COMPLETE EDITION
with original Sanskrit text,
Roman transliteration, English equivalents,
translation and elaborate purports
His Divine Grace
A. C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupäda
Collier Books
A Division of Macmillan Publishing Co., Inc.
NEW YORK
Collier Macmillan Publishers
LONDON
To
ÇRÉLA BALADEVA VIDYÄBHÜÑAËA
who presented so nicely
the “Govinda-bhäñya” commentary
on
Vedänta philosophy
Bg. Foreword
Foreword
The Bhagavad-gétä is the best known
and the most frequently translated of Vedic religious texts. Why it should be
so appealing to the Western mind is an interesting question. It has drama, for
its setting is a scene of two great armies, banners flying, drawn up opposite
one another on the field, poised for battle. It has ambiguity, and the fact
that Arjuna and his charioteer Kåñëa are carrying on their dialogue between the
two armies suggests the indecision of Arjuna about the basic question: should
he enter battle against and kill those who are friends and kinsmen? It has
mystery, as Kåñëa demonstrates to Arjuna His cosmic form. It has a properly
complicated view of the ways of the religious life and treats of the paths of
knowledge, works, discipline and faith and their inter-relationships, problems
that have bothered adherents of other religions in other times and places. The
devotion spoken of is a deliberate means of religious satisfaction, not a mere
outpouring of poetic emotion. Next to the Bhägavata-puräëa,
a long work from South India, the Gétä is
the text most frequently quoted in the philosophical writings of the Gauòéya
Vaiñëava school, the school represented by Swami Bhaktivedanta as the latest in
a long succession of teachers. It can be said that this school of Vaiñëavism
was founded, or revived, by Çré Kåñëa-Caitanya Mahäprabhu (1486-1533) in
Bengal, and that it is currently the strongest single religious force in the
eastern part of the Indian subcontinent. The Gauòiya Vaiñëava school, for whom
Kåñëa is Himself the Supreme God, and not merely an incarnation of another
deity, sees bhakti as an immediate and powerful
religious force, consisting of love between man and God. Its discipline
consists of devoting all one’s actions to the Deity, and one listens to the
stories of Kåñëa from the sacred texts, one chants Kåñëa’s name, washes,
bathes, and dresses the mürti of Kåñëa, feeds Him
and takes the remains of the food offered to Him, thus absorbing His grace; one
does these things and many more, until one has been changed: the devotee has
become transformed into one close to Kåñëa, and sees the Lord face to face.
Swami Bhaktivedanta comments upon the Gétä from this point of view, and that is legitimate. More than that, in this translation the Western reader has the unique opportunity of seeing how a Kåñëa devotee interprets his own texts. It is the Vedic exegetical tradition, justly famous, in action. This book is then a welcome addition from many points of view. It can serve as a valuable textbook for the college student. It allows us to listen to a skilled interpreter explicating a text which has profound religious meaning. It gives us insights into the original and highly convincing ideas of the Gauòiya Vaiñëava school. In providing the Sanskrit in both Devanagari and transliteration, it offers the Sanskrit specialist the opportunity to re-interpret, or debate particular Sanskrit meanings—although I think there will be little disagreement about the quality of the Swami’s Sanskrit scholarship. And finally, for the nonspecialist, there is readable English and a devotional attitude which cannot help but move the sensitive reader. And there are the paintings, which, incredibly as it may seem to those familiar with contemporary Indian religious art, were done by American devotees.
The scholar, the student of Gauòéya Vaiñëavism, and the increasing number of Western readers interested in classical Vedic thought have been done a service by Swami Bhaktivedanta. By bringing us a new and living interpretation of a text already known to many, he has increased our understanding manyfold; and arguments for understanding, in these days of estrangement, need not be made.
Professor Edward C. Dimock, Jr.
Department of South Asian Languages and Civilization
University of Chicago
Bg. Preface
Preface
Originally I wrote Bhagavad-gétä As It Is
>in the form in which it is presented now. When this book was first
published, the original manuscript was, unfortunately, cut short to less than
400 pages, without illustrations and without explanations for most of the
original verses of the Çrémad Bhagavad-gétä. In all of my other books—Çrémad Bhägavatam, Çré Éçopaniñad, etc.—the system is
that I give the original verse, its English transliteration, word-for-word
Sanskrit-English equivalents, translations and purports. This makes the book
very authentic and scholarly and makes the meaning self-evident. I was not very
happy, therefore, when I had to minimize my original manuscript. But later on,
when the demand for Bhagavad-gétä As It Is considerably
increased, I was requested by many scholars and devotees to present the book in
its original form, and Messrs. Macmillan and Co. agreed to publish the complete
edition. Thus the present attempt is to offer the original manuscript of this
great book of knowledge with full paramparä
explanation in order to establish the Kåñëa consciousness movement more soundly
and progressively.
Our Kåñëa consciousness movement is genuine, historically authorized, natural and transcendental due to its being based on Bhagavad-gétä As It Is. It is gradually becoming the most popular movement in the entire world, especially amongst the younger generation. It is becoming more and more interesting to the older generation also. Older gentlemen are becoming interested, so much so that the fathers and grandfathers of my disciples are encouraging us by becoming life members of our great society, the International Society for Krishna Consciousness. In Los Angeles many fathers and mothers used to come to see me to express their feelings of gratitude for my leading the Kåñëa consciousness movement throughout the entire world. Some of them said that it is greatly fortunate for the Americans that I have started the Kåñëa consciousness movement in America. But actually the original father of this movement is Lord Kåñëa Himself, since it was started a very long time ago but is coming down to human society by disciplic succession. If I have any credit in this connection, it does not belong to me personally, but it is due to my eternal spiritual master, His Divine Grace Om Viñëupäda Paramahaàsa Parivräjakäcärya 108 Çré Çrémad Bhaktisiddhänta Sarasvaté Gosvämé Mahäräja Prabhupäda.
If personally I have any credit in this matter, it is only that I have tried to present Bhagavad-gétä as it is, without adulteration. Before my presentation of Bhagavad-gétä As It Is, almost all the English editions of Bhagavad-gétä were introduced to fulfill someone’s personal ambition. But our attempt, in presenting Bhagavad-gétä As It Is, is to present the mission of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa. Our business is to present the will of Kåñëa, not that of any mundane speculator like the politician, philosopher or scientist, for they have very little knowledge of Kåñëa, despite all their other knowledge. When Kåñëa says, man-manä bhava mad-bhakto mad-yäjé mäà namaskuru, etc., we, unlike the so-called scholars, do not say that Kåñëa and His inner spirit are different. Kåñëa is absolute, and there is no difference between Kåñëa’s name, Kåñëa’s form, Kåñëa’s quality, Kåñëa’s pastimes, etc. This absolute position of Kåñëa is difflcult to understand for any person who is not a devotee of Kåñëa in the paramparä (disciplic succession) system. Generally the so-called scholars, politicians, philosophers, and svämés, without perfect knowledge of Kåñëa, try to banish or kill Kåñëa when writing commentary on Bhagavad-gétä. Such unauthorized commentary upon Bhagavad-gétä is known as Mäyävädé-Bhäñya, and Lord Caitanya has warned us about these unauthorized men. Lord Caitanya clearly says that anyone who tries to understand Bhagavad-gétä from the Mäyävädé point of view will commit a great blunder. The result of such a blunder will be that the misguided student of Bhagavad-gétä will certainly be bewildered on the path of spiritual guidance and will not be able to go back home, back to Godhead.
Our only purpose is to present this Bhagavad-gétä As It Is in order to guide the conditioned student to the same purpose for which Kåñëa descends to this planet once in a day of Brahmä, or every 8,600,000,000 years. This purpose is stated in Bhagavad-gétä, and we have to accept it as it is; otherwise there is no point in trying to understand the Bhagavad-gétä and its speaker, Lord Kåñëa. Lord Kåñëa first spoke Bhagavad-gétä to the sun-god some hundreds of millions of years ago. We have to accept this fact and thus understand the historical significance of Bhagavad-gétä, without misinterpretation, on the authority of Kåñëa. To interpret Bhagavad-gétä without any reference to the will of Kåñëa is the greatest offense. In order to save oneself from this offense, one has to understand the Lord as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, as He was directly understood by Arjuna, Lord Kåñëa’s first disciple. Such understanding of Bhagavad-gétä is really profitable and authorized for the welfare of human society in fulfilling the mission of life.
The Kåñëa consciousness movement is essential in human society, for it offers the highest perfection of life. How this is so is explained fully in the Bhagavad-gétä. Unfortunately, mundane wranglers have taken advantage of Bhagavad-gétä to push forward their demonic propensities and mislead people regarding right understanding of the simple principles of life. Everyone should know how God or Kåñëa is great, and everyone should know the factual position of the living entities. Everyone should know that a living entity is eternally a servant and that unless one serves Kåñëa one has to serve illusion in different varieties of the three modes of material nature, and thus perpetually one has to wander within the cycle of birth and death; even the so-called liberated Mäyävädé speculator has to undergo this process. This knowledge constitutes a great science, and each and every living being has to hear it for his own interest.
People in general, especially in this age of Kali, are enamored by the external energy of Kåñëa, and they wrongly think that by advancement of material comforts every man will be happy. They have no knowledge that the material or external nature is very strong, for everyone is strongly bound by the stringent laws of material nature. A living entity is happily the part and parcel of the Lord, and thus his natural function is to render immediate service to the Lord. By the spell of illusion one tries to be happy by serving his personal sense gratification in different forms which will never make him happy. Instead of satisfying his own personal material senses, he has to satisfy the senses of the Lord. That is the highest perfection of life. The Lord wants this, and He demands it. One has to understand this central point of Bhagavad-gétä. Our Kåñëa consciousness movement is teaching the whole world this central point, and because we are not polluting the theme of Bhagavad-gétä As It Is, anyone seriously interested in deriving benefit by studying the Bhagavad-gétä must take help from the Kåñëa consciousness movement for practical understanding of Bhagavad-gétä under the direct guidance of the Lord. We hope, therefore, that people will derive the greatest benefit by studying Bhagavad-gétä As It Is as we have presented it here, and if even one man becomes a pure devotee of the Lord we shall consider our attempt a success.
[signed]
A. C. Bhaktivedanta Swami
12 May 1971
Sydney, Australia
Bg. introduction
INTRODUCTION
om ajïäna-timirändhasya
jïänäïjana-çaläkayä
cakñur unmélitaà yena
tasmai çré-gurave namaù
çré-caitanya-mano-’bhéñöaà
sthäpitaà yena bhü-tale
svayaà rüpaù kadä mahyaà
dadäti sva-padäntikam
I was born in the darkest ignorance, and my spiritual master
opened my eyes with the torch of knowledge. I offer my respectful obeisances
unto him.
When will Çréla Rüpa Gosvämé Prabhupäda, who has established
within this material world the mission to fulfill the desire of Lord Caitanya,
give me shelter under his lotus feet?
vande ’haà çré-guroù çré-yuta-pada-kamalaà çré-gurun vaiñëaväàç ca
çré-rüpaà sägrajätaà saha-gaëa-raghunäthänvitaà taà sa-jévam
sädvaitaà sävadhütaà parijana-sahitaà kåñëa-caitanya-devaà
çré-rädhä-kåñëa-pädän saha-gaëa-lalitä-çré-viçäkhänvitäàç ca
I offer my respectful obeisances unto the lotus feet of my
spiritual master and unto the feet of all Vaiñëavas. I offer my respectful
obeisances unto the lotus feet of Çréla Rüpa Gosvämé along with his elder
brother Sanätana Gosvämé, as well as Raghunätha Däsa and Raghunätha Bhaööa,
Gopäla Bhaööa, and Çréla Jéva Gosvämé. I offer my respectful obeisances to Lord
Kåñëa Caitanya and Lord Nityänanda along with Advaita Äcärya, Gadädhara,
Çréväsa, and other associates. I offer my respectful obeisances to Çrématé
Rädhäräëé and Çré Kåñëa along with Their associates, Çré Lalitä and Viçäkhä.
he kåñëa karuëä-sindho déna-bandho jagat-pate
gopeça gopikä-känta rädhä-känta namo ’stu te
O my dear Kåñëa, You are the friend of the distressed and the
source of creation. You are the master of the gopés and
the lover of Rädhäräëé. I offer my respectful obeisances unto You.
tapta-käïcana-gauräìgi rädhe våndävaneçvari
våñabhänu-sute devi praëamämi hari-priye
I offer my respects to Rädhäräëé whose bodily complexion is like
molten gold and who is the Queen of Våndävana. You are the daughter of King
Våñabhänu, and You are very dear to Lord Kåñëa.
väïchä-kalpatarubhyaç ca kåpä-sindhubhya eva ca
patitänäà pävanebhyo vaiñëavebhyo namo namaù
I offer my respectful obeisances unto all the Vaiñëava devotees of
the Lord who can fulfill the desires of everyone, just like desire trees, and
who are full of compassion for the fallen souls.
çré kåñëa caitanya prabhu nityänanda
çré advaita gadädhara çréväsädi-gaura-bhakta-vånda
I offer my obeisances to Çré Kåñëa Caitanya, Prabhu Nityänanda,
Çré Advaita, Gadädhara, Çréväsa and all others in the line of devotion.
hare kåñëa, hare kåñëa, kåñëa kåñëa, hare hare
hare räma, hare räma, räma räma, hare hare.
Bhagavad-gétä is also
known as Gétopaniñad. It is the essence of Vedic
knowledge and one of the most important Upaniñads in
Vedic literature. Of course there are many commentaries in English on the Bhagavad-gétä, and one may question the necessity for
another one. This present edition can be explained in the following way.
Recently an American lady asked me to recommend an English translation of Bhagavad-gétä. Of course in America there are so many
editions of Bhagavad-gétä available in English,
but as far as I have seen, not only in America but also in India, none of them
can be strictly said to be authoritative because in almost every one of them
the commentator has expressed his own opinions without touching the spirit of Bhagavad-gétä as it is.
The spirit of Bhagavad-gétä is mentioned in Bhagavad-gétä itself. It is just like this: if we want to take a particular medicine, then we have to follow the directions written on the label. We cannot take the medicine according to our own whim or the direction of a friend. It must be taken according to the directions on the label or the directions given by a physician. Similarly, Bhagavad-gétä should be taken or accepted as it is directed by the speaker himself. The speaker of Bhagavad-gétä is Lord Çré Kåñëa. He is mentioned on every page of Bhagavad-gétä as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Bhagavän. Of course the word “bhagavän” sometimes refers to any powerful person or any powerful demigod, and certainly here Bhagavän designates Lord Çré Kåñëa as a great personality, but at the same time we should know that Lord Çré Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, as is confirmed by all great äcäryas (spiritual masters) like Çaìkaräcärya, Rämänujäcärya, Madhväcärya, Nimbärka Svämé, Çré Caitanya Mahäprabhu and many other authorities of Vedic knowledge in India. The Lord Himself also establishes Himself as the Supreme Personality of Godhead in the Bhagavad-gétä, and He is accepted as such in the Brahma-saàhitä and all the Puräëas, especially the Çrémad-Bhägavatam, known as the Bhägavata Puräëa (Kåñëas tu bhagavän svayam). Therefore we should take Bhagavad-gétä as it is directed by the Personality of Godhead Himself.
In the Fourth Chapter of the Gétä the Lord says:
(1) imaà vivasvate yogaà proktavän aham
avyayam
vivasvän manave präha manur ikñväkave ’bravét
(2) evaà paramparä-präptam imaà räjarñayo
viduù
sa käleneha mahatä yogo nañöaù parantapa
(3) sa eväyaà mayä te ’dya yogaù proktaù
purätanaù
bhakto ’si me sakhä ceti rahasyaà hy etad uttamam
Here the Lord informs Arjuna that this system of yoga, the Bhagavad-gétä,
was first spoken to the sun-god, and the sun-god explained it to Manu, and Manu
explained it to Ikñväku, and in that way, by disciplic succession, one speaker
after another, this yoga system has been coming
down. But in the course of time it has become lost. Consequently the Lord has
to speak it again, this time to Arjuna on the Battlefield of Kurukñetra.
He tells Arjuna that He is relating this supreme secret to him because he is His devotee and His friend. The purport of this is that Bhagavad-gétä is a treatise which is especially meant for the devotee of the Lord. There are three classes of transcendentalists, namely the jïäné, the yogé and the bhakta, or the impersonalist, the meditator and the devotee. Here the Lord clearly tells Arjuna that He is making him the first receiver of a new paramparä (disciplic succession) because the old succession was broken. It was the Lord’s wish, therefore, to establish another paramparä in the same line of thought that was coming down from the sun-god to others, and it was His wish that His teaching be distributed anew by Arjuna. He wanted Arjuna to become the authority in understanding the Bhagavad-gétä. So we see that Bhagavad-gétä is instructed to Arjuna especially because Arjuna was a devotee of the Lord, a direct student of Kåñëa, and His intimate friend. Therefore Bhagavad-gétä is best understood by a person who has qualities similar to Arjuna’s. That is to say he must be a devotee in a direct relationship with the Lord. As soon as one becomes a devotee of the Lord, he also has a direct relationship with the Lord. That is a very elaborate subject matter, but briefly it can be stated that a devotee is in a relationship with the Supreme Personality of Godhead in one of five different ways:
1. One may be a devotee in a passive state;
2. One may be a devotee in an active state;
3. One may be a devotee as a friend;
4. One may be a devotee as a parent;
5. One may be a devotee as a conjugal lover.
Arjuna was in a relationship with the Lord as friend. Of course
there is a gulf of difference between this friendship and the friendship found
in the material world. This is transcendental friendship which cannot be had by
everyone. Of course everyone has a particular relationship with the Lord, and
that relationship is evoked by the perfection of devotional service. But in the
present status of our life, we have not only forgotten the Supreme Lord, but we
have forgotten our eternal relationship with the Lord. Every living being, out
of many, many billions and trillions of living beings, has a particular
relationship with the Lord eternally. That is called svarüpa.
By the process of devotional service, one can revive that svarüpa, and that stage is called svarüpa-siddhi—perfection of one’s constitutional
position. So Arjuna was a devotee, and he was in touch with the Supreme Lord in
friendship.
How Arjuna accepted this Bhagavad-gétä should be noted. His manner of acceptance is given in the Tenth Chapter.
(12) arjuna uväca
paraà brahma paraà dhäma pavitraà paramaà bhavän
puruñaà çäçvataà divyam ädi-devam ajaà vibhum
(13) ähus tväm åñayaù sarve devarñir
näradas tathä
asito devalo vyäsaù svayaà caiva bravéñi me
(14) sarvam etad åtaà manye yan mäà vadasi
keçava
na hi te bhagavan vyaktià vidur devä na dänaväù
“Arjuna said: You are the Supreme Brahman, the ultimate, the
supreme abode and purifier, the Absolute Truth and the eternal Divine Person.
You are the primal God, transcendental and original, and You are the unborn and
all-pervading beauty. All the great sages like Närada, Asita, Devala, and Vyäsa
proclaim this of You, and now You Yourself are declaring it to me. O Kåñëa, I
totally accept as truth all that You have told me. Neither the gods nor demons,
O Lord, know Thy personality.” (Bg. 10. 12–14).
After hearing Bhagavad-gétä from the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, Arjuna accepted Kåñëa as Paraà Brahma, the Supreme Brahman. Every living being
is Brahman, but the supreme living being, or the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, is the Supreme Brahman. Paraà dhäma means
that He is the supreme rest or abode of everything, pavitram
means that He is pure, untainted by material contamination, puruñam means that He is the supreme enjoyer, divyam, transcendental, ädi-devam,
the Supreme Personality of Godhead, ajam, the
unborn, and vibhum, the greatest, the
all-pervading.
Now one may think that because Kåñëa was the friend of Arjuna, Arjuna was telling Him all this by way of flattery, but Arjuna, just to drive out this kind of doubt from the minds of the readers of Bhagavad-gétä, substantiates these praises in the next verse when he says that Kåñëa is accepted as the Supreme Personality of Godhead not only by himself but by authorities like the sage Närada, Asita, Devala, Vyäsadeva and so on. These are great personalities who distribute the Vedic knowledge as it is accepted by all äcäryas. Therefore Arjuna tells Kåñëa that he accepts whatever He says to be completely perfect. Sarvam etad åtaà manye: “I accept everything You say to be true.” Arjuna also says that the personality of the Lord is very difficult to understand and that He cannot be known even by the great demigods. This means that the Lord cannot even be known by personalities greater than human beings. So how can a human being understand Çré Kåñëa without becoming His devotee?
Therefore Bhagavad-gétä should be taken up in a spirit of devotion. One should not think that he is equal to Kåñëa, nor should he think that Kåñëa is an ordinary personality or even a very great personality. Lord Çré Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, at least theoretically, according to the statements of Bhagavad-gétä or the statements of Arjuna, the person who is trying to understand the Bhagavad-gétä. We should therefore at least theoretically accept Çré Kåñëa as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and with that submissive spirit we can understand the Bhagavad-gétä. Unless one reads the Bhagavad-gétä in a submissive spirit, it is very difficult to understand Bhagavad-gétä because it is a great mystery.
Just what is the Bhagavad-gétä? The purpose of Bhagavad-gétä is to deliver mankind from the nescience of material existence. Every man is in difficulty in so many ways, as Arjuna also was in difficulty in having to fight the Battle of Kurukñetra. Arjuna surrendered unto Çré Kåñëa, and consequently this Bhagavad-gétä was spoken. Not only Arjuna, but every one of us is full of anxieties because of this material existence. Our very existence is in the atmosphere of nonexistence. Actually we are not meant to be threatened by nonexistence. Our existence is eternal. But somehow or other we are put into asat. Asat refers to that which does not exist.
Out of so many human beings who are suffering, there are a few who are actually inquiring about their position, as to what they are, why they are put into this awkward position and so on. Unless one is awakened to this position of questioning his suffering, unless he realizes that he doesn’t want suffering but rather wants to make a solution to all sufferings, then one is not to be considered a perfect human being. Humanity begins when this sort of inquiry is awakened in one’s mind. In the Brahma-sütra this inquiry is called “brahma-jijïäsä.” Every activity of the human being is to be considered a failure unless he inquires about the nature of the Absolute. Therefore those who begin to question why they are suffering or where they came from and where they shall go after death are proper students for understanding Bhagavad-gétä. The sincere student should also have a firm respect for the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Such a student was Arjuna.
Lord Kåñëa descends specifically to reestablish the real purpose of life when man forgets that purpose. Even then, out of many, many human beings who awaken, there may be one who actually enters the spirit of understanding his position, and for him this Bhagavad-gétä is spoken. Actually we are all followed by the tiger of nescience, but the Lord is very merciful upon living entities, especially human beings. To this end He spoke the Bhagavad-gétä, making His friend Arjuna His student.
Being an associate of Lord Kåñëa, Arjuna was above all ignorance, but Arjuna was put into ignorance on the Battlefield of Kurukñetra just to question Lord Kåñëa about the problems of life so that the Lord could explain them for the benefit of future generations of human beings and chalk out the plan of life. Then man could act accordingly and perfect the mission of human life.
The subject of the Bhagavad-gétä entails the comprehension of five basic truths. First of all, the science of God is explained and then the constitutional position of the living entities, jévas. There is éçvara, which means controller, and there are jévas, the living entities which are controlled. If a living entity says that he is not controlled but that he is free, then he is insane. The living being is controlled in every respect, at least in his conditioned life. So in the Bhagavad-gétä the subject matter deals with the éçvara, the supreme controller, and the jévas, the controlled living entities. Prakåti (material nature) and time (the duration of existence of the whole universe or the manifestation of material nature) and karma (activity) are also discussed. The cosmic manifestation is full of different activities. All living entities are engaged in different activities. From Bhagavad-gétä we must learn what God is, what the living entities are, what prakrti is, what the cosmic manifestation is and how it is controlled by time, and what the activities of the living entities are.
Out of these five basic
subject matters in Bhagavad-gétä it is
established that the Supreme Godhead, or Kåñëa, or Brahman, or supreme
controller, or Paramätmä—you may use whatever name you like—is the greatest of
all. The living beings are in quality like the supreme controller. For
instance, the Lord has control over the universal affairs, over material
nature, etc., as will be explained in the later chapters of Bhagavad-gétä. Material nature is not independant. She
is acting under the directions of the Supreme Lord. As Lord Kåñëa says, “Prakåti is working under My direction.” When we see
wonderful things happening in the cosmic nature, we should know that behind
this cosmic manifestation there is a controller. Nothing could be manifested
without being controlled. It is childish not to consider the controller. For
instance, a child may think that an automobile is quite wonderful to be able to
run without a horse or other animal pulling it, but a sane man knows the nature
of the automobile’s engineering arrangement. He always knows that behind the
machinery there is a man, a driver. Similarly, the Supreme Lord is a driver under
whose direction everything is working. Now the jévas, or
the living entities, have been accepted by the Lord, as we will note in the
later chapters, as His parts and parcels. A particle of gold is also gold, a
drop of water from the ocean is also salty, and similarly, we the living
entities, being part and parcel of the supreme controller, ésvara, or Bhagavän, Lord Çré Kåñëa, have all the
qualities of the Supreme Lord in minute quantity because we are minute éçvaras, subordinate éçvaras.
We are trying to control nature, as presently we are trying to control space or
planets, and this tendency to control is there because it is in Kåñëa. But
although we have a tendency to lord it over material nature, we should know
that we are not the supreme controller. This is explained in Bhagavad-gétä.
What is material nature? This is also explained in Gétä as inferior prakåti, inferior nature. The living entity is explained as the superior prakåti. Prakåti is always under control, whether inferior or superior. Prakåti is female, and she is controlled by the Lord just as the activities of a wife are controlled by the husband. Prakåti is always subordinate, predominated by the Lord, who is the predominator. The living entities and material nature are both predominated, controlled by the Supreme Lord. According to the Gétä, the living entities, although parts and parcels of the Supreme Lord, are to be considered prakåti. This is clearly mentioned in the Seventh Chapter, fifth verse of Bhagavad-gétä: “Apareyam itas tv anyäm.” “This prakåti is My lower nature.” “Prakåtià viddhi me paräm jéva-bhütäà mahä-bäho yayedaà dhäryate jagat.” And beyond this there is another prakåti: jéva-bhütäm, the living entity.
Prakåti itself is constituted by three qualities: the mode of goodness, the mode of passion and the mode of ignorance. Above these modes there is eternal time, and by a combination of these modes of nature and under the control and purview of eternal time there are activities which are called karma. These activities are being carried out from time immemorial, and we are suffering or enjoying the fruits of our activities. For instance, suppose I am a businessman and have worked very hard with intelligence and have amassed a great bank balance. Then I am an enjoyer. But then say I have lost all my money in business; then I am a sufferer. Similarly, in every field of life we enjoy the results of our work, or we suffer the results. This is called karma.
Éçvara
(the Supreme Lord), jéva (the living entity), prakåti (nature), eternal time and karma (activity) are all explained in the Bhagavad-gétä. Out of these five, the Lord, the living
entities, material nature and time are eternal. The manifestation of prakåti may be temporary, but it is not false. Some
philosophers say that the manifestation of material nature is false, but
according to the philosophy of Bhagavad-gétä or
according to the philosophy of the Vaiñëavas, this is not so. The manifestation
of the world is not accepted as false; it is accepted as real, but temporary.
It is likened unto a cloud which moves across the sky, or the coming of the
rainy season which nourishes grains. As soon as the rainy season is over and as
soon as the cloud goes away, all the crops which were nourished by the rain dry
up. Similarly, this material manifestation takes place at a certain interval,
stays for a while and then disappears. Such are the workings of prakåti But this cycle is working eternally. Therefore prakrti is eternal; it is not false. The Lord refers to
this as “My prakåti.” This material nature is the
separated energy of the Supreme Lord, and similarly the living entities are
also the energy of the Supreme Lord, but they are not separated. They are
eternally related. So the Lord, the living entity, material nature and time are
all interrelated and are all eternal. However, the other item, karma, is not eternal. The effects of karma may be very old indeed. We are suffering or
enjoying the results of our activities from time immemorial, but we can change
the results of our karma, or our activity, and
this change depends on the perfection of our knowledge. We are engaged in
various activities. Undoubtedly we do not know what sort of activities we
should adopt to gain relief from the actions and reactions of all these
activities, but this is also explained in the Bhagavad-gétä.
The position of ésvara is that of supreme consciousness. The jévas, or the living entities, being parts and parcels of the Supreme Lord, are also conscious. Both the living entity and material nature are explained as prakåti, the energy of the Supreme Lord, but one of the two, the jéva, is conscious. The other prakåti is not conscious. That is the difference. Therefore the jéva-prakåti is called superior because the jéva has consciousness which is similar to the Lord’s. The Lord’s is supreme consciousness, however, and one should not claim that the jéva, the living entity, is also supremely conscious. The living being cannot be supremely conscious at any stage of his perfection, and the theory that he can be so is a misleading theory. Conscious he may be, but he is not perfectly or supremely conscious.
The distinction between the jéva and the éçvara will be explained in the Thirteenth Chapter of Bhagavad-gétä. The Lord is kñetra-jïaù, conscious, as is the living being, but the living being is conscious of his particular body, whereas the Lord is conscious of all bodies. Because He lives in the heart of every living being, He is conscious of the psychic movements of the particular jévas. We should not forget this. It is also explained that the Paramätmä, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, is living in everyone’s heart as éçvara, as the controller, and that He is giving directions for the living entity to act as he desires. The living entity forgets what to do. First of all he makes a determination to act in a certain way, and then he is entangled in the acts and reactions of his own karma. After giving up one type of body, he enters another type of body, as we put on and take off old clothes. As the soul thus migrates, he suffers the actions and reactions of his past activities. These activities can be changed when the living being is in the mode of goodness, in sanity, and understands what sort of activities he should adopt. If he does so, then all the actions and reactions of his past activities can be changed. Consequently, karma is not eternal. Therefore we stated that of the five items (éçvara, jéva, prakåti time and karma) four are eternal, whereas karma is not eternal.
The supreme conscious éçvara is similar to the living entity in this way: both the consciousness of the Lord and that of the living entity are transcendental. It is not that consciousness is generated by the association of matter. That is a mistaken idea. The theory that consciousness develops under certain circumstances of material combination is not accepted in the Bhagavad-gétä. Consciousness may be pervertedly reflected by the covering of material circumstances, just as light reflected through colored glass may appear to be a certain color, but the consciousness of the Lord is not materially affected. Lord Kåñëa says, “mayädhyakñeëa prakåtiù.” When He descends into the material universe, His consciousness is not materially affected. If He were so affected, He would be unfit to speak on transcendental matters as He does in the Bhagavad-gétä. One cannot say anything about the transcendental world without being free from materially contaminated consciousness. So the Lord is not materially contaminated. Our consciousness, at the present moment, however, is materially contaminated. The Bhagavad-gétä teaches that we have to purify this materially contaminated consciousness. In pure consciousness, our actions will be dovetailed to the will of éçvara, and that will make us happy. It is not that we have to cease all activities. Rather, our activities are to be purified, and purified activities are called bhakti. Activities in bhakti appear to be like ordinary activities, but they are not contaminated. An ignorant person may see that a devotee is acting or working like an ordinary man, but such a person with a poor fund of knowledge does not know that the activities of the devotee or of the Lord are not contaminated by impure consciousness or matter. They are transcendental to the three modes of nature. We should know, however, that at this point our consciousness is contaminated.
When we are materially contaminated, we are called conditioned. False consciousness is exhibited under the impression that I am a product of material nature. This is called false ego. One who is absorbed in the thought of bodily conceptions cannot understand his situation. Bhagavad-gétä was spoken to liberate one from the bodily conception of life, and Arjuna put himself in this position in order to receive this information from the Lord. One must become free from the bodily conception of life; that is the preliminary activity for the transcendentalist. One who wants to become free, who wants to become liberated, must first of all learn that he is not this material body. Mukti or liberation means freedom from material consciousness. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam also the definition of liberation is given: Mukti means liberation from the contaminated consciousness of this material world and situation in pure consciousness. All the instructions of Bhagavad-gétä are intended to awaken this pure consciousness, and therefore we find at the last stage of the Gétä’s instructions that Kåñëa is asking Arjuna whether he is now in purified consciousness. Purified consciousness means acting in accordance with the instructions of the Lord. This is the whole sum and substance of purified consciousness. Consciousness is already there because we are part and parcel of the Lord, but for us there is the affinity of being affected by the inferior modes. But the Lord, being the Supreme, is never affected. That is the difference between the Supreme Lord and the conditioned souls.
What is this consciousness? This consciousness is “I am.” Then what am I? In contaminated consciousness “I am” means “I am the lord of all I survey. I am the enjoyer.” The world revolves because every living being thinks that he is the lord and creator of the material world. Material consciousness has two psychic divisions. One is that I am the creator, and the other is that I am the enjoyer. But actually the Supreme Lord is both the creator and the enjoyer, and the living entity, being part and parcel of the Supreme Lord, is neither the creator nor the enjoyer, but a cooperator. He is the created and the enjoyed. For instance, a part of a machine cooperates with the whole machine; a part of the body cooperates with the whole body. The hands, feet, eyes, legs and so on are all parts of the body, but they are not actually the enjoyers. The stomach is the enjoyer. The legs move, the hands supply food, the teeth chew and all parts of the body are engaged in satisfying the stomach because the stomach is the principal factor that nourishes the body’s organization. Therefore everything is given to the stomach. One nourishes the tree by watering its root, and one nourishes the body by feeding the stomach, for if the body is to be kept in a healthy state, then the parts of the body must cooperate to feed the stomach. Similarly, the Supreme Lord is the enjoyer and the creator, and we, as subordinate living beings, are meant to cooperate to satisfy Him. This cooperation will actually help us, just as food taken by the stomach will help all other parts of the body. If the fingers of the hand think that they should take the food themselves instead of giving it to the stomach, then they will be frustrated. The central figure of creation and of enjoyment is the Supreme Lord, and the living entities are cooperators. By cooperation they enjoy. The relation is also like that of the master and the servant. If the master is fully satisfied, then the servant is satisfied. Similarly, the Supreme Lord should be satisfied, although the tendency to become the creator and the tendency to enjoy the material world are there also in the living entities because these tendencies are there in the Supreme Lord who has created the manifested cosmic world.
We shall find, therefore, in this Bhagavad-gétä that the complete whole is comprised of the supreme controller, the controlled living entities, the cosmic manifestation, eternal time, and karma, or activities, and all of these are explained in this text. All of these taken completely form the complete whole, and the complete whole is called the Supreme Absolute Truth. The complete whole and the complete Absolute Truth are the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëa. All manifestations are due to His different energies. He is the complete whole.
It is also explained in the Gétä that impersonal Brahman is also subordinate to the complete. Brahman is more explicitly explained in the Brahma-sütra to be like the rays of the sunshine. The impersonal Brahman is the shining rays of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Impersonal Brahman is incomplete realization of the absolute whole, and so also is the conception of Paramätmä in the Twelfth Chapter. There it shall be seen that the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Puruñottama, is above both impersonal Brahman and the partial realization of Paramätmä. The Supreme Personality of Godhead is called sac-cid-änanda-vigraha. The Brahma-saàhitä begins in this way: éçvaraù paramaù kåñëaù sac-cid-änanda-vigrahaù/anädir ädir govindaù sarva-käraëa-käraëam. “Kåñëa is the cause of all causes. He is the primal cause, and He is the very form of eternal being, knowledge and bliss.” Impersonal Brahman realization is the realization of His sat (being) feature. Paramätmä realization is the realization of the cit (eternal knowledge) feature. But realization of the Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, is realization of all the transcendental features: sat, cit and änanda (being, knowledge, bliss) in complete vigraha (form).
People with less intelligence consider the Supreme Truth to be impersonal, but He is a transcendental person, and this is confirmed in all Vedic literatures. Nityo nityänäm cetanaç cetanänäm. As we are all individual living beings and have our individuality, the Supreme Absolute Truth is also, in the ultimate issue, a person, and realization of the Personality of Godhead is realization of all of the transcendental features. The complete whole is not formless. If He is formless, or if He is less than any other thing, then He cannot be the complete whole. The complete whole must have everything within our experience and beyond our experience, otherwise it cannot be complete. The complete whole, Personality of Godhead, has immense potencies.
How Kåñëa is acting in different potencies is also explained in Bhagavad-gétä. This phenomenal world or material world in which we are placed is also complete in itself because the twenty-four elements of which this material universe is a temporary manifestation, according to Säìkhya philosophy, are completely adjusted to produce complete resources which are necessary for the maintenance and subsistence of this universe. There is nothing extraneous; nor is there anything needed. This manifestation has its own time fixed by the energy of the supreme whole, and when its time is complete, these temporary manifestations will be annihilated by the complete arrangement of the complete. There is complete facility for the small complete units, namely the living entities, to realize the complete, and all sorts of incompleteness are experienced due to incomplete knowledge of the complete. So Bhagavad-gétä contains the complete knowledge of Vedic wisdom.
All Vedic knowledge is infallible, and Hindus accept Vedic knowledge to be complete and infallible. For example, cow dung is the stool of an animal, and according to småti or Vedic injunction, if one touches the stool of an animal he has to take a bath to purify himself. But in the Vedic scriptures cow dung is considered to be a purifying agent. One might consider this to be contradictory, but it is accepted because it is Vedic injunction, and indeed by accepting this, one will not commit a mistake; subsequently it has been proved by modern science that cow dung contains all antiseptic properties. So Vedic knowledge is complete because it is above all doubts and mistakes, and Bhagavad-gétä is the essence of all Vedic knowledge.
Vedic knowledge is not a question of research. Our research work is imperfect because we are researching things with imperfect senses. We have to accept perfect knowledge which comes down, as is stated in Bhagavad-gétä, by the paramparä disciplic succession. We have to receive knowledge from the proper source in disciplic succession beginning with the supreme spiritual master, the Lord Himself, and handed down to a succession of spiritual masters. Arjuna, the student who took lessons from Lord Çré Kåñëa, accepts everything that He says without contradicting Him. One is not allowed to accept one portion of Bhagavad-gétä and not another. No. We must accept Bhagavad-gétä without interpretation, without deletion and without our own whimsical participation in the matter. The Gétä should he taken as the most perfect presentation of Vedic knowledge. Vedic knowledge is received from transcendental sources, and the first words were spoken by the Lord Himself. The words spoken by the Lord are different from words spoken by a person of the mundane world who is infected with four defects. A mundaner 1) is sure to commit mistakes, 2) is invariably illusioned, 3) has the tendency to cheat others and 4) is limited by imperfect senses. With these four imperfections, one cannot deliver perfect information of all-pervading knowledge.
Vedic knowledge is not imparted by such defective living entities. It was imparted unto the heart of Brahmä, the first created living being, and Brahmä in his turn disseminated this knowledge to his sons and disciples, as he originally received it from the Lord. The Lord is pürëam, all-perfect, and there is no possibility of His becoming subjected to the laws of material nature. One should therefore be intelligent enough to know that the Lord is the only proprietor of everything in the universe and that He is the original creator, the creator of Brahmä. In the Eleventh Chapter the Lord is addressed as prapitämaha because Brahmä is addressed as pitämaha, the grandfather, and He is the creator of the grandfather. So no one should claim to be the proprietor of anything; one should accept only things which are set aside for him by the Lord as his quota for his maintenance.
There are many examples given of how we are to utilize those things which are set aside for us by the Lord. This is also explained in Bhagavad-gétä. In the beginning, Arjuna decided that he should not fight in the Battle of Kurukñetra. This was his own decision. Arjuna told the Lord that it was not possible for him to enjoy the kingdom after killing his own kinsmen. This decision was based on the body because he was thinking that the body was himself and that his bodily relations or expansions were his brothers, nephews, brothers-in-law, grandfathers and so on. He was thinking in this way to satisfy his bodily demands. Bhagavad-gétä was spoken by the Lord just to change this view, and at the end Arjuna decides to fight under the directions of the Lord when he says, “kariñye vacanaà tava.” “I shall act according to Thy word.”
In this world man is not meant to toil like hogs. He must be intelligent to realize the importance of human life and refuse to act like an ordinary animal. A human being should realize the aim of his life, and this direction is given in all Vedic literatures, and the essence is given in Bhagavad-gétä. Vedic literature is meant for human beings, not for animals. Animals can kill other living animals, and there is no question of sin on their part, but if a man kills an animal for the satisfaction of his uncontrolled taste, he must be responsible for breaking the laws of nature. In the Bhagavad-gétä it is clearly explained that there are three kinds of activities according to the different modes of nature: the activities of goodness, of passion and of ignorance. Similarly, there are three kinds of eatables also: eatables in goodness, passion and ignorance. All of this is clearly described, and if we properly utilize the instructions of Bhagavad-gétä, then our whole life will become purified, and ultimately we will be able to reach the destination which is beyond this material sky.
That destination is called the sanätana sky, the eternal spiritual sky. In this material world we find that everything is temporary. It comes into being, stays for some time, produces some by-products, dwindles and then vanishes. That is the law of the material world, whether we use as an example this body, or a piece of fruit or anything. But beyond this temporary world there is another world of which we have information. This world consists of another nature which is sanätana, eternal. Jéva is also described as sanätana, eternal, and the Lord is also described as sanätana in the Eleventh Chapter. We have an intimate relationship with the Lord, and because we are all qualitatively one—the sanätana-dhäma, or sky, the sanätana Supreme Personality and the sanätana living entities—the whole purpose of Bhagavad-gétä is to revive our sanätana occupation, or sanätana-dharma, which is the eternal occupation of the living entity. We are temporarily engaged in different activities, but all of these activities can be purified when we give up all these temporary activities and take up the activities which are prescribed by the Supreme Lord. That is called our pure life.
The Supreme Lord and His transcendental abode are both sanätana, as are the living entities, and the combined association of the Supreme Lord and the living entities in the sanätana abode is the perfection of human life. The Lord is very kind to the living entities because they are His sons. Lord Kåñëa declares in Bhagavad-gétä, “sarva-yoniñu…ahaà béja-pradaù pitä.” “I am the father of all.” Of course there are all types of living entities according to their various karmas, but here the Lord claims that He is the father of all of them. Therefore the Lord descends to reclaim all of these fallen, conditioned souls to call them back to the sanätana eternal sky so that the sanätana living entities may regain their eternal sanätana positions in eternal association with the Lord. The Lord comes Himself in different incarnations, or He sends His confidential servants as sons or His associates or äcäryas to reclaim the conditioned souls.
Therefore, sanätana-dharma does not refer to any sectarian process of religion. It is the eternal function of the eternal living entities in relationship with the eternal Supreme Lord. Sanätana-dharma refers, as stated previously, to the eternal occupation of the living entity. Rämänujäcärya has explained the word sanätana as “that which has neither beginning nor end,” so when we speak of sanätana-dharma, we must take it for granted on the authority of Çré Rämänujäcärya that it has neither beginning nor end.
The English word “religion” is a little different from sanätana-dharma. Religion conveys the idea of faith, and faith may change. One may have faith in a particular process, and he may change this faith and adopt another, but sanätana-dharma refers to that activity which cannot be changed. For instance, liquidity cannot be taken from water, nor can heat be taken from fire. Similarly, the eternal function of the eternal living entity cannot be taken from the living entity. Sanätana-dharma is eternally integral with the living entity. When we speak of sanätana-dharma, therefore, we must take it for granted on the authority of Çré Rämänujäcärya that it has neither beginning nor end. That which has neither end nor beginning must not be sectarian, for it cannot be limited by any boundaries. Yet those belonging to some sectarian faith will wrongly consider that sanätana-dharma is also sectarian, but if we go deeply into the matter and consider it in the light of modern science, it is possible for us to see that sanätana-dharma is the business of all the people of the world—nay, of all the living entities of the universe.
Non-sanätana religious faith may have some beginning in the annals of human history, but there is no beginning to the history of sanätana-dharma because it remains eternally with the living entities. Insofar as the living entities are concerned, the authoritative çästras state that the living entity has neither birth nor death. In the Gétä it is stated that the living entity is never born, and he never dies. He is eternal and indestructible, and he continues to live after the destruction of his temporary material body. In reference to the concept of sanätana-dharma, we must try to understand the concept of religion from the Sanskrit root meaning of the word. Dharma refers to that which is constantly existing with the particular object. We conclude that there is heat and light along with the fire; without heat and light, there is no meaning to the word fire. Similarly, we must discover the essential part of the living being, that part which is his constant companion. That constant companion is his eternal quality, and that eternal quality is his eternal religion.
When Sanätana Gosvämé asked Çré Caitanya Mahäprabhu about the svarüpa of every living being, the Lord replied that the svarüpa or constitutional position of the living being is the rendering of service to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. If we analyze this statement of Lord Caitanya, we can easily see that every living being is constantly engaged in rendering service to another living being. A living being serves other living beings in two capacities. By doing so, the living entity enjoys life. The lower animals serve human beings as servants serve their master. A serves B master, B serves C master and C serves D master and so on. Under these circumstances, we can see that one friend serves another friend, the mother serves the son, the wife serves the husband, the husband serves the wife and so on. If we go on searching in this spirit, it will be seen that there is no exception in the society of living beings to the activity of service. The politician presents his manifesto for the public to convince them of his capacity for service. The voters therefore give the politician their valuable votes, thinking that he will render valuable service to society. The shopkeeper serves the customer, and the artisan serves the capitalist. The capitalist serves the family, and the family serves the state in the terms of the eternal capacity of the eternal living being. In this way we can see that no living being is exempt from rendering service to other living beings, and therefore we can safely conclude that service is the constant companion of the living being and that the rendering of service is the eternal religion of the living being.
Yet man professes to belong to a particular type of faith with reference to particular time and circumstance and thus claims to be a Hindu, Muslim, Christian, Buddhist or any other sect. Such designations are non-sanätana-dharma. A Hindu may change his faith to become a Muslim, or a Muslim may change his faith to become a Hindu, or a Christian may change his faith and so on. But in all circumstances the change of religious faith does not effect the eternal occupation of rendering service to others. The Hindu, Muslim or Christian in all circumstances is servant of someone. Thus, to profess a particular type of sect is not to profess one’s sanätana-dharma. The rendering of service is sanätana-dharma.
Factually we are related to the Supreme Lord in service. The Supreme Lord is the supreme enjoyer, and we living entities are His servitors. We are created for His enjoyment, and if we participate in that eternal enjoyment with the Supreme Personality of Godhead, we become happy. We cannot become happy otherwise. It is not possible to be happy independantly, just as no one part of the body can be happy without cooperating with the stomach. It is not possible for the living entity to be happy without rendering transcendental loving service unto the Supreme Lord.
In the Bhagavad-gétä, worship of different demigods or rendering service to them is not approved. It is stated in the Seventh Chapter, twentieth verse:
kämais tais tair håta-jïänäù prapadyante ’nya-devatäù
taà taà niyamam ästhäya prakåtyä niyatäù svayä
“Those whose minds are distorted by material desires surrender
unto demigods and follow the particular rules and regulations of worship
according to their own natures.” (Bg. 7.20) Here it is plainly said that those
who are directed by lust worship the demigods and not the Supreme Lord Kåñëa.
When we mention the name Kåñëa, we do not refer to any sectarian name. Kåñëa
means the highest pleasure, and it is confirmed that the Supreme Lord is the
reservoir or storehouse of all pleasure. We are all hankering after pleasure. Änandamayo ’bhyäsät. (Vs. 1.1.12) The living entities,
like the Lord, are full of consciousness, and they are after happiness. The
Lord is perpetually happy, and if the living entities associate with the Lord,
cooperate with Him and take part in His association, then they also become
happy.
The Lord descends to this mortal world to show His pastimes in
Våndävana, which are full of happiness. When Lord Çré Kåñëa was in Våndävana,
His activities with His cowherd boy friends, with His damsel friends, with the
inhabitants of Våndävana and with the cows were all full of happiness. The
total population of Våndävana knew nothing but Kåñëa. But Lord Kåñëa even discouraged
His father Nanda Mahäräja from worshiping the demigod Indra because He wanted
to establish the fact that people need not worship any demigod. They need only
worship the Supreme Lord because their ultimate goal is to return to His abode.
The abode of Lord Çré Kåñëa is described in the Bhagavad-gétä, Fifteenth Chapter, sixth verse:
na tad bhäsayate süryo na çaçäìko na pävakaù
yad gatvä na nivartante tad dhäma paramaà mama
“That abode of Mine is not illumined by the sun or moon, nor by
electricity. And anyone who reaches it never comes back to this material
world.” (Bg. 15.6)
This verse gives a description of that eternal sky. Of course we
have a material conception of the sky, and we think of it in relationship to
the sun, moon, stars and so on, but in this verse the Lord states that in the
eternal sky there is no need for the sun nor for the moon nor fire of any kind
because the spiritual sky is already illuminated by the brahmajyoti,
the rays emanating from the Supreme Lord. We are trying with difficulty
to reach other planets, but it is not difficult to understand the abode of the
Supreme Lord. This abode is referred to as Goloka. In the Brahma-saàhitä it is beautifully described: Goloka eva nivasaty akhilätma-bhütaù. The Lord resides
eternally in His abode Goloka, yet He can be approached from this world, and to
this end the Lord comes to manifest His real form, sac-cid-änanda-vigraha.
When He manifests this form, there is no need for our imagining what He
looks like. To discourage such imaginative speculation, He descends and
exhibits Himself as He is, as Çyämasundara. Unfortunately, the less intelligent
deride Him because He comes as one of us and plays with us as a human being.
But because of this we should not consider that the Lord is one of us. It is by
His potency that He presents Himself in His real form before us and displays
His pastimes, which are prototypes of those pastimes found in His abode.
In the effulgent rays of the spiritual sky there are innumerable planets floating. The brahmajyoti emanates from the supreme abode, Kåñëaloka, and the änandamaya-cinmaya planets, which are not material, float in those rays. The Lord says, na tad bhäsayate süryo na çaçäìko na pävakaù yad gatvä na nivartante tad dhäma paramaà mama. One who can approach that spiritual sky is not required to descend again to the material sky. In the material sky, even if we approach the highest planet (Brahmaloka), what to speak of the moon, we will find the same conditions of life, namely birth, death, disease and old age. No planet in the material universe is free from these four principles of material existence. Therefore the Lord says in Bhagavad-gétä, äbrahma-bhuvanäl lokäù punar ävartino ’rjuna. The living entities are traveling from one planet to another, not by mechanical arrangement but by a spiritual process. This is also mentioned: yänti deva-vratä devän pitèn yänti pitå-vratäù. No mechanical arrangement is necessary if we want interplanetary travel. The Gétä instructs: yänti deva-vratä devän. The moon, the sun and higher planets are called svargaloka. There are three different statuses of planets: higher, middle and lower planetary systems. The earth belongs to the middle planetary system. Bhagavad-gétä informs us how to travel to the higher planetary systems (devaloka) with a very simple formula: yänti deva-vratä devän. One need only worship the particular demigod of that particular planet and in that way go to the moon, the sun or any of the higher planetary systems.
Yet Bhagavad-gétä does not advise us to go to any of the planets in this material world because even if we go to Brahmaloka, the highest planet, through some sort of mechanical contrivance by maybe traveling for forty thousand years (and who would live that long?), we will still find the material inconveniences of birth, death, disease and old age. But one who wants to approach the supreme planet, Kåñëaloka, or any of the other planets within the spiritual sky, will not meet with these material inconveniences. Amongst all of the planets in the spiritual sky there is one supreme planet called Goloka Våndävana, which is the original planet in the abode of the original Personality of Godhead Çré Kåñëa. All of this information is given in Bhagavad-gétä, and we are given through its instruction information how to leave the material world and begin a truly blissful life in the spiritual sky.
In the Fifteenth Chapter of the Bhagavad-gétä, the real picture of the material world is given. It is said there:
ürdhva-mülam adhaù-çäkham açvatthaà prähur avyayam
chandäàsi yasya parëäni yas taà veda sa veda-vit
“The Supreme Lord said: There is a banyan tree which has its roots
upward and its branches down, and the Vedic hymns are its leaves. One who knows
this tree is the knower of the Vedas.” (Bg. 15.1)
Here the material world is described as a tree whose roots are upwards and
branches are below. We have experience of a tree whose roots are upward: if one
stands on the bank of a river or any reservoir of water, he can see that the
trees reflected in the water are upside down. The branches go downward and the
roots upward. Similarly, this material world is a reflection of the spiritual
world. The material world is but a shadow of reality. In the shadow there is no
reality or substantiality, but from the shadow we can understand that there is
substance and reality. In the desert there is no water, but the mirage suggests
that there is such a thing as water. In the material world there is no water,
there is no happiness, but the real water of actual happiness is there in the spiritual
world.
The Lord suggests that we attain the spiritual world in the
following manner:
nirmäna-mohä jita-saìga-doñä
adhyätma-nityä vinivåtta-kämäù
dvandvair vimuktäù sukha-duùkha-saàjïair
gacchanty amüòhäù padam avyayaà tat.
That padam avyayam or eternal
kingdom can be reached by one who is nirmäna-moha. What
does this mean? We are after designations. Someone wants to become a son,
someone wants to become Lord, someone wants to become the president or a rich
man or a king or something else. As long as we are attached to these
designations, we are attached to the body because designations belong to the
body. But we are not these bodies, and realizing this is the first stage in
spiritual realization. We are associated with the three modes of material nature,
but we must become detached through devotional service to the Lord. If we are
not attached to devotional service to the Lord, then we cannot become detached
from the modes of material nature. Designations and attachments are due to our
lust and desire, our wanting to lord it over the material nature. As long as we
do not give up this propensity of lording it over material nature, there is no
possibility of returning to the kingdom of the Supreme, the sanätana-dhäma. That eternal kingdom, which is never
destroyed, can be approached by one who is not bewildered by the attractions of
false material enjoyments, who is situated in the service of the Supreme Lord.
One so situated can easily approach that supreme abode.
Elsewhere in the Gétä it is stated:
avyakto ’kñara ity uktas tam ähuù paramäà gatim
yaà präpya na nivartante tad dhäma paramaà mama.
Avyakta means
unmanifested. Not even all of the material world is manifested before us. Our
senses are so imperfect that we cannot even see all of the stars within this
material universe. In Vedic literature we can receive much information about
all the planets, and we can believe it or not believe it. All of the important
planets are described in Vedic literatures, especially Çrémad-Bhägavatam,
and the spiritual world, which is beyond this material sky, is described
as avyakta, unmanifested. One should desire and
hanker after that supreme kingdom, for when one attains that kingdom, he does
not have to return to this material world.
Next, one may raise the question of how one goes about approaching
that abode of the Supreme Lord. Information of this is given in the Eighth
Chapter. It is said there:
anta-käle ca mäm eva smaran muktvä kalevaram
yaù prayäti sa mad-bhävam yäti nästy atra saàçayaù
“Anyone who quits his body, at the end of life, remembering Me,
attains immediately to My nature; and there is no doubt of this.” (Bg. 8.5) One
who thinks of Kåñëa at the time of his death goes to Kåñëa. One must remember
the form of Kåñëa; if he quits his body thinking of this form, he approaches
the spiritual kingdom. Mad-bhävaà refers to the
supreme nature of the Supreme Being. The Supreme Being is sac-cid-änanda-vigraha—eternal, full of knowledge and
bliss. Our present body is not sac-cid-änanda. It
is asat, not sat. It
is not eternal; it is perishable. It is not cit, full
of knowledge, but it is full of ignorance. We have no knowledge of the
spiritual kingdom, nor do we even have perfect knowledge of this material world
where there are so many things unknown to us. The body is also niränanda; instead of being full of bliss it is full of
misery. All of the miseries we experience in the material world arise from the
body, but one who leaves this body thinking of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead at once attains a sac-cid-änanda body, as
is promised in this fifth verse of the Eighth Chapter where Lord Kåñëa says,
“He attains My nature.”
The process of quitting this body and getting another body in the
material world is also organized. A man dies after it has been decided what
form of body he will have in the next life. Higher authorities, not the living
entity himself, make this decision. According to our activities in this life,
we either rise or sink. This life is a preparation for the next life. If we can
prepare, therefore, in this life to get promotion to the kingdom of God, then
surely, after quitting this material body, we will attain a spiritual body just
like the Lord.
As explained before, there are different kinds of transcendentalists, the brahmavädi paramätmävädi and the devotee, and, as mentioned, in the brahmajyoti (spiritual sky) there are innumerable spiritual planets. The number of these planets is far, far greater than all of the planets of this material world. This material world has been approximated as only one quarter of the creation. In this material segment there are millions and billions of universes with trillions of planets and suns, stars and moons. But this whole material creation is only a fragment of the total creation. Most of the creation is in the spiritual sky. One who desires to merge into the existence of the Supreme Brahman is at once transferred to the brahmajyoti of the Supreme Lord and thus attains the spiritual sky. The devotee, who wants to enjoy the association of the Lord, enters into the Vaikuëöha planets, which are innumerable, and the Supreme Lord by His plenary expansions as Näräyaëa with four hands and with different names like Pradyumna, Aniruddha, Govinda, etc., associates with him there. Therefore at the end of life the transcendentalists either think of the brahmajyoti, the Paramätmä or the Supreme Personality of Godhead Çré Kåñëa. In all cases they enter into the spiritual sky, but only the devotee, or he who is in personal touch with the Supreme Lord, enters into the Vaikuëöha planets. The Lord further adds that of this “there is no doubt.” This must be believed firmly. We should not reject that which does not tally with our imagination; our attitude should be that of Arjuna: “I believe everything that You have said.” Therefore when the Lord says that at the time of death whoever thinks of Him as Brahman or Paramätmä or as the Personality of Godhead certainly enters into the spiritual sky, there is no doubt about it. There is no question of disbelieving it.
The information on how to
think of the Supreme Being at the time of death is also given in the Gétä:
yaà yaà väpi smaran bhävaà tyajaty ante kalevaram
taà tam evaiti kaunteya sadä tad-bhäva-bhävitaù
“In whatever condition one quits his present body, in his next
life he will attain to that state of being without fail.” (Bg. 8.6) Material
nature is a display of one of the energies of the Supreme Lord. In the Viñëu Puräëa the total energies of the Supreme Lord as Viñëu-çaktiù parä proktä, etc., are delineated. The
Supreme Lord has diverse and innumerable energies which are beyond our
conception; however, great learned sages or liberated souls have studied these
energies and have analyzed them into three parts. All of the energies are of Viñëu-çakti, that is to say they are different potencies
of Lord Viñëu. That energy is parä, transcendental.
Living entities also belong to the superior energy, as has already been
explained. The other energies, or material energies, are in the mode of
ignorance. At the time of death we can either remain in the inferior energy of
this material world, or we can transfer to the energy of the spiritual world.
In life we are accustomed to thinking either of the material or
the spiritual energy. There are so many literatures which fill our thoughts
with the material energy—newspapers, novels, etc. Our thinking, which is now
absorbed in these literatures, must be transferred to the Vedic literatures.
The great sages, therefore, have written so many Vedic literatures such as the Puräëas, etc. The Puräëas are
not imaginative; they are historical records. In the Caitanya-caritämåta
there is the following verse:
mäyä mugdha jéver nähi svataù kåñëa-jïäna
jévera kåpäya kailä kåñëa veda-puräëa
(Cc. Madhya 20.122)
The forgetful living entities or conditioned souls have forgotten
their relationship with the Supreme Lord, and they are engrossed in thinking of
material activities. Just to transfer their thinking power to the spiritual
sky, Kåñëa has given a great number of Vedic literatures. First He divided the Vedas into four, then He explained them in the Puräëas, and for less capable people He wrote the Mahäbhärata. In the Mahäbhärata there
is given the Bhagavad-gétä. Then all Vedic
literature is summarized in the Vedänta-sütra, and
for future guidance He gave a natural commentation on the Vedänta-sutra, called Çrémad-Bhägavatam.
We must always engage our minds in reading these Vedic literatures. Just
as materialists engage their minds in reading newspapers, magazines and so many
materialistic literatures, we must transfer our reading to these literatures
which are given to us by Vyäsadeva; in that way it will be possible for us to
remember the Supreme Lord at the time of death. That is the only way suggested
by the Lord, and He guarantees the result: “There is no doubt.” (Bg. 8.7)
tasmät sarveñu käleñu mäm anusmara yudhya ca
mayy arpita-mano-buddhir mäm evaiñyasy asaàçayaù
“Therefore, Arjuna, you should always think of Me, and at the same
time you should continue your prescribed duty and fight. With your mind and
activities always fixed on Me, and everything engaged in Me, you will attain to
Me without any doubt.”
He does not advise Arjuna to simply remember Him and give up his
occupation. No, the Lord never suggests anything impractical. In this material
world, in order to maintain the body one has to work. Human society is divided,
according to work, into four divisions of social order—brähmaëa,
kñatriya, vaiçya, çüdra. The brähmaëa class
or intelligent class is working in one way, the kñatriya
or administrative class is working in another way, and the mercantile
class and the laborers are all tending to their specific duties. In the human
society, whether one is a laborer, merchant, warrior, administrator, or farmer,
or even if one belongs to the highest class and is a literary man, a scientist
or a theologian, he has to work in order to maintain his existence. The Lord
therefore tells Arjuna that he need not give up his occupation, but while he is
engaged in his occupation he should remember Kåñëa. If he doesn’t practice remembering
Kåñëa while he is struggling for existence, then it will not be possible for
him to remember Kåñëa at the time of death. Lord Caitanya also advises this. He
says that one should practice remembering the Lord by chanting the names of the
Lord always. The names of the Lord and the Lord are nondifferent. So Lord
Kåñëa’s instruction to Arjuna to “remember Me” and Lord Caitanya’s injunction
to always “chant the names of Lord Kåñëa” are the same instruction. There is no
difference, because Kåñëa and Kåñëa’s name are nondifferent. In the absolute
status there is no difference between reference and referent. Therefore we have
to practice remembering the Lord always, twenty-four hours a day, by chanting
His names and molding our life’s activities in such a way that we can remember
Him always.
How is this possible? The äcäryas give the following example. If a married woman is attached to another man, or if a man has an attachment for a woman other than his wife, then the attachment is to be considered very strong. One with such an attachment is always thinking of the loved one. The wife who is thinking of her lover is always thinking of meeting him, even while she is carrying out her household chores. In fact, she carries out her household work even more carefully so her husband will not suspect her attachment. Similarly, we should always remember the supreme lover, Çré Kåñëa, and at the same time perform our material duties very nicely. A strong sense of love is required here. If we have a strong sense of love for the Supreme Lord, then we can discharge our duty and at the same time remember Him. But we have to develop that sense of love. Arjuna, for instance, was always thinking of Kåñëa; he was the constant companion of Kåñëa, and at the same time he was a warrior. Kåñëa did not advise him to give up fighting and go to the forest to meditate. When Lord Kåñëa delineates the yoga system to Arjuna, Arjuna says that the practice of this system is not possible for him.
arjuna uväca
yo ’yaà yogas tvayä proktaù sämyena madhusüdana
etasyähaà na paçyämi caïcalatvät sthitià sthiräm
“Arjuna said, O Madhusüdana, the system of yoga
which you have summarized appears impractical and unendurable to me, for
the mind is restless and unsteady.” (Bg. 6.33)
But the Lord says:
yoginäm api sarveñäà mad-gatenäntarätmanä
çraddhävän bhajate yo mäà sa me yuktatamo mataù
“Of all yogés, he who always abides
in Me with great faith, worshiping Me in transcendental loving service, is most
intimately united with Me in yoga, and is the
highest of all.” (Bg. 6.47) So one who thinks of the Supreme Lord always is the
greatest yogé, the supermost jïäné, and the greatest devotee at the same time. The
Lord further tells Arjuna that as a kñatriya he
cannot give up his fighting, but if Arjuna fights remembering Kåñëa, then he
will be able to remember Him at the time of death. But one must be completely
surrendered in the transcendental loving service of the Lord.
We work not with our body, actually, but with our mind and
intelligence. So if the intelligence and the mind are always engaged in the
thought of the Supreme Lord, then naturally the senses are also engaged in His
service. Superficially, at least, the activities of the senses remain the same,
but the consciousness is changed. The Bhagavad-gétä teaches
one how to absorb the mind and intelligence in the thought of the Lord. Such
absorption will enable one to transfer himself to the kingdom of the Lord. If
the mind is engaged in Kåñëa’s service, then the senses are automatically
engaged in His service. This is the art, and this is also the secret of Bhagavad-gétä: total absorption in the thought of Çré
Kåñëa.
Modern man has struggled very hard to reach the moon, but he has not tried very hard to elevate himself spiritually. If one has fifty years of life ahead of him, he should engage that brief time in cultivating this practice of remembering the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This practice is the devotional process of:
çravaëaà kértanaà viñëoù smaraëaà päda-sevanam
arcanaà vandanaà däsyaà sakhyam ätma-nivedanam
These nine processes, of which the easiest is çravaëaà, hearing Bhagavad-gétä from
the realized person, will turn one to the thought of the Supreme Being. This
will lead to niçcala, remembering the Supreme
Lord, and will enable one, upon leaving the body, to attain a spiritual body
which is just fit for association with the Supreme Lord.
The Lord further says:
abhyäsa-yoga-yuktena cetasä nänya-gäminä
paramaà puruñaà divyaà yäti pärthänucintayan
“By practicing this remembering, without being deviated, thinking
ever of the Supreme Godhead, one is sure to achieve the planet of the Divine,
the Supreme Personality, O son of Kunté.” (Bg. 8.8)
This is not a very difficult process. However, one must learn it
from an experienced person, from one who is already in the practice. The mind
is always flying to this and that, but one must always practice concentrating
the mind on the form of the Supreme Lord Çré Kåñëa or on the sound of His name.
The mind is naturally restless, going hither and thither, but it can rest in
the sound vibration of Kåñëa. One must thus meditate on paramaà
puruñaà, the Supreme Person; and thus attain Him. The ways and the means
for ultimate realization, ultimate attainment, are stated in the Bhagavad-gétä, and the doors of this knowledge are open
for everyone. No one is barred out. All classes of men can approach the Lord by
thinking of Him, for hearing and thinking of Him is possible for everyone.
The Lord further says:
mäà hi pärtha vyapäçritya ye ’pi syuù päpa-yonayaù
striyo vaiçyäs tathä çüdräs te ’pi yänti paräà gatim
kià punar brähmaëäù puëyä bhaktä räjarñayas tathä
anityam asukhaà lokam imaà präpya bhajasva mäm
“O son of Påthä, anyone who will take shelter in Me, whether a
woman, or a merchant, or one born in a low family, can yet approach the supreme
destination. How much greater then are the brähmaëas, the
righteous, the devotees, and saintly kings! In this miserable world, these are
fixed in devotional service to the Lord.” (Bg. 9.32–33)
Human beings even in the lower statuses of life (a merchant, a
woman or a laborer) can attain the Supreme. One does not need highly developed
intelligence. The point is that anyone who accepts the principle of bhakti-yoga and accepts the Supreme Lord as the summum bonum of life, as the highest target, the
ultimate goal, can approach the Lord in the spiritual sky. If one adopts the
principles enunciated in Bhagavad-gétä, he can
make his life perfect and make a perfect solution to all the problems of life
which arise out of the transient nature of material existence. This is the sum
and substance of the entire Bhagavad-gétä.
In conclusion, Bhagavad-géta is a transcendental literature which one should read very carefully. It is capable of saving one from all fear.
nehäbhikrama-näço ’sti pratyaväyo na vidyate
svalpam apy asya dharmasya träyate mahato bhayät
“In this endeavor there is no loss or diminution, and a little
advancement on this path can protect one from the most dangerous type of fear.”
(Bg. 2.40) If one reads Bhagavad-gétä sincerely
and seriously, then all of the reactions of his past misdeeds will not react
upon him. In the last portion of Bhagavad-gétä, Lord
Çré Kåñëa proclaims:
sarva-dharmän parityajya mäm ekaà çaraëaà vraja
ahaà tväà sarva-päpebhyo mokñayiñyämi mä çucaù
“Give up all varieties of religiousness, and just surrender unto
Me; and in return I shall protect you from all sinful reactions. Therefore, you
have nothing to fear.” (Bg. 18.66) Thus the Lord takes all responsibility for
one who surrenders unto Him, and He indemnifies all the reactions of sin.
One cleanses himself daily by taking a bath in water, but one who
takes his bath only once in the sacred Ganges water of the Bhagavad-gétä cleanses away all the dirt of material
life. Because Bhagavad-gétä is spoken by the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, one need not read any other Vedic literature.
One need only attentively and regularly hear and read Bhagavad-gétä.
In the present age, mankind is so absorbed with mundane activities that
it is not possible to read all of the Vedic literatures. But this is not
necessary. This one book, Bhagavad-gétä, will
suffice because it is the essence of all Vedic literatures and because it is
spoken by the Supreme Personality of Godhead. It is said that one who drinks
the water of the Ganges certainly gets salvation, but what to speak of one who
drinks the waters of Bhagavad-gétä? Gétä is the
very nectar of the Mahäbhärata spoken by Viñëu
Himself, for Lord Kåñëa is the original Viñëu. It is nectar emanating from the
mouth of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and the Ganges is said to be
emanating from the lotus feet of the Lord. Of course there is no difference
between the mouth and the feet of the Supreme Lord, but in our position we can
appreciate that the Bhagavad-gétä is even more
important than the Ganges.
The Bhagavad-gétä is just like a cow, and Lord Kåñëa, who
is a cowherd boy, is milking this cow. The milk is the essence of the Vedas, and Arjuna is just like a calf. The wise men,
the great sages and pure devotees, are to drink the nectarean milk of Bhagavad-gétä.
In this present day, man is very eager to have one scripture, one God, one religion, and one occupation. So let there be one common scripture for the whole world—Bhagavad-gétä. And let there be one God only for the whole world—Çré Kåñëa. And one mantra only—Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/ Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare. And let there be one work only—the service of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
THE DISCIPLIC SUCCESSION
Evaà paramparä-präptam imaà räjarñayo viduù. (Bhagavad-géta, 4.2) This Bhagavad-gétä As It Is is received through this disciplic succession:
1) Kåñëa, 2) Brahmä, 3) Närada; 4) Vyäsa, 5) Madhva, 6) Padmanäbha, 7) Nåhari, 8) Mädhava, 9) Akñobhya, 10) Jayatértha, 11) Jïänasindhu, 12) Dayänidhi, 13) Vidyänidhi, 14) Räjendra, 15) Jayadharma, 16) Puruñottama, 17) Brahmaëyatértha, 18) Vyäsatértha, 19) Lakñmépati, 20) Mädhavendra Puré, 21) Éçvara Puré, (Nityänanda, Advaita), 22) Lord Caitanya, 23) Rüpa (Svarüpa, Sanätana), 24) Raghunätha, Jéva, 25) Kåñëadäsa, 26) Narottama, 27) Viçvanätha, 28) (Baladeva) Jagannätha, 29) Bhaktivinode, 30) Gaurakiçora, 31) Bhaktisiddhänta Sarasvaté, 32) His Divine Grace A. C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupäda.
Bg 1. Observing the Armies on the Battlefield of Kurukñetra
CHAPTER
ONE
Observing the
Armies on the
Battlefield of Kurukñetra
Bg 1.1
TEXT
1
TEXT
Da*Taraí\ ovac
DaMaR+ae}ae ku-å+ae}ae SaMaveTaa YauYauTSav" )
MaaMak-a" Paa<@vaêEv ik-Maku-vRTa SaÅYa )) 1 ))
dhåtaräñöra
uväca
dharma-kñetre kuru-kñetre
samavetä yuyutsavaù
mämakäù päëòaväç caiva
kim akurvata saïjaya
dhåtaräñöraù—King
Dhåtaräñöra; uväca—said; dharma-kñetre—in
the place of pilgrimage; kuru-kñetre—in the place
named Kurukñetra; samavetäù—assembled; yuyatsavaù—desiring to fight; mämakäù—my
party (sons); päëòaväù—the sons of Päëòu; ca—and; eva—certainly; kim—what;
akurvata—did they do; saïjaya—O
Saïjaya.
TRANSLATION
Dhåtaräñöra said: O Saïjaya, after assembling in the place of
pilgrimage at Kurukñetra, what did my sons and the sons of Päëòu do, being
desirous to fight?
PURPORT
Bhagavad-gétä is the
widely read theistic science summarized in the Gétä-mähätmya
(Glorification of the Gétä). There it says that one should read Bhagavad-gétä very scrutinizingly with the help of a
person who is a devotee of Çré Kåñëa and try to understand it without
personally motivated interpretations. The example of clear understanding is
there in the Bhagavad-gétä itself, in the way the
teaching is understood by Arjuna, who heard the Gétä directly
from the Lord. If someone is fortunate enough to understand Bhagavad-gétä in that line of disciplic succession,
without motivated interpretation, then he surpasses all studies of Vedic
wisdom, and all scriptures of the world. One will find in the Bhagavad-gétä all that is contained in other scriptures,
but the reader will also find things which are not to be found elsewhere. That
is the specific standard of the Gétä. It is the
perfect theistic science because it is directly spoken by the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, Lord Çré Kåñëa.
The topics discussed by Dhåtaräñöra and Saïjaya, as described in the Mahäbhärata, form the basic principle for this great philosophy. It is understood that this philosophy evolved on the Battlefield of Kurukñetra, which is a sacred place of pilgrimage from the immemorial time of the Vedic age. It was spoken by the Lord when He was present personally on this planet for the guidance of mankind.
The word dharma-kñetra (a place where religious rituals are performed) is significant because, on the Battlefield of Kurukñetra, the Supreme Personality of Godhead was present on the side of Arjuna. Dhåtaräñöra, the father of the Kurus, was highly doubtful about the possibility of his sons’ ultimate victory. In his doubt, he inquired from his secretary Saïjaya, “What did my sons and the sons of Päëòu do?” He was confident that both his sons and the sons of his younger brother Päëòu were assembled in that Field of Kurukñetra for a determined engagement of the war. Still, his inquiry is significant. He did not want a compromise between the cousins and brothers, and he wanted to be sure of the fate of his sons on the battlefield. Because the battle was arranged to be fought at Kurukñetra, which is mentioned elsewhere in the Vedas as a place of worship—even for the denizens of heaven—Dhåtaräñöra became very fearful about the influence of the holy place on the outcome of the battle. He knew very well that this would influence Arjuna and the sons of Päëòu favorably, because by nature they were all virtuous. Saïjaya was a student of Vyäsa, and therefore, by the mercy of Vyäsa, Saïjaya was able to envision the Battlefield of Kurukñetra even while he was in the room of Dhåtaräñöra. And so, Dhåtaräñöra asked him about the situation on the battlefield.
Both the Päëòavas and the sons of Dhåtaräñöra belong to the same family, but Dhåtaräñöra’s mind is disclosed herein. He deliberately claimed only his sons as Kurus, and he separated the sons of Päëòu from the family heritage. One can thus understand the specific position of Dhåtaräñöra in his relationship with his nephews, the sons of Päëòu. As in the paddy field the unnecessary plants are taken out, so it is expected from the very beginning of these topics that in the religious field of Kurukñetra where the father of religion, Çré Kåñëa, was present, the unwanted plants like Dhåtaräñöra’s son Duryodhana and others would be wiped out and the thoroughly religious persons, headed by Yudhiñöhira, would be established by the Lord. This is the significance of the words dharma-kñetre and kuru-kñetre, apart from their historical and Vedic importance.
Bg 1.2
TEXT
2
TEXT
SaÅYa ovac
d*îa Tau Paa<@vaNaqk&- VYaU!& duYaaeRDaNaSTada )
AacaYaRMauPaSa®MYa raJaa vcNaMab]vqTa( )) 2 ))
saïjaya
uväca
dåñövä tu päëòavänékaà
vyüòhaà duryodhanas tadä
äcäryam upasaìgamya
räjä vacanam abravét
saïjayaù—Saïjaya; uväca—said; dåñövä—after
seeing; tu—but; päëòava-anékam—the
soldiers of the Päëòavas; vyüòham—arranged in
military phalanx; duryodhanaù—King Duryodhana; tadä—at that time; äcäryam—the
teacher; upasaìgamya—approaching nearby; räjä—the king; vacanam—words;
abravét—spoke.
TRANSLATION
Saïjaya said: O King, after looking over the army gathered by the
sons of Päëòu, King Duryodhana went to his teacher and began to speak the
following words:
PURPORT
Dhåtaräñöra was blind from birth. Unfortunately, he was also
bereft of spiritual vision. He knew very well that his sons were equally blind
in the matter of religion, and he was sure that they could never reach an
understanding with the Päëòavas, who were all pious since birth. Still he was
doubtful about the influence of the place of pilgrimage, and Saïjaya could
understand his motive in asking about the situation on the battlefield. He
wanted, therefore, to encourage the despondent King, and thus he warned him
that his sons were not going to make any sort of compromise under the influence
of the holy place. Saïjaya therefore informed the King that his son,
Duryodhana, after seeing the military force of the Päëòavas, at once went to
the commander-in-chief, Droëäcärya, to inform him of the real position.
Although Duryodhana is mentioned as the king, he still had to go to the
commander on account of the seriousness of the situation. He was therefore
quite fit to be a politician. But Duryodhana’s diplomatic veneer could not
disguise the fear he felt when he saw the military arrangement of the Päëòavas.
Bg 1.3
TEXT
3
TEXT
PaXYaETaa&
Paa<@uPau}aa<aaMaacaYaR MahTaq& cMaUMa( )
VYaU!a& d]uPadPau}ae<a Tav iXaZYae<a DaqMaTaa )) 3 ))
paçyaitäà päëòu-puträëäm
äcärya mahatéà camüm
vyüòhäà drupada-putreëa
tava çiñyeëa dhématä
paçya—behold; etäm—this; päëòu-puträëäm—of
the sons of Päëòu; äcärya—O teacher; mahatém—great; camüm—military
force; vyuòham—arranged; drupada-putreëa—by
the son of Drupada; tava—your; çiñyeëa—disciple; dhématä—very
intelligent.
TRANSLATION
O my teacher, behold the great army of the sons of Päëòu, so
expertly arranged by your intelligent disciple, the son of Drupada.
PURPORT
Duryodhana, a great diplomat, wanted to point out the defects of
Droëäcärya, the great brähmaëa commander-in-chief.
Droëäcärya had some political quarrel with King Drupada, the father of
Draupadé, who was Arjuna’s wife. As a result of this quarrel, Drupada performed
a great sacrifice, by which he received the benediction of having a son who
would be able to kill Droëäcärya. Droëäcärya knew this perfectly well, and yet,
as a liberal brähmaëa, he did not hesitate to
impart all his military secrets when the son of Drupada, Dhåñöadyumna, was
entrusted to him for military education. Now, on the Battlefield of Kurukñetra,
Dhåñöadyumna took the side of the Päëòavas, and it was he who arranged for
their military phalanx, after having learned the art from Droëäcärya.
Duryodhana pointed out this mistake of Droëäcärya’s so that he might be alert
and uncompromising in the fighting. By this he wanted to point out also that he
should not be similarly lenient in battle against the Päëòavas, who were also
Droëäcärya’s affectionate students. Arjuna, especially, was his most
affectionate and brilliant student. Duryodhana also warned that such leniency
in the fight would lead to defeat.
Bg 1.4
TEXT
4
TEXT
A}a éUra
MaheZvaSaa >aqMaaJauRNaSaMaa YauiDa )
YauYauDaaNaae ivra$=ê d]uPadê MaharQa" )) 4 ))
atra çürä maheñv-äsä
bhémärjuna-samä yudhi
yuyudhäno viräöaç ca
drupadaç ca mahä-rathaù
atra—here; çüräù—heroes; maheñväsäù—mighty
bowmen; bhéma-arjuna—Bhéma and Arjuna; samäù—equal; yudhi—in the
fight; yuyudhänaù—Yuyudhäna; viräöaù—Viräöa; ca—also; drupadaù—Drupada; ca—also;
mahärathaù—great fighter.
TRANSLATION
Here in this army there are many heroic bowmen equal in fighting
to Bhéma and Arjuna; there are also great fighters like Yuyudhäna, Viräöa and
Drupada.
PURPORT
Even though Dhåñöadyumna was not a very important obstacle in the
face of Droëäcärya’s very great power in the military art, there were many
others who were the cause of fear. They are mentioned by Duryodhana as great
stumbling blocks on the path of victory because each and every one of them was
as formidable as Bhéma and Arjuna. He knew the strength of Bhéma and Arjuna,
and thus he compared the others with them.
Bg 1.5
TEXT
5
TEXT
Da*íke-Tauêeik-TaaNa"
k-aiXaraJaê vqYaRvaNa( )
PauåiJaTku-iNTa>aaeJaê XaEBYaê NarPau®v" )) 5 ))
dhåñöaketuç cekitänaù
käçiräjaç ca véryavän
purujit kuntibhojaç ca
çaibyaç ca nara-puìgavaù
dhåñöaketuù—Dhåñöaketu; cekitänaù—Cekitäna; käçiräjaù—Kaçiräja;
ca—also; véryavän—very
powerful; purujit—Purujit; kuntibhojaù—Kuntibhoja; ca—and;
çaibyaù—Çaibya; ca—and;
nara-puìgavaù—heroes in human society.
TRANSLATION
There are also great, heroic, powerful fighters like Dhåñöaketu,
Cekitäna, Käçiräja, Purujit, Kuntibhoja and Çaibya.
Bg 1.6
TEXT
6
TEXT
YauDaaMaNYauê
iv§-aNTa otaMaaEJaaê vqYaRvaNa( )
SaaE>ad]ae d]aEPadeYaaê SavR Wv MaharQaa" )) 6 ))
yudhämanyuç ca vikränta
uttamaujäç ca véryavän
saubhadro draupadeyäç ca
sarva eva mahä-rathäù
yudhämanyuù—Yudhämanyu; ca—and; vikräntaù—mighty;
uttamaujäù—Uttamaujä; ca—and;
véryavän—very powerful; saubhadraù—the
son of Subhadrä; draupadeyäù—the sons of
Draupadé; ca—and; sarve—all;
eva—certainly; mahä-rathäù—great
chariot fighters.
TRANSLATION
There are the mighty Yudhämanyu, the very powerful Uttamaujä, the
son of Subhadrä and the sons of Draupadé. All these warriors are great chariot
fighters.
Bg 1.7
TEXT
7
TEXT
ASMaak&- Tau
iviXaía Yae TaaiàbaeDa iÜJaaetaMa )
NaaYak-a MaMa SaENYaSYa Sa&jaQa| TaaNb]vqiMa Tae )) 7 ))
asmäkaà tu viçiñöä ye
tän nibodha dvijottama
näyakä mama sainyasya
saàjïärthaà tän bravémi te
asmäkam—our; tu—but; viçiñöäù—especially
powerful; ye—those; tän—them;
nibodha—just take note, be informed; dvijottama—the best of the brähmaëas;
näyakäù—captains; mama—my; sainyasya—of the soldiers; saàjïä-artham—for
information; tän—them; bravémi—I
am speaking; te—your.
TRANSLATION
O best of the brähmaëas, for your information, let me tell you
about the captains who are especially qualified to lead my military force.
Bg 1.8
TEXT
8
TEXT
>avaN>aqZMaê
k-<aRê k*-Paê SaiMaiTa&JaYa" )
AìTQaaMaa ivk-<aRê SaaEMaditaSTaQaEv c )) 8 ))
bhavän bhéñmaç ca karëaç ca
kåpaç ca samitià-jayaù
açvatthämä vikarëaç ca
saumadattis tathaiva ca
bhavän—yourself; bhéñmaù—Grandfather Bhéñma; ca—also; karëaù—Karëa; ca—and; kåpaù—Kåpa; ca—and; samitiïjayaù—always victorious in battle; açvatthämä—Açvatthämä;
vikarëaù—Vikarëa; ca—as well as; saumadattiù—the son of Somadatta; tathä—and as; eva—certainly; ca—and.
TRANSLATION
There are personalities like yourself, Bhéñma, Karëa, Kåpa,
Açvatthämä, Vikarëa and the son of Somadatta called Bhuriçravä, who are always
victorious in battle.
PURPORT
Duryodhana mentioned the exceptional heroes in the battle, all of
whom are ever-victorious. Vikarëa is the brother of Duryodhana, Açvatthämä is
the son of Droëäcärya, and Saumadatti, or Bhüriçravä, is the son of the King of
the Bählékas. Karëa is the half brother of Arjuna, as he was born of Kunté
before her marriage with King Päëòu. Kåpäcärya married the twin sister of
Droëäcärya.
Bg 1.9
TEXT
9
TEXT
ANYae c
bhv" éUra MadQaeR TYa¢-JaqivTaa" )
NaaNaaXañPa[hr<aa" SaveR YauÖivXaarda" )) 9 ))
anye ca bahavaù çürä
mad-arthe tyakta-jévitäù
nänä-çastra-praharaëäù
sarve yuddha-viçäradäù
anye—many others;
ca—also; bahavaù—in
great numbers; çüräù—heroes; mad-arthe-for my sake; tyakta-jévitäù—prepared
to risk life; nänä—many; çastra—weapons; praharaëäù—equipped with; sarve—all
of them; yuddha—battle; viçäradäù—experienced
in military science.
TRANSLATION
There are many other heroes who are prepared to lay down their
lives for my sake. All of them are well equipped with different kinds of
weapons, and all are experienced in military science.
PURPORT
As far as the others are concerned—like Jayadratha, Kåtavarmä,
Çalya, etc.—all are determined to lay down their lives for Duryodhana’s sake.
In other words, it is already concluded that all of them would die in the
Battle of Kurukñetra for joining the party of the sinful Duryodhana. Duryodhana
was, of course, confident of his victory on account of the above-mentioned
combined strength of his friends.
Bg 1.10
TEXT
10
TEXT
APaYaaRá&
TadSMaak&- bl&/ >aqZMaai>ari+aTaMa( )
PaYaaRá& iTvdMaeTaeza& bl&/ >aqMaai>ari+aTaMa( )) 10 ))
aparyäptaà tad asmäkaà
balaà bhéñmäbhirakñitam
paryäptaà tv idam eteñäà
balaà bhémäbhirakñitam
aparyäptam—immeasurable;
tat—that; asmäkam—of
ours; balam—strength; bhéñma—by
Grandfather Bhéñma; abhirakñitam—perfectly
protected; paryäptam—limited; tu—but; idam—all these; eteñäm—of the Päëòavas; balam—strength;
bhéma—by Bhéma; abhirakñitam—carefully
protected.
TRANSLATION
Our strength is immeasurable, and we are perfectly protected by
Grandfather Bhéñma, whereas the strength of the Päëòavas, carefully protected
by Bhéma, is limited.
PURPORT
Herein an estimation of comparative strength is made by
Duryodhana. He thinks that the strength of his armed forces is immeasurable,
being specifically protected by the most experienced general, Grandfather
Bhéñma. On the other hand, the forces of the Päëòavas are limited, being
protected by a less experienced general, Bhéma, who is like a fig in the
presence of Bhéñma. Duryodhana was always envious of Bhéma because he knew
perfectly well that if he should die at all, he would only be killed by Bhéma.
But at the same time, he was confident of his victory on account of the
presence of Bhéñma, who was a far superior general. His conclusion that he
would come out of the battle victorious was well ascertained.
Bg 1.11
TEXT
11
TEXT
AYaNaezu c SaveRzu
YaQaa>aaGaMaviSQaTaa" )
>aqZMaMaevai>ar+aNTau >avNTa" SavR Wv ih )) 11 ))
ayaneñu ca sarveñu
yathä-bhägam avasthitäù
bhéñmam eväbhirakñantu
bhavantaù sarva eva hi
ayaneñu—in the
strategic points; ca—also; sarveñu—everywhere; yathäbhägam—as
they are differently arranged; avasthitäù—situated;
bhéñmam—unto Grandfather Bhéñma; eva—certainly; abhirakñantu—support
may be given; bhavantaù—all of you; sarve—respectively; eva—certainly;
hi—and exactly.
TRANSLATION
Now all of you must give full support to Grandfather Bhéñma,
standing at your respective strategic points in the phalanx of the army.
PURPORT
Duryodhana, after praising the prowess of Bhéñma, further
considered that others might think that they had been considered less
important, so in his usual diplomatic way, he tried to adjust the situation in
the above words. He emphasized that Bhéñmadeva was undoubtedly the greatest
hero, but he was an old man, so everyone must especially think of his
protection from all sides. He might become engaged in the fight, and the enemy
might take advantage of his full engagement on one side. Therefore, it was
important that other heroes would not leave their strategic positions and allow
the enemy to break the phalanx. Duryodhana clearly felt that the victory of the
Kurus depended on the presence of Bhéñmadeva. He was confident of the full
support of Bhéñmadeva and Droëäcärya in the battle because he well knew that
they did not even speak a word when Arjuna’s wife Draupadé, in her helpless
condition, had appealed to them for justice while she was being forced to strip
naked in the presence of all the great generals in the assembly. Although he
knew that the two generals had some sort of affection for the Päëòavas, he
hoped that all such affection would now be completely given up by them, as was
customary during the gambling performances.
Bg 1.12
TEXT
12
TEXT
TaSYa
SaÅNaYaNhz| ku-åv*Ö" iPaTaaMah" )
iSa&hNaad& ivNaÛaeÀE" Xa«& dDMaaE Pa[TaaPavaNa( )) 12 ))
tasya saïjanayan harñaà
kuru-våddhaù pitämahaù
siàha-nädaà vinadyoccaiù
çaìkhaà dadhmau pratäpavän
tasya—his; saïjanayan—increasing; harñam—cheerfulness;
kuru-våddhaù—the grandsire of the Kuru dynasty
(Bhéñma); pitämahaù—the grandfather; siàha-nädam—roaring sound, like a lion; vinadya—vibrating; uccaiù—very
loudly; çaìkham—conchshell; dadhmau—blew; pratäpavän—the
valiant.
TRANSLATION
Then Bhéñma, the great valiant grandsire of the Kuru dynasty, the
grandfather of the fighters, blew his conchshell very loudly like the sound of
a lion, giving Duryodhana joy.
PURPORT
The grandsire of the Kuru dynasty could understand the inner
meaning of the heart of his grandson Duryodhana, and out of his natural
compassion for him he tried to cheer him by blowing his conchshell very loudly,
befitting his position as a lion. Indirectly, by the symbolism of the
conchshell, he informed his depressed grandson Duryodhana that he had no chance
of victory in the battle, because the Supreme Lord Kåñëa was on the other side.
But still, it was his duty to conduct the fight, and no pains would be spared
in that connection.
Bg 1.13
TEXT
13
TEXT
TaTa" Xa«aê
>aeYaRê Pa<avaNak-GaaeMau%a" )
SahSaEva>YahNYaNTa Sa XaBdSTauMaul/ae_>avTa( )) 13 ))
tataù çaìkhäç ca bheryaç ca
paëavänaka-gomukhäù
sahasaiväbhyahanyanta
sa çabdas tumulo ’bhavat
tataù—thereafter; çaìkhäù—conchshells; ca—also;
bheryaù—bugles; ca—and;
paëava-änaka—trumpets and drums; go-mukhäù—horns; sahasä—all
of a sudden; eva—certainly; abhyahanyanta—being simultaneously sounded; saù—that; çabdaù—combined
sound; tumulaù—tumultuous; abhavat—became.
TRANSLATION
After that, the conchshells, bugles, trumpets, drums and horns
were all suddenly sounded, and the combined sound was tumultuous.
Bg 1.14
TEXT
14
TEXT
TaTa"
ìeTaEhRYaEYauR¢e- MahiTa SYaNdNae iSQaTaaE )
MaaDav" Paa<@vêEv idVYaaE Xa«aE Pa[dDMaTau" )) 14 ))
tataù çvetair hayair yukte
mahati syandane sthitau
mädhavaù päëòavaç caiva
divyau çaìkhau pradadhmatuù
tataù—thereafter; çvetaiù—by white; hayaiù—horses; yukte—being yoked with; mahati—in
the great; syandane—chariot; sthitau—so situated; mädhavaù—Kåñëa
(the husband of the goddess of fortune); päëòavaù—Arjuna
(the son of Päëòu); ca—also; eva—certainly; divyau—transcendental;
çaìkhau—conchshells; pradadhmatuù—sounded.
TRANSLATION
On the other side, both Lord Kåñëa and Arjuna, stationed on a
great chariot drawn by white horses, sounded their transcendental conchshells.
PURPORT
In contrast with the conchshell blown by Bhéñmadeva, the
conchshells in the hands of Kåñëa and Arjuna are described as transcendental.
The sounding of the transcendental conchshells indicated that there was no hope
of victory for the other side because Kåñëa was on the side of the Päëòavas. Jayas tu päëòu-puträëäà yeñäà pakñe janärdanaù. Victory
is always with persons like the sons of Päëòu because Lord Kåñëa is associated
with them. And whenever and wherever the Lord is present, the goddess of
fortune is also there because the goddess of fortune never lives alone without
her husband. Therefore, victory and fortune were awaiting Arjuna, as indicated
by the transcendental sound produced by the conchshell of Viñëu, or Lord Kåñëa.
Besides that, the chariot on which both the friends were seated was donated by
Agni (the fire-god) to Arjuna, and this indicated that this chariot was capable
of conquering all sides, wherever it was drawn over the three worlds.
Bg 1.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
PaaÄJaNYa&
ôzqke-Xaae devdta& DaNaÅYa" )
PaaE<@\& dDMaaE MahaXa«& >aqMak-MaaR v*k-aedr" )) 15 ))
päïcajanyaà håñékeço
devadattaà dhanaïjayaù
pauëòraà dadhmau mahä-çaìkhaà
bhéma-karmä våkodaraù
päïcajanyam—the
conchshell named Päïcajanya; håñékeçaù—Håñékeça
(Kåñëa, the Lord who directs the senses of the devotees); devadattam—the conchshell named Devadatta; dhanaïjayaù—Dhanaïjaya (Arjuna, the winner of wealth); pauëòram—the conch named Pauëòram; dadhmau—blew; mahä-çaìkham—the
terrific conchshell; bhéma-karmä—one who performs
Herculean tasks; våkodaraù—the voracious eater
(Bhéma).
TRANSLATION
Then, Lord Kåñëa blew His conchshell, called Päïcajanya; Arjuna
blew his, the Devadatta; and Bhéma, the voracious eater and performer of Herculean
tasks, blew his terrific conchshell called Pauëòram.
PURPORT
Lord Kåñëa is referred to as Håñékeça in this verse because He is
the owner of all senses The living entities are part and parcel of Him, and,
therefore, the senses of the living entities are also part and parcel of His
senses. The impersonalists cannot account for the senses of the living
entities, and therefore they are always anxious to describe all living entities
as sense-less, or impersonal. The Lord, situated in the hearts of all living
entities, directs their senses. But, He directs in terms of the surrender of
the living entity, and in the case of a pure devotee He directly controls the
senses. Here on the Battlefield of Kurukñetra the Lord directly controls the
transcendental senses of Arjuna, and thus His particular name of Håñékeça. The
Lord has different names according to His different activities. For example,
His name is Madhusüdana because He killed the demon of the name Madhu; His name
is Govinda because He gives pleasure to the cows and to the senses; His name is
Väsudeva because He appeared as the son of Vasudeva; His name is Devaké-nandana
because He accepted Devaké as His mother; His name is Yaçodä-nandana because He
awarded His childhood pastimes to Yaçodä at Våndävana; His name is
Pärtha-särathi because He worked as charioteer of His friend Arjuna. Similarly,
His name is Håñékeça because He gave direction to Arjuna on the Battlefield of
Kurukñetra.
Arjuna is referred to as Dhanaïjaya in this verse because he helped his elder brother in fetching wealth when it was required by the King to make expenditures for different sacrifices. Similarly, Bhéma is known as Våkodara because he could eat as voraciously as he could perform Herculean tasks, such as killing the demon Hiòimba. So, the particular types of conchshell blown by the different personalities on the side of the Päëòavas, beginning with the Lord’s, were all very encouraging to the fighting soldiers. On the other side there were no such credits, nor the presence of Lord Kåñëa, the supreme director, nor that of the goddess of fortune. So, they were predestined to lose the battle—and that was the message announced by the sounds of the conchshells.
Bg
1.16, Bg 1.17, Bg 1.18, Bg 1.16-18
TEXTS
16–18
TEXT
ANaNTaivJaYa&
raJaa ku-NTaqPau}aae YauiDaiïr" )
Naku-l/" Sahdevê SaugaaezMai<aPauZPak-aE )) 16 ))
k-aXYaê ParMaeZvaSa" iXa%<@q c MaharQa" )
Da*íÛuManae ivra$=ê SaaTYaik-êaParaiJaTa" )) 17 ))
d]uPadae d]aEPadeYaaê SavRXa" Pa*iQavqPaTae )
SaaE>ad]ê Mahabahu" Xa«aNdDMau" Pa*QaKPa*Qak(- )) 18 ))
anantavijayaà räjä
kunté-putro yudhiñöhiraù
nakulaù sahadevaç ca
sughoña-maëipuñpakau
käçyaç ca parameñv-äsaù
çikhaëòé ca mahä-rathaù
dhåñöadyumno viräöaç ca
sätyakiç cäparäjitaù
drupado draupadeyäç ca
sarvaçaù påthivé-pate
saubhadraç ca mahä-bähuù
çaìkhän dadhmuù påthak påthak
TRANSLATION
King Yudhiñöhira, the son of Kunté, blew his conchshell, the
Anantavijaya, and Nakula and Sahadeva blew the Sughoña and Maëipuñpaka. That
great archer the King of Käçé, the great fighter Çikhaëòé, Dhåñöadyumna, Viräöa
and the unconquerable Sätyaki, Drupada, the sons of Draupadé, and the others, O
King, such as the son of Subhadrä, greatly armed, all blew their respective
conchshells.
PURPORT
Saïjaya informed King Dhåtaräñöra very tactfully that his unwise policy
of deceiving the sons of Päëòu and endeavoring to enthrone his own sons on the
seat of the kingdom was not very laudable. The signs already clearly indicated
that the whole Kuru dynasty would be killed in that great battle. Beginning
with the grandsire, Bhéñma, down to the grandsons like Abhimanyu and
others—including kings from many states of the world—all were present there,
and all were doomed. The whole catastrophe was due to King Dhåtaräñöra, because
he encouraged the policy followed by his sons.
Bg 1.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
Sa gaaezae
DaaTaRraí\a<aa& ôdYaaiNa VYadarYaTa( )
Na>aê Pa*iQavq& cEv TauMaul/ae_>YaNauNaadYaNa( )) 19 ))
sa ghoño dhärtaräñöräëäà
hådayäni vyadärayat
nabhaç ca påthivéà caiva
tumulo ’bhyanunädayan
saù—that; ghoñaù—vibration; dhärtaräñöräëäm—of
the sons of Dhåtaräñöra; hådayäni—hearts; vyadärayat—shattered; nabhaù—the
sky; ca—also; påthivém—the
surface of the earth; ca—also; eva—certainly; tumulaù—uproarious;
abhyanunädayan—by resounding.
TRANSLATION
The blowing of these different conchshells became uproarious, and
thus, vibrating both in the sky and on the earth, it shattered the hearts of
the sons of Dhåtaräñöra.
PURPORT
When Bhéñma and the others on the side of Duryodhana blew their respective conchshells, there was no heart-breaking on the part of the Päëòavas. Such occurrences are not mentioned, but in this particular verse it is mentioned that the hearts of the sons of Dhåtaräñöra were shattered by the sounds vibrated by the Päëòavas’ party. This is due to the Päëòavas and their confidence in Lord Kåñëa. One who takes shelter of the Supreme Lord has nothing to fear, even in the midst of the greatest calamity.
Bg 1.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
AQa
VYaviSQaTaaNd*îa DaaTaRraí\aNk-iPaßJa" )
Pa[v*tae XañSaMPaaTae DaNauåÛMYa Paa<@v" )
ôzqke-Xa& Tada vaKYaiMadMaah MahqPaTae )) 20 ))
atha vyavasthitän dåñövä
dhärtaräñörän kapi-dhvajaù
pravåtte çastra-sampäte
dhanur udyamya päëòavaù
håñékeçaà tadä väkyam
idam äha mahé-pate
atha—thereupon; vyavasthitän—situated; dåñövä—looking
on; dhärtaräñörän—the sons of Dhåtaräñöra; kapi-dhvajaù—one whose flag is marked with Hanumän; pravåtte—while about to be engaged; çastra-sampäte—the arrows released; dhanuù—bow; udyamya—after
taking up; päëòavaù—the son of Päëòu (Arjuna); håñékeçam—unto Lord Kåñëa; tadä—at
that time; väkyam—words; idam—these;
äha—said; mahé-pate—O
King.
TRANSLATION
O King, at that time Arjuna, the son of Päëòu, who was seated in
his chariot, his flag marked with Hanumän, took up his bow and prepared to
shoot his arrows, looking at the sons of Dhåtaräñöra. O King, Arjuna then spoke
to Håñékeça [Kåñëa] these words:
PURPORT
The battle was just about to begin. It is understood from the
above statement that the sons of Dhåtaräñöra were more or less disheartened by
the unexpected arrangement of military force by the Päëòavas, who were guided
by the direct instructions of Lord Kåñëa on the battlefield. The emblem of
Hanumän on the flag of Arjuna is another sign of victory because Hanumän
cooperated with Lord Räma in the battle between Räma and Rävaëa, and Lord Räma
emerged victorious. Now both Räma and Hanumän were present on the chariot of
Arjuna to help him. Lord Kåñëa is Räma Himself, and wherever Lord Räma is, His
eternal servitor Hanumän and His eternal consort Sétä, the goddess of fortune,
are present. Therefore, Arjuna had no cause to fear any enemies whatsoever. And
above all, the Lord of the senses, Lord Kåñëa, was personally present to give
him direction. Thus, all good counsel was available to Arjuna in the matter of
executing the battle. In such auspicious conditions, arranged by the Lord for
His eternal devotee, lay the signs of assured victory.
Bg
1.21, Bg 1.22, Bg 1.21-22
TEXTS
21–22
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac
SaeNaYaaeå>aYaaeMaRDYae rQa& SQaaPaYa Mae_CYauTa )
YaavdeTaaiàrq+ae_h& Yaaed(Dauk-aMaaNaviSQaTaaNa( )) 21 ))
kE-MaRYaa Sah YaaeÖVYaMaiSMaNr<aSaMauÛMae )) 22 ))
arjuna
uväca
senayor ubhayor madhye
rathaà sthäpaya me ’cyuta
yävad etän nirékñe ’haà
yoddhu-kämän avasthitän
kair mayä saha yoddhavyam
asmin raëa-samudyame
arjunaù—Arjuna; uväca—said; senayoù—of
the armies; ubhayoù—of both the parties; madhye—in between them; ratham—the
chariot; sthäpaya—please keep; me—my; acyuta—O
infallible one; yävat—as long as; etän—all these; nirékñe—may
look; aham—I; yoddhu-kämän—desiring
to fight; avasthitän—arrayed on the battlefield; kaiù—with whom; mayä—by
me; saha—with; yoddhavyam—to
fight with; asmin—in this; raëa—strife; samudyame—in
the attempt.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said: O infallible one, please draw my chariot between the
two armies so that I may see who is present here, who is desirous of fighting,
and with whom I must contend in this great battle attempt.
PURPORT
Although Lord Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, out of
His causeless mercy He was engaged in the service of His friend. He never fails
in His affection for His devotees, and thus He is addressed herein as
infallible. As charioteer, He had to carry out the orders of Arjuna, and since
He did not hesitate to do so, He is addressed as infallible. Although He had
accepted the position of a charioteer for His devotee, His supreme position was
not challenged. In all circumstances, He is the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
Håñékeça, the Lord of the total senses. The relationship between the Lord and
His servitor is very sweet and transcendental. The servitor is always ready to
render a service to the Lord, and, similarly, the Lord is always seeking an
opportunity to render some service to the devotee. He takes greater pleasure in
His pure devotee’s assuming the advantageous postion of ordering Him than He
does in being the giver of orders. As master, everyone is under His orders, and
no one is above Him to order Him. But when he finds that a pure devotee is
ordering Him, He obtains transcendental pleasure, although He is the infallible
master of all circumstances.
As a pure devotee of the Lord, Arjuna had no desire to fight with his cousins and brothers, but he was forced to come onto the battlefield by the obstinacy of Duryodhana, who was never agreeable to any peaceful negotiation. Therefore, he was very anxious to see who the leading persons present on the battlefield were. Although there was no question of a peacemaking endeavor on the battlefield, he wanted to see them again, and to see how much they were bent upon demanding an unwanted war.
Bg 1.23
TEXT
23
TEXT
YaaeTSYaMaaNaaNave+ae_h&
Ya WTae_}a SaMaaGaTaa" )
DaaTaRraí\SYa dubuRÖeYauRÖe iPa[Yaick-IzRv" )) 23 ))
yotsyamänän avekñe ’haà
ya ete ’tra samägatäù
dhärtaräñörasya durbuddher
yuddhe priya-cikérñavaù
yotsyamänän—those who
will be fighting; avekñe—let me see; aham—I; ye—who; ete—those; atra—here; samägatäù—assembled; dhärtaräñörasya—the
son of Dhåtaräñöra; durbuddheù—evil-minded; yuddhe—in the fight; priya—well;
cikérñavaù—wishing.
TRANSLATION
Let me see those who have come here to fight, wishing to please
the evil-minded son of Dhåtaräñöra.
PURPORT
It was an open secret that Duryodhana wanted to usurp the kingdom
of the Päëòavas by evil plans, in collaboration with his father, Dhåtaräñöra.
Therefore, all persons who had joined the side of Duryodhana must have been
birds of the same feather. Arjuna wanted to see them in the battlefield before
the fight was begun, just to learn who they were, but he had no intention of
proposing peace negotiations with them. It was also a fact that he wanted to
see them to make an estimate of the strength which he had to face, although he
was quite confident of victory because Kåñëa was sitting by his side.
Bg 1.24
TEXT
24
TEXT
SaÅYa ovac
WvMau¢-ae ôzqke-Xaae Gau@ake-XaeNa >aarTa )
SaeNaYaaeå>aYaaeMaRDYae SQaaPaiYaTva rQaaetaMaMa( )) 24 ))
saïjaya
uväca
evam ukto håñékeço
guòäkeçena bhärata
senayor ubhayor madhye
sthäpayitvä rathottamam
saïjayaù—Saïjaya; uväca—said; evam—thus; uktaù—addressed; håñékeçaù—Lord
Kåñëa; guòäkeçena—by Arjuna; bhärata—O descendant of Bharata; senayoù—of armies; ubhayoù—of
both; madhye—in the midst of; sthäpayitvä—by placing; rathottamam—the
finest chariot.
TRANSLATION
Saïjaya said: O descendant of Bharata, being thus addressed by
Arjuna, Lord Kåñëa drew up the fine chariot in the midst of the armies of both
parties.
PURPORT
In this verse Arjuna is referred to as Guòäkeça. Guòäka means sleep, and one who conquers sleep is
called guòäkeça. Sleep also means ignorance. So
Arjuna conquered both sleep and ignorance because of his friendship with Kåñëa.
As a great devotee of Kåñëa, he could not forget Kåñëa even for a moment,
because that is the nature of a devotee. Either in waking or in sleep, a
devotee of the Lord can never be free from thinking of Kåñëa’s name, form,
quality and pastimes. Thus a devotee of Kåñëa can conquer both sleep and
ignorance simply by thinking of Kåñëa constantly. This is called Kåñëa
consciousness, or samädhi. As Håñékeça, or the
director of the senses and mind of every living entity, Kåñëa could understand
Arjuna’s purpose in placing the chariot in the midst of the armies. Thus He did
so, and spoke as follows.
Bg 1.25
TEXT
25
TEXT
>aqZMad]ae<aPa[Mau%Ta"
SaveRza& c Mahqi+aTaaMa( )
ovac PaaQaR PaXYaETaaNSaMaveTaaNku-æiNaiTa )) 25 ))
bhéñma-droëa-pramukhataù
sarveñäà ca mahé-kñitäm
uväca pärtha paçyaitän
samavetän kurün iti
bhéñma—Grandfather
Bhéñma; droëa—the teacher Droëa; pramukhataù—in the front of; sarveñäm—all;
ca—also; mahékñitäm—chiefs
of the world; uväca—said; pärtha—O
Pärtha (son of Påthä); paçya—just behold; etän—all of them; samavetän—assembled;
kurün—all the members of the Kuru dynasty; iti—thus.
TRANSLATION
In the presence of Bhéñma, Droëa and all other chieftains of the
world, Håñékeça, the Lord, said, Just behold, Pärtha, all the Kurus who are
assembled here.
PURPORT
As the Supersoul of all living entities, Lord Kåñëa could
understand what was going on in the mind of Arjuna. The use of the word
Håñékeça in this connection indicates that He knew everything. And the word
Pärtha, or the son of Kunté or Påthä, is also similarly significant in
reference to Arjuna. As a friend, He wanted to inform Arjuna that because
Arjuna was the son of Påthä, the sister of His own father Vasudeva, He had
agreed to be the charioteer of Arjuna. Now what did Kåñëa mean when He told
Arjuna to “behold the Kurus”? Did Arjuna want to stop there and not fight?
Kåñëa never expected such things from the son of His aunt Påthä. The mind of
Arjuna was thus predicated by the Lord in friendly joking.
Bg 1.26
TEXT
26
TEXT
Ta}aaPaXYaiTSQaTaaNPaaQaR"
iPaTa›NaQa iPaTaaMahaNa( )
AacaYaaRNMaaTaul/aN>a]aTa›NPau}aaNPaaE}aaNSa%q„&STaQaa )
ìéuraNSauôdêEv SaeNaYaaeå>aYaaeriPa )) 26 ))
taträpaçyat sthitän pärthaù
pitèn atha pitämahän
äcäryän mätulän bhrätèn
puträn pauträn sakhéàs tathä
çvaçurän suhådaç caiva
senayor ubhayor api
tatra—there; apaçyat—he could see; sthitän—standing;
pärthaù—Arjuna; pitèn—fathers;
atha—also; pitämahän—grandfathers;
äcäryän—teachers; mätulän—maternal
uncles; bhrätèn—brothers; puträn—sons
; pauträn—grandsons; sakhén—friends;
tathä—too, çvaçurän—fathers-in-law;
suhådaù—wellwishers; ca—also;
eva—certainly; senayoù—of
the armies; ubhayoù—of both parties; api—including.
TRANSLATION
There Arjuna could see, within the midst of the armies of both
parties, his fathers, grandfathers, teachers, maternal uncles, brothers, sons,
grandsons, friends, and also his father-in-law and well-wishers—all present
there.
PURPORT
On the battlefield Arjuna could see all kinds of relatives. He
could see persons like Bhüriçravä, who were his father’s contemporaries, grandfathers
Bhéñma and Somadatta, teachers like Droëäcärya and Kåpäcärya, maternal uncles
like Çalya and Çakuni, brothers like Duryodhana, sons like Lakñmaëa, friends
like Açvatthämä, well-wishers like Kåtavarmä, etc. He could see also the armies
which contained many of his friends.
Bg 1.27
TEXT
27
TEXT
TaaNSaMaq+Ya Sa
k-aENTaeYa" SavaRNbNDaUNaviSQaTaaNa( )
k*-PaYaa ParYaaivíae ivzqdiàdMab]vqTa( )) 27 ))
tän samékñya sa kaunteyaù
sarvän bandhün avasthitän
kåpayä parayäviñöo
viñédann idam abravét
tän—all of them;
samékñya—after seeing; saù—he;
kaunteyaù—the son of Kunté; sarvän—all kinds of; bandhün—relatives;
avasthitän—situated; kåpayä—by
compassion; parayä—of a high grade; äviñöaù—overwhelmed by; viñédan—while
lamenting; idam—thus; abravét—spoke.
TRANSLATION
When the son of Kunté, Arjuna, saw all these different grades of
friends and relatives, he became overwhelmed with compassion and spoke thus:
Bg 1.28
TEXT
28
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac
d*îeMa& SvJaNa& k*-Z<a YauYauTSau& SaMauPaiSQaTaMa( )
SaqdiNTa MaMa Gaa}aai<a Mau%& c PairéuZYaiTa )) 28 ))
arjuna
uväca
dåñövemaà sva-janaà kåñëa
yuyutsuà samupasthitam
sédanti mama gäträëi
mukhaà ca pariçuñyati
arjunaù—Arjuna; uväca—said; dåñövä—after
seeing; imam—all these; svajanam—kinsmen;
kåñëa—O Kåñëa; yuyutsum—all
in fighting spirit; samupasthitam—all present; sédanti—quivering; mama—my;
gäträëi—limbs of the body; mukham—mouth; ca—also; pariçuñyati—drying up.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said: My dear Kåñëa, seeing my friends and relatives
present before me in such a fighting spirit, I feel the limbs of my body
quivering and my mouth drying up.
PURPORT
Any man who has genuine devotion to the Lord has all the good
qualities which are found in godly persons or in the demigods, whereas the
nondevotee, however advanced he may be in material qualifications by education
and culture, lacks in godly qualities. As such, Arjuna, just after seeing his
kinsmen, friends and relatives on the battlefield, was at once overwhelmed by
compassion for them who had so decided to fight amongst themselves. As far as
his soldiers were concerned, he was sympathetic from the beginning, but he felt
compassion even for the soldiers of the opposite party, foreseeing their
imminent death. And so thinking, the limbs of his body began to quiver, and his
mouth became dry. He was more or less astonished to see their fighting spirit.
Practically the whole community, all blood relatives of Arjuna, had come to
fight with him. This overwhelmed a kind devotee like Arjuna. Although it is not
mentioned here, still one can easily imagine that not only were Arjuna’s bodily
limbs quivering and his mouth drying up, but that he was also crying out of
compassion. Such symptoms in Arjuna were not due to weakness but to his
softheartedness, a characteristic of a pure devotee of the Lord. It is said
therefore:
yasyästi bhaktir bhagavaty akiïcanä
sarvair guëais tatra samäsate suräù
haräv abhaktasya kuto mahad-guëä
mano-rathenäsati dhävato bahiù
“One who has unflinching devotion for the Personality of Godhead
has all the good qualities of the demigods. But one who is not a devotee of the
Lord has only material qualifications that are of little value. This is because
he is hovering on the mental plane and is certain to be attracted by the
glaring material energy.” (Bhäg. 5.18.12)
Bg 1.29
TEXT
29
TEXT
vePaQauê Xarqre
Mae raeMahzRê JaaYaTae )
Gaa<@qv& ó&SaTae hSTaatvKcEv PairdùTae )) 29 ))
vepathuç ca çarére me
roma-harñaç ca jäyate
gäëòévaà sraàsate hastät
tvak caiva paridahyate
vepathuù—trembling of
the body; ca—also; çarére—on
the body; me—my;
roma-harñaù—standing of hair on end; ca—also;
jäyate—is taking place; gäëòévam—the
bow of Arjuna; sraàsate—is slipping; hastät—from the hands; tvak—skin;
ca—also; eva—certainly;
paridahyate—burning.
TRANSLATION
My whole body is trembling, and my hair is standing on end. My bow
Gäëòéva is slipping from my hand, and my skin is burning.
PURPORT
There are two kinds of trembling of the body, and two kinds of
standings of the hair on end. Such phenomena occur either in great spiritual
ecstasy or out of great fear under material conditions. There is no fear in
transcendental realization. Arjuna’s symptoms in this situation are out of
material fear—namely, loss of life. This is evident from other symptoms also;
he became so impatient that his famous bow Gäëòéva was slipping from his hands,
and, because his heart was burning within him, he was feeling a burning
sensation of the skin. All these are due to a material conception of life.
Bg 1.30
TEXT
30
TEXT
Na c
Xa¥-aeMYavSQaaTau& >a]MaTaqv c Mae MaNa" )
iNaiMataaiNa c PaXYaaiMa ivParqTaaiNa ke-Xav )) 30 ))
na ca çaknomy avasthätuà
bhramatéva ca me manaù
nimittäni ca paçyämi
viparétäni keçava
na—nor; ca—also; çaknomi—am I
able; avasthätum—to stay; bhramati—forgetting;
iva—as; ca—and; me—my; manaù—mind; nimittäni—causes; ca—also;
paçyämi—I foresee; viparétäni—just
the opposite; keçava—O killer of the demon Keçé
(Kåñëa).
TRANSLATION
I am now unable to stand here any longer. I am forgetting myself,
and my mind is reeling. I foresee only evil, O killer of the Keçé demon.
PURPORT
Due to his impatience, Arjuna was unable to stay on the
battlefield, and he was forgetting himself on account of the weakness of his
mind. Excessive attachment for material things puts a man in a bewildering
condition of existence. Bhayaà dvitéyäbhiniveçataù:
such fearfulness and loss of mental equilibrium take place in persons who are
too affected by material conditions. Arjuna envisioned only unhappiness in the
battlefield—he would not be happy even by gaining victory over the foe. The
word nimitta is significant. When a man sees only
frustration in his expectations, he thinks, “Why am I here?” Everyone is
interested in himself and his own welfare. No one is interested in the Supreme
Self. Arjuna is supposed to show disregard for self-interest by submission to
the will of Kåñëa, who is everyone’s real self-interest. The conditioned soul
forgets this, and therefore suffers material pains. Arjuna thought that his
victory in the battle would only be a cause of lamentation for him.
Bg 1.31
TEXT
31
TEXT
Na c
é[eYaae_NauPaXYaaiMa hTva SvJaNaMaahve )
Na k-a¿e ivJaYa& k*-Z<a Na c raJYa& Sau%aiNa c )) 31 ))
na ca çreyo ’nupaçyämi
hatvä sva-janam ähave
na käìkñe vijayaà kåñëa
na ca räjyaà sukhäni ca
na—nor; ca—also; çreyaù—good; anupaçyämi—do I foresee; hatvä—by
killing; svajanam—own kinsmen; ähave—in the fight; na—nor;
känkñe—do I desire; vijayam—victory;
kåñëa—O Kåñëa; na—nor;
ca—also; räjyam—kingdom;
sukhäni—happiness thereof; ca—also.
TRANSLATION
I do not see how any good can come from killing my own kinsmen in
this battle, nor can I, my dear Kåñëa, desire any subsequent victory, kingdom,
or happiness.
PURPORT
Without knowing that one’s self-interest is in Viñëu (or Kåñëa),
conditioned souls are attracted by bodily relationships, hoping to be happy in
such situations. Under delusion, they forget that Kåñëa is also the cause of
material happiness. Arjuna appears to have even forgotten the moral codes for a
kñatriya. It is said that two kinds of men,
namely the kñatriya who dies directly in front of
the battlefield under Kåñëa’s personal orders and the person in the renounced
order of life who is absolutely devoted to spiritual culture, are eligible to
enter into the sun-globe, which is so powerful and dazzling. Arjuna is
reluctant even to kill his enemies, let alone his relatives. He thought that by
killing his kinsmen there would be no happiness in his life, and therefore he
was not willing to fight, just as a person who does not feel hunger is not
inclined to cook. He has now decided to go into the forest and live a secluded
life in frustration. But as a kñatriya, he
requires a kingdom for his subsistence, because the kñatriyas
cannot engage themselves in any other occupation. But Arjuna has had no
kingdom. Arjuna’s sole opportunity for gaining a kingdom lay in fighting with
his cousins and brothers and reclaiming the kingdom inherited from his father,
which he does not like to do. Therefore he considers himself fit to go to the
forest to live a secluded life of frustration.
Bg
1.32, Bg 1.33, Bg 1.34, Bg 1.35, Bg 1.32-35
TEXTS
32–35
TEXT
ik&- Naae
raJYaeNa GaaeivNd ik&- >aaeGaEJas„ivTaeNa va )
YaezaMaQaeR k-ax(i+aTa& Naae raJYa& >aaeGaa" Sau%aiNa c )) 32
))
Ta wMae_viSQaTaa YauÖe Pa[a<aa&STYa¤-a DaNaaiNa c )
AacaYaaR" iPaTar" Pau}aaSTaQaEv c iPaTaaMaha" )) 33 ))
MaaTaul/a" ìéura" PaaE}aa" XYaal/a" SaMbiNDaNaSTaQaa )
WTaaà hNTauiMaC^aiMa ganTaae_iPa MaDauSaUdNa )) 34 ))
AiPa }aEl/aeKYaraJYaSYa heTaae" ik&- Nau Mahqk*-Tae )
iNahTYa DaaTaRraí\aà" k-a Pa[qiTa" SYaaÂNaadRNa )) 35 ))
kià no räjyena govinda
kià bhogair jévitena vä
yeñäm arthe käìkñitaà no
räjyaà bhogäù sukhäni ca
ta ime ’vasthitä yuddhe
präëäàs tyaktvä dhanäni ca
äcäryäù pitaraù puträs
tathaiva ca pitämahäù
mätuläù çvaçuräù pauträù
çyäläù sambandhinas tathä
etän na hantum icchämi
ghnato ’pi madhusüdana
api trailokya-räjyasya
hetoù kià nu mahé-kåte
nihatya dhärtaräñörän naù
kä prétiù syäj janärdana
kim—what use; naù—to us; räjyena—is the
kingdom; govinda—O Kåñëa; kim—what;
bhogaiù—enjoyment; jévitena—by
living; vä—either; yeñäm—for
whom; arthe—for the matter of; käìkñitam—desired; naù—our;
räjyam—kingdom; bhogäù—material
enjoyment; sukhäni—all happiness; ca—also; te—all of them; ime—these; avasthitäù—situated;
yuddhe—in this battlefield; präëän—lives; tyaktvä—giving
up; dhanäni—riches; ca—also;
äcäryäù—teachers; pitaraù—fathers;
puträù—sons; tathä—as
well as; eva—certainly; ca—also;
pitämahäù—grandfathers; mätuläù—maternal
uncles; çvaçuräù—fathers-in-law; pauträù—grandsons; çyäläù—brothers-in-law;
sambandhinaù—relatives; tathä—as
well as; etän—all these; na—never;
hantum—for killing; icchämi—do
I wish; ghnataù—being killed; api—even; madhusüdana—O
killer of the demon Madhu (Kåñëa); api—even if; trailokya—of the three worlds; räjyasya—of
the kingdoms; hetoù—in exchange; kim—what to speak of; nu—only;
mahé-kåte—for the sake of earth; nihatya—by killing; dhärtaräñörän—the
sons of Dhåtaräñöra; naù—our; kä—what; prétiù—pleasure;
syät—will there be; janärdana—O
maintainer of all living entities.
TRANSLATION
O Govinda, of what avail to us are kingdoms, happiness or even
life itself when all those for whom we may desire them are now arrayed in this
battlefield? O Madhusüdana, when teachers, fathers, sons, grandfathers,
maternal uncles, fathers-in-law, grandsons, brothers-in-law and all relatives
are ready to give up their lives and properties and are standing before me,
then why should I wish to kill them, though I may survive? O maintainer of all
creatures, I am not prepared to fight with them even in exchange for the three
worlds, let alone this earth.
PURPORT
Arjuna has addressed Lord Kåñëa as Govinda because Kåñëa is the
object of all pleasures for cows and the senses. By using this significant
word, Arjuna indicates what will satisfy his senses. Although Govinda is not
meant for satisfying our senses, if we try to satisfy the senses of Govinda
then automatically our own senses are satisfied. Materially, everyone wants to
satisfy his senses, and he wants God to be the order supplier for such
satisfaction. The Lord will satisfy the senses of the living entities as much as
they deserve, but not to the extent that they may covet. But when one takes the
opposite way—namely, when one tries to satisfy the senses of Govinda without
desiring to satisfy one’s own senses—then by the grace of Govinda all desires
of the living entity are satisfied. Arjuna’s deep affection for community and
family members is exhibited here partly due to his natural compassion for them.
He is therefore not prepared to fight. Everyone wants to show his opulence to
friends and relatives, but Arjuna fears that all his relatives and friends will
be killed in the battlefield, and he will be unable to share his opulence after
victory. This is a typical calculation of material life. The transcendental
life is, however, different. Since a devotee wants to satisfy the desires of
the Lord, he can, Lord willing, accept all kinds of opulence for the service of
the Lord, and if the Lord is not willing, he should not accept a farthing.
Arjuna did not want to kill his relatives, and if there were any need to kill
them, he desired that Kåñëa kill them personally. At this point he did not know
that Kåñëa had already killed them before their coming into the battlefield and
that he was only to become an instrument for Kåñëa. This fact is disclosed in
following chapters. As a natural devotee of the Lord, Arjuna did not like to
retaliate against his miscreant cousins and brothers, but it was the Lord’s
plan that they should all be killed. The devotee of the Lord does not retaliate
against the wrongdoer, but the Lord does not tolerate any mischief done to the
devotee by the miscreants. The Lord can excuse a person on His own account, but
He excuses no one who has done harm to His devotees. Therefore the Lord was
determined to kill the miscreants, although Arjuna wanted to excuse them.
Bg 1.36
TEXT
36
TEXT
PaaPaMaevaé[YaedSMaaNhTvETaaNaaTaTaaiYaNa"
)
TaSMaaàahaR vYa& hNTau& DaaTaRraí\aNSabaNDavaNa( )
SvJaNa& ih k-Qa& hTva Saui%Na" SYaaMa MaaDav )) 36 ))
päpam eväçrayed asmän
hatvaitän ätatäyinaù
tasmän närhä vayaà hantuà
dhärtaräñörän sa-bändhavän
sva-janaà hi kathaà hatvä
sukhinaù syäma mädhava
päpam—vices; eva—certainly; äçrayet—must
take upon; asmän—us; hatvä—by
killing; etän—all these; ätatäyinaù—aggressors;
tasmät—therefore; na—never;
arhäù—deserving; vayam—us; hantum—to kill; dhärtaräñörän—the
sons of Dhåtaräñöra; svabändhavän—along with
friends; svajanam—kinsmen; hi—certainly; katham—how;
hatvä—by killing; sukhinaù—happy;
syäma—become; mädhava—O
Kåñëa, husband of the goddess of fortune.
TRANSLATION
Sin will overcome us if we slay such aggressors. Therefore it is
not proper for us to kill the sons of Dhåtaräñöra and our friends. What should
we gain, O Kåñëa, husband of the goddess of fortune, and how could we be happy
by killing our own kinsmen?
PURPORT
According to Vedic injunctions there are six kinds of aggressors:
1) a poison giver, 2) one who sets fire to the house, 3) one who attacks with
deadly weapons, 4) one who plunders riches, 5) one who occupies another’s land,
and 6) one who kidnaps a wife. Such aggressors are at once to be killed, and no
sin is incurred by killing such aggressors. Such killing of aggressors is quite
befitting for any ordinary man, but Arjuna was not an ordinary person. He was
saintly by character, and therefore he wanted to deal with them in saintliness.
This kind of saintliness, however, is not for a kñatriya.
Although a responsible man in the administration of a state is required
to be saintly, he should not be cowardly. For example, Lord Räma was so saintly
that people were anxious to live in His kingdom, (Räma-räjya),
but Lord Räma never showed any cowardice. Rävaëa was an aggressor
against Räma because he kidnapped Räma’s wife, Sétä, but Lord Räma gave him
sufficient lessons, unparalleled in the history of the world. In Arjuna’s case,
however, one should consider the special type of aggressors, namely his own
grandfather, own teacher, friends, sons, grandsons, etc. Because of them,
Arjuna thought that he should not take the severe steps necessary against
ordinary aggressors. Besides that, saintly persons are advised to forgive. Such
injunctions for saintly persons are more important than any political
emergency. Arjuna considered that rather than kill his own kinsmen for
political reasons, it would be better to forgive them on grounds of religion and
saintly behavior. He did not, therefore, consider such killing profitable
simply for the matter of temporary bodily happiness. After all, kingdoms and
pleasures derived therefrom are not permanent, so why should he risk his life
and eternal salvation by killing his own kinsmen? Arjuna’s addressing of Kåñëa
as “Mädhava,” or the husband of the goddess of fortune, is also significant in
this connection. He wanted to point out to Kåñëa that, as husband of the
goddess of fortune, He should not have to induce Arjuna to take up a matter
which would ultimately bring about misfortune. Kåñëa, however, never brings
misfortune to anyone, to say nothing of His devotees.
Bg
1.37, Bg 1.38, Bg 1.37-38
TEXTS
37–38
TEXT
YaÛPYaeTae Na
PaXYaiNTa l/ae>aaePahTaceTaSa" )
ku-l/+aYak*-Ta& daez& iMa}ad]aehe c PaaTak-Ma( )) 37 ))
k-Qa& Na jeYaMaSMaai>a" PaaPaadSMaaiàviTaRTauMa( )
ku-l/+aYak*-Ta& daez& Pa[PaXYaiÙJaRNaadRNa )) 38 ))
yady apy ete na paçyanti
lobhopahata-cetasaù
kula-kñaya-kåtaà doñaà
mitra-drohe ca pätakam
kathaà na jïeyam asmäbhiù
päpäd asmän nivartitum
kula-kñaya-kåtaà doñaà
prapaçyadbhir janärdana
yadi—if; api—certainly; ete—they; na—do not; paçyanti—see; lobha—greed; upahata—overpowered;
cetasaù—the hearts; kula-kñaya—in
killing the family; kåtam—done; doñam—fault; mitra-drohe—quarreling
with friends; ca—also; pätakam—sinful
reactions; katham—why; na—shall
not; jïeyam—know this; asmäbhiù—by
us; päpät—from sins; asmät—ourselves;
nivartitum—to cease; kula-kñaya—the
destruction of a dynasty; kåtam—by so doing; doñam—crime; prapaçyadbhiù—by
those who can see; janärdana—O Kåñëa.
TRANSLATION
O Janärdana, although these men, overtaken by greed, see no fault
in killing one’s family or quarreling with friends, why should we, with
knowledge of the sin, engage in these acts?
PURPORT
A kñatriya is not supposed to refuse
to battle or gamble when he is so invited by some rival party. Under such
obligation, Arjuna could not refuse to fight because he was challenged by the
party of Duryodhana. In this connection, Arjuna considered that the other party
might be blind to the effects of such a challenge. Arjuna, however, could see
the evil consequences and could not accept the challenge. Obligation is
actually binding when the effect is good, but when the effect is otherwise,
then no one can be bound. Considering all these pros and cons, Arjuna decided
not to fight.
Bg 1.39
TEXT
39
TEXT
ku-l/+aYae
Pa[<aXYaiNTa ku-l/DaMaaR" SaNaaTaNaa" )
DaMaeR Naíe ku-l&/ k*-TòMaDaMaaeR_i>a>avTYauTa )) 39 ))
kula-kñaye praëaçyanti
kula-dharmäù sanätanäù
dharme nañöe kulaà kåtsnam
adharmo ’bhibhavaty uta
kula-kñaye—in
destroying the family; praëaçyanti—becomes
vanquished; kula-dharmäù—the family traditions; sanätanäù—eternal; dharme—in
religion; nañöe—being destroyed; kulam—family; kåtsnam—wholesale;
adharmaù—irreligious; abhibhavati—transforms;
uta—it is said.
TRANSLATION
With the destruction of dynasty, the eternal family tradition is
vanquished, and thus the rest of the family becomes involved in irreligious
practice.
PURPORT
In the system of the varëäçrama
institution there are many principles of religious traditions to help members
of the family grow properly and attain spiritual values. The elder members are
responsible for such purifying processes in the family, beginning from birth to
death. But on the death of the elder members, such family traditions of
purification may stop, and the remaining younger family members may develop
irreligious habits and thereby lose their chance for spiritual salvation.
Therefore, for no purpose should the elder members of the family be slain.
Bg 1.40
TEXT
40
TEXT
ADaMaaRi>a>avaTk*-Z<a
Pa[duZYaiNTa ku-l/iñYa" )
ñqzu duíaSau vaZ<aeRYa JaaYaTae v<aRSaªr" )) 40 ))
adharmäbhibhavät kåñëa
praduñyanti kula-striyaù
stréñu duñöäsu värñëeya
jäyate varëa-saìkaraù
adharma—irreligion; abhibhavät—having been predominant; kåñëa—O Kåñëa; praduñyanti—become
polluted; kula-striyaù—family ladies; stréñu —of the womanhood; duñöäsu—being
so polluted; värñëeya—O descendant of Våñëi; jäyate—it so becomes; varëa-saìkaraù—unwanted
progeny.
TRANSLATION
When irreligion is prominent in the family, O Kåñëa, the women of
the family become corrupt, and from the degradation of womanhood, O descendant
of Våñëi, comes unwanted progeny.
PURPORT
Good population in human society is the basic principle for peace,
prosperity and spiritual progress in life. The varëäçrama
religion’s principles were so designed that the good population would
prevail in society for the general spiritual progress of state and community.
Such population depends on the chastity and faithfulness of its womanhood. As
children are very prone to be misled, women are similarly very prone to
degradation. Therefore, both children and women require protection by the elder
members of the family. By being engaged in various religious practices, women
will not be misled into adultery. According to Cäëakya Paëòit, women are
generally not very intelligent and therefore not trustworthy. So, the different
family traditions of religious activities should always engage them, and thus
their chastity and devotion will give birth to a good population eligible for
participating in the varëäçrama system. On the
failure of such varëäçrama-dharma, naturally the
women become free to act and mix with men, and thus adultery is indulged in at
the risk of unwanted population. Irresponsible men also provoke adultery in
society, and thus unwanted children flood the human race at the risk of war and
pestilence.
Bg 1.41
TEXT
41
TEXT
Saªrae
Nark-aYaEv ku-l/ganaNaa& ku-l/SYa c )
PaTaiNTa iPaTarae ùeza& lu/áiPa<@aedk-i§-Yaa" )) 41 ))
saìkaro narakäyaiva
kula-ghnänäà kulasya ca
patanti pitaro hy eñäà
lupta-piëòodaka-kriyäù
saìkaraù—such
unwanted children; narakäya—for hellish life; eva—certainly; kula-ghnänäm—of
those who are killers of the family; kulasya—of
the family; ca—also; patanti—fall
down; pitaraù—forefathers; hi—certainly; eñäm—of
them; lupta—stopped; piëòa—offerings;
udaka—water; kriyäù—performance.
TRANSLATION
When there is increase of unwanted population, a hellish situation
is created both for the family and for those who destroy the family tradition.
In such corrupt families, there is no offering of oblations of food and water
to the ancestors.
PURPORT
According to the rules and regulations of fruitive activities,
there is a need to offer periodical food and water to the forefathers of the
family. This offering is performed by worship of Viñëu, because eating the
remnants of food offered to Viñëu can deliver one from all kinds of sinful
actions. Sometimes the forefathers may be suffering from various types of sinful
reactions, and sometimes some of them cannot even acquire a gross material body
and are forced to remain in subtle bodies as ghosts. Thus, when remnants of prasädam food are offered to forefathers by
descendants, the forefathers are released from ghostly or other kinds of
miserable life. Such help rendered to forefathers is a family tradition, and
those who are not in devotional life are required to perform such rituals. One
who is engaged in the devotional life is not required to perform such actions. Simply
by performing devotional service, one can deliver hundreds and thousands of
forefathers from all kinds of misery. It is stated in the Bhägavatam:
devarñi-bhütäpta-nånäà pitèëäà
na kiìkaro näyamåëé ca räjan
sarvätmanä yaù çaraëaà çaraëyaà
gato mukundaà parihåtya kartam
“Anyone who has taken shelter of the lotus feet of Mukunda, the
giver of liberation, giving up all kinds of obligation, and has taken to the
path in all seriousness, owes neither duties nor obligations to the demigods,
sages, general living entities, family members, humankind or forefathers.” (Bhäg. 11.5.41) Such obligations are automatically
fulfilled by performance of devotional service to the Supreme Personality of
Godhead.
Bg 1.42
TEXT
42
TEXT
daezEreTaE"
ku-l/ganaNaa& v<aRSaªrk-arkE-" )
oTSaaÛNTae JaaiTaDaMaaR" ku-l/DaMaaRê XaaìTaa" )) 42 ))
doñair etaiù kula-ghnänäà
varëa-saìkara-kärakaiù
utsädyante jäti-dharmäù
kula-dharmäç ca çäçvatäù
doñaiù—by such
faults; etaiù—all these; kula-ghnänäm—of
the destroyer of a family; varëa-saìkara—unwanted
children; kärakaiù—by the doers; utsädyante—causes devastation; jäti-dharmäù—community
project; kula-dharmäù—family tradition; ca—also; çäçvatäù—eternal.
TRANSLATION
Due to the evil deeds of the destroyers of family tradition, all
kinds of community projects and family welfare activities are devastated.
PURPORT
The four orders of human society, combined with family welfare
activities as they are set forth by the institution of the sanätana-dharma or varëäçrama-dharma,
are designed to enable the human being to attain his ultimate salvation.
Therefore, the breaking of the sanätana-dharma tradition
by irresponsible leaders of society brings about chaos in that society, and
consequently people forget the aim of life—Viñëu. Such leaders are called
blind, and persons who follow such leaders are sure to be led into chaos.
Bg 1.43
TEXT
43
TEXT
oTSaàku-l/DaMaaR<aa&
MaNauZYaa<aa& JaNaadRNa )
Narke- iNaYaTa& vaSaae >avTaqTYaNauéué[uMa )) 43 ))
utsanna-kula-dharmäëäà
manuñyäëäà janärdana
narake niyataà väso
bhavatéty anuçuçruma
utsanna—spoiled; kula-dharmäëäm—of those who have the family traditions;
manuñyäëäm—of such men; janärdana—O
Kåñëa; narake—in hell; niyatam—always;
väsaù—residence; bhavati—it
so becomes; iti—thus; anuçuçruma—I
have heard by disciplic succession.
TRANSLATION
O Kåñëa, maintainer of the people, I have heard by disciplic
succession that those who destroy family traditions dwell always in hell.
PURPORT
Arjuna bases his argument not on his own personal experience, but
on what he has heard from the authorities. That is the way of receiving real
knowledge. One cannot reach the real point of factual knowledge without being
helped by the right person who is already established in that knowledge. There
is a system in the varëäçrama institution by
which one has to undergo the process of ablution before death for his sinful
activities. One who is always engaged in sinful activities must utilize the
process of ablution called the präyaçcitta. Without
doing so, one surely will be transferred to hellish planets to undergo
miserable lives as the result of sinful activities.
Bg 1.44
TEXT
44
TEXT
Ahae bTa
MahTPaaPa& k-Tau| VYaviSaTaa vYaMa( )
Yad]aJYaSau%l/ae>aeNa hNTau& SvJaNaMauÛTaa" )) 44 ))
aho bata mahat päpaà
kartuà vyavasitä vayam
yad räjya-sukha-lobhena
hantuà sva-janam udyatäù
ahaù—alas; bata—how strange it is; mahat—great;
päpam—sins; kartum—to
perform; vyavasitäù—decided; vayam—we; yat—so that; räjya—kingdom; sukha-lobhena—driven
by greed for royal happiness; hantum—to kill; svajanam—kinsmen; udyatäù—trying
for.
TRANSLATION
Alas, how strange it is that we are preparing to commit greatly
sinful acts, driven by the desire to enjoy royal happiness.
PURPORT
Driven by selfish motives, one may be inclined to such sinful acts
as the killing of one’s own brother, father, or mother. There are many such
instances in the history of the world. But Arjuna, being a saintly devotee of
the Lord, is always conscious of moral principles and therefore takes care to
avoid such activities.
Bg 1.45
TEXT
45
TEXT
Yaid MaaMaPa[Taqk-arMaXañ&
XañPaa<aYa" )
DaaTaRraí\a r<ae hNYauSTaNMae +aeMaTar& >aveTa( )) 45 ))
yadi mäm apratékäram
açastraà çastra-päëayaù
dhärtaräñörä raëe hanyus
tan me kñemataraà bhavet
yadi—even if; mäm—unto me; apratékäram—without
being resistant; açastram—without being fully
equipped; çastra-päëayaù—those with weapons in
hand; dhärtaräñöräù—the sons of Dhåtaräñöra; raëe—in the battlefield; hanyuù—may
kill; tat—that; me—mine;
kñemataram—better; bhavet—become.
TRANSLATION
I would consider it better for the sons of Dhåtaräñöra to kill me
unarmed and unresisting, rather than fight with them.
PURPORT
It is the custom—according to kñatriya fighting
principles—that an unarmed and unwilling foe should not be attacked. Arjuna,
however, in such an enigmatic position, decided he would not fight if he were
attacked by the enemy. He did not consider how much the other party was bent
upon fighting. All these symptoms are due to softheartedness resulting from his
being a great devotee of the Lord.
Bg 1.46
TEXT
46
TEXT
SaÅYa ovac
WvMau¤-aJauRNa" Sa&:Yae rQaaePaSQa oPaaivXaTa( )
ivSa*JYa SaXar& caPa& Xaaek-Sa&ivGanMaaNaSa" )) 46 ))
saïjaya
uväca
evam uktvärjunaù saìkhye
rathopastha upäviçat
visåjya sa-çaraà cäpaà
çoka-saàvigna-mänasaù
saïjayaù—Saïjaya; uväca—said; evam—thus; uktvä—saying; arjunaù—Arjuna;
saìkhye—in the battlefield; ratha—chariot; upasthaù—situated
on; upäviçat—sat down again; visåjya—keeping aside; sa-çaram—along
with arrows; cäpam—the bow; çoka—lamentation; saàvigna—distressed;
mänasaù—within the mind.
TRANSLATION
Saïjaya said: Arjuna, having thus spoken on the battlefield, cast
aside his bow and arrows and sat down on the chariot, his mind overwhelmed with
grief.
PURPORT
While observing the situation of his enemy, Arjuna stood up on the
chariot, but he was so afflicted with lamentation that he sat down again,
setting aside his bow and arrows. Such a kind and softhearted person, in the
devotional service of the Lord, is fit to receive self-knowledge.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the First Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of Observing the Armies on the Battlefield of
Kurukñetra.
Bg 2. Contents of the Gétä Summarized
CHAPTER
TWO
Contents of
the Gétä Summarized
Bg 2.1
TEXT
1
TEXT
SaÅYa ovac
Ta& TaQaa k*-PaYaaivíMaé[uPaU<aaRku-le/+a<aMa( )
ivzqdNTaiMad& vaKYaMauvac MaDauSaUdNa" )) 1 ))
saïjaya
uväca
taà tathä kåpayäviñöam
açru-pürëäkulekñaëam
viñédantam idaà väkyam
uväca madhusüdanaù
saïjayaù uväca—Saïjaya
said; tam—unto Arjuna; tathä—thus;
kåpayä—by compassion; äviñöam—overwhelmed;
açru-pürëa—full of tears; äkula—depressed;
ékñaëam—eyes; viñédantam—lamenting;
idam—this; väkyam—words;
uväca—said; madhusüdanaù—the
killer of Madhu.
TRANSLATION
Saïjaya said: Seeing Arjuna full of compassion and very sorrowful,
his eyes brimming with tears, Madhusüdana, Kåñëa, spoke the following words.
PURPORT
Material compassion, lamentation and tears are all signs of
ignorance of the real self. Compassion for the eternal soul is
self-realization. The word “Madhusüdana” is significant in this verse. Lord
Kåñëa killed the demon Madhu, and now Arjuna wanted Kåñëa to kill the demon of
misunderstanding that had overtaken him in the discharge of his duty. No one
knows where compassion should be applied. Compassion for the dress of a
drowning man is senseless. A man fallen in the ocean of nescience cannot be
saved simply by rescuing his outward dress—the gross material body. One who
does not know this and laments for the outward dress is called a çüdra, or one who laments unnecessarily. Arjuna was a kñatriya, and this conduct was not expected from him.
Lord Kåñëa, however, can dissipate the lamentation of the ignorant man, and for
this purpose the Bhagavad-gétä was sung by Him.
This chapter instructs us in self-realization by an analytical study of the
material body and the spirit soul, as explained by the supreme authority, Lord
Çré Kåñëa. This realization is made possible by working with the fruitive being
situated in the fixed conception of the real self.
Bg 2.2
TEXT
2
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
ku-TaSTva k-XMal/iMad& ivzMae SaMauPaiSQaTaMa( )
ANaaYaRJauíMaSvGYaRMak-IiTaRk-rMaJauRNa )) 2 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
kutas tvä kaçmalam idaà
viñame samupasthitam
anärya-juñöam asvargyam
akérti-karam arjuna
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; kutaù—wherefrom; tvä—unto you; kaçmalam—dirtiness;
idam—this lamentation; viñame—this
hour of crisis; samupasthitam—arrived; anärya—persons who do not know the value of life; juñöam—practiced by; asvargyam—that
which does not lead to higher planets; akérti—infamy;
karam—the cause of; arjuna—O
Arjuna.
TRANSLATION
The Supreme Person [Bhagavän] said: My dear Arjuna, how have these
impurities come upon you? They are not at all befitting a man who knows the
progressive values of life. They do not lead to higher planets, but to infamy.
PURPORT
Kåñëa and the Supreme Personality of Godhead are identical.
Therefore Lord Kåñëa is referred to as “Bhagavän” throughout the Gétä. Bhagavän is the ultimate in the Absolute Truth.
Absolute Truth is realized in three phases of understanding, namely Brahman or
the impersonal all-pervasive spirit; Paramätmä, or the localized aspect of the
Supreme within the heart of all living entities; and Bhagavän, or the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, Lord Kåñëa. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam
this conception of the Absolute Truth is explained thus:
vadanti tat tattva-vidas tattvaà yaj jïänam advayam
brahmeti paramätmeti bhagavän iti çabdyate.
“The Absolute Truth is realized in three phases of understanding
by the knower of the Absolute Truth, and all of them are identical. Such phases
of the Absolute Truth are expressed as Brahman, Paramätmä, and Bhagavän.” (Bhäg. 1.2.11) These three divine aspects can be
explained by the example of the sun, which also has three different aspects,
namely the sunshine, the sun’s surface and the sun planet itself. One who
studies the sunshine only is the preliminary student. One who understands the
sun’s surface is further advanced. And one who can enter into the sun planet is
the highest. Ordinary students who are satisfied by simply understanding the
sunshine—its universal pervasiveness and the glaring effulgence of its
impersonal nature—may be compared to those who can realize only the Brahman
feature of the Absolute Truth. The student who has advanced still further can
know the sun disc, which is compared to knowledge of the Paramätmä feature of
the Absolute Truth. And the student who can enter into the heart of the sun
planet is compared to those who realize the personal features of the Supreme
Absolute Truth. Therefore, the bhaktas, or the
transcendentalists who have realized the Bhagavän feature of the Absolute
Truth, are the topmost transcendentalists, although all students who are
engaged in the study of the Absolute Truth are engaged in the same subject
matter. The sunshine, the sun disc and the inner affairs of the sun planet
cannot be separated from one another, and yet the students of the three
different phases are not in the same category.
The Sanskrit word Bhagavän is
explained by the great authority, Paräçara Muni, the father of Vyäsadeva. The
Supreme Personality who possesses all riches, all strength, all fame, all
beauty, all knowledge and all renunciation is called Bhagavän. There are many
persons who are very rich, very powerful, very beautiful, very famous, very
learned, and very much detached, but no one can claim that he possesses all
riches, all strength, etc., entirely. Only Kåñëa can claim this because He is
the Supreme Personality of Godhead. No living entity, including Brahmä, Lord
Çiva, or Näräyaëa, can possess opulences as fully as Kåñëa. Therefore it is
concluded in the Brahma-saàhitä by Lord Brahmä
himself that Lord Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. No one is equal
to or above Him. He is the primeval Lord, or Bhagavän, known as Govinda, and He
is the supreme cause of all causes.
éçvaraù paramaù kåñëaù sac-cid-änanda-vigrahaù
anädir ädir govindaù sarua-käraëa-käraëam
“There are many personalities possessing the qualities of
Bhagavän, but Kåñëa is the supreme because none can excel Him. He is the
Supreme Person, and His body is eternal, full of knowledge and bliss. He is the
primeval Lord Govinda and the cause of all causes.” (Brahma-saàhitä
5.1)
In the Bhägavatam also there is a
list of many incarnations of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, but Kåñëa is
described as the original Personality of Godhead, from whom many, many
incarnations and Personalities of Godhead expand:
ete cäàça-kaläù puàsaù kåñëas tu bhagavän svayam
indräri-vyäkulaà lokaà måòayanti yuge yuge
“All the lists of the incarnations of Godhead submitted herewith
are either plenary expansions or parts of the plenary expansions of the Supreme
Godhead, but Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself.” (Bhag.
1.3.28)
Therefore, Kåñëa is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead,
the Absolute Truth, the source of both the Supersoul and the impersonal
Brahman.
In the presence of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Arjuna’s lamentation for his kinsmen is certainly unbecoming, and therefore Kåñëa expressed His surprise with the word kutas, “wherefrom.” Such unmanly sentiments were never expected from a person belonging to the civilized class of men known as Äryans. The word äryan is applicable to persons who know the value of life and have a civilization based on spiritual realization. Persons who are led by the material conception of life do not know that the aim of life is realization of the Absolute Truth, Viñëu, or Bhagavän, and they are captivated by the external features of the material world, and therefore they do not know what liberation is. Persons who have no knowledge of liberation from material bondage are called non-Äryans. Although Arjuna was a kñatriya, he was deviating from his prescribed duties by declining to fight. This act of cowardice is described as befitting the non-Äryans. Such deviation from duty does not help one in the progress of spiritual life, nor does it even give one the opportunity to become famous in this world. Lord Kåñëa did not approve of the so-called compassion of Arjuna for his kinsmen.
Bg 2.3
TEXT
3
TEXT
©E-BYa& Maa
SMa GaMa" PaaQaR NaETatvYYauPaPaÛTae )
+aud]& ôdYadaEbRLYa& TYa¤-aeitaï ParNTaPa )) 3 ))
klaibyaà mä sma gamaù pärtha
naitat tvayy upapadyate
kñudraà hådaya-daurbalyaà
tyaktvottiñöha parantapa
klaibyam—impotence; mä—do not; sma—take it; gamaù—go in; pärtha—O son
of Påthä; na—never; etat—like
this; tvayi—unto you; upapadyate—is
befitting; kñudram—very little; hådaya—heart; daurbalyam—weakness;
tyaktvä—giving up; uttiñöha—get
up; parantapa—O chastiser of the enemies.
TRANSLATION
O son of Påthä, do not yield to this degrading impotence. It does
not become you. Give up such petty weakness of heart and arise, O chastiser of
the enemy.
PURPORT
Arjuna was addressed as the “son of Påthä,” who happened to be the
sister of Kåñëa’s father Vasudeva. Therefore Arjuna had a blood relationship
with Kåñëa. If the son of a ksatriya declines to
fight, he is a kñatriya in name only, and if the
son of a brähmaëa acts impiously, he is a brähmaëa in name only. Such kñatriyas
and brähmaëas are unworthy sons of their
fathers; therefore, Kåñëa did not want Arjuna to become an unworthy son of a kñatriya. Arjuna was the most intimate friend of Kåñëa,
and Kåñëa was directly guiding him on the chariot; but in spite of all these
credits, if Arjuna abandoned the battle, he would be committing an infamous
act; therefore Kåñëa said that such an attitude in Arjuna did not fit his
personality. Arjuna might argue that he would give up the battle on the grounds
of his magnanimous attitude for the most respectable Bhéñma and his relatives,
but Kåñëa considered that sort of magnanimity not approved by authority.
Therefore, such magnanimity or so-called nonviolence should be given up by
persons like Arjuna under the direct guidance of Kåñëa.
Bg 2.4
TEXT
4
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac
k-Qa& >aqZMaMah& Sa&:Yae d]ae<a& c MaDauSaUdNa )
wzui>a" Pa[iTaYaaeTSYaaiMa PaUJaahaRvirSaUdNa )) 4 ))
arjuna
uväca
kathaà bhéñmam ahaà saìkhye
droëaà ca madhusüdana
iñubhiù pratiyotsyämi
püjärhäv ari-südana
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna said;
katham—how; bhéñmam—unto
Bhéñma; aham—I; saìkhye—in
the fight; droëam—unto Droëa; ca—also, madhusüdana—O
killer of Madhu; iñubhiù—with arrows; pratiyotsyämi—shall counterattack; püjä-arhau—those who are worshipable; arisüdana—O killer of the enemies.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said: O killer of Madhu [Kåñëa], how can I counterattack
with arrows in battle men like Bhéñma and Droëa, who are worthy of my worship?
PURPORT
Respectable superiors like Bhéñma the grandfather and Droëäcärya
the teacher are always worshipable. Even if they attack, they should not be
counterattacked. It is general etiquette that superiors are not to be offered
even a verbal fight. Even if they are sometimes harsh in behavior, they should
not be harshly treated. Then, how is it possible for Arjuna to counterattack
them? Would Kåñëa ever attack His own grandfather, Ugrasena, or His teacher,
Sändépani Muni? These were some of the arguments by Arjuna to Kåñëa.
Bg 2.5
TEXT
5
TEXT
GauæNahTva ih
MahaNau>aavaNa(
é[eYaae >aae¢u-& >aE+YaMaPaqh
l/aeke- )
hTvaQaRk-aMaa&STau GauæiNahEv
>auÅqYa >aaeGaaNåiDarPa[idGDaaNa(
)) 5 ))
gurün ahatvä hi mahänubhävän
çreyo bhoktuà bhaikñyam apéha loke
hatvärtha-kämäàs tu gurün ihaiva
bhuïjéya bhogän rudhira-pradigdhän
gurün—the
superiors; ahatvä—by killing; hi—certainly; mahä-anubhävän—great
souls; çreyaù—it is better; bhoktum—to enjoy life; bhaikñyam—begging;
api—even; iha—in
this life; loke—in this world; hatvä—killing; artha—gain;
kämän—so desiring; tu—but;
gurün—superiors; iha—in
this world; eva—certainly; bhuïjéya—has to enjoy; bhogän—enjoyable
things; rudhira—blood; pradigdhän—tainted
with.
TRANSLATION
It is better to live in this world by begging than to live at the
cost of the lives of great souls who are my teachers. Even though they are
avaricious, they are nonetheless superiors. If they are killed, our spoils will
be tainted with blood.
PURPORT
According to scriptural codes, a teacher who engages in an
abominable action and has lost his sense of discrimination is fit to be
abandoned. Bhéñma and Droëa were obliged to take the side of Duryodhana because
of his financial assistance, although they should not have accepted such a
position simply on financial considerations. Under the circumstances, they have
lost the respectability of teachers. But Arjuna thinks that nevertheless they
remain his superiors, and therefore to enjoy material profits after killing
them would mean to enjoy spoils tainted with blood.
Bg 2.6
TEXT
6
TEXT
Na cETaiÜÚ"
k-Taràae GarqYaae
YaÜa JaYaeMa Yaid va Naae JaYaeYau"
)
YaaNaev hTva Na iJaJaqivzaMa‚
STae_viSQaTaa" Pa[Mau%e DaaTaRraí\a"
)) 6 ))
na caitad vidmaù kataran no garéyo
yad vä jayema yadi vä no jayeyuù
yän eva hatvä na jijéviñämas
te ’vasthitäù pramukhe dhärtaräñöräù
na—nor; ca—also; etat—this; vidmaù—do know; katarat—which;
naù—us; garéyaù—better;
yat—what; vä—either;
jayema—conquer us; yadi—if;
vä—or; naù—us; jayeyuù—conquer; yän—those;
eva—certainly; hatvä—by
killing; na—never; jijéviñämaù—want
to live; te—all of them; avasthitäù—are
situated; pramukhe—in the front; dhärtaräñöräù—the sons of Dhåtaräñöra.
TRANSLATION
Nor do we know which is better—conquering them or being conquered
by them. The sons of Dhåtaräñöra, whom if we killed we should not care to live,
are now standing before us on this battlefield.
PURPORT
Arjuna did not know whether he should fight and risk unnecessary
violence, although fighting is the duty of the kñatriyas,
or whether he should refrain and live by begging. If he did not conquer
the enemy, begging would be his only means of subsistence. Nor was there
certainty of victory, because either side might emerge victorious. Even if
victory awaited them (and their cause was justified), still, if the sons of
Dhåtaräñöra died in battle, it would be very difficult to live in their
absence. Under the circumstances, that would be another kind of defeat for them.
All these considerations by Arjuna definitely prove that he was not only a
great devotee of the Lord but that he was also highly enlightened and had
complete control over his mind and senses. His desire to live by begging,
although he was born in the royal household, is another sign of detachment. He
was truly virtuous, as these qualities, combined with his faith in the words of
instruction of Çré Kåñëa (his spiritual master), indicate. It is concluded that
Arjuna was quite fit for liberation. Unless the senses are controlled, there is
no chance of elevation to the platform of knowledge, and without knowledge and
devotion there is no chance of liberation. Arjuna was competent in all these
attributes, over and above his enormous attributes in his material relationships.
Bg 2.7
TEXT
7
TEXT
k-aPaR<YadaezaePahTaSv>aav"
Pa*C^aiMa Tva&
DaMaRSaMMaU!ceTaa" )
YaC^\eYa" SYaaiàiêTa& b]Uih TaNMae
iXaZYaSTae_h& XaaiDa Maa&
Tva& Pa[PaàMa( )) 7 ))
kärpaëya-doñopahata-svabhävaù
påcchämi tväà dharma-sammüòha-cetäù
yac chreyaù syän niçcitaà brühi tan me
çiñyas te ’haà çädhi mäà tväà prapannam
kärpaëya—miserly; doña—weakness; upahata—being
inflicted by; svabhävaù—characteristics; påcchämi—I am asking; tväm—unto
You; dharma—religion; saàmüòha—bewildered;
cetäù—in heart; yat—what;
çreyaù—all-good; syät—may
be; niçcitam—confidently; brühi—tell;
tat—that; me—unto
me; çiñyaù—disciple; te—Your;
aham—I am; çädhi—just
instruct; mäm—me; tväm—unto
You; prapannam—surrendered.
TRANSLATION
Now I am confused about my duty and have lost all composure
because of weakness. In this condition I am asking You to tell me clearly what
is best for me. Now I am Your disciple, and a soul surrendered unto You. Please
instruct me.
PURPORT
By nature’s own way the complete system of material activities is a
source of perplexity for everyone. In every step there is perplexity, and
therefore it behooves one to approach a bona fide spiritual master who can give
one proper guidance for executing the purpose of life. All Vedic literatures
advise us to approach a bona fide spiritual master to get free from the
perplexities of life which happen without our desire. They are like a forest
fire that somehow blazes without being set by anyone. Similarly, the world
situation is such that perplexities of life automatically appear, without our
wanting such confusion. No one wants fire, and yet it takes place, and we
become perplexed. The Vedic wisdom therefore advises that in order to solve the
perplexities of life and to understand the science of the solution, one must approach
a spiritual master who is in the disciplic succession. A person with a bona
fide spiritual master is supposed to know everything. One should not,
therefore, remain in material perplexities but should approach a spiritual
master. This is the purport of this verse.
Who is the man in material perplexities? It is he who does not understand the problems of life. In the Garga Upaniñad the perplexed man is described as follows:
yo vä etad akñaraà gärgy aviditväsmäl lokät praiti sa kåpaëaù
“He is a miserly man who does not solve the problems of life as a
human and who thus quits this world like the cats and dogs, without
understanding the science of self-realization.” This human form of life is a
most valuable asset for the living entity who can ultilize it for solving the
problems of life; therefore, one who does not utilize this opportunity properly
is a miser. On the other hand, there is the brähmaëa, or
he who is intelligent enough to utilize this body to solve all the problems of
life.
The kåpaëas, or miserly persons,
waste their time in being overly affectionate for family, society, country,
etc., in the material conception of life. One is often attached to family life,
namely to wife, children and other members, on the basis of “skin disease.” The
kåpaëa thinks that he is able to protect his
family members from death; or the kåpaëa thinks
that his family or society can save him from the verge of death. Such family
attachment can be found even in the lower animals who take care of children
also. Being intelligent, Arjuna could understand that his affection for family
members and his wish to protect them from death were the causes ot his
perplexities. Although he could understand that his duty to fight was awaiting
him, still, on account of miserly weakness, he could not discharge the duties.
He is therefore asking Lord Kåñëa, the supreme spiritual master, to make a
definite solution. He offers himself to Kåñëa as a disciple. He wants to stop
friendly talks. Talks between the master and the disciple are serious, and now
Arjuna wants to talk very seriously before the recognized spiritual master.
Kåñëa is therefore the original spiritual master of the science of Bhagavad-gétä, and Arjuna is the first disciple for
understanding the Gétä. How Arjuna understands the
Bhagavad-gétä is stated in the Gétä itself. And yet foolish mundane scholars explain
that one need not submit to Kåñëa as a person, but to “the unborn within
Kåñëa.” There is no difference between Kåñëa’s within and without. And one who
has no sense of this understanding is the greatest fool in trying to understand
Bhagavad-gétä.
Bg 2.8
TEXT
8
TEXT
Na ih
Pa[PaXYaaiMa MaMaaPaNauÛa‚
ÛC^aek-MauC^aez<aiMaiNd]Yaa<aaMa(
)
AvaPYa >aUMaavSaPaÒMa*Ö&
raJYa& Saura<aaMaiPa
caiDaPaTYaMa( )) 8 ))
na hi prapaçyämi mamäpanudyäd
yac chokam ucchoñaëam indriyäëäm
aväpya bhümäv asapatnam åddhaà
räjyaà suräëäm api cädhipatyam
na—do not; hi—certainly; prapaçyämi—I
see; mama—my; apanudyät—they
can drive away; yat—that; çokam—lamentation;
ucchoñaëam—drying up;
indriyäëäm—of the senses; aväpya—achieving;
bhümau—on the earth; asapatnam—without
rival; åddham—prosperous; räjyam—kingdom;
suräëäm—of the demigods; api—even;
ca—also; ädhipatyam—supremacy.
TRANSLATION
I can find no means to drive away this grief which is drying up my
senses. I will not be able to destroy it even if I win an unrivalled kingdom on
the earth with sovereignty like the demigods in heaven.
PURPORT
Although Arjuna was putting forward so many arguments based on
knowledge of the principles of religion and moral codes, it appears that he was
unable to solve his real problem without the help of the spiritual master, Lord
Çré Kåñëa. He could understand that his so-called knowledge was useless in
driving away his problems, which were drying up his whole existence; and it was
impossible for him to solve such perplexities without the help of a spiritual
master like Lord Kåñëa. Academic knowledge, scholarship, high position, etc.,
are all useless in solving the problems of life; help can only be given by a
spiritual master like Kåñëa. Therefore, the conclusion is that a spiritual
master who is one hundred percent Kåñëa conscious is the bona fide spiritual
master, for he can solve the problems of life. Lord Caitanya said that one who
is master in the science of Kåñëa consciousness, regardless of his social
position, is the real spiritual master.
kibävipra, kibä nyäsé, çüdra kene naya
yei kåñëa-tattva-vettä, sei ‘guru’ haya.
(Caitanya-caritämåta, Madhya 8.127)
“It does not matter whether a person is a vipra
[learned scholar in Vedic wisdom] or is born in a lower family, or is in
the renounced order of life—if he is master in the science of Kåñëa, he is the
perfect and bona fide spiritual master.” So without being a master in the
science of Kåñëa consciousness, no one is a bona fide spiritual master. It is
also said in Vedic literatures:
ñaö-karma-nipuëo vipro mantra-tantra-viçäradaù
avaiñëavo gurur na syäd vaiñëavaù çvapaco guruù
“A scholarly brähmaëa, expert in all
subjects of Vedic knowledge, is unfit to become a spiritual master without
being a Vaiñëava, or expert in the science of Kåñëa consciousness. But a person
born in a family of a lower caste can become a spiritual master if he is a
Vaiñëava, or Kåñëa conscious.”
The problems of material existence—birth, old age, disease and
death—cannot be counteracted by accumulation of wealth and economic
development. In many parts of the world there are states which are replete with
all facilities of life, which are full of wealth, and economically developed,
yet the problems of material existence are still present. They are seeking
peace in different ways, but they ean achieve real happiness only if they
consult Kåñëa, or the Bhagavad-gétä and Çrémad-Bhägavatam—which constitute the science of
Kåñëa—or the bona fide representative of Kåñëa, the man in Kåñëa consciousness.
If economic development and material comforts could drive away one’s lamentations for family, social, national or international inebrieties, then Arjuna would not have said that even an unrivalled kingdom on earth or supremacy like that of the demigods in the heavenly planets would not be able to drive away his lamentations. He sought, therefore, refuge in Kåñëa consciousness, and that is the right path for peace and harmony. Economic development or supremacy over the world can be finished at any moment by the cataclysms of material nature. Even elevation into a higher planetary situation, as men are now seeking a place on the moon planet, can also be finished at one stroke. The Bhagavad-gétä confirms this: kñéëe puëye martyalokaà viçanti “When the results of pious activities are finished, one falls down again from the peak of happiness to the lowest status of life.” Many politicians of the world have fallen down in that way. Such downfalls only constitute more causes for lamentation.
Therefore, if we want to curb lamentation for good, then we have to take shelter of Kåñëa, as Arjuna is seeking to do. So Arjuna asked Kåñëa to solve his problem definitely, and that is the way of Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 2.9
TEXT
9
TEXT
SaÅYa ovac
WvMau¤-a ôzqke-Xa& Gau@ake-Xa" ParNTaPa" )
Na YaaeTSYa wiTa GaaeivNdMau¤-a TaUZ<aq& b>aUv h )) 9 ))
saïjaya
uväca
evam uktvä håñékeçaà
guòäkeçaù parantapaù
na yotsya iti govindam
uktvä tüñëéà babhüva ha
saïjayaù uväca—Saïjaya
said; evam—thus; uktvä—speaking;
håñékeçam—unto Kåñëa, the master of the senses; guòäkeçaù—Arjuna, the master at curbing ignorance; parantapaù—the chastiser of the enemies; na yotsye—I shall not fight; iti—thus;
govindam—unto Kåñëa, the giver of pleasure; uktvä—saying; tüñëém—silent;
babhüva—became; ha—certainly.
TRANSLATION
Saïjaya said: Having spoken thus, Arjuna, chastiser of enemies,
told Kåñëa, “Govinda, I shall not fight,” and fell silent.
PURPORT
Dhåtaräñöra must have been very glad to understand that Arjuna was
not going to fight and was instead leaving the battlefield for the begging
profession. But Saïjaya disappointed him again in relating that Arjuna was
competent to kill his enemies (parantapaù). Although
Arjuna was for the time being overwhelmed with false grief due to family
affection, he surrendered unto Kåñëa, the supreme spiritual master, as a
disciple. This indicated that he would soon be free from the false lamentation
resulting from family affection and would be enlightened with perfect knowledge
of self-realization, or Kåñëa consciousness, and would then surely fight. Thus
Dhåtaräñöra’s joy would be frustrated, since Arjuna would be enlightened. by
Kåñëa and would fight to the end.
Bg 2.10
TEXT
10
TEXT
TaMauvac
ôzqke-Xa" Pa[hSaiàv >aarTa
SaeNaYaaeå>aYaaeMaRDYae ivzqdNTaiMad& vc" )) 10 ))
tam
uväca håñékeçaù
prahasann iva bhärata
senayor ubhayor madhye
viñédantam idaà vacaù
tam—unto him; uväca—said; håñékeçaù—the
master of the senses, Kåñëa; prahasan—smiling; iva—like that; bhärata—O
Dhåtaräñöra, descendant of Bharata; senayoù—of
the armies; ubhayoù—of both parties; madhye—between; viñédantam—unto
the lamenting one; idam—the following; vacaù—words.
TRANSLATION
O descendant of Bharata, at that time Kåñëa, smiling, in the midst
of both the armies, spoke the following words to the grief-stricken Arjuna.
PURPORT
The talk was going on between intimate friends, namely the
Håñékeça and the Guòäkeça. As friends, both of them were on the same level, but
one of them voluntarily became a student of the other. Kåñëa was smiling
because a friend had chosen to become a disciple. As Lord of all, He is always
in the superior position as the master of everyone, and yet the Lord accepts
one who wishes to be a friend, a son, a lover or a devotee, or who wants Him in
such a role. But when He was accepted as the master, He at once assumed the
role and talked with the disciple like the master—with gravity, as it is
required. It appears that the talk between the master and the disciple was
openly exchanged in the presence of both armies so that all were benefitted. So
the talks of Bhagavad-gétä are not for any
particular person, society, or community, but they are for all, and friends or
enemies are equally entitled to hear them.
Bg 2.11
TEXT
11
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
AXaaeCYaaNaNvXaaecSTv& Pa[javada&ê >aazSae )
GaTaaSaUNaGaTaaSaU&ê NaaNauXaaeciNTa Pai<@Taa" )) 11 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
açocyän anvaçocas tvaà
prajïä-vädäàç ca bhäñase
gatäsün agatäsüàç ca
nänuçocanti paëòitäù
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; açocyän—that which
is not worthy of lamentation; anvaçocaù—you are
lamenting; tvam—you;
prajïä-vädäù—learned talks; ca—also; bhäñase—speaking; gata—lost;
asün—life; agata—not
past; asün—life; ca—also;
na—never; anuçocanti—lament;
paëòitäù—the learned.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: While speaking learned words, you are
mourning for what is not worthy of grief. Those who are wise lament neither for
the living nor the dead.
PURPORT
The Lord at once took the position of the teacher and chastised
the student, calling him, indirectly, a fool. The Lord said, you are talking
like a learned man, but you do not know that one who is learned—one who knows
what is body and what is soul—does not lament for any stage of the body,
neither in the living nor in the dead condition. As it will be explained in
later chapters, it will be clear that knowledge means to know matter and spirit
and the controller of both. Arjuna argued that religious principles should be
given more importance than politics or sociology, but he did not know that
knowledge of matter, soul and the Supreme is even more important than religious
formularies. And, because he was lacking in that knowledge, he should not have
posed himself as a very learned man. As he did not happen to be a very learned
man, he was consequently lamenting for something which was unworthy of
lamentation. The body is born and is destined to be vanquished today or
tomorrow; therefore the body is not as important as the soul. One who knows
this is actually learned, and for him there is no cause for lamentation,
regardless of the condition of the material body.
Bg 2.12
TEXT
12
TEXT
NaTvevah&
JaaTau NaaSa& Na Tv& NaeMae JaNaaiDaPaa" )
Na cEv Na>aivZYaaMa" SaveR vYaMaTa" ParMa( )) 12 ))
na tv evähaà jätu näsaà
na tvaà neme janädhipäù
na caiva na bhaviñyämaù
sarve vayam ataù param
na—never; tu—but; eva—certainly; aham—I; jätu—become; na—never; äsam—existed; na—it is not so; tvam—yourself;
na—not; ime—all
these; janädhipäù—kings; na—never;
ca—also; eva—certainly;
na—not like that; bhaviñyämaù—shall
exist; sarve—all of us; vayam—we;
ataù param—hereafter.
TRANSLATION
Never was there a time when I did not exist, nor you, nor all
these kings; nor in the future shall any of us cease to be.
PURPORT
In the Vedas, in the Kaöha Upaniñad as well as in the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad, it is said that the Supreme
Personality of Godhead is the maintainer of innumerable living entities, in
terms of their different situations according to individual work and reaction
of work. That Supreme Personality of Godhead is also, by His plenary portions,
alive in the heart of every living entity. Only saintly persons who can see,
within and without, the same Supreme Lord, can actually attain to perfect and
eternal peace.
nityo nityänäà cetanaç cetanänäm
eko bahünäà yo vidadhäti kämän
tam ätmasthaà ye ’nupaçyanti dhéräs
teñäà çäntiù çäçvaté netareñäm.
(Kaöha 2.2.13)
The same Vedic truth given to Arjuna is given to all persons in
the world who pose themselves as very learned but factually have but a poor
fund of knowledge. The Lord says clearly that He Himself, Arjuna, and all the
kings who are assembled on the battlefield, are eternally individual beings and
that the Lord is eternally the maintainer of the individual living entities
both in their conditioned as well as in their liberated situations. The Supreme
Personality of Godhead is the supreme individual person, and Arjuna, the Lord’s
eternal associate, and all the kings assembled there are individual, eternal
persons. It is not that they did not exist as individuals in the past, and it
is not that they will not remain eternal persons. Their individuality existed
in the past, and their individuality will continue in the future without
interruption. Therefore, there is no cause for lamentation for anyone.
The Mäyävädé theory that after liberation the individual soul,
separated by the covering of mäyä or illusion, will merge into the impersonal
Brahman and lose its individual existence is not supported herein by Lord
Kåñëa, the supreme authority. Nor is the theory that we only think of
individuality in the conditioned state supported herein. Kåñëa clearly says
herein that in the future also the individuality of the Lord and others, as it
is confirmed in the Upaniñads, will continue
eternally. This statement of Kåñëa is authoritative because Kåñëa cannot be
subject to illusion. If individuality is not a fact, then Kåñëa would not have
stressed it so much—even for the future. The Mäyävädé may argue that the
individuality spoken of by Kåñëa is not spiritual, but material. Even accepting
the argument that the individuality is material, then how can one distinguish
Kåñëa’s individuality? Kåñëa affirms His individuality in the past and confirms
His individuality in the future also. He has confirmed His individuality in
many ways, and impersonal Brahman has been declared to be subordinate to Him.
Kåñëa has maintained spiritual individuality all along; if He is accepted as an
ordinary conditioned soul in individual consciousness, then His Bhagavad-gétä has no value as authoritative scripture.
A common man with all the four defects of human frailty is unable to teach that
which is worth hearing. The Gétä is above such
literature. No mundane book compares with the Bhagavad-gétä.
When one accepts Kåñëa as an ordinary man, the Gétä
loses all importance. The Mäyävädé argues that the plurality mentioned
in this verse is conventional and that it refers to the body. But previous to
this verse such a bodily conception is already condemned. After condemning the
bodily conception of the living entities, how was it possible for Kåñëa to
place a conventional proposition on the body again? Therefore, individuality is
maintained on spiritual grounds and is thus confirmed by great äcäryas like Çré Rämänuja and others. It is clearly
mentioned in many places in the Gétä that this
spiritual individuality is understood by those who are devotees of the Lord.
Those who are envious of Kåñëa as the Supreme Personality of Godhead have no
bona fide access to the great literature. The nondevotee’s approach to the
teachings of the Géta is something like bees
licking on a bottle of honey. One cannot have a taste of honey unless one opens
the bottle. Similarly, the mysticism of the Bhagavad-gétä
can be understood only by devotees, and no one else can taste it, as it
is stated in the Fourth Chapter of the book. Nor can the Gétä be touched by persons who envy the very existence
of the Lord. Therefore, the Mäyävädé explanation of the Gétä
is a most misleading presentation of the whole truth. Lord Caitanya has
forbidden us to read commentations made by the Mäyävädés and warns that one who
takes to such an understanding of the Mäyävädé philosophy loses all power to
understand the real mystery of the Gétä. If
individuality refers to the empirical universe, then there is no need of teaching
by the Lord. The plurality of the individual soul and of the Lord is an eternal
fact, and it is confirmed by the Vedas as above
mentioned.
Bg 2.13
TEXT
13
TEXT
deihNaae_iSMaNYaQaa
dehe k-aEMaar& YaaEvNa& Jara )
TaQaa dehaNTarPa[aiáDasrSTa}a Na MauùiTa )) 13 ))
dehino ’smin yathä dehe
kaumäraà yauvanaà jarä
tathä dehäntara-präptir
dhéras tatra na muhyati
dehinaù—of the
embodied; asmin—in this; yathä—as; dehe—in the body; kaumäram—boyhood;
yauvanam—youth; jarä—old
age; tathä—similarly; dehäntara—transference
of the body; präptiù—achievement; dhéraù—the sober; tatra—thereupon;
na—never; muhyati—deluded.
TRANSLATION
As the embodied soul continually passes, in this body, from
boyhood to youth to old age, the soul similarly passes into another body at
death. The self-realized soul is not bewildered by such a change.
PURPORT
Since every living entity is an individual soul, each is changing
his body every moment, manifesting sometimes as a child, sometimes as a youth,
and sometimes as an old man. Yet the same spirit soul is there and does not
undergo any change. This individual soul finally changes the body at death and
transmigrates to another body; and since it is sure to have another body in the
next birth—either material or spiritual—there was no cause for lamentation by
Arjuna on account of death, neither for Bhéñma nor for Droëa, for whom he was
so much concerned. Rather, he should rejoice for their changing bodies from old
to new ones, thereby rejuvenating their energy. Such changes of body account
for varieties of enjoyment or suffering, according to one’s work in life. So
Bhéñma and Droëa, being noble souls, were surely going to have either spiritual
bodies in the next life, or at least life in heavenly bodies for superior
enjoyment of material existence. So, in either case, there was no cause of
lamentation.
Any man who has perfect knowledge of the constitution of the individual soul, the Supersoul, and nature—both material and spiritual—is called a dhéra or a most sober man. Such a man is never deluded by the change of bodies. The Mäyävädé theory of oneness of the spirit soul cannot be entertained on the ground that spirit soul cannot be cut into pieces as a fragmental portion. Such cutting into different individual souls would make the Supreme cleavable or changeable, against the principle of the Supreme Soul being unchangeable.
As confirmed in the Gétä, the fragmental portions of the Supreme exist
eternally (sanätana) and are called kñara; that is, they have a tendency to fall down into
material nature. These fragmental portions are eternally so, and even after
liberation, the individual soul remains the same—fragmental. But once
liberated, he lives an eternal life in bliss and knowledge with the Personality
of Godhead. The theory of reflection can be applied to the Supersoul who is
present in each and every individual body and is known as the Paramätmä, who is
different from the individual living entity. When the sky is reflected in
water, the reflections represent both the sun and the moon and the stars also.
The stars can be compared to the living entities and the sun or the moon to the
Supreme Lord. The individual fragmental spirit soul is represented by Arjuna,
and the Supreme Soul is the Personality of Godhead Çré Kåñëa. They are not on
the same level, as it will be apparent in the beginning of the Fourth Chapter.
If Arjuna is on the same level with Kåñëa, and Kåñëa is not superior to Arjuna,
then their relationship of instructor and instructed becomes meaningless. If
both of them are deluded by the illusory energy (mäyä), then
there is no need of one being the instructor and the other the instructed. Such
instruction would be useless because, in the clutches of mäyä, no one can be an authoritative instructor. Under
the circumstances, it is admitted that Lord Kåñëa is the Supreme Lord, superior
in position to the living entity, Arjuna, who is a forgotten soul deluded by mäyä.
Bg 2.14
TEXT
14
TEXT
Maa}aaSPaXaaRSTau
k-aENTaeYa XaqTaaeZ<aSau%du"%da" )
AaGaMaaPaaiYaNaae_iNaTYaaSTaa&iSTaiTa+aSv >aarTa )) 14 ))
mäträ-sparçäs tu kaunteya
çétoñëa-sukha-duùkha-däù
ägamäpäyino ’nityäs
täàs titikñasva bhärata
mäträ—sensuous; sparçäù—perception; tu—only;
kaunteya—O son of Kunté; çéta—winter;
uñëa—summer; sukha—happiness;
duùkha-daù—giving pain; ägama—appearing;
apäyinaù—disappearing; anityäù—nonpermanent;
tän—all of them; titikñasva—just
try to tolerate; bhärata—O descendant of the
Bhärata dynasty.
TRANSLATION
O son of Kunté, the nonpermanent appearance of happiness and
distress, and their disappearance in due course, are like the appearance and
disappearance of winter and summer seasons. They arise from sense perception, O
scion of Bharata, and one must learn to tolerate them without being disturbed.
PURPORT
In the proper discharge of duty, one has to learn to tolerate nonpermanent
appearances and disappearances of happiness and distress. According to Vedic
injunction, one has to take his bath early in the morning even during the month
of Mägha (January-February). It is very cold at
that time, but in spite of that a man who abides by the religious principles
does not hesitate to take his bath. Similarly, a woman does not hesitate to
cook in the kitchen in the months of May and June, the hottest part of the
summer season. One has to execute his duty in spite of climatic inconveniences.
Similarly, to fight is the religious principle of the kñatriyas,
and although one has to fight with some friend or relative, one should
not deviate from his prescribed duty. One has to follow the prescribed rules
and regulations of religious principles in order to rise up to the platform of
knowledge because by knowledge and devotion only can one liberate himself from
the clutches of mäyä (illusion).
The two different names of address given to Arjuna are also significant. To address him as Kaunteya signifies his great blood relations from his mother’s side; and to address him as Bhärata signifies his greatness from his father’s side. From both sides he is supposed to have a great heritage. A great heritage brings responsibility in the matter of proper discharge of duties; therefore, he cannot avoid fighting.
Bg 2.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
Ya& ih Na
VYaQaYaNTYaeTae Pauåz& PauåzzR>a )
SaMadu"%Sau%& Daqr& Saae_Ma*TaTvaYa k-LPaTae )) 15 ))
yaà hi na vyathayanty ete
puruñaà puruñarñabha
sama-duùkha-sukhaà dhéraà
so ’måtatväya kalpate
yam—one who; hi—certainly; na—never; vyathayanti—are distressing; ete—all
these; puruñam—to a person; puruñarñabha—is best among men; sama—unaltered;
duùkha—distress; sukham—happiness;
dhéram—patient; saù—he;
amåtatväya—for liberation; kalpate—is considered eligible.
TRANSLATION
O best among men [Arjuna], the person who is not disturbed by
happiness and distress and is steady in both is certainly eligible for
liberation.
PURPORT
Anyone who is steady in his determination for the advanced stage
of spiritual realization and can equally tolerate the onslaughts of distress
and happiness is certainly a person eligible for liberation. In the varëäçrama institution, the fourth stage of life,
namely the renounced order (sannyäsa) is a
painstaking situation. But one who is serious about making his life perfect
surely adopts the sannyäsa order of life in spite
of all difficulties. The difficulties usually arise from having to sever family
relationships, to give up the connection of wife and children. But if anyone is
able to tolerate such difficulties, surely his path to spiritual realization is
complete. Similarly, in Arjuna’s discharge of duties as a kñatriya, he is advised to persevere, even if it is
difficult to fight with his family members or similarly beloved persons. Lord
Caitanya took sannyäsa at the age of twenty-four,
and His dependants, young wife as well as old mother, had no one else to look
after them. Yet for a higher cause He took sannyäsa
and was steady in the discharge of higher duties. That is the way of achieving
liberation from material bondage.
Bg 2.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
NaaSaTaae ivÛTae
>aavae Naa>aavae ivÛTae SaTa" )
o>aYaaeriPa d*íae_NTaSTvNaYaaeSTatvdiXaRi>a" )) 16 ))
näsato vidyate bhävo
näbhävo vidyate sataù
ubhayor api dåñöo ’ntas
tv anayos tattva-darçibhiù
na—never; asataù—of the nonexistent; vidyate—there
is; bhävaù—endurance; na—never;
abhävaù—changing quality; vidyate—there
is; sataù—of the eternal; ubhayoù—of
the two; api—verily; dåñöaù—observed;
antaù—conclusion; tu—but;
anayoù—of them; tattva—truth;
darçibhiù—by the seers.
TRANSLATION
Those who are seers of the truth have concluded that of the
nonexistent there is no endurance, and of the existent there is no cessation.
This seers have concluded by studying the nature of both.
PURPORT
There is no endurance of the changing body. That the body is
changing every moment by the actions and reactions of the different cells is
admitted by modern medical science; and thus growth and old age are taking
place in the body. But the spirit soul exists permanently, remaining the same
despite all changes of the body and the mind. That is the difference between
matter and spirit. By nature, the body is ever changing, and the soul is
eternal. This conclusion is established by all classes of seers of the truth,
both impersonalist and personalist. In the Viñëu Puräëa it
is stated that Viñëu and His abodes all have self-illuminated spiritual
existence. “Jyotéàñi viñëur bhavanäni viñëuù.” The words existent and nonexistent refer only to
spirit and matter. That is the version of all seers of truth.
This is the beginning of the instruction by the Lord to the living entities who are bewildered by the influence of ignorance. Removal of ignorance involves the reestablishment of the eternal relationship between the worshiper and the worshipable and the consequent understanding of the difference between the part and parcel living entities and the Supreme Personality of Godhead. One can understand the nature of the Supreme by thorough study of oneself, the difference between oneself and the Supreme being understood as the relationship between the part and the whole. In the Vedänta-sütras, as well as in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam, the Supreme has been accepted as the origin of all emanations. Such emanations are experienced by superior and inferior natural sequences. The living entities belong to the superior nature, as it will be revealed in the Seventh Chapter. Although there is no difference between the energy and the energetic, the energetic is accepted as the Supreme, and energy or nature is accepted as the subordinate. The living entities, therefore, are always subordinate to the Supreme Lord, as in the case of the master and the servant, or the teacher and the taught. Such clear knowledge is impossible to understand under the spell of ignorance, and to drive away such ignorance the Lord teaches the Bhagavad-gétä for the enlightenment of all living entities for all time.
Bg 2.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
AivNaaiXa Tau
TaiÜiÖ YaeNa SavRiMad& TaTaMa( )
ivNaaXaMaVYaYaSYaaSYa Na k-iêTk-TauRMahRiTa )) 17 ))
avinäçi tu tad viddhi
yena sarvam idaà tatam
vinäçam avyayasyäsya
na kaçcit kartum arhati
avinäçi—imperishable;
tu—but; tat—that; viddhi—know it; yena—by
whom; sarvam—all of the body; idam—this; tatam—widespread;
vinäçam—destruction; avyayasya—of
the imperishable; asya—of it; na kaçcit—no one; kartum—to
do; arhati—able.
TRANSLATION
Know that which pervades the entire body is indestructible. No one
is able to destroy the imperishable soul.
PURPORT
This verse more clearly explains the real nature of the soul,
which is spread all over the body. Anyone can understand what is spread all
over the body: it is consciousness. Everyone is conscious of the pains and
pleasures of the body in part or as a whole. This spreading of consciousness is
limited within one’s own body. The pains and pleasures of one body are unknown
to another. Therefore, each and every body is the embodiment of an individual
soul, and the symptom of the soul’s presence is perceived as individual
consciousness. This soul is described as one ten-thousandth part of the upper
portion of the hair point in size. The Çvetäçvatara
Upaniñad confirms this:
bälägra-çata-bhägasya çatadhä kalpitasya ca
bhägo jévaù sa vijïeyaù sa cänantyäya kalpate.
“When the upper point of a
hair is divided into one hundred parts and again each of such parts is further
divided into one hundred parts, each such part is the measurement of the
dimension of the spirit soul.” (Svet. 5.9)
Similarly, in the Bhägavatam the same version is
stated:
keçägra-çata-bhägasya çatäàçaù sädåçätmakaù
jévaù sükñma-svarupo ’yaà saìkhyätéto hi cit-kaëaù
“There are innumerable particles of spiritual atoms, which are
measured as one ten-thousandth of the upper portion of the hair.”
Therefore, the individual particle of spirit soul is a spiritual
atom smaller than the material atoms, and such atoms are innumerable. This very
small spiritual spark is the basic principle of the material body, and the
influence of such a spiritual spark is spread all over the body as the influence
of the active principle of some medicine spreads throughout the body. This
current of the spirit soul is felt all over the body as consciousness, and that
is the proof of the presence of the soul. Any layman can understand that the
material body minus consciousness is a dead body, and this consciousness cannot
be revived in the body by any means of material administration. Therefore,
consciousness is not due to any amount of material combination, but to the
spirit soul. In the Muëòaka Upaniñad the measurement
of the atomic spirit soul is further explained:
eño ’ëurätmä cetasä veditavyo
yasmin präëaù païcadhä saàviveça
präëaiç cittaà sarvam otam prajänäà
yasmin viçuddhe vibhavaty eña ätmä.
“The soul is atomic in size and can be perceived by perfect intelligence.
This atomic soul is floating in the five kinds of air [präëa,
apäna, vyäna, samäna and udäna], is
situated within the heart, and spreads its influence all over the body of the
embodied living entities. When the soul is purified from the contamination of
the five kinds of material air, its spiritual influence is exhibited.” (Muëò.
3.1.9)
The haöha-yoga system is meant for
controlling the five kinds of air encircling the pure soul by different kinds
of sitting postures—not for any material profit, but for liberation of the
minute soul from the entanglement of the material atmosphere.
So the constitution of
the atomic soul is admitted in all Vedic literatures, and it is also actually
felt in the practical experience of any sane man. Only the insane man can think
of this atomic soul as all-pervading Viñëu-tattva.
The influence of the atomic soul can be spread all over a particular body. According to the Muëòaka Upaniñad, this atomic soul is situated in the heart of every living entity, and because the measurement of the atomic soul is beyond the power of appreciation of the material scientists, some of them assert foolishly that there is no soul. The individual atomic soul is definitely there in the heart along with the Supersoul, and thus all the energies of bodily movement are emanating from this part of the body. The corpuscles which carry the oxygen from the lungs gather energy from the soul. When the soul passes away from this position, activity of the blood, generating fusion, ceases. Medical science accepts the importance of the red corpuscles, but it cannot ascertain that the source of the energy is the soul. Medical science, however, does admit that the heart is the seat of all energies of the body.
Such atomic particles of the spirit whole are compared to the sunshine molecules. In the sunshine there are innumerable radiant molecules. Similarly, the fragmental parts of the Supreme Lord are atomic sparks of the rays of the Supreme Lord, called by the name prabhä or superior energy. Neither Vedic knowledge nor modern science denies the existence of the spirit soul in the body, and the science of the soul is explicitly described in the Bhagavad-gétä by the Personality of Godhead Himself.
Bg 2.18
TEXT
18
TEXT
ANTavNTa wMae
deha iNaTYaSYaae¢-a" Xarqir<a" )
ANaaiXaNaae_Pa[MaeYaSYa TaSMaaÛuDYaSv >aarTa )) 18 ))
antavanta ime dehä
nityasyoktäù çarériëaù
anäçino ’prameyasya
tasmäd yudhyasva bhärata
antavantaù—perishable; ime—all these; dehäù—material
bodies; nityasya—eternal in existence; uktäù—it is so said; sarériëaù—the
embodied souls; anäçinaù—never to be destroyed; aprameyasya—immeasurable; tasmät—therefore;
yudhyasva—fight; bhärata—O
descendant of Bharata.
TRANSLATION
Only the material body of the indestructible, immeasurable and
eternal living entity is subject to destruction; therefore, fight, O descendant
of Bharata.
PURPORT
The material body is perishable by nature. It may perish
immediately, or it may do so after a hundred years. It is a question of time
only. There is no chance of maintaining it indefinitely. But the spirit soul is
so minute that it cannot even be seen by an enemy, to say nothing of being
killed. As mentioned in the previous verse, it is so small that no one can have
any idea how to measure its dimension. So from both viewpoints there is no
cause of lamentation because the living entity can neither be killed as he is,
nor can the material body, which cannot be saved for any length of time, be
permanently protected. The minute particle of the whole spirit acquires this
material body according to his work, and therefore observance of religious
principles should be utilized. In the Vedänta-sütras
the living entity is qualified as light because he is part and parcel of the
supreme light. As sunlight maintains the entire universe, so the light of the
soul maintains this material body. As soon as the spirit soul is out of this
material body, the body begins to decompose; therefore it is the spirit soul
which maintains this body. The body itself is unimportant. Arjuna was advised
to fight and sacrifice the material body for the cause of religion.
Bg 2.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
Ya WNa&
veita hNTaar& YaêENa& MaNYaTae hTaMa( )
o>aaE TaaE Na ivJaaNaqTaae NaaYa& hiNTa Na hNYaTae )) 19 ))
ya enaà vetti hantäraà
yaç cainaà manyate hatam
ubhau tau na vijänéto
näyaà hanti na hanyate
yaù—anyone; enam—this; vetti—knows; hantäram—the killer; yaù—anyone;
ca—also; enam—this;
manyate—thinks; hatam—killed;
ubhau—both of them; tau—they;
na—never; vijänétaù—in
knowledge; na—never; ayam—this;
hanti—kills; na—nor;
hanyate—be killed.
TRANSLATION
He who thinks that the living entity is the slayer or that he is
slain, does not understand. One who is in knowledge knows that the self slays
not nor is slain.
PURPORT
When an embodied living entity is hurt by fatal weapons, it is to
be known that the living entity within the body is not killed. The spirit soul
is so small that it is impossible to kill him by any material weapon, as is
evident from the previous verses. Nor is the living entity killable because of
his spiritual constitution. What is killed, or is supposed to be killed, is the
body only. This, however, does not at all encourage killing of the body. The
Vedic injunction is, “mähiàsyät sarva-bhütäni”
never commit violence to anyone. Nor does understanding that the living entity
is not killed encourage animal slaughter. Killing the body of anyone without
authority is abominable and is punishable by the law of the state as well as by
the law of the Lord. Arjuna, however, is being engaged in killing for the
principle of religion, and not whimsically.
Bg 2.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
Na JaaYaTae
iMa]YaTae va k-daic‚
àaYa& >aUTva >aivTaa va Na
>aUYa" )
AJaae iNaTYa" XaaìTaae_Ya& Paura<aae
Na hNYaTae hNYaMaaNae Xarqre )) 20 ))
na jäyate mriyate vä kadäcin
näyaà bhütvä bhavitä vä na bhüyaù
ajo nityaù çäçvato ’yaà puräëo
na hanyate hanyamäne çarére
na—never; jäyate—takes birth; mriyate—never
dies; vä—either; kadäcit—at
any time (past, present or future); na—never; ayam—this; bhütvä—came
into being; bhavitä—will come to be; vä—or; na—not; bhüyaù—or has come to be; ajaù—unborn;
nityaù—eternal; çäçvataù—permanent;
ayam—this; puräëaù—the
oldest; na—never; hanyate—is
killed; hanyamäne—being killed; çarére—by the body.
TRANSLATION
For the soul there is never birth nor death. Nor, having once
been, does he ever cease to be. He is unborn, eternal, ever-existing, undying
and primeval. He is not slain when the body is slain.
PURPORT
Qualitatively, the small atomic fragmental part of the Supreme
Spirit is one with the Supreme. He undergoes no changes like the body.
Sometimes the soul is called the steady, or küöastha. The
body is subject to six kinds of transformations. It takes its birth in the womb
of the mother’s body, remains for some time, grows, produces some effects,
gradually dwindles, and at last vanishes into oblivion. The soul, however, does
not go through such changes. The soul is not born, but, because he takes on a
material body, the body takes its birth. The soul does not take birth there,
and the soul does not die. Anything which has birth also has death. And because
the soul has no birth, he therefore has no past, present or future. He is
eternal, ever-existing, and primeval—that is, there is no trace in history of
his coming into being. Under the impression of the body, we seek the history of
birth, etc., of the soul. The soul does not at any time become old, as the body
does. The so-called old man, therefore, feels himself to be in the same spirit
as in his childhood or youth. The changes of the body do not affect the soul.
The soul does not deteriorate like a tree, nor anything material. The soul has
no by-product either. The by-products of the body, namely children, are also
different individual souls; and, owing to the body, they appear as children of
a particular man. The body develops because of the soul’s presence, but the
soul has neither offshoots nor change. Therefore, the soul is free from the six
changes of the body.
In the Kaöha Upaniñad also we find a similar passage which reads:
na jäyate mriyate vä vipaçcin
näyaà kutaçcin na vibhüva kaçcit
ajo nityaù çäçvato ’yaà puräëo
na hanyate hanyamäne çarére.
(Kaöha 1.2.18)
The meaning and purport of this verse is the same as in the Bhagavad-gétä, but here in this verse there is one
special word, vipaçcit, which means learned or
with knowledge.
The soul is full of knowledge, or full always with consciousness.
Therefore, consciousness is the symptom of the soul. Even if one does not find
the soul within the heart, where he is situated, one can still understand the
presence of the soul simply by the presence of consciousness. Sometimes we do
not find the sun in the sky owing to clouds, or for some other reason, but the
light of the sun is always there, and we are convinced that it is therefore
daytime. As soon as there is a little light in the sky early in the morning, we
can understand that the sun is in the sky. Similarly, since there is some
consciousness in all bodies—whether man or animal—we can understand the
presence of the soul. This consciousness of the soul is, however, different from
the consciousness of the Supreme because the supreme consciousness is
all-knowledge—past, present and future. The consciousness of the individual
soul is prone to be forgetful. When he is forgetful of his real nature, he
obtains education and enlightenment from the superior lessons of Kåñëa. But
Kåñëa is not like the forgetful soul. If so, Kåñëa’s teachings of Bhagavad-gétä would be useless.
There are two kinds of souls—namely the minute particle soul (aëu-ätmä) and the Supersoul (the vibhu-ätmä). This is also confirmed in the Kaöha Upaniñad in this way:
aëor aëéyän mahato mahéyän
ätmäsya jantor nihito guhäyäm
tam akratuù paçyati véta-çoko
dhätuù prasädän mahimänam ätmanaù
(Kaöha 1.2.20)
“Both the Supersoul [Paramätmä] and
the atomic soul [jévätmä] are situated on the
same tree of the body within the same heart of the living being, and only one
who has become free from all material desires as well as lamentations can, by
the grace of the Supreme, understand the glories of the soul.” Kåñëa is the
fountainhead of the Supersoul also, as it will be disclosed in the following
chapters, and Arjuna is the atomic soul, forgetful of his real nature;
therefore he requires to be enlightened by Kåñëa, or by His bona fide
representative (the spiritual master).
Bg 2.21
TEXT
21
TEXT
vedaivNaaiXaNa&
iNaTYa& Ya WNaMaJaMaVYaYaMa( )
k-Qa& Sa Pauåz" PaaQaR k&- gaaTaYaiTa hiNTa k-Ma( )) 21 ))
vedävinäçinaà nityaà
ya enam ajam avyayam
kathaà sa puruñaù pärtha
kaà ghätayati hanti kam
veda—in
knowledge; avinäçinam—indestructible; nityam—always; yaù—one
who; enam—this (soul); ajam—unborn;
avyayam—immutable; katham—how;
saù—he; puruñaù—person;
pärtha—O Pärtha (Arjuna); kam—whom;
ghätayati—hurts; hanti—kills;
kam—whom.
TRANSLATION
O Pärtha, how can a person who knows that the soul is indestructible,
unborn, eternal and immutable, kill anyone or cause anyone to kill?
PURPORT
Everything has its proper utility, and a man who is situated in
complete knowledge knows how and where to apply a thing for its proper utility.
Similarly, violence also has its utility, and how to apply violence rests with
the person in knowledge. Although the justice of the peace awards capital
punishment to a person condemned for murder, the justice of the peace cannot be
blamed because he orders violence to another person according to the codes of
justice. In Manu-saàhitä, the lawbook for
mankind, it is supported that a murderer should be condemned to death so that
in his next life he will not have to suffer for the great sin he has committed.
Therefore, the king’s punishment of hanging a murderer is actually beneficial.
Similarly, when Kåñëa orders fighting, it must be concluded that violence is
for supreme justice, and, as such, Arjuna should follow the instruction,
knowing well that such violence, committed in the act of fighting for Kåñëa, is
not violence at all because, at any rate, the man, or rather the soul, cannot
be killed; so for the administration of justice, so-called violence is
permitted. A surgical operation is not meant to kill the patient, but to cure
him. Therefore the fighting to be executed by Arjuna at the instruction of
Kåñëa is with full knowledge, so there is no possibility of sinful reaction.
Bg 2.22
TEXT
22
TEXT
vaSaa&iSa
Jaq<aaRiNa YaQaa ivhaYa
NavaiNa Ga*õaiTa Narae_Parai<a )
TaQaa Xarqrai<a ivhaYa Jaq<aaR‚
NYaNYaaiNa Sa&YaaiTa NavaiNa dehq ))
22 ))
väsäàsi jérëäni yathä vihäya
naväni gåhëäti naro ’paräëi
tathä çaréräëi vihäya jérëäny
anyäni saàyäti naväni dehé
väsäàsi—garments; jérëäni—old and worn out; yathä—as
it is; vihäya—giving up; naväni—new
garments; gåhëäti—does accept; naraù—a man; aparäëi—other;
tathä—in the same way; çaréräëi—bodies;
vihäya—giving up; jérëäni—old
and useless; anyäni—different; saàyäti—verily accepts; naväni—new
sets; dehé—the embodied.
TRANSLATION
As a person puts on new garments, giving up old ones, similarly,
the soul accepts new material bodies, giving up the old and useless ones.
PURPORT
Change of body by the atomic individual soul is an accepted fact.
Even some of the modern scientists who do not believe in the existence of the
soul, but at the same time cannot explain the source of energy from the heart,
have to accept continuous changes of body which appear from childhood to
boyhood and from boyhood to youth and again from youth to old age. From old
age, the change is transferred to another body. This has already been explained
in the previous verse.
Transference of the atomic individual soul to another body is made possible by the grace of the Supersoul.The Supersoul fulfills the desire of the atomic soul as one friend fulfills the desire of another. The Vedas, like the Muëòaka Upaniñad, as well as the Çvetäçvatara Upanisad, compare the soul and the Supersoul to two friendly birds sitting on the same tree. One of the birds (the individual atomic soul) is eating the fruit of the tree, and the other bird (Kåñëa) is simply watching His friend. Of these two birds—although they are the same in quality—one is captivated by the fruits of the material tree, while the other is simply witnessing the activities of His friend. Kåñëa is the witnessing bird, and Arjuna is the eating bird. Although they are friends, one is still the master and the other is the servant. Forgetfulness of this relationship by the atomic soul is the cause of one’s changing his position from one tree to another or from one body to another. The jéva soul is struggling very hard on the tree of the material body, but as soon as he agrees to accept the other bird as the supreme spiritual master—as Arjuna agreed to do by voluntary surrender unto Kåñëa for instruction—the subordinate bird immediately becomes free from all lamentations. Both the Kaöha Upaniñad and Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad confirm this:
samäne våkñe puruño nimagno
’néçayä çocati muhyamänaù
juñöaà yadä paçyaty anyam éçam asya
mahimänam iti véta-çokaù
“Although the two birds are in the same tree, the eating bird is
fully engrossed with anxiety and moroseness as the enjoyer of the fruits of the
tree. But if in some way or other he turns his face to his friend who is the
Lord and knows His glories—at once the suffering bird becomes free from all
anxieties.” Arjuna has now turned his face towards his eternal friend, Kåñëa,
and is understanding the Bhagavad-gétä from Him.
And thus, hearing from Kåñëa, he can understand the supreme glories of the Lord
and be free from lamentation.
Arjuna is advised herewith by the Lord not to lament for the
bodily change of his old grandfather and his teacher. He should rather be happy
to kill their bodies in the righteous fight so that they may be cleansed at
once of all reactions from various bodily activities. One who lays down his
life on the sacrificial altar, or in the proper battlefield, is at once
cleansed of bodily reactions and promoted to a higher status of life. So there
was no cause for Arjuna’s lamentation.
Bg 2.23
TEXT
23
TEXT
NaENa&
i^NdiNTa Xañai<a NaENa& dhiTa Paavk-" )
Na cENa& ©e-dYaNTYaaPaae Na XaaezYaiTa MaaåTa" )) 23 ))
nainaà chindanti çasträëi
nainaà dahati pävakaù
na cainaà kledayanty äpo
na çoñayati märutaù
na—never; enam—unto this soul; chindanti—can
cut into pieces; çasträëi —all weapons; na—never; enam—unto this
soul; dahati—burns; pävakaù—fire;
na—never; ca—also; enam—unto this soul; kledayanti—moistens;
äpaù —water; na—never;
çoñayati—dries; märutaù—wind.
TRANSLATION
The soul can never be cut into pieces by any weapon, nor can he be
burned by fire, nor moistened by water, nor withered by the wind.
PURPORT
All kinds of weapons, swords, flames, rains, tornadoes, etc., are
unable to kill the spirit soul. It appears that there were many kinds of weapons
made of earth, water, air, ether, etc., in addition to the modern weapons of
fire. Even the nuclear weapons of the modern age are classified as fire
weapons, but formerly there were other weapons made of all different types of
material elements. Firearms were counteracted by water weapons, which are now
unknown to modern science. Nor do modern scientists have knowledge of tornado
weapons. Nonetheless, the soul can never be cut into pieces, nor annihilated by
any number of weapons, regardless of scientific devices.
Nor was it ever possible to cut the individual souls from the original Soul. The Mäyävädé, however, cannot describe how the individual soul evolved from ignorance and consequently became covered by illusory energy. Because they are atomic individual souls (sanätana) eternally, they are prone to be covered by the illusory energy, and thus they become separated from the association of the Supreme Lord, just as the sparks of the fire, although one in quality with the fire, are prone to be extinguished when out of the fire. In the Varäha Puräëa, the living entities are described as separated parts and parcels of the Supreme. They are eternally so, according to the Bhagavad-gétä also. So, even after being liberated from illusion, the living entity remains a separate identity, as is evident from the teachings of the Lord to Arjuna. Arjuna became liberated by the knowledge received from Kåñëa, but he never became one with Kåñëa.
Bg 2.24
TEXT
24
TEXT
AC^eÛae_YaMadaùae_YaMa©e-Ûae_XaaeZYa
Wv c )
iNaTYa" SavRGaTa" SQaa<aurcl/ae_Ya& SaNaaTaNa" )) 24 ))
acchedyo ’yam adähyo ’yam
akledyo ’çoñya eva ca
nityaù sarva-gataù sthäëur
acalo ’yaà sanätanaù
acchedyaù—unbreakable;
ayam—this soul; adähyaù—cannot
be burned; ayam—this soul; akledyaù—insoluble; açoñyaù—cannot
be dried; eva—certainly; ca—and;
nityaù—everlasting; sarva-gataù—all-pervading;
sthäëuù—unchangeable; acalaù—immovable;
ayam—this soul; sanätanaù—eternally
the same.
TRANSLATION
This individual soul is unbreakable and insoluble, and can be
neither burned nor dried. He is everlasting, all-pervading, unchangeable,
immovable and eternally the same.
PURPORT
All these qualifications of the atomic soul definitely prove that
the individual soul is eternally the atomic particle of the spirit whole, and
he remains the same atom eternally, without change. The theory of monism is
very difficult to apply in this case, because the individual soul is never
expected to become one homogeneously. After liberation from material
contamination, the atomic soul may prefer to remain as a spiritual spark in the
effulgent rays of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, but the intelligent souls
enter into the spiritual planets to associate with the Personality of Godhead.
The word sarva-gataù (all-pervading) is significant because there is no doubt that living entities are all over God’s creation. They live on the land, in the water, in the air, within the earth and even within fire. The belief that they are sterilized in fire is not acceptable, because it is clearly stated here that the soul cannot be burned by fire. Therefore, there is no doubt that there are living entities also in the sun planet with suitable bodies to live there. If the sun globe is uninhabited, then the word sarva-gataù—living everywhere—becomes meaningless.
Bg 2.25
TEXT
25
TEXT
AVYa¢-ae_YaMaicNTYaae_YaMaivk-aYaaeR_YaMauCYaTae
)
TaSMaadev& ividTvENa& NaaNauXaaeicTauMahRiSa )) 25 ))
avyakto ’yam acintyo ’yam
avikäryo ’yam ucyate
tasmäd evaà viditvainaà
nänuçocitum arhasi
avyaktaù—invisible; ayam—this soul; acintyaù—inconceivable;
ayam—this soul; avikäryaù—unchangeable;
ayam—this soul; ucyate—is
said; tasmät—therefore; evam—like
this; viditvä—knowing it well; enam—this soul; na—do
not; anuçocitum—may lament over; arhasi—you deserve.
TRANSLATION
It is said that the soul is invisible, inconceivable, immutable,
and unchangeable. Knowing this, you should not grieve for the body.
PURPORT
As described previously, the magnitude of the soul is so small for
our material calculation that he cannot be seen even by the most powerful
microscope; therefore, he is invisible. As far as the soul’s existence is
concerned, no one can establish his existence experimentally beyond the proof
of çruti or Vedic wisdom. We have to accept this
truth, because there is no other source of understanding the existence of the
soul, although it is a fact by perception. There are many things we have to
accept solely on grounds of superior authority. No one can deny the existence
of his father, based upon the authority of his mother. There is no other source
of understanding the identity of the father except by the authority of the
mother. Similarly, there is no other source of understanding the soul except by
studying the Vedas. In other words, the soul is
inconceivable by human experimental knowledge. The soul is consciousness and
conscious—that also is the statement of the Vedas, and
we have to accept that. Unlike the bodily changes, there is no change in the
soul. As eternally unchangeable, the soul remains atomic in comparison to the
infinite Supreme Soul. The Supreme Soul is infinite, and the atomic soul is
infinitesimal. Therefore, the infinitesimal soul, being unchangeable, can never
become equal to the infinite soul, or the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This
concept is repeated in the Vedas in different
ways just to confirm the stability of the conception of the soul. Repetition of
something is necessary in order that we understand the matter thoroughly
without error.
Bg 2.26
TEXT
26
TEXT
AQa cENa&
iNaTYaJaaTa& iNaTYa& va MaNYaSae Ma*TaMa( )
TaQaaiPa Tv& Mahabahae NaENa& XaaeicTauMahRiSa )) 26 ))
atha cainaà nitya-jätaà
nityaà vä manyase måtam
tathäpi tvaà mahä-bäho
nainaà çocitum arhasi
atha—if, however;
ca—also; enam—this
soul; nitya-jätam—always born; nityam—forever; vä—either;
manyase—so think; måtam—dead;
tathäpi—still; tvam—you; mahä-bäho—O mighty-armed one; na—never;
enam—about the soul; çocitum—to
lament; arhasi—deserve.
TRANSLATION
If, however, you think that the soul is perpetually born and
always dies, still you have no reason to lament, O mighty-armed.
PURPORT
There is always a class of philosophers, almost akin to the
Buddhists, who do not believe in the separate existence of the soul beyond the
body. When Lord Kåñëa spoke the Bhagavad-gétä, it
appears that such philosophers existed, and they were known as the Lokäyatikas and Vaibhäñikas. These
philosophers maintained that life symptoms, or soul, takes place at a certain
mature condition of material combination. The modern material scientist and
materialist philosophers also think similarly. According to them, the body is a
combination of physical elements, and at a certain stage the life symptoms
develop by interaction of the physical and chemical elements. The science of
anthropology is based on this philosophy. Currently, many pseudo-religions—now
becoming fashionable in America—are also adhering to this philosophy, as well
as to the nihilistic nondevotional Buddhist sects.
Even if Arjuna did not believe in the existence of the soul—as in the Vaibhäñika philosophy—there would still have been no cause for lamentation. No one laments the loss of a certain bulk of chemicals and stops discharging his prescribed duty. On the other hand, in modern science and scientific warfare, so many tons of chemicals are wasted for achieving victory over the enemy. According to the Vaibhäñika philosophy, the so-called soul or ätmä vanishes along with the deterioration of the body. So, in any case, whether Arjuna accepted the Vedic conclusion that there is an atomic soul, or whether he did not believe in the existence of the soul, he had no reason to lament. According to this theory, since there are so many living entities generating out of matter every moment, and so many of them are being vanquished every moment, there is no need to grieve for such an incidence. However, since he was not risking rebirth of the soul, Arjuna had no reason to be afraid of being affected with sinful reactions due to his killing his grandfather and teacher. But at the same time, Kåñëa sarcastically addressed Arjuna as mahä-bähu, mighty-armed, because He, at least, did not accept the theory of the Vaibhäñikas, which leaves aside the Vedic wisdom. As a kñatriya, Arjuna belonged to the Vedic culture, and it behooved him to continue to follow its principles.
Bg 2.27
TEXT
27
TEXT
JaaTaSYa ih
Da]uvae Ma*TYauDa]uRv& JaNMa Ma*TaSYa c )
TaSMaadPairhaYaeR_QaeR Na Tv& XaaeicTauMahRiSa )) 27 ))
jätasya hi dhruvo måtyur
dhruvaà janma måtasya ca
tasmäd aparihärye ’rthe
na tvaà çocitum arhasi
jätasya—one who has
taken his birth; hi—certainly; dhruvaù—a fact; måtyuù—death;
dhruvam—it is also a fact; janma—birth; måtasya—of
the dead; ca—also; tasmät—therefore;
aparihärye—for that which is unavoidable; arthe—in the matter of; na—do
not; tvam—you; çocitum—to
lament; arhasi—deserve.
TRANSLATION
For one who has taken his birth, death is certain; and for one who
is dead, birth is certain. Therefore, in the unavoidable discharge of your
duty, you should not lament.
PURPORT
One has to take birth according to one’s activities of life. And,
after finishing one term of activities, one has to die to take birth for the
next. In this way the cycle of birth and death is revolving, one after the
other without liberation. This cycle of birth and death does not, however,
support unnecessary murder, slaughter and war. But at the same time, violence
and war are inevitable factors in human society for keeping law and order.
The Battle of Kurukñetra, being the will of the Supreme, was an inevitable event, and to fight for the right cause is the duty of a kñatriya. Why should he be afraid of or aggrieved at the death of his relatives since he was discharging his proper duty? He did not deserve to break the law, thereby becoming subjected to the reactions of sinful acts, of which he was so afraid. By avoiding the discharge of his proper duty, he would not be able to stop the death of his relatives, and he would be degraded due to his selection of the wrong path of action.
Bg 2.28
TEXT
28
TEXT
AVYa¢-adqiNa
>aUTaaiNa VYa¢-MaDYaaiNa >aarTa )
AVYa¢-iNaDaNaaNYaev Ta}a k-a PairdevNaa )) 28 ))
avyaktädéni bhütäni
vyakta-madhyäni bhärata
avyakta-nidhanäny eva
tatra kä paridevanä
avyaktädéni—in the
beginning unmanifested; bhütäni—all that are
created; vyakta—manifested; madhyäni—in the middle; bhärata—O
descendant of Bharata; avyakta—nonmanifested; nidhanäni—all that are vanquished; eva—it is all like that; tatra—therefore;
kä—what; paridevanä—lamentation.
TRANSLATION
All created beings are unmanifest in their beginning, manifest in
their interim state, and unmanifest again when they are annihilated. So what
need is there for lamentation?
PURPORT
Accepting that there are two classes of philosophers, one
believing in the existence of soul and the other not believing in the existence
of the soul, there is no cause for lamentation in either case. Nonbelievers in
the existence of the soul are called atheists by followers of Vedic wisdom. Yet
even if, for argument’s sake, we accept the atheistic theory, there is still no
cause for lamentation. Apart from the separate existence of the soul, the
material elements remain unmanifested before creation. From this subtle state
of unmanifestation comes manifestation, just as from ether, air is generated;
from air, fire is generated; from fire, water is generated; and from water,
earth becomes manifested. From the earth, many varieties of manifestations take
place. Take, for example, a big skyscraper manifested from the earth. When it
is dismantled, the manifestation becomes again unmanifested and remains as
atoms in the ultimate stage. The law of conservation of energy remains, but in
course of time things are manifested and unmanifested—that is the difference.
Then what cause is there for lamentation either in the stage of manifestation
or unmanifestation? Somehow or other, even in the unmanifested stage, things
are not lost. Both at the beginning and at the end, all elements remain
unmanifested, and only in the middle are they manifested, and this does not
make any real material difference.
And if we accept the Vedic conclusion as stated in the Bhagavad-gétä (antavanta ime dehäù) that these material bodies are perishable in due course of time (nityasyoktäù çarériëaù) but that soul is eternal, then we must remember always that the body is like a dress; therefore why lament the changing of a dress? The material body has no factual existence in relation to the eternal soul. It is something like a dream. In a dream we may think of flying in the sky, or sitting on a chariot as a king, but when we wake up we can see that we are neither in the sky nor seated on the chariot. The Vedic wisdom encourages self-realization on the basis of the nonexistence of the material body. Therefore, in either case, whether one believes in the existence of the soul, or one does not believe in the existence of the soul, there is no cause for lamentation for loss of the body.
Bg 2.29
TEXT
29
TEXT
AaêYaRvTPaXYaiTa
k-iêdeNa‚
MaaêYaRvÜdiTa TaQaEv caNYa" )
AaêYaRvÀENaMaNYa" é*<aaeiTa
é[uTvaPYaeNa& ved Na cEv k-iêTa( ))
29 ))
äçcarya-vat paçyati kaçcid enam
äçcarya-vad vadati tathaiva cänyaù
äçcarya-vac cainam anyaù çåëoti
çrutväpy enaà veda na caiva kaçcit
äçcaryavat—amazing; paçyati—see; kaçcit—some;
enam—this soul; äçcaryavat—amazing;
vadati—speak; tathä—there;
eva—certainly; ca—also;
anyaù—others; äçcaryavat—similarly
amazing; ca—also; enam—this
soul; anyaù—others; çåëoti—hear;
çrutvä—having heard; api—even;
enam—this soul; veda—do
know; na—never; ca—and;
eva—certainly; kaçcit—anyone.
TRANSLATION
Some look on the soul as amazing, some describe him as amazing,
and some hear of him as amazing, while others, even after hearing about him,
cannot understand him at all.
PURPORT
Since Gétopaniñad is largely based
on the principles of the Upaniñads, it is not
surprising to also find this passage in the Kaöha
Upaniñad.
çravaëäyäpi bahubhir yo na labhyaù
çåëvanto ’pi bahavo yaù na vidyuù
äçcaryo vaktä kuçalo ’sya labdhä
äçcaryo jïätä kuçalänuçiñöaù.
The fact that the atomic soul is within the body of a gigantic
animal, in the body of a gigantic banyan tree, and also in the microbic germs,
millions and billions of which occupy only an inch of space, is certainly very
amazing. Men with a poor fund of knowledge and men who are not austere cannot
understand the wonders of the individual atomic spark of spirit, even though it
is explained by the greatest authority of knowledge, who imparted lessons even
to Brahmä, the first living being in the universe. Owing to a gross material
conception of things, most men in this age cannot imagine how such a small
particle can become both so great and so small. So men look at the soul proper
as wonderful either by constitution or by description. Illusioned by the
material energy, people are so engrossed in subject matter for sense
gratification that they have very little time to understand the question of
self-understanding, even though it is a fact that without this
self-understanding all activities result in ultimate defeat in the struggle for
existence. Perhaps one has no idea that one must think of the soul, and also
make a solution of the material miseries.
Some people who are inclined to hear about the soul may be
attending lectures, in good association, but sometimes, owing to ignorance,
they are misguided by acceptance of the Supersoul and the atomic soul as one
without distinction of magnitude. It is very difficult to find a man who
perfectly understands the position of the soul, the Supersoul, the atomic soul,
their respective functions, relationships and all other major and minor
details. And it is still more difficult to find a man who has actually derived full
benefit from knowledge of the soul, and who is able to describe the position of
the soul in different aspects. But if, somehow or other, one is able to
understand the subject matter of the soul, then one’s life is successful. The
easiest process for understanding the subject matter of self, however, is to
accept the statements of the Bhagavad-gétä spoken
by the greatest authority, Lord Kåñëa, without being deviated by other
theories. But it also requires a great deal of penance and sacrifice, either in
this life or in the previous ones, before one is able to accept Kåñëa as the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. Kåñëa can, however, be known as such by the
causeless mercy of the pure devotee and by no other way.
Bg 2.30
TEXT
30
TEXT
dehq
iNaTYaMavDYaae_Ya& dehe SavRSYa >aarTa )
TaSMaaTSavaRi<a >aUTaaiNa Na Tv& XaaeicTauMahRiSa )) 30 ))
dehé nityam avadhyo ’yaà
dehe sarvasya bhärata
tasmät sarväëi bhütäni
na tvaà çocitum arhasi
dehé—the owner of
the material body; nityam—eternally; avadhyaù—cannot be killed; ayam—this
soul; dehe—in the body; sarvasya—of
everyone; bhärata—O descendant of Bharata; tasmät—therefore; sarväëi—all;
bhütäni—living entities (that are born); na—never; tvam—yourself; çocitum —to lament; arhasi— deserve.
TRANSLATION
O descendant of Bharata, he who dwells in the body is eternal and
can never be slain. Therefore you need not grieve for any creature.
PURPORT
The Lord now concludes the chapter of instruction on the immutable
spirit soul. In describing the immortal soul in various ways, Lord Kåñëa
establishes that the soul is immortal and the body is temporary. Therefore
Arjuna as a kñatriya should not abandon his duty
out of fear that his grandfather and teacher—Bhéñma and Droëa—will die in the
battle. On the authority of Çré Kåñëa, one has to believe that there is a soul
different from the material body, not that there is no such thing as soul, or
that living symptoms develop at a certain stage of material maturity resulting
from the interaction of chemicals. Though the soul is immortal, violence is not
encouraged, but at the time of war it is not discouraged when there is actual
need for it. That need must be justified in terms of the sanction of the Lord,
and not capriciously.
Bg 2.31
TEXT
31
TEXT
SvDaMaRMaiPa
cave+Ya Na ivk-iMPaTauMahRiSa )
DaMYaaRiÖ YauÖaC^\eYaae_NYaT+ai}aYaSYa Na ivÛTae )) 31 ))
sva-dharmam api cävekñya
na vikampitum arhasi
dharmyäd dhi yuddhäc chreyo ’nyat
kñatriyasya na vidyate
svadharmam—one’s own
religious principles; api—also; ca—indeed; avekñya—considering;
na—never; vikampitum—to
hesitate; arhasi—you deserve; dharmyät—from religious principles; hi—indeed; yuddhät—of
fighting; çreyaù—better engagements; anyat—anything else; kñatriyasya—of
the kñatriya; na—does
not; vidyate—exist.
TRANSLATION
Considering your specific duty as a kñatriya, you should know that
there is no better engagement for you than fighting on religious principles;
and so there is no need for hesitation.
PURPORT
Out of the four orders of social administration, the second order,
for the matter of good administration, is called kñatriya.
Kñat means hurt. One who gives protection from harm is called kñatriya (trayate—to give protection). The kñatriyas are trained for killing in the forest. A kñatriya would go into the forest and challenge a tiger
face to face and fight with the tiger with his sword. When the tiger was
killed, it would be offered the royal order of cremation. This system is being
followed even up to the present day by the kñatriya kings
of Jaipur state. The kñatriyas are specially
trained for challenging and killing because religious violence is sometimes a
necessary factor. Therefore, kñatriyas are never
meant for accepting directly the order of sannyäsa or
renunciation. Nonviolence in politics may be a diplomacy, but it is never a
factor or principle. In the religious law books it is stated:
ähaveñu mitho ’nyonyaà jighäàsanto mahékñitaù
yuddhamänäù paraà çaktyä svargaà yänty aparäìmukhäù
yajïeñu paçavo brahman hanyante satataà dvijaiù
saàskåtäù kila mantraiç ca te ’pi svargam aväpnuvan.
“In the battlefield, a king or kñatriya, while
fighting another king envious of him, is eligible for achieving heavenly
planets after death, as the brähmaëas also attain
the heavenly planets by sacrificing animals in the sacrificial fire.”
Therefore, killing on the battle on the religious principle and the killing of
animals in the sacrificial fire are not at all considered to be acts of
violence, because everyone is benefitted by the religious principles involved.
The animal sacrificed gets a human life immediately without undergoing the
gradual evolutionary process from one form to another, and the kñatriyas killed in the battlefield also attain the
heavenly planets as do the brähmaëas who attain
them by offering sacrifice.
There are two kinds of svadharmas, specific
duties. As long as one is not liberated, one has to perform the duties of that
particular body in accordance with religious principles in order to achieve
liberation. When one is liberated, one’s svadharma—specific
duty—becomes spiritual and is not in the material bodily concept. In the bodily
conception of life there are specific duties for the brähmaëas and kñatriyas respectively,
and such duties are unavoidable. Svadharma is
ordained by the Lord, and this will be clarified in the Fourth Chapter. On the
bodily plane svadharma is called varëäçrama-dharma, or man’s steppingstone for spiritual
understanding. Human civilization begins from the stage of varëäçrama-dharma, or specific duties in terms of the
specific modes of nature of the body obtained. Discharging one’s specific duty
in any field of action in accordance with varëäçrama-dharma
serves to elevate one to a higher status of life.
Bg 2.32
TEXT
32
TEXT
Yad*C^Yaa
caePaPaà& SvGaRÜarMaPaav*TaMa( )
Saui%Na" +ai}aYaa" PaaQaR l/>aNTae YauÖMaqd*XaMa( )) 32 ))
yadåcchayä copapannaà
svarga-dväram apävåtam
sukhinaù kñatriyäù pärtha
labhante yuddham édåçam
yadåcchayä—by its own
accord; ca—also; upapannam—arrived
at; svarga—heavenly planet; dväram—door; apävåtam—wide
open; sukhinaù—very happy; kñatriyäù—the members of the royal order; pärtha—O son of Påthä; labhante—do
achieve; yuddham—war; édåçam—like
this.
TRANSLATION
O Pärtha, happy are the kñatriyas to whom such fighting
opportunities come unsought, opening for them the doors of the heavenly
planets.
PURPORT
As supreme teacher of the world, Lord Kåñëa condemns the attitude
of Arjuna who said, “I do not find any good in this fighting. It will cause
perpetual habitation in hell.” Such statements by Arjuna were due to ignorance
only. He wanted to become nonviolent in the discharge of his specific duty. For
a kñatriya to be in the battlefield and to become
nonviolent is the philosophy of fools. In the Paräçara-småti
or religious codes made by Paräçara, the great sage and father of
Vyäsadeva, it is stated:
kñatriyo hi prajä rakñan çastra-päëiù pradaëòayan
nirjitya parasainyädi kñitià dharmeëa pälayet.
“The kñatriya’s duty is to protect
the citizens from all kinds of difficulties, and for that reason he has to
apply violence in suitable cases for law and order. Therefore he has to conquer
the soldiers of inimical kings, and thus, with religious
principles, he should rule over the world.”
Considering all aspects, Arjuna had no reason to refrain from
fighting. If he should conquer his enemies, he would enjoy the kingdom; and if
he should die in the battle, he would be elevated to the heavenly planets whose
doors were wide open to him. Fighting would be for his benefit in either case.
Bg 2.33
TEXT
33
TEXT
AQa
cetviMaMa& DaMYa| Sa°aMa& Na k-irZYaiSa )
TaTa" SvDaMa| k-IiTa| c ihTva PaaPaMavaPSYaiSa )) 33 ))
atha cet tvam imaà dharmyaà
saìgrämaà na kariñyasi
tataù sva-dharmaà kértià ca
hitvä päpam aväpsyasi
atha—therefore; cet—if; tvam—you; imam—this; dharmyam—religious
duty; saìgrämam—fighting; na—do
not; kariñyasi—perform; tataù—then;
svadharmam—your religious duty; kértim—-reputation; ca—also;
hitvä—losing; päpam—sinful
reaction; aväpsyasi—do gain.
TRANSLATION
If, however, you do not fight this religious war, then you will
certainly incur sins for neglecting your duties and thus lose your reputation
as a fighter.
PURPORT
Arjuna was a famous fighter, and he attained fame by fighting many
great demigods, including even Lord Çiva. After fighting and defeating Lord
Çiva in the dress of a hunter, Arjuna pleased the Lord and received as a reward
a weapon called päçupata-astra. Everyone knew
that he was a great warrior. Even Droëäcärya gave him benediction and awarded
him the special weapon by which he could kill even his teacher. So he was
credited with so many military certificates from many authorities, including
his adopted father Indra, the heavenly king. But if he abandoned the battle, he
would not only neglect his specific duty as a kñatriya, but
he would lose all his fame and good name and thus prepare his royal road to hell.
In other words, he would go to hell, not by fighting, but by withdrawing from
battle.
Bg 2.34
TEXT
34
TEXT
Ak-IiTa| caiPa
>aUTaaiNa k-QaiYaZYaiNTa Tae_VYaYaaMa( )
SaM>aaivTaSYa cak-IiTaRMaRr<aadiTairCYaTae )) 34 ))
akértià cäpi bhütäni
kathayiñyanti te ’vyayäm
sambhävitasya cäkértir
maraëäd atiricyate
akértim—infamy; ca—also; api—over and
above; bhütäni—all people; kathayiñyanti—will speak; te—of you; avyayäm—forever; sambhävitasya—for
a respectable man; ca—also; akértiù—ill fame; maraëät—than
death; atiricyate—becomes more than.
TRANSLATION
People will always speak of your infamy, and for one who has been
honored, dishonor is worse than death.
PURPORT
Both as friend and philosopher to Arjuna, Lord Kåñëa now gives His
final judgement regarding Arjuna’s refusal to fight. The Lord says, “Arjuna, if
you leave the battlefield, people will call you a coward even before your
actual flight. And if you think that people may call you bad names but that you
will save your life by fleeing the battlefield, then My advice is that you’d do
better to die in the battle. For a respectable man like you, ill fame is worse
than death. So, you should not flee for fear of your life; better to die in the
battle. That will save you from the ill fame of misusing My friendship and from
losing your prestige in society.”
So, the final judgement of the Lord was for Arjuna to die in the battle and not withdraw.
Bg 2.35
TEXT
35
TEXT
>aYaad]<aaduParTa&
Ma&SYaNTae Tva& MaharQaa" )
Yaeza& c Tv& bhuMaTaae >aUTva YaaSYaiSa l/agavMa( )) 35 ))
bhayäd raëäd uparataà
maàsyante tväà mahä-rathäù
yeñäà ca tvaà bahu-mato
bhütvä yäsyasi läghavam
bhayät—out of fear;
raëät—from the battlefield; uparatam—ceased; maàsyante—will
consider; tväm—unto you; mahä-rathäù—the
great generals; yeñäm—of those who; ca—also; tvam—you; bahu-mataù—in great estimation; bhütvä—will become; yäsyasi—will
go; läghavam—decreased in value.
TRANSLATION
The great generals who have highly esteemed your name and fame
will think that you have left the battlefield out of fear only, and thus they
will consider you a coward.
PURPORT
Lord Kåñëa continued to give His verdict to Arjuna: “Do not think
that the great generals like Duryodhana, Karëa, and other contemporaries will
think that you have left the battlefield out of compassion for your brothers
and grandfather. They will think that you have left out of fear for your life.
And thus their high estimation of your personality will go to hell.”
Bg 2.36
TEXT
36
TEXT
AvaCYavada&ê
bhUNvidZYaiNTa TavaihTaa" )
iNaNdNTaSTav SaaMaQYa| TaTaae du"%Tar& Nau ik-Ma( )) 36 ))
aväcya-vädäàç ca bahün
vadiñyanti tavähitäù
nindantas tava sämarthyaà
tato duùkhataraà nu kim
aväcya—unkind; vädän—fabricated words; ca—also;
bahün—many; vadiñyanti—will
say; tava—your; ahitäù—enemies;
nindantaù—while vilifying; tava—your; sämarthyam—ability;
tataù—thereafter; duùkhataram—more
painful; nu—of course; kim—what
is there.
TRANSLATION
Your enemies will describe you in many unkind words and scorn your
ability. What could be more painful for you?
PURPORT
Lord Kåñëa was astonished in the beginning at Arjuna’s
uncalled-for plea for compassion, and He described his compassion as befitting
the non-Aryans. Now in so many words, He has proved His statements against
Arjuna’s so-called compassion.
Bg 2.37
TEXT
37
TEXT
hTaae va Pa[aPSYaiSa
SvGa| iJaTva va >aae+YaSae MahqMa( )
TaSMaaduitaï k-aENTaeYa YauÖaYa k*-TaiNaêYa" )) 37 ))
hato vä präpsyasi svargaà
jitvä vä bhokñyase mahém
tasmäd uttiñöha kaunteya
yuddhäya kåta-niçcayaù
hataù—being
killed; vä—either; präpsyasi—you
gain; svargam—the heavenly kingdom; jitvä—by conquering; vä—or;
bhokñyase—you enjoy; mahém—the
world; tasmät—therefore; uttiñöha—get
up; kaunteya—O son of Kunté; yuddhäya—to fight; kåta—determination;
niçcayaù—uncertainty.
TRANSLATION
O son of Kunté, either you will be killed on the battlefield and
attain the heavenly planets, or you will conquer and enjoy the earthly kingdom.
Therefore get up and fight with determination.
PURPORT
Even though there was no certainty of victory for Arjuna’s side,
he still had to fight; for, even being killed there, he could be elevated into
the heavenly planets.
Bg 2.38
TEXT
38
TEXT
Sau%du"%e
SaMae k*-Tva l/a>aal/a>aaE JaYaaJaYaaE )
TaTaae YauÖaYa YauJYaSv NaEv& PaaPaMavaPSYaiSa )) 38 ))
sukha-duùkhe same kåtvä
läbhäläbhau jayäjayau
tato yuddhäya yujyasva
naivaà päpam aväpsyasi
sukha—happiness; duùkhe—in distress; same—in
equanimity; kåtvä—doing so; läbhäläbhau—both in loss and profit; jayäjayau—both in defeat and victory; tataù—thereafter; yuddhäya—for
the sake of fighting; yujyasva—do fight; na—never; evam—in this
way; päpam—sinful reaction; aväpsyasi—you will gain.
TRANSLATION
Do thou fight for the sake of fighting, without considering
happiness or distress, loss or gain, victory or defeat—and, by so doing, you
shall never incur sin.
PURPORT
Lord Kåñëa now directly says that Arjuna should fight for the sake
of fighting because He desires the battle. There is no consideration of
happiness or distress, profit or gain, victory or defeat in the activities of
Kåñëa consciousness. That everything should be performed for the sake of Kåñëa
is transcendental consciousness; so there is no reaction to material
activities. He who acts for his own sense gratification, either in goodness or
in passion, is subject to the reaction, good or bad. But he who has completely
surrendered himself in the activities of Kåñëa consciousness is no longer
obliged to anyone, nor is he a debtor to anyone, as one is in the ordinary
course of activities. It is said:
devarñi-bhutäpta-nåëäà pitèëäà
na kiìkaro näyamåëé ca räjan
sarvätmanä yaù çaraëaà çaraëyaà
gato mukundaà parihåtya kartam
(Bhag. 11.5.41)
“Anyone who has completely surrendered unto Kåñëa, Mukunda, giving
up all other duties, is no longer a debtor, nor is he obliged to anyone—not the
demigods, nor the sages, nor the people in general, nor kinsmen, nor humanity,
nor forefathers.” That is the indirect hint given by Kåñëa to Arjuna in this
verse, and the matter will be more clearly explained in the following verses.
Bg 2.39
TEXT
39
TEXT
Wza
Tae_i>aihTaa Saa&:Yae buiÖYaaeRGae iTvMaa& é*<au )
buÖya Yau¢-ae YaYaa PaaQaR k-MaRbNDa& Pa[haSYaiSa )) 39 ))
eñä te ’bhihitä säìkhye
buddhir yoge tv imäà çåëu
buddhyä yukto yayä pärtha
karma-bandhaà prahäsyasi
eñä—all these; te—unto you; abhihitä—described;
çäìkhye—by analytical study; buddhiù—intelligence; yoge—work
without fruitive result; tu—but; imäm—this; çåëu—just hear; buddhyä—by
intelligence; yuktaù—dovetailed; yayä—by which; pärtha—O
son of Påthä; karma-bandham—bondage of reaction; prahäsyasi—you can be released from.
TRANSLATION
Thus far I have declared to you the analytical knowledge of
säìkhya philosophy. Now listen to the knowledge of yoga whereby one works
without fruitive result. O son of Påthä, when you act by such intelligence, you
can free yourself from the bondage of works.
PURPORT
According to the Nirukti, or the
Vedic dictionary, saìkhya means that which
describes phenomena in detail, and saìkhya refers
to that philosophy which describes the real nature of the soul. And yoga involves controlling the senses. Arjuna’s proposal
not to fight was based on sense gratification. Forgetting his prime duty, he
wanted to cease fighting because he thought that by not killing his relatives
and kinsmen he would be happier than by enjoying the kingdom by conquering his
cousins and brothers, the sons of Dhåtaräñöra. In both ways, the basic
principles were for sense gratification. Happiness derived from conquering them
and happiness derived by seeing kinsmen alive are both on the basis of persona1
sense gratification, for there is a sacrifice of wisdom and duty. Kåñëa,
therefore, wanted to explain to Arjuna that by killing the body of his
grandfather he would not be killing the soul proper, and He explained that all
individual persons, including the Lord Himself, are eternal individuals; they
were individuals in the past, they are individuals in the present, and they
will continue to remain individuals in the future, because all of us are
individual souls eternally, and we simply change our bodily dress in different
manners. But, actually, we keep our individuality even after liberation from
the bondage of material dress. An analytical study of the soul and the body has
been very graphically explained by Lord Kåñëa. And this descriptive knowledge
of the soul and the body from different angles of vision has been described
here as säìkhya, in terms of the Nirukti dictionary. This säìkhya
has nothing to do with the säìkhya philosophy
of the atheist Kapila. Long before the imposter Kapila’s säìkhya, the säìkhya philosophy
was expounded in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam by the
true Lord Kapila, the incarnation of Lord Kåñëa, who explained it to His
mother, Devahüti. It is clearly explained by Him that the Puruña, or the Supreme Lord, is active and that He
creates by looking over the prakåti. This is
accepted in the Vedas and in the Gétä. The description in the Vedas
indicates that the Lord glanced over the prakåti,
or nature, and impregnated it with atomic individuals souls. All these
individuals are working in the material world for sense gratification, and
under the spell of material energy they are thinking of being enjoyers. This
mentality is dragged to the last point of liberation when the living entity
wants to become one with the Lord. This is the last snare of mäyä or sense gratificatory illusion, and it is only
after many, many births of such sense gratificatory activities that a great
soul surrenders unto Väsudeva, Lord Kåñëa, thereby fulfilling the search after
the ultimate truth.
Arjuna has already accepted Kåñëa as his spiritual master by surrendering himself unto Him: çiñyas te ’haà çädhi mäà tväà prapannam. Consequently, Kåñëa will now tell him about the working process in buddhi-yoga, or karma-yoga, or in other words, the practice of devotional service only for the sense gratification of the Lord. This buddhi-yoga is clearly explained in Chapter Ten, verse ten, as being direct communion with the Lord, who is sitting as Paramätmä in everyone’s heart. But such communion does not take place without devotional service. One who is therefore situated in devotional or transcendental loving service to the Lord, or, in other words, in Kåñëa consciousness, attains to this stage of buddhi-yoga by the special grace of the Lord. The Lord says, therefore, that only to those who are always engaged in devotional service out of transcendental love does He award the pure knowledge of devotion in love. In that way the devotee can reach Him easily in the ever-blissful kingdom of God.
Thus the buddhi-yoga mentioned in this verse is the devotional
service of the Lord, and the word säìkhya mentioned
herein has nothing to do with the atheistic säìkhya-yoga
enunciated by the impostor Kapila. One should not, therefore,
misunderstand that the säìkhya-yoga mentioned
herein has any connection with the atheistic säìkhya. Nor
did that philosophy have any influence during that time; nor would Lord Kåñëa
care to mention such godless philosophical speculations. Real säìkhya philosophy is described by Lord Kapila in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam, but even that säìkhya has nothing to do with the current topics.
Here, säìkhya means analytical description of the
body and the soul. Lord Kåñëa made an analytical description of the soul just
to bring Arjuna to the point of buddhi-yoga, or bhakti-yoga. Therefore, Lord Kåñëa’s säìkhya and Lord Kapila’s säìkhya,
as described in the Bhägavatam; are one
and the same. They are all bhakti-yoga. He said,
therefore, that only the less intelligent class of men make a distinction
between säìkhya-yoga and bhakti-yoga.
Of course, atheistic säìkhya-yoga has nothing to do with bhakti-yoga, yet the unintelligent claim that the
atheistic säìkhya-yoga is referred to in the Bhagavad-gétä.
One should therefore understand that buddhi-yoga means to work in Kåñëa consciousness, in the full bliss and knowledge of devotional service. One who works for the satisfaction of the Lord only, however difficult such work may be, is working under the principles of buddhi-yoga and finds himself always in transcendental bliss. By such transcendental engagement, one achieves all transcendental qualities automatically, by the grace of the Lord, and thus his liberation is complete in itself, without his making extraneous endeavors to acquire knowledge. There is much difference between work in Kåñëa consciousness and work for fruitive results, especially in the matter of sense gratification for achieving results in terms of family or material happiness. Buddhi-yoga is therefore the transcendental quality of the work that we perform.
Bg 2.40
TEXT
40
TEXT
Naehai>a§-MaNaaXaae_iSTa
Pa[TYavaYaae Na ivÛTae )
SvLPaMaPYaSYa DaMaRSYa }aaYaTae MahTaae >aYaaTa( )) 40 ))
nehäbhikrama-näço ’sti
pratyaväyo na vidyate
sv-alpam apy asya dharmasya
träyate mahato bhayät
na—there is
not; iha—in this world; abhikrama—endeavoring;
näçaù—loss; asti—there
is; pratyaväyaù—diminution; na—never; vidyate—there
is; svalpam—little; api—although;
asya—of this; dharmasya—of
this occupation; träyate—releases; mahataù—of very great; bhayät—from
danger.
TRANSLATION
In this endeavor there is no loss or diminution, and a little
advancement on this path can protect one from the most dangerous type of fear.
PURPORT
Activity in Kåñëa consciousness, or acting for the benefit of
Kåñëa without expectation of sense gratification, is the highest transcendental
quality of work. Even a small beginning of such activity finds no impediment,
nor can that small beginning be lost at any stage. Any work begun on the
material plane has to be completed, otherwise the whole attempt becomes a
failure. But any work begun in Kåñëa consciousness has a permanent effect, even
though not finished. The performer of such work is therefore not at a loss even
if his work in Kåñëa consciousness is incomplete. One percent done in Kåñëa
consciousness bears permanent results, so that the next beginning is from the
point of two percent; whereas, in material activity, without a hundred percent
success, there is no profit. Ajämila performed his duty in some percentage of
Kåñëa consciousness, but the result he enjoyed at the end was a hundred
percent, by the grace of the Lord. There is a nice verse in this connection in Çrémad-Bhägavatam:
tyaktvä sva-dharmaà caraëämbujaà harer
bhajan na pakko ’tha patet tato yadi
yatra kva väbhadram abhüd amuñya kià
ko värtha äpto ’bhajatäà sva-dharmataù
“If someone gives up self-gratificatory pursuits and works in
Kåñëa consciousness and then falls down on account of not completing his work,
what loss is there on his part? And, what can one gain if one performs his
material activities perfectly?” (Bhäg. 1.5.17)
Or, as the Christians say, “What profiteth a man if he gain the whole world yet
suffers the loss of his eternal soul?”
Material activities and their results end with the body. But work
in Kåñëa consciousness carries the person again to Kåñëa consciousness, even
after the loss of the body. At least one is sure to have a chance in the next
life of being born again as a human being, either in the family of a great
cultured brähmaëa or in a rich aristocratic
family that will give one a further chance for elevation. That is the unique
quality of work done in Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 2.41
TEXT
41
TEXT
VYavSaaYaaiTMak-a
buiÖreke-h ku-åNaNdNa )
bhuXaa%a ùNaNTaaê buÖYaae_VYavSaaiYaNaaMa( )) 41 ))
vyavasäyätmikä buddhir
ekeha kuru-nandana
bahu-çäkhä hy anantäç ca
buddhayo ’vyavasäyinäm
vyavasäyätmikä—resolute
Kåñëa consciousness; buddhiù—intelligence; ekä—only one; iha—in this
world; kuru-nandana—O beloved child of the Kurus;
bahu-çäkhäù—various branches; hi—indeed; anantäù—unlimited;
ca—also; buddhayaù—intelligence;
avyavasäyinäm—of those who are not in Kåñëa
consciousness.
TRANSLATION
Those who are on this path are resolute in purpose, and their aim
is one. O beloved child of the Kurus, the intelligence of those who are
irresolute is many-branched.
PURPORT
A strong faith in Kåñëa consciousness that one should be elevated
to the highest perfection of life is called vyavasäyätmikä
intelligence. The Caitanya-caritämåta states:
‘çraddhä’-çabde viçväsa kahe sudåòha niçcaya
kåñëe bhakti kaile sarva-karma kåta haya
Faith means unflinching trust in something sublime. When one is
engaged in the duties of Kåñëa consciousness, he need not act in relationship
to the material world with obligations to family traditions, humanity, or
nationality. Fruitive activities are the engagements of one’s reactions from
past good or bad deeds. When one is awake in Kåñëa consciousness, he need no
longer endeavor for good results in his activities. When one is situated in
Kåñëa consciousness, all activities are on the absolute plane, for they are no
longer subject to dualities like good and bad. The highest perfection of Kåñëa
consciousness is renunciation of the material conception of life. This state is
automatically achieved by progressive Kåñëa consciousness. The resolute purpose
of a person in Kåñëa consciousness is based on knowledge (“Väsudevaù sarvam iti sa mahätmä sudurlabhaù”) by
which one comes to know perfectly that Väsudeva, or Kåñëa, is the root of all
manifested causes. As water on the root of a tree is automatically distributed
to the leaves and branches, in Kåñëa consciousness, one can render the highest
service to everyone—namely self, family, society, country, humanity, etc. If
Kåñëa is satisfied by one’s actions, then everyone will be satisfied.
Service in Kåñëa consciousness is, however, best practiced under
the able guidance of a spiritual master who is a bona fide representative of
Kåñëa, who knows the nature of the student and who can guide him to act in
Kåñëa consciousness. As such, to be well-versed in Kåñëa consciousness one has
to act firmly and obey the representative of Kåñëa, and one should accept the
instruction of the bona fide spiritual master as one’s mission in life. Çréla
Viçvanätha Cakravarté Öhäkur instructs us, in his famous prayers for the
spiritual master, as follows:
yasya prasädäd bhagavat-prasädo
yasyäprasädänna gatiù kuto ’pi
dhyäyaà stuvaàs tasya yaças tri-sandhyaà
vande guroù çré-caraëäravindam.
“By satisfaction of the spiritual master, the Supreme Personality
of Godhead becomes satisfied. And by not satisfying the spiritual master, there
is no chance of being promoted to the plane of Kåñëa consciousness. I should,
therefore, meditate and pray for his mercy three times a day, and offer my
respectful obeisances unto him, my spiritual master.”
The whole process, however, depends on perfect knowledge of the
soul beyond the conception of the body—not theoretically but practically, when
there is no longer chance for sense gratification manifested in fruitive
activities. One who is not firmly fixed in mind is diverted by various types of
fruitive acts.
Bg
2.42, Bg 2.43, Bg 2.42-43
TEXTS
42–43
TEXT
YaaiMaMaa&
PauiZPaTaa& vac& Pa[vdNTYaivPaiêTa" )
vedvadrTaa" PaaQaR NaaNYadSTaqiTa vaidNa" )) 42 ))
k-aMaaTMaaNa" SvGaRPara JaNMak-MaRf-l/Pa[daMa( )
i§-YaaivXaezbhul/a& >aaeGaEìYaRGaiTa& Pa[iTa )) 43 ))
yäm imäà puñpitäà väcaà
pravadanty avipaçcitaù
veda-väda-ratäù pärtha
nänyad astéti vädinaù
kämätmänaù svarga-parä
janma-karma-phala-pradäm
kriyä-viçeña-bahuläà
bhogaiçvarya-gatià prati
yäm imäm—all these; puñpitäm—flowery; väcam—words;
pravadanti—say; avipaçcitaù—men
with a poor fund of knowledge; veda-väda-ratäù—supposed
followers of the Vedas; pärtha—O son of Påthä; na—never; anyat—anything
else; asti—there is; iti—this;
vädinaù—advocates; käma-ätmänaù—desirous
of sense gratification; svarga-paräù—aiming to
achieve heavenly planets; janma-karma-phala-pradäm—resulting
in fruitive action, good birth, etc.; kriyä-viçeña—pompous
ceremonies; bahuläm—various; bhoga—sense enjoyment; aiçvarya—opulence;
gatim—progress; prati—towards.
TRANSLATION
Men of small knowledge are very much attached to the flowery words
of the Vedas, which recommend various fruitive activities for elevation to
heavenly planets, resultant good birth, power, and so forth. Being desirous of
sense gratification and opulent life, they say that there is nothing more than
this.
PURPORT
People in general are not very intelligent, and due to their
ignorance they are most attached to the fruitive activities recommended in the karma-käëòa portions of the Vedas.
They do not want anything more than sense gratificatory proposals for
enjoying life in heaven, where wine and women are available and material
opulence is very common. In the Vedas many
sacrifices are recommended for elevation to the heavenly planets, especially
the jyotiñöoma sacrifices. In fact, it is stated
that anyone desiring elevation to heavenly planets must perform these
sacrifices, and men with a poor fund of knowledge think that this is the whole
purpose of Vedic wisdom. It is very difficult for such inexperienced persons to
be situated in the determined action of Kåñëa consciousness. As fools are
attached to the flowers of poisonous trees without knowing the results of such
attractions, similarly unenlightened men are attracted by such heavenly
opulence and the sense enjoyment thereof.
In the karma-käëòa section of the Vedas it is said that those who perform the four monthly penances become eligible to drink the somarasa beverages to become immortal and happy forever. Even on this earth some are very eager to have somarasa to become strong and fit to enjoy sense gratifications. Such persons have no faith in liberation from material bondage, and they are very much attached to the pompous ceremonies of Vedic sacrifices. They are generally sensual, and they do not want anything other than the heavenly pleasures of life. It is understood that there are gardens called nandana-känana in which there is good opportunity for association with angelic, beautiful women and having a profuse supply of somarasa wine. Such bodily happiness is certainly sensual; therefore there are those who are purely attached to material, temporary happiness, as lords of the material world.
Bg 2.44
TEXT
44
TEXT
>aaeGaEìYaRPa[Sa¢-aNaa&
TaYaaPaôTaceTaSaaMa( )
VYavSaaYaaiTMak-a buiÖ" SaMaaDaaE Na ivDaqYaTae )) 44 ))
bhogaiçvarya-prasaktänäà
tayäpahåta-cetasäm
vyavasäyätmikä buddhiù
samädhau na vidhéyate
bhoga—material
enjoyment; aiçvarya—opulence; prasaktänäm—those who are so attached; tayä—by such things; apahåta-cetasäm—bewildered
in mind; vyavasäyätmikä—fixed determination; buddhiù—devotional service of the Lord; samädhau—in the controlled mind; na—never; vidhéyate—does
take place.
TRANSLATION
In the minds of those who are too attached to sense enjoyment and
material opulence, and who are bewildered by such things, the resolute
determination of devotional service to the Supreme Lord does not take place.
PURPORT
Samädhi means “fixed
mind.” The Vedic dictionary, the Nirukti, says, samyag ädhéyate ’sminn ätmatattva-yäthätmyam: “When the
mind is fixed for understanding the self, it is called samädhi.
“Samädhi is never possible for persons interested in material sense
enjoyment, nor for those who are bewildered by such temporary things. They are
more or less condemned by the process of material energy.
Bg 2.45
TEXT
45
TEXT
}aEGau<YaivzYaa
veda iNañEGau<Yaae >avaJauRNa )
iNaÜRNÜae iNaTYaSatvSQaae iNaYaaeRGa+aeMa AaTMavaNa( )) 45 ))
trai-guëya-viñayä vedä
nistrai-guëyo bhavärjuna
nirdvandvo nitya-sattva-stho
niryoga-kñema ätmavän
traiguëya—pertaining
to the three modes of material nature; viñayäù—on
the subject matter; vedäù—Vedic literatures; nistraiguëyaù—in a pure state of spiritual existence; bhava—be; arjuna—O Arjuna; nirdvandvaù—free
from the pains of opposites; nitya-sattva-sthaù—ever
remaining in sattva (goodness); niryoga-kñemaù—free from (the thought of) acquisition
and preservation; ätmavän—established in the
Self.
TRANSLATION
The Vedas mainly deal with the subject of the three modes of
material nature. Rise above these modes, O Arjuna. Be transcendental to
all of them. Be free from all dualities and from all anxieties for gain and
safety, and be established in the Self.
PURPORT
All material activities involve actions and reactions in the three
modes of material nature. They are meant for fruitive results, which cause
bondage in the material world. The Vedas deal
mostly with fruitive activities to gradually elevate the general public from
the field of sense gratification to a position on the transcendental plane.
Arjuna, as a student and friend of Lord Kåñëa, is advised to raise himself to
the transcendental position of Vedänta philosophy
where, in the beginning, there is brahma-jijïäsä, or
questions on the Supreme Transcendence. All the living entities who are in the
material world are struggling very hard for existence. For them the Lord, after
creation of the material world, gave the Vedic wisdom advising how to live and
get rid of the material entanglement. When the activities for sense
gratification, namely the karma-käëòa chapter,
are finished, then the chance for spiritual realization is offered in the form
of the Upaniñads, which are part of different Vedas, as the Bhagavad-gétä
is a part of the fifth Veda, namely the Mahäbhärata. The Upaniñads mark
the beginning of transcendental life.
As long as the material body exists, there are actions and reactions in the material modes. One has to learn tolerance in the face of dualities such as happiness and distress, or cold and warmth, and by tolerating such dualities become free from anxieties regarding gain and loss. This transcendental position is achieved in full Kåñëa consciousness when one is fully dependant on the good will of Kåñëa
Bg 2.46
TEXT
46
TEXT
YaavaNaQaR
odPaaNae SavRTa" SaMPl/uTaaedke- )
TaavaNSaveRzu vedezu b]aø<aSYa ivJaaNaTa" )) 46 ))
yävän artha udapäne
sarvataù samplutodake
tävän sarveñu vedeñu
brähmaëasya vijänataù
yävän—all that; arthaù—is meant; udapäne—in
a well of water; sarvataù—in all respects; sampluta-udake—in a great reservoir of water; tävän—similarly; sarveñu—in
all; vedeñu—Vedic literatures; brähmaëasya—of the man who knows the Supreme Brahman; vijänataù—of one who is in complete knowledge.
TRANSLATION
All purposes that are served by the small pond can at once be
served by the great reservoirs of water. Similarly, all the purposes of the
Vedas can be served to one who knows the purpose behind them.
PURPORT
The rituals and sacrifices mentioned in the karma-käëòa division of the Vedic literature are to
encourage gradual development of self-realization. And the purpose of
self-realization is clearly stated in the Fifteenth Chapter of the Bhagavad-gétä (15.15): the purpose of studying the Vedas is to know Lord Kåñëa, the primeval cause of
everything. So, self-realization means understanding Kåñëa and one’s eternal
relationship with Him. The relationship of the living entities with Kåñëa is
also mentioned in the Fifteenth Chapter of Bhagavad-gétä.
The living entities are parts and parcels of Kåñëa; therefore, revival
of Kåñëa consciousness by the individual living entity is the highest perfectional
stage of Vedic knowledge. This is confirmed in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam
(3.33.7) as follows:
aho bata çvapaco’to garéyän
yaj-jihvägre vartate näma tubhyam
tepus tapas te juhuvuù sasnur äryä
brahmänücur näma gåëanti ye te.
“O my Lord, a person who is chanting Your holy name, although born
of a low family like that of a cäëòäla [dog
eater], is situated on the highest platform of self-realization. Such a person
must have performed all kinds of penances and sacrifices according to Vedic
rituals and studied the Vedic literatures many, many times after taking his
bath in all the holy places of pilgrimage. Such a person is considered to be
the best of the Äryan family.” So one must be intelligent enough to understand
the purpose of the Vedas, without being attached
to the rituals only, and must not desire to be elevated to the heavenly
kingdoms for a better quality of sense gratification. It is not possible for
the common man in this age to follow all the rules and regulations of the Vedic
rituals and the injunctions of the Vedäntas and
the Upaniñads. It requires much time, energy,
knowledge and resources to execute the purposes of the Vedas.
This is hardly possible in this age. The best purpose of Vedic culture
is served, however, by chanting the holy name of the Lord, as recommended by
Lord Caitanya, the deliverer of all fallen souls. When Lord Caitanya was asked
by a great Vedic scholar, Prakäçänanda Sarasvaté, why He, the Lord, was
chanting the holy name of the Lord like a sentimentalist instead of studying Vedänta philosophy, the Lord replied that His spiritual
master found Him to be a great fool, and thus he asked Him to chant the holy
name of Lord Kåñëa. He did so, and became ecstatic like a madman. In this age
of Kali, most of the population is foolish and not adequately educated to
understand Vedänta philosophy; the best purpose
of Vedänta philosophy is served by inoffensively
chanting the holy name of the Lord. Vedänta is
the last word in Vedic wisdom, and the author and knower of the Vedänta philosophy is Lord Kåñëa; and the highest
Vedantist is the great soul who takes pleasure in chanting the holy name of the
Lord. That is the ultimate purpose of all Vedic mysticism.
Bg 2.47
TEXT
47
TEXT
k-MaR<YaevaiDak-arSTae
Maa f-le/zu k-dacNa )
Maa k-MaRf-l/heTau>aURMaaR Tae Sa®ae_STvk-MaRi<a )) 47 ))
karmaëy evädhikäras te
mä phaleñu kadäcana
mä karma-phala-hetur bhür
mä te saìgo ’stv akarmaëi
karmaëi—prescribed
duties; eva—certainly; adhikäraù—right;
te—of you; mä—never; phaleñu—in
the fruits; kadäcana—at any time; mä—never; karma-phala—in
the result of the work; hetuù—cause; bhüù—become; mä—never; te—of you; saìgaù—attachment;
astu—be there; akarmaëi—in
not doing.
TRANSLATION
You have a right to perform your prescribed duty, but you are not
entitled to the fruits of action. Never consider yourself to be the cause of
the results of your activities, and never be attached to not doing your duty.
PURPORT
There are three considerations here: prescribed duties, capricious
work, and inaction. Prescribed duties refer to activities performed while one
is in the modes of material nature. Capricious work means actions without the
sanction of authority, and inaction means not performing one’s prescribed
duties. The Lord advised that Arjuna not be inactive, but that he perform his
prescribed duty without being attached to the result. One who is attached to
the result of his work is also the cause of the action. Thus he is the enjoyer
or sufferer of the result of such actions.
As far as prescribed duties are concerned, they can be fitted into three subdivisions, namely routine work, emergency work and desired activities. Routine work, in terms of the scriptural injunctions, is done without desire for results. As one has to do it, obligatory work is action in the mode of goodness. Work with results becomes the cause of bondage; therefore such work is not auspicious. Everyone has his proprietory right in regard to prescribed duties, but should act without attachment to the result; such disinterested obligatory duties doubtlessly lead one to the path of liberation.
Arjuna was therefore advised by the Lord to fight as a matter of duty without attachment to the result. His nonparticipation in the battle is another side of attachment. Such attachment never leads one to the path of salvation. Any attachment, positive or negative, is cause for bondage. Inaction is sinful. Therefore, fighting as a matter of duty was the only auspicious path of salvation for Arjuna.
Bg 2.48
TEXT
48
TEXT
YaaeGaSQa"
ku-å k-MaaRi<a Sa®& TYa¤-a DaNaÅYa )
iSaÖyiSaÖyae" SaMaae >aUTva SaMaTv& YaaeGa oCYaTae )) 48 ))
yoga-sthaù kuru karmäëi
saìgaà tyaktvä dhanaïjaya
siddhy-asiddhyoù samo bhütvä
samatvaà yoga ucyate
yoga-sthaù—steadfast in
yoga; kuru—perform; karmäëi—your
duty; saìgam—attachment; tyaktvä—having
abandoned; dhanaïjaya—O Dhanaïjaya; siddhi-asiddhyoù—in success and failure; samaù—the same; bhütvä—having
become; samatvam—evenness of mind; yogaù—yoga; ucyate—is called.
TRANSLATION
Be steadfast in yoga, O Arjuna. Perform your duty and abandon all
attachment to success or failure. Such evenness of mind is called yoga.
PURPORT
Kåñëa tells Arjuna that he should act in yoga.
And what is that yoga? Yoga means to
concentrate the mind upon the Supreme by controlling the ever-disturbing
senses. And who is the Supreme? The Supreme is the Lord. And because He Himself
is telling Arjuna to fight, Arjuna has nothing to do with the results of the
fight. Gain or victory are Kåñëa’s concern; Arjuna is simply advised to act
according to the dictation of Kåñëa. The following of Kåñëa’s dictation is real
yoga, and this is practiced in the process called
Kåñëa consciousness. By Kåñëa consciousness only can one give up the sense of
proprietorship. One has to become the servant of Kåñëa, or the servant of the
servant of Kåñëa. That is the right way to discharge duty in Kåñëa
consciousness, which alone can help one to act in yoga.
Arjuna is a kñatriya, and as such he is participating in the varëäçrama-dharma institution. It is said in the Viñëu Puraëa that in the varëäçrama-dharma, the whole aim is to satisfy Viñëu. No one should satisfy himself, as is the rule in the material world, but one should satisfy Kåñëa. So, unless one satisfies Kåñëa, one cannot correctly observe the principles of varëäçrama-dharma. Indirectly, Arjuna was advised to act as Kåñëa told him.
Bg 2.49
TEXT
49
TEXT
dUre<a
ùvr& k-MaR buiÖYaaeGaaÖNaÅYa )
buÖaE Xar<aMaiNvC^ k*-Pa<aa" f-l/heTav" )) 49 ))
düreëa hy avaraà karma
buddhi-yogäd dhanaïjaya
buddhau çaraëam anviccha
kåpaëäù phala-hetavaù
düreëa—by
discarding it at a long distance; hi—certainly; avaram—abominable; karma—activities;
buddhi-yogät—on the strength of Kåñëa
consciousness; dhanaïjaya—O conqueror of wealth; buddhau—in such consciousness; çaraëam—full
surrender; anviccha—desire; kåpaëäù—the misers; phala-hetavaù—those
desiring fruitive action.
TRANSLATION
O Dhanaïjaya, rid yourself of all fruitive activities by
devotional service, and surrender fully to that consciousness. Those who want
to enjoy the fruits of their work are misers.
PURPORT
One who has actually come to understand one’s constitutional
position as the eternal servitor of the Lord gives up all engagements save
working in Kåñëa consciousness. As already explained, buddhi-yoga
means transcendental loving service to the Lord. Such devotional service
is the right course of action for the living entity. Only misers desire to
enjoy the fruit of their own work just to be further entangled in material
bondage. Except for work in Kåñëa consciousness, all activities are abominable
because they continually bind the worker to the cycle of birth and death. One
should therefore never desire to be the cause of work. Everything should be
done in Kåñëa consciousness for the satisfaction of Kåñëa. Misers do not know
how to utilize the assets of riches which they acquire by good fortune or by
hard labor. One should spend all energies working in Kåñëa consciousness, and
that will make one’s life successful. Like the misers, unfortunate persons do
not employ their human energy in the service of the Lord.
Bg 2.50
TEXT
50
TEXT
buiÖYau¢-ae
JahaTaqh o>ae Sauk*-TaduZk*-Tae )
TaSMaaÛaeGaaYa YauJYaSv YaaeGa" k-MaRSau k-aEXal/Ma( )) 50 ))
buddhi-yukto jahätéha
ubhe sukåta-duñkåte
tasmäd yogäya yujyasva
yogaù karmasu kauçalam
buddhi-yuktaù—one who is
engaged in devotional service; jahäti—can get rid
of; iha—in this life; ubhe—in
both; sukåta-duñkåte—in good and bad results; tasmät—therefore; yogäya—for
the sake of devotional service; yujyasva—be so
engaged; yogaù—Kåñëa consciousness; karmasu—in all activities; kauçalam—art.
TRANSLATION
A man engaged in devotional service rids himself of both good and
bad actions even in this life. Therefore strive for yoga, O Arjuna, which is
the art of all work.
PURPORT
Since time immemorial each living entity has accumulated the
various reactions of his good and bad work, As such, he is continuously
ignorant of his real constitutional position. One’s ignorance can be removed by
the instruction of the Bhagavad-gétä which
teaches one to surrender unto Lord Çré Kåñëa in all respects and become
liberated from the chained victimization of action and reaction, birth after
birth. Arjuna is therefore advised to act in Kåñëa consciousness, the purifying
process of resultant action.
Bg 2.51
TEXT
51
TEXT
k-MaRJa&
buiÖYau¢-a ih f-l&/ TYa¤-a MaNaqiz<a" )
JaNMabNDaiviNaMauR¢-a" Pad& GaC^NTYaNaaMaYaMa( )) 51 ))
karma-jaà buddhi-yuktä hi
phalaà tyaktvä manéñiëaù
janma-bandha-vinirmuktäù
padaà gacchanty anämayam
karma-jam—because of
fruitive activities; buddhi-yuktäù—being done in
devotional service; hi—certainly; phalam—results; tyaktvä—giving
up; manéñiëaù—devotees who are great sages; janma-bandha—the bondage of birth and death; vinirmuktäù—liberated souls;
padam—position; gacchanti—reach; anämayam—without miseries.
TRANSLATION
The wise, engaged in devotional service, take refuge in the Lord,
and free themselves from the cycle of birth and death by renouncing the fruits
of action in the material world. In this way they can attain that state beyond
all miseries.
PURPORT
The liberated living entities seek that place where there are no
material miseries. The Bhägavatam says:
samäçritä ye padapallava-plavaà
mahat-padaà puëya-yaço muräreù
bhävambudhir vatsa-padaà paraà padaà
paraà padaà yad vipadäà na teñäm
(Bhäg. 10.14.58)
“For one who has accepted the boat of the lotus feet of the Lord,
who is the shelter of the cosmic manifestation and is famous as Mukunda or the
giver of mukti, the ocean of the material world
is like the water contained in a calf’s hoofprint. Param
padam, or the place where there are no material miseries, or Vaikuëöha,
is his goal, not the place where there is danger in every step of life.”
Owing to ignorance, one does not know that this material world is
a miserable place where there are dangers at every step. Out of ignorance only,
less intelligent persons try to adjust to the situation by fruitive activities,
thinking that resultant actions will make them happy. They do not know that no
kind of material body anywhere within the universe can give life without
miseries. The miseries of life, namely birth, death, old age and diseases, are
present everywhere within the material world. But one who understands his real
constitutional position as the eternal servitor of the Lord, and thus knows the
position of the Personality of Godhead, engages himself in the transcendental
loving service of the Lord. Consequently he becomes qualified to enter into the
Vaikuëöha planets, where there is neither material, miserable life, nor the
influence of time and death. To know one’s constitutional position means to
know also the sublime position of the Lord. One who wrongly thinks that the
living entity’s position and the Lord’s position are on the same level is to be
understood to be in darkness and therefore unable to engage himself in the
devotional service of the Lord. He becomes a lord himself and thus paves the
way for the repetition of birth and death. But one who, understanding that his
position is to serve, transfers himself to the service of the Lord, at once
becomes eligible for Vaikuëöhaloka. Service for the cause of the Lord is called
karma-yoga or buddhi-yoga,
or in plain words, devotional service to the Lord.
Bg 2.52
TEXT
52
TEXT
Yada Tae
Maaehk-il/l&/ buiÖVYaRiTaTairZYaiTa )
Tada GaNTaaiSa iNaveRd& é[aeTaVYaSYa é[uTaSYa c )) 52 ))
yadä te moha-kalilaà
buddhir vyatitariñyati
tadä gantäsi nirvedaà
çrotavyasya çrutasya ca
yadä—when; te—your; moha—illusory; kalilam—dense forest; buddhiù—transcendental
service with intelligence; vyatitariñyati—surpasses;
tadä—at that time; gantäsi—you
shall go; nirvedam—callousness; çrotavyasya—all that is to be heard; çrutasya—all that is already heard; ca—also.
TRANSLATION
When your intelligence has passed out of the dense forest of
delusion, you shall become indifferent to all that has been heard and all that
is to be heard.
PURPORT
There are many good examples in the lives of the great devotees of
the Lord of those who became indifferent to the rituals of the Vedas simply by devotional service to the Lord. When a
person factually understands Kåñëa and his relationship with Kåñëa, he
naturally becomes completely indifferent to the rituals of fruitive activities,
even though an experienced brähmaëa. Çré
Mädhavendra Puré, a great devotee and äcärya in
the line of the devotees, says:
sandhyä-vandana bhadram astu bhavato bhoù snäna tubhyaà namo
bho deväù pitaraç ca tarpaëa-vidhau nähaà kñamaù kñamyatäm
yatra kväpi niñadya yädava-kulottamasya kaàsa-dviñaù
smäraà smäram aghaà harämi tad alaà manye kim anyena me.
“O Lord, in my prayers three times a day, all glory to You.
Bathing, I offer my obeisances unto You. O demigods! O forefathers! Please
excuse me for my inability to offer you my respects. Now wherever I sit, I can
remember the great descendant of the Yadu dynasty [Kåñëa], the enemy of Kaàsa,
and thereby I can free myself from all sinful bondage. I think this is
sufficient for me.”
The Vedic rites and rituals are imperative for neophytes:
comprehending all kinds of prayer three times a day, taking a bath early in the
morning, offering respects to the forefathers, etc. But, when one is fully in
Kåñëa consciousness and is engaged in His transcendental loving service, one
becomes indifferent to all these regulative principles because he has already
attained perfection. If one can reach the platform of understanding by service
to the Supreme Lord Kåñëa, he has no longer to execute different types of
penances and sacrifices as recommended in revealed scriptures. And, similarly,
if one has not understood that the purpose of the Vedas is
to reach Kåñëa and simply engages in the rituals, etc., then he is uselessly
wasting time in such engagements. Persons in Kåñëa consciousness transcend the
limit of çabda-brahma, or the range of the Vedas and Upaniñads.
Bg 2.53
TEXT
53
TEXT
é[uiTaivPa[iTaPaàa
Tae Yada SQaaSYaiTa iNaêl/a )
SaMaaDaavcl/a buiÖSTada YaaeGaMavaPSYaiSa )) 53 ))
çruti-vipratipannä te
yadä sthäsyati niçcalä
samädhäv acalä buddhis
tadä yogam aväpsyasi
çruti—Vedic
revelation; vipratipannä—without being influenced
by the fruitive results of the Vedas; te—your; yadä—when; sthäsyati—remains;
niçcalä—unmoved; samädhau—in
transcendental consciousness, or Kåñëa consciousness; acalä—unflinching;
buddhiù—intelligence; tadä—at
that time; yogam—self-realization; aväpsyasi—you will achieve.
TRANSLATION
When your mind is no longer disturbed by the flowery language of
the Vedas, and when it remains fixed in the trance of self-realization, then
you will have attained the Divine consciousness.
PURPORT
To say that one is in samädhi is to
say that one has fully realized Kåñëa consciousness; that is, one in full samädhi has realized Brahman, Paramätmä and Bhagavän.
The highest perfection of self-realization is to understand that one is
eternally the servitor of Kåñëa and that one’s only business is to discharge
one’s duties in Kåñëa consciousness. A Kåñëa conscious person, or unflinching
devotee of the Lord, should not be disturbed by the flowery language of the Vedas nor be engaged in fruitive activities for
promotion to the heavenly kingdom. In Kåñëa consciousness, one comes directly
into communion with Kåñëa, and thus all directions from Kåñëa may be understood
in that transcendental state. One is sure to achieve results by such activities
and attain conclusive knowledge. One has only to carry out the orders of Kåñëa
or His representative, the spiritual master.
Bg 2.54
TEXT
54
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac
iSQaTaPa[jSYa k-a >aaza SaMaaiDaSQaSYa ke-Xav )
iSQaTaDaq" ik&- Pa[>aazeTa ik-MaaSaqTa v]JaeTa ik-Ma( )) 54 ))
arjuna
uväca
sthita-prajïasya kä bhäñä
samädhi-sthasya keçava
sthita-dhéù kià prabhäñeta
kim äséta vrajeta kim
arjuna uväca—Arjuna said;
sthita-prajïasya—of one who is situated in fixed
Kåñëa consciousness; kä—what; bhäñä—language; samädhi-sthasya—of
one situated in trance; keçava—O Kåñëa; sthita-dhéù—one fixed in Kåñëa consciousness; kim—what; prabhäñeta—speak;
kim—how; äséta—does
remain; vrajeta—walk; kim—how.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said: What are the symptoms of one whose consciousness is
thus merged in Transcendence? How does he speak, and what is his language? How
does he sit, and how does he walk?
PURPORT
As there are symptoms for each and every man, in terms of his
particular situation, similarly one who is Kåñëa conscious has his particular
nature—talking, walking, thinking, feeling, etc. As a rich man has his symptoms
by which he is known as a rich man, as a diseased man has his symptoms, by
which he is known as diseased, or as a learned man has his symptoms, so a man
in transcendental consciousness of Kåñëa has specific symptoms in various
dealings. One can know his specific symptoms from the Bhagavad-gétä.
Most important is how the man in Kåñëa consciousness speaks, for speech is the
most important quality of any man. It is said that a fool is undiscovered as
long as he does not speak, and certainly a well-dressed fool cannot be
identified unless he speaks, but as soon as he speaks, he reveals himself at
once. The immediate symptom of a Kåñëa conscious man is that he speaks only of
Kåñëa and of matters relating to Him. Other symptoms then automatically follow,
as stated below.
Bg 2.55
TEXT
55
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
Pa[JahaiTa Yada k-aMaaNSavaRNPaaQaR MaNaaeGaTaaNa( )
AaTMaNYaevaTMaNaa Tauí" iSQaTaPa[jSTadaeCYaTae )) 55 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
prajahäti yadä kämän
sarvän pärtha mano-gatän
ätmany evätmanä tuñöaù
sthita-prajïas tadocyate
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; prajahäti—gives up; yadä—when; kämän—desires
for sense gratification; sarvän—of all varieties;
pärtha—O son of Påthä; manaù-gatän—of
mental concoction; ätmani—in the pure state of
the soul; eva—certainly; ätmanä—by
the purified mind; tuñöaù—satisfied; sthita-prajïaù—transcendentally situated; tadä—at that time; ucyate—is
said.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: O Pärtha, when a man gives up all varieties
of sense desire which arise from mental concoction, and when his mind finds
satisfaction in the self alone, then he is said to be in pure transcendental
consciousness.
PURPORT
The Bhägavatam affirms that any
person who is fully in Kåñëa consciousness, or devotional service of the Lord,
has all the good qualities of the great sages, whereas a person who is not so
transcendentally situated has no good qualifications, because he is sure to be
taking refuge in his own mental concoctions. Consequently, it is rightly said
herein that one has to give up all kinds of sense desire manufactured by mental
concoction. Artificially, such sense desires cannot be stopped. But if one is
engaged in Kåñëa consciousness, then, automatically, sense desires subside
without extraneous efforts. Therefore, one has to engage himself in Kåñëa
consciousness without hesitation, for this devotional service will instantly
help one on to the platform of transcendental consciousness. The highly
developed soul always remains satisfied in himself by realizing himself as the
eternal servitor of the Supreme Lord. Such a transcendentally situated person
has no sense desires resulting from petty materialism; rather, he remains
always happy in his natural position of eternally serving the Supreme Lord.
Bg 2.56
TEXT
56
TEXT
du"%eZvNauiÜGanMaNaa"
Sau%ezu ivGaTaSPa*h" )
vqTaraGa>aYa§-aeDa" iSQaTaDaqMauRiNaåCYaTae )) 56 ))
duùkheñv anudvigna-manäù
sukheñu vigata-spåhaù
véta-räga-bhaya-krodhaù
sthita-dhér munir ucyate
duùkheñu—in the
threefold miseries; anudvigna-manäù—without being
agitated in mind; sukheñu—in happiness; vigata-spåhaù—without being too interested; véta—free from; räga—attachment;
bhaya—fear; krodhaù—anger;
sthita-dhéù—one who is steady; muniù—sage; ucyate—is
called.
TRANSLATION
One who is not disturbed in spite of the threefold miseries, who
is not elated when there is happiness, and who is free from attachment, fear
and anger, is called a sage of steady mind.
PURPORT
The word muni means one who can
agitate his mind in various ways for mental speculation without coming to a
factual conclusion. It is said that every muni has
a different angle of vision, and unless a muni differs
from other munis, he cannot be called a muni in the strict sense of the term. Näsau munir yasya mataà na binnam. But a sthita-dhé-muni as mentioned herein by the Lord, is
different from an ordinary muni The sthita-dhé-muni is always in Kåñëa consciousness, for
he has exhausted all his business of creative speculation. He has surpassed the
stage of mental speculations and has come to the conclusion that Lord Çré
Kåñëa, or Väsudeva, is everything. He is called a muni fixed
in mind. Such a fully Kåñëa conscious person is not at all disturbed by the
onslaughts of the threefold miseries, for he accepts all miseries as the mercy
of the Lord, thinking himself only worthy of more trouble due to his past
misdeeds; and he sees that his miseries, by the grace of the Lord, are
minimized to the lowest. Similarly, when he is happy he gives credit to the
Lord, thinking himself unworthy of the happiness; he realizes that it is due
only to the Lord’s grace that he is in such a comfortable condition and able to
render better service to the Lord. And, for the service of the Lord, he is
always daring and active and is not influenced by attachment or aversion.
Attachment means accepting things for one’s own sense gratification, and
detachment is the absence of such sensual attachment. But one fixed in Kåñëa
consciousness has neither attachment nor detachment because his life is
dedicated in the service of the Lord. Consequently he is not at all angry even
when his attempts are unsuccessful. A Kåñëa conscious person is always steady
in his determination.
Bg 2.57
TEXT
57
TEXT
Ya"
SavR}aaNai>aòehSTataTPa[aPYa éu>aaéu>aMa( )
Naai>aNaNdiTa Na Üeií TaSYa Pa[ja Pa[iTaiïTaa )) 57 ))
yaù sarvatränabhisnehas
tat tat präpya çubhäçubham
näbhinandati na dveñöi
tasya prajïä pratiñöhitä
yaù—one who; sarvatra—everywhere; anabhisnehaù—without
affection; tat—that; tat—that;
präpya—achieving; çubha—good;
açubham—evil; na—never;
abhinandati—prays; na—never;
dveñöi—envies; tasya—his;
prajïä—perfect knowledge; pratiñöhita—fixed.
TRANSLATION
He who is without attachment, who does not rejoice when he obtains
good, nor lament when he obtains evil, is firmly fixed in perfect knowledge.
PURPORT
There is always some upheaval in the material world which may be
good or evil. One who is not agitated by such material upheavals, who is
unaffected by good and evil, is to be understood to be fixed in Kåñëa
consciousness. As long as one is in the material world there is always the
possibility of good and evil because this world is full of duality. But one who
is fixed in Kåñëa consciousness is not affected by good and evil because he is
simply concerned with Kåñëa, who is all good absolute. Such consciousness in
Kåñëa situates one in a perfect transcendental position called, technically, samädhi.
Bg 2.58
TEXT
58
TEXT
Yada
Sa&hrTae caYa& kU-MaaeR_®aNaqv SavRXa" )
wiNd]Yaa<aqiNd]YaaQaeR>YaSTaSYa Pa[ja Pa[iTaiïTaa )) 58 ))
yadä saàharate cäyaà
kürmo ’ìgänéva sarvaçaù
indriyäëéndriyärthebhyas
tasya prajïä pratiñöhitä
yadä—when; saàharate—winds up; ca—also;
ayam—all these; kürmaù—tortoise;
aìgäni—limbs; iva—like;
sarvaçaù—altogether; indriyäni—senses; indriya-arthebhyaù—from the sense objects; tasya—his; prajïä—consciousness;
pratiñöhitä—fixed up.
TRANSLATION
One who is able to withdraw his senses from sense objects, as the
tortoise draws his limbs within the shell, is to be understood as truly
situated in knowledge.
PURPORT
The test of a yogé, devotee, or
self-realized soul is that he is able to control the senses according to his
plan. Most people, however, are servants of the senses and are thus directed by
the dictation of the senses. That is the answer to the question as to how the yogé is situated. The senses are compared to venomous
serpents. They want to act very loosely and without restriction. The yogé, or the devotee, must be very strong to control
the serpents—like a snake charmer. He never allows them to act independantly.
There are many injunctions in the revealed scriptures; some of them are do-not’s,
and some of them are do’s. Unless one is able to follow the do’s and the
do-not’s, restricting oneself from sense enjoyment, it is not possible to be
firmly fixed in Kåñëa consciousness. The best example, set herein, is the
tortoise. The tortoise can at any moment wind up his senses and exhibit them
again at any time for particular purposes. Similarly, the senses of the Kåñëa
conscious persons are used only for some particular purpose in the service of
the Lord and are withdrawn otherwise. Keeping the senses always in the service
of the Lord is the example set by the analogy of the tortoise, who keeps the
senses within.
Bg 2.59
TEXT
59
TEXT
ivzYaa
iviNavTaRNTae iNaraharSYa deihNa" )
rSavJa| rSaae_PYaSYa Par& d*îa iNavTaRTae )) 59 ))
viñayä vinivartante
nirähärasya dehinaù
rasa-varjaà raso ’py asya
paraà dåñövä nivartate
viñayäù—objects for
sense enjoyment; vinivartante—are practiced to be
refrained from; nirähärasya—by negative
restrictions; dehinaù—for the embodied; rasa-varjam—giving up the taste; rasaù—sense of enjoyment; api—although
there is; asya—his; param—far
superior things; dåñövä—by experiencing; nivartate—ceases from.
TRANSLATION
The embodied soul may be restricted from sense enjoyment, though
the taste for sense objects remains. But, ceasing such engagements by
experiencing a higher taste, he is fixed in consciousness.
PURPORT
Unless one is transcendentally situated, it is not possible to
cease from sense enjoyment. The process of restriction from sense enjoyment by
rules and regulations is something like restricting a diseased person from
certain types of eatables. The patient, however, neither likes such
restrictions, nor loses his taste for eatables. Similarly, sense restriction by
some spiritual process like añöäìga-yoga, in the
matter of yama, niyama, äsana, präëäyäma, pratyähära, dharaëä, dhyäna, etc., is recommended for
less intelligent persons who have no better knowledge. But one who has tasted
the beauty of the Supreme Lord Kåñëa, in the course of his advancement in Kåñëa
consciousness, no longer has a taste for dead material things. Therefore,
restrictions are there for the less intelligent neophytes in the spiritual
advancement of life, but such restrictions are only good if one actually has a
taste for Kåñëa consciousness. When one is actually Kåñëa conscious, he
automatically loses his taste for pale things.
Bg 2.60
TEXT
60
TEXT
YaTaTaae ùiPa
k-aENTaeYa PauåzSYa ivPaiêTa" )
wiNd]Yaai<a Pa[MaaQaqiNa hriNTa Pa[Sa>a& MaNa" )) 60 ))
yatato hy api kaunteya
puruñasya vipaçcitaù
indriyäëi pramäthéni
haranti prasabhaà manaù
yatataù—while
endeavoring; hi—certainly; api—in spite of; kaunteya—O
son of Kunté; puruñasya—of the man; vipaçcitaù—full of discriminating knowledge; indriyäëi—the senses; pramäthéni—stimulated;
haranti—throws forcefully; prasabhaà—by force; manaù—the
mind.
TRANSLATION
The senses are so strong and impetuous, O Arjuna, that they
forcibly carry away the mind even of a man of discrimination who is endeavoring
to control them.
PURPORT
There are many learned sages, philosophers and transcendentalists
who try to conquer the senses, but in spite of their endeavors, even the
greatest of them sometimes fall victim to material sense enjoyment due to the
agitated mind. Even Viçvämitra, a great sage and perfect yogé, was misled by Menakä into sex enjoyment, although
the yogé was endeavoring for sense control with
severe types of penance and yoga practice. And,of
course, there are so many similar instances in the history of the world.
Therefore, it is very difficult to control the mind and the senses without
being fully Kåñëa conscious. Without engaging the mind in Kåñëa, one cannot
cease such material engagements. A practical example is given by Çré
Yämunäcärya, a great saint and devotee, who says: “Since my mind has been
engaged in the service of the lotus feet of Lord Kåñëa, and I have been
enjoying an ever new transcendental humor, whenever I think of sex life with a
woman, my face at once turns from it, and I spit at the thought.”
Kåñëa consciousness is such a transcendentally nice thing that automatically material enjoyment becomes distasteful. It is as if a hungry man had satisfied his hunger by a sufficient quantity of nutritious eatables. Mahäräja Ambaréña also conquered a great yogé, Durväsä Muni, simply because his mind was engaged in Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 2.61
TEXT
61
TEXT
TaaiNa
SavaRi<a Sa&YaMYa Yau¢- AaSaqTa MaTPar" )
vXae ih YaSYaeiNd]Yaai<a TaSYa Pa[ja Pa[iTaiïTaa )) 61 ))
täni sarväëi saàyamya
yukta äséta mat-paraù
vaçe hi yasyendriyäëi
tasya prajïä pratiñöhitä
täni—those senses;
sarväëi—all; saàyamya—keeping
under control; yuktaù—being engaged; äséta—being so situated; mat-paraù—in
relationship with Me; vaçe—in full subjugation; hi—certainly; yasya—one
whose; indriyäëi—senses; tasya—his;
prajïä—consciousness; pratiñöhitä—fixed.
TRANSLATION
One who restrains his senses and fixes his consciousness upon Me
is known as a man of steady intelligence.
PURPORT
That the highest conception of yoga
perfection is Kåñëa consciousness is clearly explained in this verse. And,
unless one is Kåñëa conscious, it is not at all possible to control the senses.
As cited above, the great sage Durväsä Muni picked a quarrel with Mahäräja
Ambaréña, and Durväsä Muni unnecessarily became angry out of pride and
therefore could not check his senses. On the other hand, the King, although not
as powerful a yogé as the sage, but a devotee of
the Lord, silently tolerated all the sage’s injustices and thereby emerged
victorious. The King was able to control his senses because of the following
qualifications, as mentioned in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam:
sa vai manaù kåñëa-padäravindayor
vacäàsi vaikuëöha-guëänavarëane
karau harer mandira-märjanädiñu
çrutià cakäräcyuta-sat-kathodaye
mukunda-liìgälaya-darçane dåçau
tad-bhåtya-gätra-sparçe’ìga-saìgamam
ghräëaà ca tat-päda-saroja-saurabhe
çrémat-tulasyä rasanäà tad-arpite
pädau hareù kñetra-padänusarpaëe
çiro håñékeça-padäbhivandane
kämaà ca däsye na tu käma-kämyayä
yathottamaçloka-janäçrayä ratiù
“King Ambaréña fixed his mind on the lotus feet of Lord Kåñëa,
engaged his words in describing the abode of the Lord, his hands in cleansing
the temple of the Lord, his ears in hearing the pastimes of the Lord, his eyes
in seeing the form of the Lord, his body in touching the body of the devotee,
his nostrils in smelling the flavor of the flowers offered to the lotus feet of
the Lord, his tongue in tasting the tulasé leaves
offered to Him, his legs in traveling to the holy place where His temple is
situated, his head in offering obeisances unto the Lord, and his desires in
fulfilling the desires of the Lord … and all these qualifications made him fit
to become a mat-paraù devotee of the Lord.” (Bhäg. 9.4.18-20)
The word mat-paraù is most
significant in this connection. How one can become a mat-paraù
is described in the life of Mahäräja Ambaréña. Çréla Baladeva
Vidyäbhüñaëa, a great scholar and äcärya in the
line of the mat-paraù, remarks: “mad-bhakti-prabhävena sarvendriya-vijaya-pürvikä svätma
dåñöiù sulabheti bhävaù.” “The senses can be completely controlled only
by the strength of devotional service to Kåñëa.” Also the example of fire is
sometimes given: “As the small flames within burn everything within the room,
similarly Lord Viñëu, situated in the heart of the yogé,
burns up all kinds of impurities.” The Yoga-sütra
also prescribes meditation on Viñëu, and not meditation on the void. The
so-called yogés who meditate on something which
is not the Viñëu form simply waste their time in a vain search after some
phantasmagoria. We have to be Kåñëa conscious—devoted to the Personality of
Godhead. This is the aim of the real yoga.
Bg 2.62
TEXT
62
TEXT
DYaaYaTaae
ivzYaaNPau&Sa" Sa®STaezUPaJaaYaTae )
Sa®aTSaÅaYaTae k-aMa" k-aMaaT§-aeDaae_i>aJaaYaTae )) 62 ))
dhyäyato viñayän puàsaù
saìgas teñüpajäyate
saìgät saïjäyate kämaù
kämät krodho ’bhijäyate
dhyayataù—while
contemplating; viñayän—sense objects; puàsaù—of the person; saìgaù—attachment;
teñu—in the sense objects; upajäyate—develops; saìgät—attachment;
saïjäyate—develops; kämaù—desire;
kämät—from desire; krodhaù—anger;
abhijäyate—becomes manifest.
TRANSLATION
While contemplating the objects of the senses, a person develops
attachment for them, and from such attachment lust develops, and from lust
anger arises.
PURPORT
One who is not Kåñëa conscious is subjected to material desires
while contemplating the objects of senses. The senses require real engagements,
and if they are not engaged in the transcendental loving service of the Lord,
they will certainly seek engagement in the service of materialism. In the
material world everyone, including Lord Çiva and Lord Brahmä—to say nothing of
other demigods in the heavenly planets—is subjected to the influence of sense
objects, and the only method to get out of this puzzle of material existence is
to become Kåñëa conscious. Lord Çiva was deep in meditation, but when Pärvaté
agitated him for sense pleasure, he agreed to the proposal, and as a result
Kärtikeya was born. When Haridäsa Öhäkur was a young devotee of the Lord, he
was similarly allured by the incarnation of Mäyä Devé, but Haridäsa easily passed
the test because of his unalloyed devotion to Lord Kåñëa. As illustrated in the
above-mentioned verse of Çré Yämunäcärya, a sincere devotee of the Lord shuns
all material sense enjoyment due to his higher taste for spiritual enjoyment in
the association of the Lord. That is the secret of success. One who is not,
therefore, in Kåñëa consciousness, however powerful he may be in controlling
the senses by artificial repression, is sure ultimately to fail, for the
slightest thought of sense pleasure will agitate him to gratify his desires.
Bg 2.63
TEXT
63
TEXT
§-aeDaaÙviTa
SaMMaaeh" SaMMaaehaTSMa*iTaiv>a]Ma" )
SMa*iTa>a]&Xaad(buiÖNaaXaae buiÖNaaXaaTPa[<aXYaiTa )) 63 ))
krodhäd bhavati sammohaù
sammohät småti-vibhramaù
småti-bhraàçäd buddhi-näço
buddhi-näçät praëaçyati
krodhät—from anger; bhavati—takes place; saàmohaù—perfect
illusion; saàmohät—from illusion; småti—of memory; vibhramaù—bewilderment;
småti-bhraàçät—after bewilderment of memory; buddhi-näçaù—loss of intelligence; buddhi-näçät—and from loss of intelligence; praëaçyati—falls down.
TRANSLATION
From anger, delusion arises, and from delusion bewilderment of
memory. When memory is bewildered, intelligence is lost, and when intelligence
is lost, one falls down again into the material pool.
PURPORT
By development of Kåñëa consciousness one can know that everything
has its use in the service of the Lord. Those who are without knowledge of
Kåñëa consciousness artificially try to avoid material objects, and as a
result, although they desire liberation from material bondage, they do not
attain to the perfect stage of renunciation. On the other hand, a person in
Kåñëa consciousness knows how to use everything in the service of the Lord;
therefore he does not become a victim of material consciousness. For example,
for an impersonalist, the Lord, or the Absolute, being impersonal, cannot eat.
Whereas an impersonalist tries to avoid good eatables, a devotee knows that
Kåñëa is the supreme enjoyer and that He eats all that is offered to Him in
devotion. So, after offering good eatables to the Lord, the devotee takes the
remnants, called prasädam. Thus everything
becomes spiritualized and there is no danger of a downfall. The devotee takes prasädam in Kåñëa consciousness, whereas the nondevotee
rejects it as material. The impersonalist, therefore, cannot enjoy life due to
his artificial renunciation; and for this reason, a slight agitation of the
mind pulls him down again into the pool of material existence. It is said that
such a soul, even though rising up to the point of liberation, falls down again
due to his not having support in devotional service.
Bg 2.64
TEXT
64
TEXT
raGaÜezivMau¢E-STau
ivzYaaiNaiNd]YaEêrNa( )
AaTMavXYaEivRDaeYaaTMaa Pa[SaadMaiDaGaC^iTa )) 64 ))
räga-dveña-vimuktais tu
viñayän indriyaiç caran
ätma-vaçyair vidheyätmä
prasädam adhigacchati
räga—attachment; dveña—detachment; vimuktaiù—by
one who has been free from such things; tu—but; viñayän—sense objects; indriyaiù—by
the senses; caran—acting; ätma-vaçyaiù—one
who has control over; vidheyätmä—one who follows
regulated freedom; prasädam—the mercy of the
Lord; adhigacchati—attains.
TRANSLATION
One who can control his senses by practicing the regulated
principles of freedom can obtain the complete mercy of the Lord and thus become
free from all attachment and aversion.
PURPORT
It is already explained that one may externally control the senses
by some artificial process, but unless the senses are engaged in the
transcendental service of the Lord, there is every chance of a fall. Although
the person in full Kåñëa consciousness may apparently be on the sensual plane,
because of his being Kåñëa conscious, he has no attachment to sensual
activities. The Kåñëa conscious person is concerned only with the satisfaction
of Kåñëa, and nothing else. Therefore he is transcendental to all attachment.
If Kåñëa wants, the devotee can do anything which is ordinarily undesirable;
and if Kåñëa does not want, he shall not do that which he would have ordinarily
done for his own satisfaction. Therefore to act or not to act is within his
control because he acts only under the direction of Kåñëa. This consciousness
is the causeless mercy of the Lord, which the devotee can achieve in spite of
his being attached to the sensual platform.
Bg 2.65
TEXT
65
TEXT
Pa[Saade
SavRdu"%aNaa& haiNarSYaaePaJaaYaTae )
Pa[SaàceTaSaae ùaéu buiÖ" PaYaRviTaïTae )) 65 ))
prasäde sarva-duùkhänäà
hänir asyopajäyate
prasanna-cetaso hy äçu
buddhiù paryavatiñöhate
prasäde—on
achievement of the causeless mercy of the Lord; sarva—all;
duùkhänäm—material miseries; häniù—destruction; asya—his;
upajäyate—takes place; prasanna-cetasaù—of
the happy-minded; hi—certainly; äçu—very soon; buddhiù—intelligence;
pari—sufficiently; avatiñöhate—established.
TRANSLATION
For one who is so situated in the Divine consciousness, the
threefold miseries of material existence exist no longer; in such a happy
state, one’s intelligence soon becomes steady.
Bg 2.66
TEXT
66
TEXT
NaaiSTa
buiÖrYau¢-SYa Na caYau¢-SYa >aavNaa )
Na ca>aavYaTa" XaaiNTarXaaNTaSYa ku-Ta" Sau%Ma( )) 66 ))
nästi buddhir ayuktasya
na cäyuktasya bhävanä
na cäbhävayataù çäntir
açäntasya kutaù sukham
na asti—there cannot
be; buddhiù—transcendental intelligence; ayuktasya—of one who is not connected (with Kåñëa
consciousness); na—neither; ca—and; ayuktasya—of one
devoid of Kåñëa consciousness; bhävanä—mind fixed
in happiness; na—neither; ca—and;
abhävayataù—one who is not fixed; çäntiù—peace; açäntasya—of
the unpeaceful; kutaù—where is; sukham—happiness.
TRANSLATION
One who is not in transcendental consciousness can have neither a
controlled mind nor steady intelligence, without which there is no possibility
of peace. And how can there be any happiness without peace?
PURPORT
Unless one is in Kåñëa consciousness, there is no possibility of
peace. So it is confirmed in the Fifth Chapter (5.29) that when one understands
that Kåñëa is the only enjoyer of all the good results of sacrifice and
penance, and that He is the proprietor of all universal manifestations, that He
is the real friend of all living entities, then only can one have real peace.
Therefore, if one is not in Kåñëa consciousness, there cannot be a final goal
for the mind. Disturbance is due to want of an ultimate goal, and when one is
certain that Kåñëa is the enjoyer, proprietor and friend of everyone and everything,
then one can, with a steady mind, bring about peace. Therefore, one who is
engaged without a relationship with Kåñëa is certainly always in distress and
is without peace, however much one may make a show of peace and spiritual
advancement in life. Kåñëa consciousness is a self-manifested peaceful
condition which can be achieved only in relationship with Kåñëa.
Bg 2.67
TEXT
67
TEXT
wiNd]Yaa<aa&
ih crTaa& YaNMaNaae_NauivDaqYaTae )
TadSYa hriTa Pa[ja& vaYauNaaRviMavaM>aiSa )) 67 ))
indriyäëäà hi caratäà
yan mano ’nuvidhéyate
tad asya harati prajïäà
väyur nävam ivämbhasi
indriyäëäm—of the
senses; hi—certainly; caratäm—while
herding over; yat—that; manaù—mind;
anuvidhéyate—becomes constantly engaged; tat—that; asya—his; harati—takes away; prajïäm—intelligence;
väyuù—wind; nävam—a
boat; iva—like; ambhasi—on
the water.
TRANSLATION
As a boat on the water is swept away by a strong wind, even one of
the senses on which the mind focuses can carry away a man’s intelligence.
PURPORT
Unless all of the senses are engaged in the service of the Lord,
even one of them engaged in sense gratification can deviate the devotee from
the path of transcendental advancement. As mentioned in the life of Mahäräja
Ambaréña, all of the senses must be engaged in Kåñëa consciousness, for that is
the correct technique for controlling the mind.
Bg 2.68
TEXT
68
TEXT
TaSMaaÛSYa
Mahabahae iNaGa*hqTaaiNa SavRXa" )
wiNd]Yaa<aqiNd]YaaQaeR>YaSTaSYa Pa[ja Pa[iTaiïTaa )) 68 ))
tasmäd yasya mahä-bäho
nigåhétäni sarvaçaù
indriyäëéndriyärthebhyas
tasya prajïä pratiñöhitä
tasmät—therefore; yasya—of one’s; mahä-bäho—O
mighty-armed one; nigåhétäni—so curbed down; sarvaçaù—all around; indriyäëi—the
senses; indriya-arthebhyaù—for the sake of sense
objects; tasya—his;
prajïä—intelligence; pratiñöhitä—fixed.
TRANSLATION
Therefore, O mighty-armed, one whose senses are restrained from
their objects is certainly of steady intelligence.
PURPORT
As enemies are curbed by superior force, similarly, the senses can
be curbed not by any human endeavor, but only by keeping them engaged in the
service of the Lord. One who has understood this—that only by Kåñëa
consciousness is one really established in intelligence and that one should
practice this art under the guidance of a bona fide spiritual master—is called sädhaka, or a suitable candidate for liberation.
Bg 2.69
TEXT
69
TEXT
Yaa iNaXaa
SavR>aUTaaNaa& TaSYaa& JaaGaiTaR Sa&YaMaq )
YaSYaa& JaaGa]iTa >aUTaaiNa Saa iNaXaa PaXYaTaae MauNae" )) 69 ))
yä niçä sarva-bhütänäà
tasyäà jägarti saàyamé
yasyäà jägrati bhütäni
sä niçä paçyato muneù
yä—what; niçä—is night; sarva—all;
bhütänäm—of living entities; tasyäm—in that; jägarti—wakeful;
saàyamé—the self-controlled; yasyäm—in which; jägrati—awake;
bhütäni—all beings; sä—that
is; niçä—night; paçyataù—for
the introspective; muneù—sage.
TRANSLATION
What is night for all beings is the time of awakening for the
self-controlled; and the time of awakening for all beings is night for the
introspective sage.
PURPORT
There are two classes of intelligent men. The one is intelligent
in material activities for sense gratification, and the other is introspective
and awake to the cultivation of self-realization. Activities of the
introspective sage, or thoughtful man, are night for persons materially
absorbed. Materialistic persons remain asleep in such a night due to their
ignorance of self-realization. The introspective sage remains alert in the
“night” of the materialistic men. The sage feels transcendental pleasure in the
gradual advancement of spiritual culture, whereas the man in materialistic
activities, being asleep to self-realization, dreams of varieties of sense
pleasure, feeling sometimes happy and sometimes distressed in his sleeping
condition. The introspective man is always indifferent to materialistic
happiness and distress. He goes on with his self-realization activities
undisturbed by material reaction.
Bg 2.70
TEXT
70
TEXT
AaPaUYaRMaa<aMacl/Pa[iTaï&
SaMaud]MaaPa" Pa[ivXaiNTa YaÜTa( )
TaÜTk-aMaa Ya& Pa[ivXaiNTa SaveR
Sa XaaiNTaMaaPanaeiTa Na k-aMak-aMaq ))
70 ))
äpüryamäëam acala-pratiñöhaà
samudram äpaù praviçanti yadvat
tadvat kämä yaà praviçanti sarve
sa çäntim äpnoti na käma-kämé
äpüryamäëam—always
filled; acala-pratiñöham—steadily situated; samudram—the ocean; äpaù—water;
praviçanti—enter; yadvat—as;
tadvat—so; kämäù—desires;
yam—unto one; praviçanti—enter;
sarve—all; saù—that
person; çäntim—peace; äpnoti—achieves;
na—not; käma-kämé—one
who desires to fulfill desires.
TRANSLATION
A person who is not disturbed by the incessant flow of
desires—that enter like rivers into the ocean which is ever being filled but is
always still—can alone achieve peace, and not the man who strives to satisfy
such desires.
PURPORT
Although the vast ocean is always filled with water, it is always,
especially during the rainy season, being filled with much more water. But the
ocean remains the same—steady; it is not agitated, nor does it cross beyond the
limit of its brink. That is also true of a person fixed in Kåñëa consciousness.
As long as one has the material body, the demands of the body for sense
gratification will continue. The devotee, however, is not disturbed by such
desires because of his fullness. A Kåñëa conscious man is not in need of
anything because the Lord fulfills all his material necessities. Therefore he
is like the ocean—always full in himself. Desires may come to him like the
waters of the rivers that flow into the ocean, but he is steady in his
activities, and he is not even slightly disturbed by desires for sense
gratification. That is the proof of a Kåñëa conscious man—one who has lost all
inclinations for material sense gratification, although the desires are
present. Because he remains satisfied in the transcendental loving service of
the Lord, he can remain steady, like the ocean, and therefore enjoy full peace.
Others, however, who fulfill desires even up to the limit of liberation, what
to speak of material success, never attain peace. The fruitive workers, the
salvationists, and also the yogés who are after
mystic powers, are all unhappy because of unfulfilled desires. But the person
in Kåñëa consciousness is happy in the service of the Lord, and he has no
desires to be fulfilled. In fact, he does not even desire liberation from the
so-called material bondage. The devotees of Kåñëa have no material desires, and
therefore they are in perfect peace.
Bg 2.71
TEXT
71
TEXT
ivhaYa
k-aMaaNYa" SavaRNPauMaa&êriTa iNa"SPa*h" )
iNaMaRMaae iNarhªar" Sa XaaiNTaMaiDaGaC^iTa )) 71 ))
vihäya kämän yaù sarvän
pumäàç carati niùspåhaù
nirmamo nirahaìkäraù
sa çäntim adhigacchati
vihäya—after giving
up; kämän—all material desires for sense
gratification; yaù—the person; sarvän—all; pumän—a
person; carati—lives; nihñpåhaù
—desireless; nirmamaù—without a sense of
proprietorship; nirahaìkäraù—without false ego; saù—all; çäntim—perfect
peace; adhigacchati—attains.
TRANSLATION
A person who has given up all desires for sense gratification, who
lives free from desires, who has given up all sense of proprietorship and is
devoid of false ego—he alone can attain real peace.
PURPORT
To become desireless means not to desire anything for sense
gratification. In other words, desire for becoming Kåñëa conscious is actually
desirelessness. To understand one’s actual position as the eternal servitor of
Kåñëa, without falsely claiming this material body to be oneself and without
falsely claiming proprietorship over anything in the world, is the perfect
stage of Kåñëa consciousness. One who is situated in this perfect stage knows
that because Kåñëa is the proprietor of everything, therefore everything must
be used for the satisfaction of Kåñëa. Arjuna did not want to fight for his own
sense satisfaction, but when he became fully Kåñëa conscious he fought because
Kåñëa wanted him to fight. For himself there was no desire to fight, but for
Kåñëa the same Arjuna fought to his best ability. Desire for the satisfaction
of Kåñëa is really desirelessness; it is not an artificial attempt to abolish
desires. The living entity cannot be desireless or senseless, but he does have
to change the quality of the desires. A materially desireless person certainly
knows that everything belongs to Kåñëa (éçäväsyam idaà
sarvam), and therefore he does not falsely claim proprietorship over
anything. This transcendental knowledge is based on self-realization—namely,
knowing perfectly well that every living entity is the eternal part and parcel
of Kåñëa in spiritual identity. and therefore the eternal position of the
living entity is never on the level of Kåñëa or greater than Him. This
understanding of Kåñëa consciousness is the basic principle of real peace.
Bg 2.72
TEXT
72
TEXT
Wza b]aøq
iSQaiTa" PaaQaR NaENaa& Pa[aPYa ivMauùiTa )
iSQaTvaSYaaMaNTak-ale/_iPa b]øiNavaR<aMa*C^iTa )) 72 ))
eñä brähmé sthitiù pärtha
nainäà präpya vimuhyati
sthitväsyäm anta-käle ’pi
brahma-nirväëam åcchati
eñä—this; brähmé—spiritual; sthitiù—situation;
pärtha—O son of Påthä; na—never;
enäm—this; präpya—achieving;
vimuhyati—bewilders; sthitvä—being
so situated; asyäm—being so; anta-käle—at the end of life; api—also;
brahma-nirväëam—spiritual (kingdom of God); åcchati—attains.
TRANSLATION
That is the way of the spiritual and godly life, after attaining
which a man is not bewildered. Being so situated, even at the hour of death,
one can enter into the kingdom of God.
PURPORT
One can attain Kåñëa consciousness or divine life at once, within
a second—or one may not attain such a state of life even after millions of
births. It is only a matter of understanding and accepting the fact. Khaöväìga
Mahäräja attained this state of life just a few minutes before his death, by surrendering
unto Kåñëa. Nirväëa means ending the process of
materialistic life. According to Buddhist philosophy, there is only void after
the completion of this material life, but Bhagavad-gétä teaches
differently. Actual life begins after the completion of this material life. For
the gross materialist it is sufficient to know that one has to end this
materialistic way of life, but for persons who are spiritually advanced, there
is another life after this materialistic life. Before ending this life, if one
fortunately becomes Kåñëa conscious, he at once attains the stage of Brahma-nirväëa. There is no difference between the
kingdom of God and the devotional service of the Lord. Since both of them are
on the absolute plane, to be engaged in the transcendental loving service of
the Lord is to have attained the spiritual kingdom. In the material world there
are activities of sense gratification, whereas in the spiritual world there are
activities of Kåñëa consciousness. Attainment of Kåñëa consciousness even during
this life is immediate attainment of Brahman, and one who is situated in Kåñëa
consciousness has certainly already entered into the kingdom of God.
Brahman is just the opposite of matter. Therefore brähmé sthitiù means “not on the platform of material activities.” Devotional service of the Lord is accepted in the Bhagavad-gétä as the liberated stage. Therefore, brähmé-sthitiù is liberation from material bondage.
Çréla Bhaktivinode Öhäkur has summarized this Second Chapter of the Bhagavad-gétä as being the contents for the whole text. In the Bhagavad-gétä, the subject matters are karma-yoga, jïäna-yoga, and bhakti-yoga. In the Second Chapter karma-yoga and jïäna-yoga have been clearly discussed, and a glimpse of bhakti-yoga has also been given, as the contents for the complete text.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports to the Second Chapter of the
Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of its Contents.
Bg 3. Karma-yoga
CHAPTER
THREE
Karma-yoga
Bg 3.1
TEXT
1
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac
JYaaYaSaq ceTk-MaR<aSTae MaTaa buiÖJaRNaadRNa )
TaiTk&- k-MaRi<a gaaere Maa& iNaYaaeJaYaiSa ke-Xav )) 1 ))
arjuna
uväca
jyäyasé cet karmaëas te
matä buddhir janärdana
tat kià karmaëi ghore mäà
niyojayasi keçava
arjunaù—Arjuna; uväca—said; jyäyasé—speaking
very highly; cet—although;
karmaëaù—than fruitive action; te—your; matä—opinion; buddhiù—intelligence;
janärdana—O Kåñëa; tat—therefore;
kim—why; karmaëi—in
action; ghore—ghastly; mäm—me;
niyojayasi—engaging me; keçava—O
Kåñëa.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said: O Janärdana, O Keçava, why do You urge me to engage
in this ghastly warfare, if You think that intelligence is better than fruitive
work?
PURPORT
The Supreme Personality of Godhead Çré Kåñëa has very elaborately
described the constitution of the soul in the previous chapter, with a view to
deliver His intimate friend Arjuna from the ocean of material grief. And the
path of realization has been recommended: buddhi-yoga, or
Kåñëa consciousness. Sometimes Kåñëa consciousness is misunderstood to be
inertia, and one with such a misunderstanding often withdraws to a secluded
place to become fully Kåñëa conscious by chanting the holy name of Lord Kåñëa.
But without being trained in the philosophy of Kåñëa consciousness, it is not
advisable to chant the holy name of Kåñëa in a secluded place where one may
acquire only cheap adoration from the innocent public. Arjuna also thought of
Kåñëa consciousness or buddhi-yoga, or
intelligence in spiritual advancement of knowledge, as something like
retirement from active life and the practice of penance and austerity at a
secluded place. In other words, he wanted to skillfully avoid the fighting by
using Kåñëa consciousness as an excuse. But as a sincere student, he placed the
matter before his master and questioned Kåñëa as to his best course of action.
In answer, Lord Kåñëa elaborately explained karma-yoga, or
work in Kåñëa consciousness, in this Third Chapter.
Bg 3.2
TEXT
2
TEXT
VYaaiMaé[e<aev
vaKYaeNa buiÖ& MaaehYaSaqv Mae )
Tadek&- vd iNaiêTYa YaeNa é[eYaae_hMaaPanuYaaMa( )) 2 ))
vyämiçreëeva väkyena
buddhià mohayaséva me
tad ekaà vada niçcitya
yena çreyo ’ham äpnuyäm
vyämiçreëa—by
equivocal; iva—as; väkyena—words;
buddhim—intelligence; mohayasi—bewildering;
iva—as; me—my; tat—therefore; ekam—only
one; vada—please tell; niçcitya—ascertaining;
yena—by which; çreyaù—real
benefit; aham—I; äpnuyäm—may
have it.
TRANSLATION
My intelligence is bewildered by Your equivocal instructions.
Therefore, please tell me decisively what is most beneficial for me.
PURPORT
In the previous chapter, as a prelude to the Bhagavad-gétä, many different paths were explained,
such as säìkhya-yoga, buddhi-yoga, control of the
senses by intelligence, work without fruitive desire, and the position of the
neophyte. This was all presented unsystematically. A more organized outline of
the path would be necessary for action and understanding. Arjuna, therefore,
wanted to clear up these apparently confusing matters so that any common man
could accept them without misinterpretation. Although Kåñëa had no intention of
confusing Arjuna by any jugglery of words, Arjuna could not follow the process
of Kåñëa consciousness—either by inertia or active service. In other words, by
his questions he is clearing the path of Kåñëa consciousness for all students
who seriously want to understand the mystery of the Bhagavad-gétä.
Bg 3.3
TEXT
3
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
l/aeke-_iSMaiNÜivDaa iNaïa Paura Pa[ae¢-a MaYaaNaga )
jaNaYaaeGaeNa Saa&:YaaNaa& k-MaRYaaeGaeNa YaaeiGaNaaMa( )) 3 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
loke ’smin dvi-vidhä niñöhä
purä proktä mayänagha
jïäna-yogena säìkhyänäà
karma-yogena yoginäm
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; loke—in the world; asmin—this; dvi-vidhä—two
kinds of; niñöhä—faith; purä—formerly;
proktä—was said; mayä—by
Me; anagha—O sinless one; jïäna-yogena—by
the linking process of knowledge; säìkhyänäm—of
the empiric philosophers; karma-yogena—by the
linking process of devotion; yoginäm—of the
devotees.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: O sinless Arjuna, I have already explained
that there are two classes of men who realize the Self. Some are inclined to
understand Him by empirical, philosophical speculation, and others are inclined
to know Him by devotional work.
PURPORT
In the Second Chapter, verse 39, the Lord explained two kinds of
procedures—namely säìkhya-yoga and karma-yoga, or buddhi-yoga. In
this verse, the Lord explains the same more clearly. Säìkhya-yoga,
or the analytical study of the nature of spirit and matter, is the
subject matter for persons who are inclined to speculate and understand things
by experimental knowledge and philosophy. The other class of men work in Kåñëa
consciousness, as it is explained in the 61st verse of the Second Chapter. The
Lord has explained, also in the 39th verse, that by working by the principles
of buddhi-yoga, or Kåñëa consciousness, one can
be relieved from the bonds of action; and, furthermore, there is no flaw in the
process. The same principle is more clearly explained in the 61st verse—that
this buddhi-yoga is to depend entirely on the
Supreme (or more specifically, on Kåñëa), and in this way all the senses can be
brought under control very easily. Therefore, both the yogas
are interdependant, as religion and philosophy. Religion without
philosophy is sentiment, or sometimes fanaticism, while philosophy without
religion is mental speculation. The ultimate goal is Kåñëa, because the
philosophers who are also sincerely searching after the Absolute Truth come in
the end to Kåñëa consciousness. This is also stated in the Bhagavad-gétä. The whole process is to understand the
real position of the self in relation to the Superself. The indirect process is
philosophical speculation, by which, gradually, one may come to the point of
Kåñëa consciousness; and the other process is directly connecting with
everything in Kåñëa consciousness. Of these two, the path of Kåñëa
consciousness is better because it does not depend on purifying the senses by a
philosophical process. Kåñëa consciousness is itself the purifying process, and
by the direct method of devotional service it is simultaneously easy and
sublime.
Bg 3.4
TEXT
4
TEXT
Na
k-MaR<aaMaNaarM>aaàEZk-MYa| Pauåzae_énuTae )
Na c SaNNYaSaNaadev iSaiÖ& SaMaiDaGaC^iTa )) 4 ))
na karmaëäm anärambhän
naiñkarmyaà puruño ’çnute
na ca sannyasanäd eva
siddhià samadhigacchati
na—without; karmaëäm—of the prescribed duties; anärambhät—non-performance; naiñkarmyam—freedom
from reaction; puruñah—man; açnute—achieve; na—nor; ca—also; sannyasanät—by
renunciation; eva—simply; siddhim—success;
samadhigacchati—attain.
TRANSLATION
Not by merely abstaining from work can one achieve freedom from
reaction, nor by renunciation alone can one attain perfection.
PURPORT
The renounced order of life can be accepted upon being purified by
the discharge of the prescribed form of duties which are laid down just to
purify the heart of materialistic men. Without purification, one cannot attain
success by abruptly adopting the fourth order of life (sannyäsa).
According to the empirical philosophers, simply by adopting sannyäsa, or retiring from fruitive activities, one at
once becomes as good as Näräyaëa. But Lord Kåñëa does not approve this
principle. Without purification of heart, sannyäsa is
simply a disturbance to the social order. On the other hand, if someone takes
to the transcendental service of the Lord, even without discharging his
prescribed duties, whatever he may be able to advance in the cause is accepted
by the Lord (buddhi-yoga). Svalpam apy asya dharmasya
träyate mahato bhayät. Even a slight performance of such a principle
enables one to overcome great difficulties.
Bg 3.5
TEXT
5
TEXT
Na ih
k-iêT+a<aMaiPa JaaTau iTaïTYak-MaRk*-Ta( )
k-aYaRTae ùvXa" k-MaR SavR" Pa[k*-iTaJaEGauR<aE" )) 5 ))
na hi kaçcit kñaëam api
jätu tiñöhaty akarma-kåt
käryate hy avaçaù karma
sarvaù prakåti-jair guëaiù
na—nor; hi—certainly; kaçcit—anyone;
kñaëam—even a moment; api—also;
jätu—even; tiñöhati—stands;
akarma-kåt—without doing something; käryate—is forced to do; hi—certainly;
avaçaù—helplessly; karma—work;
sarvaù—everything; prakåti-jaiù—out
of the modes of material nature; guëaiù—by the
qualities.
TRANSLATION
All men are forced to act helplessly according to the impulses
born of the modes of material nature; therefore no one can refrain from doing
something, not even for a moment.
PURPORT
It is not a question of embodied life, but it is the nature of the
soul to be always active. Without the presence of the spirit soul, the material
body cannot move. The body is only a dead vehicle to be worked by the spirit
soul, which is always active and cannot stop even for a moment. As such, the
spirit soul has to be engaged in the good work of Kåñëa consciousness,
otherwise it will be engaged in occupations dictated by illusory energy. In
contact with material energy, the spirit soul acquires material modes, and to
purify the soul from such affinities it is necessary to engage in the
prescribed duties enjoined in the çästras. But if
the soul is engaged in his natural function of Kåñëa consciousness, whatever he
is able to do is good for him. The Çrémad-Bhägavatam affirms
this:
tyaktvä sva-dharmaà caraëämbujaà harer
bhajann apakvo ’tha patet tato yadi
yatra kva väbhadram abhüd amuñya kià
ko värtha äpto ’bhajatäà sva-dharmataù.
“If someone takes to Kåñëa consciousness, even though he may not
follow the prescribed duties in the çästras nor
execute the devotional service properly, and even though he may fall down from
the standard, there is no loss or evil for him. But if he carries out all the
injunctions for purification in the çästras, what
does it avail him if he is not Kåñëa conscious?” (Bhäg. 1.5.17)
So the purificatory process is necessary for reaching this point of Kåñëa
consciousness. Therefore, sannyäsa, or any
purificatory process, is to help reach the ultimate goal of becoming Kåñëa
conscious, without which everything is considered a failure.
Bg 3.6
TEXT
6
TEXT
k-MaeRiNd]Yaai<a
Sa&YaMYa Ya AaSTae MaNaSaa SMarNa( )
wiNd]YaaQaaRiNvMaU!aTMaa iMaQYaacar" Sa oCYaTae )) 6 ))
karmendriyäëi saàyamya
ya äste manasä smaran
indriyärthän vimüòhätmä
mithyäcäraù sa ucyate
karma-indriyäëi—the five
working sense organs; saàyamya—controlling; yaù—anyone who; äste—remains;
manasä—by mind; smaran—thinking;
indriya-arthän—sense objects; vimüòha—foolish; ätmä—soul;
mithyä-äcäraù—pretender; saù—he;
ucyate—is called.
TRANSLATION
One who restrains the senses and organs of action, but whose mind
dwells on sense objects, certainly deludes himself and is called a pretender.
PURPORT
There are many pretenders who refuse to work in Kåñëa
consciousness but make a show of meditation, while actually dwelling within the
mind upon sense enjoyment. Such pretenders may also speak on dry philosophy in
order to bluff sophisticated followers, but according to this verse these are
the greatest cheaters. For sense enjoyment one can act in any capacity of the
social order, but if one follows the rules and regulations of his particular
status, he can make gradual progress in purifying his existence. But he who
makes a show of being a yogé, while actually
searching for the objects of sense gratification, must be called the greatest
cheater, even though he sometimes speaks of philosophy. His knowledge has no
value because the effects of such a sinful man’s knowledge are taken away by
the illusory energy of the Lord. Such a pretender’s mind is always impure, and
therefore his show of yogic meditation has no value whatsoever.
Bg 3.7
TEXT
7
TEXT
YaiSTviNd]Yaai<a
MaNaSaa iNaYaMYaar>aTae_JauRNa )
k-MaeRiNd]YaE" k-MaRYaaeGaMaSa¢-" Sa iviXaZYaTae )) 7 ))
yas tv indriyäëi manasä
niyamyärabhate ’rjuna
karmendriyaiù karma-yogam
asaktaù sa viçiñyate
yaù—one who; tu—but; indriyäëi—senses;
manasä—by the mind; niyamya—regulating;
ärabhate—begins; arjuna—O
Arjuna; karma-indriyaiù—by the active sense
organs; karma-yogam—devotion; asaktaù—without attachment; saù—he;
viçiñyate—by far the better.
TRANSLATION
On the other hand, he who controls the senses by the mind and
engages his active organs in works of devotion, without attachment, is by far
superior.
PURPORT
Instead of becoming a pseudo-transcendentalist for the sake of
wanton living and sense enjoyment, it is far better to remain in one’s own
business and execute the purpose of life, which is to get free from material
bondage and enter into the kingdom of God. The prime svärtha-gati,
or goal of self-interest, is to reach Viñëu. The whole institution of varëa and äçrama is
designed to help us reach this goal of life. A householder can also reach this
destination by regulated service in Kåñëa consciousness. For self-realization,
one can live a controlled life, as prescribed in the çästras,
and continue carrying out his business without attachment, and in that way make
progress. Such a sincere person who follows this method is far better situated
than the false pretender who adopts show-bottle spiritualism to cheat the
innocent public. A sincere sweeper in the street is far better than the
charlatan meditator who meditates only for the sake of making a living.
Bg 3.8
TEXT
8
TEXT
iNaYaTa&
ku-å k-MaR Tv& k-MaR JYaaYaae ùk-MaR<a" )
XarqrYaa}aaiPa c Tae Na Pa[iSaÖyedk-MaR<a" )) 8 ))
niyataà kuru karma tvaà
karma jyäyo hy akarmaëaù
çaréra-yäträpi ca te
na prasiddhyed akarmaëaù
niyatam—prescribed; kuru—do; karma—duties; tvam—you; karma—work; jyäyaù—better; hi—than; akarmaëaù—without work; çaréra—bodily;
yäträ—maintenance; api—even;
ca—also; te—your; na—never; prasiddhyet—effected;
akarmaëaù—without work.
TRANSLATION
Perform your prescribed duty, for action is better than inaction.
A man cannot even maintain his physical body without work.
PURPORT
There are many pseudo-meditators who misrepresent themselves as
belonging to high parentage, and great professional men who falsely pose that
they have sacrificed everything for the sake of advancement in spiritual life.
Lord Kåñëa did not want Arjuna to become a pretender, but that he perform his
prescribed duties as set forth for kñatriyas. Arjuna
was a householder and a military general, and therefore it was better for him
to remain as such and perform his religious duties as prescribed for the
householder kñatriya. Such activities gradually
cleanse the heart of a mundane man and free him from material contamination.
So-called renunciation for the purpose of maintenance is never approved by the
Lord, nor by any religious scripture. After all, one has to maintain one’s body
and soul together by some work. Work should not be given up capriciously,
without purification of materialistic propensities. Anyone who is in the
material world is certainly possessed of the impure propensity for lording it
over material nature, or, in other words, for sense gratification. Such
polluted propensities have to be cleared. Without doing so, through prescribed
duties, one should never attempt to become a so-called transcendentalist,
renouncing work and living at the cost of others.
Bg 3.9
TEXT
9
TEXT
YajaQaaRTk-MaR<aae_NYa}a
l/aek-ae_Ya& k-MaRbNDaNa" )
TadQa| k-MaR k-aENTaeYa Mau¢-Sa®" SaMaacr )) 9 ))
yajïärthät karmaëo ’nyatra
loko ’yaà karma-bandhanaù
tad-arthaà karma kaunteya
mukta-saìgaù samäcara
yajïa-arthät—only for the
sake of Yajïa, or Viñëu; karmaëaù—work done; anyatra—otherwise; lokaù—this
world; ayam—this; karma-bandhanaù—bondage
by work; tat—Him; artham—for
the sake of; karma—work; kaunteya—O
son of Kunté; mukta-saìgaù—liberated from
association; samäcara—do it perfectly.
TRANSLATION
Work done as a sacrifice for Viñëu has to be performed, otherwise
work binds one to this material world. Therefore, O son of Kunté, perform your
prescribed duties for His satisfaction, and in that way you will always remain
unattached and free from bondage.
PURPORT
Since one has to work even for the simple maintenance of the body,
the prescribed duties for a particular social position and quality are so made
that that purpose can be fulfilled. Yajïa means
Lord Viñëu, or sacrificial performances. All sacrificial performances also are
meant for the satisfaction of Lord Viñëu. The Vedas enjoin:
yajïo vai viñëuù. In other words, the same
purpose is served whether one performs prescribed yajïas
or directly serves Lord Viñëu. Kåñëa consciousness is therefore
performance of yajïa as it is prescribed in this
verse. The varëäçrama institution also aims at
this for satisfying Lord Viñëu. “Varëäçramäcära-vatä
puruñeëa paraù pumän/viñëur ärädhyate…” (Viñëu
Puräëa 3.8.8) Therefore one has to work for the satisfaction of Viñëu.
Any other work done in this material world wilI be a cause of bondage, for both
good and evil work have their reactions, and any reaction binds the performer.
Therefore, one has to work in Kåñëa consciousness to satisfy Kåñëa (or Viñëu);
and while performing such activities one is in a liberated stage. This is the
great art of doing work, and in the beginning this process requires very expert
guidance. One should therefore act very diligently, under the expert guidance
of a devotee of Lord Kåñëa, or under the direct instruction of Lord Kåñëa
Himself (under whom Arjuna had the opportunity to work). Nothing should be
performed for sense gratification, but everything should be done for the
satisfaction of Kåñëa. This practice will not only save one from the reaction
of work, but will also gradually elevate one to transcendental loving service
of the Lord, which alone can raise one to the kingdom of God.
Bg 3.10
TEXT
10
TEXT
SahYaja"
Pa[Jaa" Sa*îa Pauraevac Pa[JaaPaiTa" )
ANaeNa Pa[SaivZYaßMaez vae_iSTvík-aMaDauk(- )) 10 ))
saha-yajïäù prajäù såñövä
puroväca prajäpatiù
anena prasaviñyadhvam
eña vo ’stv iñöa-käma-dhuk
saha—along with; yajïäù—sacrifices; prajäù—generations;
såñövä—by creating; purä—anciently;
uväca—said; prajä-patiù—the
Lord of creatures; anena—by this; prasaviñyadhvam—be more and more prosperous; eñaù—certainly; vaù—your;
astu—let it be; iñöa—all
desirable; käma-dhuk—bestower.
TRANSLATION
In the beginning of creation, the Lord of all creatures sent forth
generations of men and demigods, along with sacrifices for Viñëu, and blessed
them by saying, “Be thou happy by this yajïa [sacrifice] because its
performance will bestow upon you all desirable things.”
PURPORT
The material creation by the Lord of creatures (Viñëu) is a chance
offered to the conditioned souls to come back home—back to Godhead. All living
entities within the material creation are conditioned by material nature
because of their forgetfulness of their relationship to Kåñëa, the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. The Vedic principles are to help us understand this
eternal relation as it is stated in the Bhagavad-gétä:
vedaiç ca sarvair aham eva vedyaù. The Lord says that the purpose of the
Vedas is to understand Him. In the Vedic hymns it
is said: patià viçvasyätmeçvaram. Therefore, the
Lord of the living entities is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Viñëu. In
the Çrémad-Bhägavatam also Çréla Çukadeva Gosvämé
describes the Lord as pati in so many ways:
çriyaù-patir yajïa-patiù prajä-patir
dhiyäà patir loka-patir dharä-patiù
patir gatiç cändhaka-våñëi-sätvatäà
prasédatäà me bhagavän satäà patiù
(Bhäg. 2.4.20)
The prajä-pati is Lord Viñëu, and He
is the Lord of all living creatures, all worlds, and all beauties, and the
protector of everyone. The Lord created this material world for the conditioned
souls to learn how to perform yajïas (sacrifice)
for the satisfaction of Viñëu, so that while in the material world they can
live very comfortably without anxiety. Then after finishing the present
material body, they can enter into the kingdom of God. That is the whole
program for the conditioned soul. By performance of yajïa,
the conditioned souls gradually become Kåñëa conscious and become godly
in all respects. In this age of Kali, the saìkértana-yajïa
(the chanting of the names of God) is recommended by the Vedic
scriptures, and this transcendental system was introduced by Lord Caitanya for
the deliverance of all men in this age. Saìkértana-yajïa
and Kåñëa consciousness go well together. Lord Kåñëa in His devotional
form (as Lord Caitanya) is mentioned in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam
as follows, with special reference to the saìkértana-yajïa:
kåñëa-varëaà tviñäkåñëäà säìgopäìgästra-pärñadam
yajïaiù saìkértana-präyair yajanti hi su-medhasaù
“In this age of Kali, people who are endowed with sufficient
intelligence will worship the Lord, who is accompanied by His associates, by
performance of saìkértana-yajïa.” (Bhäg. 11.5.29)
Other yajïas prescribed in the Vedic literatures
are not easy to perform in this age of Kali, but the saìkértana-yajïa
is easy and sublime for all purposes.
Bg 3.11
TEXT
11
TEXT
devaN>aavYaTaaNaeNa
Tae deva >aavYaNTau v" )
ParSPar& >aavYaNTa" é[eYa" ParMavaPSYaQa )) 11 ))
devän bhävayatänena
te devä bhävayantu vaù
parasparaà bhävayantaù
çreyaù param aväpsyatha
devän—demigods; bhävayata—having been pleased; anena—by
this sacrifice; te—those; deväù—the
demigods; bhävayantu—will please; vaù—you; parasparam—mutual;
bhävayantaù—pleasing one another; sreyaù—benediction; param—the
supreme; aväpsyatha—do you achieve.
TRANSLATION
The demigods, being pleased by sacrifices, will also please you;
thus nourishing one another, there will reign general prosperity for all.
PURPORT
The demigods are empowered administrators of material affairs. The
supply of air, light, water and all other benedictions for maintaining the body
and soul of every living entity are entrusted to the demigods, who are
innumerable assistants in different parts of the body of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. Their pleasures and displeasures are dependant on the
performance of yajïas by the human being. Some of
the yajïas are meant to satisfy particular
demigods; but even in so doing, Lord Viñëu is worshiped in all yajïas as the chief beneficiary. It is stated also in
the Bhagavad-gétä that Kåñëa Himself is the
beneficiary of all kinds of yajïas: bhoktäraà
yajïa-tapasäm. Therefore, ultimate satisfaction of the yajïapati is the chief purpose of all yajïas. When these yajïas are
perfectly performed, naturally the demigods in charge of the different
departments of supply are pleased, and there is no scarcity in the supply of
natural products.
Performance of yajïas has many side benefits, ultimately leading to
liberation from the material bondage. By performance of yajïas,
all activities become purified, as it is stated in the Vedas:
ähära-çuddhau sattva-çuddhiù sattva-çuddhau
dhruvä småtiù småti-lambhe sarva-granthénäà vipra-mokñaù
As it will be explained in the following verse, by performance of yajïa, one’s eatables become sanctified, and by eating
sanctified foodstuffs, one’s very existence becomes purified; by the
purification of existence, finer tissues in the memory become sanctified, and
when memory is sanctified, one can think of the path of liberation, and all
these combined together lead to Kåñëa consciousness, the great necessity of
present-day society.
Bg 3.12
TEXT
12
TEXT
wíaN>aaeGaaiNh
vae deva daSYaNTae Yaj>aaivTaa" )
TaEdRtaaNaPa[daYaE>Yaae Yaae >au»e STaeNa Wv Sa" )) 12 ))
iñöän bhogän hi vo devä
däsyante yajïa-bhävitäù
tair dattän apradäyaibhyo
yo bhuìkte stena eva saù
iñöän—desired; bhogän—necessities of life; hi—certainly;
vaù—unto you; deväù—the
demigods; däsyante—award; yajïa-bhävitäù—being
satisfied by the performance of sacrifices; taiù—by
them; dattän—things given; apradäya—without offering; ebhyaù—to
the demigods; yaù—he who; bhuìkte—enjoys;
stenaù—thief; eva—certainly;
saù—is he.
TRANSLATION
In charge of the various necessities of life, the demigods, being
satisfied by the performance of yajïa [sacrifice], supply all necessities to
man. But he who enjoys these gifts, without offering them to the demigods in
return, is certainly a thief.
PURPORT
The demigods are authorized supplying agents on behalf of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, Viñëu. Therefore, they must be satisfied by the
performance of prescribed yajïas. In the Vedas, there are different kinds of yajïas prescribed for different kinds of demigods, but
all are ultimately offered to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. For one who
cannot understand what the Personality of Godhead is, sacrifice to the demigods
is recommended. According to the different material qualities of the persons
concerned, different types of yajïas are
recommended in the Vedas. Worship of different
demigods is also on the same basis—namely, according to different qualities.
For example, the meat-eaters are recommended to worship the goddess Kälé, the
ghastly form of material nature, and before the goddess the sacrifice of
animals is recommended. But for those who are in the mode of goodness, the
transcendental worship of Viñëu is recommended. But ultimately, all yajïas are meant for gradual promotion to the
transcendental position. For ordinary men, at least five yajïas, known as païca-mahäyajïa,
are necessary.
One should know, however, that all the necessities of life that the human society requires are supplied by the demigod agents of the Lord. No one can manufacture anything. Take, for example, all the eatables of human society. These eatables include grains, fruits, vegetables, milk, sugar, etc., for the persons in the mode of goodness, and also eatables for the nonvegetarians, like meats, etc., none of which can be manufactured by men. Then again, take for example heat, light, water, air, etc., which are also necessities of life—none of them can be manufactured by the human society. Without the Supreme Lord, there can be no profuse sunlight, moonlight, rainfall, breeze, etc., without which no one can live. Obviously, our life is dependant on supplies from the Lord. Even for our manufacturing enterprises, we require so many raw materials like metal, sulphur, mercury, manganese, and so many essentials—all of which are supplied by the agents of the Lord, with the purpose that we should make proper use of them to keep ourselves fit and healthy for the purpose of self-realization, leading to the ultimate goal of life, namely, liberation from the material struggle for existence. This aim of life is attained by performance of yajïas. If we forget the purpose of human life and simply take supplies from the agents of the Lord for sense gratification and become more and more entangled in material existence, which is not the purpose of creation, certainly we become thieves, and therefore we are punished by the laws of material nature. A society of thieves can never be happy because they have no aim in life. The gross materialist thieves have no ultimate goal of life. They are simply directed to sense gratification; nor do they have knowledge of how to perform yajïas. Lord Caitanya, however, inaugurated the easiest performance of yajïa, namely the saìkértana-yajïa, which can be performed by anyone in the world who accepts the principles of Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 3.13
TEXT
13
TEXT
YajiXaíaiXaNa"
SaNTaae MauCYaNTae SavRik-iLbzE"
>auÅTae Tae Tvga& PaaPaa Yae PacNTYaaTMak-ar<aaTa( )) 13 ))
yajïa-çiñöäçinaù santo
mucyante sarva-kilbiñaiù
bhuïjate te tv aghaà päpä
ye pacanty ätma-käraëät
yajïa-çiñöa—food taken
after performance of yajïa; açinaù—eaters; santaù—the
devotees; mucyante—get relief from; sarva—all kinds of; kilbiñaiù—sins;
bhuïjate—enjoy; te—they;
tu—but; agham—grievous
sins; päpäù—sinners; ye—those;
pacanti—prepare food; ätma-käraëät—for
sense enjoyment.
TRANSLATION
The devotees of the Lord are released from all kinds of sins
because they eat food which is offered first for sacrifice. Others, who prepare
food for personal sense enjoyment, verily eat only sin.
PURPORT
The devotees of the Supreme Lord, or the persons who are in Kåñëa
consciousness, are called santas, and they are
always in love with the Lord as it is described in the Brahma-saàhitä:
premäïjana- cchurita-bhakti-vilocanena santaù sadaiva hådayeñu vilokayanti.
The santas, being always in a compact of love
with the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Govinda (the giver of all pleasures),
or Mukunda (the giver of liberation), or Kåñëa (the all-attractive person),
cannot accept anything without first offering it to the Supreme Person.
Therefore, such devotees always perform yajïas in
different modes of devotional service, such as çravaëam,
kértanam, smaraëam, arcanam, etc., and these performances of yajïas keep them always aloof from all kinds of
contamination of sinful association in the material world. Others, who prepare
food for self or sense gratification, are not only thieves, but are also the
eaters of all kinds of sins. How can a person be happy if he is both a thief
and sinful? It is not possible. Therefore, in order for people to become happy
in all respects, they must be taught to perform the easy process of saìkértana-yajïa, in full Kåñëa consciousness.
Otherwise, there can be no peace or happiness in the world.
Bg 3.14
TEXT
14
TEXT
AàaÙviNTa
>aUTaaiNa PaJaRNYaadàSaM>av" )
YajaÙviTa PaJaRNYaae Yaj" k-MaRSaMauÙv" )) 14 ))
annäd bhavanti bhütäni
parjanyäd anna-sambhavaù
yajïäd bhavati parjanyo
yajïaù karma-samudbhavaù
annät—from grains;
bhavanti—grow; bhütäni—the
material bodies; parjanyät—from rains; anna—food grains; sambhavaù—are
made possible; yajïät—from the performance of
sacrifice; bhavati—becomes possible; parjanyaù—rains; yajïaù—performance
of yajïa; karma—prescribed
duties; samudbhavaù—born of.
TRANSLATION
All living bodies subsist on food grains, which are produced from
rain. Rains are produced by performance of yajïa [sacrifice], and yajïa is born
of prescribed duties.
PURPORT
Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa, a great commentator on the Bhagavad-gétä, writes as follows: ye indrädy-aìga-tayävasthitaà yajïaà sarveçvaraà viñëum
abhyarccya taccheñam açnanti tena taddeha-yänträà sampädayanti te santaù
sarveçvarasya bhaktäù sarva-kilviñair anädi-käla-vivåddhair ätmänubhava-
pratibandhakair nikhilaiù päpair vimucyante. The Supreme Lord, who is
known as the yajïa-puruñaù, or the personal
beneficiary of all sacrifices, is the master of all demigods who serve Him as
the different limbs of the body serve the whole. Demigods like Indra, Candra,
Varuëa, etc., are appointed officers who manage material affairs, and the Vedas direct sacrifices to satisfy these demigods so
that they may be pleased to supply air, light and water sufficiently to produce
food grains. When Lord Kåñëa is worshiped, the demigods, who are different
limbs of the Lord, are also automatically worshiped; therefore there is no
separate need to worship the demigods. For this reason, the devotees of the
Lord, who are in Kåñëa consciousness, offer food to Kåñëa and then eat—a
process which nourishes the body spiritually. By such action not only are past
sinful reactions in the body vanquished, but the body becomes immunized to all
contamination of material nature. When there is an epidemic disease, an
antiseptic vaccine protects a person from the attack of such an epidemic.
Similarly, food offered to Lord Viñëu and then taken by us makes us
sufficiently resistant to material affection, and one who is accustomed to this
practice is called a devotee of the Lord. Therefore, a person in Kåñëa
consciousness, who eats only food offered to Kåñëa, can counteract all
reactions of past material infections, which are impediments to the progress of
self-realization. On the other hand, one who does not do so continues to
increase the volume of sinful action, and this prepares the next body to
resemble hogs and dogs, to suffer the resultant reactions of all sins. The
material world is full of contaminations, and one who is immunized by accepting
prasädam of the Lord (food offered to Viñëu) is
saved from the attack, whereas one who does not do so becomes subjected to
contamination.
Food grains or vegetables are factually eatables. The human being eats different kinds of food grains, vegetables, fruits, etc., and the animals eat the refuse of the food grains and vegetables, grass, plants, etc. Human beings who are accustomed to eating meat and flesh must also depend on the production of vegetation in order to eat the animals. Therefore, ultimately, we have to depend on the production of the field and not on the production of big factories. The field production is due to sufficient rain from the sky, and such rains are controlled by demigods like Indra, sun, moon, etc., and they are all servants of the Lord. The Lord can be satisfied by sacrifices; therefore, one who cannot perform them will find himself in scarcity—that is the law of nature. Yajïa, specifically the saìkértana-yajïa prescribed for this age, must therefore be performed to save us at least from scarcity of food supply.
Bg 3.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
k-MaR
b]øaeÙv& iviÖ b]øa+arSaMauÙvMa( )
TaSMaaTSavRGaTa& b]ø iNaTYa& Yaje Pa[iTaiïTaMa( )) 15 ))
karma brahmodbhavaà viddhi
brahmäkñara-samudbhavam
tasmät sarva-gataà brahma
nityaà yajïe pratiñöhitam
karma—work; brahma—Vedas; udbhavam—produced from; viddhi—one should know; brahma—the
Vedas; akñara—the Supreme Brahman (Personality of
Godhead); samudbhavam; directly manifested; tasmät—therefore; sarva-gatam—all-pervading;
brahma—Transcendence; nityam—eternally;
yajïe—in sacrifice; pratiñöhitam—situated.
TRANSLATION
Regulated activities are prescribed in the Vedas, and the Vedas
are directly manifested from the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Consequently
the all-pervading Transcendence is eternally situated in acts of sacrifice.
PURPORT
Yajïärtha karma, or the
necessity of work for the satisfaction of Kåñëa only, is more expressly stated
in this verse. If we have to work for the satisfaction of the yajïa-puruña, Viñëu, then we must find out the
direction of work in Brahman, or the transcendental Vedas.
The Vedas are therefore codes of working
directions. Anything performed without the direction of the Vedas is called vikarma, or
unauthorized or sinful work. Therefore, one should always take direction from
the Vedas to be saved from the reaction of work.
As one has to work in ordinary life by the direction of the state, similarly,
one has to work under direction of the supreme state of the Lord. Such
directions in the Vedas are directly manifested
from the breathing of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. It is said: asya mahato bhütasya naçvasitam etad yad åg-vedo yajur-vedaù
säma-vedo ’tharväì girasaù. “The four Vedas—namely
the Åg-veda, Yajur-veda, Säma-veda and Atharva-veda—are all emanations from the breathing of
the great Personality of Godhead.” The Lord, being omnipotent, can speak by
breathing air, as it is confirmed in the Brahma-saàhitä,
for the Lord has the omnipotence to perform through each of His senses
the actions of all other senses. In other words, the Lord can speak through His
breathing, and He can impregnate by His eyes. In fact, it is said that He
glanced over material nature and thus fathered all living entities. After
creating or impregnating the conditioned souls into the womb of material
nature, He gave His directions in the Vedic wisdom as to how such conditioned
souls can return home, back to Godhead. We should always remember that the
conditioned souls in material nature are all eager for material enjoyment. But
the Vedic directions are so made that one can satisfy one’s perverted desires,
then return to Godhead, having finished his so-called enjoyment. It is a chance
for the conditioned souls to attain liberation; therefore the conditioned souls
must try to follow the process of yajïa by
becoming Kåñëa conscious. Even those who cannot follow the Vedic injunctions
may adopt the principles of Kåñëa consciousness, and that will take the place
of performance of Vedic yajïas, or karmas.
Bg 3.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
Wv&
Pa[viTaRTa& c§&- NaaNauvTaRYaTaqh Ya" )
AgaaYauiriNd]YaaraMaae Maaega& PaaQaR Sa JaqviTa )) 16 ))
evaà pravartitaà cakraà
nänuvartayatéha yaù
aghäyur indriyärämo
moghaà pärtha sa jévati
evam—thus
prescribed; pravartitam—established by the Vedas; cakram—cycle; na—does
not; anuvartayati—adopt; iha—in
this life; yaù—one who; aghäyuù—life
full of sins; indriya-ärämaù—satisfied in sense
gratification; mogham—useless; pärtha—O son of Påthä (Arjuna); saù—one
who does so; jévati—lives.
TRANSLATION
My dear Arjuna, a man who does not follow this prescribed Vedic
system of sacrifice certainly leads a life of sin, for a person delighting only
in the senses lives in vain.
PURPORT
The mammonist philosophy of work very hard and enjoy sense
gratification is condemned herein by the Lord. Therefore, for those who want to
enjoy this material world, the above-mentioned cycle of performing yajïas is absolutely necessary. One who does not follow
such regulations is living a very risky life, being condemned more and more. By
nature’s law, this human form of life is specifically meant for
self-realization, in either of the three ways—namely karma-yoga,
jïäna-yoga, or bhakti-yoga. There is no
necessity of rigidly following the performances of the prescribed yajïas for the transcendentalists who are above vice
and virtue; but those who are engaged in sense gratification require
purification by the above-mentioned cycle of yajïa performances.
There are different kinds of activities. Those who are not Kåñëa conscious are
certainly engaged in sensory consciousness; therefore they need to execute
pious work. The yajïa system is planned in such a
way that sensory conscious persons may satisfy their desires without becoming
entangled in the reaction of sense-gratificatory work. The prosperity of the
world depends not on our own efforts but on the background arrangement of the
Supreme Lord, directly carried out by the demigods. Therefore, the yajïas are directly aimed at the particular demigod
mentioned in the Vedas. Indirectly, it is the
practice of Kåñëa consciousness, because when one masters the performance of yajïas, one is sure to become Kåñëa conscious. But if
by performing yajïas one does not become Kåñëa
conscious, such principles are counted as only moral codes. One should not,
therefore, limit his progress only to the point of moral codes, but should
transcend them, to attain Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 3.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
YaSTvaTMariTarev
SYaadaTMaTa*áê MaaNav" )
AaTMaNYaev c SaNTauíSTaSYa k-aYa| Na ivÛTae )) 17 ))
yas tv ätma-ratir eva syäd
ätma-tåptaç ca mänavaù
ätmany eva ca santuñöas
tasya käryaà na vidyate
yaù—one who; tu—but; ätma-ratiù—takes
pleasure; eva—certainly; syät—remains;
ätma-tåptaù—self-illuminated; ca—and; mänavaù—a man; ätmani—in himself; eva—only;
ca—and; santuñöaù—perfectly
satiated; tasya—his; käryam—duty;
na—does not; vidyate—exist.
TRANSLATION
One who is, however, taking pleasure in the self, who is illumined
in the self, who rejoices in and is satisfied with the self only, fully
satiated—for him there is no duty.
PURPORT
A person who is fully Kåñëa
conscious, and is fully satisfied by his acts in Kåñëa consciousness, no longer
has any duty to perform. Due to his being Kåñëa conscious, all impiety within
is instantly cleansed, an effect of many, many thousands of yajïa performances. By such clearing of consciousness,
one becomes fully confident of his eternal position in relationship with the
Supreme. His duty thus becomes self-illuminated by the grace of the Lord, and
therefore he no longer has any obligations to the Vedic injunctions. Such a
Kåñëa conscious person is no longer interested in material activities and no
longer takes pleasure in material arrangements like wine, women and similar
infatuations.
Bg 3.18
TEXT
18
TEXT
NaEv TaSYa
k*-TaeNaaQaaeR Naak*-TaeNaeh k-êNa )
Na caSYa SavR>aUTaezu k-iêdQaRVYaPaaé[Ya" )) 18 ))
naiva tasya kåtenärtho
näkåteneha kaçcana
na cäsya sarva-bhüteñu
kaçcid artha-vyapäçrayaù
na—never; eva—certainly; tasya—his;
kåtena—by discharge of duty; arthaù—purpose; na—nor; akåtena—without discharge of duty; iha—in this world; kaçcana—whatever;
na—never; ca—and; asya—of him; sarva-bhüteñu —in
all living beings; kaçcit—any; artha—purpose; vyapa-äçrayaù—taking
shelter of.
TRANSLATION
A self-realized man has no purpose to fulfill in the discharge of
his prescribed duties, nor has he any reason not to perform such work. Nor has
he any need to depend on any other living being.
PURPORT
A self-realized man is no longer obliged to perform any prescribed
duty, save and except activities in Kåñëa consciousness. Kåñëa consciousness is
not inactivity either, as will be explained in the following verses. A Kåñëa
conscious man does not take shelter of any person—man or demigod. Whatever he
does in Kåñëa consciousness is sufficient in the discharge of his obligation.
Bg 3.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
TaSMaadSa¢-"
SaTaTa& k-aYa| k-MaR SaMaacr )
ASa¢-ae ùacrNk-MaR ParMaaPanaeiTa PaUåz" )) 19 ))
tasmäd asaktaù satataà
käryaà karma samäcara
asakto hy äcaran karma
param äpnoti püruñaù
tasmät—therefore; asaktaù—without attachment; satatam—constantly;
käryam—as duty; karma—work;
samäcara—perform; asaktaù—nonattachment;
hi—certainly; äcaran—performing;
karma—work; param—the
Supreme; äpnoti—achieves; püruñaù—a
man.
TRANSLATION
Therefore, without being attached to the fruits of activities, one
should act as a matter of duty; for by working without attachment, one attains
the Supreme.
PURPORT
The Supreme is the Personality of Godhead for the devotees, and
liberation for the impersonalist. A person, therefore, acting for Kåñëa, or in
Kåñëa consciousness, under proper guidance and without attachment to the result
of the work, is certainly making progress toward the supreme goal of life.
Arjuna is told that he should fight in the Battle of Kurukñetra for the
interest of Kåñëa because Kåñëa wanted him to fight. To be a good man or a
nonviolent man is a personal attachment, but to act on behalf of the Supreme is
to act without attachment for the result. That is perfect action of the highest
degree, recommended by the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëa. Vedic
rituals, like prescribed sacrifices, are performed for purification of impious
activities that were performed in the field of sense gratification. But action
in Kåñëa consciousness is transcendental to the reactions of good or evil work.
A Kåñëa conscious person has no attachment for the result but acts on behalf of
Kåñëa alone. He engages in all kinds of activities, but is completely nonattached.
Bg 3.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
k-MaR<aEv ih
Sa&iSaiÖMaaiSQaTaa JaNak-adYa" )
l/aek-Sa°hMaevaiPa SaMPaXYaNk-TauRMahRiSa )) 20 ))
karmaëaiva hi saàsiddhim
ästhitä janakädayaù
loka-saìgraham eväpi
sampaçyan kartum arhasi
karmaëä—by work; eva—even; hi—certainly; saàsiddhim—perfection; ästhitäù—situated;
janaka-ädayaù—kings like Janaka and others; loka-saìgraham—educating the people in general; eva—also; api—for the
sake of; sampaçyan—by considering; kartum—to act; arhasi—deserve.
TRANSLATION
Even kings like Janaka and others attained the perfectional stage
by performance of prescribed duties. Therefore, just for the sake of educating
the people in general, you should perform your work.
PURPORT
Kings like Janaka and others were all self-realized souls;
consequently they had no obligation to perform the prescribed duties in the Vedas. Nonetheless they performed all prescribed
activities just to set examples for the people in general. Janaka was the
father of Sétä, and father-in-law of Lord Çré Räma. Being a great devotee of
the Lord, he was transcendentally situated, but because he was the King of
Mithila (a subdivision of Behar province in India), he had to teach his
subjects how to fight righteously in battle. He and his subjects fought to
teach people in general that violence is also necessary in a situation where
good arguments fail. Before the Battle of Kurukñetra, every effort was made to
avoid the war, even by the Supreme Personality of Godhead, but the other party
was determined to fight. So for such a right cause, there is a necessity for
fighting. Although one who is situated in Kåñëa consciousness may not have any
interest in the world, he still works to teach the public how to live and how
to act. Experienced persons in Kåñëa consciousness can act in such a way that
others will follow, and this is explained in the following verse.
Bg 3.21
TEXT
21
TEXT
YaÛdacriTa
é[eïSTatadeveTarae JaNa" )
Sa YaTPa[Maa<a& ku-åTae l/aek-STadNauvTaRTae )) 21 ))
yad yad äcarati çreñöhas
tat tad evetaro janaù
sa yat pramäëaà kurute
lokas tad anuvartate
yat—whatever; yat—and whichever; äcarati—does
he act; çreñöhaù—respectable leader; tat—that; tat—and that
alone; eva—certainly; itaraù—common;
janaù—person; saù—he;
yat—whichever; pramäëam—evidence;
kurute—does perform; lokaù—all
the world; tat—that; anuvartate—follow
in the footsteps.
TRANSLATION
Whatever action is performed by a great man, common men follow in
his footsteps. And whatever standards he sets by exemplary acts, all the world
pursues.
PURPORT
People in general always require a leader who can teach the public
by practical behavior. A leader cannot teach the public to stop smoking if he
himself smokes. Lord Caitanya said that a teacher should behave properly even
before he begins teaching. One who teaches in that way is called äcärya, or the ideal teacher. Therefore, a teacher must
follow the principles of çäçtra (scripture) to
reach the common man. The teacher cannot manufacture rules against the
principles of revealed scriptures. The revealed scriptures, like Manu-saàhitä and similar others, are considered the
standard books to be followed by human society. Thus the leader’s teaching
should be based on the principles of the standard rules as they are practiced
by the great teachers. The Çrémad-Bhägavatam also
affirms that one should follow in the footsteps of great devotees, and that is
the way of progress on the path of spiritual realization. The king or the
executive head of a state, the father and the school teacher are all considered
to be natural leaders of the innocent people in general. All such natural
leaders have a great responsibility to their dependants; therefore they must be
conversant with standard books of moral and spiritual codes.
Bg 3.22
TEXT
22
TEXT
Na Mae
PaaQaaRiSTa k-TaRVYa& i}azu l/aeke-zu ik-ÄNa )
NaaNavaáMavaáVYa& vTaR Wv c k-MaRi<a )) 22 ))
na me pärthästi kartavyaà
triñu lokeñu kiïcana
nänaväptam aväptavyaà
varta eva ca karmaëi
na—none; me—Mine; pärtha—O son of
Påthä; asti—there is; kartavyam—any
prescribed duty; triñu—in the three; lokeñu—planetary systems; kiïcana—anything;
na—no; anaväptam—in
want; aväptavyam—to be gained; varte—engaged; eva—certainly;
ca—also; karmaëi—in
one’s prescribed duty.
TRANSLATION
O son of Påthä, there is no work prescribed for Me within all the
three planetary systems. Nor am I in want of anything, nor have I need to
obtain anything—and yet I am engaged in work.
PURPORT
The Supreme Personality of Godhead is described in the Vedic
literatures as follows:
tam éçvaräëäà paramaà maheçvaraà
taà devatänäà paramaà ca daivatam
patià paténäà paramaà parastäd
vidäma devaà bhuvaneçam éòyam
na tasya käryaà karaëaà ca vidyate
na tat-samaç cäbhyadhikaç ca dåçyate
paräsya çaktir vividhaiva çrüyate
svä-bhäviké jïäna-bala-kriyä ca.
“The Supreme Lord is the controller of all other controllers, and
He is the greatest of all the diverse planetary leaders. Everyone is under His
control. All entities are delegated with particular power only by the Supreme
Lord; they are not supreme themselves. He is also worshipable by all demigods
and is the supreme director of all directors. Therefore, He is transcendental
to all kinds of material leaders and controllers and is worshipable by all.
There is no one greater than Him, and He is the supreme cause of all causes.
“He does not possess bodily form like that of an ordinary living
entity. There is no difference between His body and His soul. He is absolute.
All His senses are transcendental. Any one of His senses can perform the action
of any other sense. Therefore, no one is greater than Him or equal to Him. His
potencies are multifarious, and thus His deeds are automatically performed as a
natural sequence.” (Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad 6.7–8)
Since everything is in full opulence in the Personality of Godhead and is existing in full truth, there is no duty for the Supreme Personality of Godhead to perform. One who must receive the results of work has some designated duty, but one who has nothing to achieve within the three planetary systems certainly has no duty. And yet Lord Kåñëa is engaged on the Battlefield of Kurukñetra as the leader of the kñatriyas because the kñatriyas are duty-bound to give protection to the distressed. Although He is above all the regulations of the revealed scriptures, He does not do anything that violates the revealed scriptures.
Bg 3.23
TEXT
23
TEXT
Yaid ùh& Na
vTaeRYa& JaaTau k-MaR<YaTaiNd]Ta" )
MaMa vTMaaRNauvTaRNTae MaNauZYaa" PaaQaR SavRXa" )) 23 ))
yadi hy ahaà na varteyaà
jätu karmaëy atandritaù
mama vartmänuvartante
manuñyäù pärtha sarvaçaù
yadi—if; hi—certainly; aham—I; na—do not; varteyam—thus
engage; jätu—ever; karmaëi—in
the performance of prescribed duties; atandritaù—with
great care; mama—My; vartma—path;
anuvartante—would follow; manuñyäù—all
men; pärtha—O son of Påthä; sarvaçaù—in all respects.
TRANSLATION
For, if I did not engage in work, O Pärtha, certainly all men
would follow My path.
PURPORT
In order to keep the balance of social tranquility for progress in
spiritual life. there are traditional family usages meant for every civilized
man. Although such rules and regulations are for the conditioned souls and not
Lord Kåñëa, because He descended to establish the principles of religion, He
followed the prescribed rules. Otherwise, common men would follow in His
footsteps because He is the greatest authority. From the Çrémad-Bhägavatam it is understood that Lord Kåñëa was
performing all the religious duties at home and out of home, as required of a
householder.
Bg 3.24
TEXT
24
TEXT
oTSaqdeYauirMae
l/aek-a Na ku-Yaa| k-MaR cedhMa( )
SaªrSYa c k-TaaR SYaaMauPahNYaaiMaMaa" Pa[Jaa" )) 24 ))
utsédeyur ime lokä
na kuryäà karma ced aham
saìkarasya ca kartä syäm
upahanyäm imäù prajäù
utsédeyuù—put into
ruin; ime—all these; lokäù—worlds;
na—do not; kuryäm—perform;
karma—prescribed duties; cet—if;
aham—I; saìkarasya—of
unwanted population; ca—and; kartä—creator; syäm—shall
be; upahanyäm—destroy; imäù—all
these; prajäù—living entities.
TRANSLATION
If I should cease to work, then all these worlds would be put to
ruination. I would also be the cause of creating unwanted population, and I
would thereby destroy the peace of all sentient beings.
PURPORT
Varëa-saìkara is unwanted
population which disturbs the peace of the general society. In order to check
this social disturbance, there are prescribed rules and regulations by which
the population can automatically become peaceful and organized for spiritual
progress in life. When Lord Kåñëa descends, naturally He deals with such rules
and regulations in order to maintain the prestige and necessity of such
important performances. The Lord is the father of all living entities, and if
the living entities are misguided, indirectly the responsibility goes to the
Lord. Therefore, whenever there is general disregard of regulative principles,
the Lord Himself descends and corrects the society. We should, however, note
carefully that although we have to follow in the footsteps of the Lord, we
still have to remember that we cannot imitate Him. Following and imitating are
not on the same level. We cannot imitate the Lord by lifting Govardhana Hill,
as the Lord did in His childhood. It is impossible for any human being. We have
to follow His instructions, but we may not imitate Him at any time. The Çrémad-Bhägavatam affirms:
naitat samäcarej jätu manasäpi hy anéçvaraù
vinaçyaty äcaran mauòhyäd yathä ’rudro ’bdhijaà viñam
éçvaräëäà vacaù satyaà tathaiväcaritaà kvacit
teñäà yat sva-vaco yuktaà buddhimäàs tat samäcaret
“One should simply follow the instructions of the Lord and His
empowered servants. Their instructions are all good for us, and any intelligent
person will perform them as instructed. However, one should guard against
trying to imitate their actions. One should not try to drink the ocean of
poison in imitation of Lord Çiva.” (Bhäg. 10.33.30)
We should always consider the position of the éçvaras, or those who can actually control the
movements of the sun and moon, as superior. Without such power, one cannot
imitate the éçvaras, who are superpowerful. Lord
Çiva drank poison to the extent of swallowing an ocean, but if any common man
tries to drink even a fragment of such poison, he will be killed. There are
many psuedo-devotees of Lord Çiva who want to indulge in smoking gäïjä
(marijuana) and similar intoxicating drugs, forgetting that by so imitating the
acts of Lord Çiva they are calling death very near. Similarly, there are some
psuedo-devotees of Lord Kåñëa who prefer to imitate the Lord in His räsa-lélä, or dance of love, forgetting their inability
to lift Govardhana Hill. It is best, therefore, that one not try to imitate the
powerful, but simply follow their instructions; nor should one try to occupy
their posts without qualification. There are so many “incarnations” of God
without the power of the Supreme Godhead.
Bg 3.25
TEXT
25
TEXT
Sa¢-a"
k-MaR<YaivÜa&Saae YaQaa ku-vRiNTa >aarTa )
ku-YaaRiÜÜa&STaQaaSa¢-iêk-IzuRl/aeRk-Sa°hMa( )) 25 ))
saktäù karmaëy avidväàso
yathä kurvanti bhärata
kuryäd vidväàs tathäsaktaç
cikérñur loka-saìgraham
saktäù—being
attached; karmaëi—prescribed duties; avidväàsaù—the ignorant; yathä—as
much as; kurvanti—do it; bhärata—O
descendant of Bharata; kuryät—must do; vidvän—the learned; tathä—thus;
asaktaù—without attachment; cikérñuù—desiring to; loka-saìgraham—leading
the people in general.
TRANSLATION
As the ignorant perform their duties with attachment to results,
similarly the learned may also act, but without attachment, for the sake of
leading people on the right path.
PURPORT
A person in Kåñëa consciousness and a person not in Kåñëa
consciousness are differentiated by different desires. A Kåñëa conscious person
does not do anything which is not conducive to development of Kåñëa
consciousness. He may even act exactly like the ignorant person, who is too
much attached to material activities, but one is engaged in such activities for
the satisfaction of his sense gratification, whereas the other is engaged for
the satisfaction of Kåñëa. Therefore, the Kåñëa conscious person is required to
show the people how to act and how to engage the results of action for the
purpose of Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 3.26
TEXT
26
TEXT
Na buiÖ>aed&
JaNaYaedjaNaa& k-MaRSai®NaaMa( )
JaaezYaeTSavRk-MaaRi<a ivÜaNYau¢-" SaMaacrNa( )) 26 ))
na buddhi-bhedaà janayed
ajïänäà karma-saìginäm
joñayet sarva-karmäëi
vidvän yuktaù samäcaran
na—do not; buddhi-bhedam—disrupt the intelligence; janayet—do; ajïänäm—of
the foolish; karma-saìginäm—attached to fruitive
work; joñayet—dovetailed; sarva—all;
karmäëi—work; vidvän—learned;
yuktaù—all engaged; samäcaran—practicing.
TRANSLATION
Let not the wise disrupt the minds of the ignorant who are
attached to fruitive action. They should not be encouraged to refrain from
work, but to engage in work in the spirit of devotion.
PURPORT
Vedaiç ca sarvair aham eva vedyaù: that is the
end of all Vedic rituals. All rituals, all performances of sacrifices, and
everything that is put into the Vedas, including
all directions for material activities, are meant for understanding Kåñëa, who
is the ultimate goal of life. But because the conditioned souls do not know
anything beyond sense gratification, they study the Vedas
to that end. Through sense regulations, however, one is gradually
elevated to Kåñëa consciousness. Therefore a realized soul in Kåñëa
consciousness should not disturb others in their activities or understanding,
but he should act by showing how the results of all work can be dedicated to
the service of Kåñëa. The learned Kåñëa conscious person may act in such a way
that the ignorant person working for sense gratification may learn how to act
and how to behave. Although the ignorant man is not to be disturbed in his activities,
still, a slightly developed Kåñëa conscious person may directly be engaged in
the service of the Lord without waiting for other Vedic formulas. For this
fortunate man there is no need to follow the Vedic rituals, because in direct
Kåñëa consciousness one can have all the results simply by following the
prescribed duties of a particular person.
Bg 3.27
TEXT
27
TEXT
Pa[k*-Tae"
i§-YaMaa<aaiNa Gau<aE" k-MaaRi<a SavRXa" )
AhªarivMaU!aTMaa k-TaaRhiMaiTa MaNYaTae )) 27 ))
prakåteù kriyamäëäni
guëaiù karmäëi sarvaçaù
ahaìkära-vimüòhätmä
kartäham iti manyate
prakåteù—of material
nature; kriyamäëäni—all being done; guëaiù—by the modes; karmäëi—activities;
sarvaçaù—all kinds of;
ahaìkära-vimüòha—bewildered by false ego; ätmä—the
spirit soul; kartä—doer; aham—I; iti—thus; manyate—thinks.
TRANSLATION
The bewildered spirit soul, under the influence of the three modes
of material nature, thinks himself to be the doer of activities, which are in
actuality carried out by nature.
PURPORT
Two persons, one in Kåñëa consciousness and the other in material
consciousness, working on the same level, may appear to be working on the same
platform, but there is a wide gulf of difference in their respective positions.
The person in material consciousness is convinced by false ego that he is the
doer of everything. He does not know that the mechanism of the body is produced
by material nature, which works under the supervision of the Supreme Lord. The
materialistic person has no knowledge that ultimately he is under the control
of Kåñëa. The person in false ego takes all credit for doing everything
independantly, and that is the symptom of his nescience. He does not know that
this gross and subtle body is the creation of material nature, under the order
of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and as such his bodily and mental
activities should be engaged in the service of Kåñëa, in Kåñëa consciousness.
The ignorant man forgets that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is known as
Håñékeça, or the master of the senses of the material body, for due to his long
misuse of the senses in sense gratification, he is factually bewildered by the
false ego, which makes him forget his eternal relationship with Kåñëa.
Bg 3.28
TEXT
28
TEXT
Tatvivtau
Mahabahae Gau<ak-MaRiv>aaGaYaae" )
Gau<aa Gau<aezu vTaRNTa wiTa MaTva Na SaÂTae )) 28 ))
tattva-vit tu mahä-bäho
guëa-karma-vibhägayoù
guëä guëeñu vartanta
iti matvä na sajjate
tattvavit—the knower
of the Absolute Truth; tu—but; mahä-bäho—O mighty-armed one; guëa-karma—works
under material influence; vibhägayoù—differences;
guëäù—senses; guëeñu—in
sense gratification; vartante—being engaged; iti—thus; matvä—thinking;
na—never; sajjate—becomes
attached.
TRANSLATION
One who is in knowledge of the Absolute Truth, O mighty-armed,
does not engage himself in the senses and sense gratification, knowing well the
differences between work in devotion and work for fruitive results.
PURPORT
The knower of the Absolute Truth is convinced of his awkward
position in material association. He knows that he is part and parcel of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, and that his position should not be in
the material creation. He knows his real identity as part and parcel of the
Supreme, who is eternal bliss and knowledge, and he realizes that somehow or
other he is entrapped in the material conception of life. In his pure state of
existence he is meant to dovetail his activities in devotional service to the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa. He therefore engages himself in the
activities of Kåñëa consciousness and becomes naturally unattached to the
activities of the material senses, which are all circumstantial and temporary.
He knows that his material condition of life is under the supreme control of
the Lord; consequently he is not disturbed by all kinds of material reactions,
which he considers to be the mercy of the Lord. According to Çrémad-Bhägavatam, one who knows the Absolute Truth in
three different features—namely Brahman, Paramätmä, and the Supreme Personality
of Godhead—is called tattvavit, for he knows also
his own factual position in relationship with the Supreme.
Bg 3.29
TEXT
29
TEXT
Pa[k*-TaeGauR<aSaMMaU!a"
SaÂNTae Gau<ak-MaRSau )
TaaNak*-Tòivdae MaNdaNk*-Tòivà ivcal/YaeTa( )) 29 ))
prakåter guëa-sammüòhäù
sajjante guëa-karmasu
tän akåtsna-vido mandän
kåtsna-vin na vicälayet
prakåteù—impelled by
the material modes; guëa-saàmüòhäù—befooled by
material identification; sajjante—become engaged;
guëa-karmasu—in material activities; tän—all those; akåtsna-vidaù—persons
with a poor fund of knowledge; mandän—lazy to understand
self-realization; kåtsna-vit—one who is in
factual knowledge; na—may not; vicälayet—try to agitate.
TRANSLATION
Bewildered by the modes of material nature, the ignorant fully
engage themselves in material activities and become attached. But the wise
should not unsettle them, although these duties are inferior due to the
performers’ lack of knowledge.
PURPORT
Persons who are unknowledgeable falsely identify with gross
material consciousness and are full of material designations. This body is a
gift of the material nature, and one who is too much attached to the bodily
consciousness is called mandän, or a lazy person
without understanding of spirit soul. Ignorant men think of the body as the
self; bodily connections with others are accepted as kinsmanship; the land in
which the body is obtained is the object of worship; and the formalities of
religious rituals are considered ends in themselves. Social work, nationalism,
and altruism are some of the activities for such materially designated persons.
Under the spell of such designations, they are always busy in the material
field; for them spiritual realization is a myth, and so they are not
interested. Such bewildered persons may even be engaged in such primary moral
principles of life as nonviolence and similar materially benevolent work. Those
who are, however, enlightened in spiritual life, should not try to agitate such
materially engrossed persons. Better to prosecute one’s own spiritual
activities silently.
Men who are ignorant cannot appreciate activities in Kåñëa consciousness, and therefore Lord Kåñëa advises us not to disturb them and simply waste valuable time. But the devotees of the Lord are more kind than the Lord because they understand the purpose of the Lord. Consequently they undertake all kinds of risks, even to the point of approaching ignorant men to try to engage them in the acts of Kåñëa consciousness, which are absolutely necessary for the human being.
Bg 3.30
TEXT
30
TEXT
MaiYa
SavaRi<a k-MaaRi<a SaNNYaSYaaDYaaTMaceTaSaa )
iNaraXaqiNaRMaRMaae >aUTva YauDYaSv ivGaTaJvr" )) 30 ))
mayi sarväëi karmäëi
sannyasyädhyätma-cetasä
niräçér nirmamo bhütvä
yudhyasva vigata-jvaraù
mayi—unto Me; sarväëi—all sorts of; karmäëi—activities;
sannyasya—giving up completely; adhyätma—with full knowledge of the self; cetasä—consciousness; niräçéù—without
desire for profit; nirmamaù—without ownership; bhütvä—so being; yudhyasva—fight;
vigata-jvaraù—without being lethargic.
TRANSLATION
Therefore, O Arjuna, surrendering all your works unto Me, with
mind intent on Me, and without desire for gain and free from egoism and
lethargy, fight.
PURPORT
This verse clearly indicates the purpose of the Bhagavad-gétä. The Lord instructs that one has to
become fully Kåñëa conscious to discharge duties, as if in military discipline.
Such an injunction may make things a little difficult; nevertheless duties must
be carried out, with dependence on Kåñëa, because that is the constitutional
position of the living entity. The living entity cannot be happy independant of
the cooperation of the Supreme Lord because the eternal constitutional position
of the living entity is to become subordinate to the desires of the Lord.
Arjuna was, therefore, ordered by Çré Kåñëa to fight as if the Lord were his
military commander. One has to sacrifice everything for the good will of the
Supreme Lord, and at the same time discharge prescribed duties without claiming
proprietorship. Arjuna did not have to consider the order of the Lord; he had
only to execute His order. The Supreme Lord is the Soul of all souls;
therefore, one who depends solely and wholly on the Supreme Soul without
personal consideration, or in other words, one who is fully Kåñëa conscious, is
called adhyätma-cetasä. Niräçéù means that one
has to act on the order of the master. Nor should one ever expect fruitive
results. The cashier may count millions of dollars for his employer, but he
does not claim a cent for himself. Similarly, one has to realize that nothing
in the world belongs to any individual person, but that everything belongs to
the Supreme Lord. That is the real purport of mayi, or
unto Me. And when one acts in such Kåñëa consciousness, certainly he does not
claim proprietorship over anything. This consciousness is called nirmama, or nothing is mine. And, if there is any
reluctance to execute such a stern order which is without consideration of
so-called kinsmen in the bodily relationship, that reluctance should be thrown
off; in this way one may become vigata-jvara, or
without feverish mentality or lethargy. Everyone, according to his quality and
position, has a particular type of work to discharge, and all such duties may
be discharged in Kåñëa consciousness, as described above. That will lead one to
the path of liberation.
Bg 3.31
TEXT
31
TEXT
Yae Mae
MaTaiMad& iNaTYaMaNauiTaïiNTa MaaNava" )
é[ÖavNTaae_NaSaUYaNTaae MauCYaNTae Tae_iPa k-MaRi>a" )) 31 ))
ye me matam idaà nityam
anutiñöhanti mänaväù
çraddhävanto ’nasüyanto
mucyante te ’pi karmabhiù
ye—those; me—My; matam—injunctions;
idam—this; nityam—eternal
function; anutiñöhanti—execute regularly; mänaväù—humankind; çraddhävantaù—with
faith and devotion; anasüyantaù—without envy; mucyante—become free; te—all
of them; api—even; karmabhiù—from
the bondage of the law of fruitive action.
TRANSLATION
One who executes his duties according to My injunctions and who
follows this teaching faithfully, without envy, becomes free from the bondage
of fruitive actions.
PURPORT
The injunction of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, is
the essence of all Vedic wisdom, and therefore is eternally true without
exception. As the Vedas are eternal, so this
truth of Kåñëa consciousness is also eternal. One should have firm faith in
this injunction, without envying the Lord. There are many philosophers who
write comments on the Bhagavad-gétä but have no
faith in Kåñëa. They will never be liberated from the bondage of fruitive
action. But an ordinary man with firm faith in the eternal injunctions of the
Lord, even though unable to execute such orders, becomes liberated from the
bondage of the law of karma. In the beginning of
Kåñëa consciousness, one may not fully discharge the injunctions of the Lord,
but because one is not resentful of this principle and works sincerely without
consideration of defeat and hopelessness, he will surely be promoted to the
stage of pure Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 3.32
TEXT
32
TEXT
Yae
TveTad>YaSaUYaNTaae NaaNauiTaïiNTa Mae MaTaMa( )
SavRjaNaivMaU!a&STaaiNviÖ NaíaNaceTaSa" )) 32 ))
ye tv etad abhyasüyanto
nänutiñöhanti me matam
sarva-jïäna-vimüòhäàs tän
viddhi nañöän acetasaù
ye—those; tu—however; etat—this; abhyasüyantaù—out of envy; na—do
not; anutiñöhanti—regularly perform; me—My; matam—injunction; sarva-jïäna—all sorts of knowledge; vimüòhän—perfectly befooled; tän—they
are; viddhi—know it well; nañöän—all
ruined; acetasaù—without Kåñëa consciousness.
TRANSLATION
But those who, out of envy, disregard these teachings and do not
practice them regularly, are to be considered bereft of all knowledge,
befooled, and doomed to ignorance and bondage.
PURPORT
The flaw of not being Kåñëa conscious is clearly stated herein. As
there is punishment for disobedience to the order of the supreme executive
head, so there is certainly punishment for the disobedience of the order of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. A disobedient person, however great he may be,
is ignorant of his own self, of the Supreme Brahman, and Paramätmä and the
Personality of Godhead, due to a vacant heart. Therefore there is no hope of
perfection of life for him.
Bg 3.33
TEXT
33
TEXT
Sad*Xa&
ceíTae SvSYaa" Pa[k*-TaejaRNavaNaiPa )
Pa[k*-iTa& YaaiNTa >aUTaaiNa iNaGa]h" ik&- k-irZYaiTa )) 33 ))
sadåçaà ceñöate svasyäù
prakåter jïänavän api
prakåtià yänti bhütäni
nigrahaù kià kariñyati
sadåçam—accordingly;
ceñöate—tries; svasyäù—in
one’s own nature; prakåteù—modes; jïänavän—the learned; api—although;
prakåtim—nature; yänti—undergo;
bhütäni—all living entities; nigrahaù—suppression; kim—what;
kariñyati—can do.
TRANSLATION
Even a man of knowledge acts according to his own nature, for
everyone follows his nature. What can repression accomplish?
PURPORT
Unless one is situated on the transcendental platform of Kåñëa
consciousness, he cannot get free from the influence of the modes of material
nature, as it is confirmed by the Lord in the Seventh Chapter (7.14). Therefore,
even for the most highly educated person on the mundane plane, it is impossible
to get out of the entanglement of mäyä simply by
theoretical knowledge, or by separating the soul from the body. There are many
so-called spiritualists who outwardly pose to be advanced in the science, but
inwardly or privately are completely under the particular modes of nature which
they are unable to surpass. Academically, one may be very learned, but because
of his long association with material nature, he is in bondage. Kåñëa
consciousness helps one to get out of the material entanglement, even though
one may be engaged in his prescribed duties. Therefore, without being fully in
Kåñëa consciousness, no one should suddenly give up his prescribed duties and
become a so-called yogé or transcendentalist
artificially. It is better to be situated in one’s position and to try to
attain Kåñëa consciousness under superior training. Thus one may be freed from
the clutches of mäyä.
Bg 3.34
TEXT
34
TEXT
wiNd]YaSYaeiNd]YaSYaaQaeR
raGaÜezaE VYaviSQaTaaE )
TaYaaeNaR vXaMaaGaC^etaaE ùSYa PairPaiNQaNaaE )) 34 ))
indriyasyendriyasyärthe
räga-dveñau vyavasthitau
tayor na vaçam ägacchet
tau hy asya paripanthinau
indriyasya—of the
senses; indriyasya arthe—in the sense objects; räga—attachment; dveñau—also
in detachment; vyavasthitau—put under
regulations; tayoù—of them; na—never; vaçam—control; ägacchet—one should come; tau—those;
hi—certainly are; asya—his;
paripanthinau—stumbling blocks.
TRANSLATION
Attraction and repulsion for sense objects are felt by embodied
beings, but one should not fall under the control of senses and sense objects
because they are stumbling blocks on the path of self-realization.
PURPORT
Those who are in Kåñëa consciousness are naturally reluctant to
engage in material sense gratifications. But those who are not in such
consciousness should follow the rules and regulations of the revealed
scriptures. Unrestricted sense enjoyment is the cause of material encagement,
but one who follows the rules and regulations of the revealed scriptures does
not become entangled by the sense objects. For example, sex enjoyment is a
necessity for the conditioned soul, and sex enjoyment is allowed under the
license of marriage ties. For example, according to scriptural injunctions, one
is forbidden to engage in sex relationships with any women other than one’s
wife. All other women are to be considered as one’s mother. But, in spite of
such injunctions, a man is still inclined to have sex relationships with other
women. These propensities are to be curbed; otherwise they will be stumbling
blocks on the path of self-realization. As long as the material body is there,
the necessities of the material body are allowed, but under rules and
regulations. And yet, we should not rely upon the control of such allowances.
One has to follow those rules and regulations, unattached to them, because
practice of sense gratifications under regulations may also lead one to go
astray—as much as there is always the chance of an accident, even on the royal
roads. Although they may be very carefully maintained, no one can guarantee
that there will be no danger even on the safest road. The sense enjoyment
spirit has been current a very long, long time, owing to material association.
Therefore, in spite of regulated sense enjoyment, there is every chance of
falling down; therefore any attachment for regulated sense enjoyment must also
be avoided by all means. But action in the loving service of Kåñëa detaches one
from all kinds of sensory activities. Therefore, no one should try to be
detached from Kåñëa consciousness at any stage of life. The whole purpose of
detachment from all kinds of sense attachment is ultimately to become situated
on the platform of Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 3.35
TEXT
35
TEXT
é[eYaaNSvDaMaaeR
ivGau<a" ParDaMaaRTSvNauiïTaaTa( )
SvDaMaeR iNaDaNa& é[eYa" ParDaMaaeR >aYaavh" )) 35 ))
çreyän sva-dharmo viguëaù
para-dharmät sv-anuñöhität
sva-dharme nidhanaà çreyaù
para-dharmo bhayävahaù
çreyän—far better; sva-dharmaù—one’s prescribed duties; viguëaù—even faulty; para-dharmät—from
duties mentioned for others; svanuñthität—than
perfectly done; sva-dharme—in one’s prescribed
duties; nidhanam—destruction; çreyaù—better; para-dharmaù—duties
prescribed for others; bhaya-ävahaù—dangerous.
TRANSLATION
It is far better to discharge one’s prescribed duties, even though
they may be faulty, than another’s duties. Destruction in the course of
performing one’s own duty is better than engaging in another’s duties, for to
follow another’s path is dangerous.
PURPORT
One should therefore discharge his prescribed duties in full Kåñëa
consciousness rather than those prescribed for others. Prescribed duties
complement one’s psychophysical condition, under the spell of the modes of
material nature. Spiritual duties are as ordered by the spiritual master, for
the transcendental service of Kåñëa. But both materially or spiritually, one
should stick to his prescribed duties even up to death, rather than imitate
another’s prescribed duties. Duties on the spiritual platform and duties on the
material platform may be different, but the principle of following the
authorized direction is always good for the performer. When one is under the
spell of the modes of material nature, one should follow the prescribed rules
for particular situations and should not imitate others. For example, a brähmaëa, who is in the mode of goodness, is
nonviolent, whereas a kñatriya, who is in the
mode of passion, is allowed to be violent. As such, for a kñatriya it is better to be vanquished following the
rules of violence than to imitate a brähmaëa who
follows the principles of nonviolence. Everyone has to cleanse his heart by a
gradual process, not abruptly. However, when one transcends the modes of
material nature and is fully situated in Kåñëa consciousness, he can perform
anything and everything under the direction of the bona fide spiritual master.
In that complete stage of Kåñëa consciousness, the kñatriya
may act as a brähmaëa, or a brähmaëa may act as a kñatriya. In
the transcendental stage, the distinctions of the material world do not apply.
For example, Viçvämitra was originally a kñatriya, but
later on he acted as a brähmaëa, whereas
Paraçuräma was a brähmaëa, but later on he acted
as a kñatriya. Being transcendentally situated,
they could do so; but as long as one is on the material platform, he must
perform his duties according to the modes of material nature. At the same time,
he must have a full sense of Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 3.36
TEXT
36
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac
AQa ke-Na Pa[Yau¢-ae_Ya& PaaPa& criTa PaUåz" )
AiNaC^àiPa vaZ<aeRYa bl/aidv iNaYaaeiJaTa" )) 36 ))
arjuna
uväca
atha kena prayukto ’yaà
päpaà carati püruñaù
anicchann api värñëeya
baläd iva niyojitaù
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna said; atha—hereafter; kena—by
what; prayuktaù—impelled; ayam—one; päpam—sins; carati—acts; püruñaù—a man; anicchan—without
desiring; api—although; värñëeya—O
descendant of Våñëi; balät—by force; iva—as if; niyojitaù—engaged.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said: O descendant of Våñëi, by what is one impelled to
sinful acts, even unwillingly, as if engaged by force?
PURPORT
A living entity, as part and parcel of the Supreme, is originally
spiritual, pure, and free from all material contaminations. Therefore, by
nature he is not subjected to the sins of the material world. But when he is in
contact with the material nature, he acts in many sinful ways without
hesitation, and sometimes even against his will. As such, Arjuna’s question to
Kåñëa is very sanguine, as to the perverted nature of the living entities.
Although the living entity sometimes does not want to act in sin, he is still
forced to act. Sinful actions are not, however, impelled by the Supersoul
within, but are due to another cause, as the Lord explains in the next verse.
Bg 3.37
TEXT
37
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
k-aMa Wz §-aeDa Wz rJaaeGau<aSaMauÙv" )
MahaXaNaae MahaPaaPMaa ivÖyeNaiMah vEir<aMa( )) 37 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
käma eña krodha eña
rajo-guëa-samudbhavaù
mahäçano mahä-päpmä
viddhy enam iha vairiëam
çré bhagavän uväca—the
Personality of Godhead said; kämaù—lust; eñaù—all these; krodhaù—wrath;
eñaù—all these; rajo-guëa—the
mode of passion; samudbhavaù—born of; mahä-çanaù—all-devouring; mahä-päpmä—greatly
sinful; viddhi—know; enam—this;
iha—in the material world; vairiëam—greatest enemy.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: It is lust only, Arjuna, which is born of
contact with the material modes of passion and later transformed into wrath,
and which is the all-devouring, sinful enemy of this world.
PURPORT
When a living entity comes in contact with the material creation,
his eternal love for Kåñëa is transformed into lust, in association with the
mode of passion. Or, in other words, the sense of love of God becomes
transformed into lust, as milk in contact with sour tamarind is transformed
into yogurt. Then again, when lust is unsatisfied, it turns into wrath; wrath
is transformed into illusion, and illusion continues the material existence.
Therefore, lust is the greatest enemy of the living entity, and it is lust only
which induces the pure living entity to remain entangled in the material world.
Wrath is the manifestation of the mode of ignorance; these modes exhibit
themselves as wrath and other corollaries. If, therefore, the modes of passion,
instead of being degraded into the modes of ignorance, are elevated to the
modes of goodness by the prescribed method of Iiving and acting, then one can
be saved from the degradation of wrath by spiritual attachment.
The Supreme Personality of Godhead expanded Himself into many for His ever-increasing spiritual bliss, and the living entities are parts and parcels of this spiritual bliss. They also have partial independence, but by misuse of their independence, when the service attitude is transformed into the propensity for sense enjoyment, they come under the sway of lust. This material creation is created by the Lord to give a facility to the conditioned souls to fulfill these lustful propensities, and when they are completely baffled by prolonged lustful activities, the living entities begin to inquire about their real position.
This inquiry is the beginning of the Vedänta-sütras, wherein it is said, athäto brahma-jijïäsä: one should inquire into the Supreme. And the Supreme is defined in Çrémad-Bhägavatam as janmädyasya yato ’nvayäd itarataç ca, or, "The origin of everything is the Supreme Brahman." Therefore, the origin of lust is also in the Supreme. If, therefore, lust is transformed into love for the Supreme, or transformed into Kåñëa consciousness—or, in other words, desiring everything for Kåñëa—then both lust and wrath can be spiritualized. Hanumän, the great servitor of Lord Rama, engaged his wrath upon his enemies for the satisfaction of the Lord. Therefore, lust and wrath, when they are employed in Kåñëa consciousness, become our friends instead of our enemies.
Bg 3.38
TEXT
38
TEXT
DaUMaeNaaiv]YaTae
viöYaRQaadXaaeR Male/Na c )
YaQaaeLbeNaav*Taae Ga>aRSTaQaa TaeNaedMaav*TaMa( )) 38 ))
dhümenävriyate vahnir
yathädarço malena ca
yatholbenävåto garbhas
tathä tenedam ävåtam
dhümena—by smoke; ävriyate—covered; vahniù—fire;
yathä—just as; ädarçaù—mirror;
malena—by dust; ca—also;
yathä—just as; ulbena—by
the womb; ävåtaù—is covered; garbhaù—embryo; tathä—so; tena—by
that lust; idam—this; ävåtam—is
covered.
TRANSLATION
As fire is covered by smoke, as a mirror is covered by dust, or as
the embryo is covered by the womb, similarly, the living entity is covered by
different degrees of this lust.
PURPORT
There are three degrees of covering of the living entity by which
his pure consciousness is obscured. This covering is but lust under different
manifestations like smoke in the fire, dust on the mirror, and the womb about
the embryo. When lust is compared to smoke, it is understood that the fire of
the living spark can be a little perceived. In other words, when the living
entity exhibits his Kåñëa consciousness slightly, he may be likened to the fire
covered by smoke. Although fire is necessary where there is smoke, there is no
overt manifestation of fire in the early stage. This stage is like the
beginning of Kåñëa consciousness. The dust on the mirror refers to a cleansing
process of the mirror of the mind by so many spiritual methods. The best
process is to chant the holy names of the Lord. The embryo covered by the womb
is an analogy illustrating a helpless position, for the child in the womb is so
helpless that he cannot even move. This stage of living condition can be
compared to that of the trees. The trees are also living entities, but they
have been put in such a condition of life by such a great exhibition of lust
that they are almost void of all consciousness. The covered mirror is compared
to the birds and beasts, and the smoke covered fire is compared to the human
being. In the form of a human being, the living entity may revive a little
Kåñëa consciousness, and, if he makes further development, the fire of
spiritual life can be kindled in the human form of life. By careful handling of
the smoke in the fire, the fire can be made to blaze. Therefore the human form
of life is a chance for the living entity to escape the entanglement of material
existence. In the human form of life, one can conquer the enemy, lust, by
cultivation of Kåñëa consciousness under able guidance.
Bg 3.39
TEXT
39
TEXT
Aav*Ta&
jaNaMaeTaeNa jaiNaNaae iNaTYavEir<aa )
k-aMaæPae<a k-aENTaeYa duZPaUre<aaNale/Na c )) 39 ))
ävåtaà jïänam etena
jïänino nitya-vairiëä
käma-rüpeëa kaunteya
duñpüreëänalena ca
ävåtam—covered; jïänam—pure consciousness; etena—by
this; jïäninaù—of the knower; nitya-vairiëä—eternal enemy; käma-rüpeëa—in
the form of lust; kaunteya—O son of Kunté; duñpüreëa—never to be satisfied; analena—by the fire; ca—also.
TRANSLATION
Thus, a man’s pure consciousness is covered by his eternal enemy
in the form of lust, which is never satisfied and which burns like fire.
PURPORT
It is said in the Manu-småti that
lust cannot be satisfied by any amount of sense enjoyment, just as fire is
never extinguished by a constant supply of fuel. In the material world, the
center of all activities is sex, and thus this material world is called maithuëya-ägära, or the shackles of sex life. In the
ordinary prison house, criminals are kept within bars; similarly, the criminals
who are disobedient to the laws of the Lord are shackled by sex life.
Advancement of material civilization on the basis of sense gratification means
increasing the duration of the material existence of a living entity.
Therefore, this lust is the symbol of ignorance by which the living entity is
kept within the material world. While one enjoys sense gratification, it may be
that there is some feeling of happiness, but actually that so-called feeling of
happiness is the ultimate enemy of the sense enjoyer.
Bg 3.40
TEXT
40
TEXT
wiNd]Yaai<a
MaNaae buiÖrSYaaiDaïaNaMauCYaTae )
WTaEivRMaaehYaTYaez jaNaMaav*TYa deihNaMa( )) 40 ))
indriyäëi mano buddhir
asyädhiñöhänam ucyate
etair vimohayaty eña
jïänam ävåtya dehinam
indriyäëi—the senses; manaù—the mind; buddhiù—the
intelligence; asya—of the lust; adhiñöhänam—sitting place; ucyate—called;
etaiù—by all these; vimohayati—bewilders;
eñaù—of this; jïänam—knowledge;
ävåtya—covering; dehinam—the
embodied.
TRANSLATION
The senses, the mind and the intelligence are the sitting places
of this lust, which veils the real knowledge of the living entity and bewilders
him.
PURPORT
The enemy has captured different strategic positions in the body
of the conditioned soul, and therefore Lord Kåñëa is giving hints of those
places, so that one who wants to conquer the enemy may know where he can be
found. Mind is the center of all the activities of the senses, and thus the
mind is the reservoir of all ideas of sense gratification; and, as a result,
the mind and the senses become the repositories of lust. Next, the intelligence
department becomes the capital of such lustful propensities. Intelligence is
the immediate next-door neighbor of the spirit soul. Lusty intelligence
influences the spirit soul to acquire the false ego and identify itself with
matter, and thus with the mind and senses. The spirit soul becomes addicted to
enjoying the material senses and mistakes this as true happiness. This false identification
of the spirit soul is very nicely explained in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam:
yasyätma-buddhiù kuëäpe tri-dhätuke
sva-dhéù kalaträdiñu bhauma idyadhéù
yat-tértha-buddhiù salite na karhicij
janeñv abhijïeñu sa eva gokharaù.
"A human being who identifies this body made of three
elements with his self, who considers the by-products of the body to be his
kinsmen, who considers the land of birth as worshipable, and who goes to the
place of pilgrimage simply to take a bath rather than meet men of transcendental
knowledge there, is to be considered as an ass or a cow."
Bg 3.41
TEXT
41
TEXT
TaSMaatviMaiNd]Yaa<YaadaE
iNaYaMYa >arTazR>a )
PaaPMaaNa& Pa[Jaih ùeNa& jaNaivjaNaNaaXaNaMa( )) 41 ))
tasmät tvam indriyäëy ädau
niyamya bharatarñabha
päpmänaà prajahi hy enaà
jïäna-vijïäna-näçanam
tasmät—therefore; tvam—you; indriyäëi—senses; ädau—in
the beginning; niyamya—by regulating; bharatarñabha—O chief amongst the descendants of
Bharata; päpmänam—the great symbol of sin; prajahi—curb; hi—certainly; enam—this; jïäna—knowledge;
vijïäna—scientific knowledge of the pure soul; näçanam—destroyer.
TRANSLATION
Therefore, O Arjuna, best of the Bhäratas, in the very beginning
curb this great symbol of sin [lust] by regulating the senses, and slay this
destroyer of knowledge and self-realization.
PURPORT
The Lord advised Arjuna to regulate the senses from the very
beginning so that he could curb the greatest sinful enemy, lust, which destroys
the urge for self-realization, and specifically, knowledge of the self. Jïänam refers to knowledge of self as distinguished
from non-self, or, in other words, knowledge that the spirit soul is not the
body. Vijïänam refers to specific knowledge of
the spirit soul and knowledge of one’s constitutional position and his
relationship to the Supreme Soul. It is explained thus in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam: jïänaà parama-guhyaà me
yad-vijïäna-samanvitam / sarahasyaà tad-aìgaà ca gåhäna gaditaà mayä: "The
knowledge of the self and the Supreme Self is very confidential and mysterious,
being veiled by mäyä, but such knowledge and
specific realization can be understood if it is explained by the Lord
Himself." Bhagavad-gétä gives us that
knowledge, specifically knowledge of the self. The living entities are parts
and parcels of the Lord, and therefore they are simply meant to serve the Lord.
This consciousness is called Kåñëa consciousness. So, from the very beginning
of life one has to learn this Kåñëa consciousness, and thereby one may become
fully Kåñëa conscious and act accordingly.
Lust is only the perverted reflection of the love of God which is natural for every living entity. But if one is educated in Kåñëa consciousness from the very beginning, that natural love of God cannot deteriorate into lust. When love of God deteriorates into lust, it is very difficult to return to the normal condition. Nonetheless, Kåñëa consciousness is so powerful that even a late beginner can become a lover of God by following the regulative principles of devotional service. So, from any stage of life, or from the time of understanding its urgency, one can begin regulating the senses in Kåñëa consciousness, devotional service of the Lord, and turn the lust into love of Godhead—the highest perfectional stage of human life.
Bg 3.42
TEXT
42
TEXT
wiNd]Yaai<a
Para<YaahuiriNd]Yae>Ya" Par& MaNa" )
MaNaSaSTau Para buiÖYaaeR buÖe" ParTaSTau Sa" )) 42 ))
indriyäëi paräëy ähur
indriyebhyaù paraà manaù
manasas tu parä buddhir
yo buddheù paratas tu saù
indriyäëé—senses; paräëi—superior; ähuù—is
said; indriyebhyaù—more than the senses; param—superior; manaù—the
mind; manasaù—more than the mind; tu—also; parä—superior; buddhiù—intelligence; yaù—one
which; buddheù—more than the intelligence; parataù—superior; tu—but;
saù—he.
TRANSLATION
The working senses are superior to dull matter; mind is higher
than the senses; intelligence is still higher than the mind; and he [the soul]
is even higher than the intelligence.
PURPORT
The senses are different outlets for the activities of lust. Lust
is reserved within the body, but it is given vent through the senses.
Therefore, the senses are superior to the body as a whole. These outlets are
not in use when there is superior consciousness, or Kåñëa consciousness. In
Kåñëa consciousness the soul makes direct connection with the Supreme
Personality of Godhead; therefore the bodily functions, as described here,
ultimately end in the Supreme Soul. Bodily action means the functions of the
senses, and stopping the senses means stopping all bodily actions. But since
the mind is active, then, even though the body may be silent and at rest, the
mind will act—as it does during dreaming. But, above the mind there is the
determination of the intelligence, and above the intelligence is the soul
proper. If, therefore, the soul is directly engaged with the Supreme, naturally
all other subordinates, namely, the intelligence, mind and the senses, will be
automatically engaged. In the Kaöha Upaniñad there
is a passage in which it is said that the objects of sense gratification are
superior to the senses, and mind is superior to the sense objects. If,
therefore, the mind is directly engaged in the service of the Lord constantly,
then there is no chance of the senses becoming engaged in other ways. This
mental attitude has already been explained. If the mind is engaged in the transcendental
service of the Lord, there is no chance of its being engaged in the lower
propensities. In the Kaöha Upaniñad the soul has
been described as mahän, the great. Therefore the
soul is above all—namely, the sense objects, the senses, the mind and the
intelligence. Therefore, directly understanding the constitutional position of
the soul is the solution of the whole problem.
With intelligence one has to seek out the constitutional position of the soul and then engage the mind always in Kåñëa consciousness. That solves the whole problem. A neophyte spiritualist is generally advised to keep aloof from the objects of senses. One has to strengthen the mind by use of intelligence. If by intelligence one engages one’s mind in Kåñëa consciousness, by complete surrender unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead, then, automatically, the mind becomes stronger, and even though the senses are very strong, like serpents, they will be no more effective than serpents with broken fangs. But even though the soul is the master of intelligence and mind, and the senses also, still, unless it is strengthened by association with Kåñëa in Kåñëa consciousness, there is every chance of falling down due to the agitated mind.
Bg 3.43
TEXT
43
TEXT
Wv&
buÖe" Par& bud(ßa Sa&STa>YaaTMaaNaMaaTMaNaa )
Jaih Xa}au& Mahabahae k-aMaæPa& duraSadMa( )) 43 ))
evaà buddheù paraà buddhvä
saàstabhyätmänam ätmanä
jahi çatruà mahä-bäho
käma-rüpaà duräsadam
evam—thus; buddheù—of intelligence; param—superior;
buddhvä—so knowing; saàstabhya—by
steadying; ätmänam—the mind; ätmanä—by deliberate intelligence; jahi—conquer; çatrum—the
enemy; mahä-bäho—O mighty-armed one; käma-rüpam—the form of lust; duräsadam—formidable.
TRANSLATION
Thus knowing oneself to be transcendental to material senses, mind
and intelligence, one should control the lower self by the higher self and
thus—by spiritual strength—conquer this insatiable enemy known as lust.
PURPORT
This Third Chapter of the Bhagavad-gétä is
conclusively directive to Kåñëa consciousness by knowing oneself as the eternal
servitor of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, without considering impersonal
voidness as the ultimate end. In the material existence of life, one is
certainly influenced by propensities for lust and desire for dominating the
resources of material nature. Desire for overlording and sense gratification
are the greatest enemies of the conditioned soul; but by the strength of Kåñëa
consciousness, one can control the material senses, the mind and the
intelligence. One may not give up work and prescribed duties all of a sudden;
but by gradually developing Kåñëa consciousness, one can be situated in a
transcendental position without being influenced by the material senses and the
mind—by steady intelligence directed toward one’s pure identity. This is the
sum total of this chapter. In the immature stage of material existence,
philosophical speculations and artificial attempts to control the senses by the
so-called practice of yogic postures can never help a man toward spiritual
life. He must be trained in Kåñëa consciousness by higher intelligence.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the Third Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of Karma-yoga, or
the Discharge of One’s Prescribed Duty in Kåñëa Consciousness.
Bg 4. Transcendental Knowledge
CHAPTER
FOUR
Transcendental
Knowledge
Bg 4.1
TEXT
1
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
wMa& ivvSvTae YaaeGa& Pa[ae¢-vaNahMaVYaYaMa( )
ivvSvaNMaNave Pa[ah MaNauir+vak-ve_b]vqTa( )) 1 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
imaà vivasvate yogaà
proktavän aham avyayam
vivasvän manave präha
manur ikñväkave ’bravét
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; imam—this; vivasvate—unto the sun-god;
yogam—the science of one’s relationship to the Supreme; proktavän—instructed; aham—I; avyayam—imperishable; vivasvän—Vivasvän
(the sun-god’s name); manave—unto the father of
mankind (of the name Vaivasvata); präha—told; manuù—the father of mankind; ikñväkave—unto
King Ikñväku; abravét—said.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: I instructed this imperishable science of
yoga to the sun-god, Vivasvän, and Vivasvän instructed it to Manu, the father
of mankind, and Manu in turn instructed it to Ikñväku.
PURPORT
Herein we find the history of the Bhagavad-gétä
traced from a remote time when it was delivered to the royal order, the
kings of all planets. This science is especially meant for the protection of
the inhabitants and therefore the royal order should understand it in order to
be able to rule the citizens and protect them from the material bondage to
lust. Human life is meant for cultivation of spiritual knowledge, in eternal
relationship with the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and the executive heads
of all states and all planets are obliged to impart this lesson to the citizens
by education, culture and devotion. In other words, the executive heads of all
states are intended to spread the science of Kåñëa consciousness so that the
people may take advantage of this great science and pursue a successful path,
utilizing the opportunity of the human form of life.
In this millennium, the sun-god is known as Vivasvän, the king of the sun, which is the origin of all planets within the solar system. In the Brahma-saàhitä it is stated:
yac-cakñur eña savitä sakala-grahäëäà
räjä samasta-sura-mürttir açeña-tejäù
yasyäjïayä bhramati sambhåta-kälacakro
govindam ädi-puruñaà tam ahaà bhajämi
"Let me worship," Lord Brahmä said, "the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, Govinda [Kåñëa], who is the original person and under
whose order the sun, which is the king of all planets, is assuming immense
power and heat. The sun represents the eye of the Lord and traverses its orbit
in obedience to His order."
The sun is the king of the planets, and the sun-god (at present of
the name Vivasvän) rules the sun planet, which is controlling all other planets
by supplying heat and light. He is rotating under the order of Kåñëa, and Lord
Kåñëa originally made Vivasvän His first disciple to understand the science of Bhagavad-gétä. The Gétä
is not, therefore, a speculative treatise for the insignificant mundane scholar
but is a standard book of knowledge coming down from time immemorial. In the Mahäbhärata (Çänti-parva 348.51–52) we can trace out
the history of the Gétä as follows:
tretä-yugädau ca tato vivasvän manave dadau
manuç ca loka-bhåty-arthaà sutäyekñväkave dadau
ikñväkuëä ca kathito vyäpya lokän avasthitäù
"In the beginning of the Tretä-yuga [millennium] this science
of the relationship with the Supreme was delivered by Vivasvän to Manu. Manu,
being the father of mankind, gave it to his son Mahäräja Ikñväku, the King of this
earth planet and forefather of the Raghu dynasty in which Lord Rämacandra
appeared. Therefore, Bhagavad-gétä existed in the
human society from the time of Mahäräja Ikñväku."
At the present moment we have just passed through five thousand
years of the Kali-yuga, which lasts 432,000 years. Before this there was
Dväpara-yuga (800,000 years), and before that there was Tretä-yuga (1,200,000
years). Thus, some 2,005,000 years ago, Manu spoke the Bhagavad-gétä
to his disciple and son Mahäräja lkñväku, the King of this planet earth.
The age of the current Manu is calculated to last some 305,300,000 years, of
which 120,400,000 have passed. Accepting that before the birth of Manu, the Gétä was spoken by the Lord to His disciple, the
sun-god Vivasvän, a rough estimate is that the Gétä was
spoken at least 120,400,000 years ago; and in human society it has been extant
for two million years. It was respoken by the Lord again to Arjuna about five
thousand years ago. That is the rough estimate of the history of the Géta, according to the Gétä itself
and according to the version of the speaker, Lord Çré Kåñëa. It was spoken to
the sun-god Vivasvän because he is also a kñatriya and
is the father of all kñatriyas who are
descendants of the sun-god, or the sürya-vaàça kñatriyas.
Because Bhagavad-gétä is as good as the Vedas, being spoken by the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, this knowledge is apauruñeya, superhuman.
Since the Vedic instructions are accepted as they are, without human
interpretation, the Gétä must therefore be
accepted without mundane interpretation. The mundane wranglers may speculate on
the Gétä in their own ways, but that is not Bhagavad-gétä as it is. Therefore, Bhagavad-gétä has to be accepted as it is, from the
disciplic succession, and it is described herein that the Lord spoke to the
sun-god, the sun-god spoke to his son Manu, and Manu spoke to his son Ikñväku.
Bg 4.2
TEXT
2
TEXT
Wv&
ParMParaPa[aáiMaMa& raJazRYaae ivdu" )
Sa k-ale/Naeh MahTaa YaaeGaae Naí" ParNTaPa )) 2 ))
evaà paramparä-präptam
imaà räjarñayo viduù
sa käleneha mahatä
yogo nañöaù parantapa
evam—thus; paramparä—disciplic succession; präptam—received;
imam—this science; räjarñayaù—the
saintly kings; viduù—understood; saù—that knowledge; kälena—in
the course of time; iha—in this world; mahatä—by great; yogaù—the
science of one’s relationship with the Supreme; nañöaù—scattered;
parantapa—O Arjuna, subduer of the enemies.
TRANSLATION
This supreme science was thus received through the chain of
disciplic succession, and the saintly kings understood it in that way. But in
course of time the succession was broken, and therefore the science as it is
appears to be lost.
PURPORT
It is clearly stated that the Gétä
was especially meant for the saintly kings because they were to execute its
purpose in ruling over the citizens. Certainly Bhagavad-gétä
was never meant for the demonic persons, who would dissipate its value
for no one’s benefit and would devise all types of interpretations according to
personal whims. As soon as the original purpose was scattered by the motives of
the unscrupulous commentators, there arose the need to reestablish the
disciplic succession. Five thousand years ago it was detected by the Lord
Himself that the disciplic succession was broken, and therefore He declared
that the purpose of the Gétä appeared to be lost.
In the same way, at the present moment also there are so many editions of the Gétä (especially in English), but almost all of them
are not according to authorized disciplic succession. There are innumerable
interpretations rendered by different mundane scholars, but almost all of them
do not accept the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, although they make a
good business on the words of Çré Kåñëa. This spirit is demonic, because demons
do not believe in God but simply enjoy the property of the Supreme. Since there
is a great need of an edition of the Gétä in
English, as it is received by the paramparä (disciplic
succession) system, an attempt is made herewith to fulfill this great want. Bhagavad-gétä—accepted as it is—is a great boon to
humanity; but if it is accepted as a treatise of philosophical speculations, it
is simply a waste of time.
Bg 4.3
TEXT
3
TEXT
Sa WvaYa&
MaYaa Tae_Û YaaeGa" Pa[ae¢-" PauraTaNa" )
>a¢-ae_iSa Mae Sa%a ceiTa rhSYa& ùeTadutaMaMa( )) 3 ))
sa eväyaà mayä te ’dya
yogaù proktaù purätanaù
bhakto ’si me sakhä ceti
rahasyaà hy etad uttamam
saù—the same
ancient; eva—certainly; ayam—this;
mayä—by Me; te—unto
you; adya—today; yogaù—the
science of yoga; proktaù—spoken; purätanaù—very old; bhaktaù—devotee;
asi—you are; me—My; sakhä—friend; ca—also; iti—therefore; rahasyam—mystery;
hi—certainly; etat—this;
uttamam—transcendental.
TRANSLATION
That very ancient science of the relationship with the Supreme is
today told by Me to you because you are My devotee as well as My friend;
therefore you can understand the transcendental mystery of this science.
PURPORT
There are two classes of men, namely the devotee and the demon.
The Lord selected Arjuna as the recipient of this great science owing to his
becoming the devotee of the Lord, but for the demon it is not possible to
understand this great mysterious science. There are a number of editions of
this great book of knowledge, and some of them have commentaries by the
devotees, and some of them have commentaries by the demons. Commentation by the
devotees is real, whereas that of the demons is useless. Arjuna accepts Çré
Kåñëa as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and any commentary on the Gétä following in the footsteps of Arjuna is real
devotional service to the cause of this great science. The demonic, however,
concoct something about Kåñëa and mislead the public and general readers from
the path of Kåñëa’s instructions. One should try to follow the disciplic
succession from Arjuna, and thus be benefitted.
Bg 4.4
TEXT
4
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac
APar& >avTaae JaNMa Par& JaNMa ivvSvTa" )
k-QaMaeTaiÜJaaNaqYaa& TvMaadaE Pa[ae¢-vaiNaiTa )) 4 ))
arjuna
uväca
aparaà bhavato janma
paraà janma vivasvataù
katham etad vijänéyäà
tvam ädau proktavän iti
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna said;
aparam—junior; bhavataù—Your;
janma—birth; param—superior;
janma—birth; vivasvataù—of
the sun-god; katham—how; etat—this;
vijänéyäm—shall I understand; tvam—You; ädau—in the
beginning; proktavän—instructed; iti—thus.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said: The sun-god Vivasvän is senior by birth to You. How
am I to understand that in the beginning You instructed this science to him?
PURPORT
Arjuna is an accepted devotee of the Lord, so how could he not
believe Kåñëa’s words? The fact is that Arjuna is not inquiring for himself but
for those who do not believe in the Supreme Personality of Godhead or for the
demons who do not like the idea that Kåñëa should be accepted as the Supreme
Personality of Godhead; for them only Arjuna inquires on this point, as if he
were himself not aware of the Personality of Godhead, or Kåñëa. As it will be
evident from the Tenth Chapter, Arjuna knew perfectly well that Kåñëa is the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, the fountainhead of everything and the last
word in Transcendence. Of course, Kåñëa also appeared as the son of Devaké on
this earth. How Kåñëa remained the same Supreme Personality of Godhead, the
eternal, original person, is very difficult for an ordinary man to understand.
Therefore, to clarify this point, Arjuna put this question before Kåñëa so that
He Himself could speak authoritatively. That Kåñëa is the supreme authority is
accepted by the whole world, not only at present, but from time immemorial, and
the demons alone reject Him. Anyway, since Kåñëa is the authority accepted by all,
Arjuna put this question before Him in order that Kåñëa would describe Himself
without being depicted by the demons who always try to distort Him in a way
understandable to the demons and their followers. It is necessary that
everyone, for his own interest, know the science of Kåñëa. Therefore, when
Kåñëa Himself speaks about Himself, it is auspicious for all the worlds. To the
demons, such explanations by Kåñëa Himself may appear to be strange because the
demons always study Kåñëa from their own standpoint, but those who are devotees
heartily welcome the statements of Kåñëa when they are spoken by Kåñëa Himself.
The devotees will always worship such authoritative statements of Kåñëa because
they are always eager to know more and more about Him. The atheists, who
consider Kåñëa an ordinary man, may in this way come to know that Kåñëa is
superhuman, that He is sac-cid-änanda-vigraha—the
eternal form of bliss and knowledge—that He is transcendental, and that He is
above the domination of the modes of material nature and above the influence of
time and space. A devotee of Kåñëa’s, like Arjuna, is undoubtedly above any
misunderstanding of the transcendental position of Kåñëa. Arjuna’s putting this
question before the Lord is simply an attempt by the devotee to defy the
atheistic attitude of persons who consider Kåñëa to be an ordinary human being
subject to the modes of material nature.
Bg 4.5
TEXT
5
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
bhUiNa Mae VYaTaqTaaiNa JaNMaaiNa Tav caJauRNa )
TaaNYah& ved SavaRi<a Na Tv& veTQa ParNTaPa )) 5 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
bahüni me vyatétäni
janmäni tava cärjuna
täny ahaà veda sarväëi
na tvaà vettha parantapa
çré bhagavän uväca—the
Personality of Godhead said; bahüni—many; me—of Mine; vyatétäni—have
passed; janmäni—births; tava—of
yours; ca—and also; arjuna—O
Arjuna; täni—all those; aham—I; veda—do know; sarväëi—all;
na—not; tvam—yourself;
vettha—know; parantapa—O
subduer of the enemy.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: Many, many births both you and I have
passed. I can remember all of them, but you cannot, O subduer of the enemy!
PURPORT
In the Brahma-saàhitä we have
information of many, many incarnations of the Lord. lt is stated there:
advaitam acyutam anädim ananta-rüpam
ädyaà puräëa-puruñaà nava-yauvanaà ca
vedeñu durllabham adurllabham ätma-bhaktau
govindam ädi-puruñaà tam ahaà bhajämi.
(Bs. 5.33)
"I worship the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Govinda
[Kåñëa], who is the original person—absolute, infallible, without beginning,
although expanded into unlimited forms, still the same original, the oldest,
and the person always appearing as a fresh youth. Such eternal, blissful,
all-knowing forms of the Lord are usually understood by the best Vedic
scholars, but they are always manifest to pure, unalloyed devotees." It is
also stated in Brahma-saàhitä:
rämädi mürttiñu kalä-niyamena tiñöhan
nänävatäram akarod bhuvaneñu kintu
kåñëaù svayaà samabhavat paramaù pumän yo
govindam ädi-puruñaà tam ahaà bhajämi
(Bs. 5.39)
"I worship the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Govinda
[Kåñëa], who is always situated in various incarnations such as Räma, Nåsiàha
and many sub-incarnations as well, but who is the original Personality of
Godhead known as Kåñëa, and who incarnates personally also."
In the Vedas also it is said that
the Lord, although one without a second, nevertheless manifests Himself in
innumerable forms. He is like the vaidurya stone,
which changes color yet still remains one. All those multi-forms are understood
by the pure, unalloyed devotees, but not by a simple study of the Vedas: vedeñu durllabham adurllabham ätma-bhaktau. Devotees
like Arjuna are constant companions of the Lord, and whenever the Lord
incarnates, the associate devotees also incarnate in order to serve the Lord in
different capacities. Arjuna is one of these devotees, and in this verse it is
understood that some millions of years ago when Lord Kåñëa spoke the Bhagavad-gétä to the sun-god Vivasvän, Arjuna, in a
different capacity, was also present. But the difference between the Lord and
Arjuna is that the Lord remembered the incidence, whereas Arjuna could not
remember. That is the difference between the part and parcel living entity and
the Supreme Lord. Although Arjuna is addressed herein as the mighty hero who
could subdue the enemies, he is unable to recall what had happened in his
various past births. Therefore, a living entity, however great he may be in the
material estimation, can never equal the Supreme Lord. Anyone who is a constant
companion of the Lord is certainly a liberated person, but he cannot be equal
to the Lord. The Lord is described in the Brahma-saàhitä
as infallible (acyuta), which means that
He never forgets Himself, even though He is in material contact. Therefore, the
Lord and the living entity can never be equal in all respects, even if the
living entity is as liberated as Arjuna. Although Arjuna is a devotee of the
Lord, he sometimes forgets the nature of the Lord, but by the divine grace a
devotee can at once understand the infallible condition of the Lord, whereas a
nondevotee or a demon cannot understand this transcendental nature.
Consequently these descriptions in the Gétä cannot
be understood by demonic brains. Kåñëa remembered acts which were performed by
Him millions of years before, but Arjuna could not, despite the fact that both
Kåñëa and Arjuna are eternal in nature. We may also note herein that a living
entity forgets everything due to his change of body, but the Lord remembers
because He does not change His sac-cid-änanda body.
He is advaita, which means there is no
distinction between His body and Himself. Everything in relation to Him is
spirit—whereas the conditioned soul is different from his material body. And,
because the Lord’s body and self are identical, His position is always
different from the ordinary living entity, even when He descends to the
material platform. The demons cannot adjust themselves to this transcendental
nature of the Lord, as the Lord explains in the following verse.
Bg 4.6
TEXT
6
TEXT
AJaae_iPa
SaàVYaYaaTMaa >aUTaaNaaMaqìrae_iPa SaNa( )
Pa[k*-iTa& SvaMaiDaïaYa SaM>avaMYaaTMaMaaYaYaa )) 6 ))
ajo ’pi sann avyayätmä
bhütänäm éçvaro ’pi san
prakåtià sväm adhiñöhäya
sambhavämy ätma-mäyayä
ajaù—unborn; api—although; san—being
so; avyaya—without deterioration; ätmä—body; bhütänäm—all
those who are born; éçvaraù—the Supreme Lord; api—although; san—being
so; prakåtim—transcendental form; sväm—of Myself; adhiñöhäya—being
so situated; sambhavämi—I do incarnate; ätma-mäyayä—by My internal energy.
TRANSLATION
Although I am unborn and My transcendental body never
deteriorates, and although I am the Lord of all sentient beings, I still appear
in every millennium in My original transcendental form.
PURPORT
The Lord has spoken about the peculiarity of His birth: although
He may appear like an ordinary person, He remembers everything of His many,
many past "births," whereas a common man cannot remember what he has
done even a few hours before. If someone is asked what he did exactly at the
same time one day earlier, it would be very difficult for a common man to
answer immediately. He would surely have to dredge his memory to recall what he
was doing exactly at the same time one day before. And yet, men often dare
claim to be God, or Kåñëa. One should not be misled by such meaningless claims.
Then again, the Lord explains His prakåti or His form.
Prakåti means nature as well as svarüpa, or one’s own form. The Lord says that He
appears in His own body. He does not change His body, as the common living
entity changes from one body to another. The conditioned soul may have one kind
of body in the present birth, but he has a different body in the next birth. In
the material world, the living entity has no fixed body but transmigrates from
one body to another. The Lord, however, does not do so. Whenever He appears, He
does so in the same original body, by His internal potency. In other words,
Kåñëa appears in this material world in His original eternal form, with two
hands, holding a flute. He appears exactly in His eternal body, uncontaminated
by this material world. Although He appears in the same transcendental body and
is Lord of the universe, it still appears that He takes His birth like an
ordinary living entity. Despite the fact Lord Kåñëa grows from childhood to
boyhood and from boyhood to youth, astonishingly enough He never ages beyond youth.
At the time of the Battle of Kurukñetra, He had many grandchildren at home; or,
in other words, He had sufficiently aged by material calculations. Still He
looked just like a young man twenty or twenty-five years old. We never see a
picture of Kåñëa in old age because He never grows old like us, although He is
the oldest person in the whole creation—past, present, and future. Neither His
body nor His intelligence ever deteriorates or changes. Therefore, it is clear
that in spite of His being in the material world, He is the same unborn,
eternal form of bliss and knowledge, changeless in His transcendental body and
intelligence. Factually, His appearance and disappearance is like the sun’s
rising, moving before us, and then disappearing from our eyesight. When the sun
is out of sight, we think that the sun is set, and when the sun is before our
eyes, we think that the sun is on the horizon. Actually, the sun is always in
its fixed position, but owing to our defective, insufficient senses, we
calculate the appearance and disappearance of the sun in the sky. And, because
His appearance and disappearance are completely different from that of any
ordinary, common living entity, it is evident that He is eternal, blissful
knowledge by His internal potency—and He is never contaminated by material
nature. The Vedas also confirm that the Supreme
Personality of Godhead is unborn, yet He still appears to take His birth in
multi-manifestations. The Vedic supplementary literatures also confirm that
even though the Lord appears to be taking His birth, He is still without change
of body. In the Bhägavatam, He appears before His
mother as Näräyaëa, with four hands and the decorations of the six kinds of
full opulences. His appearance in His original eternal form is His causeless
mercy, according to the Viçvakoça dictionary. The
Lord is conscious of all of His previous appearances and disappearances, but a
common living entity forgets everything about his past body as soon as he gets
another body. He is the Lord of all living entities because He performs
wonderful and superhuman activities while He is on this earth. Therefore, the
Lord is always the same Absolute Truth and is without differentiation between
His form and self, or between His quality and body. A question may now be
raised as to why the Lord appears and disappears in this world. This is
explained in the next verse.
Bg 4.7
TEXT
7
TEXT
Yada Yada ih
DaMaRSYa Gl/aiNa>aRviTa >aarTa )
A>YauTQaaNaMaDaMaRSYa TadaTMaaNa& Sa*JaaMYahMa( )) 7 ))
yadä yadä hi dharmasya
glänir bhavati bhärata
abhyutthänam adharmasya
tadätmänaà såjämy aham
yadä—whenever; yadä—wherever; hi—certainly;
dharmasya—of religion; gläniù—discrepancies;
bhavati—manifested, becomes; bhärata—O descendant of Bharata; abhyutthänam—predominance; adharmasya—of
irreligion; tadä—at that time; ätmänam—self; såjämi—manifest;
aham—I.
TRANSLATION
Whenever and wherever there is a decline in religious practice, O
descendant of Bharata, and a predominant rise of irreligion—at that time I
descend Myself.
PURPORT
The word såjämi is significant
herein. Såjämi cannot be used in the sense of
creation. because, according to the previous verse, there is no creation of the
Lord’s form or body, since all of the forms are eternally existent. Therefore såjämi means that the Lord manifests Himself as He is.
Although the Lord appears on schedule, namely at the end of Dväpara-yuga of the
twenty-eighth millennium of the eighth Manu, in one day of Brahmä, still He has
no obligation to adhere to such rules and regulations because He is completely
free to act in many ways at His will. He therefore appears by His own will
whenever there is a predominance of irreligiosity and a disappearance of true
religion. Principles of religion are laid down in the Vedas,
and any discrepancy in the matter of properly executing the rules of the
Vedas makes one irreligious. In the Bhägavatam it is stated that such principles are the
laws of the Lord. Only the Lord can manufacture a system of religion. The Vedas are also accepted as originally spoken by the
Lord Himself to Brahmä, from within his heart. Therefore, the principles of dharma, or religion, are the direct orders of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead (dharmaà tu
säkñät-bhagavat-praëétam). These principles are clearly indicated
throughout the Bhagavad-gétä. The purpose of the Vedas is to establish such principles under the order
of the Supreme Lord, and the Lord directly orders, at the end of the Gétä, that the highest principle of religion is to
surrender unto Him only, and nothing more. The Vedic principles push one
towards complete surrender unto Him; and, whenever such principles are
disturbed by the demonic, the Lord appears. From the Bhägavatam
we understand that Lord Buddha is the incarnation of Kåñëa who appeared
when materialism was rampant and materialists were using the pretext of the
authority of the Vedas. Although there are
certain restrictive rules and regulations regarding animal sacrifice for
particular purposes in the Vedas, people of
demonic tendency still took to animal sacrifice without reference to the Vedic
principles. Lord Buddha appeared to stop this nonsense and to establish the
Vedic principles of nonviolence. Therefore each and every avatära, or incarnation of the Lord, has a particular
mission, and they are all described in the revealed scriptures. No one should
be accepted as an avatära unless he is referred
to by scriptures. It is not a fact that the Lord appears only on Indian soil.
He can advent Himself anywhere and everywhere, and whenever He desires to
appear. In each and every incarnation, He speaks as much about religion as can
be understood by the particular people under their particular circumstances.
But the mission is the same—to lead people to God consciousness and obedience
to the principles of religion. Sometimes He descends personally, and sometimes
He sends His bona fide representative in the form of His son, or servant, or
Himself in some disguised form.
The principles of the Bhagavad-gétä were spoken to Arjuna, and, for that matter, to other highly elevated persons, because he was highly advanced compared to ordinary persons in other parts of the world. Two plus two equals four is a mathematical principle that is true both in the beginner’s arithmetic class and in the advanced class as well. Still, there are higher and lower mathematics. In all incarnations of the Lord, therefore, the same principles are taught, but they appear to be higher and lower in varied circumstances. The higher principles of religion begin with the acceptance of the four orders and the four statuses of social life, as will be explained later. The whole purpose of the mission of incarnations is to arouse Kåñëa consciousness everywhere. Such consciousness is manifest and nonmanifest only under different circumstances.
Bg 4.8
TEXT
8
TEXT
Pair}aa<aaYa
SaaDaUNaa& ivNaaXaaYa c duZk*-TaaMa( )
DaMaRSa&SQaaPaNaaQaaRYa SaM>avaiMa YauGae YauGae )) 8 ))
pariträëäya sädhünäà
vinäçäya ca duñkåtäm
dharma-saàsthäpanärthäya
sambhavämi yuge yuge
pariträëäya—for the
deliverance; sädhünäm—of the devotees; vinäçäya—for the annihilation; ca—also;
duñkåtäm—of the miscreants; dharma—principles of religion; saàsthäpana-arthäya—to
reestablish; sambhavämi—I do appear; yuge—millennium; yuge—after
millennium.
TRANSLATION
In order to deliver the pious and to annihilate the miscreants, as
well as to reestablish the principles of religion, I advent Myself millennium
after millennium.
PURPORT
According to Bhagavad-gétä, a sädhu (holyman) is a man in Kåñëa consciousness. A
person may appear to be irreligious, but if he has the qualifications of Kåñëa
consciousness wholly and fully, he is to be understood to be a sädhu. And duñkåtam applies
to one who doesn't care for Kåñëa consciousness. Such miscreants, or duñkåtam, are described as foolish and the lowest of
mankind, even though they may be decorated with mundane education; whereas
another person, who is one hundred percent engaged in Kåñëa consciousness, is
accepted as sädhu, even though such a person may
neither be learned nor well cultured. As far as the atheistic are concerned, it
is not necessary for the Supreme Lord to appear as He is to destroy them, as He
did with the demons Rävaëa and Kaàsa. The Lord has many agents who are quite
competent to vanquish demons. But the Lord especially descends to appease His
unalloyed devotees, who are always harassed by the demonic. The demon harasses
the devotee, even though the latter may happen to be his kin. Although Prahläda
Mahäräja was the son of Hiraëyakaçipu, he was nonetheless persecuted by his
father; although Devaké, the mother of Kåñëa, was the sister of Kaàsa, she and
her husband Vasudeva were persecuted only because Kåñëa was to be born of them.
So Lord Kåñëa appeared primarily to deliver Devaké, rather than kill Kaàsa, but
both were performed simultaneously. Therefore it is said here that to deliver
the devotee and vanquish the demon miscreants, the Lord appears in different
incarnations.
In the Caitanya-caritämåta of Kåñëadäsa Kaviräja, the following verses summarize these principles of incarnation:
såñöi-hetu yei mürti prapaïce avatare
sei éçvara-mürti ‘avatära’ näma dhare
mäyätita paravyome savära avasthäna
viçve ‘avatäri’ dhare ‘avatära’ näma.
"The avatära, or incarnation of
Godhead, descends from the kingdom of God for material manifestation. And the
particular form of the Personality of Godhead who so descends is called an
incarnation, or avatära. Such incarnations are
situated in the spiritual world, the kingdom of God. When they descend to the
material creation, they assume the name avatära."
There are various kinds of avatäras, such
as puruñävatäras, guëävatäras, lélävatäras, çaktyäveça
avatäras, manvantara-avatäras and yugävatäras—all
appearing on schedule all over the universe. But Lord Kåñëa is the primeval
Lord, the fountainhead of all avatäras. Lord Çré
Kåñëa descends for the specific purposes of mitigating the anxieties of the
pure devotees, who are very anxious to see Him in His original Våndävana
pastimes. Therefore, the prime purpose of the Kåñëa avatära
is to satisfy His unalloyed devotees.
The Lord says that He incarnates Himself in every millennium. This indicates that He incarnates also in the age of Kali. As stated in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam, the incarnation in the age of Kali is Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu, who spread the worship of Kåñëa by the saìkértana movement (congregational chanting of the holy names), and spread Kåñëa consciousness throughout India. He predicted that this culture of saìkértana would be broadcast all over the world, from town to town and village to village. Lord Caitanya as the incarnation of Kåñëa, the Personality of Godhead, is described secretly but not directly in the confidential parts of the revealed scriptures, such as the Upaniñads, Mahäbhärata, Bhägavatam, etc. The devotees of Lord Kåñëa are much attracted by the saìkértana movement of Lord Caitanya. This avatära of the Lord does not kill the miscreants, but delivers them by the causeless mercy of the Lord.
Bg 4.9
TEXT
9
TEXT
JaNMa k-MaR c
Mae idVYaMaev& Yaae veita TatvTa" )
TYa¤-a deh& PauNaJaRNMa NaEiTa MaaMaeiTa Saae_JauRNa )) 9 ))
janma karma ca me divyam
evaà yo vetti tattvataù
tyaktvä dehaà punar janma
naiti mäm eti so ’rjuna
janma—birth; karma—work; ca—also; me—of Mine; divyam—transcendental;
evam—like this; yaù—anyone
who; vetti—knows; tattvataù—in
reality; tyaktvä—leaving aside; deham—this body; punaù—again;
janma—birth; na—never;
eti—does attain; mäm—unto
Me; eti—does attain; saù—he;
arjuna—O Arjuna.
TRANSLATION
One who knows the transcendental nature of My appearance and
activities does not, upon leaving the body, take his birth again in this
material world, but attains My eternal abode, O Arjuna.
PURPORT
The Lord’s descent from His transcendental abode is already
explained in the 6th verse. One who can understand the truth of the appearance
of the Personality of Godhead is already liberated from material bondage, and
therefore he returns to the kingdom of God immediately after quitting this
present material body. Such liberation of the living entity from material
bondage is not at all easy. The impersonalists and the yogés
attain liberation only after much trouble and many, many births. Even then, the
liberation they achieve—merging into the impersonal brahmajyoti
of the Lord—is only partial, and there is the risk of returning again to
this material world. But the devotee, simply by understanding the
transcendental nature of the body and activities of the Lord, attains the abode
of the Lord after ending this body and does not run the risk of returning again
to this material world. In the Brahma-saàhitä it
is stated that the Lord has many, many forms and incarnations: advaitam acyutam anädim ananta-rüpam. Although there
are many transcendental forms of the Lord, they are still one and the same
Supreme Personality of Godhead. One has to understand this fact with
conviction, although it is incomprehensible to mundane scholars and empiric
philosophers. As stated in the Vedas:
eko devo nitya-lélänurakto bhakta-vyäpé hådy antarätmä.
"The one Supreme Personality of Godhead is eternally engaged
in many, many transcendental forms in relationships with His unalloyed
devotees." This Vedic version is confirmed in this verse of the Gétä personally by the Lord. He who accepts this truth
on the strength of the authority of the Vedas and
of the Supreme Personality of Godhead and who does not waste time in
philosophical speculations attains the highest perfectional stage of
liberation. Simply by accepting this truth on faith, one can, without a doubt,
attain liberation. The Vedic version, "tattvamasi,"
is actually applied in this case. Anyone who understands Lord Kåñëa to be the
Supreme, or who says unto the Lord, "You are the same Supreme Brahman, the
Personality of Godhead" is certainly liberated instantly, and consequently
his entrance into the transcendental association of the Lord is guaranteed. In
other words, such a faithful devotee of the Lord attains perfection, and this
is confirmed by the following Vedic assertion:
tam eva viditvätimåtyumeti nänyaù panthä vidyate ayanäya.
One can attain the perfect stage of liberation from birth and
death simply by knowing the Lord, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. There is
no alternative because anyone who does not understand Lord Kåñëa as the Supreme
Personality of Godhead is surely in the mode of ignorance. Consequently he will
not attain salvation, simply, so to speak, by licking the outer surface of the
bottle of honey, or by interpreting the Bhagavad-gétä according
to mundane scholarship. Such empiric philosophers may assume very important
roles in the material world, but they are not necessarily eligible for
liberation. Such puffed up mundane scholars have to wait for the causeless
mercy of the devotee of the Lord. One should therefore cultivate Kåñëa
consciousness with faith and knowledge, and in this way attain perfection.
Bg 4.10
TEXT
10
TEXT
vqTaraGa>aYa§-aeDaa
MaNMaYaa MaaMauPaaié[Taa" )
bhvae jaNaTaPaSaa PaUTaa MaÙavMaaGaTaa" )) 10 ))
véta-räga-bhaya-krodhä
man-mayä mäm upäçritäù
bahavo jïäna-tapasä
pütä mad-bhävam ägatäù
véta—freed from; räga—attachment; bhaya—fear;
krodhäù—anger; mat-mayä—fully
in Me; mäm—unto Me; upäçritäù—being
fully situated; bahavaù—many; jïäna—knowledge; tapasä—by
penance; pütäù—being purified; mat-bhävam—transcendental love for Me; ägatäù—attained.
TRANSLATION
Being freed from attachment, fear and anger, being fully absorbed
in Me and taking refuge in Me, many, many persons in the past became purifled
by knowledge of Me—and thus they all attained transcendental love for Me.
PURPORT
As described above, it is very difficult for a person who is too
materially affected to understand the personal nature of the Supreme Absolute
Truth. Generally, people who are attached to the bodily conception of life are
so absorbed in materialism that it is almost impossible for them to understand
that there is a transcendental body which is imperishable, full of knowledge
and eternally blissful. In the materialistic concept, the body is perishable,
full of ignorance and completely miserable. Therefore, people in general keep
this same bodily idea in mind when they are informed of the personal form of
the Lord. For such materialistic men, the form of the gigantic material
manifestation is supreme. Consequently they consider the Supreme to be
impersonal. And because they are too materially absorbed, the conception of
retaining the personality after liberation from matter frightens them. When
they are informed that spiritual life is also individual and personal, they
become afraid of becoming persons again, and so they naturally prefer a kind of
merging into the impersonal void. Generally, they compare the living entities
to the bubbles of the ocean, which merge into the ocean. That is the highest
perfection of spiritual existence attainable without individual personality.
This is a kind of fearful stage of life, devoid of perfect knowledge of spiritual
existence. Furthermore there are many persons who cannot understand spiritual
existence at all. Being embarassed by so many theories and by contradictions of
various types of philosophical speculation, they become disgusted or angry and
foolishly conclude that there is no supreme cause and that everything is
ultimately void. Such people are in a diseased condition of life. Some people
are too materially attached and therefore do not give attention to spiritual
life, some of them want to merge into the supreme spiritual cause, and some of
them disbelieve in everything, being angry at all sorts of spiritual
speculation out of hopelessness. This last class of men take to the shelter of
some kind of intoxication, and their affective hallucinations are sometimes
accepted as spiritual vision. One has to get rid of all three stages of
attachment to the material world: negligence of spiritual life, fear of a
spiritual personal identity, and the conception of void that underlies the
frustration of life. To get free from these three stages of the material
concept of life, one has to take complete shelter of the Lord, guided by the
bona fide spiritual master, and follow the disciplines and regulative
principles of devotional life. The last stage of the devotional life is called bhäva, or transcendental love of Godhead.
According to Bhakti-rasämåta-sindhu, the science of devotional service:
ädau çraddhä tataù sädhu-saìgo ’tha bhajana-kriyä
tato ’nartha-nivåttiù syät tato niñöhä rucis tataù
athäsaktis tato bhävas tataù premäbhyudaïcati
sädhakänäm ayaà premëaù prädurbhäve bhavet kramaù.
"In the beginning one must have a preliminary desire for
self-realization. This will bring one to the stage of trying to associate with
persons who are spiritually elevated. In next stage one becomes initiated by an
elevated spiritual master, and under his instruction the neophyte devotee
begins the process of devotional service. By execution of devotional service
under the guidance of the spiritual master, one becomes free from all material
attachment, attains steadiness in self-realization, and acquires a taste for
hearing about the Absolute Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëa. This taste leads
one further forward to attachment for Kåñëa consciousness, which is matured in bhäva, or the preliminary stage of transcendental love
of God. Real love for God is called premä, the
highest perfectional stage of life." In the premä
stage there is constant engagement in the transcendental loving service of the
Lord. So, by the slow process of devotional service, under the guidance of the
bona fide spiritual master, one can attain the highest stage, being freed from
all material attachment, from the fearfulness of one’s individual spiritual
personality, and from the frustrations resulting from void philosophy. Then one
can ultimately attain to the abode of the Supreme Lord.
Bg 4.11
TEXT
11
TEXT
Yae YaQaa
Maa& Pa[PaÛNTae Taa&STaQaEv >aJaaMYahMa( )
MaMa vTMaaRNauvTaRNTae MaNauZYaa" PaaQaR SavRXa" )) 11 ))
ye yathä mäà prapadyante
täàs tathaiva bhajämy aham
mama vartmänuvartante
manuñyäù pärtha sarvaçaù
ye—all of them;
yathä—as; mäm—unto
Me; prapadyante—surrender; tän—unto them; tathä—so; eva—certainly; bhajämi—do
I reward; aham—I; mama—My;
vartma—path; anuvartante—do
follow; manuñyäù—all men; pärtha—O
son of Påthä; sarvaçaù—in all respects.
TRANSLATION
All of them—as they surrender unto Me—I reward accordingly.
Everyone follows My path in all respects, O son of Påthä.
PURPORT
Eveyone is searching for Kåñëa in the different aspects of His
manifestations. Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, is partially
realized in His impersonal brahmajyoti effulgence
and as the all-pervading Supersoul dwelling within everything, including the
particles of atoms. But Kåñëa is only fully realized by His pure devotees. Consequently,
Kåñëa is the object of everyone’s realization, and thus anyone and everyone is
satisfied according to one’s desire to have Him. In the transcendental world
also, Kåñëa reciprocates with His pure devotees in the transcendental attitude,
just as the devotee wants Him. One devotee may want Kåñëa as supreme master,
another as his personal friend, another as his son, and still another as his
lover. Kåñëa rewards all the devotees equally, according to their different
intensities of love for Him. In the material world, the same reciprocations of
feelings are there, and they are equally exchanged by the Lord with the
different types of worshipers. The pure devotees both here and in the
transcendental abode associate with Him in person and are able to render
personal service to the Lord and thus derive transcendental bliss in His loving
service. As for those who are impersonalists and who want to commit spiritual
suicide by annihilating the individual existence of the living entity, Kåñëa
helps also by absorbing them into His effulgence. Such impersonalists do not
agree to accept the eternal, blissful Personality of Godhead; consequently they
cannot relish the bliss of transcendental personal service to the Lord, having
extinguished their individuality. Some of them, who are not situated even in
the impersonal existence, return to this material field to exhibit their
dormant desires for activities. They are not admitted in the spiritual planets,
but they are again given a chance to act on the material planets. For those who
are fruitive workers, the Lord awards the desired results of their prescribed
duties, as the yajïeçvara; and those who are yogés seeking mystic powers are awarded such powers. In
other words, everyone is dependant for success upon His mercy alone, and all
kinds of spiritual processes are but different degrees of success on the same
path. Unless, therefore, one comes to the highest perfection of Kåñëa
consciousness, all attempts remain imperfect, as is stated in the Çrémad Bhägavatam:
akämaù sarva-kämo vä mokña-käma udäradhéù
tévreëa bhakti-yogena yajeta puruñaà param
"Whether one is without desire [the condition of the
devotees], or is desirous of all fruitive results, or is after liberation, one
should with all efforts try to worship the Supreme Personality of Godhead for
complete perfection, culminating in Kåñëa consciousness." (Bhäg. 2.3.10)
Bg 4.12
TEXT
12
TEXT
k-a¿NTa"
k-MaR<aa& iSaiÖ& YaJaNTa wh devTaa" )
i+aPa[& ih MaaNauze l/aeke- iSaiÖ>aRviTa k-MaRJaa )) 12 ))
käìkñantaù karmaëäà siddhià
yajanta iha devatäù
kñipraà hi mänuñe loke
siddhir bhavati karma-jä
käìkñantaù—desiring; karmaëäm—of fruitive activities; siddhim—perfection; yajante—worship
by sacrifices; iha—in the material world; devatäù—the demigods; kñipram—very
quickly; hi—certainly; mänuñe—in
human society; loke—within this world; siddhiù bhavati—becomes successful; karmajä—the fruitive worker.
TRANSLATION
Men in this world desire success in fruitive activities, and
therefore they worship the demigods. Quickly, of course, men get results from
fruitive work in this world.
PURPORT
There is a great misconception about the gods or demigods of this
material world, and men of less intelligence, although passing as great
scholars, take these demigods to be various forms of the Supreme Lord.
Actually, the demigods are not different forms of God, but they are God’s
different parts and parcels. God is one, and the parts and parcels are many.
The Vedas say, nityo
nityänäm: God is one. Éçvaraù paramaù kåñëaù. The
Supreme God is one—Kåñëa—and the demigods are delegated with powers to manage
this material world. These demigods are all living entities (nityänäm) with different grades of material power.
They cannot be equal to the Supreme God—Näräyaëa, Viñëu, or Kåñëa. Anyone who
thinks that God and the demigods are on the same level is called an atheist, or
päñaëòé. Even the great demigods like Brahmä and
Çiva cannot be compared to the Supreme Lord. In fact, the Lord is worshiped by
demigods such as Brahmä and Çiva (çiva-viriïci-nutam). Yet
curiously enough there are many human leaders who are worshiped by foolish men
under the misunderstanding of anthropomorphism or zoomorphism. Iha devatäù denotes a powerful man or demigod of this
material world. But Näräyaëa, Viñëu or Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, does not belong to this world. He is above, or transcendental to,
material creation. Even Çrépäda Çaìkaräcärya, the leader of the impersonalists,
maintains that Näräyaëa, or Kåñëa, is beyond this material creation. However,
foolish people (håt-aïjana) worship the demigods
because they want immediate results. They get the results, but do not know that
results so obtained are temporary and are meant for less intelligent persons.
The intelligent person is in Kåñëa consciousness, and he has no need to worship
the paltry demigods for some immediate, temporary benefit. The demigods of this
material world, as well as their worshipers, will vanish with the annihilation
of this material world. The boons of the demigods are material and temporary.
Both the material worlds and their inhabitants, including the demigods, and
their worshipers, are bubbles in the cosmic ocean. In this world, however,
human society is mad after temporary things such as the material opulence of
possessing land, family and enjoyable paraphernalia. To achieve such temporary
things, they worship the demigods or powerful men in human society. If a man
gets some ministership in the government by worshiping a political leader, he
considers that he has achieved a great boon. All of them are therefore
kowtowing to the so-called leaders or "big guns" in order to achieve
temporary boons, and they indeed achieve such things. Such foolish men are not
interested in Kåñëa consciousness for the permanent solution to the hardships
of material existence. They are all after sense enjoyment, and to get a little
facility for sense enjoyment they are attracted to worship empowered living
entities known as demigods. This verse indicates that people are rarely
interested in Kåñëa consciousness. They are mostly interested in material
enjoyment, and therefore they worship some powerful living entity.
Bg 4.13
TEXT
13
TEXT
caTauvR<Ya|
MaYaa Sa*í& Gau<ak-MaRiv>aaGaXa" )
TaSYa k-TaaRrMaiPa Maa& ivÖyk-TaaRrMaVYaYaMa( )) 13 ))
cätur-varëyaà mayä såñöaà
guëa-karma-vibhägaçaù
tasya kartäram api mäà
viddhy akartäram avyayam
cätur-varëyam—the four
divisions of human society; mayä—by Me; såñöam—created; guëa—quality;
karma—work; vibhägaçaù—in
terms of division; tasya—of that; kartäram—the father; api—although;
mäm—Me; viddhi—you
may know; akartäram—as the non-doer; avyayam—being unchangeable.
TRANSLATION
According to the three modes of material nature and the work
ascribed to them, the four divisions of human society were created by Me. And,
although I am the creator of this system, you should know that I am yet the
non-doer, being unchangeable.
PURPORT
The Lord is the creator of everything. Everything is born of Him,
everything is sustained by Him, and everything, after annihilation, rests in
Him. He is therefore the creator of the four divisions of the social order,
beginning with the intelligent class of men, technically called brähmaëas due to their being situated in the mode of
goodness. Next is the administrative class, technically called the kñatriyas due to their being situated in the mode of
passion. The mercantile men, called the vaiçyas,
are situated in the mixed modes of passion and ignorance, and the çüdras, or laborer class, are situated in the ignorant
mode of material nature. In spite of His creating the four divisions of human
society, Lord Kåñëa does not belong to any of these divisions, because He is
not one of the conditioned souls, a section of whom form human society. Human
society is similar to any other animal society, but to elevate men from the animal
status, the abovementioned divisions are created by the Lord for the systematic
development of Kåñëa consciousness. The tendency of a particular man toward
work is determined by the modes of material nature which he has acquired. Such
symptoms of life, according to different modes of material nature, are
described in the Eighteenth Chapter of this book. A person in Kåñëa
consciousness, however, is above even the brähmaëas, because
a brähmaëa by quality is supposed to know about
Brahman, the Supreme Absolute Truth. Most of them approach the impersonal
Brahman manifestation of Lord Kåñëa, but only a man who transcends the limited
knowledge of a brähmaëa and reaches the knowledge
of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Çré Kåñëa, becomes a person in Kåñëa
consciousness—or, in other words, a Vaiñëava. Kåñëa
consciousness includes knowledge of all different plenary expansions of Kåñëa,
namely Räma, Nåsiàha, Varäha, etc. However, as Kåñëa is transcendental to this
system of the four divisions of human society, a person in Kåñëa consciousness
is also transcendental to all divisions of human society, whether we consider
the divisions of community, nation or species.
Bg 4.14
TEXT
14
TEXT
Na Maa&
k-MaaRi<a il/MPaiNTa Na Mae k-MaRf-le/ SPa*ha )
wiTa Maa& Yaae_i>aJaaNaaiTa k-MaRi>aNaR Sa bDYaTae )) 14 ))
na mäà karmäëi limpanti
na me karma-phale spåhä
iti mäà yo ’bhijänäti
karmabhir na sa badhyate
na—never; mäm—unto Me; karmäëi—all
kinds of work; limpanti—do affect; na—nor; me—My; karma-phale—in fruitive action; spåhä—aspiration; iti—thus;
mäm—unto Me; yaù—one
who; abhijänäti—does know; karmabhiù—by the reaction of such work; na—never does; saù—he; badhyate—become entangled.
TRANSLATION
There is no work that affects Me; nor do I aspire for the fruits
of action. One who understands this truth about Me also does not become
entangled in the fruitive reactions of work.
PURPORT
As there are constitutional laws in the material world stating
that the king can do no wrong, or that the king is not subject to the state
laws, similarly the Lord, although He is the creator of this material world, is
not affected by the activities of the material world. He creates and remains
aloof from the creation, whereas the living entities are entangled in the
fruitive results of material activities because of their propensity for lording
it over material resources. The proprietor of an establishment is not
responsible for the right and wrong activities of the workers, but the workers
are themselves responsible. The living entities are engaged in their respective
activities of sense gratification, and these activities are not ordained by the
Lord. For advancement of sense gratification, the living entities are engaged
in the work of this world, and they aspire to heavenly happiness after death.
The Lord, being full in Himself, has no attraction for so-called heavenly
happiness. The heavenly demigods are only His engaged servants. The proprietor
never desires the low-grade happiness such as the workers may desire. He is
aloof from the material actions and reactions. For example, the rains are not
responsible for different types of vegetation that appear on the earth,
although without such rains there is no possibility of vegetative growth. Vedic
småti confirms this fact as follows:
nimitta-mätram eväsau såjyänäà sarga-karmaëi
pradhäna-käraëé-bhütä yato vai såjya-çaktayaù.
In the material creations, the Lord is only the supreme cause. The
immediate cause is material nature by which the cosmic manifestation is
visible. The created beings are of many varieties, such as the demigods, human
beings and lower animals, and all of them are subject to the reactions of their
past good or bad activities. The Lord only gives them the proper facilities for
such activities and the regulations of the modes of nature, but He is never
responsible for their past and present activities. In the Vedänta-sütras it is confirmed that the Lord is never
partial to any living entity. The living entity is responsible for his own
acts. The Lord only gives him facilities, through the agency of material
nature, the external energy. Anyone who is fully conversant with all the
intricacies of this law of karma, or fruitive
activities, does not become affected by the results of his activities. In other
words, the person who understands this transcendental nature of the Lord is an
experienced man in Kåñëa consciousness, and thus he is never subjected to the
laws of karma. One who does not know the
transcendental nature of the Lord and who thinks that the activities of the
Lord are aimed at fruitive results, as are the activities of the ordinary
living entities, certainly becomes entangled himself in fruitive reaction. But
one who knows the Supreme Truth is a liberated soul fixed in Kåñëa
consciousness.
Bg 4.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
Wv& jaTva
k*-Ta& k-MaR PaUvŒriPa MauMau+aui>a" )
ku-å k-MaŒv TaSMaatv& PaUvŒ" PaUvRTar& k*-TaMa( )) 15 ))
evaà jïätvä kåtaà karma
pürvair api mumukñubhiù
kuru karmaiva tasmät tvaà
pürvaiù pürvataraà kåtam
evam—thus; jïätvä—knowing well; kåtam—performed;
karma—work; pürvaiù—by
past authorities; api—although; mumukñubhiù—who attained liberation; kuru—just perform; karma—prescribed
duty; eva—certainly; tasmät—therefore;
tvam—you; pürvaiù—by
the predecessors; pürvataram—ancient
predecessors; kåtam—as performed.
TRANSLATION
All the liberated souls in ancient times acted with this
understanding and so attained liberation. Therefore, as the ancients, you
should perform your duty in this divine consciousness.
PURPORT
There are two classes of men. Some of them are full of polluted material
things within their hearts, and some of them are materially free. Kåñëa
consciousness is equally beneficial for both of these persons. Those who are
full of dirty things can take to the line of Kåñëa consciousness for a gradual
cleansing process, following the regulative principles of devotional service.
Those who are already cleansed of the impurities may continue to act in the
same Kåñëa consciousness so that others may follow their exemplary activities
and thereby be benefitted. Foolish persons or neophytes in Kåñëa consciousness
often want to retire from activities without having knowledge of Kåñëa
consciousness. Arjuna’s desire to retire from activities on the battlefield was
not approved by the Lord. One need only know how to act. To retire from the
activities of Kåñëa consciousness and to sit aloof making a show of Kåñëa
consciousness; is less important than actually engaging in the field of
activities for the sake of Kåñëa. Arjuna is here advised to act in Kåñëa
consciousness, following in the footsteps of the Lord’s previous disciples,
such as the sun-god Vivasvän, as mentioned hereinbefore. The Supreme Lord knows
all His past activities, as well as those of persons who acted in Kåñëa
consciousness in the past. Therefore He recommends the acts of the sun-god, who
learned this art from the Lord some millions of years before. All such students
of Lord Kåñëa are mentioned here as past liberated persons, engaged in the
discharge of duties allotted by Kåñëa.
Bg 4.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
ik&- k-MaR
ik-Mak-MaeRiTa k-vYaae_PYa}a MaaeihTaa" )
Tatae k-MaR Pa[v+YaaiMa YaJjaTva Maae+YaSae_éu>aaTa( )) 16 ))
kià karma kim akarmeti
kavayo ’py atra mohitäù
tat te karma pravakñyämi
yaj jïätvä mokñyase ’çubhät
kim—what is; karma—action; kim—what
is; akarma—inaction; iti—thus;
kavayaù—the intelligent; api—also;
atra—in this matter; mohitäù—bewildered;
tat—that; te—unto
you; karma—work; pravakñyämi—I
shall explain; yat—which; jïätvä—knowing;
mokñyase—be liberated; açubhät—from
ill fortune.
TRANSLATION
Even the intelligent are bewildered in determining what is action
and what is inaction. Now I shall explain to you what action is, knowing which
you shall be liberated from all sins.
PURPORT
Action in Kåñëa consciousness has to be executed in accord with
the examples of previous bona fide devotees. This is recommended in the 15th
verse. Why such action should not be independant will be explained in the text
to follow.
To act in Kåñëa consciousness, one has to follow the leadership of authorized persons who are in a line of disciplic succession as explained in the beginning of this chapter. The system of Kåñëa consciousness was first narrated to the sun-god, the sun-god explained it to his son Manu, Manu explained it to his son Ikñväku, and the system is current on this earth from that very remote time. Therefore, one has to follow in the footsteps of previous authorities in the line of disciplic succession. Otherwise even the most intelligent men will be bewildered regarding the standard actions of Kåñëa consciousness. For this reason, the Lord decided to instruct Arjuna in Kåñëa consciousness directly. Because of the direct instruction of the Lord to Arjuna, anyone who follows in the footsteps of Arjuna is certainly not bewildered.
It is said that one cannot ascertain the ways of religion simply by imperfect experimental knowledge. Actually, the principles of religion can only be laid down by the Lord Himself. Dharmaà hi säkñät-bhagavat-praëétam. No one can manufacture a religious principle by imperfect speculation. One must follow in the footsteps of great authorities like Brahmä, Çiva, Närada, Manu, Kumära, Kapila, Prahläda, Bhéñma, Çukadeva Gosvämé, Yamaräja, Janaka, etc. By mental speculation one cannot ascertain what is religion or self-realization. Therefore, out of causeless mercy to His devotees, the Lord explains directly to Arjuna what action is and what inaction is. Only action performed in Kåñëa consciousness can deliver a person from the entanglement of material existence.
Bg 4.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
k-MaR<aae
ùiPa baeÖVYa& baeÖVYa& c ivk-MaR<a" )
Ak-MaR<aê baeÖVYa& GahNaa k-MaR<aae GaiTa" )) 17 ))
karmaëo hy api boddhavyaà
boddhavyaà ca vikarmaëaù
akarmaëaç ca boddhavyaà
gahanä karmaëo gatiù
karmaëaù—working
order ; hi—certainly; api—also;
boddhavyam—should be understood; boddhavyam—to be understood; ca—also;
vikarmaëaù—forbidden work; akarmaëaù—inaction; ca—also;
boddhavyam—should be understood; gahanä—very difficult; karmaëaù—working
order; gatiù—to enter into.
TRANSLATION
The intricacies of action are very hard to understand. Therefore
one should know properly what action is, what forbidden action is, and what
inaction is.
If one is serious about liberation from material bondage, one has
to understand the distinctions between action, inaction and unauthorized
actions. One has to apply oneself to such an analysis of action, reaction and
perverted actions because it is a very difficult subject matter. To understand
Kåñëa consciousness and action according to the modes, one has to learn one’s
relationship with the Supreme; i.e., one who has learned perfectly knows that
every living entity is the eternal servitor of the Lord and that consequently
one has to act in Kåñëa consciousness. The entire Bhagavad-gétä
is directed toward this conclusion. Any other
conclusions, against this consciousness and its attendant reactions, are vikarmas, or prohibitive actions. To understand all
this one has to associate with authorities in Kåñëa consciousness and learn the
secret from them; this is as good as learning from the Lord directly. Otherwise,
even the most intelligent person will be bewildered.
Bg 4.18
TEXT
18
TEXT
k-MaR<Yak-MaR
Ya" PaXYaedk-MaRi<a c k-MaR Ya" )
Sa buiÖMaaNMaNauZYaezu Sa Yau¢-" k*-Tòk-MaRk*-Ta( )) 18 ))
karmaëy akarma yaù paçyed
akarmaëi ca karma yaù
sa buddhimän manuñyeñu
sa yuktaù kåtsna-karma-kåt
karmaëi—in action; akarma—inaction; yaù—one
who; paçyet—observes; akarmaëi—in
inaction; ca—also; karma—fruitive
action; yaù—one who; saù—he;
buddhimän—is intelligent; manuñyeñu—in
human society; saù—he; yuktaù—is
in the transcendental position; kåtsna-karma-kåt—although
engaged in all activities.
TRANSLATION
One who sees inaction in action, and action in inaction, is
intelligent among men, and he is in the tranecendental position, although
engaged in all sorts of activities.
PURPORT
A person acting in Kåñëa consciousness is naturally free from the
bonds of karma. His activities are all performed
for Kåñëa; therefore he does not enjoy or suffer any of the effects of work.
Consequently he is intelligent in human society, even though he is engaged in
all sorts of activities for Kåñëa. Akarma means
without reaction to work. The impersonalist ceases fruitive activities out of
fear, so that the resultant action may not be a stumbling block on the path of
self-realization, but the personalist knows rightly his position as the eternal
servitor of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Therefore he engages himself in
the activities of Kåñëa consciousness. Because everything is done for Kåñëa, he
enjoys only transcendental happiness in the discharge of this service. Those
who are engaged in this process are known to be without desire for personal
sense gratification. The sense of eternal servitorship to Kåñëa makes one
immune to all sorts of reactionary elements of work.
Bg 4.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
YaSYa SaveR
SaMaarM>aa" k-aMaSaªLPaviJaRTaa" )
jaNaaiGandGDak-MaaR<a& TaMaahu" Pai<@Ta& buDaa" )) 19
))
yasya sarve samärambhäù
käma-saìkalpa-varjitäù
jïänägni-dagdha-karmäëaà
tam ähuù paëòitaà budhäù
yasya—one whose; sarve—all sorts of; samärambhäù—in
all attempts; käma—desire for sense
gratification; saìkalpa—determination; varjitäù—are devoid of; jïäna—of
perfect knowledge; ägni—fire; dagdha—being burnt by; karmäëam—the
performer; tam—him; ähuù—declare;
paëòitam—learned; budhäù—those
who know.
TRANSLATION
One is understood to be in full knowledge whose every act is
devoid of desire for sense gratification. He is said by sages to be a worker
whose fruitive action is burned up by the fire of perfect knowledge.
PURPORT
Only a person in full knowledge can understand the activities of a
person in Kåñëa consciousness. Because the person in Kåñëa consciousness is
devoid of all kinds of sense-gratificatory propensities, it is to be understood
that he has burned up the reactions of his work by perfect knowledge of his constitutional
position as the eternal servitor of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He is
actually learned who has attained to such perfection of knowledge. Development
of this knowledge of the eternal servitorship of the Lord is compared to fire.
Such a fire, once kindled, can burn up all kinds of reactions to work.
Bg 4.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
TYa¤-a
k-MaRf-l/aSa®& iNaTYaTa*áae iNaraé[Ya" )
k-MaR<Yai>aPa[v*taae_iPa NaEv ik-iÄTk-raeiTa Sa" )) 20 ))
tyaktvä karma-phaläsaìgaà
nitya-tåpto niräçrayaù
karmaëy abhipravåtto ’pi
naiva kiïcit karoti saù
tyaktvä—having given
up; karma-phala-äsaìgam—attachment for fruitive
results; nitya—always; tåptaù—being
satisfied; niräçrayaù—without any center; karmaëi—in activity; abhipravåttaù—being
fully engaged; api—in spite of; na—does not; eva—certainly;
kiïcit—anything; karoti—do;
saù—he.
TRANSLATION
Abandoning all attachment to the results of his activities, ever
satisfied and independant, he performs no fruitive action, although engaged in
all kinds of undertakings.
PURPORT
This freedom from the bondage of actions is possible only in Kåñëa
consciousness when one is doing everything for Kåñëa. A Kåñëa conscious person
acts out of pure love for the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and therefore he
has no attraction for the results of the action. He is not even attached to his
personal maintenance, for everything is left to Kåñëa. Nor is he anxious to
secure things, nor to protect things already in his possession. He does his
duty to his best ability and leaves everything to Kåñëa. Such an unattached
person is always free from the resultant reactions of good and bad; it is as
though he were not doing anything. This is the sign of akarma,
or actions without fruitive reactions. Any other action, therefore, devoid of
Kåñëa consciousness, is binding upon the worker, and that is the real aspect of
vikarma, as explained hereinbefore.
Bg 4.21
TEXT
21
TEXT
iNaraXaqYaRTaictaaTMaa
TYa¢-SavRPairGa]h" )
Xaarqr& ke-vl&/ k-MaR ku-vRàaPanaeiTa ik-iLbzMa( )) 21 ))
niräçér yata-cittätmä
tyakta-sarva-parigrahaù
çäréraà kevalaà karma
kurvan näpnoti kilbiñam
niräçéù—without
desire for the results; yata—controlled; citta-ätmä—mind and intelligence; tyakta—giving up; sarva—all;
parigrahaù—sense of proprietorship over all
possessions; çäréram—in keeping body and soul
together; kevalam—only; karma—work;
kurvan—doing so; na—never;
äpnoti—does not acquire; kilbiñam—sinful
reactions.
TRANSLATION
Such a man of understanding acts with mind and intelligence
perfectly controlled, gives up all sense of proprietorship over his possessions
and acts only for the bare necessities of life. Thus working, he is not
affected by sinful reactions.
PURPORT
A Kåñëa conscious person does not expect good or bad results in
his activities. His mind and intelligence are fully controlled. He knows that
he is part and parcel of the Supreme, and therefore the part played by him, as
a part and parcel of the whole, is not his by choice but is chosen for him by
the Supreme and is done only through His agency. When the hand moves, it does
not move out of its own accord, but by the endeavor of the whole body. A Kåñëa
conscious person is always dovetailed with the supreme desire, for he has no
desire for personal sense gratification. He moves exactly like a part of a
machine. As a machine part requires oiling and cleaning for maintenance,
similarly, a Kåñëa conscious man maintains himself by his work just to remain
fit for action in the transcendental loving service of the Lord. He is
therefore immune to all the reactions of his endeavors. Like an animal, he has
no proprietorship even over his own body. A cruel proprietor of an animal
sometimes kills the animal in his possession, yet the animal does not protest.
Nor does it have any real independence. A Kåñëa conscious person, fully engaged
in self-realization, has very little time to falsely possess any material
object. For maintaining body and soul, he does not require unfair means of
accumulating money. He does not, therefore, become contaminated by such
material sins. He is free from all reactions to his actions.
Bg 4.22
TEXT
22
TEXT
Yad*C^al/a>aSaNTauíae
ÜNÜaTaqTaae ivMaTSar" )
SaMa" iSaÖaviSaÖaE c k*-TvaiPa Na iNabDYaTae )) 22 ))
yadåcchä-läbha-santuñöo
dvandvätéto vimatsaraù
samaù siddhäv asiddhau ca
kåtväpi na nibadhyate
yadåcchä—out of its
own accord; läbha—gain; santuñöaù—satisfied;
dvandva—duality; atétaù—surpassed;
vimatsaraù—free from envy; samaù—steady; siddhau—in
success; asiddhau—failure; ca—also; kåtvä—doing; api—although; na—never; nibadhyate—is affected.
TRANSLATION
He who is satisfied with gain which comes of its own accord, who
is free from duality and does not envy, who is steady both in success and
failure, is never entangled, although performing actions.
PURPORT
A Kåñëa conscious person does not make much endeavor even to
maintain his body. He is satisfied with gains which are obtained of their own
accord. He neither begs nor borrows, but he labors honestly as far as is in his
power, and is satisfied with whatever is obtained by his own honest labor. He
is therefore independant in his livelihood. He does not allow anyone’s service
to hamper his own service in Kåñëa consciousness. However, for the service of
the Lord he can participate in any kind of action without being disturbed by
the duality of the material world. The duality of the material world is felt in
terms of heat and cold, or misery and happiness. A Kåñëa conscious person is
above duality because he does not hesitate to act in any way for the
satisfaction of Kåñëa. Therefore he is steady both in success and in failure. These
signs are visible when one is fully in transcendental knowledge.
Bg 4.23
TEXT
23
TEXT
GaTaSa®SYa
Mau¢-SYa jaNaaviSQaTaceTaSa" )
YajaYaacrTa" k-MaR SaMaGa]& Pa[ivl/IYaTae )) 23 ))
gata-saìgasya muktasya
jïänävasthita-cetasaù
yajïäyäcarataù karma
samagraà praviléyate
gata-saìgasya—unattached
to the modes of material nature; muktasya—of the
liberated; jïäna-avasthita—situated in
transcendence; cetasaù—of such wisdom; yajïäya—for the sake of Yajïa (Kåñëa); äcarataù—so acting; karma—work;
samagram—in total; praviléyate—merges
entirely.
TRANSLATION
The work of a man who is unattached to the modes of material
nature and who is fully situated in transcendental knowledge merges entirely
into transcendence.
PURPORT
Becoming fully Kåñëa conscious, one is freed from all dualities
and thus is free from the contaminations of the material modes. He can become
liberated because he knows his constitutional position in relationship with
Kåñëa; and thus his mind cannot be drawn from Kåñëa consciousness.
Consequently, whatever he does, he does for Kåñëa, who is the primeval Viñëu.
Therefore, all his works are technically sacrifices because sacrifice involves
satisfying the Supreme Person, Kåñëa. The resultant reactions to all such work
certainly merge into transcendence, and one does not suffer material effects.
Bg 4.24
TEXT
24
TEXT
b]øaPaR<a&
b]ø hivb]RøaGanaE b]ø<aa huTaMa( )
b]øEv TaeNa GaNTaVYa& b]øk-MaRSaMaaiDaNaa )) 24 ))
brahmärpaëaà brahma havir
brahmägnau brahmaëä hutam
brahmaiva tena gantavyaà
brahma-karma-samädhinä
brahma—spiritual
nature; arpaëam—contribution; brahma—the Supreme; haviù—butter;
brahma—spiritual; agnau—in
the fire of consummation; brähmaëä—by the spirit
soul; hutam—offered; brahma—spiritual
kingdom; eva—certainly; tena—by
him; gantavyam—to be reached; brahma—spiritual; karma—activities;
samädhinä—by complete absorption.
TRANSLATION
A person who is fully absorbed in Kåñëa consciousness is sure to
attain the spiritual kingdom because of his full contribution to spiritual
activities, in which the consummation is absolute and that which is offered is
of the same spiritual nature.
PURPORT
How activities in Kåñëa consciousness can lead one ultimately to
the spiritual goal is described here. There are various activities in Kåñëa
consciousness, and all of them will be described in the following verses. But,
for the present, just the principle of Kåñëa consciousness is described. A
conditioned soul, entangled in material contamination, is sure to act in the
material atmosphere, and yet he has to get out of such an environment. The
process by which the conditioned soul can get out of the material atmosphere is
Kåñëa consciousness. For example, a patient who is suffering from a disorder of
the bowels due to overindulgence in milk products is cured by another milk product,
namely curds. The materially absorbed conditioned soul can be cured by Kåñëa
consciousness as set forth here in the Gétä. This
process is generally known as yajïa, or
activities (sacrifices) simply meant for the satisfaction of Viñëu or Kåñëa.
The more the activities of the material world are performed in Kåñëa
consciousness, or for Viñëu only, the more the atmosphere becomes spiritualized
by complete absorption. Brahman means spiritual. The Lord is spiritual, and the
rays of His transcendental body are called brahmajyoti, His
spiritual effulgence. Everything that exists is situated in that brahmajyoti, but when the jyoti
is covered by illusion (mäyä) or sense
gratification, it is called material. This material veil can be removed at once
by Kåñëa consciousness; thus the offering for the sake of Kåñëa consciousness,
the consuming agent of such an offering or contribution; the process of
consumption, the contributor, and the result are—all combined together—Brahman,
or the Absolute Truth. The Absolute Truth covered by mäyä
is called matter. Matter dovetailed for the cause of the Absolute Truth regains
its spiritual quality. Kåñëa consciousness is the process of converting the
illusory consciousness into Brahman, or the Supreme. When the mind is fully absorbed
in Kåñëa consciousness, it is said to be in samädhi, or
trance. Anything done in such transcendental consciousness is called yajïa, or sacrifice for the Absolute. In that condition
of spiritual consciousness, the contributor, the contribution, the consumption,
the performer or leader of the performance, and the result or ultimate
gain—everything—becomes one in the Absolute, the Supreme Brahman. That is the
method of Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 4.25
TEXT
25
TEXT
dEvMaevaPare
Yaj& YaaeiGaNa" PaYauRPaaSaTae )
b]øaGanavPare Yaj& YajeNaEvaePaJauûiTa )) 25 ))
daivam eväpare yajïaà
yoginaù paryupäsate
brahmägnäv apare yajïaà
yajïenaivopajuhvati
daivam—in
worshiping the demigods; eva—like this; apare—some; yajïam—sacrifices;
yoginaù—the mystics; paryupäsate—worship
perfectly; brahma—the Absolute Truth; agnau—in the fire of; apare—others;
yajïam—sacrifice; yajïena—by
sacrifice; eva—thus; upajuhvati—worship.
TRANSLATION
Some yogés perfectly worship the demigods by offering different
sacrifices to them, and some of them offer sacrffices in the fire of the
Supreme Brahman.
PURPORT
As described above, a person engaged in discharging duties in
Kåñëa consciousness is also called a perfect yogé
or a first-class mystic. But there are others also, who perform similar
sacrifices in the worship of demigods, and still others who sacrifice to the
Supreme Brahman, or the impersonal feature of the Supreme Lord. So there are
different kinds of sacrifices in terms of different categories. Such different
categories of sacrifice by different types of performers only superficially
demark varieties of sacrifice. Factual sacrifice means to satisfy the Supreme
Lord, Viñëu, who is also known as Yajïa. All the
different varieties of sacrifice can be placed within two primary divisions:
namely, sacrifice of worldly possessions and sacrifice in pursuit of
transcendental knowledge. Those who are in Kåñëa consciousness sacrifice all
material possessions for the satisfaction of the Supreme Lord, while others,
who want some temporary material happiness, sacrifice their material
possessions to satisfy demigods such as Indra, the sun-god, etc. And others,
who are impersonalists, sacrifice their identity by merging into the existence
of impersonal Brahman. The demigods are powerful living entities appointed by
the Supreme Lord for the maintenance and supervision of all material functions
like the heating, watering and lighting of the universe. Those who are
interested in material benefits worship the demigods by various sacrifices
according to the Vedic rituals. They are called bahv-éçvara-vädé,
or believers in many gods. But others, who worship the impersonal
feature of the Absolute Truth and regard the forms of the demigods as
temporary, sacrifice their individual selves in the supreme fire and thus end their
individual existences by merging into the existence of the Supreme. Such
impersonalists spend their time in philosophical speculation to understand the
transcendental nature of the Supreme. In other words, the fruitive workers
sacrifice their material possessions for material enjoyment, whereas the
impersonalist sacrifices his material designations with a view to merging into
the existence of the Supreme. For the impersonalist, the fire altar of
sacrifice is the Supreme Brahman, and the offering is the self being consumed
by the fire of Brahman. The Kåñëa conscious person, like Arjuna, however,
sacrifices everything for the satisfaction of Kåñëa, and thus all his material
possessions as well as his own self—everything—is sacrificed for Kåñëa. Thus, he
is the first-class yogé; but he does not lose his
individual existence.
Bg 4.26
TEXT
26
TEXT
é[ae}aadqNaqiNd]Yaa<YaNYae
Sa&YaMaaiGanzu JauûiTa )
XaBdadqiNvzYaaNaNYa wiNd]YaaiGanzu JauûiTa )) 26 ))
çroträdénéndriyäëy anye
saàyamägniñu juhvati
çabdädén viñayän anya
indriyägniñu juhvati
çrotra ädéni—hearing
process; indriyäëi—senses; anye—others; saàyama—of
restraint; agniñu—in the fire; juhvati—offers; çabda-ädén—sound
vibration, etc.; viñayän—objects of sense
gratification; anye—others: indriya—of sense organs; agniñu—in
the fire; juhvati—sacrifice.
TRANSLATION
Some of them sacrifice the hearing process and the senses in the
fire of the controlled mind, and others sacrifice the objects of the senses,
such as sound, in the fire of sacrifice.
PURPORT
The four divisions of human life, namely the brahmacäré, the gåhastha, the
vänaprastha, and the sannyäsé,
are all meant to help men become perfect yogés
or transcendentalists. Since human life is not meant for our enjoying sense
gratification like the animals, the four orders of human life are so arranged
that one may become perfect in spiritual life. The brahmacärés,
or students under the care of a bona fide spiritual master, control the
mind by abstaining from sense gratification. They are referred to in this verse
as sacrificing the hearing process and the senses in the fire of the controlled
mind. A brahmacäré hears only words concerning
Kåñëa consciousness; hearing is the basic principle for understanding, and
therefore the pure brahmacäré engages fully in harer nämänukértanam—chanting and hearing the glories
of the Lord. He restrains himself from the vibrations of material sounds, and
his hearing is engaged in the transcendental sound vibration of Hare Kåñëa,
Hare Kåñëa. Similarly, the householders, who have some license for sense
gratification, perform such acts with great restraint. Sex life, intoxication
and meat eating are general tendencies of human society, but a regulated
householder does not indulge in unrestricted sex life and other sense
gratifications. Marriage on principles of religious life is therefore current
in all civilized human society because that is the way for restricted sex life.
This restricted, unattached sex life is also a kind of yajïa
because the restricted householder sacrifices his general tendency toward sense
gratification for higher transcendental life.
Bg 4.27
TEXT
27
TEXT
SavaR<aqiNd]Yak-MaaRi<a
Pa[a<ak-MaaRi<a caPare )
AaTMaSa&YaMaYaaeGaaGanaE JauûiTa jaNadqiPaTae )) 27 ))
sarväëéndriya-karmäëi
präëa-karmäëi cäpare
ätma-saàyama-yogägnau
juhvati jïäna-dépite
sarväëi—all; indriya—senses; karmäëi—functions;
präëa-karmäëi—functions of the life breath; ca—also; apare—others; ätma-saàyama—controlling the mind; yoga—linking process; agnau—in
the fire of; juhvati—offers; jïäna-dépite—because of the urge for self-realization.
TRANSLATION
Those who are interested in self-realization, in terms of mind and
sense control, offer the functions of all the senses, as well as the vital
force [breath], as oblations into the fire of the controlled mind.
PURPORT
The yoga system conceived by
Pataïjali is referred to herein. In the Yoga-sütra
of Pataïjali, the soul is called pratyag-ätmä and
parag-ätmä. As long as the soul is attached to
sense enjoyment, it is called parag-ätmä. The
soul is subjected to the functions of ten kinds of air at work within the body,
and this is perceived through the breathing system. The Pätaïjala system of yoga instructs one on how to control the functions of
the body’s air in a technical manner so that ultimately all the functions of
the air within become favorable for purifying the soul of material attachment.
According to this yoga system, pratyag ätmä is the ultimate goal. This pratyag ätmä is a withdrawal from activities in matter.
The senses interact with the sense objects, like the ear for hearing, eyes for
seeing, nose for smelling, tongue for tasting, hand for touching, and all of
them are thus engaged in activities outside the self. They are called the
functions of the präëa-väyu. The apäna-väyu goes downwards, vyäna-väyu
acts to shrink and expand, samäna-väyu adjusts
equilibrium, udäna-väyu goes upwards—and when one
is enlightened, one engages all these in searching for self-realization.
Bg 4.28
TEXT
28
TEXT
d]VYaYajaSTaPaaeYaja
YaaeGaYajaSTaQaaPare )
SvaDYaaYajaNaYajaê YaTaYa" Sa&iXaTav]Taa" )) 28 ))
dravya-yajïäs tapo-yajïä
yoga-yajïäs tathäpare
svädhyäya-jïäna-yajïäç ca
yatayaù saàçita-vratäù
dravya-yajïäù—sacrificing
one’s possessions; tapo-yajïäù—sacrifice in
austerities; yoga-yajïäù—sacrifice in eightfold
mysticism; tathä—thus; apare—others;
svädhyäya—sacrifice in the study of the Vedas; jïäna-yajïäù—sacrifice in advancement of
transcendental knowledge; ca—also; yatayaù—enlightened; saàçita—taken
to strict; vratäù—vows.
TRANSLATION
There are others who, enlightened by sacrificing their material
possessions in severe austerities, take strict vows and practice the yoga of
eightfold mysticism, and others study the Vedas for the advancement of
transcendental knowledge.
PURPORT
These sacrifices may be fitted into various divisions. There are
persons who are sacrificing their possessions in the form of various kinds of
charities. In India, the rich mercantile community or princely orders open
various kinds of charitable institutions like dharmaçälä,
anna-kñetra, atithi-çälä, anathalaya, vidyäpéöha, etc. In other
countries, too, there are many hospitals, old age homes and similar charitable
foundations meant for distributing food, education and medical treatment free
to the poor. All these charitable activities are called dravyamaya-yajïa.
There are others who, for higher elevation in life or for promotion to
higher planets within the universe, voluntarily accept many kinds of
austerities such as candräyana and cäturmäsya. These processes entail severe vows for
conducting life under certain rigid rules. For example, under the cäturmäsya vow the candidate does not shave for four
months during the year (July to October), he does not eat certain foods, does
not eat twice in a day and does not leave home. Such sacrifice of the comforts
of life is called tapomaya-yajïa. There are still
others who engage themselves in different kinds of mystic yogas like the Pataïjali system (for merging into the
existence of the Absolute), or haöha-yoga or añöäìga-yoga (for particular perfections). And some
travel to all the sanctified places of pilgrimage. All these practices are
called yoga-yajïa, sacrifice for a certain type
of perfection in the material world. There are others who engage themselves in
the studies of different Vedic literatures, specifically the Upaniñads and Vedänta-sütras, or
the säìkhya philosophy. All of these are called svädhyäya-yajïa, or engagement in the sacrifice of
studies. All these yogés are faithfully engaged
in different types of sacrifice and are seeking a higher status of life. Kåñëa
consciousness, is, however, different from these because it is the direct
service of the Supreme Lord. Kåñëa consciousness cannot be attained by any one
of the above-mentioned types of sacrifices but can be attained only by the
mercy of the Lord and His bona fide devotee. Therefore, Kåñëa consciousness is
transcendental.
Bg 4.29
TEXT
29
TEXT
APaaNae JauûiTa
Pa[a<a& Pa[a<ae_PaaNa& TaQaaPare )
Pa[a<aaPaaNaGaTaq åd(ßa Pa[a<aaYaaMaParaYa<aa" )
APare iNaYaTaahara" Pa[a<aaNPa[a<aezu JauûiTa )) 29 ))
apäne juhvati präëaà
präëe ’pänaà tathäpare
präëäpäna-gaté ruddhvä
präëäyäma-paräyaëäù
apare niyatähäräù
präëän präëeñu juhvati
apäne—air which
acts downward; juhvati—offers; präëam—air which acts outward; präëe—in
the air going outward; apänam—air going downward;
tathä—as also; apare—others;
präëa—air going outward; apäna—air
going downward; gaté—movement; ruddhvä—checking; präëäyäma—trance
induced by stopping all breathing; paräyaëäù—so
inclined; apare—others; niyata—controlled;
ähäräù—eating; präëän—outgoing
air; präëeñu—in the outgoing air; juhvati—sacrifices.
TRANSLATION
And there are even others who are inclined to the process of
breath restraint to remain in trance, and they practice stopping the movement
of the outgoing breath into the incoming, and incoming breath into the
outgoing, and thus at last remain in trance, stopping all breathing. Some of
them, curtailing the eating process, offer the outgoing breath into itself, as
a sacrifice.
PURPORT
This system of yoga for controlling
the breathing process is called präëäyäma, and in
the beginning it is practiced in the haöha-yoga system
through different sitting postures. All of these processes are recommended for
controlling the senses and for advancement in spiritual realization. This
practice involves controlling the air within the body to enable simultaneous
passage in opposite directions. The apäna air
goes downward, and the präëa air goes up. The präëäyäma yogé practices breathing the opposite way
until the currents are neutralized into püraka, equilibrium.
Similarly, when the exhaled breathing is offered to inhaled breathing, it is
called recaka. When both air currents are
completely stopped, it is called kumbhaka-yoga.
By practice of kumbhaka-yoga, the yogés increase the duration of life by many, many
years. A Kåñëa conscious person, however, being always situated in the
transcendental loving service of the Lord, automatically becomes the controller
of the senses. His senses, being always engaged in the service of Kåñëa, have
no chance of becoming otherwise engaged. So at the end of life, he is naturally
transferred to the transcendental plane of Lord Kåñëa; consequently he makes no
attempt to increase his longevity. He is at once raised to the platform of
liberation. A Kåñëa conscious person begins from the transcendental stage, and
he is constantly in that consciousness. Therefore, there is no falling down,
and ultimately he enters into the abode of the Lord without delay. The practice
of reduced eating is automatically done when one eats only Kåñëa prasädam, or food which is offered first to the Lord.
Reducing the eating process is very helpful in the matter of sense control. And
without sense control there is no possibility of getting out of the material
entanglement.
Bg 4.30
TEXT
30
TEXT
SaveR_PYaeTae
Yajivdae Yaj+aiPaTak-LMaza" )
YajiXaíaMa*Ta>auJaae YaaiNTa b]ø SaNaaTaNaMa( )) 30 ))
sarve ’py ete yajïa-vido
yajïa-kñapita-kalmañäù
yajïa-çiñöämåta-bhujo
yänti brahma sanätanam
sarve—all; api—although apparently different; ete—all these; yajïa-vidaù—conversant
with the purpose of performing; yajïa—sacrifices;
kñapita—being cleansed of the result of such
performances; kalmañäù—sinful reactions; yajïa-çiñöa—as a result of such performances of yajïa; amåta-bhujaù—those
who have tasted such nectar; yänti—do approach; brahma—the supreme; sanätanam—eternal
atmosphere.
TRANSLATION
All these performers who know the meaning of sacrifice become
cleansed of sinful reaction, and, having tasted the nectar of the remnants of
such sacrifice, they go to the supreme eternal atmosphere.
PURPORT
From the foregoing explanation of differents types of sacrifice
(namely sacrifice of one’s possessions, study of the Vedas
or philosophical doctrines, and performance of the yoga system),
it is found that the common aim of all is to control the senses. Sense
gratification is the root cause of material existence; therefore, unless and
until one is situated on a platform apart from sense gratification, there is no
chance of being elevated to the eternal platform of full knowledge, full bliss
and full life. This platform is in the eternal atmosphere, or Brahman
atmosphere. All the above-mentioned sacrifices help one to become cleansed of
the sinful reactions of material existence. By this advancement in life, one
not only becomes happy and opulent in this life, but also, at the end, he
enters into the eternal kingdom of God, either merging into the impersonal
Brahman or associating with the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa.
Bg 4.31
TEXT
31
TEXT
NaaYa&
l/aek-ae_STYaYajSYa ku-Taae_NYa" ku-åSataMa )) 31 ))
näyaà loko ’sty ayajïasya
kuto ’nyaù kuru-sattama
na—never; ayam—this; lokaù—planet; asti—there is; ayajïasya—of
the foolish; kutaù—where is; anyaù—the other; kuru-sattama—O
best amongst the Kurus.
TRANSLATION
O best of the Kuru dynasty, without sacrifice one can never live
happily on this planet or in this life: what then of the next?
PURPORT
Whatever form of material existence one is in, one is invariably
ignorant of his real situation. In other words, existence in the material world
is due to the multiple reactions to our sinful lives. Ignorance is the cause of
sinful life, and sinful life is the cause of one’s dragging on in material
existence. The human form of life is the only loophole by which one may get out
of this entanglement. The Vedas, therefore, give
us a chance for escape by pointing out the paths of religion, economic comfort,
regulated sense gratification and, at last, the means to get out of the
miserable condition entirely. The path of religion, or the different kinds of
sacrifice recommended above, automatically solves our economic problems. By
performance of yajïa we can have enough food,
enough milk, etc.—even if there is a so-called increase of population. When the
body is fully supplied, naturally the next stage is to satisfy the senses. The Vedas prescribe, therefore, sacred marriage for
regulated sense gratification. Thereby one is gradually elevated to the
platform of release from material bondage, and the highest perfection of
liberated life is to associate with the Supreme Lord. Perfection is achieved by
performance of yajïa (sacrifice), as described
above. Now, if a person is not inclined to perform yajïa
according to the Vedas, how can he expect
a happy life? There are different grades of material comforts in different
heavenly planets, and in all cases there is immense happiness for persons
engaged in different kinds of yajïa. But the
highest kind of happiness that a man can achieve is to be promoted to the
spiritual planets by practice of Kåñëa consciousness. A life of Kåñëa
consciousness is therefore the solution to all the problems of material
existence.
Bg 4.32
TEXT
32
TEXT
Wv& bhuivDaa
Yaja ivTaTaa b]ø<aae Mau%e )
k-MaRJaaiNviÖ TaaNSavaRNaev& jaTva ivMaae+YaSae )) 32 ))
evaà bahu-vidhä yajïä
vitatä brahmaëo mukhe
karma-jän viddhi tän sarvän
evaà jïätvä vimokñyase
evam—thus; bahu-vidhäù—various kinds of; yajïäù—sacrifices;
vitatäù—widespread; brahmaëaù—of
the Vedas; mukhe—in the face of; karma-jän—born of work; viddhi—you
should know; tän—them; sarvän—all;
evam—thus; jïätvä—knowing;
vimokñyase—be liberated.
TRANSLATION
All these different types of sacrifice are approved by the Vedas,
and all of them are born of different types of work. Knowing them as such, you
will become liberated.
PURPORT
Different types of sacrifice, as discussed above, are mentioned in
the Vedas to suit the different types of worker.
Because men are so deeply absorbed in the bodily concept, these sacrifices are
so arranged that one can work either with the body, the mind, or the intelligence.
But all of them are recommended for ultimately bringing about liberation from
the body. This is confirmed by the Lord herewith from His own mouth.
Bg 4.33
TEXT
33
TEXT
é[eYaaNd]VYaMaYaaÛjaJjaNaYaj"
ParNTaPa )
Sav| k-MaaRi%l&/ PaaQaR jaNae PairSaMaaPYaTae )) 33 ))
çreyän dravya-mayäd yajïäj
jïäna-yajïaù parantapa
sarvaà karmäkhilaà pärtha
jïäne parisamäpyate
çreyän—greater; dravyamayät—than the sacrifice of material possessions;
yajïät—knowledge; jïäna-yajïaù—sacrifice
in knowledge; parantapa—O chastiser of the enemy;
sarvam—all; karma—activities;
akhilam—in totality; pärtha—O
son of Påthä; jïäne—in knowledge; parisamäpyate—ends in.
TRANSLATION
O chastiser of the enemy, the sacrifice of knowledge is greater
than the sacrifice of material possessions. O son of Påthä, after all, the
sacrifice of work culminates in transcendental knowledge.
PURPORT
The purpose of all sacrifices is to arrive at the status of
complete knowledge, then to gain release from material miseries, and,
ultimately, to engage in loving transcendental service to the Supreme Lord
(Kåñëa consciousness). Nonetheless, there is a mystery about all these
different activities of sacrifice, and one should know this mystery. Sacrifices
sometimes take different forms according to the particular faith of the
performer. When one’s faith reaches the stage of transcendental knowledge, the
performer of sacrifices should be considered more advanced than those who
simply sacrifice material possessions without such knowledge, for without
attainment of knowledge, sacrifices remain on the material platform and bestow
no spiritual benefit. Real knowledge culminates in Kåñëa consciousness, the
highest stage of transcendental knowledge. Without the elevation of knowledge,
sacrifices are simply material activities. When, however, they are elevated to
the level of transcendental knowledge, all such activities enter onto the
spiritual platform. Depending on differences in consciousness, sacrificial
activities are sometimes called karma-käëòa, fruitive
activities, and sometimes jïäna-käëòa, knowledge
in the pursuit of truth. It is better when the end is knowledge.
Bg 4.34
TEXT
34
TEXT
TaiÜiÖ
Pa[i<aPaaTaeNa PairPa[éneNa SaevYaa )
oPade+YaiNTa Tae jaNa& jaiNaNaSTatvdiXaRNa" )) 34 ))
tad viddhi praëipätena
paripraçnena sevayä
upadekñyanti te jïänaà
jïäninas tattva-darçinaù
tat—that
knowledge of different sacrifices; viddhi—try to
understand; praëipätena—by approaching a
spiritual master; paripraçnena—by submissive
inquiries; sevayä—by the rendering of service; upadekñyanti—initiate; te—unto
you; jïänam—knowledge; jïäninaù—the
self-realized; tattva—truth; darçinaù—the seers.
TRANSLATION
Just try to learn the truth by approaching a spiritual master.
Inquire from him submissively and render service unto him. The self-realized
soul can impart knowledge unto you because he has seen the truth.
PURPORT
The path of spiritual realization is undoubtedly difficult. The
Lord therefore advises us to approach a bona fide spiritual master in the line
of disciplic succession from the Lord Himself. No one can be a bona fide spiritual
master without following this principle of disciplic succession. The Lord is
the original spiritual master, and a person in the disciplic succession can
convey the message of the Lord as it is to his disciple. No one can be
spiritually realized by manufacturing his own process, as is the fashion of the
foolish pretenders. The Bhägavatam says: dharmaà hi säkñäd-bhagavat-praëétam—the path of
religion is directly enunciated by the Lord. Therefore, mental speculation or
dry arguments cannot help one progress in spiritual life. One has to approach a
bona fide spiritual master to receive the knowledge. Such a spiritual master
should be accepted in full surrender, and one should serve the spiritual master
like a menial servant, without false prestige. Satisfaction of the
self-realized spiritual master is the secret of advancement in spiritual life.
Inquiries and submission constitute the proper combination for spiritual
understanding. Unless there is submission and service, inquiries from the
learned spiritual master will not be effective. One must be able to pass the
test of the spiritual master, and when he sees the genuine desire of the
disciple, he automatically blesses the disciple with genuine spiritual understanding.
In this verse, both blind following and absurd inquiries are condemned. One
should not only hear submissively from the spiritual master; but one must also
get a clear understanding from him, in submission and service and inquiries. A
bona fide spiritual master is by nature very kind toward the disciple.
Therefore when the student is submissive and is always ready to render service,
the reciprocation of knowledge and inquiries becomes perfect.
Bg 4.35
TEXT
35
TEXT
YaJjaTva Na
PauNaMaaeRhMaev& YaaSYaiSa Paa<@v )
YaeNa >aUTaaNYaXaezai<a d]+YaSYaaTMaNYaQaae MaiYa )) 35 ))
yaj jïätvä na punar moham
evaà yäsyasi päëòava
yena bhütäny açeñäëi
drakñyasy ätmany atho mayi
yat—which; jïätvä—knowing; na—never;
punaù—again; moham—illusion;
evam—like this; yäsyasi—you
shall go; päëòava—O son of Päëòu; yena—by which; bhütäni—all
living entities; açesäëi—totally; drakñyasi—you will see; ätmani—in
the Supreme Soul; atho—or in other words; mayi—in Me.
TRANSLATION
And when you have thus learned the truth, you will know that all
living beings are but part of Me—and that they are in Me, and are Mine.
PURPORT
The result of receiving knowledge from a self-realized soul, or
one who knows things as they are, is learning that all living beings are parts
and parcels of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Çré Kåñëa. The sense of
a separated existence from Kåñëa is called mäyä (mä—not,
yä—this). Some think that we have nothing to do
with Kåñëa, that Kåñëa is only a great historical personality and that the
Absolute is the impersonal Brahman. Factually, as it is stated in the Bhagavad-gétä, this impersonal Brahman is the personal
effulgence of Kåñëa. Kåñëa, as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, is the cause
of everything. In the Brahma-saàhitä it is
clearly stated that Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the cause of
all causes. Even the millions of incarnations are only His different
expansions. Similarly, the living entities are also expansions of Kåñëa. The
Mäyävädé philosophers wrongly think that Kåñëa loses His own separate existence
in His many expansions. This thought is material in nature. We have experience
in the material world that a thing, when fragmentally distributed, loses its
own original identity. But the Mäyävädé philosophers fail to understand that Absolute
means that one plus one is equal to one, and that one minus one is also equal
to one. This is the case in the absolute world.
For want of sufficient knowledge in the absolute science, we are now covered with illusion, and therefore we think that we are separate from Kåñëa. Although we are separated parts of Kåñëa, we are nevertheless not different from Him. The bodily difference of the living entities is mäyä, or not actual fact. We are all meant to satisfy Kåñëa. By mäyä alone Arjuna thought that the temporary bodily relationship with his kinsmen was more important than his eternal spiritual relationship with Kåñëa. The whole teaching of the Gétä is targetted toward this end: that a living being, as His eternal servitor, cannot be separated from Kåñëa, and his sense of being an identity apart from Kåñëa is called mäyä. The living entities, as separate parts and parcels of the Supreme, have a purpose to fulfill. Having forgotten that purpose, since time immemorial they are situated in different bodies, as men, animals, demigods, etc. Such bodily differences arise from forgetfulness of the transcendental service of the Lord. But when one is engaged in transcendental service through Kåñëa consciousness, one becomes at once liberated from this illusion. One can acquire such pure knowledge only from the bona fide spiritual master and thereby avoid the delusion that the living entity is equal to Kåñëa. Perfect knowledge is that the Supreme Soul, Kåñëa, is the supreme shelter for all living entities, and giving up such shelter, the living entities are deluded by the material energy, imagining themselves to have a separate identity. Thus, under different standards of material identity, they become forgetful of Kåñëa. When, however, such deluded living entities become situated in Kåñëa consciousness, it is to be understood that they are on the path of liberation, as confirmed in the Bhägavatam: muktir hitvänyathä rüpaà svarüpeëa vyavasthitiù. Liberation means to be situated in one’s constitutional position as the eternal servitor of Kåñëa (Kåñëa consciousness).
Bg 4.36
TEXT
36
TEXT
AiPa cediSa
PaaPae>Ya" SaveR>Ya" PaaPak*-taMa" )
Sav| jaNaâveNaEv v*iJaNa& SaNTairZYaiSa )) 36 ))
api ced asi päpebhyaù
sarvebhyaù päpa-kåt-tamaù
sarvaà jïäna-plavenaiva
våjinaà santariñyasi
api—even; cet—if; asi—you are; päpebhyaù—of sinners; sarvebhyaù—of
all; päpa-kåttamaù—the greatest sinner; sarvam—all such sinful actions; jïäna-plavena—by
the boat of transcendental knowledge; eva—certainly;
våjinam—the ocean of miseries; santariñyasi—you will cross completely.
TRANSLATION
Even if you are considered to be the most sinful of all sinners,
when you are situated in the boat of transcendental knowledge, you will be able
to cross over the ocean of miseries.
PURPORT
Proper understanding of one’s constitutional position in
relationship to Kåñëa is so nice that it can at once lift one from the struggle
for existence which goes on in the ocean of nescience. This material world is
sometimes regarded as an ocean of nescience and sometimes as a blazing forest.
In the ocean, however expert a swimmer one may be, the struggle for existence
is very severe. If someone comes forward and lifts the struggling swimmer from
the ocean, he is the greatest savior. Perfect knowledge, received from the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, is the path of liberation. The boat of Kåñëa
consciousness is very simple, but at the same time the most sublime.
Bg 4.37
TEXT
37
TEXT
YaQaEDaa&iSa
SaiMaÖae_iGan>aRSMaSaaTku-åTae_JauRNa )
jaNaaiGan" SavRk-MaaRi<a >aSMaSaaTku-åTae TaQaa )) 37 ))
yathaidhäàsi samiddho ’gnir
bhasma-sät kurute ’rjuna
jïänägniù sarva-karmäëi
bhasma-sät kurute tathä
yathä—just as; edhäàsi—firewood; samiddhaù—blazing;
agniù—fire; bhasmasät—turns
into ashes; kurute—so does; arjuna—O Arjuna; jïäna-agniù—the
fire of knowledge; sarva-karmäëi—all reactions to
material activities; bhasmasät—to ashes; kurute—it so does; tathä—similarly.
TRANSLATION
As the blazing fire turns firewood to ashes, O Arjuna, so does the
fire of knowledge burn to ashes all reactions to material activities.
PURPORT
Perfect knowledge of self and Superself and of their relationship
is compared herein to fire. This fire not only burns up all reactions to
impious activities, but also all reactions to pious activities, turning them to
ashes. There are many stages of reaction: reaction in the making, reaction
fructifying, reaction already achieved, and reaction a
priori. But knowledge of the constitutional position of the living
entity burns everything to ashes. When one is in complete knowledge, all reactious,
both a priori and a
posteriori, are consumed. In the Vedas it
is stated: ubhe uhaivaiña ete taraty amåtaù
sädhv-asädhüné: "One overcomes both the pious and impious
interactions of work."
Bg 4.38
TEXT
38
TEXT
Na ih jaNaeNa
Sad*Xa& Paiv}aiMah ivÛTae )
TaTSvYa& YaaeGaSa&iSaÖ" k-ale/NaaTMaiNa ivNdiTa )) 38 ))
na hi jïänena sadåçaà
pavitram iha vidyate
tat svayaà yoga-saàsiddhaù
kälenätmani vindati
na—never; hi—certainly; jïänena—with
knowledge; sadåçam—in comparison; pavitram—sanctified; iha—in
this world; vidyate—exists; tat—that; svayam—itself; yoga—devotion; saàsiddhaù—matured;
kälena—in course of time; ätmani—in
himself; vindati—enjoys.
TRANSLATION
In this world, there is nothing so sublime and pure as
transcendental knowledge. Such knowledge is the mature fruit of all mysticism.
And one who has achieved this enjoys the self within himself in due course of
time.
PURPORT
When we speak of transcendental knowledge, we do so in terms of
spiritual understanding. As such, there is nothing so sublime and pure as
transcendental knowledge. Ignorance is the cause of our bondage, and knowledge
is the cause of our liberation. This knowledge is the mature fruit of
devotional service, and when one is situated in transcendental knowledge, he
need not search for peace elsewhere, for he enjoys peace within himself. In
other words, this knowledge and peace are culminated in Kåñëa consciousness.
That is the last word in the Bhagavad-gétä.
Bg 4.39
TEXT
39
TEXT
é[Öavamç>aTae
jaNa& TaTPar" Sa&YaTaeiNd]Ya" )
jaNa& l/Bßa Para& XaaiNTaMaicre<aaiDaGaC^iTa )) 39 ))
çraddhäväl labhate jïänaà
tat-paraù saàyatendriyaù
jïänaà labdhvä paräà çäntim
acireëädhigacchati
çraddhävän—a faithful
man; labhate—achieves; jïänam—knowledge;
tat-paraù—very much attached to it; saàyata—controlled; indriyaù—senses;
jïanam—knowledge; labdhvä—having
achieved; paräm—transcendental; çäntim—peace; acireëa—very
soon; adhigacchati—attains.
TRANSLATION
A faithful man who is absorbed in transcendental knowledge and who
subdues his senses quickly attains the supreme spiritual peace.
PURPORT
Such knowledge in Kåñëa consciousness can be achieved by a
faithful person who believes firmly in Kåñëa. One is called a faithful man who
thinks that, simply by acting in Kåñëa consciousness, he can attain the highest
perfection. This faith is attained by the discharge of devotional service, and
by chanting "Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa,
Hare Hare/ Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare," which
cleanses one’s heart of all material dirt. Over and above this, one should
control the senses. A person who is faithful to Kåñëa and who controls the
senses can easily attain perfection in the knowledge of Kåñëa consciousness
without delay.
Bg 4.40
TEXT
40
TEXT
Ajêaé[ÕDaaNaê
Sa&XaYaaTMaa ivNaXYaiTa )
NaaYa& l/aek-ae_iSTa Na Parae Na Sau%& Sa&XaYaaTMaNa" )) 40 ))
ajïaç cäçraddadhänaç ca
saàçayätmä vinaçyati
näyaà loko ’sti na paro
na sukhaà saàçayätmanaù
ajïaù—fools who
have no knowledge in standard scriptures; ca—and;
açraddadhänaù—without faith in revealed
scriptures; ca—also; saàçaya—doubts;
ätmä—person; vinaçyati—falls
back; na—never; ayam—this;
lokaù—world; asti—there
is; na—neither; paraù—next
life; na—not; sukham—happiness;
saàçaya—doubtful; ätmanaù—of
the person.
TRANSLATION
But ignorant and faithless persons who doubt the revealed
scriptures do not attain God consciousness. For the doubting soul there is
happiness neither in this world nor in the next.
PURPORT
Out of many standard and authoritative revealed scriptures, the Bhagavad-gétä is the best. Persons who are almost like
animals have no faith in, or knowledge of, the standard revealed scriptures;
and some, even though they have knowledge of, or can cite passages from, the
revealed scriptures, have actually no faith in these words. And even though
others may have faith in scriptures like Bhagavad-gétä, they
do not believe in or worship the Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëa. Such
persons cannot have any standing in Kåñëa consciousness. They fall down. Out of
all the abovementioned persons, those who have no faith and are always doubtful
make no progress at all. Men without faith in God and His revealed word find no
good in this world, nor in the next. For them there is no happiness whatsoever.
One should therefore follow the principles of revealed scriptures with faith and
thereby be raised to the platform of knowledge. Only this knowledge will help
one become promoted to the transcendental platform of spiritual understanding.
In other words, doubtful persons have no status whatsoever in spiritual
emancipation. One should therefore follow in the footsteps of great äcäryas who are in the disciplic succession and thereby
attain success.
Bg 4.41
TEXT
41
TEXT
YaaeGaSaNNYaSTak-MaaR<a&
jaNaSaiH^àSa&XaYaMa( )
AaTMavNTa& Na k-MaaRi<a iNabDaniNTa DaNaÅYa )) 41 ))
yoga-sannyasta-karmäëaà
jïäna-saïchinna-saàçayam
ätmavantaà na karmäëi
nibadhnanti dhanaïjaya
yoga—devotional
service in karma-yoga; sannyasta—renounced; karmäëam—of the performers; jïäna—knowledge;
saïchinna—cut by the advancement of knowledge; saàçayam—doubts; ätma-vantam—situated
in the self; na—never; karmäëi—work;
nibadhnanti—do bind up;
dhanaïjaya—O conquerer of riches.
TRANSLATION
Therefore, one who has renounced the fruits of his action, whose
doubts are destroyed by transcendental knowledge, and who is situated firmly in
the self, is not bound by works, O conqueror of riches.
PURPORT
One who follows the instruction of the Gétä,
as it is imparted by the Lord, the Personality of Godhead Himself, becomes free
from all doubts by the grace of transcendental knowledge. He, as a part and
parcel of the Lord, in full Kåñëa consciousness, is already established in
self-knowledge. As such, he is undoubtedly above bondage to action.
Bg 4.42
TEXT
42
TEXT
TaSMaadjaNaSaM>aUTa&
ôTSQa& jaNaaiSaNaaTMaNa" )
i^tvENa& Sa&XaYa& YaaeGaMaaiTaïaeitaï >aarTa )) 42 ))
tasmäd ajïäna-sambhütaà
håt-sthaà jïänäsinätmanaù
chittvainaà saàçayaà yogam
ätiñöhottiñöha bhärata
tasmät—therefore; ajïäna-sambhütam—outcome of ignorance; håt-stham—situated in the heart; jïäna—knowledge; asinä—by
the weapon of; ätmanaù—of the self; chittvä—cutting off; enam—this;
saàçayam—doubt; yogam—in
yoga; ätiñöha—be situated; uttiñöha—stand up to fight; bhärata—O
descendant of Bharata.
TRANSLATION
Therefore the doubts which have arisen in your heart out of
ignorance should be slashed by the weapon of knowledge. Armed with yoga, O
Bhärata, stand and fight.
PURPORT
The yoga system instructed in this
chapter is called sanätana-yoga, or eternal
activities performed by the living entity. This yoga has
two divisions of sacrificial actions: one is called sacrifice of one’s material
possessions, and the other is called knowledge of self, which is pure spiritual
activity. If sacrifice of one’s material possessions is not dovetailed for
spiritual realization, then such sacrifice becomes material. But one who
performs such sacrifices with a spiritual objective, or in devotional service,
makes a perfect sacrifice. When we come to spiritual activities, we find that
these are also divided into two: namely, understanding of one’s own self (or
one’s constitutional position), and the truth regarding the Supreme Personality
of Godhead. One who follows the path of the Gétä
as it is can very easily understand these two important divisions of spiritual
knowledge. For him there is no difficulty in obtaining perfect knowledge of the
self as part and parcel of the Lord. And such understanding is beneficial for
such a person who easily understands the transcendental activities of the Lord.
In the beginning of this chapter, the transcendental activities of the Lord
were discussed by the Supreme Lord Himself. One who does not understand the
instructions of the Gétä is faithless, and is to
be considered to be misusing the fragmental independence awarded to him by the
Lord. In spite of such instructions, one who does not understand the real
nature of the Lord as the eternal, blissful, all-knowing Personality of
Godhead, is certainly fool number one. Ignorance can be removed by gradual
acceptance of the principles of Kåñëa consciousness. Kåñëa consciousness is
awakened by different types of sacrifices to the demigods, sacrifice to
Brahman, sacrifice in celibacy, in household life, in controlling the senses,
in practicing mystic yoga, in penance, in
foregoing material possessions, in studying the Vedas, and
in partaking of the social institution called varëäçrama-dharma.
All of these are known as sacrifice, and all of them are based on regulated
action. But within all these activities, the important factor is
self-realization. One who seeks that objective is
the real student of Bhagavad-gétä, but one who
doubts the authority of Kåñëa falls back. One is therefore advised to study Bhagavad-gétä, or any other scripture, under a bona
fide spiritual master, with service and surrender. A bona fide spiritual master
is in the disciplic succession from time eternal, and he does not deviate at
all from the instructions of the Supreme Lord as they were imparted millions of
years ago to the sun-god, from whom the instructions of Bhagavad-gétä
have come down to the earthly kingdom. One should, therefore, follow the
path of Bhagavad-gétä as it is expressed in the Gétä itself and beware of self-interested people after
personal aggrandizement who deviate others from the actual path. The Lord is
definitely the supreme person, and His activities are transcendental. One who
understands this is a liberated person from the very beginning of his study of
the Gétä.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the Fourth Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of Transcendental Knowledge.
Bg 5. Karma-yoga—Action in Kåñëa Consciousness
CHAPTER
FIVE
Karma-yoga—Action
in Kåñëa Consciousness
Bg 5.1
TEXT
1
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac
SaNNYaaSa& k-MaR<aa& k*-Z<a PauNaYaaeRGa& c Xa&SaiSa )
YaC^\eYa WTaYaaerek&- TaNMae b]Uih SauiNaiêTaMa( )) 1 ))
arjuna
uväca
sannyäsaà karmaëäà kåñëa
punar yogaà ca çaàsasi
yac chreya etayor ekaà
tan me brühi su-niçcitam
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna said;
sannyäsam—renunciation; karmaëäm—of
all activities; kåñëa—O Kåñëa; punaù—again; yogam—devotional
service; ca—also; çaàsasi—You
are praising; yat—which; çreyaù—is
beneficial; etayoù—of these two; ekam—one; tat—that; me—unto me; brühi—please
tell; suniçcitam—definitely.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said: O Kåñëa, first of all You ask me to renounce work,
and then again You recommend work with devotion. Now will You kindly tell me
definitely which of the two is more beneficial?
PURPORT
In this Fifth Chapter of the Bhagavad-gétä,
the Lord says that work in devotional service is better than dry mental
speculation. Devotional service is easier than the latter because, being
transcendental in nature, it frees one from reaction. In the Second Chapter,
preliminary knowledge of the soul and its entanglement in the material body
were explained. How to get out of this material encagement by buddhi-yoga, or devotional service, was also explained
therein. In the Third Chapter, it was explained that a person who is situated
on the platform of knowledge no longer has any duties to perform. And, in the
Fourth Chapter, the Lord told Arjuna that all kinds of sacrificial work
culminate in knowledge. However, at the end of the Fourth Chapter, the Lord
advised Arjuna to wake up and fight, being situated in perfect knowledge.
Therefore, by simultaneously stressing the importance of both work in devotion
and inaction in knowledge, Kåñëa has perplexed Arjuna and confused his
determination. Arjuna understands that renunciation in knowledge involves
cessation of all kinds of work performed as sense activities. But if one
performs work in devotional service, then how is work stopped? In other words,
he thinks that sannyäsam, or renunciation in
knowledge, should be altogether free from all kinds of activity because work
and renunciation appear to him to be incompatible. He appears not to have
understood that work in full knowledge is nonreactive and is therefore the same
as inaction. He inquires, therefore, whether he should cease work altogether,
or work with full knowledge.
Bg 5.2
TEXT
2
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
SaNNYaaSa" k-MaRYaaeGaê iNa"é[eYaSak-ravu>aaE )
TaYaaeSTau k-MaRSaNNYaaSaaTk-MaRYaaeGaae iviXaZYaTae )) 2 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
sannyäsaù karma-yogaç ca
niùçreyasa-karäv ubhau
tayos tu karma-sannyäsät
karma-yogo viçiñyate
çré bhagavän uväca—the
Personality of Godhead said; sannyäsaù—renunciation
of work; karma-yogaù—work in devotion; ca—also; niùçreyasa-karau—all
leading to the path of liberation; ubhau—both; tayoù—of the two; tu—but;
karma-sannyäsät—in comparison to the renunciation
of fruitive work; karma-yogaù—work in devotion; viçiñyate—is better.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: The renunciation of work and work in
devotion are both good for liberation. But, of the two, work in devotional
service is better than renunciation of works.
PURPORT
Fruitive activities (seeking sense gratification) are cause for
material bondage. As long as one is engaged in activities aimed at improving
the standard of bodily comfort, one is sure to transmigrate to different types
of bodies, thereby continuing material bondage perpetually. Çrémad-Bhägavatam confirms this as follows:
nünaà pramattaù kurute vikarma yad indriya-prétaya äpåëoti
na sädhu manye yata ätmano ’yam asann api kleçada äsa dehaù
paräbhavas tävad abodha-jäto yävanna jijïäsata ätma-tattvam
yävat kriyäs tävad idaà mano vai karmätmakaà yena çaréra-bandhaù
evaà manaù karma-vaçaà prayuìkte avidyayätmany upadhéyamäne
prétir na yävan mayi väsudeve na mucyate deha-yogena tävat
"People are mad after sense gratification, and they do not
know that this present body, which is full of miseries, is a result of one’s
fruitive activities in the past. Although this body is temporary, it is always
giving one trouble in many ways. Therefore, to act for sense gratification is
not good. One is considered to be a failure in life as long as he makes no
inquiry about the nature of work for fruitive results, for as long as one is
engrossed in the consciousness of sense gratification, one has to transmigrate
from one body to another. Although the mind may be engrossed in fruitive
activities and influenced by ignorance, one must develop a love for devotional
service to Väsudeva. Only then can one have the opportunity to get out of the
bondage of material existence." (Bhäg.
5.5.4-6)
Therefore, jïäna (or knowledge that
one is not this material body but spirit soul) is not sufficient for
liberation. One has to act in the status of
spirit soul, otherwise there is no escape from material bondage. Action in
Kåñëa consciousness is not, however, action on the fruitive platform.
Activities performed in full knowledge strengthen one’s advancement in real
knowledge. Without Kåñëa consciousness, mere renunciation of fruitive
activities does not actually purify the heart of a conditioned soul. As long as
the heart is not purified, one has to work on the fruitive platform. But action
in Kåñëa consciousness automatically helps one escape the result of fruitive
action so that one need not descend to the material platform. Therefore, action
in Kåñëa consciousness is always superior to renunciation, which always entails
a risk of falling. Renunciation without Kåñëa consciousness is incomplete, as
is confirmed by Çréla Rüpa Gosvämé in his Bhak
ti-rasämåta-sindbu.
präpaïcikatayä buddhyä hari-sambandhi-vastunaù
mumukñubhiù parityägo vairägyaà phalgu kathyate.
"Renunciation by persons eager to achieve liberation of
things which are related to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, though they are
material, is called incomplete renunciation." Renunciation is compete when
it is in the knowledge that everything in existence belongs to the Lord and
that no one should claim proprietorship over anything. One should understand
that, factually, nothing belongs to anyone. Then where is the question of
renunciation? One who knows that everything is Kåñëa’s property is always
situated in renunciation. Since everything belongs to Kåñëa, everything should
be employed in the service of Kåñëa. This perfect form of action in Kåñëa
consciousness is far better than any amount of artificial renunciation by a sannyäsé of the Mäyävädé school.
Bg 5.3
TEXT
3
TEXT
jeYa" Sa
iNaTYaSaNNYaaSaq Yaae Na Üeií Na k-ax(+aiTa )
iNaÜRNÜae ih Mahabahae Sau%& bNDaaTPa[MauCYaTae )) 3 ))
jïeyaù sa nitya-sannyäsé
yo na dveñöi na käìkñati
nirdvandvo hi mahä-bäho
sukhaà bandhät pramucyate
jïeyaù—should be
known; saù—he; nitya—always;
sannyäsé—renouncer; yaù—who;
na—never; dveñöi—abhors;
na—nor; käìkñati—desires;
nirdvandvaù—free from all dualities; hi—certainly; mahä-bäho—O
mighty-armed one; sukham—happily; bandhät—from bondage; pramucyate—completely
liberated.
TRANSLATION
One who neither hates nor desires the fruits of his activities is
known to be always renounced. Such a person, liberated from all dualities,
easily overcomes material bondage and is completely liberated, O mighty-armed
Arjuna.
PURPORT
One who is fully in Kåñëa consciousness is always a renouncer
because he feels neither hatred nor desire for the results of his actions. Such
a renouncer, dedicated to the transcendental loving service of the Lord, is
fully qualified in knowledge because he knows his constitutional position in
his relationship with Kåñëa. He knows fully well that Kåñëa is the whole and
that he is part and parcel of Kåñëa. Such knowledge is perfect because it is
qualitatively and quantitatively correct. The concept of oneness with Kåñëa is
incorrect because the part cannot be equal to the whole. Knowledge that one is
one in quality yet different in quantity is correct transcendental knowledge
leading one to become full in himself, having nothing to aspire to nor lament
over. There is no duality in his mind because whatever he does, he does for
Kåñëa. Being thus freed from the platform of dualities, he is liberated—even in
this material world.
Bg 5.4
TEXT
4
TEXT
Saa&:YaYaaeGaaE
Pa*QaGbal/a" Pa[vdiNTa Na Pai<@Taa" )
Wk-MaPYaaiSQaTa" SaMYaGau>aYaaeivRNdTae f-l/Ma( )) 4 ))
säìkhya-yogau påthag bäläù
pravadanti na paëòitäù
ekam apy ästhitaù samyag
ubhayor vindate phalam
säìkhya—analytical
study of the material world; yogau—work in
devotional service; påthak—different; bäläù—less intelligent; pravadanti—do
talk; na—never; paëòitäù—the
learned; ekam—in one; api—even
though; ästhitaù—being situated; samyak—complete; ubhayoù—of
both; vindate—enjoys; phalam—result.
TRANSLATION
Only the ignorant speak of karma-yoga and devotional service as
being different from the analytical study of the material world [säìkhya].
Those who are actually learned say that he who applies himself well to one of
these paths achieves the results of both.
PURPORT
The aim of the analytical study of the material world is to find
the soul of existence. The soul of the material world is Viñëu, or the
Supersoul. Devotional service to the Lord entails service to the Supersoul. One
process is to find the root of the tree, and next to water the root. The real
student of säìkhya philosophy finds the root of
the material world, Viñëu, and then, in perfect knowledge, engages himself in
the service of the Lord. Therefore, in essence, there is no difference between
the two because the aim of both is Viñëu. Those who do not know the ultimate
end say that the purposes of säìkhya and karma-yoga are not the same, but one who is learned
knows the unifying aim in these different processes.
Bg 5.5
TEXT
5
TEXT
YaTSaa&:YaE"
Pa[aPYaTae SQaaNa& TaÛaeGaEriPa GaMYaTae )
Wk&- Saa&:Ya& c YaaeGa& c Ya" PaXYaiTa Sa PaXYaiTa )) 5 ))
yat säìkhyaiù präpyate sthänaà
tad yogair api gamyate
ekaà säìkhyaà ca yogaà ca
yaù paçyati sa paçyati
yat—what; säìkhyaiù—by means of säìkhya philosophy;
präpyate—is achieved; sthänam—place;
tat—that; yogaiù—by
devotional service; api—also; gamyate—one can attain; ekam—one;
säìkhyam—analytical study; ca—and; yogam—action in
devotion; ca—and; yaù—one
who; paçyati—sees; saù—he;
paçyati—actually sees.
TRANSLATION
One who knows that the position reached by means of renunciation
can also be attained by works in devotional service and who therefore sees that
the path of works and the path of renunciation are one, sees things as they
are.
PURPORT
The real purpose of philosophical research is to find the ultimate
goal of life. Since the ultimate goal of life is self-realization, there is no
difference between the conclusions reached by the two processes. By säìkhya philosophical research one comes to the
conclusion that a living entity is not a part and parcel of the material world,
but of the supreme spirit whole. Consequently, the spirit soul has nothing to
do with the material world; his actions must be in some relation with the
Supreme. When he acts in Kåñëa consciousness, he is actually in his
constitutional position. In the first process of säìkhya,
one has to become detached from matter, and in the devotional yoga process one has to attach himself to the work of
Kåñëa. Factually, both processes are the same, although superficially one
process appears to involve detachment and the other process appears to involve
attachment. However, detachment from matter and attachment to Kåñëa are one and
the same. One who can see this sees things as they are.
Bg 5.6
TEXT
6
TEXT
SaNNYaaSaSTau
Mahabahae du"%MaaáuMaYaaeGaTa" )
YaaeGaYau¢-ae MauiNab]Rø Naicre<aaiDaGaC^iTa )) 6 ))
sannyäsas tu mahä-bäho
duùkham äptum ayogataù
yoga-yukto munir brahma
na cireëädhigacchati
sannyäsaù—the
renounced order of life; tu—but; mahä-bäho—O mighty-armed one; duùkham—distress;
äptum—to be afflicted with; ayogataù—without devotional service; yoga-yuktaù—one engaged in devotional service; muniù—thinker; brahma—Supreme;
na—without; cireëa—delay;
adhigacchati—attains.
TRANSLATION
Unless one is engaged in the devotional service of the Lord, mere
renunciation of activities cannot make one happy. The sages, purified by works
of devotion, achieve the Supreme without delay.
PURPORT
There are two classes of sannyäsés, or
persons in the renounced order of life. The Mäyävädé sannyäsés
are engaged in the study of säìkhya philosophy,
whereas the Vaisnava sannyäsés are engaged in the
study of Bhägavatam philosophy, which affords the
proper commentary on the Vedänta-sütras. The
Mäyävädé sannyäsés also study the Vedänta-sütras, but use their own commentary, called Çäréraka-bhäñya, written by Çaìkaräcärya. The students
of the Bhägavata school are engaged in devotional
service of the Lord, according to päïcarätriké regulations,
and therefore the Vaiñëava sannyäsés have
multiple engagements in the transcendental service of the Lord. The Vaiñëava sannyäsés have nothing to do with material activities,
and yet they perform various activities in their devotional service to the
Lord. But the Mäyävädé sannyäsés, engaged in the
studies of säìkhya and Vedänta
and speculation, cannot relish transcendental service of the Lord.
Because their studies become very tedious, they sometimes become tired of
Brahman speculation, and thus they take shelter of the Bhägavatam
without proper understanding. Consequently their study of the Çrémad-Bhägavatam becomes troublesome. Dry speculations
and impersonal interpretations by artificial means are all useless for the
Mäyävädé sannyäsés. The Vaiñëava sannyäsés, who are engaged in devotional service, are
happy in the discharge of their transcendental duties, and they have the
guarantee of ultimate entrance into the kingdom of God. The Mäyävädé sannyäsés sometimes fall down from the path of
self-realization and again enter into material activities of a philanthropic
and altruistic nature, which are nothing but material engagements. Therefore,
the conclusion is that those who are engaged in Kåñëa consciousness are better
situated than the sannyäsés engaged in simple
Brahman speculation, although they too come to Kåñëa consciousness, after many
births.
Bg 5.7
TEXT
7
TEXT
YaaeGaYau¢-ae
ivéuÖaTMaa iviJaTaaTMaa iJaTaeiNd]Ya" )
SavR>aUTaaTMa>aUTaaTMaa ku-vRàiPa Na il/PYaTae )) 7 ))
yoga-yukto viçuddhätmä
vijitätmä jitendriyaù
sarva-bhütätma-bhütätmä
kurvann api na lipyate
yoga-yuktaù—engaged in
devotional service; viçuddha-ätmä—a purified
soul; vijita-ätmä—self-controlled; jita-indriyaù—having conquered the senses; sarvabhuta-ätmabhüta-ätmä—compassionate to all living
entities; kurvan api—although engaged in work; na—never; lipyate—is
entangled.
TRANSLATION
One who works in devotion, who is a pure soul, and who controls
his mind and senses, is dear to everyone, and everyone is dear to him. Though
always working, such a man is never entangled.
PURPORT
One who is on the path of liberation by Kåñëa consciousness is
very dear to every living being, and every living being is dear to him. This is
due to his Kåñëa consciousness. Such a person cannot think of any living being
as separate from Kåñëa, just as the leaves and branches of a tree are not
separate from the tree. He knows very well that by pouring water on the root of
the tree, the water will be distributed to all the leaves and branches, or by
supplying food to the stomach, the energy is automatically distributed
throughout the body. Because one who works in Kåñëa consciousness is servant to
all, he is very dear to everyone. And, because everyone is satisfied by his
work, he is pure in consciousness. Because he is pure in consciousness, his
mind is completely controlled. And, because his mind is controlled, his senses
are also controlled. Because his mind is always fixed on Kåñëa, there is no chance
of his being deviated from Kåñëa. Nor is there a chance that he will engage his
senses in matters other than the service of the Lord. He does not like to hear
anything except topics relating to Kåñëa; he does not like to eat anything
which is not offered to Kåñëa; and he does not wish to go anywhere if Kåñëa is
not involved. Therefore, his senses are controlled. A man of controlled senses
cannot be offensive to anyone. One may ask, "Why then was Arjuna offensive
(in battle) to others? Wasn't he in Kåñëa consciousness?" Arjuna was only
superficially offensive because (as has already been explained in the Second
Chapter) all the assembled persons on the battlefield would continue to live
individually, as the soul cannot be slain. So, spiritually, no one was killed
on the Battlefield of Kurukñetra. Only their dresses were changed by the order
of Kåñëa, who was personally present. Therefore Arjuna, while fighting on the
Battlefield of Kurukñetra, was not really fighting at all; he was simply
carrying out the orders of Kåñëa in full Kåñëa consciousness. Such a person is
never entangled in the reactions of work.
Bg 5.8,
Bg 5.9, Bg 5.8-9
TEXTS
8–9
TEXT
NaEv
ik-iÄTk-raeMaqiTa Yau¢-ae MaNYaeTa TatvivTa( )
PaXYaHXa*<vNSPa*XaiÅga]àénNGaC^NSvPaNìSaNa( )) 8 ))
Pa[l/PaiNvSa*JaNGa*õàuiNMaziàiMazàiPa )
wiNd]Yaa<aqiNd]YaaQaeRzu vTaRNTa wiTa DaarYaNa( )) 9 ))
naiva kiïcit karométi
yukto manyeta tattva-vit
paçyaï çåëvan spåçaï jighrann
açnan gacchan svapan çvasan
pralapan visåjan gåhëann
unmiñan nimiñann api
indriyäëéndriyärtheñu
vartanta iti dhärayan
na—never; eva—certainly; kiïcit—anything;
karomi—do I do; iti—thus; yuktaù—engaged in the divine consciousness; manyeta—thinks; tattvavit—one
who knows the truth; paçyan—by seeing; çåëvan—by hearing; spåçan—by
touching; jighran—by smelling; açnan—by eating; gacchan—by
going; svapan—by dreaming; çvasan—by breathing; pralapan—by
talking; visåjan—by giving up; gåhëan—by accepting; unmiñan—opening;
nimiñan—closing; api—in
spite of; indriyäëi—the senses; indriya-artheñu—in sense gratification; vartante—let them be so engaged; iti—thus; dhärayan—considering.
TRANSLATION
A person in the divine consciousness, although engaged in seeing,
hearing, touching, smelling, eating, moving about, sleeping, and breathing,
always knows within himself that he actually does nothing at all. Because while
speaking, evacuating, receiving, opening or closing his eyes, he always knows
that only the material senses are engaged with their objects and that he is
aloof from them.
PURPORT
A person in Kåñëa consciousness is pure in his existence, and
consequently he has nothing to do with any work which depends upon five
immediate and remote causes: the doer, the work, the situation, the endeavor
and fortune. This is because he is engaged in the loving transcendental service
of Kåñëa. Although he appears to be acting with his body and senses, he is
always conscious of his actual position, which is spiritual engagement. In
material consciousness, the senses are engaged in sense gratification, but in
Kåñëa consciousness the senses are engaged in the satisfaction of Kåñëa’s
senses. Therefore, the Kåñëa conscious person is always free, even though he
appears to be engaged in things of the senses. Activities such as seeing,
hearing, speaking, evacuating, etc., are actions of the senses meant for work.
A Kåñëa consciousness person is never affected by the actions of the senses. He
cannot perform any act except in the service of the Lord because he knows that
he is the eternal servitor of the Lord.
Bg 5.10
TEXT
10
TEXT
b]ø<YaaDaaYa
k-MaaRi<a Sa®& TYa¤-a k-raeiTa Ya" )
il/PYaTae Na Sa PaaPaeNa PaÚPa}aiMavaM>aSaa )) 10 ))
brahmaëy ädhäya karmäëi
saìgaà tyaktvä karoti yaù
lipyate na sa päpena
padma-patram ivämbhasä
brahmaëi—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead; ädhäya—resigning unto; karmäëi—all works; saìgam—attachment;
tyaktvä—giving up; karoti—performs;
yaù—who; lipyate—is
affected; na—never; saù—he;
päpena—by sin; padma-patram—lotus
leaf; iva—like; ambhasä—in
the water.
TRANSLATION
One who performs his duty without attachment, surrendering the
results unto the Supreme God, is not affected by sinful action, as the lotus
leaf is untouched by water.
PURPORT
Here brahmaëi means in Kåñëa
consciousness. The material world is a sum total manifestation of the three
modes of material nature, technically called the pradhäna.
The Vedic hymns, sarvam etad brahma, tasmäd etad
brahma näma-rüpam annaà ca jäyate, and, in the Bhagavad-gétä,
mama yonir mahad brahma, indicate that everything in the material world
is the manifestation of Brahman; and, although the effects are differently
manifested, they are nondifferent from the cause. In the Éçopaniñad it is said that everything is related to the
Supreme Brahman or Kåñëa, and thus everything belongs to Him only. One who
knows perfectly well that everything belongs to Kåñëa, that He is the
proprietor of everything and that, therefore, everything is engaged in the
service of the Lord, naturally has nothing to do with the results of his
activities, whether virtuous or sinful. Even one’s material body, being a gift
of the Lord for carrying out a particular type of action, can be engaged in
Kåñëa consciousness. It is beyond contamination by sinful reactions, exactly as
the lotus leaf, though remaining in the water, is not wet. The Lord also says
in the Gétä: mayi sarväëi karmäëi sannyasya: "Resign
all works unto Me [Kåñëa]." The conclusion is that a person without Kåñëa
consciousness acts according to the concept of the material body and senses,
but a person in Kåñëa consciousness acts according to the knowledge that the
body is the property of Kåñëa and should therefore be engaged in the service of
Kåñëa.
Bg 5.11
TEXT
11
TEXT
k-aYaeNa MaNaSaa
buÖya ke-vlE/iriNd]YaEriPa )
YaaeiGaNa" k-MaR ku-vRiNTa Sa®& TYa¤-aTMaéuÖYae )) 11 ))
käyena manasä buddhyä
kevalair indriyair api
yoginaù karma kurvanti
saìgaà tyaktvätma-çuddhaye
käyena—with the
body; manasä—with the mind; buddhyä—with the intelligence; kevalaiù—purified;
indriyaiù—with the senses; api—even with; yoginaù—the
Kåñëa conscious persons; karma—actions; kurvanti—they act; saìgam—attachment;
tyaktvä—giving up; ätma—self;
çuddhaye—for the purpose of purification.
TRANSLATION
The yogés, abandoning attachment, act with body, mind,
intelligence, and even with the senses, only for the purpose of purification.
PURPORT
By acting in Kåñëa consciousness for the satisfaction of the
senses of Kåñëa, any action, whether of the body, mind, intelligence or even of
the senses, is purified of material contamination. There are no material
reactions resulting from the activities of a Kåñëa conscious person. Therefore,
purified activities, which are generally called sadäcära,
can be easily performed by acting in Kåñëa consciousness. Çré Rüpa Gosvämé in
his Bhakti-rasämåta-sindhu describes this as
follows:
éhä yasya harer däsye karmaëä manasä girä
nikhiläsv apy avasthäsu jévanmuktaù sa ucyate
A person acting in Kåñëa consciousness (or, in other words, in the
service of Kåñëa) with his body, mind, intelligence and words is a liberated
person even within the material world, although he may be engaged in many
so-called material activities. He has no false ego, nor does he believe that he
is this material body, nor that he possesses the body. He knows that he is not
this body and that this body does not belong to him. He himself belongs to
Kåñëa, and the body too belongs to Kåñëa. When he applies everything produced
of the body, mind, intelligence, words, life, wealth, etc.—whatever he may have
within his possession—to Kåñëa’s service, he is at once dovetailed with Kåñëa.
He is one with Kåñëa and is devoid of the false ego that leads one to believe
that he is the body, etc. This is the perfect stage of Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 5.12
TEXT
12
TEXT
Yau¢-"
k-MaRf-l&/ TYa¤-a XaaiNTaMaaPanaeiTa NaEiïk-IMa( )
AYau¢-" k-aMak-are<a f-le/ Sa¢-ae iNabDYaTae )) 12 ))
yuktaù karma-phalaà tyaktvä
çäntim äpnoti naiñöhikém
ayuktaù käma-käreëa
phale sakto nibadhyate
yuktaù—one who is
engaged in devotional service; karma-phalam—the
results of all activities; tyaktvä—giving up; çäntim—perfect peace; äpnoti—achieves;
naiñöhikém—unflinching; ayuktaù—one
who is not in Kåñëa consciousness; käma-käreëa—for
enjoying the result of work; phale—in the result;
saktaù—attached; nibadhyate—becomes
entangled.
TRANSLATION
The steadily devoted soul attains unadulterated peace because he
offers the result of all activities to Me; whereas a person who is not in union
with the Divine, who is greedy for the fruits of his labor, becomes entangled.
PURPORT
The difference between a person in Kåñëa consciousness and a
person in bodily consciousness is that the former is attached to Kåñëa, whereas
the latter is attached to the results of his activities. The person who is
attached to Kåñëa and works for Him only is certainly a liberated person, and
he is not anxious for fruitive rewards. In the Bhägavatam,
the cause of anxiety over the result of an activity is explained as
being due to one’s functioning in the conception of duality, that is, without
knowledge of the Absolute Truth. Kåñëa is the Supreme Absolute Truth, the
Personality of Godhead. In Kåñëa consciousness, there is no duality. All that
exists is a product of Kåñëa’s energy, and Kåñëa is all good. Therefore,
activities in Kåñëa consciousness are on the absolute plane; they are
transcendental and have no material effect. One is, therefore, filled with
peace in Kåñëa consciousness. One who is, however, entangled in profit
calculation for sense gratification cannot have that peace. This is the secret
of Kåñëa consciousness—realization that there is no existence besides Kåñëa is
the platform of peace and fearlessness.
Bg 5.13
TEXT
13
TEXT
SavRk-MaaRi<a
MaNaSaa SaNNYaSYaaSTae Sau%& vXaq )
NavÜare Paure dehq NaEv ku-vRà k-arYaNa( )) 13 ))
sarva-karmäëi manasä
sannyasyäste sukhaà vaçé
nava-dväre pure dehé
naiva kurvan na kärayan
sarva—all; karmäëi—activities; manasä—by
the mind; sannyasya—giving up; äste—remains; sukham—in
happiness; vaçé—one who is controlled; nava-dväre—in the place where there are nine gates; pure—in the city; dehé—the
embodied soul; na—never; eva—certainly;
kurvan—doing anything; na—not;
kärayan—causing to be done.
TRANSLATION
When the embodied living being controls his nature and mentally
renounces all actions, he resides happily in the city of nine gates [the
material body], neither working nor causing work to be done.
PURPORT
The embodied soul lives in the city of nine gates. The activities
of the body, or the figurative city of body, are conducted automatically by the
particular modes of nature. The soul, although subjecting himself to the
conditions of the body, can be beyond those conditions, if he so desires. Owing
only to forgetfulness of his superior nature, he identifies with the material
body, and therefore suffers. By Kåñëa consciousness, he can revive his real
position and thus come out of his embodiment. Therefore, when one takes to
Kåñëa consciousness, one at once becomes completely aloof from bodily
activities. In such a controlled life, in which his deliberations are changed,
he lives happily within the city of nine gates. The nine gates are described as
follows:
nava-dväre pure dehé haàso leläyate bahiù
vaçé sarvasya lokasya sthävarasya carasya ca.
"The Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is living within the
body of a living entity, is the controller of all living entities all over the
universe. The body consists of nine gates: two eyes, two nostrils, two ears,
one mouth, the anus and the genital. The living entity in his conditioned stage
identifies himself with the body, but when he identifies himself with the Lord
within himself, he becomes just as free as the Lord, even while in the
body." (Çvet. 3.18)
Therefore, a Kåñëa conscious person is free from both the outer
and inner activities of the material body.
Bg 5.14
TEXT
14
TEXT
Na k-Ta*RTv&
Na k-MaaRi<a l/aek-SYa Sa*JaiTa Pa[>au" )
Na k-MaRf-l/Sa&YaaeGa& Sv>aavSTau Pa[vTaRTae )) 14 ))
na kartåtvaà na karmäëi
lokasya såjati prabhuù
na karma-phala-saàyogaà
svabhävas tu pravartate
na—never; kartåtvam—proprietorship; na—nor;
karmäëi—activities; lokasya—of
the people; såjati—creates; prabhuù—the master of the city of the body; na—nor; karma-phala—results
of activities; saàyogam—connection; svabhävaù—modes of material nature; tu—but; pravartate—acts.
TRANSLATION
The embodied spirit, master of the city of his body, does not
create activities, nor does he induce people to act, nor does he create the
fruits of action. All this is enacted by the modes of material nature.
PURPORT
The living entity, as will be explained in the Seventh Chapter, is
one in nature with the Supreme Lord, distinguished from matter, which is
another nature—called inferior—of the Lord. Somehow, the superior nature, the
living entity, has been in contact with material nature since time immemorial.
The temporary body or material dwelling place which he obtains is the cause of
varieties of activities and their resultant reactions. Living in such a
conditional atmosphere, one suffers the results of the activities of the body
by identifying himself (in ignorance) with the body. It is ignorance acquired
from time immemorial that is the cause of bodily suffering and distress. As
soon as the living entity becomes aloof from the activities of the body, he
becomes free from the reactions as well. As long as he is in the city of body,
he appears to be the master of it, but actually he is neither its proprietor
nor controller of its actions and reactions. He is simply in the midst of the
material ocean, struggling for existence. The waves of the ocean are tossing
him, and he has no control over them. His best solution is to get out of the
water by transcendental Kåñëa consciousness. That alone will save him from all
turmoil.
Bg 5.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
Naadtae
k-SYaicTPaaPa& Na cEv Sauk*-Ta& iv>au" )
AjaNaeNaav*Ta& jaNa& TaeNa MauùiNTa JaNTav" )) 15 ))
nädatte kasyacit päpaà
na caiva sukåtaà vibhuù
ajïänenävåtaà jïänaà
tena muhyanti jantavaù
na—never; ädatte—accepts; kasyacit—anyone’s;
päpam—sin; na—nor; ca—also; eva—certainly; sukåtam—pious activities; vibhuù—the
Supreme Lord; ajïänena—by ignorance; ävåtam—covered; jïänam—knowledge;
tena—by that; muhyanti—bewildered;
jantavaù—the living entities.
TRANSLATION
Nor does the Supreme Spirit assume anyone’s sinful or pious
activities. Embodied beings, however, are bewildered because of the ignorance
which covers their real knowledge.
PURPORT
The Sanskrit word vibhuù means the
Supreme Lord who is full of unlimited knowledge, riches, strength, fame, beauty
and renunciation. He is always satisfied in Himself, undisturbed by sinful or
pious activities. He does not create a particular situation for any living
entity, but the living entity, bewildered by ignorance, desires to be put into
certain conditions of life, and thereby his chain of action and reaction
begins. A living entity is, by superior nature, full of knowledge.
Nevertheless, he is prone to be influenced by ignorance due to his limited
power. The Lord is omnipotent, but the living entity is not. The Lord is vibhu, or omniscient, but the living entity is aëu, or atomic. Because he is a living soul, he has the
capacity to desire by his free will. Such desire is fulfilled only by the
omnipotent Lord. And so, when the living entity is bewildered in his desires,
the Lord allows him to fulfill those desires, but the Lord is never responsible
for the actions and reactions of the particular situation which may be desired.
Being in a bewildered condition, therefore, the embodied soul identifies
himself with the circumstantial material body and becomes subjected to the
temporary misery and happiness of life. The Lord is the constant companion of
the living entity as Paramätmä, or the Supersoul, and therefore He can
understand the desires of the individual soul, as one can smell the flavor of a
flower by being near it. Desire is a subtle form of conditioning of the living
entity. The Lord fulfills his desire as he deserves: Man proposes and God
disposes. The individual is not, therefore, omnipotent in fulfilling his
desires. The Lord, however, can fulfill all desires, and the Lord, being
neutral to everyone, does not interfere with the desires of the minute
independant living entities. However, when one desires Kåñëa, the Lord takes
special care and encourages one to desire in such a way that one can attain to
Him and be eternally happy. The Vedic hymn therefore declares:
eña u hy eva sädhu karma kärayati taà yamebhyo lokebhya unninéñate
eña u eväsädhu karma kärayati yamadho ninéñate.
ajïo jantur anéso ’yam ätmanaù sukha-duùkhayoù
éçvara-prerito gacchet svargaà väçvabhram eva ca.
"The Lord engages the living entity in pious activities so he
may be elevated. The Lord engages him in impious activities so he may go to
hell. The living entity is completely dependant in his distress and happiness.
By the will of the Supreme he can go to heaven or hell, as a cloud is driven by
the air."
Therefore the embodied soul, by his immemorial desire to avoid
Kåñëa consciousness, causes his own bewilderment. Consequently, although he is
constitutionally eternal, blissful and cognizant, due to the littleness of his
existence he forgets his constitutional position of service to the Lord and is
thus entrapped by nescience. And, under the spell of ignorance, the living
entity claims that the Lord is responsible for his conditional existence. The Vedänta-sütras also confirm this:
vaiñamya-nairghåëye na säpekñatvät tathä hi darçayati.
"The Lord neither hates nor likes anyone, though He appears
to."
Bg 5.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
jaNaeNa Tau
TadjaNa& Yaeza& NaaiXaTaMaaTMaNa" )
TaezaMaaidTYavJjaNa& Pa[k-aXaYaiTa TaTParMa( )) 16 ))
jïänena tu tad ajïänaà
yeñäà näçitam ätmanaù
teñäm äditya-vaj jïänaà
prakäçayati tat param
jïänena—by
knowledge; tu—but; tat—that;
ajïänam—nescience; yeñäm—of
those; näçitam—is destroyed; ätmanaù—of the living entity; teñäm—of
their; ädityavat—like the rising sun; jïänam—knowledge; prakäçayati—discloses;
tat param—in Kåñëa consciousness.
TRANSLATION
When, however, one is enlightened with the knowledge by which
nescience is destroyed, then his knowledge reveals everything, as the sun
lights up everything in the daytime.
PURPORT
Those who have forgotten Kåñëa must certainly be bewildered, but
those who are in Kåñëa consciousness are not bewildered at all. It is stated in
the Bhagavad-gétä, "sarvaà jïäna-plavena,"
"jïänägniù sarva-karmäëi" and "na
hi jïänena sadåçam." Knowledge is always highly esteemed. And what
is that knowledge? Perfect knowledge is achieved when one surrenders unto
Kåñëa, as is said in the Seventh Chapter, 19th verse: bahünäà
janmanäm ante jïänavän mäà prapadyate. After passing through many, many
births, when one perfect in knowledge surrenders unto Kåñëa, or when one
attains Kåñëa consciousness, then everything is revealed to him, as the sun
reveals everything in the daytime. The living entity is bewildered in so many
ways. For instance, when he thinks himself God, unceremoniously, he actually
falls into the last snare of nescience. If a living entity is God, then how can
he become bewildered by nescience? Does God become bewildered by nescience? If
so, then nescience, or Satan, is greater than God. Real knowledge can be
obtained from a person who is in perfect Kåñëa consciousness. Therefore, one
has to seek out such a bona fide spiritual master and, under him, learn what
Kåñëa consciousness is. The spiritual master can drive away all nescience, as
the sun drives away darkness. Even though a person may be in full knowledge
that he is not this body but is transcendental to the body, he still may not be
able to discriminate between the soul and the Supersoul. However, he can know
everything well if he cares to take shelter of the perfect, bona fide Kåñëa
conscious spiritual master. One can know God and one’s relationship with God
only when one actually meets a representative of God. A representative of God
never claims that he is God, although he is paid all the respect ordinarily
paid to God because he has knowledge of God. One has to learn the distinction
between God and the living entity. Lord Çré Kåñëa therefore stated in the
Second Chapter (2.12) that every living being is individual and that the Lord
also is individual. They were all individuals in the past, they are individuals
at present, and they will continue to be individuals in the future, even after
liberation. At night we see everything as one in the darkness, but in day when
the sun is up, we see everything in its real identity. Identity with
individuality in spiritual life is real knowledge.
Bg 5.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
Tad(buÖYaSTadaTMaaNaSTaiàïaSTaTParaYa<aa"
GaC^NTYaPauNarav*ita& jaNaiNaDaURTak-LMaza" )) 17 ))
tad-buddhayas tad-ätmänas
tan-niñöhäs tat-paräyaëäù
gacchanty apunar-ävåttià
jïäna-nirdhüta-kalmañäù
tad-buddhayaù—one whose
intelligence is always in the Supreme; tad-ätmänaù—one
whose mind is always in the Supreme; tat-niñöhäù—whose
mind is only meant for the Supreme; tat-paräyaëäù—who
has completely taken shelter of Him; gacchanti—goes;
apunaù-ävåttim—liberation; jïäna—knowledge; nirdhüta—cleanses;
kalmañäù—misgivings.
TRANSLATION
When one’s intelligence, mind, faith and refuge are all fixed in
the Supreme, then one becomes fully cleansed of misgivings through complete
knowledge and thus proceeds straight on the path of liberation.
PURPORT
The Supreme Transcendental Truth is Lord Kåñëa. The whole Bhagavad-gétä centers around the declaration of Kåñëa
as the Supreme Personality of Godhead. That is the version of all Vedic
literature. Paratattva means the Supreme Reality,
who is understood by the knowers of the Supreme as Brahman, Paramätmä and
Bhagavän. Bhagavän, or the Supreme Personality of Godhead, is the last word in
the Absolute. There is nothing more than that.TheLord says, mattaù parataraà nänyat kiïcit asti dhanaïjaya. Impersonal
Brahman is also supported by Kåñëa: brahmaëo
pratiñöhäham. Therefore in all ways Kåñëa is the Supreme Reality. One
whose mind, intelligence, faith and refuge are always in Kåñëa, or, in other
words, one who is fully in Kåñëa consciousness, is undoubtedly washed clean of
all misgivings and is in perfect knowledge in everything concerning
transcendence. A Kåñëa conscious person can thoroughly understand that there is
duality (simultaneous identity and individuality) in Kåñëa, and, equipped with
such transcendental knowledge, one can make steady progress on the path of
liberation.
Bg 5.18
TEXT
18
TEXT
ivÛaivNaYaSaMPaàe
b]aø<ae Gaiv hiSTaiNa )
éuiNa cEv ìPaake- c Pai<@Taa" SaMadiXaRNa" )) 18 ))
vidyä-vinaya-sampanne
brähmaëe gavi hastini
çuni caiva çva-päke ca
paëòitäù sama-darçinaù
vidyä—education; vinaya—gentleness; sampanne—fully
equipped; brähmaëe—in the brähmaëa;
gavi—in the cow; hastini—in the elephant; çuni—in the dog; ca—and; eva—certainly; çvapäke—in
the dog-eater (the outcaste); ca—respectively;
paëòitäù—those who are so wise; sama-darçinaù—do
see with equal vision.
TRANSLATION
The humble sage, by virtue of true knowledge, sees with equal
vision a learned and gentle brähmaëa, a cow, an elephant, a dog and a dog-eater
[outcaste] .
PURPORT
A Kåñëa conscious person does not make any distinction between
species or castes. The brähmaëa and the outcaste
may be different from the social point of view, or a dog, a cow, or an elephant
may be different from the point of view of species, but these differences of
body are meaningless from the viewpoint of a learned transcendentalist. This is
due to their relationship to the Supreme, for the Supreme Lord, by His plenary
portion as Paramätmä, is present in everyone’s heart. Such an understanding of
the Supreme is real knowledge. As far as the bodies are concerned in different
castes or different species of life, the Lord is equally kind to everyone
because He treats every living being as a friend yet maintains Himself as
Paramätmä regardless of the circumstances of the living entities. The Lord as
Paramätmä is present both in the outcaste and in the brähmaëa,
although the body of a brähmaëa and that
of an outcaste are not the same. The bodies are material productions of
different modes of material nature, but the soul and the Supersoul within the
body are of the same spiritual quality. The similarity in the quality of the
soul and the Supersoul, however, does not make them equal in quantity, for the
individual soul is present only in that particular body, whereas the Paramätmä
is present in each and every body. A Kåñëa conscious person has full knowledge
of this, and therefore he is truly learned and has equal vision. The similar
characteristics of the soul and Supersoul are that they are both conscious,
eternal and blissful. But the difference is that the individual soul is
conscious within the limited jurisdiction of the body, whereas the Supersoul is
conscious of all bodies. The Supersoul is present in all bodies without
distinction.
Bg 5.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
whEv TaEiJaRTa"
SaGaaeR Yaeza& SaaMYae iSQaTa& MaNa" )
iNadaeRz& ih SaMa& b]ø TaSMaad(b]øi<a Tae iSQaTaa" )) 19 ))
ihaiva tair jitaù sargo
yeñäà sämye sthitaà manaù
nirdoñaà hi samaà brahma
tasmäd brahmaëi te sthitäù
iha—in this
life; eva—certainly; taiù—by
them; jitaù—conquered; sargaù—birth
and death; yeñäm—of those; sämye—in equanimity; sthitam—so
situated; manaù—mind; nirdoñam—flawless;
hi—certainly; samam—in
equanimity; brahma—the Supreme; tasmät—therefore; brahmaëi—in
the Supreme; te—they; sthitäù—are
situated.
TRANSLATION
Those whose minds are established in sameness and equanimity have
already conquered the conditions of birth and death. They are flawless like
Brahman, and thus they are already situated in Brahman.
PURPORT
Equanimity of mind, as mentioned above, is the sign of
self-realization. Those who have actually attained to such a stage should be
considered to have conquered material conditions, specifically birth and death.
As long as one identifies with this body, he is considered a conditioned soul,
but as soon as he is elevated to the stage of equanimity through realization of
self, he is liberated from conditional life. In other words, he is no longer
subject to take birth in the material world but can enter into the spiritual
sky after his death. The Lord is flawless because He is without attraction or
hatred. Similarly, when a living entity is without attraction or hatred, he
also becomes flawless and eligible to enter into the spiritual sky. Such
persons are to be considered already liberated, and their symptoms are
described below.
Bg 5.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
Na
Pa[ôZYaeiTPa[Ya& Pa[aPYa NaaeiÜJaeTPa[aPYa caiPa[YaMa( )
iSQarbuiÖrSaMMaU!ae b]øivd(b]øi<a iSQaTa" )) 20 ))
na prahåñyet priyaà präpya
nodvijet präpya cäpriyam
sthira-buddhir asammüòho
brahma-vid brahmaëi sthitaù
na—never; prahåñyet—rejoice; priyam—pleasant;
präpya—achieving; na—does
not; udvijet—agitated; präpya—obtaining;
ca—also; apriyam—unpleasant;
sthira-buddhiù—self-intelligent; asammüòhaù—unbewildered; brahmavit—one
who knows the Supreme perfectly; brahmaëi—in the
Transcendence; sthitaù—situated.
TRANSLATION
A person who neither rejoices upon achieving something pleasant
nor laments upon obtaining something unpleasant, who is self-intelligent,
unbewildered, and who knows the science of God, is to be understood as already
situated in Transcendence.
PURPORT
The symptoms of the self-realized person are given herein. The
first symptom is that he is not illusioned by the false identification of the
body with his true self. He knows perfectly well that he is not this body, but
is the fragmental port~on of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He is
therefore not joyful in achieving something, nor does he lament in losing
anything which is related to his body. This steadiness of mind is called sthira-buddhi, or self-intelligence. He is therefore
never bewildered by mistaking the gross body for the soul, nor does he accept
the body as permanent and disregard the existence of the soul. This knowledge
elevates him to the station of knowing the complete science of the Absolute
Truth, namely Brahman, Paramätmä and Bhagavän. He thus knows his constitutional
position perfectly well, without falsely trying to become one with the Supreme
in all respects. This is called Brahman realization, or self-realization. Such
steady consciousness is called Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 5.21
TEXT
21
TEXT
baùSPaXaeRZvSa¢-aTMaa
ivNdTYaaTMaiNa YaTSau%Ma( )
Sa b]øYaaeGaYau¢-aTMaa Sau%Ma+aYaMaénuTae )) 21 ))
bähya-sparçeñv asaktätmä
vindaty ätmani yat sukham
sa brahma-yoga-yuktätmä
sukham akñayam açnute
bähya-sparçeñu—in external
sense pleasure; asakta-ätmä—one who is not so
attached; vindati—enjoys; ätmani—in
the self; yat—that which; sukham—happiness;
saù—that; brahma-yoga—concentrated
in Brahman; yukta-ätmä—self-connected; sukham—happiness; akñayam—unlimited;
açnute—enjoys.
TRANSLATION
Such a liberated person is not attracted to material sense
pleasure or external objects but is always in trance, enjoying the pleasure
within. In this way the self-realized person enjoys unlimited happiness, for he
concentrates on the Supreme.
PURPORT
Çré Yämunäcärya, a great devotee in Kåñëa consciousness, said:
yadävadhi mama cetaù kåñëa-padäravinde
nava-nava-rasa-dhämanudyata rantum äsét
tadävadhi bata näré-saìgame smaryamäne
bhavati mukha-vikäraù suñöu niñöhévanaà ca
"Since I have been engaged in the transcendental loving
service of Kåñëa, realizing ever-new pleasure in Him, whenever I think of sex
pleasure, I spit at the thought, and my lips curl with distaste." A person
in brahma-yoga, or Kåñëa consciousness, is so
absorbed in the loving service of the Lord that he loses his taste for material
sense pleasure altogether. The highest pleasure in terms of matter is sex
pleasure. The whole world is moving under its spell, and a materialist cannot
work at all without this motivation. But a person engaged in Kåñëa
consciousness can work with greater vigor without sex pleasure, which he
avoids. That is the test in spiritual realization. Spiritual realization and
sex pleasure go ill together. A Kåñëa conscious person is not attracted to any
kind of sense pleasure due to his being a liberated soul.
Bg 5.22
TEXT
22
TEXT
Yae ih
Sa&SPaXaRJaa >aaeGaa du"%YaaeNaYa Wv Tae )
AaÛNTavNTa" k-aENTaeYa Na Taezu rMaTae buDa" )) 22 ))
ye hi saàsparça-jä bhogä
duùkha-yonaya eva te
ädy-antavantaù kaunteya
na teñu ramate budhaù
ye—those; hi—certainly; saàsparçajäù—by
contact with the material senses; bhogäù—enjoyment;
duùkha—distress; yonayaù—sources
of; eva—certainly; te—they
are; ädi—in the beginning; antavantaù—subject to; kaunteya—O
son of Kunté; na—never; teñu—in
those; ramate—take delight; budhaù—the intelligent.
TRANSLATION
An intelligent person does not take part in the sources of misery,
which are due to contact with the material senses. O son of Kunté, such
pleasures have a beginning and an end, and so the wise man does not delight in
them.
PURPORT
Material sense pleasures are due to the contact of the material
senses, which are all temporary because the body itself is temporary. A
liberated soul is not interested in anything which is temporary. Knowing well
the joys of transcendental pleasures, how can a liberated soul agree to enjoy
false pleasure? In the Padma Puräëa it is said:
ramante yogino ’nante satyänanda-cid-ätmani
iti räma-padenäsau paraà brahmäbhidhéyate
"The mystics derive unlimited transcendental pleasures from
the Absolute Truth, and therefore the Supreme Absolute Truth, the Personality
of Godhead, is also known as Räma."
In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam also it is
said:
näyaà deho deha-bhäjäà nå-loke
kañöän kämän arhate viò-bhajäà ye
tapo divyaà putrakä yena sattvaà
çuddhyed yasmäd brahma-saukhyaà tv anantam.
"My dear sons, there is no reason to labor very hard for
sense pleasure while in this human form of life; such pleasures are available
to the stool-eaters [hogs]. Rather, you should undergo penances in this life by
which your existence will be purified, and, as a result, you will be able to
enjoy unlimited transcendental bliss." (Bhäg. 5.5.1)
Therefore, those who are true yogés or
learned transcendentalists are not attracted by sense pleasures, which are the
causes of continuous material existence. The more one is addicted to material
pleasures, the more he is entrapped by material miseries.
Bg 5.23
TEXT
23
TEXT
Xa¥-aeTaqhEv
Ya" Saae!u& Pa[aKXarqrivMaae+a<aaTa( )
k-aMa§-aeDaaeÙv& veGa& Sa Yau¢-" Sa Sau%q Nar" )) 23 ))
çaknotéhaiva yaù soòhuà
präk çaréra-vimokñaëät
käma-krodhodbhavaà vegaà
sa yuktaù sa sukhé naraù
çaknoti—able to do; iha eva—in the present body; yaù—one
who; soòhum—to tolerate; präk—before;
çaréra—body; vimokñaëät—giving
up; käma—desire; krodha—anger;
udbhavam—generated from; vegam—urge;
saù—he; yuktaù—in
trance; saù—he; sukhé—happy;
naraù—human being.
TRANSLATION
Before giving up this present body, if one is able to tolerate the
urges of the material senses and check the force of desire and anger, he is a
yogé and is happy in this world.
PURPORT
lf one wants to make steady progress on the path of
self-realization, he must try to control the forces of the material senses.
There are the forces of talk, forces of anger, forces of mind, forces of the
stomach, forces of the genitals, and forces of the tongue. One who is able to
control the forces of all these different senses, and the mind, is called gosvämé, or svämé. Such gosvämés live strictly controlled lives, and forego
altogether the forces of the senses. Material desires, when unsatiated,
generate anger, and thus the mind, eyes and chest become agitated. Therefore,
one must practice to control them before one gives up this material body. One
who can do this is understood to be self-realized and is thus happy in the
state of self-realization. It is the duty of the transcendentalist to try
strenuously to control desire and anger.
Bg 5.24
TEXT
24
TEXT
Yaae_NTa"Sau%ae_NTararaMaSTaQaaNTaJYaaeRiTarev
Ya" )
Sa YaaeGaq b]øiNavaR<a& b]ø>aUTaae_iDaGaC^iTa )) 24 ))
yo ’ntaù-sukho ’ntar-ärämas
tathäntar-jyotir eva yaù
sa yogé brahma-nirväëaà
brahma-bhüto ’dhigacchati
yaù—one who; antaù-sukhaù—happy from within; antaù-ärämah—active
within; tathä—as well as; antaù-jyotiù—aiming
within; eva—certainly; yaù—anyone;
saù—he; yogé—mystic;
brahma-nirväëam—liberated in the Supreme; brahma-bhütaù—self-realized; adhigacchati—attains.
TRANSLATION
One whose happiness is within, who is active within, who rejoices
within and is illumined within, is actually the perfect mystic. He is liberated
in the Supreme, and ultimately he attains the Supreme.
PURPORT
Unless one is able to relish happiness from within, how can one
retire from the external engagements meant for deriving superficial happiness?
A liberated person enjoys happiness by factual experience. He can, therefore,
sit silently at any place and enjoy the activities of life from within. Such a
liberated person no longer desires external material happiness. This state is
called brahma-bhüta, attaining which one is
assured of going back to Godhead, back to home.
Bg 5.25
TEXT
25
TEXT
l/>aNTae
b]øiNavaR<aMa*zYa" +aq<ak-LMaza" )
i^àÜEDaa YaTaaTMaaNa" SavR>aUTaihTae rTaa" )) 25 ))
labhante brahma-nirväëam
åñayaù kñéëa-kalmañäù
chinna-dvaidhä yatätmänaù
sarva-bhüta-hite ratäù
labhante—achieve; brahma-nirväëam—liberation in the Supreme; åñayaù—those who are active within; kñéëa-kalmañäù—who are devoid of all sins; chinna—torn off; dvaidhäù—duality;
yata-ätmänaù—engaged in self-realization; sarva-bhüta—in all living entities; hite—in welfare work; ratäù—engaged.
TRANSLATION
One who is beyond duality and doubt, whose mind is engaged within,
who is always busy working for the welfare of all sentient beings, and who is
free from all sins, achieves liberation in the Supreme.
PURPORT
Only a person who is fully in Kåñëa consciousness can be said to
be engaged in welfare work for all living entities. When a person is actually
in the knowledge that Kåñëa is the fountainhead of everything, then when he
acts in that spirit he acts for everyone. The sufferings of humanity are due to
forgetfulness of Kåñëa as the supreme enjoyer, the supreme proprietor, and the
supreme friend. Therefore, to act to revive this consciousness within the
entire human society is the highest welfare work. One cannot be engaged in
first-class welfare work without being liberated in the Supreme. A Kåñëa
conscious person has no doubt about the supremacy of Kåñëa. He has no doubt
because he is completely freed from all sins. This is the state of divine love.
A person engaged only in ministering to the physical welfare of human society cannot factually help anyone. Temporary relief of the external body and the mind is not satisfactory. The real cause of one’s difficulties in the hard struggle for life may be found in one’s forgetfulness of his relationship with the Supreme Lord. When a man is fully conscious of his relationship with Kåñëa, he is actually a liberated soul, although he may be in the material tabernacle.
Bg 5.26
TEXT
26
TEXT
k-aMa§-aeDaivMau¢-aNaa&
YaTaqNaa& YaTaceTaSaaMa( )
Ai>aTaae b]øiNavaR<a& vTaRTae ividTaaTMaNaaMa( )) 26 ))
käma-krodha-vimuktänäà
yaténäà yata-cetasäm
abhito brahma-nirväëaà
vartate viditätmanäm
käma—desires; krodha—anger; vimuktänäm—of
those who are so liberated; yaténäm—of the
saintly persons; yata-cetasäm—of persons who have
full control over the mind; abhitaù—assured in
the near future; brahma-nirväëam—liberation in
the Supreme; vartate—is there; vidita-ätmanäm—of those who are self-realized.
TRANSLATION
Those who are free from anger and all material desires, who are
selfrealized, self-disciplined and constantly endeavoring for perfection, are
assured of liberation in the Supreme in the very near future.
PURPORT
Of the saintly persons who are constantly engaged in striving
toward salvation, one who is in Kåñëa consciousness is the best of all. The Bhägavatam confirms this fact as follows:
yat-päda-paìkaja-paläça-viläsa-bhaktyä
karmäçayaà grathitam udgrathayanti santaù
tadvan na rikta-matayo yatayo ’pi ruddha-
srotogaëäs tam araëaà bhaja väsudevam.
"Just try to worship, in devotional service, Väsudeva, the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. Even great sages are not able to control the
forces of the senses as effectively as those who are engaged in transcendental
bliss by serving the lotus feet of the Lord, uprooting the deep grown desire
for fruitive activities." (Bhäg. 4.22.39)
In the conditioned soul the desire to enjoy the fruitive results
of work is so deep-rooted that it is very difficult even for the great sages to
control such desires, despite great endeavors. A devotee of the Lord,
constantly engaged in devotional service in Kåñëa consciousness, perfect in
self-realization, very quickly attains liberation in the Supreme. Owing to his
complete knowledge in self-realization, he always remains in trance. To cite an
analagous example of this:
darçana-dhyäna-saàsparçair matsya-kürma-vihaìgamäù
svänya patyäni puñëanti tathäham api padmaja.
"By vision, by meditation and by touch only do the fish, the
tortoise and the birds maintain their offspring. Similarly do I also, O
Padmaja!"
The fish brings up its offspring simply by looking at them. The
tortoise brings up its offspring simply by meditation. The eggs of the tortoise
are laid on land, and the tortoise meditates on the eggs while in the water.
Similarly, a devotee in Kåñëa consciousness, although far away from the Lord’s
abode, can elevate himself to that abode simply by thinking of Him
constantly—by engagement in Kåñëa consciousness. He does not feel the pangs of
material miseries; this state of life is called brahma-nirväëa,
or the absence of material miseries due to being constantly immersed in
the Supreme.
Bg
5.27, Bg 5.28, Bg 5.27-28
TEXTS
27–28
TEXT
SPaXaaRNk*-Tva
bihbaRùa&ê+auêEvaNTare >a]uvae" )
Pa[a<aaPaaNaaE SaMaaE k*-Tva NaaSaa>YaNTarcair<aaE )) 27 ))
YaTaeiNd]YaMaNaaebuiÖMauRiNaMaaeR+aParaYa<a" )
ivGaTaeC^a>aYa§-aeDaae Ya" Sada Mau¢- Wv Sa" )) 28 ))
sparçän kåtvä bahir bähyäàç
cakñuç caiväntare bhruvoù
präëäpänau samau kåtvä
näsäbhyantara-cäriëau
yatendriya-mano-buddhir
munir mokña-paräyaëaù
vigatecchä-bhaya-krodho
yaù sadä mukta eva saù
sparçän—external
sense objects, such as sound, etc.; kåtvä—doing
so; bahiù—external; bähyän—unnecessary;
cakñuù—eyes; ca—also;
eva—certainly; antare—within;
bhruvoù—of the eyebrows; präëa-apänau—up-and
down-moving air; samau—in suspension; kåtvä—doing so; näsä-abhyantara—within
the nostrils; cäriëau—blowing; yata—controlled; indriya—senses;
manaù—mind; buddhih—intelligence;
muniù—the transcendentalist; mokña—liberation; paräyaëaù—being
so destined; vigata—discarded; icchä—wishes; bhaya—fear;
krodhaù—anger; yaù—one
who; sadä—always; muktaù—liberated;
eva—certainly; saù—he
is.
TRANSLATION
Shutting out all external sense objects, keeping the eyes and
vision concentrated between the two eyebrows, suspending the inward and outward
breaths within the nostrils—thus controlling the mind, senses and intelligence,
the tranecendentalist becomes free from desire, fear and anger. One who is
always in this state is certainly liberated.
PURPORT
Being engaged in Kåñëa consciousness, one can immediately
understand one’s spiritual identity, and then one can understand the Supreme
Lord by means of devotional service. When he is well situated in devotional
service, one comes to the transcendental position, qualified to feel the
presence of the Lord in the sphere of one’s activity. This particular position
is called liberation in the Supreme.
After explaining the above principles of liberation in the Supreme, the Lord gives instruction to Arjuna as to how one can come to that position by the practice of mysticism or yoga, known as añöäìga-yoga, which is divisible into an eightfold procedure called yama, niyama, äsana, präëäyäma, pratyähära, dhäraëä, dhyäna, and samädhi. In the Sixth Chapter the subject of yoga is explicitly detailed, and at the end of the Fifth it is only preliminarily explained. One has to drive out the sense objects such as sound, touch, form, taste and smell by the pratyähära (breathing) process in yoga, and then keep the vision of the eyes between the two eyebrows and concentrate on the tip of the nose with half closed lids. There is no benefit in closing the eyes altogether, because then there is every chance of falling asleep. Nor is there benefit in opening the eyes completely, because then there is the hazard of being attracted by sense objects. The breathing movement is restrained within the nostrils by neutralizing the up- and down-moving air within the body. By practice of such yoga one is able to gain control over the senses, refrain from outward sense objects, and thus prepare oneself for liberation in the Supreme.
This yoga process helps one become free from all kinds of fear and anger and thus feel the presence of the Supersoul in the transcendental situation. In other words, Kåñëa consciousness is the easiest process of executing yoga principles. This will be thoroughly explained in the next chapter. A Kåñëa conscious person, however, being always engaged in devotional service, does not risk losing his senses to some other engagement. This is a better way of controlling the senses than by the añöäìga-yoga.
Bg 5.29
TEXT
29
TEXT
>aae¢-ar&
YajTaPaSaa& SavRl/aek-MaheìrMa( )
Sauôd& SavR>aUTaaNaa& jaTva Maa& XaaiNTaMa*C^iTa )) 29 ))
bhoktäraà yajïa-tapasäà
sarva-loka-maheçvaram
suhådaà sarva-bhütänäà
jïätvä mäà çäntim åcchati
bhoktäram—beneficiary;
yajïa—sacrifices; tapasäm—of
penances and austerities; sarva-loka—all planets
and the demigods thereof; maheçvaram—the Supreme
Lord; suhådam—benefactor; sarva—all;
bhütänäm—of the living entities; jïätvä—thus knowing; mäm—Me
(Lord Kåñëa); çäntim—relief from material pangs; åcchati—achieves.
TRANSLATION
The sages, knowing Me as the ultimate purpose of all sacrifices
and austerities, the Supreme Lord of all planets and demigods and the
benefactor and well-wisher of all living entities, attain peace from the pangs
of material miseries.
PURPORT
The conditioned souls within the clutches of illusory energy are
all anxious to attain peace in the material world. But they do not know the
formula for peace, which is explained in this part of the Bhagavad-gétä. The greatest peace formula is simply
this: Lord Kåñëa is the beneficiary in all human activities. Men should offer
everything to the transcendental service of the Lord because He is the
proprietor of all planets and the demigods thereon. No one is greater than He.
He is greater than the greatest of the demigods, Lord Çiva and Lord Brahmä. In
the Vedas the Supreme Lord is described as tam éçvaräëäà paramaà maheçvaram. Under the spell of
illusion, living entities are trying to be lords of all they survey, but
actually they are dominated by the material energy of the Lord. The Lord is the
master of material nature, and the conditioned souls are under the stringent
rules of material nature. Unless one understands these bare facts, it is not
possible to achieve peace in the world either individually or collectively.
This is the sense of Kssna consciousness: Lord Kåñëa is the supreme
predominator, and all living entities, including the great demigods, are His
subordinates. One can attain perfect peace only in complete Kåñëa
consciousness.
This Fifth Chapter is a practical explanation of Kåñëa consciousness, generally known as karma-yoga. The question of mental speculation as to how karma-yoga can give liberation is answered herewith. To work in Kåñëa consciousness is to work with the complete knowledge of the Lord as the predominator. Such work is not different from transcendental knowledge. Direct Kåñëa consciousness is bhakti-yoga, and jïäna-yoga is a path leading to bhakti-yoga. Kåñëa consciousness means to work in full knowledge of one’s relationship with the Supreme Absolute, and the perfection of this consciousness is full knowledge of Kåñëa, or the Supreme Personality of Godhead. A pure soul is the eternal servant of God as His fragmental part and parcel. He comes into contact with mäyä (illusion) due to the desire to lord it over mäyä, and that is the cause of his many sufferings. As long as he is in contact with matter, he has to execute work in terms of material necessities. Kåñëa consciousness, however, brings one into spiritual life even while one is within the jurisdiction of matter, for it is an arousing of spiritual existence by practice in the material world. The more one is advanced, the more he is freed from the clutches of matter. The Lord is not partial toward anyone. Everything depends on one’s practical performance of duties in an effort to control the senses and conquer the influence of desire and anger. And, attaining Kåñëa consciousness by controlling the above-mentioned passions, one remains factually in the transcendental stage, or brahman-nirväëa. The eightfold yoga mysticism is automatically practiced in Kåñëa consciousness because the ultimate purpose is served. There is gradual process of elevation in the practice of yama, niyama, äsana, pratyähära, dhyäna, dhäraëä, präëäyäma, and samädhi. But these only preface perfection by devotional service, which alone can award peace to the human being. It is the highest perfection of life.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the Fifth Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of Karma-yoga, or
Action in Kåñëa Consciousness.
Bg 6. Säìkhya-yoga
CHAPTER
SIX
Säìkhya-yoga
Bg 6.1
TEXT
1
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
ANaaié[Ta" k-MaRf-l&/ k-aYa| k-MaR k-raeiTa Ya" )
Sa SaNNYaaSaq c YaaeGaq c Na iNariGanNaR cai§-Ya" )) 1 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
anäçritaù karma-phalaà
käryaà karma karoti yaù
sa sannyäsé ca yogé ca
na niragnir na cäkriyaù
çré bhagavän uväca—the Lord
said; anäçritaù—without shelter; karma-phalam—the result of work; käryam—obligatory; karma—work;
karoti—performs; yaù—one
who; saù—he; sannyäsé—in
the renounced order; ca—also; yogé—mystic; ca—also; na—not; nir—without; agniù—fire; na—nor; ca—also; akriyaù—without
duty.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: One who is unattached to the fruits of his
work and who works as he is obligated is in the renounced order of life, and he
is the true mystic: not he who lights no fire and performs no work.
PURPORT
In this chapter the Lord explains that the process of the
eightfold yoga system is a means to control the
mind and the senses. However, this is very difficult for people in general to
perform, especially in the age of Kali. Although the eightfold yoga system is recommended in this chapter, the Lord
emphasizes that the process of karma-yoga, or
acting in Kåñëa consciousness, is better. Everyone acts in this world to
maintain his family and their paraphernalia, but no one is working without some
self-interest, some personal gratification, be it concentrated or extended. The
criterion of perfection is to act in Kåñëa consciousness, and not with a view
to enjoying the fruits of work. To act in Kåñëa consciousness is the duty of
every living entity because all are constitutionally parts and parcels of the
Supreme. The parts of the body work for the satisfaction of the whole body. The
limbs of the body do not act for self-satisfaction but for the satisfaction of
the complete whole. Similarly, the living entity who acts for satisfaction of
the supreme whole and not for personal satisfaction is the perfect sannyäsé, the perfect yogé.
The sannyäsés sometimes artificially think that they have become liberated from all material duties, and therefore they cease to perform agnihotra yajïas (fire sacrifices), but actually they are self-interested because their goal is becoming one with the impersonal Brahman. Such a desire is greater than any material desire, but it is not without self-interest. Similarly, the mystic yogé who practices the yoga system with half-open eyes, ceasing all material activities, desires some satisfaction for his personal self. But a person acting in Kåñëa consciousness works for the satisfaction of the whole, without self-interest. A Kåñëa conscious person has no desire for self-satisfaction. His criterion of success is the satisfaction of Kåñëa, and thus he is the perfect sannyäsé, or perfect yogé. Lord Caitanya, the highest perfectional symbol of renunciation, prays in this way:
na dhanaà na janaà na sundaréà kavitäà vä jagadéça kämaye.
mama janmani janmanéçvare bhavatäd bhaktir ahaituké tvayi.
"O Almighty Lord, I have no desire to accumulate wealth, nor
to enjoy beautiful women. Nor do I want any number of followers. What I want
only is the causeless mercy of Your devotional service in my life, birth after
birth."
Bg 6.2
TEXT
2
TEXT
Ya&
SaNNYaaSaiMaiTa Pa[ahuYaaeRGa& Ta& iviÖ Paa<@v )
Na ùSaNNYaSTaSaªLPaae YaaeGaq >aviTa k-êNa )) 2 ))
yaà sannyäsam iti prähur
yogaà taà viddhi päëòava
na hy asannyasta-saìkalpo
yogé bhavati kaçcana
yam—what; sannyäsam—renunciation; iti—thus;
prähuù—they say; yogam—linking
with the Supreme; tam—that; viddhi—you must know; päëòava—O
son of Päëòu; na—never; hi—certainly;
asannyasta—without giving up; saìkalpaù—self-satisfaction; yogé—a
mystic transcendentalist; bhavati—becomes; kaçcana—anyone.
TRANSLATION
What is called renunciation is the same as yoga, or linking
oneself with the Supreme, for no one can become a yogé unless he renounces the
desire for sense gratification.
PURPORT
Real sannyäsa-yoga or bhakti means that one should know his constitutional
position as the living entity, and act accordingly. The living entity has no
separate independant identity. He is the marginal energy of the Supreme. When
he is entrapped by material energy, he is conditioned, and when he is Kåñëa
conscious, or aware of the spiritual energy, then he is in his real and natural
state of life. Therefore, when one is in complete knowledge, one ceases all
material sense gratification, or renounces all kinds of sense gratificatory
activities. This is practiced by the yogés who
restrain the senses from material attachment. But a person in Kåñëa
consciousness has no opportunity to engage his senses in anything which is not
for the purpose of Kåñëa. Therefore, a Kåñëa conscious person is simultaneously
a sannyäsé and a yogé. The
purpose of knowledge and of restraining the senses, as prescribed in the jïäna and yoga processes,
is automatically served in Kåñëa consciousness. If one is unable to give up the
activities of his selfish nature, then jïäna and yoga are of no avail. The real aim is for a living
entity to give up all selfish satisfaction and to be prepared to satisfy the
Supreme. A Kåñëa conscious person has no desire for any kind of self-enjoyment.
He is always engaged for the enjoyment of the Supreme. One who has no
information of the Supreme must therefore be engaged in self-satisfaction
because no one can stand on the platform of inactivity. All these purposes are
perfectly served by the practice of Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 6.3
TEXT
3
TEXT
Aaåå+aaeMauRNaeYaaeRGa&
k-MaR k-ar<aMauCYaTae )
YaaeGaaæ!SYa TaSYaEv XaMa" k-ar<aMauCYaTae )) 3 ))
ärurukñor muner yogaà
karma käraëam ucyate
yogärüòhasya tasyaiva
çamaù käraëam ucyate
ärurukñoù—of one who
has just begun yoga; muneù—of the sage; yogam—the eightfold yoga system;
karma—work; käraëam—the
cause; ucyate—is said to be; yoga—eightfold yoga; ärüòhasya—one
who has attained; tasya—his; eva—certainly; çamaù—cessation
of all material activities; käraëam—the cause; ucyate—is said to be.
TRANSLATION
For one who is a neophyte in the eightfold yoga system, work is
said to be the means; and for one who has already attained to yoga, cessation
of all material activities is said to be the means.
PURPORT
The process of linking oneself with the Supreme is called yoga, which may be compared to a ladder for attaining
the topmost spiritual realization. This ladder begins from the lowest material
condition of the living entity and rises up to perfect self-realization in pure
spiritual life. According to various elevations, different parts of the ladder
are known by different names. But all in all, the complete ladder is called yoga and may be divided into three parts, namely jïäna-yoga, dhyäna-yoga and bhakti-yoga.
The beginning of the ladder is called the yogärurukña
stage, and the highest rung is called yogärüòha.
Concerning the eightfold yoga system, attempts in the beginning to enter into meditation through regulative principles of life and practice of different sitting postures (which are more or less bodily exercises) are considered fruitive material activities. All such activities lead to achieving perfect mental equilibrium to control the senses. When one is accomplished in the practice of meditation, he ceases all disturbing mental activities.
A Kåñëa conscious person is, however, situated from the beginning on the platform of meditation because he always thinks of Kåñëa. And, being constantly engaged in the service of Kåñëa, he is considered to have ceased all material activities.
Bg 6.4
TEXT
4
TEXT
Yada ih
NaeiNd]YaaQaeRzu Na k-MaRSvNauzÂTae )
SavRSaªLPaSaNNYaaSaq YaaeGaaæ!STadaeCYaTae )) 4 ))
yadä hi nendriyärtheñu
na karmasv anuñajjate
sarva-saìkalpa-sannyäsé
yogärüòhas tadocyate
yadä—when; hi—certainly; na—not; indriya-artheñu—in sense gratification; na—never; karmasu—in
fruitive activities; anuñajjate—does necessarily
engage; sarva-saìkalpa—all material desires; sannyäsé—renouncer; yoga-ärüòhaù—elevated
in yoga; tadä—at that time; ucyate—is said to be.
TRANSLATION
A person is said to have attained to yoga when, having renounced
all material desires, he neither acts for sense gratification nor engages in
fruitive activities.
PURPORT
When a person is fully engaged in the transcendental loving
service of the Lord, he is pleased in himself, and thus he is no longer engaged
in sense gratification or in fruitive activities. Otherwise, one must be
engaged in sense gratification, since one cannot live without engagement.
Without Kåñëa consciousness, one must be always seeking self-centered or
extended selfish activities. But a Kåñëa conscious person can do everything for
the satisfaction of Kåñëa and thereby be perfectly detached from sense
gratification. One who has no such realization must mechanically try to escape
material desires before being elevated to the top rung of the yoga ladder.
Bg 6.5
TEXT
5
TEXT
oÖredaTMaNaaTMaaNa&
NaaTMaaNaMavSaadYaeTa( )
AaTMaEv ùaTMaNaae bNDauraTMaEv irPauraTMaNa" )) 5 ))
uddhared ätmanätmänaà
nätmänam avasädayet
ätmaiva hy ätmano bandhur
ätmaiva ripur ätmanaù
uddharet—one must
deliver; ätmanä—by the mind; ätmänam—the conditioned soul; na—never;
ätmänam—the conditioned soul; avasädayet—put into degradation; ätmä—mind; eva—certainly;
hi—indeed; ätmanaù—of
the conditioned soul; bandhuù—friend; ätmä—mind; eva—certainly;
ripuù—enemy; ätmanaù—of
the conditioned soul.
TRANSLATION
A man must elevate himself by his own mind, not degrade himself.
The mind is the friend of the conditioned soul, and his enemy as well.
PURPORT
The word ätmä denotes body, mind and
soul—depending upon different circumstances. In the yoga
system, the mind and the conditioned soul are especially important. Since the
mind is the central point of yoga practice, ätmä refers here to the mind. The purpose of the yoga system is to control the mind and to draw it away
from attachment to sense objects. It is stressed herein that the mind must be
so trained that it can deliver the conditioned soul from the mire of nescience.
In material existence one is subjected to the influence of the mind and the
senses. In fact, the pure soul is entangled in the material world because of
the mind’s ego which desires to lord it over material nature. Therefore, the
mind should be trained so that it will not be attracted by the glitter of
material nature, and in this way the conditioned soul may be saved. One should
not degrade oneself by attraction to sense objects. The more one is attracted
by sense objects, the more one becomes entangled in material existence. The
best way to disentangle oneself is to always engage the mind in Kåñëa
consciousness. The word hi is used for emphasizing this point, i.e., that one must do this. It is also said:
mana eva manuñyäëäà käraëaà bandha-mokñayoù
bandhäya viñayäsaìgo muktyai nirviñayaà manaù.
"For man, mind is the cause of bondage and mind is the cause
of liberation. Mind absorbed in sense objects is the cause of bondage, and mind
detached from the sense objects is the cause of liberation." Therefore,
the mind which is always engaged in Kåñëa consciousness is the cause of supreme
liberation.
Bg 6.6
TEXT
6
TEXT
bNDauraTMaaTMaNaSTaSYa
YaeNaaTMaEvaTMaNaa iJaTa" )
ANaaTMaNaSTau Xa}auTve vTaeRTaaTMaEv Xa}auvTa( )) 6 ))
bandhur ätmätmanas tasya
yenätmaivätmanä jitaù
anätmanas tu çatrutve
vartetätmaiva çatru-vat
bandhuù—friend; ätmä—mind; ätmanaù—of the
living entity; tasya—of him; yena—by whom; ätmä—mind; eva—certainly; ätmanä—by
the living entity; jitaù—conquered; anätmanaù—of one who has failed to control the mind; tu—but; çatrutve—because
of enmity; varteta—remains; ätmä eva—the very mind; çatruvat—as
an enemy.
TRANSLATION
For him who has conquered the mind, the mind is the best of
friends; but for one who has failed to do so, his very mind will be the
greatest enemy.
PURPORT
The purpose of practicing eightfold yoga is to control the mind in order to make it a friend in
discharging the human mission. Unless the mind is controlled, the practice of yoga (for show) is simply a waste of time. One who
cannot control his mind lives always with the greatest enemy, and thus his life
and its mission are spoiled. The constitutional position of the living entity
is to carry out the order of the superior. As long as one’s mind remains an
unconquered enemy, one has to serve the dictations of lust, anger, avarice,
illusion, etc. But when the mind is conquered, one voluntarily agrees to abide
by the dictation of the Personality of Godhead, who is situated within the
heart of everyone as Paramätmä. Real yoga practice
entails meeting the Paramätmä within the heart and then following His
dictation. For one who takes to Kåñëa consciousness directly, perfect surrender
to the dictation of the Lord follows automatically.
Bg 6.7
TEXT
7
TEXT
iJaTaaTMaNa"
Pa[XaaNTaSYa ParMaaTMaa SaMaaihTa" )
XaqTaaeZ<aSau%du"%ezu TaQaa MaaNaaPaMaaNaYaae" )) 7 ))
jitätmanaù praçäntasya
paramätmä samähitaù
çétoñëa-sukha-duùkheñu
tathä mänäpamänayoù
jita-ätmanaù—of one who
has conquered his mind; praçäntasya—of one who
has attained tranquility by such control over the mind; paramätmä—the
Supersoul; samähitaù—approached completely; çéta—cold; uñëa—heat; sukha—in happiness; duùkheñu—in
distress; tathä—also; mäna—honor;
apamänayoù—in dishonor.
TRANSLATION
For one who has conquered the mind, the Supersoul is already
reached, for he has attained tranquility. To such a man happiness and distress,
heat and cold, honor and dishonor are all the same.
PURPORT
Actually, every living entity is intended to abide by the
dictation of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is seated in everyone’s
heart as Paramätmä. When the mind is misled by the external illusory energy,
one becomes entangled in material activities. Therefore, as soon as one’s mind
is controlled through one of the yoga systems,
one is to be considered as having already reached the destination. One has to
abide by superior dictation. When one’s mind is fixed on the superior nature,
he has no other alternative but to follow the dictation of the Supreme. The
mind must admit some superior dictation and follow it. The effect of
controlling the mind is that one automatically follows the dictation of the Paramätmä
or Supersoul. Because this transcendental position is at once achieved by one
who is in Kåñëa consciousness, the devotee of the Lord is unaffected by the
dualities of material existence, namely distress and happiness, cold and heat,
etc. This state is practical samädhi, or
absorption in the Supreme.
Bg 6.8
TEXT
8
TEXT
jaNaivjaNaTa*áaTMaa
kU-$=SQaae iviJaTaeiNd]Ya" )
Yau¢- wTYauCYaTae YaaeGaq SaMal/aeí\aXMak-aÄNa" )) 8 ))
jïäna-vijïäna-tåptätmä
küöa-stho vijitendriyaù
yukta ity ucyate yogé
sama-loñöräçma-käïcanaù
jïäna—acquired
knowledge; vijïäna—realized knowledge; tåpta—satisfied; ätmä—living
entity; küöasthaù—spiritually situated; vijita-indriyaù—sensually controlled; yuktaù—competent for self-realization; iti—thus; ucyate—is said;
yogé—the mystic; sama—equiposed;
loñöra—pebbles; açma—stone;
käïcanaù—gold.
TRANSLATION
A person is said to be established in self-realization and is
called a yogé [or mystic] when he is fully satisfied by virtue of acquired
knowledge and realization. Such a person is situated in transcendence and is
self-controlled. He sees everything—whether it be pebbles, stones or gold—as
the same.
PURPORT
Book knowledge without realization of the Supreme Truth is
useless. This is stated as follows:
ataù çré-kåñëa-nämädi na bhaved grähyam indriyaiù
sevonmukhe hi jihvädau svayam eva sphuraty adaù.
"No one can understand the transcendental nature of the name,
form, quality and pastimes of Çré Kåñëa through his materially contaminated
senses. Only when one becomes spiritually saturated by transcendental service
to the Lord are the transcendental name, form, quality and pastimes of the Lord
revealed to him." (Padma Puräëa)
This Bhagavad-gétä is the science of Kåñëa consciousness. No one can become
Kåñëa conscious simply by mundane scholarship. One must be fortunate enough to
associate with a person who is in pure consciousness. A Kåñëa conscious person
has realized knowledge, by the grace of Kåñëa, because he is satisfied with
pure devotional service. By realized knowledge, one becomes perfect. By
transcendental knowledge one can remain steady in his convictions, but by mere
academic knowledge one can be easily deluded and confused by apparent
contradictions. It is the realized soul who is actually self-controlled because
he is surrendered to Kåñëa. He is transcendental because he has nothing to do
with mundane scholarship. For him mundane scholarship and mental speculation,
which may be as good as gold to others, are of no greater value than pebbles or
stones.
Bg 6.9
TEXT
9
TEXT
SauôiNMa}aaYauRdaSaqNaMaDYaSQaÜeZYabNDauzu
)
SaaDauZviPa c PaaPaezu SaMabuiÖivRiXaZYaTae )) 9 ))
suhån-miträry-udäséna-
madhyastha-dveñya-bandhuñu
sädhuñv api ca päpeñu
sama-buddhir viçiñyate
suhåt—by nature a
well-wisher; mitra—benefactor with affection; ari—enemy; udäséna—neutral
between the belligerents; madhyastha—mediator
between the belligerents; dveñya—envious; bandhuñu—among the relatives or well-wishers; sädhuñu—unto the pious; api—as
well as; ca—and; päpeñu—unto
the sinners; sama-buddhiù—having equal
intelligence; viçiñyate—is far advanced.
TRANSLATION
A person is said to be still further advanced when he regards
all—the honest well-wisher, friends and enemies, the envious, the pious, the
sinner and those who are indifferent and impartial—with an equal mind.
Bg 6.10
TEXT
10
TEXT
YaaeGaq YauÅqTa
SaTaTaMaaTMaaNa& rhiSa iSQaTa" )
Wk-ak-I YaTaictaaTMaa iNaraXaqrPairGa]h" )) 10 ))
yogé yuïjéta satatam
ätmänaà rahasi sthitaù
ekäké yata-cittätmä
niräçér aparigrahaù
yogé—a
transcendentalist; yuïjéta—must concentrate in Kåñëa
consciousness; satatam—constantly; ätmänam—himself (by the body, mind and self); rahasi—in a secluded place; sthitaù—being
so situated; ekäké—alone; yata-cittätmä—always
careful in mind; niräçéù—without being attracted
by anything else; aparigrahaù—free from the
feeling of possessiveness.
TRANSLATION
A transcendentalist should always try to concentrate his mind on
the Supreme Self; he should live alone in a secluded place and should always
carefully control his mind. He should be free from desires and feelings of
possessiveness.
PURPORT
Kåñëa is realized in different degrees as Brahman, Paramätmä and
the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Kåñëa consciousness means, concisely, to be
always engaged in the transcendental loving service of the Lord. But those who
are attached to the impersonal Brahman or the localized Supersoul are also
partially Kåñëa conscious, because impersonal Brahman is the spiritual ray of
Kåñëa and Supersoul is the all-pervading partial expansion of Kåñëa. Thus the
impersonalist and the meditator are also indirectly Kåñëa conscious. A directly
Kåñëa conscious person is the topmost transcendentalist because such a devotee
knows what is meant by Brahman or Paramätmä. His knowledge of the Absolute
Truth is perfect, whereas the impersonalist and the meditative yogé are imperfectly Kåñëa conscious.
Nevertheless, all of these are instructed herewith to be constantly engaged in their particular pursuits so that they may come to the highest perfection sooner or later. The first business of a transcendentalist is to keep the mind always on Kåñëa. One should always think of Kåñëa and not forget Him even for a moment. Concentration of the mind on the Supreme is called samädhi or trance. In order to concentrate the mind, one should always remain in seclusion and avoid disturbance by external objects. He should be very careful to accept favorable and reject unfavorable conditions that affect his realization. And, in perfect determination, he should not hanker after unnecessary material things that entangle him by feelings of possessiveness.
All these perfections and precautions are perfectly executed when one is directly in Kåñëa consciousness because direct Kåñëa consciousness means self-abnegation, wherein there is very little chance for material possessiveness. Çréla Rüpa Gosvämé characterizes Kåñëa consciousness in this way:
anäsaktasya viñayän yathärham upayuïjataù
nirbandhaù kåñëa-sambandhe yuktaà vairägyam ucyate
präpaïcikatayä buddhyä hari-sambandhi-vastunaù
mumukñubhiù parityägo vairägyaà phalgu kathyate.
(Bhakti-rasämåta-sindhu 2.255–256)
"When one is not attached to anything, but at the same time
accepts everything in relation to Kåñëa, one is rightly situated above
possessiveness. On the other hand, one who rejects everything without knowledge
of its relationship to Kåñëa is not as complete in his renunciation."
A Kåñëa conscious person well knows that everything belongs to
Kåñëa, and thus he is always free from feelings of personal possession. As
such, he has no hankering for anything on his own personal account. He knows
how to accept things in favor of Kåñëa consciousness and how to reject things
unfavorable to Kåñëa consciousness. He is always aloof from material things
because he is always transcendental, and he is always alone, having nothing to
do with persons not in Kåñëa consciousness. Therefore a person in Kåñëa
consciousness is the perfect yogé.
Bg
6.11, Bg 6.12, Bg 6.11-12
TEXTS
11–12
TEXT
éucaE deXae
Pa[iTaïaPYa iSQarMaaSaNaMaaTMaNa" )
NaaTYauiC^\Ta& NaaiTaNaqc& cEl/aiJaNaku-XaaetarMa( )) 11 ))
Ta}aEk-aGa]& MaNa" k*-Tva YaTaictaeiNd]Yai§-Ya" )
oPaivXYaaSaNae YauHJYaaÛaeGaMaaTMaivéuÖYae )) 12 ))
çucau deçe pratiñöhäpya
sthiram äsanam ätmanaù
näty-ucchritaà näti-nécaà
cailäjina-kuçottaram
tatraikägraà manaù kåtvä
yata-cittendriya-kriyaù
upaviçyäsane yuïjyäd
yogam ätma-viçuddhaye
çucau—in
sanctified; deçe—in the land; pratiñöhäpya—placing; sthiram—firm;
äsanam—seat; ätmanaù—self-dependant;
na—not; ati—too; ucchritam—high; na—nor; ati—too; nécam—low; caila-ajna—soft cloth and deerskin; kuçottaram—kuça grass; tatra—thereupon;
ekägram—one attention; manaù—mind;
kåtvä—doing so; yata-citta—controlling
the mind; indriya—senses; kriyaù—activities;
upaviçya—sitting on; äsane—on
the seat; yuïjyät—execute; yogam—yoga practice; ätma—heart;
viçuddhaye—for clarifying.
TRANSLATION
To practice yoga, one should go to a secluded place and should lay
kuça-grass on the ground and then cover it with a deerskin and a soft cloth.
The seat should neither be too high nor too low and should be situated in a
sacred place. The yogé should then sit on it very firmly and should practice
yoga by controlling the mind and the senses, purifying the heart and fixing the
mind on one point.
PURPORT
"Sacred place" refers to places of pilgrimage. In India
the yogés, the transcendentalists or the devotees
all leave home and reside in sacred places such as Prayäg, Mathurä, Våndävana,
Håñékeça, and Hardwar and in solitude practice yoga where
the sacred rivers like the Yamunä and the Ganges flow. But often this is not
possible, especially for Westerners. The so-called yoga societies
in big cities may be successful in earning material benefit, but they are not
at all suitable for the actual practice of yoga. One
who is not self-controlled and whose mind is not undisturbed cannot practice
meditation. Therefore, in the Båhan-Näradéya Puräëa it
is said that in the Kali-yuga (the present yuga or
age) when people in general are short-lived, slow in spiritual realization and
always disturbed by various anxieties, the best means of spiritual realization
is chanting the holy name of the Lord.
harer näma harer näma harer nämaiva kevalam
kalau nästy eva nästy eva nästy eva gatir anyathä.
"In this age of quarrel and hypocrisy the only means of
deliverance is chanting the holy name of the Lord. There is no other way. There
is no other way. There is no other way."
Bg
6.13, Bg 6.14, Bg 6.13-14
TEXTS
13–14
TEXT
SaMa&
k-aYaiXaraeGa]qv& DaarYaàcl&/ iSQar" )
SaMPa[e+Ya NaaiSak-aGa]& Sv& idXaêaNavl/aek-YaNa( )) 13 ))
Pa[XaaNTaaTMaa ivGaTa>aqb]Røcairv]Tae iSQaTa" )
MaNa" Sa&YaMYa MaiÀtaae Yau¢- AaSaqTa MaTPar" )) 14 ))
samaà käya-çiro-grévaà
dhärayann acalaà sthiraù
samprekñya näsikägraà svaà
diçaç cänavalokayan
praçäntätmä vigata-bhér
brahmacäri-vrate sthitaù
manaù saàyamya mac-citto
yukta äséta mat-paraù
samam—straight; käya-çiraù—body and head; grévam—neck;
dhärayan—holding; acalam—unmoved;
sthiraù—still; samprekñya—looking;
näsikä—nose; agram—tip;
svam—own; diçaù—all
sides; ca—also; anavalokayan—not
seeing; praçänta—unagitated; ätmä—mind; vigata-bhéù—devoid
of fear; brahmacäri-vrate—in the vow of celibacy;
sthitaù—situated; manaù—mind;
saàyamya—completely subdued; mat—unto Me (Kåñëa); cittaù—concentrated;
yuktaù—actual yogé;
äséta—being so; mat—unto
Me; paraù—ultimate goal.
TRANSLATION
One should hold one’s body, neck and head erect in a straight line
and stare steadily at the tip of the nose. Thus with an unagitated, subdued
mind, devoid of fear, completely free from sex life, one should meditate upon
Me within the heart and make Me the ultimate goal of life.
PURPORT
The goal of life is to know Kåñëa, who is situated within the
heart of every living being as Paramätmä, the four-handed Viñëu form. The yoga process is practiced in order to discover and see
this localized form of Viñëu, and not for any other purpose. The localized
Viñëu-mürti is the plenary representation of Kåñëa dwelling within one’s heart.
One who has no program to realize this Viñëu-murti is uselessly engaged in
mock-yoga practice and is certainly wasting his
time. Kåñëä is the ultimate goal of life, and the Viñëu-murti situated in one’s
heart is the object of yoga practice. To realize
this Viñëu-murti within the heart, one has to observe complete abstinence from
sex life; therefore one has to leave home and live alone in a secluded place,
remaining seated as mentioned above. One cannot enjoy sex life daily at home or
elsewhere and attend a so-called yoga class and
thus become a yogé. One has to practice
controlling the mind and avoiding all kinds of sense gratification, of which
sex life is the chief. In the rules of celibacy written by the great sage
Yäjïavalkya it is said:
karmaëä manasä väcä sarvävasthäsu sarvadä
sarvatra maithuëa-tyägo brahmacaryaà pracakñate.
"The vow of brahmacarya is meant to help one completely abstain from sex
indulgence in work, words and mind—at all times, under all circumstances, and
in all places." No one can perform correct yoga practice
through sex indulgence. Brahmacarya is taught,
therefore, from childhood when one has no knowledge of sex life. Children at
the age of five are sent to the guru-kula, or the
place of the spiritual master, and the master trains the young boys in the
strict discipline of becoming brahmacärés. Without
such practice, no one can make advancement in any yoga, whether
it be dhyäna, jïäna or bhakti.
One who, however, follows the rules and regulations of married life,
having sexual relationship only with his wife (and that also under regulation),
is also called brahmacäré. Such a restrained
householder brahmacäré may be accepted in the bhakti school, but the jïäna and
dhyäna schools do not admit even householder brahmacärés. They require complete abstinence without
compromise. In the bhakti school, a householder brahmacäré is allowed controlled sex life because the
cult of bhakti-yoga is so powerful that one
automatically loses sexual attraction, being engaged in the superior service of
the Lord. In the Bhagavad-gétä it is said:
viñayä vinivartante nirähärasya dehinaù
rasa-varjaà raso ’py asya paraà dåñövä nivartate
Whereas others are forced to restrain themselves from sense
gratification, a devotee of the Lord automatically refrains because of superior
taste. Other than the devotee, no one has any information of that superior
taste.
Vigatabhéù. One cannot
be fearless unless one is fully in Kåñëa consciousness. A conditioned soul is
fearful due to his perverted memory, his forgetfulness of his eternal
relationship with Kåñëa. The Bhägavatam says, bhayaà dvitéyäbhiniveçataù syäd éçäd apetasya viparyayo
‘småtiù: Kåñëa consciousness is the only basis for fearlessness.
Therefore, perfect practice is possible for a person who is Kåñëa conscious.
And since the ultimate goal of yoga practice is
to see the Lord within, a Kåñëa conscious person is already the best of all yogés. The principles of the yoga
system mentioned herein are different from those of the popular
so-called yoga societies.
Bg 6.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
YauÅàev&
SadaTMaaNa& YaaeGaq iNaYaTaMaaNaSa" )
XaaiNTa& iNavaR<aParMaa& MaTSa&SQaaMaiDaGaC^iTa )) 15 ))
yuïjann evaà sadätmänaà
yogé niyata-mänasaù
çäntià nirväëa-paramäà
mat-saàsthäm adhigacchati
yuïjan—practicing
like this; evam—as mentioned above; sadä—constantly; ätmänam—body,
mind and soul; yogé—the mystic transcendentalist;
niyata-mänasaù—regulated mind; çäntim—peace; nirväëa-paramäm—cessation
of material existence; mat-saàsthäm—in the
spiritual sky (the kingdom of God); adhigacchati—does
attain.
TRANSLATION
Thus practicing control of the body, mind and activities, the
mystic transcendentalist attains to the kingdom of God [or the abode of Kåñëa]
by cessation of material existence.
PURPORT
The ultimate goal in practicing yoga is
now clearly explained. Yoga practice is not meant
for attaining any kind of material facility; it is to enable the cessation of
all material existence. One who seeks an improvement in health or aspires after
material perfection is no yogé according to Bhagavad-gétä. Nor does cessation of material existence
entail one’s entering into "the void," which is only a myth. There is
no void anywhere within the creation of the Lord. Rather, the cessation of
material existence enables one to enter into the spiritual sky, the abode of
the Lord. The abode of the Lord is also clearly described in the Bhagavad-gétä as that place where there is no need of
sun, moon, nor electricity. All the planets in the spiritual kingdom are
self-illuminated like the sun in the material sky. The kingdom of God is
everywhere, but the spiritual sky and the planets thereof are called paraà dhäma, or superior abodes.
A consummate yogé, who is perfect in understanding Lord Kåñëa, as is clearly stated herein (mat-cittaù, mat-paraù, mat-sthänam) by the Lord Himself, can attain real peace and can ultimately reach His supreme abode, the Kåñëa-loka known as Goloka Våndävana. In the Brahma-saàhitä it is clearly stated (goloka eva nivasaty akhilätma-bhütaù) that the Lord, although residing always in His abode called Goloka, is the all-pervading Brahman and the localized Paramätmä as well by dint of His superior spiritual energies. No one can reach the spiritual sky or enter into the eternal abode (Vaikuëöha Goloka Våndävana) of the Lord without the proper understanding of Kåñëa and His plenary expansion Viñëu. Therefore a person working in Kåñëa consciousness is the perfect yogé, because his mind is always absorbed in Kåñëa’s activities. Sa vai manaù kåñëa-padäravindayoù. In the Vedas also we learn: tam eva viditvätimåtyum eti: "One can overcome the path of birth and death only by understanding the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa." In other words, perfection of the yoga system is the attainment of freedom from material existence and not some magical jugglery or gymnastic feats to befool innocent people.
Bg 6.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
NaaTYaénTaSTau
YaaeGaae_iSTa Na cEk-aNTaMaNaénTa" )
Na caiTaSvPanXaql/SYa JaaGa]Taae NaEv caJauRNa )) 16 ))
näty-açnatas ’tu yogo ’sti
na caikäntam anaçnataù
na cäti-svapna-çélasya
jägrato naiva cärjuna
na—never; ati—too much; açnataù—of
one who eats so; tu—but; yogaù—linking
with the Supreme; asti—there is; na—nor; ca—also; ekäntam—very low; anaçnataù—abstaining
from eating; na—nor; ca—also;
ati—too much; svapna-çélasya—of
one who sleeps too much; jägrataù—or one who
keeps night watch too much; na—not; eva—ever; ca—and; arjuna—O Arjuna.
TRANSLATION
There is no possibility of one’s becoming a yogé, O Arjuna, if one
eats too much, or eats too little, sleeps too much or does not sleep enough.
PURPORT
Regulation of diet and sleep is recommended herein for the yogés. Too much eating means eating more than is
required to keep the body and soul together. There is no need for men to eat
animals because there is an ample supply of grains, vegetables, fruits and
milk. Such simple foodstuff is considered to be in the mode of goodness
according to the Bhagavad-gétä. Animal food is
for those in the mode of ignorance. Therefore, those who indulge in animal
food, drinking, smoking and eating food which is not first offered to Kåñëa
will suffer sinful reactions because of eating only polluted things. Bhuïjate te tv aghaà papa ye pacanty ätma-käraëät. Anyone
who eats for sense pleasure, or cooks for himself, not offering his food to
Kåñëa, eats only sin. One who eats sin and eats more than is allotted to him
cannot execute perfect yoga. It is best that one
eat only the remnants of foodstuff offered to Kåñëa. A person in Kåñëa
consciousness does not eat anything which is not first offered to Kåñëa.
Therefore, only the Kåñëa conscious person can attain perfection in yoga practice. Nor can one who artificially abstains
from eating, manufacturing his own personal process of fasting, practice yoga. The Kåñëa conscious person observes fasting as it
is recommended in the scriptures. He does not fast or eat more than is
required, and he is thus competent to perform yoga practice.
One who eats more than required will dream very much while sleeping, and he
must consequently sleep more than is required. One should not sleep more than
six hours daily. One who sleeps more than six hours out of twenty-four is
certainly influenced by the mode of ignorance. A person in the mode of ignorance
is lazy and prone to sleep a great deal. Such a person cannot perform yoga.
Bg 6.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
Yau¢-aharivharSYa
Yau¢-ceíSYa k-MaRSau )
Yau¢-SvPanavbaeDaSYa YaaeGaae >aviTa du"%ha )) 17 ))
yuktähära-vihärasya
yukta-ceñöasya karmasu
yukta-svapnävabodhasya
yogo bhavati duùkha-hä
yukta—regulated; ähära—eating; vihärasya—recreation;
yukta—regulated; ceñöasya—of
one who works for maintenance; karmasu—in
discharging duties; yukta—regulated; svapna-avabodhasya—regulated sleep and wakefulness; yogaù—practice of yoga; bhavati—becomes;
duùkha-hä—diminishing pains.
TRANSLATION
He who is temperate in his habits of eating, sleeping, working and
recreation can mitigate all material pains by practicing the yoga system.
PURPORT
Extravagance in the matter of eating, sleeping, defending and
mating—which are demands of the body—can block advancement in the practice of yoga. As far as eating is concerned, it can be
regulated only when one is practiced to take and accept prasädam,
sanctified food. Lord Kåñëa is offered, according to the Bhagavad-gétä (Bg. 9.26), vegetables, flowers, fruits,
grains, milk, etc. In this way, a person in Kåñëa consciousness becomes
automatically trained not to accept food not meant for human consumption, or
which is not in the category of goodness. As far as sleeping is concerned, a
Kåñëa conscious person is always alert in the discharge of his duties in Kåñëa
consciousness, and therefore any unnecessary time spent sleeping is considered
a great loss. A Kåñëa conscious person cannot bear to pass a minute of his life
without being engaged in the service of the Lord. Therefore, his sleeping is
kept to a minimum. His ideal in this respect is Çréla Rüpa Gosvämé, who was
always engaged in the service of Kåñëa and who could not sleep more than two hours
a day, and sometimes not even that. Öhäkura Haridäsa would not even accept prasädam nor even sleep for a moment without finishing
his daily routine of chanting with his beads three hundred thousand names. As
far as work is concerned, a Kåñëa conscious person does not do anything which
is not connected with Kåñëa’s interest, and thus his work is always regulated
and is untainted by sense gratification. Since there is no question of sense
gratification, there is no material leisure for a person in Kåñëa consciousness.
And because he is regulated in all his work, speech, sleep, wakefulness and all
other bodily activities, there is no material misery for him.
Bg 6.18
TEXT
18
TEXT
Yada
iviNaYaTa& ictaMaaTMaNYaevaviTaïTae )
iNaSPa*h" SavRk-aMae>Yaae Yau¢- wTYauCYaTae Tada )) 18 ))
yadä viniyataà cittam
ätmany evävatiñöhate
nispåhaù sarva-kämebhyo
yukta ity ucyate tadä
yadä—when; viniyatam—particularly disciplined; cittam—the mind and its activities; ätmani—in the Transcendence; eva—certainly;
avatiñöhate—becomes situated; nispåhaù—devoid of; sarva—all
kinds of; kämebhyaù—material desires; yuktaù—well situated in yoga;
iti—thus; ucyate—is said to be; tadä—at that time.
TRANSLATION
When the yogé, by practice of yoga, disciplines his mental
activities and becomes situated in Transcendence—devoid of all material
desires—he is said to have attained yoga.
PURPORT
The activities of the yogé are
distinguished from those of an ordinary person by his characteristic cessation
from all kinds of material desires—of which sex is the chief. A perfect yogé is so well disciplined in the activities of the
mind that he can no longer be disturbed by any kind of material desire. This
perfectional stage can automatically be attained by persons in Kåñëa
consciousness, as is stated in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam (9.4.18–20):
sa vai manaù kåñëa-padäravindayor vacäàsi vaikuëöha-guëänavarëane
karau harer mandira-märjanädiñu çrutià cakäräcyuta-sat-kathodaye
mukunda-liìgälaya-darçane dåçau tad-bhåtyagätra-sparçe ’ìga-saìgamam
ghräëaà ca tat-päda-saroja-saurabhe çrémat tulasyä rasanäà tad-arpite
pädau hareù kñetra-padänusarpaëe çiro håñékeça-padäbhivandane
kämaà ca däsye na tu käma-kämyayä yathottama-çloka-janäçrayä ratiù
"King Ambaréña first of all engaged his mind on the lotus
feet of Lord Kåñëa; then, one after another, he engaged his words in describing
the transcendental qualities of the Lord, his hands in mopping the temple of
the Lord, his ears in hearing of the activities of the Lord, his eyes in seeing
the transcendental forms of the Lord, his body in touching the bodies of the
devotees, his sense of smell in smelling the scents of the lotus flower offered
to the Lord, his tongue in tasting the tulasé
leaf offered at the lotus feet of the Lord, his legs in going to places of
pilgrimage and the temple of the Lord, his head in offering obeisances unto the
Lord and his desires in executing the mission of the Lord. All these
transcendental activities are quite befitting a pure devotee."
This transcendental stage may be inexpressible subjectively by the
followers of the impersonalist path, but it becomes very easy and practical for
a person in Kåñëa consciousness, as is apparent in the above description of the
engagements of Mahäräja Ambaréña. Unless the mind is fixed on the lotus feet of
the Lord by constant remembrance, such transcendental engagements are not
practical. In the devotional service of the Lord, therefore, these prescribed
activities are called arcanä, or engaging all the
senses in the service of the Lord. The senses and the mind require engagements.
Simple abnegation is not practical. Therefore, for people in general—especially
those who are not in the renounced order of life—transcendental engagement of
the senses and the mind as described above is the perfect process for
transcendental achievement, which is called yukta
in the Bhagavad-gétä.
Bg 6.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
YaQaa dqPaae
iNavaTaSQaae Nae®Tae SaaePaMaa SMa*Taa )
YaaeiGaNaae YaTaictaSYa YauÅTaae YaaeGaMaaTMaNa" )) 19 ))
yathä dépo niväta-stho
neìgate sopamä småtä
yogino yata-cittasya
yuïjato yogam ätmanaù
yathä—as; dépaù—a lamp; nivätasthaù—in
a place without wind; na—does not; iìgate—waver; sä upamä—compared
to that; småtä—likened; yoginaù—of
the yogé; yata-cittasya—whose
mind is controlled; yuïjataù—constantly engaged
in; yogam—meditation; ätmanaù—on
Transcendence.
TRANSLATION
As a lamp in a windless place does not waver, so the
transcendentalist, whose mind is controlled, remains always steady in his
meditation on the transcendent Self.
PURPORT
A truly Kåñëa conscious person, always absorbed in Transcendence,
in constant undisturbed meditation on his worshipable Lord, is as steady as a
lamp in a windless place.
Bg
6.20, Bg 6.21, Bg 6.22, Bg 6.23, Bg 6.20-23
TEXTS
20–23
TEXT
Ya}aaeParMaTae
icta& iNaåÖ& YaaeGaSaevYaa )
Ya}a cEvaTMaNaaTMaaNa& PaXYaàaTMaiNa TauZYaiTa )) 20 ))
Sau%MaaTYaiNTak&- Yatad(buiÖGa]aùMaTaqiNd]YaMa( )
veita Ya}a Na cEvaYa& iSQaTaêl/iTa TatvTa" )) 21 ))
Ya& l/Bßa caPar& l/a>a& MaNYaTae NaaiDak&- TaTa" )
YaiSMaiNSQaTaae Na du"%eNa Gauå<aaiPa ivcaLYaTae )) 22 ))
Ta& ivÛaÕu"%Sa&YaaeGaivYaaeGa& YaaeGaSa&ijTaMa( )) 23 ))
yatroparamate cittaà
niruddhaà yoga-sevayä
yatra caivätmanätmänaà
paçyann ätmani tuñyati
sukham ätyantikaà yat tad
buddhi-grähyam aténdriyam
vetti yatra na caiväyaà
sthitaç calati tattvataù
yaà labdhvä cäparaà läbhaà
manyate nädhikaà tataù
yasmin sthito na duùkhena
guruëäpi vicälyate
taà vidyäd duùkha-saàyoga-
viyogaà yoga-saàjïitam
yatra—in that
state of affairs; uparamate—when one feels
transcendental happiness; cittam—mental
activities; niruddham—restrained from matter; yoga-sevayä—by performance of yoga;
yatra—in that; ca—also; eva—certainly; ätmanä—by
the pure mind; ätmänam—self; paçyan—realizing the position; ätmani—in
the self; tuñyati—becomes satisfied; sukham—happiness; ätyantikam—supreme;
yat—in which; tat—that;
buddhi—intelligence; grähyam—acceptable;
aténdriyam—transcendental; vetti—knows; yatra—wherein;
na—never; ca—also; eva—certainly; ayam—in
this; sthitaù—situated; calati—moves;
tattvataù—from the truth; yam—that
which; labdhvä—by attainment; ca—also; aparam—any
other; läbham—gain; manyate—does
not mind; na—never; adhikam—more
than that; tataù—from that; yasmin—in which; sthitaù—being
situated; na—never; duùkhena—by
miseries; guruëäpi—even though very difficult; vicälyate—becomes shaken; tam—that;
vidyät—you must know; duùkha-saàyoga—miseries
of material contact; viyogam—extermination; yoga-samjïitam—trance in yoga.
TRANSLATION
The stage of perfection is called trance, or samädhi, when one’s
mind is completely restrained from material mental activities by practice of
yoga. This is characterized by one’s ability to see the self by the pure mind
and to relish and rejoice in the self. In that joyous state, one is situated in
boundless transcendental happiness and enjoys himself through transcendental
senses. Established thus, one never departs from the truth, and upon gaining
this he thinks there is no greater gain. Being situated in such a position, one
is never shaken, even in the midst of greatest difficulty. This indeed is
actual freedom from all miseries arising from material contact.
PURPORT
By practice of yoga one becomes
gradually detached from material concepts. This is the primary characteristic
of the yoga principle. And after this, one
becomes situated in trance, or samädhi which
means that the yogé realizes the Supersoul
through transcendental mind and intelligence, without any of the misgivings of
identifying the self with the Superself. Yoga practice
is more or less based on the principles of the Pataïjali system. Some
unauthorized commentators try to identify the individual soul with the
Supersoul, and the monists think this to be liberation, but they do not
understand the real purpose of the Pataïjali system of yoga.
There is an acceptance of transcendental pleasure in the Pataïjali system,
but the monists do not accept this transcendental pleasure out of fear of
jeopardizing the theory of oneness. The duality of knowledge and knower is not
accepted by the nondualist, but in this verse transcendental pleasure—realized
through transcendental senses—is accepted. And this is corroborated by the
Pataïjali Muni, the famous exponent of the yoga system.
The great sage declares in his Yoga-sütras:
puruñärtha-çünyänäà guëänäà pratiprasavaù kaivalyaà svarüpa-pratiñöhä vä
citi-çaktir iti.
This citi-çakti, or internal potency, is transcendental. Puruñärtha means material religiosity, economic development, sense gratification and, at the end, the attempt to become one with the Supreme. This "oneness with the Supreme" is called kaivalyam by the monist. But according to Pataïjali, this kaivalyam is an internal, or transcendental, potency by which the living entity becomes aware of his constitutional position. In the words of Lord Caitanya, this state of affairs is called ceto-darpaëa-märjanam, or clearance of the impure mirror of the mind. This "clearance" is actually liberation, or bhava-mahädävägni-nirväpaëam. The theory of nirväëa—also preliminary—corresponds with this principle. In the Bhägavatam this is called svarüpeëa vyavasthitiù. The Bhagavad-gétä also confirms this situation in this verse.
After nirväëa, or material cessation, there is the
manifestation of spiritual activities, or devotional service of the Lord, known
as Kåñëa consciousness. In the words of the Bhägavatam,
svarüpeëa vyavasthitiù: this is the "real life of the living
entity." Mäyä, or illusion, is the condition
of spiritual life contaminated by material infection. Liberation from this
material infection does not mean destruction of the original eternal position
of the living entity. Pataïjali also accepts this by his words kaivalyam svarüpa-pratiñöhä vä citi-çaktir iti. This citi-çakti or transcendental pleasure, is real life.
This is confirmed in the Vedänta-sütras as änandamayo ’bhyäsät. This natural transcendental
pleasure is the ultimate goal of yoga and is
easily achieved by execution of devotional service, or bhakti-yoga.
Bhaktiyoga will be vividly described in the Seventh Chapter of Bhagavad-gétä.
In the yoga system, as described in this chapter, there are two kinds of samädhi, called samprajïäta-samädhi and asamprajïäta-samädhi. When one becomes situated in the transcendental position by various philosophical researches, it is called samprajïäta-samädhi. In the asamprajïäta-samädhi there is no longer any connection with mundane pleasure, for one is then transcendental to all sorts of happiness derived from the senses. When the yogé is once situated in that transcendental position, he is never shaken from it. Unless the yogé is able to reach this position, he is unsuccessful. Today’s so-called yoga practice, which involves various sense pleasures, is contradictory. A yogé indulging in sex and intoxication is a mockery. Even those yogés who are attracted by the siddhis (perfections) in the process of yoga are not perfectly situated. If the yogés are attracted by the by-products of yoga, then they cannot attain the stage of perfection, as is stated in this verse. Persons, therefore, indulging in the make-show practice of gymnastic feats or siddhis should know that the aim of yoga is lost in that way.
The best practice of yoga in this age is Kåñëa consciousness, which is not
baffling. A Kåñëa conscious person is so happy in his occupation that he does
not aspire after any other happiness. There are many impediments, especially in
this age of hypocrisy, to practicing haöha-yoga,
dhyäna-yoga, and jïäna-yoga, but there is
no such problem in executing karma-yoga or bhakti-yoga.
As long as the material body exists, one has to meet the demands of the body, namely eating, sleeping, defending and mating. But a person who is in pure bhakti-yoga or in Kåñëa consciousness does not arouse the senses while meeting the demands of the body. Rather, he accepts the bare necessities of life, making the best use of a bad bargain, and enjoys transcendental happiness in Kåñëa consciousness. He is callous toward incidental occurrences—such as accidents, disease, scarcity and even the death of a most dear relative—but he is always alert to execute his duties in Kåñëa consciousness or bhakti-yoga. Accidents never deviate him from his duty. As stated in the Bhagavad-gétä, ägamäpäyino ’nityäs täàs titikñasva bhärata. He endures all such incidental occurences because he knows that they come and go and do not affect his duties. In this way he achieves the highest perfection in yoga practice.
Bg 6.24
TEXT
24
TEXT
Sa iNaêYaeNa
Yaae¢-VYaae YaaeGaae_iNaivR<aceTaSaa )
SaªLPaPa[>avaNk-aMaa&STYa¤-a SavaRNaXaezTa" )
MaNaSaEveiNd]YaGa]aMa& iviNaYaMYa SaMaNTaTa" )) 24 ))
sa niçcayena yoktavyo
yogo ’nirviëëa-cetasä
saìkalpa-prabhavän kämäàs
tyaktvä sarvän açeñataù
manasaivendriya-grämaà
viniyamya samantataù
saù—that yoga system; niçcayena—with
firm determination; yoktavyaù—must be practiced; yogaù—in such practice; anirviëëa-cetasä—without
deviation; saìkalpa—material desires; prabhavän—born of; kämän—sense
gratification; tyaktvä—giving up; sarvän—all; açeñatah—completely;
manasä—by the mind; eva—certainly;
indriya-grämam—the full set of senses; viniyamya—regulating; samantataù—from
all sides.
TRANSLATION
One should engage oneself in the practice of yoga with undeviating
determination and faith. One should abandon, without exception, all material
desires born of false ego and thus control all the senses on all sides by the
mind.
PURPORT
The yoga practitioner should be
determined and should patiently prosecute the practice without deviation. One
should be sure of success at the end and pursue this course with great
perserverance, not becoming discouraged if there is any delay in the attainment
of success. Success is sure for the rigid practitioner. Regarding bhakti-yoga, Rupa Gosvämé says:
utsähän niçcayäd dhairyät tat tat karma-pravartanät
saìga-tyägät satovåtteù ñaòbhir bhaktiù prasidhyati
"The process of bhakti-yoga can
be executed successfully with full-hearted enthusiasm, perseverance, and
determination by following the prescribed duties in the association of devotees
and by engaging completely in activities of goodness."
As for determination, one should follow the example of the sparrow
who lost her eggs in the waves of the ocean. A sparrow laid her eggs on the
shore of the ocean, but the big ocean carried away the eggs on its waves. The
sparrow became very upset and asked the ocean to return her eggs. The ocean did
not even consider her appeal. So the sparrow decided to dry up the ocean. She
began to pick out the water in her small beak, and everyone laughed at her for
her impossible determination. The news of her activity spread, and at last
Garuòa, the gigantic bird carrier of Lord Viñëu, heard it. He became
compassionate toward his small sister bird, and so he came to see the sparrow.
Garuòa was very pleased by the determination of the small sparrow, and he
promised to help. Thus Garuòa at once asked the ocean to return her eggs lest
he himself take up the work of the sparrow. The ocean was frightened at this,
and returned the eggs. Thus the sparrow became happy by the grace of Garuòa.
Similarly, the practice of yoga, especially bhakti-yoga in Kåñëa consciousness, may appear to be a very difficult job. But if anyone follows the principles with great determination, the Lord will surely help, for God helps those who help themselves.
Bg 6.25
TEXT
25
TEXT
XaNaE"
XaNaEåParMaed(buÖya Da*iTaGa*hqTaYaa )
AaTMaSa&SQa& MaNa" k*-Tva Na ik-iÄdiPa icNTaYaeTa( )) 25 ))
çanaiù çanair uparamed
buddhyä dhåti-gåhétayä
ätma-saàsthaà manaù kåtvä
na kiïcid api cintayet
çanaiù—gradually; çanaiù—step by step; uparamet—hesitated;
buddhyä—by intelligence; dhåti-gåhétayä—carrying
the conviction; ätma-saàstham—placed in
transcendence; manaù—mind; kåtvä—doing so; na—nothing;
kiïcit—anything else; api—even;
cintayet—be thinking of.
TRANSLATION
Gradually, step by step, with full conviction, one should become
situated in trance by means of intelligence, and thus the mind should be fixed
on the Self alone and should think of nothing else.
PURPORT
By proper conviction and intelligence one should gradually cease
sense activities. This is called pratyähära. The
mind, being controlled by conviction, meditation, and cessation of the senses,
should be situated in trance, or samädhi. At that
time there is no longer any danger of becoming engaged in the material
conception of life. In other words, although one is involved with matter as
long as the material body exists, one should not think about sense
gratification. One should think of no pleasure aside from the pleasure of the
Supreme Self. This state is easily attained by directly practicing Kåñëa
consciousness.
Bg 6.26
TEXT
26
TEXT
YaTaae YaTaae
iNaêl/iTa MaNaêÄl/MaiSQarMa( )
TaTaSTaTaae iNaYaMYaETadaTMaNYaev vXa& NaYaeTa( )) 26 ))
yato yato niçcalati
manaç caïcalam asthiram
tatas tato niyamyaitad
ätmany eva vaçaà nayet
yataù—whatever; yataù—wherever; niçcalati—verily
agitated; manaù—the mind; caïcalam—flickering;
asthiram—unsteady; tataù—from
there; tataù—and thereafter; niyamya—regulating; etat—this;
ätmani—in the self; eva—certainly;
vaçam—control; nayet—must
bring in.
TRANSLATION
From whatever and wherever the mind wanders due to its flickering
and unsteady nature, one must certainly withdraw it and bring it back under the
control of the Self.
PURPORT
The nature of the mind is flickering and unsteady. But a
self-realized yogé has to control the mind; the
mind should not control him. One who controls the mind (and therefore the
senses as well) is called gosvämé, or svämé, and one who is controlled by the mind is called godäsa, or the servant of the senses. A gosvämé knows the standard of sense happiness. In
transcendental sense happiness, the senses are engaged in the service of
Håñékeça or the supreme owner of the senses—Kåñëa. Serving Kåñëa with purified
senses is called Kåñëa consciousness. That is the way of bringing the senses
under full control. What is more, that is the highest perfection of yoga practice.
Bg 6.27
TEXT
27
TEXT
Pa[XaaNTaMaNaSa&
ùeNa& YaaeiGaNa& Sau%MautaMaMa( )
oPaEiTa XaaNTarJaSa& b]ø>aUTaMak-LMazMa( )) 27 ))
praçänta-manasaà hy enaà
yoginaà sukham uttamam
upaiti çänta-rajasaà
brahma-bhütam akalmañam
praçänta—mind fixed
on the lotus feet of Kåñëa; manasam—of one whose
mind is so fixed; hi—certainly; enam—this; yoginam—the yogé; sukham—happiness; uttamam—the highest; upaiti—attains;
çänta-rajasam—pacified passion; brahma-bhütam—liberated by identification with the
Absolute; akalmañam—freed from all past sinful
reaction.
TRANSLATION
The yogé whose mind is fixed on Me verily attains the highest
happiness. By virtue of his identity with Brahman, he is liberated; his mind is
peaceful, his passions are quieted, and he is freed from sin.
PURPORT
Brahma-bhüta is the
state of being free from material contamination and situated in the
transcendental service of the Lord. Mad-bhaktim labhate
paräm (Bg. 18.54). One cannot remain in the quality of Brahman, the
Absolute, until one’s mind is fixed on the lotus feet of the Lord. Sa vai manaù kåñëa-padäravindayoù. To be always engaged
in the transcendental loving service of the Lord, or to remain in Kåñëa
consciousness, is to be factually liberated from the mode of passion and all
material contamination.
Bg 6.28
TEXT
28
TEXT
YauÅàev&
SadaTMaaNa& YaaeGaq ivGaTak-LMaz" )
Sau%eNa b]øSa&SPaXaRMaTYaNTa& Sau%MaénuTae )) 28 ))
yuïjann evaà sadätmänaà
yogé vigata-kalmañaù
sukhena brahma-saàsparçam
atyantaà sukham açnute
yuïjan—thus being
engaged in yoga practice; evam—thus;
sadä—always; ätmänam—self;
yogé—one who is in touch with the Supreme Self; vigata—is freed from; kalmañaù—all
material contamination; sukhena—in transcendental
happiness; brahma-saàsparçam—being in constant
touch with the Supreme; atyantam—highest; sukham—happiness; açnute—attains.
TRANSLATION
Steady in the Self, being freed from all material contamination,
the yogé achieves the highest perfectional stage of happiness in touch with the
Supreme Consciousness.
PURPORT
Self-realization means knowing one’s constitutional position in
relationship to the Supreme. The individual soul is part and parcel of the
Supreme, and his position is to render transcendental service to the Lord. This
transcendental contact with the Supreme is called brahma-saàsparça.
Bg 6.29
TEXT
29
TEXT
SavR>aUTaSQaMaaTMaaNa&
SavR>aUTaaiNa caTMaiNa )
wR+aTae YaaeGaYau¢-aTMaa SavR}a SaMadXaRNa" )) 29 ))
sarva-bhüta-stham ätmänaà
sarva-bhütäni cätmani
ékñate yoga-yuktätmä
sarvatra sama-darçanaù
sarva-bhüta-stham—situated in
all beings; ätmänam—the Supersoul; sarva—all; bhütäni—entities;
ca—also; ätmani—in
the Self; ékñate—does see; yoga-yukta-ätmä—one who is dovetailed in Kåñëa
consciousness; sarvatra—everywhere; sama-darçanaù—seeing equally.
TRANSLATION
A true yogé observes Me in all beings, and also sees every being
in Me. Indeed, the self-realized man sees Me everywhere.
PURPORT
A Kåñëa conscious yogé is the
perfect seer because he sees Kåñëa, the Supreme, situated in everyone’s heart
as Supersoul (Paramätmä). Éçvaraù sarva-bhütänäà
håd-deçe ’rjuna tiñöhati. The Lord in His Paramätmä feature is situated
within both the heart of the dog and that of a brähmaëa.
The perfect yogé knows that the Lord is
eternally transcendental and is not materially affected by His presence in
either a dog or a brähmaëa. That is the supreme
neutrality of the Lord. The individual soul is also situated in the individual
heart, but he is not present in all hearts. That is the distinction between the
individual soul and the Supersoul. One who is not factually in the practice of yoga cannot see so clearly. A Kåñëa conscious person
can see Kåñëa in the heart of both the believer and nonbeliever. In the småti this is confirmed as follows: ätatatväc ca mätåtväd ätmä hi paramo hariù.
The Lord, being the source of all beings, is like the mother and the maintainer. As the mother is neutral to all different kinds of children, the Supreme Father (or Mother) is also. Consequently the Supersoul is always in every living being. Outwardly, also, every living being is situated in the energy of the Lord. As will be explained in the Seventh Chapter, the Lord has, primarily, two energies—the spiritual (or superior) and the material (or inferior). The living entity, although part of the superior energy, is conditioned by the inferior energy; the living entity is always in the Lord’s energy. Every living entity is situated in Him in one way or another. The yogé sees equally because he sees that all living entities, although in different situations according to the results of fruitive work, in all circumstances remain the servants of God. While in the material energy, the living entity serves the material senses; and while in spiritual energy, he serves the Supreme Lord directly. In either case the living entity is the servant of God. This vision of equality is perfect in a person in Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 6.30
TEXT
30
TEXT
Yaae Maa&
PaXYaiTa SavR}a Sav| c MaiYa PaXYaiTa )
TaSYaah& Na Pa[<aXYaaiMa Sa c Mae Na Pa[<aXYaiTa )) 30 ))
yo mäà paçyati sarvatra
sarvaà ca mayi paçyati
tasyähaà na praëaçyämi
sa ca me na praëaçyati
yaù—whoever; mäm—Me; paçyati—sees; sarvatra—everywhere; sarvam—everything;
ca—and; mayi—in Me;
paçyati—he sees; tasya—his;
aham—I; na—not; praëaçyämi—am lost; saù—he;
ca—also; me—to Me; na—nor; praëaçyati—is
lost.
TRANSLATION
For one who sees Me everywhere and sees everything in Me, I am never
lost, nor is he ever lost to Me.
PURPORT
A person in Kåñëa consciousness certainly sees Lord Kåñëa
everywhere, and he sees everything in Kåñëa. Such a person may appear to see
all separate manifestations of the material nature, but in each and every instance
he is conscious of Kåñëa, knowing that everything is the manifestation of
Kåñëa’s energy. Nothing can exist without Kåñëa, and Kåñëa is the Lord of
everything—this is the basic principle of Kåñëa consciousness.
Kåñëa consciousness is
the development of love of Kåñëa—a position transcendental even to material
liberation. It is the stage beyond self-realization at which the devotee
becomes one with Kåñëa in the sense that Kåñëa becomes everything for the
devotee, and the devotee becomes full in loving Kåñëa. An intimate relationship
between the Lord and the devotee then exists. In that stage, the living entity
attains his immortality. Nor is the Personality of Godhead ever out of the
sight of the devotee. To merge in Kåñëa is spiritual annihilation. A devotee
takes no such risk. It is stated in the Brahma-saàhitä:
premäïjana-cchurita-bhakti-vilocanena
santaù sadaiva hådayeñu vilokayanti
yaà çyämasundaram acintya-guëa-svarüpaà
govindam ädi-puruñaà tam ahaà bhajämi
“I worship the primeval Lord, Govinda, who is always seen by the
devotee whose eyes are anointed with the pulp of love. He is seen in His
eternal form of Çyämasundara situated within the heart of the devotee."
(Bs. 5.38)
At this stage, Lord Kåñëa never disappears from the sight of the
devotee, nor does the devotee ever lose sight of the Lord. In the case of a yogé who sees the Lord as Paramätmä within the heart,
the same applies. Such a yogé turns into a pure
devotee and cannot bear to live for a moment with out seeing the Lord within
himself.
Bg 6.31
TEXT
31
TEXT
SavR>aUTaiSQaTa&
Yaae Maa& >aJaTYaek-TvMaaiSQaTa" )
SavRQaa vTaRMaaNaae_iPa Sa YaaeGaq MaiYa vTaRTae )) 31 ))
sarva-bhüta-sthitaà yo mäà
bhajaty ekatvam ästhitaù
sarvathä vartamäno ’pi
sa yogé mayi vartate
sarva-bhüta-sthitam—situated in
everyone’s heart; yaù—he who; mäm—unto Me; bhajati—serves
in devotional service; ekatvam—oneness; ästhitaù—thus situated; sarvathä—in
all respects; vartamänaù—being situated; api—in spite of; saù—he; yogé—transcendentalist; mayi—unto
Me; vartate—remains.
TRANSLATION
The yogé who knows that I and the Supersoul within all creatures
are one worships Me and remains always in Me in all circumstances.
PURPORT
A yogé who is practicing meditation
on the Supersoul sees within himself the plenary portion of Kåñëa as Viñëu—with
four hands, holding conchshell, wheel, club and lotus flower. The yogé should know that Viñëu is not different from
Kåñëa. Kåñëa in this form of Supersoul is situated in everyone’s heart.
Furthermore, there is no difference between the innumerable Supersouls present
in the innumerable hearts of living entities. Nor is there a difference between
a Kåñëa conscious person always engaged in the transcendental loving service of
Kåñëa and a perfect yogé engaged in meditation on
the Supersoul. The yogé in Kåñëa
consciousness—even though he may be engaged in various activities while in
material existence—remains always situated in Kåñëa. This is confirmed in the Bhakti-rasämåta-sindhu of Çréla Rüpa Gosvämé: nikhileñu avasthäsu jévanmukta sa ucyate. A devotee of
the Lord, always acting in Kåñëa consciousness, is automatically liberated. In
the Närada-païcarätra this is confirmed in this
way:
dik-kälädy-anavacchinne kåñëe ceto vidhäya ca
tanmayo bhavati kñipraà jévo brahmaëi yojayet.
"By concentrating one’s attention on the transcendental form
of Kåñëa, who is all-pervading and beyond time and space, one becomes absorbed
in thinking of Kåñëa and then attains the happy state of transcendental
association with Him."
Kåñëa consciousness is the highest stage of trance in yoga practice. This very understanding that Kåñëa is
present as Paramätmä in everyone’s heart makes the yogé
faultless. The Vedas confirm this inconceivable
potency of the Lord as follows:
eko ’pi san bahudhä yo ’vabhäti
aiçvaryäd rüpam ekaà ca süryavad bahudheyate.
"Viñëu is one, and yet He is certainly all-pervading. By His
inconceivable potency, in spite of His one form, He is present everywhere. As
the sun, He appears in many places at once."
Bg 6.32
TEXT
32
TEXT
AaTMaaEPaMYaeNa
SavR}a SaMa& PaXYaiTa Yaae_JauRNa )
Sau%& va Yaid va du"%& Sa YaaeGaq ParMaae MaTa" )) 32 ))
ätmaupamyena sarvatra
samaà paçyati yo ’rjuna
sukhaà vä yadi vä duùkhaà
sa yogé paramo mataù
ätma—self; aupamyena—by comparison; sarvatra—everywhere;
samam—equality; paçyati—sees;
yaù—he who; arjuna—O
Arjuna; sukham—happiness; vä—or;
yadi—if; vä—or; duùkham—distress; saù—such;
yogé—transcendentalist; paramaù—perfect;
mataù—considered.
TRANSLATION
He is a perfect yogé who, by comparison to his own self, sees the
true equality of all beings, both in their happiness and distress, O Arjuna!
PURPORT
One who is Kåñëa conscious is a perfect yogé;
he is aware of everyone’s happiness and distress by dint of his own personal
experience. The cause of the distress of a living entity is forgetfulness of
his relationship with God. And the cause of happiness is knowing Kåñëa to be
the supreme enjoyer of all the activities of the human being. Kåñëa is the
proprietor of all lands and planets. The perfect yogé
is the sincerest friend of all living entities. He knows that the living being
who is conditioned by the modes of material nature is subjected to the
threefold material miseries due to forgetfulness of his relationship with
Kåñëa. Because one in Kåñëa consciousness is happy, he tries to distribute the
knowledge of Kåñëa everywhere. Since the perfect yogé tries
to broadcast the importance of becoming Kåñëa conscious, he is the best
philanthropist in the world, and he is the dearest servitor of the Lord. Na tasmät kaçcid me priyakåt tamaù. In other words, a
devotee of the Lord always looks to the welfare of all living entities, and in
this way he is factually the friend of everyone. He is the best yogé because he does not desire perfection in yoga for his personal benefit, but tries for others also.
He does not envy his fellow living entities. Here is a contrast between a pure
devotee of the Lord and a yogé interested only in
his personal elevation. The yogé who has
withdrawn to a secluded place in order to meditate perfectly may not be as
perfect as a devotee who is trying his best to turn every man toward Kåñëa
consciousness.
Bg 6.33
TEXT
33
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac
Yaae_Ya& YaaeGaSTvYaa Pa[ae¢-" SaaMYaeNa MaDauSaUdNa )
WTaSYaah& Na PaXYaaiMa cÄl/TvaiTSQaiTa& iSQaraMa( )) 33 ))
arjuna
uväca
yo ’yaà yogas tvayä proktaù
sämyena madhusüdana
etasyähaà na paçyämi
caïcalatvät sthitià sthiräm
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna said;
yaù—the system; ayam—this;
yogaù—mysticism; tvayä—by
You; proktaù—described; sämyena—generally;
madhusüdana—O killer of the demon Madhu; etasya—of this; aham—I; na—do not; paçyämi—see; caïcalatvät—due to being restless; sthitim—situation; sthiräm—stable.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said: O Madhusüdana, the system of yoga which you have
summarized appears impractical and unendurable to me, for the mind is restless
and unsteady.
PURPORT
The system of mysticism described by Lord Kåñëa to Arjuna
beginning with the words çucau deçe and ending
with yogé paramaù is here being rejected by
Arjuna out of a feeling of inability. It is not possible for an ordinary man to
leave home and go to a secluded place in the mountains or jungles to practice yoga in this age of Kali. The present age is
characterized by a bitter struggle for a life of short duration. People are not
serious about self-realization even by simple, practical means, and what to
speak of this difficult yoga system, which
regulates the mode of living, the manner of sitting, selection of place, and
detachment of the mind from material engagements. As a practical man, Arjuna
thought it was impossible to follow this system of yoga,
even though he was favorably endowed in many ways. He belonged to the
royal family and was highly elevated in terms of numerous qualities; he was a
great warrior, he had great longevity, and, above all, he was the most intimate
friend of Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Five thousand years
ago, Arjuna had much better facilities then we do now, yet he refused to accept
this system of yoga. In fact, we do not find any
record in history of his practicing it at any time. Therefore this system must
be considered generally impossible in this age of Kali. Of course it may be
possible for some very few, rare men, but for the people in general it is an
impossible proposal. If this were so five thousand years ago, then what of the
present day? Those who are imitating this yoga system
in different so-called schools and societies, although complacent, are
certainly wasting their time. They are completely in ignorance of the desired
goal.
Bg 6.34
TEXT
34
TEXT
cÄl&/ ih
MaNa" k*-Z<a Pa[MaaiQa bl/vÕ*!Ma( )
TaSYaah& iNaGa]h& MaNYae vaYaaeirv SauduZk-rMa( )) 34 ))
caïcalaà hi manaù kåñëa
pramäthi balavad dåòham
tasyähaà nigrahaà manye
väyor iva su-duñkaram
caïcalam—flickering;
hi—certainly; manaù—mind;
kåñëa—O Kåñëa; pramäthi—agitating;
balavat—strong; dåòham—obstinate;
tasya—its; aham—I; nigraham—subduing; manye—think;
väyoù—of the wind; iva—like;
suduñkaram—difficult.
TRANSLATION
For the mind is restless, turbulent, obstinate and very strong, O
Kåñëa, and to subdue it is, it seems to me, more difficult than controlling the
wind.
PURPORT
The mind is so strong and obstinate that it sometimes overcomes
the intelligence, although mind is supposed to be subservient to the
intelligence. For a man in the practical world who has to fight so many opposing
elements, it is certainly very difficult to control the mind. Artificially, one
may establish a mental equilibrium toward both friend and enemy, but ultimately
no worldly man can do so, for this is more difficult than controlling the
raging wind. In the Vedic literatures it is said:
ätmänaà rathinaà viddhi çaréraà ratham eva ca
buddhintu särathià viddhi manaù pragraham eva ca
indriyäëi hayänähur viñayäàs teñu gocarän
ätmendriya-mano-yukto bhoktety ähur manéñiëaù.
"The individual is the passenger in the car of the material
body, and intelligence is the driver. Mind is the driving instrument, and the
senses are the horses. The self is thus the enjoyer or sufferer in the
association of the mind and senses. So it is understood by great
thinkers." Intelligence is supposed to direct the mind, but the mind is so
strong and obstinate that it often overcomes even one’s own intelligence. Such
a strong mind is supposed to be controlled by the practice of yoga, but such practice is never practical for a
worldly person like Arjuna. And what can we say of modern man? The simile used
here is appropriate: one cannot capture the blowing wind. And it is even more
difficult to capture the turbulent mind. The easiest way to control the mind,
as suggested by Lord Caitanya, is chanting "Hare Kåñëa," the great mantra for deliverance, in all humility. The method
prescribed is sa vai manaù kåñëa-padäravindayoù: one
must engage one’s mind fully in Kåñëa. Only then will there remain no other
engagements to agitate the mind.
Bg 6.35
TEXT
35
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
ASa&XaYa& Mahabahae MaNaae duiNaRGa]h& cl/Ma( )
A>YaaSaeNa Tau k-aENTaeYa vEraGYae<a c Ga*ùTae )) 35 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
asaàçayaà mahä-bäho
mano durnigrahaà calam
abhyäsena tu kaunteya
vairägyeëa ca gåhyate
çré bhagavän uväca—the
Personality of Godhead said; asaàçayam—undoubtedly;
mahä-bäho—O mighty-armed one; manaù—mind; durnigraham—difficult
to curb; calam—flickering; abhyäsena—by practice; tu—but;
kaunteya—O son of Kunté; vairägyeëa—by
detachment; ca—also; gåhyate—can
be so controlled.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: O mighty-armed son of Kunté, it is
undoubtedly very difficult to curb the restless mind, but it is possible by
constant practice and by detachment.
PURPORT
The difficulty of controlling the obstinate mind, as expressed by
Arjuna, is accepted by the Personality of Godhead. But at the same time He
suggests that by practice and detachment it is possible. What is that practice?
In the present age no one can observe strict rules and regulations, such as
placing oneself in a sacred place, focusing the mind on the Supersoul,
restraining the senses and mind, observing celibacy, remaining alone, etc. By
the practice of Kåñëa consciousness, however, one engages in nine types of
devotional service to the Lord. The first and foremost of such devotional
engagements is hearing about Kåñëa. This is a very powerful transcendental
method for purging the mind of all misgivings. The more one hears about Kåñëa,
the more one becomes enlightened and detached from everything that draws the
mind away from Kåñëa. By detaching the mind from activities not devoted to the
Lord, one can very easily learn vairägya. Vairägya
means detachment from matter and engagement of the mind in spirit. Impersonal
spiritual detachment is more difficult than attaching the mind to the
activities of Kåñëa. This is practical because by hearing about Kåñëa one
becomes automatically attached to the Supreme Spirit. This attachment is called
pareçänubhüti spiritual satisfaction. It is just
like the feeling of satisfaction a hungry man has for every morsel of food he
eats. Similarly, by discharge of devotional service, one feels transcendental
satisfaction as the mind becomes detached from material objectives. It is
something like curing a disease by expert treatment and appropriate diet.
Hearing of the transcendental activities of Lord Kåñëa is therefore expert
treatment for the mad mind, and eating the foodstuff offered to Kåñëa is the
appropriate diet for the suffering patient. This treatment is the process of Kåñëa
consciousness.
Bg 6.36
TEXT
36
TEXT
ASa&YaTaaTMaNaa
YaaeGaae duZPa[aPa wiTa Mae MaiTa" )
vXYaaTMaNaa Tau YaTaTaa XaKYaae_vaáuMauPaaYaTa" )) 36 ))
asaàyatätmanä yogo
duñpräpa iti me matiù
vaçyätmanä tu yatatä
çakyo ’väptum upäyataù
asaàyata—unbridled; ätmanä—by the mind; yogaù—self-realization;
duñpräpaù—difficult to obtain; iti—thus; me—My; matiù—opinion; vaçya—controlled;
ätmanä—by the mind; tu—but;
yatatä—while endeavoring; çakyaù—practical;
aväptum—to achieve; upäyataù—appropriate
means.
TRANSLATION
For one whose mind is unbridled, self-realization is difficult
work. But he whose mind is controlled and who strives by right means is assured
of success. That is My opinion.
PURPORT
The Supreme Personality of Godhead declares that one who does not
accept the proper treatment to detach the mind from material engagement can
hardly achieve success in self-realization. Trying to practice yoga while engaging the mind in material enjoyment is
like trying to ignite a fire while pouring water on it. Similarly, yoga practice without mental control is a waste of
time. Such a show of yoga practice may be
materially lucrative, but it is useless as far as spiritual realization is
concerned. Therefore, the mind must be controlled by engaging it constantly in
the transcendental loving service of the Lord. Unless one is engaged in Kåñëa
consciousness, he cannot steadily control the mind. A Kåñëa conscious person
easily achieves the result of yoga practice
without separate endeavor, but a yoga practitioner
cannot achieve success without becoming Kåñëa conscious.
Bg 6.37
TEXT
37
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac
AYaiTa" é[ÖYaaePaeTaae YaaeGaaÀil/TaMaaNaSa" )
APa[aPYa YaaeGaSa&iSaiÖ& k-a& GaiTa& k*-Z<a GaC^iTa )) 37 ))
arjuna
uväca
ayatiù çraddhayopeto
yogäc calita-mänasaù
apräpya yoga-saàsiddhià
käà gatià kåñëa gacchati
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna said;
ayatiù—unsuccessful transcendentalist; çraddhayä—with faith; upetaù—engaged;
yogät—from the mystic link; calita—deviated; mänasaù—of
one who has such a mind; apräpya—failing; yoga-saàsiddhim—highest perfection in mysticism; käm—which; gatim—destination;
kåñëa—O Kåñëa; gacchati—achieves.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said: What is the destination of the man of faith who does
not persevere, who in the beginning takes to the process of self-realization
but who later desists due to worldly-mindedness and thus does not attain
perfection in mysticism?
PURPORT
The path of self-realization or mysticism is described in the Bhagavad-gétä. The basic principle of self-realization
is knowledge that the living entity is not this material body but that he is
different from it and that his happiness is in eternal life, bliss and
knowledge. These are transcendental, beyond both body and mind.
Self-realization is sought by the path of knowledge, the practice of the
eightfold system or by bhakti-yoga. In each of
these processes one has to realize the constitutional position of the living
entity, his relationship with God, and the activities whereby he can
reestablish the lost link and achieve the highest perfectional stage of Kåñëa consciousness.
Following any of the above-mentioned three methods, one is sure to reach the
supreme goal sooner or later. This was asserted by the Lord in the Second
Chapter: even a little endeavor on the transcendental path offers a great hope
for deliverance. Out of these three methods, the path of bhakti-yoga is especially suitable for this age because
it is the most direct method of God realization. To be doubly assured, Arjuna
is asking Lord Kåñëa to confirm His former statement. One may sincerely accept
the path of self-realization, but the process of cultivation of knowledge and
the practice of the eightfold yoga system are
generally very difficult for this age. Therefore, despite constant endeavor,
one may fail for many reasons. First of all, one may not be following the
process. To pursue the transcendental path is more or less to declare war on
illusory energy. Consequently, whenever a person tries to escape the clutches
of the illusory energy, she tries to defeat the practitioner by various allurements.
A conditioned soul is already allured by the modes of material energy, and
there is every chance of being allured again, even while performing
transcendental disciplines. This is called yogät
calita-mänasaù: deviation from the transcendental path. Arjuna is
inquisitive to know the results of deviation from the path of self-realization.
Bg 6.38
TEXT
38
TEXT
k-iÀàae>aYaiv>a]íiX^àa>a]iMav
NaXYaiTa )
APa[iTaïae Mahabahae ivMaU!ae b]ø<a" PaiQa )) 38 ))
kaccin nobhaya-vibhrañöaç
chinnäbhram iva naçyati
apratiñöho mahä-bäho
vimüòho brahmaëaù pathi
kaccit—whether; na—not; ubhaya—both; vibhrañöaù—deviated from; chinna—fallen;
abhram—cloud; iva—likened;
naçyati—perishes; apratiñöhaù—without
any position; mahä-bäho—O mighty-armed Kåñëa; vimüòhaù—bewildered; brahmaëaù—of
Transcendence; pathi—on the path.
TRANSLATION
O mighty-armed Kåñëa, does not such a man, being deviated from the
path of Transcendence, perish like a riven cloud, with no position in any
sphere?
PURPORT
There are two ways to progress. Those who are materialists have no
interest in Transcendence; therefore they are more interested in material
advancement by economic development, or in promotion to the higher planets by
appropriate work. When one takes to the path of Transcendence, one has to cease
all material activities and sacrifice all forms of so-called material
happiness. If the aspiring transcendentalist fails, then he apparently loses
both ways; in other words, he can enjoy neither material happiness nor
spiritual success. He has no position; he is like a riven cloud. A cloud in the
sky sometimes deviates from a small cloud and joins a big one. But if it cannot
join a big one, then it is blown away by the wind and becomes a nonentity in
the vast sky. The brahmaëaù pathi is the path of
transcendental realization through knowing oneself to be spiritual in essence,
part and parcel of the Supreme Lord who is manifested as Brahman, Paramätmä and
Bhagavän. Lord Çré Kåñëa is the fullest manifestation of the Supreme Absolute
Truth, and therefore one who is surrendered to the Supreme Person is a
successful transcendentalist. To reach this goal of life through Brahman and
Paramätmä realization takes many, many births: Bahünäà
janmanäm ante. Therefore the supermost of transcendental realization is bhakti-yoga or Kåñëa consciousness, the direct method.
Bg 6.39
TEXT
39
TEXT
WTaNMae
Sa&XaYa& k*-Z<a ^etauMahRSYaXaezTa" )
TvdNYa" Sa&XaYaSYaaSYa ^etaa Na ùuPaPaÛTae )) 39 ))
etan me saàçayaà kåñëa
chettum arhasy açeñataù
tvad-anyaù saàçayasyäsya
chettä na hy upapadyate
etat—this is; me—my; saàçayam—doubt; kåñëa—O Kåñëa; chettum—to
dispel; arhasi—requested to do; açeñataù—completely; tvat—Yourself;
anyaù—without; saàçayäsya—of
the doubt; asya—of this; chettä—remover;
na—never; hi—certainly;
upapadyate—to be found.
TRANSLATION
This is my doubt O Kåñëa, and I ask You to dispel it completely.
But for Yourself, no one is to be found who can destroy this doubt.
PURPORT
Kåñëa is the perfect knower of past, present and future. In the
beginning of the Bhagavad-gétä, the Lord said
that all living entities exist individually in the past, that they exist now in
the present, and that they continue to retain individual identity in the
future, even after liberation from the material entanglement. So He has already
cleared up the question of the future of the individual living entity. Now,
Arjuna wants to know of the future of the unsuccessful transcendentalist. No
one is equal to or above Kåñëa, and certainly the so-called great sages and
philosophers who are at the mercy of material nature cannot equal Him.
Therefore the verdict of Kåñëa is the final and complete answer to all doubts
because He knows past, present and future perfectly—but no one knows Him. Kåñëa
and Kåñëa conscious devotees alone can know what is what.
Bg 6.40
TEXT
40
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
PaaQaR NaEveh NaaMau}a ivNaaXaSTaSYa ivÛTae )
Na ih k-LYaa<ak*-Tk-iêÕuGaRiTa& TaaTa GaC^iTa )) 40 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
pärtha naiveha nämutra
vinäças tasya vidyate
na hi kalyäëa-kåt kaçcid
durgatià täta gacchati
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; pärtha—O son of
Prthä; na eva—never is it so; iha—in this material world; na—never;
amutra—in the next life; vinäçaù—destruction;
tasya—his; vidyate—exists;
na—never; hi—certainly;
kalyäëa-kåt—one who is engaged in auspicious
activities; kaçcit—anyone; durgatim—degradation; täta—thereafter;
gacchati—going.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: Son of Påthä, a transcendentalist engaged
in auspicious activities does not meet with destruction either in this world or
in the spiritual world; one who does good, My friend, is never overcome by
evil.
PURPORT
In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam (1.5.17)
Çré Närada Muni instructs Vyäsadeva as follows:
tyaktvä sva-dharmaà caraëämbujaà harer
bhajann apakko ’tha patet tato yadi
yatra kva väbhadram abhüd amuñya kià
ko värtha äpto ’bhajatäà sva-dharmataù
"If someone gives up all material prospects and takes
complete shelter of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, there is no loss or
degradation in any way. On the other hand a nondevotee may fully engage in his
occupational duties and yet not gain anything." For material prospects,
there are many activities both scriptural and customary. A transcendentalist is
supposed to give up all material activities for the sake of spiritual
advancement in life, Kåñëa consciousness. One may argue that by Kåñëa
consciousness one may attain the highest perfection if it is completed, but if
one does not attain such a perfectional stage, then he loses both
materially and spiritually. It is enjoined in the scriptures that one has to
suffer the reaction of not executing prescribed duties; therefore one who fails
to discharge transcendental activities properly becomes subjected to these
reactions. The Bhägavatam assures the
unsuccessful transcendentalist that there need be no worries. Even though he
may be subjected to the reaction of not perfectly executing prescribed duties,
he is still not a loser, because auspicious Kåñëa consciousness is never
forgotten, and one so engaged will continue to be so even if he is lowborn in the
next life. On the other hand, one who simply follows strictly the prescribed
duties need not necessarily attain auspicious results if he is lacking in Kåñëa
consciousness.
The purport may be understood as follows: humanity may be divided
into two sections, namely, the regulated and the nonregulated. Those who are
engaged simply in bestial sense gratifications without knowledge of their next
life or spiritual salvation belong to the nonregulated section. And those who
follow the principles of prescribed duties in the scriptures are classified
amongst the regulated section. The nonregulated section, both civilized and
noncivilized, educated and noneducated, strong and weak, are full of animal
propensities. Their activities are never auspicious because, enjoying the
animal propensities of eating, sleeping, defending and mating, they perpetually
remain in material existence, which is always miserable. On the other hand,
those who are regulated by scriptural injunctions and thus gradually rise to
Kåñëa consciousness certainly progress in life.
Those who are then following the path of auspiciousness can be divided into three sections, namely, 1) the followers of scriptural rules and regulations who are enjoying material prosperity, 2) those who are trying to find out the ultimate liberation from material existence, and 3) those who are devotees in Kåñëa consciousness. Those who are following the rules and regulations of the scriptures for material happiness may be further divided into two classes: those who are fruitive workers and those who desire no fruit for sense gratification. Those who are after fruitive results for sense gratification may be elevated to a higher standard of life—even to the higher planets; but still, because they are not free from material existence, they are not following the truly auspicious path. The only auspicious activities are those which lead one to liberation. Any activity which is not aimed at ultimate self-realization or liberation from the material bodily concept of life is not at all auspicious. Activity in Kåñëa consciousness is the only auspicious activity, and anyone who voluntarily accepts all bodily discomforts for the sake of making progress on the path of Kåñëa consciousness can be called a perfect transcendentalist under severe austerity. And because the eightfold yoga system is directed toward the ultimate realization of Kåñëa consciousness, such practice is also auspicious, and no one who is trying his best in this matter need fear degradation.
Bg 6.41
TEXT
41
TEXT
Pa[aPYa
Pau<Yak*-Taa& l/aek-aNauizTva XaaìTaq" SaMaa" )
éucqNaa& é[qMaTaa& Gaehe YaaeGa>a]íae_i>aJaaYaTae )) 41 ))
präpya puëya-kåtäà lokän
uñitvä çäçvatéù samäù
çucénäà çrématäà gehe
yoga-bhrañöo ’bhijäyate
präpya—after
achieving; puëya-kåtäm—of those who performed
pious activities; lokän—planets; uñitvä—after dwelling; çäçvatéù—many;
samäù—years; çucénäm—of
the pious; çrématäm—of the prosperous; gehe—in the house of; yoga-bhrañöaù—one
who is fallen from the path of self-realization; abhijäyate—takes
his birth.
TRANSLATION
The unsuccessful yogé, after many, many years of enjoyment on the
planets of the pious living entities, is born into a family of righteous
people, or into a family of rich aristocracy.
PURPORT
The unsuccessful yogés are divided
into two classes: one is fallen after very little progress, and one is fallen
after long practice of yoga. The yogé who falls after a short period of practice goes to
the higher planets where pious living entities are allowed to enter. After
prolonged life there, he is sent back again to this planet, to take birth in
the family of a righteous brähmaëa vaiñëava or of
aristocratic merchants.
The real purpose of yoga practice is to achieve the highest perfection of Kåñëa consciousness. But those who do not persevere to such an extent and fail due to material allurements are allowed, by the grace of the Lord, to make full utilization of their material propensities. And after that, they are given opportunities to live prosperous lives in righteous or aristocratic families. Those who are born in such families may take advantage of the facilities and try to elevate themselves to full Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 6.42
TEXT
42
TEXT
AQava
YaaeiGaNaaMaev ku-le/ >aviTa DaqMaTaaMa( )
WTaiÖ dulR/>aTar& l/aeke- JaNMa Yadqd*XaMa( )) 42 ))
atha vä yoginäm eva
kule bhavati dhématäm
etad dhi durlabhataraà
loke janma yad édåçam
athavä—or; yoginäm—of learned transcendentalists; eva—certainly; kule—in
the family of; bhavati—takes birth; dhématäm—of those who are endowed with great wisdom; etat—this; hi—certainly; durlabhataram—very rare; loke—in
this world; janma—birth; yat—that
which; édåçam—like this.
TRANSLATION
Or he takes his birth in a family of transcendentalists who are
surely great in wisdom. Verily, such a birth is rare in this world.
PURPORT
Birth in a family of yogés or
transcendentalists—those with great wisdom—is praised herein because the child
born in such a family receives spiritual impetus from the very beginning of his
life. It is especially the case in the äcärya or gosvämé families. Such families are very learned and
devoted by tradition and training, and thus they become spiritual masters. In
India there are many such äcärya families, but
they have now degenerated due to insufficient education and training. By the
grace of the Lord, there are still families that foster transcendentalists
generation after generation. It is certainly very fortunate to take birth in
such families. Fortunately, both our spiritual master, Oà Viñëupäda Çré Çrémad
Bhaktisiddhänta Sarasvaté Gosvämé Mahäräja, and our humble self, had the
opportunity to take birth in such families, by the grace of the Lord, and both
of us were trained in the devotional service of the Lord from the very
beginning of our lives. Later on we met by the order of the transcendental system.
Bg 6.43
TEXT
43
TEXT
Ta}a Ta&
buiÖSa&YaaeGa& l/>aTae PaaEvRdeihk-Ma( )
YaTaTae c TaTaae >aUYa" Sa&iSaÖaE ku-åNaNdNa )) 43 ))
tatra taà buddhi-saàyogaà
labhate paurva-dehikam
yatate ca tato bhüyaù
saàsiddhau kuru-nandana
tatra—thereupon; tam—that; buddhi-saàyogam—revival
of such consciousness; labhate—regains; paurva—previous; dehikam—bodily
consciousness; yatate—endeavors; ca—also; tataù—thereafter;
bhüyaù—again; saàsiddhau—for
perfection; kuru-nandana—O son of Kuru.
TRANSLATION
On taking such a birth, he again revives the divine consciousness
of his previous life, and he tries to make further progress in order to achieve
complete success, O son of Kuru.
PURPORT
King Bharata, who took his third birth in the family of a good brähmaëa, is an example of good birth for the revival
of previous transcendental consciousness. King Bharata was the Emperor of the
world, and since his time this planet is known among the demigods as
Bhäratavarña. Formerly it was known as Ilävartavarña. The Emperor, at an early
age, retired for spiritual perfection but failed to achieve success. In his
next life he took birth in the family of a good brähmaëa
and was known as Jaòabharata because he always remained secluded and did
not talk to anyone. And later on, he was discovered as the greatest
transcendentalist by King Rahügaëa. From his life it is understood that
transcendental endeavors, or the practice of yoga,
never go in vain. By the grace of the Lord the transcendentalist gets repeated
opportunities for complete perfection in Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 6.44
TEXT
44
TEXT
PaUvaR>YaaSaeNa
TaeNaEv ihYaTae ùvXaae_iPa Sa" )
iJajaSauriPa YaaeGaSYa XaBdb]øaiTavTaRTae )) 44 ))
pürväbhyäsena tenaiva
hriyate hy avaço ’pi saù
jijïäsur api yogasya
çabda-brahmätivartate
pürva—previous; abhyäsena—practice; tena—by
the influence of that; eva—certainly; hriyate—is attracted; hi—surely;
avaçaù—helpless; api—also;
saù—he; jijïäsuù—willing
to know; api—so; yogasya—of
yoga; çabda-brahma—ritualistic principles of
scripture; ativartate—transcends.
TRANSLATION
By virtue of the divine consciousness of his previous life, he
automatically becomes attracted to the yogic principles—even without seeking
them. Such an inquisitive transcendentalist, striving for yoga, stands always
above the ritualistic principles of the scriptures.
PURPORT
Advanced yogés are not very much
attracted to the rituals of the scriptures, but they automatically become
attracted to the yoga principles, which can
elevate them to complete Kåñëa consciousness, the highest yoga perfection. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam
(3.33.8), such disregard of Vedic rituals by the advanced
transcendentalists is explained as follows:
aho bata çvapaco ’to garéyän
yajjihvägre vartate näma tubhyam
tepus tapas te juhuvuù sasnur äryä
brahmänücur näma gåëanti ye te.
"O my Lord! Persons who chant the holy names of Your Lordship
are far, far advanced in spiritual life, even if born in families of
dog-eaters. Such chanters have undoubtedly performed all kinds of austerities
and sacrifices, bathed in all sacred places, and finished all scriptural
studies."
The famous example of this was presented by Lord Caitanya, who
accepted Öhäkur Haridäsa as one of His most important disciples. Although
Öhäkur Haridäsa happened to take his birth in a Moslem family, he was elevated
to the post of nämäcärya by Lord Caitanya due to
his rigidly attended principle of chanting three hundred thousand holy names of
the Lord daily: Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/ Hare Räma, Hare
Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare. And because he chanted the holy name of the Lord
constantly, it is understood that in his previous life he must have passed
through all the ritualistic methods of the Vedas, known
as çabda-brahman. Unless, therefore, one is
purified, one cannot take to the principle of Kåñëa consciousness nor become
engaged in chanting the holy name of the Lord, Hare Kåñëa.
Bg 6.45
TEXT
45
TEXT
Pa[YaÒaÛTaMaaNaSTau
YaaeGaq Sa&éuÖik-iLbz" )
ANaek-JaNMaSa&iSaÖSTaTaae YaaiTa Para& GaiTaMa( )) 45 ))
prayatnäd yatamänas tu
yogé saàçuddha-kilbiñaù
aneka-janma-saàsiddhas
tato yäti paräà gatim
prayatnät—by rigid
practice; yatamänaù—one who endeavors; tu—but; yogé—such a
transcendentalist; saàçuddha—washed off; kilbiñaù—all kinds of sins; aneka—many,
many; janma—births; saàsiddhaù—so
achieved perfection; tataù—thereafter; yäti—attains; paräm—highest;
gatim—destination.
TRANSLATION
But when the yogé engages himself with sincere endeavor in making
further progress, being washed of all contaminations, then ultimately, after
many, many births of practice, he attains the supreme goal.
PURPORT
A person born in a particularly righteous, aristocratic or sacred
family becomes conscious of his favorable condition for executing yoga practice. With determination, therefore, he begins
his unfinished task, and thus he completely cleanses himself of all material
contaminations. When he is finally free from all contaminations, he attains the
supreme perfection—Kåñëa consciousness. Kåñëa consciousness is the perfect
stage of being freed of all contaminations. This is confirmed in the Bhagavad-gétä:
yeñäà tvanta-gataà päpaà janänäà puëya-karmaëäm
te dvandva-moha-nirmuktä bhajante mäà dåòha-vratäù
"After many, many births of executing pious activities, when
one is completely freed from all contaminations, and from all illusory dualities,
one then becomes engaged in the transcendental loving service of the
Lord."
Bg 6.46
TEXT
46
TEXT
TaPaiSv>Yaae_iDak-ae
YaaeGaq jaiNa>Yaae_iPa MaTaae_iDak-" )
k-iMaR>YaêaiDak-ae YaaeGaq TaSMaaÛaeGaq >avaJauRNa )) 46 ))
tapasvibhyo ’dhiko yogé
jïänibhyo ’pi mato ’dhikaù
karmibhyaç cädhiko yogé
tasmäd yogé bhavärjuna
tapasvibhyaù—than the
ascetic; adhikaù—greater; yogé—the
yogé; jïänibhyaù—than
the wise; api—also; mataù—considered;
adhikaù—greater than; karmibhyaù—than
the fruitive worker; ca—also; adhikaù—greater than; yogé—the
yogé; tasmät—therefore;
yogé—a transcendentalist; bhava—just
become; arjuna—O Arjuna.
TRANSLATION
A yogé is greater than the ascetic, greater than the empiricist
and greater than the fruitive worker. Therefore, O Arjuna, in all
circumstances, be a yogé.
PURPORT
When we speak of yoga we refer to
linking up our consciousness with the Supreme Absolute Truth. Such a process is
named differently by various practitioners in terms of the particular method
adopted. When the linking up process is predominantly in fruitive activities,
it is called karma-yoga, when it is predominantly
empirical, it is called jïäna-yoga, and when it
is predominantly in a devotional relationship with the Supreme Lord, it is
called bhakti-yoga. Bhakti-yoga or Kåñëa
consciousness is the ultimate perfection of all yogas, as
will be explained in the next verse. The Lord has confirmed herein the
superiority of yoga, but He has not mentioned
that it is better than bhakti-yoga. Bhakti-yoga
is full spiritual knowledge, and as such, nothing can excel it. Asceticism
without self-knowledge is imperfect. Empiric knowledge without surrender to the
Supreme Lord is also imperfect. And fruitive work without Kåñëa consciousness
is a waste of time. Therefore, the most highly praised form of yoga performance mentioned here is bhakti-yoga, and this is still more clearly explained
in the next verse.
Bg 6.47
TEXT
47
TEXT
YaaeiGaNaaMaiPa
SaveRza& MaÓTaeNaaNTaraTMaNaa )
é[ÖavaN>aJaTae Yaae Maa& Sa Mae Yau¢-TaMaae MaTa" )) 47 ))
yoginäm api sarveñäà
mad-gatenäntar-ätmanä
çraddhävän bhajate yo mäà
sa me yuktatamo mataù
yoginäm—of all yogés; api—also; sarveñäm—all
types of; mat-gatena—abiding in Me; antaù-ätmanä—always thinking of Me within; çraddhävän—in full faith; bhajate—renders
transcendental loving service; yaù—one who; mäm—Me (the Supreme Lord); saù—he;
me—Mine; yuktatamaù—the
greatest yogé; mataù—is
considered.
TRANSLATION
And of all yogés, he who always abides in Me with great faith,
worshiping Me in transcendental loving service, is most intimately united with
Me in yoga and is the highest of all.
PURPORT
The word bhajete is significant
here. Bhajete has its root in the verb bhaj, which is used when there is need of service. The
English word "worship" cannot be used in the same sense as bhaja. Worship means to adore, or to show respect and
honor to the worthy one. But service with love and faith is especially meant
for the Supreme Personality of Godhead. One can avoid worshiping a respectable
man or a demigod and may be called discourteous, but one cannot avoid serving
the Supreme Lord without being thoroughly condemned. Every living entity is
part and parcel of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and thus every living
entity is intended to serve the Supreme Lord by his own constitution. Failing
to do this, he falls down. The Bhägavatam confirms
this as follows:
ya eñäà puruñaà säkñäd ätma-prabhavam éçvaram
na bhajanty avajänanti sthänäd bhrañöä patanty adhaù.
"Anyone who does not render service and neglects his duty
unto the Primeval Lord, who is the source of all living entities, will
certainly fall down from his constitutional position."
In this verse also the word bhajanti
is used. Therefore, bhajanti is applicable to the Supreme Lord only, whereas the word
"worship" can be applied to demigods or to any other common living
entity. The word avajänanti, used in this verse
of Çrémad-Bhägavatam, is also found in the Bhagavad-gétä: avajänanti mäà müòhäù: "Only the
fools and rascals deride the Supreme Personality of Godhead Lord Kåñëa." Such
fools take it upon themselves to write commentaries on the Bhagavad-gétä without an attitude of service to the
Lord. Consequently they cannot properly distinguish between the word bhajanti and the word "worship."
The culmination of all kinds of yoga practices lies in bhakti-yoga. All other yogas are but means to come to the point of bhakti in bhakti-yoga. Yoga actually means bhakti-yoga; all other yogas are progressions toward the destination of bhakti-yoga. From the beginning of karma-yoga to the end of bhakti-yoga is a long way to self-realization. Karma-yoga, without fruitive results, is the beginning of this path. When karma-yoga increases in knowledge and renunciation, the stage is called jïäna-yoga. When jïäna-yoga increases in meditation on the Supersoul by different physical processes, and the mind is on Him, it is called añöäìga-yoga. And, when one surpasses the añöäìga-yoga and comes to the point of the Supreme Personality of Godhead Kåñëa, it is called bhakti-yoga, the culmination. Factually, bhakti-yoga is the ultimate goal, but to analyze bhakti-yoga minutely one has to understand these other yogas. The yogé who is progressive is therefore on the true path of eternal good fortune. One who sticks to a particular point and does not make further progress is called by that particular name: karma-yogé, jïäna-yogé or dhyäna-yogé, räja-yogé, haöha-yogé, etc. If one is fortunate enough to come to the point of bhakti-yoga, it is to be understood that he has surpassed all the other yogas. Therefore, to become Kåñëa conscious is the highest stage of yoga, just as, when we speak of Himalayan, we refer to the world’s highest mountains, of which the highest peak, Mount Everest, is considered to be the culmination.
It is by great fortune
that one comes to Kåñëa consciousness on the path of bhakti-yoga
to become well situated according to the Vedic direction. The ideal yogé concentrates his attention on Kåñëa, who is called
Çyämasundara, who is as beautifully colored as a cloud, whose lotus-like face
is as effulgent as the sun, whose dress is brilliant with jewels and whose body
is flower garlanded. Illuminating all sides is His gorgeous luster, which is
called the brahmajyoti. He incarnates in
different forms such as Räma, Nåsiàha, Varäha and Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality
of Godhead, and He descends like a human being, as the son of Mother Yaçodä,
and He is known as Kåñëa, Govinda and Väsudeva. He is the perfect child,
husband, friend and master, and He is full with all opulences and
transcendental qualities. If one remains fully conscious of these features of
the Lord, he is called the highest yogé.
This stage of highest perfection in yoga can be attained only by bhakti-yoga, as is confirmed in all Vedic literature:
yasya deve parä bhaktir yathä deve tathä gurau.
tasyaite kathitä hy arthäù prakäçante mahätmanaù.
"Only unto those great souls who have implicit faith in both
the Lord and the spiritual master are all the imports of Vedic knowledge
automatically revealed."
Bhaktir asya bhajanaà
tadihämutropädhi nairäsyenämuñmin manaù kalpanam; etad eva naiñkarmyam. “Bhakti
means devotional service to the Lord which is free from desire for
material profit, either in this life or in the next. Devoid of such
inclinations, one should fully absorb the mind in the Supreme. That is the
purpose of naiñkarmya.”
These are some of the means for performance of bhakti or Kåñëa consciousness, the highest perfectional stage of the yoga system.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the Sixth Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of Säìkhya-yoga Brahma-vidyä.
Bg 7. Knowledge of the Absolute
CHAPTER
SEVEN
Knowledge of
the Absolute
Bg 7.1
TEXT
1
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
MaYYaaSa¢-MaNaa" PaaQaR YaaeGa& YauÅNMadaé[Ya" )
ASa&XaYa& SaMaGa]& Maa& YaQaa jaSYaiSa TaC^*<au )) 1 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
mayy äsakta-manäù pärtha
yogaà yuïjan mad-äçrayaù
asaàçayaà samagraà mäà
yathä jïäsyasi tac chåëu
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Lord said; mayi—unto Me; äsakta-manäù—mind
attached; pärtha—O son of Påthä; yogam—self-realization; yuïjan—so
practicing; mat-äçrayaù—in consciousness of Me
(Kåñëa consciousness); asaàçayam—without doubt; samagram—completely; mäm—unto
Me; yathä—as much as; jïäsyasi—you
can know; tat—that; çåëu—try
to hear.
TRANSLATION
Now hear, O son of Påthä [Arjuna], how by practicing yoga in full
consciousness of Me, with mind attached to Me, you can know Me in full, free
from doubt.
PURPORT
In this Seventh Chapter of Bhagavad-gétä, the
nature of Kåñëa consciousness is fully described. Kåñëa is full in all
opulences, and how He manifests such opulences is described herein. Also, four
kinds of fortunate people who become attached to Kåñëa, and four kinds of
unfortunate people who never take to Kåñëa are described in this chapter.
In the first six chapters of Bhagavad-gétä, the living entity has been described as nonmaterial spirit soul which is capable of elevating himself to self-realization by different types of yogas. At the end of the Sixth Chapter, it has been clearly stated that the steady concentration of the mind upon Kåñëa, or in other words Kåñëa consciousness, is the highest form of all yoga. By concentrating one’s mind upon Kåñëa, one is able to know the Absolute Truth completely, but not otherwise. Impersonal brahmajyoti or localized Paramätmä realization is not perfect knowledge of the Absolute Truth because it is partial. Full and scientific knowledge is Kåñëa, and everything is revealed to the person in Kåñëa consciousness. In complete Kåñëa consciousness one knows that Kåñëa is ultimate knowledge beyond any doubts. Different types of yoga are only steppingstones on the path of Kåñëa consciousness. One who takes directly to Kåñëa consciousness automatically knows about brahmajyoti and Paramätmä in full. By practice of Kåñëa consciousness yoga, one can know everything in full—namely the Absolute Truth, the living entities, the material nature, and their manifestations with paraphernalia.
One should therefore begin yoga practice as directed in the last verse of the Sixth Chapter. Concentration of the mind upon Kåñëa the Supreme is made possible by prescribed devotional service in nine different forms, of which çravaëam is the first and most important. The Lord therefore says to Arjuna, "tat çåëu," or "Hear from Me." No one can be a greater authority than Kåñëa, and therefore by hearing from Him one receives the greatest opportunity for progress in Kåñëa consciousness. One has therefore to learn from Kåñëa directly or from a pure devotee of Kåñëa—and not from a nondevotee upstart, puffed up with academic education.
In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam this process of understanding Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the Absolute Truth, is described in the Second Chapter of the First Canto as follows:
çåëvatäà sva-kathäà kåñëaù puëya-çravaëa-kértanaù
hådyantaùstho hy abhadräëi vidbunoti suhåt satäm.
nañöa-präyeñv abhadreñu nityaà bhägavata-sevayä
bhagavaty uttama-çloke bhaktir bhavati naiñöhiké.
tadä rajas-tamo-bhäväù käma-lobhadayaç ca ye
ceta etair anäviddhaà sthitaà sattve prasédati.
evam prasanna-manaso bhagavad-bhakti-yogataù
bhagavat-tattva-vijïänaà mukta-saìgasya jäyate.
bhidyate hådaya-granthiç chidyante sarva-saàçayäù
kñéyante cäsya karmäëi dåñöa evätmanéçvare.
"To hear about Kåñëa from Vedic literatures, or to hear from
Him directly through the Bhagavad-gétä, is itself
righteous activity. And for one who hears about Kåñëa, Lord Kåñëa, who is
dwelling in everyone’s heart, acts as a best-wishing friend and purifies the
devotee who constantly engages in hearing of Him. In this way, a devotee
naturally develops his dormant transcendental knowledge. As he hears more about
Kåñëa from the Bhägavatam and from the devotees,
he becomes fixed in the devotional service of the Lord. By development of
devotional service one becomes freed from the modes of passion and ignorance,
and thus material lusts and avarice are diminished. When these impurities are
wiped away, the candidate remains steady in his position of pure goodness,
becomes enlivened by devotional service and understands the science of God
perfectly. Thus bhakti-yoga severs the hard knot
of material affection and enables one to come at once to the stage of ‘asaàçayaà samagram,’ understanding of the Supreme
Absolute Truth Personality of Godhead." (Bhäg. 1.2.17–21)
Therefore only by hearing from Kåñëa or from His devotee in Kåñëa
consciousness can one understand the science of Kåñëa.
Bg 7.2
TEXT
2
TEXT
jaNa&
Tae_h& SaivjaNaiMad& v+YaaMYaXaezTa" )
YaJjaTva Naeh >aUYaae_NYaJjaTaVYaMaviXaZYaTae )) 2 ))
jïänaà te ’haà sa-vijïänam
idaà vakñyämy açeñataù
yaj jïätvä neha bhüyo ’nyaj
jïätavyam avaçiñyate
jïänam—phenomenal
knowledge; te—unto you; aham—I;
sa—with; vijïänam—noumenal
knowledge; idam—this; vakñyämi—shall
explain; açeñataù—in full; yat—which; jïätvä—knowing;
na—not; iha—in this
world; bhüyaù—further; anyat—anything
more; jïätavyam—knowable; avaçiñyate—remains
to be known.
TRANSLATION
I shall now declare unto you in full this knowledge both
phenomenal and noumenal, by knowing which there shall remain nothing further to
be known.
PURPORT
Complete knowledge includes knowledge of the phenomenal world and
the spirit behind it. The source of both of them is transcendental knowledge.
The Lord wants to explain the above-mentioned system of knowledge because
Arjuna is Kåñëa’s confidential devotee and friend. In the beginning of the
Fourth Chapter this explanation was given by the Lord, and it is again
confirmed here: complete knowledge can be achieved only by the devotee of the
Lord directly from the Lord in disciplic succession. Therefore one should be
intelligent enough to know the source of all knowledge, who is the cause of all
causes and the only object for meditation in all types of yoga practices. When the cause of all causes becomes
known, then everything knowable becomes known, and nothing remains unknown. The
Vedas say, “yasmin vijïäte
sarvam eva vijïatam bhavanti.”
Bg 7.3
TEXT
3
TEXT
MaNauZYaa<aa&
Sahóezu k-iêÛTaiTa iSaÖYae )
YaTaTaaMaiPa iSaÖaNaa& k-iêNMaa& veita TatvTa" )) 3 ))
manuñyäëäà sahasreñu
kaçcid yatati siddhaye
yatatäm api siddhänäà
kaçcin mäà vetti tattvataù
manuñyäëäm—of men; sahasreñu—out of many thousands; kaçcit—someone; yatati—endeavors;
siddhaye—for perfection; yatatäm—of
those so endeavoring; api—indeed; siddhänäm—of those who have achieved perfection; kaçcit—someone; mäm—Me; vetti—does know; tattvataù—in
fact.
TRANSLATION
Out of many thousands among men, one may endeavor for perfection,
and of those who have achieved perfection, hardly one knows Me in truth.
PURPORT
There are various grades of men, and out of many thousands one may
be sufficiently interested in transcendental realization to try to know what is
the self, what is the body, and what is the Absolute Truth. Generally mankind
is simply engaged in the animal propensities, namely eating, sleeping,
defending and mating, and hardly anyone is interested in transcendental
knowledge. The first six chapters of the Gétä are
meant for those who are interested in transcendental knowledge, in
understanding the self, the Superself and the process of realization by jïäna-yoga, dhyäna-yoga, and discrimination of the self
from matter. However, Kåñëa can only be known by persons who are in Kåñëa
consciousness. Other transcendentalists may achieve impersonal Brahman
realization, for this is easier than understanding Kåñëa. Kåñëa is the Supreme
Person, but at the same time He is beyond the knowledge of Brahman and
Paramätmä. The yogés and jïänés
are confused in their attempts to understand Kåñëa, although the
greatest of the impersonalists, Çrépäda Çaìkaräcärya, has admitted in his Gétä commentary that Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality
of Godhead. But his followers do not accept Kåñëa as such, for it is very
difficult to know Kåñëa, even though one has transcendental realization of
impersonal Brahman.
Kåñëa is the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, the cause of all causes, the primeval Lord Govinda. Éçvaraù paramaù kåñëaù sac-cid-änanda-vigrahaù anädir ädir
govindaù sarva-käraëa-käraëam. It is very difficult for the nondevotees
to know Him. Although nondevotees declare that the path of bhakti or devotional service is very easy, they cannot
practice it. If the path of bhakti is so easy, as
the nondevotee class of men proclaim, then why do they take up the difficult
path? Actually the path of bhakti is not easy.
The so-called path of bhakti practiced by
unauthorized persons without knowledge of bhakti may
be easy, but when it is practiced factually according to the rules and
regulations, the speculative scholars and philosophers fall away from the path.
Çréla Rüpa Gosvämé writes in his Bhakti-rasämåta-sindhu:
çruti-småti-puräëädi-païcarätra-vidhià vinä
aikäntiké harer bhaktir utpätäyaiva kalpate.
"Devotional service of the Lord that ignores the authorized
Vedic literatures like the Upaniñads, Puräëas,
Närada-païcarätra, etc., is simply an unnecessary disturbance in
society."
It is not possible for the Brahman realized impersonalist or the
Paramätmä realized yogé to understand Kåñëa the
Supreme Personality of Godhead as the son of mother Yaçodä or the charioteer of
Arjuna. Even the great demigods are sometimes confused about Kåñëa: “muhyanti yat sürayaù,” “mäà tu
veda na kaçcana.” “No one knows Me as I am,” the Lord says. And if one
does know Him, then “sa mahätmä sudurlabhaù.”
“Such a great soul is very rare.” Therefore unless one practices devotional
service to the Lord, he cannot know Kåñëa as He is (tattvataù),
even though one is a great scholar or philosopher. Only the pure
devotees can know something of the inconceivable transcendental qualities in
Kåñëa, in the cause of all causes, in His omnipotence and opulence, and in His
wealth, fame, strength, beauty, knowledge and renunciation, because Kåñëa is
benevolently inclined to His devotees. He is the last word in Brahman
realization, and the devotees alone can realize Him as He is. Therefore it is
said:
ataù çré-kåñëa-nämädi na bhaved grähyam indriyäiù
sevonmukhe hi jihvädau svayam eva sphuraty adaù
"No one can understand Kåñëa as He is by the blunt material
senses. But He reveals Himself to the devotees, being pleased with them for
their transcendental loving service unto Him." (Padma
Puräëa)
Bg 7.4
TEXT
4
TEXT
>aUiMaraPaae_Nal/ae
vaYau" %& MaNaae buiÖrev c )
Ahªar wTaqYa& Mae i>aàa Pa[k*-iTaríDaa )) 4 ))
bhümir äpo ’nalo väyuù
khaà mano buddhir eva ca
ahaìkära itéyaà me
bhinnä prakåtir añöadhä
bhümiù—earth; äpaù—water; analaù—fire; väyuù—air; kham—ether; manaù—mind; buddhiù—intelligence;
eva—certainly; ca—and;
ahaìkäraù—false ego; iti—thus;
iyam—all these; me—My; bhinnä—separated; prakåtiù—energies;
añöadhä—total eight.
TRANSLATION
Earth, water, fire, air, ether, mind, intelligence and false ego—altogether
these eight comprise My separated material energies.
PURPORT
The science of God analyzes the constitutional position of God and
His diverse energies. Material nature is called prakåti,
or the energy of the Lord in His different puruña
incarnations (expansions) as described in the Svatvata
Tantra:
viñëos tu tréëi rüpäëi puruñäkhyäny atho viduù
ekantu mahataù srañöå dvitéyaà tv aëòa-saàsthitam
tåtéyaà sarvabhüta-sthaà täni jïätvä vimucyate
"For material creation, Lord Kåñëa’s plenary expansion assumes
three Viñëus. The first one, Mahä-Viñëu, creates the total material energy,
known as mahat-tattva. The second, Garbhodakaçäyé
Viñëu, enters into all the universes to create diversities in each of them. The
third, Kñérodakaçäyé Viñëu, is diffused as the all-pervading Supersoul in all
the universes and is known as Paramätmä, who is present even within the atoms.
Anyone who knows these three Viñëus can be liberated from material
entanglement."
This material world is a temporary manifestation of one of the
energies of the Lord. All the activities of the material world are directed by
these three Viñëu expansions of Lord Kåñëa. These Puruñas
are called incarnations. Generally one who does not know the science of
God (Kåñëa) assumes that this material world is for the enjoyment of the living
entities and that the living entities are the causes (Puruñas),
controllers and enjoyers of the material energy. According to Bhagavad-gétä this atheistic conclusion is false. In
the verse under discussion it is stated that Kåñëa is the original cause of the
material manifestation. Çrémad-Bhägavatam also
confirms this. The ingredients of the material manifestation are separated
energies of the Lord. Even the brahmajyoti, which
is the ultimate goal of the impersonalists, is a spiritual energy manifested in
the spiritual sky. There are no spiritual diversities in brahmajyoti as there are in the Vaikuëöhalokas, and the
impersonalist accepts this brahmajyoti as the
ultimate eternal goal. The Paramätmä manifestation is also a temporary
all-pervasive aspect of the Kñérodakaçäyé Viñëu. The Paramätmä manifestation is
not eternal in the spiritual world. Therefore the factual Absolute Truth is the
Supreme Personality of Godhead Kåñëa. He is the complete energetic person, and
He possesses different separated and internal energies.
In the material energy,
the principal manifestations are eight, as above mentioned. Out of these, the
first five manifestations, namely earth, water, fire, air and sky, are called
the five gigantic creations or the gross creations, within which the five sense
objects are included. They are the manifestations of physical sound, touch,
form, taste and smell. Material science comprises these ten items and nothing
more. But the other three items, namely mind, intelligence and false ego, are
neglected by the materialists. Philosophers who deal with mental activities are
also not perfect in knowledge because they do not know the ultimate source,
Kåñëa. The false ego—"I am," and "It is mine," which
constitute the basic principle of material existence—includes ten sense organs
for material activities. Intelligence refers to the total material creation,
called the mahat-tattva. Therefore from the eight
separated energies of the Lord are manifest the twenty-four elements of the
material world, which are the subject matter of säìkhya atheistic
philosophy; they are originally offshoots from Kåñëa’s energies and are
separated from Him, but atheistic säìkhya philosophers
with a poor fund of knowledge do not know Kåñëa as the cause of all causes. The
subject matter for discussion in the säìkhya philosophy
is only the manifestation of the external energy of Kåñëa, as it is described
in the Bhagavad-gétä.
Bg 7.5
TEXT
5
TEXT
APareYaiMaTaSTvNYaa&
Pa[k*-iTa& iviÖ Mae ParaMa( )
Jaqv>aUTaa& Mahabahae YaYaed& DaaYaRTae JaGaTa( )) 5 ))
apareyam itas tv anyäà
prakåtià viddhi me paräm
jéva-bhütäà mahä-bäho
yayedaà dhäryate jagat
aparä—inferior; iyam—this; itaù—besides
this; tu—but; anyäm—another;
prakåtim—energy; viddhi—just
try to understand; me—My;
paräm—superior; jéva-bhütäm—the living
entities; mahä-bäho—O mighty-armed one; yayä—by whom; idam—this; dhäryate—being utilized or exploited; jagat—the material world.
TRANSLATION
Besides this inferior nature, O mighty-armed Arjuna, there is a superior
energy of Mine, which are all living entities who are struggling with material
nature and are sustaining the universe.
PURPORT
Here it is clearly mentioned that living entities belong to the
superior nature (or energy) of the Supreme Lord. The inferior energy is matter
manifested in different elements, namely earth, water, fire, air, ether, mind,
intelligence and false ego. Both forms of material nature, namely gross (earth,
etc.) and subtle (mind, etc.), are products of the inferior energy. The living
entities, who are exploiting these inferior energies for different purposes,
are the superior energy of the Supreme Lord, and it is due to this energy that
the entire material world functions. The cosmic manifestation has no power to
act unless it is moved by the superior energy, the living entity. Energies are
always controlled by the energetic, and therefore living entities are always
controlled by the Lord—they have no independant existence. They are never
equally powerful, as unintelligent men think. The distinction between the
living entities and the Lord is described in Çrémad-Bhägavatam
as follows (10.87.30):
aparimitä dhruväs tanubhåto yadi sarva-gatäs
tarhià na çäsyateti niyamo dhruva netarathä
ajani ca yanmayaà tad avimucya niyantå
bhavet samam anujänatäà yad-amataà mata-duñöatayä
"O Supreme Eternal! If the embodied living entities were
eternal and all-pervading like You, then they would not be under Your control.
But if the living entities are accepted as minute energies of Your Lordship,
then they are at once subject to Your supreme control. Therefore real
liberation entails surrender by the living entities to Your control, and that
surrender will make them happy. In that constitutional position only can they
be controllers. Therefore, men with limited knowledge who advocate the monistic
theory that God and the living entities are equal in all respects are actually
misleading themselves and others."
The Supreme Lord Kåñëa is the only controller, and all living
entities are controlled by Him. These living entities are His superior energy
because the quality of their existence is one and the same with the Supreme,
but they are never equal to the Lord in quantity of power. While exploiting the
gross and subtle inferior energy (matter), the superior energy (the living
entity) forgets his real spiritual mind and intelligence. This forgetfulness is
due to the influence of matter upon the living entity. But when the living
entity becomes free from the influence of the illusory material energy, he
attains the stage called mukti, or liberation.
The false ego, under the influence of material illusion, thinks, "I am
matter, and material acquisitions are mine." His actual position is
realized when he is liberated from all material ideas, including the conception
of his becoming one in all respects with God. Therefore one may conclude that
the Gétä confirms the living entity to be only
one of the multi-energies of Kåñëa; and when this energy is freed from material
contamination, it becomes fully Kåñëa conscious, or liberated.
Bg 7.6
TEXT
6
TEXT
WTaÛaeNaqiNa
>aUTaaiNa SavaR<aqTYauPaDaarYa )
Ah& k*-TòSYa JaGaTa" Pa[>av" Pa[l/YaSTaQaa )) 6 ))
etad-yonéni bhütäni
sarväëéty upadhäraya
ahaà kåtsnasya jagataù
prabhavaù pralayas tathä
etat—these two
natures; yonéni—source of birth; bhütäni—everything created; sarväëi—all;
iti—thus; upadhäraya—know;
aham—I; kåtsnasya—all-inclusive;
jagataù—of the world; prabhavaù—source
of manifestation; pralayaù—annihilation; tathä—as well as.
TRANSLATION
Of all that is material and all that is spiritual in this world,
know for certain that I am both its origin and dissolution.
PURPORT
Everything that exists is a product of matter and spirit. Spirit
is the basic field of creation, and matter is created by spirit. Spirit is not
created at a certain stage of material development. Rather, this material world
is manifested only on the basis of spiritual energy. This material body is
developed because spirit is present within matter; a child grows gradually to
boyhood and then to manhood because of that superior energy, spirit soul, being
present. Similarly, the entire cosmic manifestation of the gigantic universe is
developed because of the presence of the Supersoul, Viñëu. Therefore spirit and
matter, which combine together to manifest this gigantic universal form, are
originally two energies of the Lord, and consequently the Lord is the original
cause of everything. A fragmental part and parcel of the Lord, namely, the
living entity, may by manipulation of material energy construct a skyscraper,
factory or city, but he cannot create matter out of nothing, and he certainly
cannot construct a planet or a universe. The cause of the universe is the
Supersoul, Kåñëa, the supreme creator of all individual souls and the original
cause of all causes, as the Kaöha Upaniñad confirms:
nityo nityänäà cetanaç cetanänäm.
Bg 7.7
TEXT
7
TEXT
Mata"
ParTar& NaaNYaiTk-iÄdiSTa DaNaÅYa )
MaiYa SavRiMad& Pa[aeTa& SaU}ae Mai<aGa<aa wv )) 7 ))
mattaù parataraà nänyat
kiïcid asti dhanaïjaya
mayi sarvam idaà protaà
sütre maëi-gaëä iva
mattaù—beyond
Myself; parataram—superior; na—not; anyat—anything
else; kiïcit—something; asti—there
is; dhanaïjaya—O conquerer of wealth; mayi—in Me; sarvam—all
that be; idam—which we see; protam—strung; sütre—on a
thread; maëi-gaëäù—pearls; iva—likened.
TRANSLATION
O conquerer of wealth [Arjuna], there is no Truth superior to Me.
Everything rests upon Me, as pearls are strung on a thread.
PURPORT
There is a common controversy over whether the Supreme Absolute
Truth is personal or impersonal. As far as Bhagavad-gétä
is concerned, the Absolute Truth is the Personality of Godhead Çré Kåñëa, and
this is confirmed in every step. In this verse, in particular, it is stressed
that the Absolute Truth is a person. That the Personality of Godhead is the Supreme
Absolute Truth is also the affirmation of the Brahma-saàhitä:
éçvaraù paramaù kåñëaù sac-cid-änanda-vigrahaù; that is, the Supreme
Absolute Truth Personality of Godhead is Lord Kåñëa, who is the primeval Lord,
the reservoir of all pleasure, Govinda, and the eternal form of complete bliss
and knowledge. These authorities leave no doubt that the Absolute Truth is the
Supreme Person, the cause of all causes. The impersonalist, however, argues on
the strength of the Vedic version given in the Çvetäçvatara
Upaniñad: tato yad uttarataraà tad arüpam anämayaà ya etad vidur amåtäs te
bhavanti athetare duùkham eväpi yanti. "In the material world
Brahmä, the primeval living entity within the universe, is understood to be the
supreme amongst the demigods, human beings and lower animals. But beyond Brahmä
there is the Transcendence who has no material form and is free from all
material contaminations. Anyone who can know Him also becomes transcendental,
but those who do not know Him suffer the miseries of the material world."
The impersonalist puts more stress on the word arüpam. But this arüpam is not impersonal. It indicates the transcendental form of eternity, bliss and knowledge as described in the Brahma-saàhitä quoted above. Other verses in the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad substantiate this as follows:
vedäham etaà puruñaà mahäntam äditya-varëaà tamasaù parastät
tam eva vidvän amåta iha bhavati nänyaù panthä vidyate ayanäya
yasmät paraà näparam asti kiïcid yasmännäëéyo na jyäyo ’sti kiïcit
"I know that Supreme Personality of Godhead who is
transcendental to all material conceptions of darkness. Only he who knows Him
can transcend the bonds of birth and death. There is no way for liberation
other than this knowledge of that Supreme Person.
"There is no truth superior to that Supreme Person because He
is the supermost. He is smaller than the smallest, and He is greater than the
greatest. He is situated as a silent tree, and He illumines the transcendental
sky, and as a tree spreads its roots, He spreads His extensive energies."
From these verses one concludes that the Supreme Absolute Truth is the Supreme Personality of Godhead who is all-pervading by His multi-energies, both material and spiritual.
Bg 7.8
TEXT
8
TEXT
rSaae_hMaPSau
k-aENTaeYa Pa[>aaiSMa XaiXaSaUYaRYaae" )
Pa[<av" SavRvedezu XaBd" %e PaaEåz& Na*zu )) 8 ))
raso ’ham apsu kaunteya
prabhäsmi çaçi-süryayoù
praëavaù sarva-vedeñu
çabdaù khe pauruñaà nåñu
rasaù—taste; aham—I; apsu—in water; kaunteya—O son of Kunté; prabhä
asmi—I am the light; çaçi-süryayoù—in the sun
and the moon; praëavaù—the three letters A.U.M.; sarva—in all; vedeñu—in
the Vedas; çabdaù—sound vibration; khe—in the ether; pauruñam—ability;
nåñu—in man.
TRANSLATION
O son of Kunté [Arjuna], I am the taste of water, the light of the
sun and the moon, the syllable om in the Vedic mantras; I am the sound in ether
and ability in man.
PURPORT
This verse explains how the Lord is all-pervasive by His diverse
material and spiritual energies. The Supreme Lord can be preliminarily
perceived by His different energies, and in this way He is realized
impersonally. As the demigod in the sun is a person and is perceived by his
all-pervading energy, the sunshine, similarly, the Lord, although in His
eternal abode, is perceived by His all-pervading, diffusive energies. The taste
of water is the active principle of water. No one likes to drink sea water
because the pure taste of water is mixed with salt. Attraction for water
depends on the purity of the taste, and this pure taste is one of the energies
of the Lord. The impersonalist perceives the presence of the Lord in water by
its taste, and the personalist also glorifies the Lord for His kindly supplying
water to quench man’s thirst. That is the way of perceiving the Supreme.
Practically speaking, there is no conflict between personalism and
impersonalism. One who knows God knows that the impersonal conception and
personal conception are simultaneously present in everything and that there is
no contradiction. Therefore Lord Caitanya established His sublime doctrine: acintya-bheda and abheda-tattvam—simultaneously
one and different.
The light of the sun and the moon is also originally emanating from the brahmajyoti, which is the impersonal effulgence of the Lord. Similarly praëava or the omkära transcendental sound used in the beginning of every Vedic hymn to address the Supreme Lord also emanates from Him. Because the impersonalists are very much afraid of addressing the Supreme Lord Kåñëa by His innumerable names, they prefer to vibrate the transcendental sound omkära. But they do not realize that omkära is the sound representation of Kåñëa. The jurisdiction of Kåñëa consciousness extends everywhere, and one who knows Kåñëa consciousness is blessed. Those who do not know Kåñëa are in illusion, and so knowledge of Kåñëa is liberation, and ignorance of Him is bondage.
Bg 7.9
TEXT
9
TEXT
Pau<Yaae
GaNDa" Pa*iQaVYaa& c TaeJaêaiSMa iv>aavSaaE )
JaqvNa& SavR>aUTaezu TaPaêaiSMa TaPaiSvzu )) 9 ))
puëyo gandhaù påthivyäà ca
tejaç cäsmi vibhävasau
jévanaà sarva-bhüteñu
tapaç cäsmi tapasviñu
puëyaù—original; gandhaù—fragrance; påthivyäm—in
the earth; ca—also; tejaù—temperature;
ca—also; asmi—I am;
vibhävasau—in the fire; jévanam—life;
sarva—all; bhüteñu—living
entities; tapaù—penance; ca—also;
asmi—I am; tapasviñu—in
those who practice penance.
TRANSLATION
I am the original fragrance of the earth, and I am the heat in
fire. I am the life of all that lives, and I am the penances of all ascetics.
PURPORT
Puëya means that
which is not decomposed; puëya is original.
Everything in the material world has a certain flavor or fragrance, as the
flavor and fragrance in a flower, or in the earth, in water, in fire, in air,
etc. The uncontaminated flavor, the original flavor, which permeates
everything, is Kåñëa. Similarly, everything has a particular original taste,
and this taste can be changed by the mixture of chemicals. So everything
original has some smell, some fragrance, and some taste. Vibhäva means fire. Without fire we cannot run
factories, we cannot cook, etc., and that fire is Kåñëa. The heat in the fire
is Kåñëa. According to Vedic medicine, indigestion is due to a low temperature
in the belly. So even for digestion fire is needed. In Kåñëa consciousness we
become aware that earth, water, fire, air and every active principle, all chemicals
and all material elements are due to Kåñëa. The duration of man’s life is also
due to Kåñëa. Therefore by the grace of Kåñëa, man can prolong his life or
diminish it. So Kåñëa consciousness is active in every sphere.
Bg 7.10
TEXT
10
TEXT
bqJa&
Maa& SavR>aUTaaNaa& iviÖ PaaQaR SaNaaTaNaMa( )
buiÖbuRiÖMaTaaMaiSMa TaeJaSTaeJaiSvNaaMahMa( )) 10 ))
béjaà mäà sarva-bhütänäà
viddhi pärtha sanätanam
buddhir buddhimatäm asmi
tejas tejasvinäm aham
béjam—seed; mäm—unto Me; sarva-bhütänäm—of
all living entities; viddhi—try to understand; pärtha—O son of Påthä; sanätanam—original,
eternal; buddhiù—intelligence; buddhimatäm—of the intelligent; asmi—I
am; tejaù—prowess; tejasvinäm—of
the powerful; aham—I am.
TRANSLATION
O son of Påthä, know that I am the original seed of all
existences, the intelligence of the intelligent, and the prowess of all
powerful men.
PURPORT
Béjam means seed;
Kåñëa is the seed of everything. In contact with material nature, the seed
fructifies into various living entities, movable and inert. Birds, beasts, men
and many other living creatures are moving living entities; trees and plants,
however, are inert—they cannot move, but only stand. Every entity is contained
within the scope of 8,400,000 species of life; some of them are moving and some
of them are inert. In all cases, however, the seed of their life is Kåñëa. As
stated in Vedic literature, Brahman, or the Supreme Absolute Truth, is that
from which everything is emanating. Kåñëa is Parabrahman, the Supreme Spirit.
Brahman is impersonal and Parabrahman is personal. Impersonal Brahman is
situated in the personal aspect—that is stated in Bhagavad-gétä.
Therefore, originally, Kåñëa is the source of everything. He is the
root. As the root of a tree maintains the whole tree, Kåñëa, being the original
root of all things, maintains everything in this material manifestation. This
is also confirmed in the Vedic literature. Yato vä imäni
bhütäni jäyante. "The Supreme Absolute Truth is that from which
everything is born." He is the prime eternal among all eternals. He is the
supreme living entity of all living entities, and He alone is maintaining all
life. Kåñëa also says that He is the root of all intelligence. Unless a person
is intelligent he cannot understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa.
Bg 7.11
TEXT
11
TEXT
bl&/
bl/vTaa& cah& k-aMaraGaivviJaRTaMa( )
DaMaaRivåÖae >aUTaezu k-aMaae_iSMa >arTazR>a )) 11 ))
balaà balavatäà cähaà
käma-räga-vivarjitam
dharmäviruddho bhüteñu
kämo ’smi bharatarñabha
balam—strength; balavatäm—of the strong; ca—and;
aham—I am; käma—passion;
räga—attachment; vivarjitam—devoid
of; dharma-aviruddha—not against the religious
principles; bhüteñu—in all beings; kämaù—sex-life; asmi—I
am; bharatarñabha—O lord of the Bhäratas.
TRANSLATION
I am the strength of the strong, devoid of passion and desire. I
am sex life which is not contrary to religious principles, O Lord of the
Bhäratas [Arjuna].
PURPORT
The strong man’s strength should be applied to protect the weak,
not for personal aggression. Similarly, sex life, according to religious
principles (dharma), should be for the
propagation of children, not otherwise. The responsibility of parents is then
to make their offspring Kåñëa conscious.
Bg 7.12
TEXT
12
TEXT
Yae cEv
Saaitvk-a >aava raJaSaaSTaaMaSaaê Yae )
Mata WveiTa TaaiNviÖ Na Tvh& Taezu Tae MaiYa )) 12 ))
ye caiva sättvikä bhävä
räjasäs tämasäç ca ye
matta eveti tän viddhi
na tv ahaà teñu te mayi
ye—all those; ca—and; eva—certainly; sättvikäù—in goodness; bhäväù—states
of being; räjasäù—mode of passion; tämasäù—mode of ignorance; ca—also;
ye—although; mattaù—from
Me; eva—certainly; iti—thus;
tän—those; viddhi—try
to know; na—not; tu—but;
aham—I; teñu—in
those; te—they; mayi—unto
Me.
TRANSLATION
All states of being—be they of goodness, passion or ignorance—are
manifested by My energy. I am, in one sense, everything—but I am independant. I
am not under the modes of this material nature.
PURPORT
All material activities in the world are being conducted under the
three modes of material nature. Although these material modes of nature are
emanations from the Supreme Lord, Kåñëa, He is not subject to them. For
instance, under the state laws one may be punished, but the king, the lawmaker,
is not subject to that law. Similarly, all the modes of material
nature—goodness, passion and ignorance—are emanations from the Supreme Lord
Kåñëa, but Kåñëa is not subject to material nature. Therefore He is nirguëa, which means that these guëas,
or modes, although issuing from Him, do not affect Him. That is one of
the special characteristics of Bhagavän, or the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Bg 7.13
TEXT
13
TEXT
i}ai>aGauR<aMaYaE>aaRvErei>a"
SavRiMad& JaGaTa( )
MaaeihTa& Naai>aJaaNaaiTa MaaMae>Ya" ParMaVYaYaMa( )) 13 ))
tribhir guëa-mayair bhävair
ebhiù sarvam idaà jagat
mohitaà näbhijänäti
mäm ebhyaù param avyayam
tribhiù—three; guëamayaiù—by the three guëas;
bhävaiù—state of being; ebhiù—all
this; sarvam—the whole world; idam—in this world; jagat—universe;
mohitam—deluded; na
abhijänäti—do not know; mäm—unto Me; ebhyaù—above these; param—the
Supreme; avyayam—inexhaustible.
TRANSLATION
Deluded by the three modes [goodness, passion and ignorance], the
whole world does not know Me who am above the modes and inexhaustible.
PURPORT
The whole world is enchanted by three modes of material nature.
Those who are bewildered by these three modes cannot understand that
transcendental to this material nature is the Supreme Lord, Kåñëa. In this
material world everyone is under the influence of these three guëas and is thus bewildered.
Bv nature living entities have particular types of body and particular types of psychic and biological activities accordingly. There are four classes of men functioning in the three material modes of nature. Those who are purely in the mode of goodness are called brähmaëas. Those who are purely in the mode of passion are called kñatriyas. Those who are in the modes of both passion and ignorance are called vaiçyas. Those who are completely in ignorance are called çüdras. And those who are less than that are animals or animal life. However, these designations are not permanent. I may either be a brähmaëa, kñatriya, vaiçya or whatever—in any case, this life is temporary. But although life is temporary and we do not know what we are going to be in the next life, still, by the spell of this illusory energy, we consider ourselves in the light of this bodily conception of life, and we thus think that we are American, Indian, Russian or brähmaëa, Hindu, Muslim, etc. And if we become entangled with the modes of material nature, then we forget the Supreme Personality of Godhead who is behind all these modes. So Lord Kåñëa says that men, deluded by these three modes of nature, do not understand that behind the material background is the Supreme Godhead.
There are many different kinds of living entities—human beings, demigods, animals, etc.—and each and every one of them is under the influence of material nature, and all of them have forgotten the transcendent Personality of Godhead. Those who are in the modes of passion and ignorance, and even those who are in the mode of goodness, cannot go beyond the impersonal Brahman conception of the Absolute Truth. They are bewildered before the Supreme Lord in His personal feature, which possesses all beauty, opulence, knowledge, strength, fame and renunciation. When even those who are in goodness cannot understand, what hope is there for those in passion and ignorance? Kåñëa consciousness is transcendental to all these three modes of material nature, and those who are truly established in Kåñëa consciousness are actually liberated.
Bg 7.14
TEXT
14
TEXT
dEvq ùeza
Gau<aMaYaq MaMa MaaYaa durTYaYaa )
MaaMaev Yae Pa[PaÛNTae MaaYaaMaeTaa& TariNTa Tae )) 14 ))
daivé hy eñä guëa-mayé
mama mäyä duratyayä
mäm eva ye prapadyante
mäyäm etäà taranti te
daivé—transcendental;
hi—certainly; eñä—this;
guëamayé—consisting of the three modes of
material nature; mama—My; mäyä—energy;
duratyayä—very difficult to overcome; mäm—unto Me; eva—certainly;
ye—those; prapadyante—surrender;
mäyäm etäm—this illusory energy; taranti—overcome; te—they.
TRANSLATION
This divine energy of Mine, consisting of the three modes of
material nature, is difficult to overcome. But those who have surrendered unto
Me can easily cross beyond it.
PURPORT
The Supreme Personality of Godhead has innumerable energies, and
all these energies are divine. Although the living entities are part of His
energies and are therefore divine, due to contact with material energy, their
original superior power is covered. Being thus covered by material energy, one
cannot possibly overcome its influence. As previously stated, both the material
and spiritual natures, being emanations from the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, are eternal. The living entities belong to the eternal superior nature
of the Lord, but due to contamination by the inferior nature, matter, their
illusion is also eternal. The conditioned soul is therefore called nitya-baddha, or eternally conditioned. No one can
trace out the history of his becoming conditioned at a certain date in material
history. Consequently, his release from the clutches of material nature is very
difficult, even though that material nature is an inferior energy, because
material energy is ultimately conducted by the supreme will, which the living
entity cannot overcome. Inferior material nature is defined herein as divine
nature due to its divine connection and movement by the divine will. Being
conducted by divine will, material nature, although inferior, acts so
wonderfully in the construction and destruction of the cosmic manifestation.
The Vedas confirm this as follows:
mäyäà tu prakåtià vidyän mäyinaà tu maheçvaram.
"Although mäyä [illusion] is
false or temporary, the background of mäyä is the
supreme magician, the Personality of Godhead, who is Maheçvara, the supreme
controller."
Another meaning of guëa is rope; it
is to be understood that the conditioned soul is tightly tied by the ropes of
illusion. A man bound by the hands and feet cannot free himself—he must be
helped by a person who is unbound. Because the bound cannot help the bound, the
rescuer must be liberated. Therefore, only Lord Kåñëa, or His bona fide
representative the spiritual master, can release the conditioned soul. Without
such superior help, one cannot be freed from the bondage of material nature.
Devotional service, or Kåñëa consciousness, can help one gain such release.
Kåñëa, being the Lord of illusory energy, can order this insurmountable energy
to release the conditioned soul. He orders this release out of His causeless
mercy on the surrendered soul and out of His paternal affection for the living
entity who is originally a beloved son of the Lord. Therefore surrender unto
the lotus feet of the Lord is the only means to get free from the clutches of
the stringent material nature.
The words mäm eva are also significant. Mäm means unto Kåñëa (Viñëu) only, and not Brahmä or Çiva. Although Brahmä and Çiva are greatly elevated and are almost on the level of Viñëu, it is not possible for such incarnations of räjo-guëa (passion) and tamo-guëa (ignorance) to release the conditioned soul from the clutches of mäyä. In other words, both Brahmä and Çiva are also under the influence of mäyä. Only Viñëu is the master of mäyä; therefore He can alone give release to the conditioned soul. The Vedas confirm this in the phrase tvam eva viditvä or "Freedom is possible only by understanding Kåñëa." Even Lord Çiva affirms that liberation can be achieved only by the mercy of Viñëu. Lord Çiva says:
mukti-pradätä sarveñäà viñëur eva na saàçayaù.
"There is no doubt that Viñëu is the deliverer of liberation
for everyone.
Bg 7.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
Na Maa&
duZk*-iTaNaae MaU!a" Pa[PaÛNTae NaraDaMaa" )
MaaYaYaaPaôTajaNaa AaSaur& >aavMaaié[Taa" )) 15 ))
na mäà duñkåtino müòhäù
prapadyante narädhamäù
mäyayäpahåta-jïänä
äsuraà bhävam äçritäù
na—not; mäm—unto Me; duñkåtinaù—miscreants;
müòhäù—foolish; prapadyante—surrender;
narädhamäù—lowest among mankind; mäyayä—by the illusory energy; apahåta—stolen
by illusion; jïänäù—knowledge; asuram—demonic; bhävam—nature;
äçritäù—accepting.
TRANSLATION
Those miscreants who are grossly foolish, lowest among mankind,
whose knowledge is stolen by illusion, and who partake of the atheistic nature
of demons, do not surrender unto Me.
PURPORT
It is said in Bhagavad-gétä that
simply by surrendering oneself unto the lotus feet of the Supreme Personality
Kåñëa, one can surmount the stringent laws of material nature. At this point a
question arises: How is it that educated philosophers, scientists, businessmen,
administrators and all the leaders of ordinary men do not surrender to the
lotus feet of Çré Kåñëa, the all-powerful Personality of Godhead? Mukti, or liberation from the laws of material nature,
is sought by the leaders of mankind in different ways and with great plans and
perseverance for a great many years and births. But if that liberation is
possible by simply surrendering unto the lotus feet of the Supreme Personality
of Godhead, then why don't these intelligent and hard-working leaders adopt
this simple method?
The Gétä answers this question very frankly. Those really learned leaders of society like Brahmä, Çiva, Kapila, the Kumäras, Manu, Vyäsa, Devala, Asita, Janaka, Prahläda, Bali, and later on Madhväcärya, Rämänujäcärya, Çré Caitanya and many others—who are faithful philosophers, politicians, educators, scientists, etc.—surrender to the lotus feet of the Supreme Person, the all-powerful authority. Those who are not actually philosophers, scientists, educators, administrators, etc., but who pose themselves as such for material gain, do not accept the plan or path of the Supreme Lord. They have no idea of God; they simply manufacture their own worldly plans and consequently complicate the problems of material existence in their vain attempts to solve them. Because material energy (nature) is so powerful, it can resist the unauthorized plans of the atheists and baffle the knowledge of "planning commissions."
The atheistic plan-makers are described herein by the word duñkåtina, or "miscreants." Kåtina means one who has performed meritorious work. The atheist planmaker is sometimes very intelligent and meritorious also, because any gigantic plan, good or bad, must take intelligence to execute. But because the atheist’s brain is improperly utilized in opposing the plan of the Supreme Lord, the atheistic planmaker is called duñkåtina, which indicates that his intelligence and efforts are misdirected.
In the Gétä it is clearly mentioned that material energy works fully under the direction of the Supreme Lord. It has no independant authority. It works as the shadow moves, in accordance with the movements of the object. But still material energy is very powerful, and the atheist, due to his godless temperament, cannot know how it works; nor can he know the plan of the Supreme Lord. Under illusion and the modes of passion and ignorance, all his plans are baffled, as in the case of Hiraëyakaçipu and Rävaëa, whose plans were smashed to dust although they were both materially learned as scientists, philosophers, administrators and educators. These duñkåtinas, or miscreants, are of four different patterns, as outlined below:
(1) The müòhas are those who are grossly foolish, like hard-working beasts of burden. They want to enjoy the fruits of their labor by themselves, and so do not want to part with them for the Supreme. The typical example of the beast of burden is the ass. This humble beast is made to work very hard by his master. The ass does not really know for whom he works so hard day and night. He remains satisfied by filling his stomach with a bundle of grass, sleeping for a while under fear of being beaten by his master, and satisfying his sex appetite at the risk of being repeatedly kicked by the opposite party. The ass sings poetry and philosophy sometimes, but this braying only disturbs others. This is the position of the foolish fruitive worker who does not know for whom he should work. He does not know that karma (action) is meant for yajïa (sacrifice).
Most often, those who work very hard day and night to clear the burden of self-created duties say that they have no time to hear of the immortality of the living being. To such müòhas, material gains, which are destructible, are life’s all in all—despite the fact that the müòhas enjoy only a very small fraction of the fruit of labor. Sometimes they spend sleepless days and nights for fruitive gain, and although they may have ulcers or indigestion, they are satisfied with practically no food; they are simply absorbed in working hard day and night for the benefit of illusory masters. Ignorant of their real master, the foolish workers waste their valuable time serving mammon. Unfortunately, they never surrender to the supreme master of all masters, nor do they take time to hear of Him from the proper sources. The swine who eat the soil do not care to accept sweetmeats made of sugar and ghee. Similarly, the foolish worker will untiringly continue to hear of the sense-enjoyable tidings of the flickering mundane force that moves the material world.
(2) Another class of duñkåtina, or miscreant, is called the narädhama, or the lowest of mankind. Nara means human being, and adhama means the lowest. Out of the 8,400,000 different species of living beings, there are 400,000 human species. Out of these there are numerous lower forms of human life that are mostly uncivilized. The civilized human beings are those who have regulated principles of social, political and religious life. Those who are socially and politically developed, but who have no religious principles, must be considered narädhamas. Nor is religion without God religion, because the purpose of following religious principles is to know the Supreme Truth and man’s relation with Him. In the Gétä the Personality of Godhead clearly states that there is no authority above Him and that He is the Supreme Truth. The civilized form of human life is meant for man’s reviving the lost consciousness of his eternal relation with the Supreme Truth, the Personality of Godhead Çré Kåñëa, who is all-powerful. Whoever loses this chance is classified as a narädhama. We get information from revealed scriptures that when the baby is in the mother’s womb (an extremely uncomfortable situation) he prays to God for deliverance and promises to worship Him alone as soon as he gets out. To pray to God when he is in difficulty is a natural instinct in every living being because he is eternally related with God. But after his deliverance, the child forgets the difficulties of birth and forgets his deliverer also, being influenced by mäyä, the illusory energy.
It is the duty of the
guardians of children to revive the divine consciousness dormant in them. The
ten processes of reformatory ceremonies, as enjoined in the Manu-småti, which is the guide to religious principles,
are meant for reviving God consciousness in the system of varëäçrama. However, no process is strictly followed
now in any part of the world, and therefore 99.9 percent of the population is narädhama.
When the whole population becomes narädhama, naturally all their so-called education is made null and void by the all-powerful energy of physical nature. According to the standard of the Gétä, a learned man is he who sees on equal terms the learned brähmaëa, the dog, the cow, the elephant and the dog-eater. That is the vision of a true devotee. Çré Nityänanda Prabhu, who is the incarnation of Godhead as divine master, delivered the typical narädhamas, the brothers Jagai and Madhai, and showed how the mercy of a real devotee is bestowed upon the lowest of mankind. So the narädhama who is condemned by the Personality of Godhead can again revive his spiritual consciousness only by the mercy of a devotee.
Çré Caitanya Mahäprabhu, in propagating the bhägavata-dharma or activities of the devotees, has recommended that people submissively hear the message of the Personality of Godhead. The essence of this message is Bhagavad-gétä. The lowest amongst human beings can be delivered by this submissive hearing process only, but unfortunately they even deny giving an aural reception to these messages, and what to speak of surrendering to the will of the Supreme Lord? Narädhamas, or the lowest of mankind, will fully neglect the prime duty of the human being.
(3) The next class of duñkåtina is called mäyayäpahåta-jïäna, or those persons whose erudite knowledge has been nullified by the influence of illusory material energy. They are mostly very learned fellows—great philosophers, poets, literati, scientists, etc.—but the illusory energy misguides them, and therefore they disobey the Supreme Lord.
There are a great number of mäyayäpahåta-jïänas at the present moment, even amongst the scholars of the Gétä. In the Gétä, in plain and simple language, it is stated that Çré Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. There is none equal to or greater than Him. He is mentioned as the father of Brahmä, the original father of all human beings. In fact, Çré Kåñëa is said to be not only the father of Brahmä but also the father of all species of life. He is the root of the impersonal Brahman and Paramätmä; the Supersoul in every entity is His plenary portion. He is the fountainhead of everything, and everyone is advised to surrender unto His lotus feet. Despite all these clear statements, the mäyayäpahåta-jïäna deride the Personality of the Supreme Lord and consider Him merely another human being. They do not know that the blessed form of human life is designed after the eternal and transcendental feature of the Supreme Lord.
All the unauthorized interpretations of the Gétä by the class of mäyayäpahåta-jïäna, outside the purview of the paramparä system, are so many stumbling blocks in the path of spiritual understanding. The deluded interpreters do not surrender unto the lotus feet of Çré Kåñëa, nor do they teach others to follow this principle.
(4) The last class of duñkåtina is called äsuraà bhävam äçrita, or those of demonic principles. This class is openly atheistic. Some of them argue that the Supreme Lord can never descend upon this material world, but they are unable to give any tangible reasons as to why not. There are others who make Him subordinate to the impersonal feature, although the opposite is declared in the Gétä. Envious of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the atheist will present a number of illicit incarnations manufactured in the factory of his brain. Such persons whose very principle of life is to decry the Personality of Godhead cannot surrender unto the lotus feet of Çré Kåñëa.
Çré Yämunäcärya Albandru of South India said, "O my Lord! You are unknowable to persons involved with atheistic principles despite Your uncommon qualities, features, and activities and despite Your personality being confirmed by all the revealed scriptures in the quality of goodness, and despite Your being acknowledged by the famous authorities renowned for their depth of knowledge in the transcendental science and situated in the godly qualities."
Therefore, (1) grossly foolish persons, (2) the lowest of mankind, (3) the deluded speculators, and (4) the professed atheists, as above mentioned, never surrender unto the lotus feet of the Personality of Godhead in spite of all scriptural and authoritative advice.
Bg 7.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
cTauivRDaa
>aJaNTae Maa& JaNaa" Sauk*-iTaNaae_JauRNa )
AaTaaeR iJajaSaurQaaRQas jaNaq c >arTazR>a )) 16 ))
catur-vidhä bhajante mäà
janäù sukåtino ’rjuna
ärto jijïäsur arthärthé
jïäné ca bharatarñabha
catur-vidhäù—four kinds
of; bhajante—render services; mäm—unto Me; janäù—persons;
sukåtinaù—those who are pious; arjuna—O Arjuna; ärtaù—the
distressed; jijïäsuù—the inquisitive; artha-arthé—one who desires material gain; jïäné—one who knows things as they are; ca—also; bharatarñabha—O
great one amongst the descendants of Bharata.
TRANSLATION
O best among the Bhäratas [Arjuna], four kinds of pious men render
devotional service unto Me—the distressed, the desirer of wealth, the
inquisitive, and he who is searching for knowledge of the Absolute.
PURPORT
Unlike the miscreants, these are adherents of the regulative
principles of the scriptures, and they are called sukåtina,
or those who obey the rules and regulations of scriptures, the moral and social
laws, and are, more or less, devoted to the Supreme Lord. Out of these there
are four classes of men—those who are sometimes distressed, those who are in
need of money, those who are sometimes inquisitive, and those who are sometimes
searching after knowledge of the Absolute Truth. These persons come to the
Supreme Lord for devotional service under different conditions. These are not
pure devotees because they have some aspiration to fulfill in exchange for
devotional service. Pure devotional service is without aspiration and without
desire for material profit. The Bhakti-rasämåta-sindhu
defines pure devotion thus:
anyäbhiläñitäçünyaà jïäna-karmädy-anävåtam
änukülyena kåñëänuçélanaà bhaktir uttamä.
"One should render transcendental loving service to the
Supreme Lord Kåñëa favorably and without desire for material profit or gain
through fruitive activities or philosophical speculation. That is called pure
devotional service."
When these four kinds of persons come to the Supreme Lord for
devotional service and are completely purified by the association of a pure
devotee, they also become pure devotees. As far as the miscreants are
concerned, for them devotional service is very difficult because their lives
are selfish, irregular and without spiritual goals. But even some of them, by
chance, when they come in contact with a pure devotee, also become pure
devotees.
Those who are always busy with fruitive activities come to the Lord in material distress and at that time associate with pure devotees and become, in their distress, devotees of the Lord. Those who are simply frustrated also come sometimes to associate with the pure devotees and become inquisitive to know about God. Similarly, when the dry philosophers are frustrated in every field of knowledge, they sometimes want to learn of God, and they come to the Supreme Lord to render devotional service and thus transcend knowledge of the impersonal Brahman and the localized Paramätmä and come to the personal conception of Godhead by the grace of the Supreme Lord or His pure devotee. On the whole, when the distressed, the inquisitive, the seekers of knowledge, and those who are in need of money are free from all material desires, and when they fully understand that material remuneration has nothing to do with spiritual improvement, they become pure devotees. As long as such a purified stage is not attained, devotees in transcendental service to the Lord are tainted with fruitive activities, and they search after mundane knowledge, etc. So one has to transcend all this before one can come to the stage of pure devotional service.
Bg 7.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
Taeza& jaNaq
iNaTYaYau¢- Wk->ai¢-ivRiXaZYaTae )
iPa[Yaae ih jaiNaNaae_TYaQaRMah& Sa c MaMa iPa[Ya" )) 17 ))
teñäà jïäné nitya-yukta
eka-bhaktir viçiñyate
priyo hi jïänino ’tyartham
ahaà sa ca mama priyaù
teñäm—out of them;
jïäné—one in full knowledge; nitya-yuktaù—always engaged; eka—only
one; bhaktiù—devotional service; viçiñyate—especially; priyaù—very
dear; hi—certainly; jïäninaù—person
in knowledge; atyartham highly; aham—I am; saù—he; ca—also; mama—Mine; priyaù—dear.
TRANSLATION
Of these, the wise one who is in full knowledge in union with Me
through pure devotional service is the best. For I am very dear to him, and he
is dear to Me.
PURPORT
Free from all contaminations of material desires, the distressed,
the inquisitive, the penniless, and the seeker after supreme knowledge can all
become pure devotees. But out of them, he who is in knowledge of the Absolute
Truth and free from all material desires becomes a really pure devotee of the
Lord. And of the four orders, the devotee who is in full knowledge and is at
the same time engaged in devotional service is, the Lord says, the best. By
searching after knowledge one realizes that his self is different from his
material body, and when further advanced he comes to the knowledge of
impersonal Brahman and Paramätmä. When one is fully purified, he realizes that
his constitutional position is to be the eternal servant of God. So by
association with pure devotees, the inquisitive, the distressed, the seeker
after material amelioration and the man in knowledge all become themselves
pure. But in the preparatory stage, the man who is in full knowledge of the
Supreme Lord and is at the same time executing devotional service is very dear
to the Lord. He who is situated in pure knowledge of the transcendence of the
Supreme Personality of God is so protected in devotional service that material
contaminations cannot touch him.
Bg 7.18
TEXT
18
TEXT
odara" SavR
WvETae jaNaq TvaTMaEv Mae MaTaMa( )
AaiSQaTa" Sa ih Yau¢-aTMaa MaaMaevaNautaMaa& GaiTaMa( )) 18 ))
udäräù sarva evaite
jïäné tv ätmaiva me matam
ästhitaù sa hi yuktätmä
mäm evänuttamäà gatim
udäräù—magnanimous;
sarve—all; eva—certainly;
ete—these; jïäné—one
who is in knowledge; tu—but; ätmä eva—just like Myself; me—Mine;
matam—opinion; ästhitaù—situated;
saù—he; hi—certainly;
yukta-ätmä—engaged in devotional service; mäm—unto Me; eva—certainly;
anuttamäm—the highest goal; gatim—destination.
TRANSLATION
All these devotees are undoubtedly magnanimous souls, but he who
is situated in knowledge of Me I consider verily to dwell in Me. Being engaged
in My transcendental service, he attains Me.
PURPORT
It is not that other devotees who are less complete in knowledge
are not dear to the Lord. The Lord says that all are magnanimous because anyone
who comes to the Lord for any purpose is called a mahätmä
or great soul. The devotees who want some benefit out of devotional
service are accepted by the Lord because there is an exchange of affection. Out
of affection they ask the Lord for some material benefit, and when they get it
they become so satisfied that they also advance in devotional service. But the
devotee in full knowledge is considered to be very dear to the Lord because his
only purpose is to serve the Supreme Lord with love and devotion. Such a
devotee cannot live a second without contacting or serving the Supreme Lord.
Similarly, the Supreme Lord is very fond of His devotee and cannot be separated
from him.
In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam (9.4.57), the Lord says:
ahaà bhakta-parädhéno hy asvatantra iva dvija
sädhubhir grasta-hådayo bhaktair bhakta-jana-priyaù
"The devotees are always in My heart, and I am always in the
heart of the devotees. The devotee does not know anything beyond Me, and I also
cannot forget the devotee. There is a very intimate relationship between Me and
the pure devotees. Pure devotees in full knowledge are never out of spiritual
touch, and therefore they are very much dear to Me."
Bg 7.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
bhUNaa&
JaNMaNaaMaNTae jaNavaNMaa& Pa[PaÛTae )
vaSaudev" SavRiMaiTa Sa MahaTMaa SaudulR/>a" )) 19 ))
bahünäà janmanäm ante
jïänavän mäà prapadyate
väsudevaù sarvam iti
sa mahätmä su-durlabhaù
bahünäm—many; janmanäm—births; ante—after;
jïänavän—he possessing knowledge; mäm—unto Me; prapadyate—surrenders;
väsudevaù—cause of all causes; sarvam—all; iti—thus; saù—such; mahätmä—great
soul; sudurlabhaù—very rare.
TRANSLATION
After many births and deaths, he who is actually in knowledge
surrenders unto Me, knowing Me to be the cause of all causes and all that is.
Such a great soul is very rare.
PURPORT
The living entity, while executing devotional service or
transcendental rituals after many, many births, may actually become situated in
transcendental pure knowledge that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the ultimate
goal of spiritual realization. In the beginning of spiritual realization, while
one is trying to give up one’s attachment to materialism, there is some leaning
towards impersonalism, but when one is further advanced he can understand that
there are activities in the spiritual life and that these activities constitute
devotional service. Realizing this, he becomes attached to the Supreme
Personality of Godhead and surrenders to Him. At such a time one can understand
that Lord Çré Kåñëa’s mercy is everything, that He is the cause of all causes
and that this material manifestation is not independant from Him. He realizes
the material world to be a perverted reflection of spiritual variegatedness and
realizes that in everything there is a relationship with the Supreme Lord
Kåñëa. Thus he thinks of everything in relation to Väsudeva, or Çré Kåñëa. Such
a universal vision of Väsudeva precipitates one’s full surrender to the Supreme
Lord Çré Kåñëa as the highest goal. Such surrendered great souls are very rare.
This verse is very nicely explained in the Third Chapter of Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad: "In this body there are powers of speaking, of seeing, of hearing, of mental activities, etc. But these are not important if not related to the Supreme Lord. And because Väsudeva is all-pervading and everything is Väsudeva, the devotee surrenders in full knowledge." (Cf. Bhagavad-gétä 7.17 and 11.40)
Bg 7.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
k-aMaESTaESTaEôRTajaNaa"
Pa[PaÛNTae_NYadevTaa" )
Ta& Ta& iNaYaMaMaaSQaaYa Pa[k*-TYaa iNaYaTaa" SvYaa )) 20 ))
kämais tais tair håta-jïänäù
prapadyante ’nya-devatäù
taà taà niyamam ästhäya
prakåtyä niyatäù svayä
kamaiù—by desires; taiù—by those; taiù—by
those; håta—distorted; jïänäù—knowledge;
prapadyante—surrender; anya—other;
devatäù—demigods; tam—that;
tam—that; niyamam—rules;
ästhäya—following; prakåtyä—by
nature; niyatäù—controlled; svayä—by their own.
TRANSLATION
Those whose minds are distorted by material desires surrender unto
demigods and follow the particular rules and regulations of worship according
to their own natures.
PURPORT
Those who are freed from all material contaminations surrender
unto the Supreme Lord and engage in His devotional service. As long as the
material contamination is not completely washed off, they are by nature
nondevotees. But even those who have material desires and who resort to the
Supreme Lord are not so much attracted by external nature; because of
approaching the right goal, they soon become free from all material lust. In
the Çrémad-Bhägavatam it is recommended that whether
one is free from all material desires, or is full of material desires, or
desires liberation from material contamination, or is a pure devotee and has no
desire for material sense gratification, he should in all cases surrender to
Väsudeva and worship Him.
It is said in the Bhägavatam that less intelligent people who have lost their spiritual sense take shelter of demigods for immediate fulfillment of material desires. Generally, such people do not go to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, because they are in particular modes of nature (ignorance and passion) and therefore worship various demigods. Following the rules and regulations of worship, they are satisfied. The worshipers of demigods are motivated by small desires and do not know how to reach the supreme goal, but a devotee of the Supreme Lord is not misguided. Because in Vedic literature there are recommendations for worshiping different gods for different purposes (e.g., a diseased man is recommended to worship the sun), those who are not devotees of the Lord think that for certain purposes demigods are better than the Supreme Lord. But a pure devotee knows that the Supreme Lord Kåñëa is the master of all. In the Caitanya-caritämåta it is said that only the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, is master and all others are servants. Therefore a pure devotee never goes to demigods for satisfaction of his material needs. He depends on the Supreme Lord. And the pure devotee is satisfied with whatever He gives.
Bg 7.21
TEXT
21
TEXT
Yaae Yaae
Yaa& Yaa& TaNau& >a¢-" é[ÖYaaicRTauiMaC^iTa )
TaSYa TaSYaacl/a& é[Öa& TaaMaev ivdDaaMYahMa( )) 21 ))
yo yo yäà yäà tanuà bhaktaù
çraddhayärcitum icchati
tasya tasyäcaläà çraddhäà
täm eva vidadhämy aham
yaù—that; yaù—that; yäm—which; yäm—which; tanum—form of
the demigods; bhaktaù—devotee; çraddhayä—with faith; arcitum—to
worship; icchati—desires; tasya—of
that; tasya—of that; acaläm—steady;
çraddhäm—faith; tam—him;
eva—surely; vidadhämi—give;
aham—I.
TRANSLATION
I am in everyone’s heart as the Supersoul. As soon as one desires
to worship the demigods, I make his faith steady so that he can devote himself
to some particular deity.
PURPORT
God has given independence to everyone; therefore, if a person
desires to have material enjoyment and wants very sincerely to have such
facilities from the material demigods, the Supreme Lord, as Supersoul in
everyone’s heart, understands and gives facilities to such persons. As the
supreme father of all living entities, He does not interfere with their
independence, but gives all facilities so that they can fulfill their material
desires. Some may ask why the all-powerful God gives facilities to the living
entities for enjoying this material world and so lets them fall into the trap
of the illusory energy. The answer is that if the Supreme Lord as Supersoul
does not give such facilities, then there is no meaning to independence.
Therefore He gives everyone full independence—whatever one likes—but His
ultimate instruction we find in the Bhagavad-gétä: man
should give up all other engagements and fully surrender unto Him. That will
make man happy.
Both the living entity and the demigods are subordinate to the will of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; therefore the living entity cannot worship the demigod by his own desire, nor can the demigod bestow any benediction without the supreme will. As it is said, not a blade of grass moves without the will of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Generally, persons who are distressed in the material world go to the demigods, as they are advised in the Vedic literature. A person wanting some particular thing may worship such and such a demigod. For example, a diseased person is recommended to worship the sun-god; a person wanting education may worship the goddess of learning, Sarasvaté; and a person wanting a beautiful wife may worship the goddess Umä, the wife of Lord Çiva. In this way there are recommendations in the çästras (Vedic scriptures) for different modes of worship of different demigods. And because a particular living entity wants to enjoy a particular material facility, the Lord inspires him with a strong desire to achieve that benediction from that particular demigod, and so he successfully receives the benediction. The particular mode of the devotional attitude of the living entity toward a particular type of demigod is also arranged by the Supreme Lord. The demigods cannot infuse the living entities with such an affinity, but because He is the Supreme Lord or the Supersoul who is present in the heart of all living entities, Kåñëa gives impetus to man to worship certain demigods. The demigods are actually different parts of the universal body of the Supreme Lord; therefore they have no independence. In the Vedic literature (Taittiréya Upaniñad, First Anuväka) it is stated: "The Supreme Personality of Godhead as Supersoul is also present within the heart of the demigod; therefore He arranges through the demigod to fulfill the desire of the living entity. But both the demigod and the living entity are dependant on the supreme wil1. They are not independant."
Bg 7.22
TEXT
22
TEXT
Sa TaYaa é[ÖYaa
Yau¢-STaSYaaraDaNaMaqhTae )
l/>aTae c TaTa" k-aMaaNMaYaEv ivihTaaiNhTaaNa( )) 22 ))
sa tayä çraddhayä yuktas
tasyärädhanam éhate
labhate ca tataù kämän
mayaiva vihitän hi tän
saù—he; tayä—with that; çraddhayä—with
faith; yuktaù—endowed; tasya—his;
ärädhanam—worship; éhate—seeks;
labhate—obtains; ca—and;
tataù—from which; kämän—desires;
mayä—by Me; eva—alone;
vihitän—regulated; hi—for;
tän—those.
TRANSLATION
Endowed with such a faith, he seeks favors of a particular demigod
and obtains his desires. But in actuality these benefits are bestowed by Me
alone.
PURPORT
The demigods cannot award benediction to the devotees without the
permission of the Supreme Lord. The living entity may forget that everything is
the property of the Supreme Lord, but the demigods do not forget. So the
worship of demigods and achievement of desired results are not due to the
demigods but to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, by arrangement. The less
intelligent living entity does not know this, and therefore he foolishly goes
to the demigods for some benefit. But the pure devotee, when in need of
something, prays only to the Supreme Lord. Asking for material benefit,
however, is not a sign of a pure devotee. A living entity goes to the demigods
usually because he is mad to fulfill his lust. This happens when something
undue is desired by the living entity, and the Lord Himself does not fulfill
the desire. In the Caitanya-caritämåta it is said
that one who worships the Supreme Lord and at the same time desires material
enjoyment is contradictory in his desires. Devotional service of the Supreme
Lord and the worship of a demigod cannot be on the same platform because
worship of a demigod is material and devotional service to the Supreme Lord is
completely spiritual.
For the living entity who desires to return to Godhead, material desires are impediments. A pure devotee of the Lord is therefore not awarded the material benefits desired by less intelligent living entities who prefer to worship demigods of the material world rather than engage in devotional service of the Supreme Lord.
Bg 7.23
TEXT
23
TEXT
ANTavtau
f-l&/ Taeza& TaÙvTYaLPaMaeDaSaaMa( )
devaNdevYaJaae YaaiNTa MaÙ¢-a YaaiNTa MaaMaiPa )) 23 ))
antavat tu phalaà teñäà
tad bhavaty alpa-medhasäm
devän deva-yajo yänti
mad-bhaktä yänti mäm api
antavat tu—limited and
temporary; phalam—fruits; teñäm—their;
tat—that; bhavati—becomes;
alpa-medhasäm—of those of small intelligence; devän—demigods’ planets; deva-yajaù—worshipers
of demigods; yänti—achieve; mat—My; bhaktäù—devotees;
yänti—attain; mäm—unto
Me; api—surely.
TRANSLATION
Men of small intelligence worship the demigods, and their fruits
are limited and temporary. Those who worship the demigods go to the planets of
the demigods, but My devotees ultimately reach My supreme planet.
PURPORT
Some commentators on the Gétä say
that one who worships a demigod can reach the Supreme Lord, but here it is
clearly stated that the worshipers of demigods go to the different planetary
systems where various demigods are situated, just as a worshiper of the sun
achieves the sun or a worshiper of the demigod of the moon achieves the moon.
Similarly, if anyone wants to worship a demigod like Indra, he can attain that
particular god’s planet. It is not that everyone, regardless of whatever
demigod is worshiped, will reach the Supreme Personality of Godhead. That is
denied here, for it is clearly stated that the worshipers of demigods go to
different planets in the material world, but the devotee of the Supreme Lord
goes directly to the supreme planet of the Personality of Godhead.
Here the point may be raised that if the demigods are different parts of the body of the Supreme Lord, then the same end should be achieved by worshiping them. However, worshipers of the demigods are less intelligent because they don't know to what part of the body food must be supplied. Some of them are so foolish that they claim that there are many parts and many ways to supply food. This isn't very sanguine. Can anyone supply food to the body through the ears or eyes? They do not know that these demigods are different parts of the universal body of the Supreme Lord, and in their ignorance they believe that each and every demigod is a separate God and a competitor of the Supreme Lord.
Not only are demigods parts of the Supreme Lord, but ordinary living entities are also. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam it is stated that the brähmaëas are the head of the Supreme Lord, the kñatriyas are the arms, etc., and that all serve different functions. Regardless of the situation, if one knows that both the demigods and himself are part and parcel of the Supreme Lord, his knowledge is perfect. But if he does not understand this, he achieves different planets where the demigods reside. This is not the same destination the devotee reaches.
The results achieved by the demigods’ benedictions are perishable because within this material world the planets, the demigods and their worshipers are all perishable. Therefore it is clearly stated in this verse that all results achieved by worshiping demigods are perishable, and therefore such worship is performed by the less intelligent living entity. Because the pure devotee engaged in Kåñëa consciousness in devotional service of the Supreme Lord achieves eternal blissful existence that is full of knowledge, his achievements and those of the common worshiper of the demigods are different. The Supreme Lord is unlimited; His favor is unlimited; His mercy is unlimited. Therefore the mercy of the Supreme Lord upon His pure devotees is unlimited.
Bg 7.24
TEXT
24
TEXT
AVYa¢&-
VYai¢-MaaPaà& MaNYaNTae MaaMabuÖYa" )
Par& >aavMaJaaNaNTaae MaMaaVYaYaMaNautaMaMa( )) 24 ))
avyaktaà vyaktim äpannaà
manyante mäm abuddhayaù
paraà bhävam ajänanto
mamävyayam anuttamam
avyaktam—nonmanifested;
vyaktim—personality; äpannam—achieved;
manyante—think; mäm—unto
Me; abuddhayaù—less intelligent persons; param—supreme; bhävam—state
of being; ajänantaù—without knowing; mama—My; avyayam—imperishable;
anuttamam—the finest.
TRANSLATION
Unintelligent men, who know Me not, think that I have assumed this
form and personality. Due to their small knowledge, they do not know My higher
nature, which is changeless and supreme.
PURPORT
Those who are worshipers of demigods have been described as less
intelligent persons, and here the impersonalists are similarly described. Lord
Kåñëa in His personal form is here speaking before Arjuna, and still, due to
ignorance, impersonalists argue that the Supreme Lord ultimately has no form.
Yämunäcärya, a great devotee of the Lord in the disciplic succession from
Rämänujäcärya, has written two very appropriate verses in this connection. He
says, "My dear Lord, devotees like Vyäsadeva and Närada know You to be the
Personality of Godhead. By understanding different Vedic literatures, one can
come to know Your characteristics, Your form and Your activities, and one can
thus understand that You are the Supreme Personality of Godhead. But those who
are in the modes of passion and ignorance, the demons, the nondevotees, cannot
understand You. They are unable to understand You. However expert such
nondevotees may be in discussing Vedänta and the Upaniñads and other Vedic literatures, it is not
possible for them to understand the Personality of Godhead."
In the Brahma-saàhitä it is stated that the Personality of Godhead cannot be understood simply by study of the Vedänta literature. Only by the mercy of the Supreme Lord can the Personality of the Supreme be known. Therefore in this verse it is clearly stated that not only the worshipers of the demigods are less intelligent, but those nondevotees who are engaged in Vedänta and speculation on Vedic literature without any tinge of true Kåñëa consciousness are also less intelligent, and for them it is not possible to understand God’s personal nature. Persons who are under the impression that the Absolute Truth is impersonal are described as asuras, which means one who does not know the ultimate feature of the Absolute Truth. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam it is stated that supreme realization begins from the impersonal Brahman and then rises to the localized Supersoul—but the ultimate word in the Absolute Truth is the Personality of Godhead. Modern impersonalists are still less intelligent, for they do not even follow their great predecessor, Çaìkaräcärya, who has specifically stated that Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Impersonalists, therefore, not knowing the Supreme Truth, think Kåñëa to be only the son of Devaké and Vasudeva, or a prince, or a powerful living entity. This is also condemned in Bhagavad-gétä: "Only the fools regard Me as an ordinary person." The fact is that no one can understand Kåñëa without rendering devotional service and without developing Kåñëa consciousness. The Gétä confirms this.
One cannot understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, or His form, quality or name simply by mental speculation or by discussing Vedic literature. One must understand Him by devotional service. When one is fully engaged in Kåñëa consciousness, beginning by chanting the mahämantra—Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare—then only can one understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Nondevotee impersonalists think that Kåñëa has a body made of this material nature and that all His activities, His form and everything, are mäyä. These impersonalists are known as Mäyävädé. They do not know the ultimate truth.
The twentieth verse clearly states: "Those who are blinded by lusty desires surrender unto the different demigods." It is accepted that besides the Supreme Personality of Godhead, there are demigods who have their different planets (Bg. 7.23), and the Lord also has a planet. It is also stated that the worshipers of the demigods go to the different planets of the demigods, and those who are devotees of Lord Kåñëa go to the Kåñëaloka planet. Although this is clearly stated, the foolish impersonalists still maintain that the Lord is formless and that these forms are impositions. From the study of the Gétä does it appear that the demigods and their abodes are impersonal? Clearly, neither the demigods nor Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, are impersonal. They are all persons; Lord Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and He has His own planet, and the demigods have theirs.
Therefore the monistic contention that ultimate truth is formless and that form is imposed does not hold true. It is clearly stated here that it is not imposed. From the Gétä we can clearly understand that the forms of the demigods and the form of the Supreme Lord are simultaneously existing and that Lord Kåñëa is sac-cid-änanda, eternal blissful knowledge. The Vedas also confirm that the Supreme Absolute Truth is änandamaya, or full of blissful pleasure, and that He is abhyäsät, by nature the reservoir of unlimited auspicious qualities. And in the Gétä the Lord says that although He is aja (unborn), He still appears. These are the facts that we should understand from the Gétä. We cannot understand how the Supreme Personality of Godhead can be impersonal; the imposition theory of the impersonalist monist is false as far as the statements of the Gétä are concerned. It is clear herein that the Supreme Absolute Truth, Lord Kåñëa, has both form and personality.
Bg 7.25
TEXT
25
TEXT
Naah&
Pa[k-aXa" SavRSYa YaaeGaMaaYaaSaMaav*Ta" )
MaU!ae_Ya& Naai>aJaaNaaiTa l/aek-ae MaaMaJaMaVYaYaMa( )) 25 ))
nähaà prakäçaù sarvasya
yoga-mäyä-samävåtaù
müòho ’yaà näbhijänäti
loko mäm ajam avyayam
na—nor; aham—I; prakäçaù—manifest;
sarvasya—to everyone; yoga-mäyä—internal
potency; samävåtaù—covered; müòhaù—foolish; ayam—this;
na—not; abhijänäti—can
understand; lokaù—such less intelligent persons; mäm—Me; ajam—unborn; avyayam—inexhaustible.
TRANSLATION
I am never manifest to the foolish and unintelligent. For them I
am covered by My eternal creative potency [yoga-mäyä]; and so the deluded world
knows Me not, who am unborn and infallible.
PURPORT
lt may be argued that since Kåñëa was present on this earth and
was visible to everyone, then why isn't He manifest to everyone now? But
actually He was not manifest to everyone. When Kåñëa was present there were
only a few people who could understand Him to be the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. In the assembly of Kurus, when Çiçupäla spoke against Kåñëa being
elected president of the assembly, Bhéñma supported Him and proclaimed Him to
be the Supreme God. Similarly, the Päëòavas and a few others knew that He was
the Supreme, but not everyone. He was not revealed to the nondevotees and the
common man. Therefore in the Gétä Kåñëa says that
but for His pure devotees, all men consider Him to be like themselves. He was
manifest only to His devotees as the reservoir of all pleasure. But to others,
to unintelligent nondevotees, He was covered by His eternal potency.
In the prayers of Kunté in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam (1.8.18), it is said that the Lord is covered by the curtain of yoga-mäyä and thus ordinary people cannot understand Him. Kunté prays: "O my Lord, You are the maintainer of the entire universe, and devotional service to You is the highest religious principle. Therefore, I pray that You will also maintain me. Your transcendental form is covered by the yoga-mäyä. The brahmajyoti is the covering of the internal potency. May You kindly remove this glowing effulgence that impedes my seeing Your sac-cid-änanda-vigraha, Your eternal form of bliss and knowledge."
This yoga-mäyä curtain is also mentioned in the Fifteenth Chapter of the Gétä. The Supreme Personality of Godhead in His transcendental form of bliss and knowledge is covered by the eternal potency of brahmajyoti and the less intelligent impersonalists cannot see the Supreme on this account. Also in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.14.7) there is this prayer by Brahmä: "O Supreme Personality of Godhead, O Supersoul, O master of all mystery, who can calculate Your potency and pastimes in this world? You are always expanding Your eternal potency, and therefore no one can understand You. Learned scientists and learned scholars can examine the atomic constitution of the material world or even the planets, but still they are unable to calculate Your energy and potency, although You are present before them." The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Kåñëa, is not only unborn, but He is avyaya, inexhaustible. His eternal form is bliss and knowledge, and His energies are all inexhaustible.
Bg 7.26
TEXT
26
TEXT
vedah&
SaMaTaqTaaiNa vTaRMaaNaaiNa caJauRNa )
>aivZYaai<a c >aUTaaiNa Maa& Tau ved Na k-êNa )) 26 ))
vedähaà samatétäni
vartamänäni cärjuna
bhaviñyäëi ca bhütäni
mäà tu veda na kaçcana
veda—know; aham—I; sama—equally; atétäni—past; vartamänäni—present;
ca—and; arjuna—O
Arjuna; bhaviñyäëi—future; ca—also; bhütäni—living
entities; mäm—Me; tu—but;
veda—knows; na—not;
kaçcana—anyone.
TRANSLATION
O Arjuna, as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, I know everything
that has happened in the past, all that is happening in the present, and all
things that are yet to come. I also know all living entities; but Me no one
knows.
PURPORT
Here the question of personality and impersonality is clearly
stated. If Kåñëa, the form of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, is considered
by the impersonalists to be mäyä, to be material,
then He would, like the living entity, change His body and forget everything in
His past life. Anyone with a material body cannot remember his past life, nor
can he foretell his future life, nor can he predict the outcome of his present
life; therefore he cannot know what is happening in past, present and future.
Unless one is liberated from material contamination, he cannot know past, present
and future.
Unlike the ordinary human being, Lord Kåñëa clearly says that He completely knows what happened in the past, what is happening in the present, and what will happen in the future. In the Fourth Chapter we have seen that Lord Kåñëa remembers instructing Vivasvän, the sun-god, millions of years ago. Kåñëa knows every living entity because He is situated in every living being’s heart as the Supreme Soul. But despite His presence in every living entity as Supersoul and His presence beyond the material sky, as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the less intelligent cannot realize Him as the Supreme Person. Certainly the transcendental body of Çré Kåñëa is not perishable. He is just like the sun, and mayä is like the cloud. In the material world we can see that there is the sun and that there are clouds and different stars and planets. The clouds may cover all these in the sky temporarily, but this covering is only apparent to our limited vision. The sun, moon and stars are not actually covered. Similarly, mäyä cannot cover the Supreme Lord. By His internal potency He is not manifest to the less intelligent class of men. As it is stated in the third verse of this chapter, out of millions and millions of men, some try to become perfect in this human form of life, and out of thousands and thousands of such perfected men, hardly one can understand what Lord Kåñëa is. Even if one is perfected by realization of impersonal Brahman or localized Paramätmä, he cannot possibly understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëa, without being in Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 7.27
TEXT
wC^aÜezSaMauTQaeNa
ÜNÜMaaeheNa >aarTa )
SavR>aUTaaiNa SaMMaaeh& SaGaeR YaaiNTa ParNTaPa )) 27 ))
icchä-dveña-samutthena
dvandva-mohena bhärata
sarva-bhütäni sammohaà
sarge yänti parantapa
icchä—desire; dveña—hate; samutthena—born;
dvandva—duality; mohena—overcome;
bhärata—O scion of Bharata; sarva—all; bhütäni—living
entities; sammoham—into delusion; sarge—in creation; yänti—go;
parantapa—O conquerer of enemies.
TRANSLATION
O scion of Bharata [Arjuna], O conquerer of the foe, all living
entities are born into delusion, overcome by the dualities of desire and hate.
PURPORT
The real constitutional position of the living entity is that of
subordination to the Supreme Lord, who is pure knowledge. When one is deluded
into separation from this pure knowledge, he becomes controlled by illusory
energy and cannot understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The illusory
energy is manifested in the duality of desire and hate. Due to desire and hate,
the ignorant person wants to become one with the Supreme Lord and envies Kåñëa
as the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Pure devotees, who are not so deluded or
contaminated by desire and hate, can understand that Lord Çré Kåñëa appears by
His internal potencies, but those who are deluded by duality and nescience
think that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is created by material energies.
This is their misfortune. Such deluded persons, symptomatically, dwell in
dualities of dishonor and honor, misery and happiness, woman and man, good and
bad, pleasure and pain, etc., thinking, "This is my wife; this is my
house; I am the master of this house; I am the husband of this wife."
These are the dualities of delusion. Those who are so deluded by dualities are
completely foolish and therefore cannot understand the Supreme Personality of
Godhead.
Bg 7.28
TEXT
28
TEXT
Yaeza&
TvNTaGaTa& PaaPa& JaNaaNaa& Pau<Yak-MaR<aaMa( )
Tae ÜNÜMaaehiNaMauR¢-a >aJaNTae Maa& d*!v]Taa" )) 28 ))
yeñäà tv anta-gataà päpaà
janänäà puëya-karmaëäm
te dvandva-moha-nirmuktä
bhajante mäà dåòha-vratäù
yeñäm—whose; tu—but; anta-gatam—completely
eradicated; päpam—sin; janänäm—of
the persons; puëya—pious; karmaëäm—previous
activities; te—they; dvandva—duality;
moha—delusion; nirmuktäù—free
from; bhajante—worship; mäm—Me;
dåòha-vratäù—with determination.
TRANSLATION
Persons who have acted piously in previous lives and in this life,
whose sinful actions are completely eradicated and who are freed from the
duality of delusion, engage themselves in My service with determination.
PURPORT
Those eligible for elevation to the transcendental position are
mentioned in this verse. For those who are sinful, atheistic, foolish and
deceitful, it is very difficult to transcend the duality of desire and hate.
Only those who have passed their lives in practicing the regulative principles
of religion, who have acted piously and have conquered sinful reactions can
accept devotional service and gradually rise to the pure knowledge of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. Then, gradually, they can meditate in trance on
the Supreme Personality of Godhead. That is the process of being situated on
the spiritual platform. This elevation is possible in Kåñëa consciousness in
the association of pure devotees who can deliver one from delusion.
It is stated in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam that if one actually wants to be liberated he must render service to the devotees; but one who associates with materialistic people is on the path leading to the darkest region of existence. All the devotees of the Lord traverse this earth just to recover the conditioned souls from their delusion. The impersonalists do not know that forgetting their constitutional position as subordinate to the Supreme Lord is the greatest violation of God’s law. Unless one is reinstated in his own constitutional position, it is not possible to understand the Supreme Personality or to be fully engaged in His transcendental loving service with determination.
Bg 7.29
TEXT
29
TEXT
JaraMar<aMaae+aaYa
MaaMaaié[TYa YaTaiNTa Yae )
Tae b]ø TaiÜdu" k*-TòMaDYaaTMa& k-MaR cai%l/Ma( )) 29 ))
jarä-maraëa-mokñäya
mäm äçritya yatanti ye
te brahma tad viduù kåtsnam
adhyätmaà karma cäkhilam
jarä—old age; maraëa—death; mokñäya—for
the purpose of liberation; mäm—unto Me; äçritya—taking shelter of; yatanti—endeavor;
ye—all those; te—such
persons; brahma—Brahman; tat—actually
that; viduù—they know; kåtsnam—everything;
adhyätmam—transcendental; karma—fruitive
activities; ca—also; akhilam—entirely.
TRANSLATION
Intelligent persons who are endeavoring for liberation from old
age and death take refuge in Me in devotional service. They are actually
Brahman because they entirely know everything about transcendental and fruitive
activities.
PURPORT
Birth, death, old age and diseases affect this material body, but
not the spiritual body. There is no birth, death, old age and disease for the
spiritual body, so one who attains a spiritual body, becomes one of the
associates of the Supreme Personality of Godhead and engages in eternal
devotional service, is really liberated. Ahaà brahmäsmi:
I am spirit. It is said that one should understand that he is
Brahman—spirit soul. This Brahman conception of life is also in devotional
service, as described in this verse. The pure devotees are transcendentally situated
on the Brahman platform, and they know everything about transcendental and
material activities.
Four kinds of impure devotees who engage themselves in the transcendental service of the Lord achieve their respective goals, and by the grace of the Supreme Lord, when they are fully Kåñëa conscious, they actually enjoy spiritual association with the Supreme Lord. But those who are worshipers of demigods never reach the Supreme Lord in His supreme planet. Even the less intelligent Brahman-realized persons cannot reach the supreme planet of Kåñëa known as Goloka Våndävana. Only persons who perform activities in Kåñëa consciousness (mäm äçritya) are actually entitled to be called Brahman, because they are actually endeavoring to reach the Kåñëa planet. Such persons have no misgivings about Kåñëa, and thus they are factually Brahman.
Those who are engaged in worshiping the form or arcä of the Lord or who are engaged in meditation on the Lord simply for liberation from material bondage, also know, by the grace of the Lord, the purports of Brahman, adhibhüta, etc., as explained by the Lord in the next chapter.
Bg 7.30
TEXT
30
TEXT
SaaiDa>aUTaaiDadEv&
Maa& SaaiDaYaj& c Yae ivdu" )
Pa[Yaa<ak-ale/_iPa c Maa& Tae ivduYauR¢-ceTaSa" )) 30 ))
sädhibhütädhidaivaà mäà
sädhiyajïaà ca ye viduù
prayäëa-käle ’pi ca mäà
te vidur yukta-cetasaù
sa-adhibhüta—the
governing principle of the material manifestation; adhidaivam—underlying
all the demigods; mäm—Me; sa-adhiyajïam—sustaining
all sacrifices; ca—and; ye—those;
viduù—know; prayäëa—of
death; käle—at the time; api—even;
ca—and; mäm—Me; te—they; viduù—know; yukta-cetasaù—with steadfast mind.
TRANSLATION
Those who know Me as the Supreme Lord, as the governing principle
of the material manifestation, who know Me as the one underlying all the
demigods and as the one sustaining all sacrifices, can, with steadfast mind,
understand and know Me even at the time of death.
PURPORT
Persons acting in Kåñëa consciousness are never entirely deviated
from the path of understanding the Supreme Personality of Godhead. In the
transcendental association of Kåñëa consciousness, one can understand how the
Supreme Lord is the governing principle of the material manifestation and even
of the demigods. Gradually, by such transcendental association, one becomes
convinced of the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself, and at the time of
death such a Kåñëa conscious person can never forget Kåñëa. Naturally he is
thus promoted to the planet of the Supreme Lord, Goloka Våndävana.
This Seventh Chapter particularly explains how one can become a fully Kåñëa conscious person. The beginning of Kåñëa consciousness is association of persons who are Kåñëa conscious. Such association is spiritual and puts one directly in touch with the Supreme Lord, and, by His grace, one can understand Kåñëa to be the Supreme God. At the same time one can really understand the constitutional position of the living entity and how the living entity forgets Kåñëa and becomes entangled in material activities. By gradual development of Kåñëa consciousness in good association, the living entity can understand that due to forgetfulness of Kåñëa he has become conditioned by the laws of material nature. He can also understand that this human form of life is an opportunity to regain Kåñëa consciousness and that it should be fully utilized to attain the causeless mercy of the Supreme Lord.
Many subjects have been discussed in this chapter: the man in distress, the inquisitive man, the man in want of material necessities, knowledge of Brahman, knowledge of Paramätmä, liberation from birth, death and diseases, and worship of the Supreme Lord. However, he who is actually elevated in Kåñëa consciousness does not care for the different processes. He simply directly engages himself in activities of Kåñëa consciousness and thereby factually attains his constitutional position as eternal servitor of Lord Kåñëa. In such a situation he takes pleasure in hearing and glorifying the Supreme Lord in pure devotional service. He is convinced that by doing so, all his objectives will be fulfilled. This determined faith is called dåòha-vrata, and it is the beginning of bhakti-yoga or transcendental loving service. That is the verdict of all scriptures. This Seventh Chapter of the Gétä is the substance of that conviction.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the Seventh Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of Knowledge of the Absolute.
Bg 8. Attaining the Supreme
CHAPTER
EIGHT
Attaining the
Supreme
Bg 8.1
TEXT
1
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac
ik&- Tad(b]ø ik-MaDYaaTMa& ik&- k-MaR PauåzaetaMa )
AiDa>aUTa& c ik&- Pa[ae¢-MaiDadEv& ik-MauCYaTae )) 1 ))
arjuna
uväca
kià tad brahma kim adhyätmaà
kià karma puruñottama
adhibhütaà ca kià proktam
adhidaivaà kim ucyate
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna said;
kim—what; tat—that;
brahma—Brahman; kim—what;
adhyätmam—the self; kim—what;
karma—fruitive activities; puruñottama—O Supreme Person; adhibhütam—the
material manifestation; ca—and; kim—what; proktam—is
called; adhidaivam—the demigods; kim—what; ucyate—is
called.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna inquired: O my Lord, O Supreme Person, what is Brahman?
What is the self? What are fruitive activities? What is this material
manifestation? And what are the demigods? Please explain this to me.
PURPORT
In this chapter Lord Kåñëa answers these different questions of
Arjuna beginning with, "What is Brahman?" The Lord also explains karma, fruitive activities, devotional service and yoga principles, and devotional service in its pure
form. The Çrémad-Bhägavatam explains that the
Supreme Absolute Truth is known as Brahman, Paramätmä, and Bhagavän. In
addition, the living entity, individual soul, is also called Brahman. Arjuna
also inquires about ätmä, which refers to body,
soul and mind. According to the Vedic dictionary, ätmä refers
to the mind, soul, body and senses also.
Arjuna has addressed the Supreme Lord as Puruñottama, Supreme Person, which means that he was putting these questions not simply to a friend but to the Supreme Person, knowing Him to be the supreme authority able to give definitive answers.
Bg 8.2
TEXT
2
TEXT
AiDaYaj"
k-Qa& k-ae_}a dehe_iSMaNMaDauSaUdNa )
Pa[Yaa<ak-ale/ c k-Qa& jeYaae_iSa iNaYaTaaTMai>a" )) 2 ))
adhiyajïaù kathaà ko ’tra
dehe ’smin madhusüdana
prayäëa-käle ca kathaà
jïeyo ’si niyatätmabhiù
adhiyajïaù—the Lord of
sacrifice; katham—how; kaù—who;
atra—here; dehe—in
the body; asmin—in this; madhusüdana—O
Madhusüdana; prayäëa-käle—at the time of death; ca—and; katham—how; jïeyaù—be known; asi—You
can; niyata-ätmabhiù—by the self-controlled.
TRANSLATION
How does this Lord of sacrifice live in the body, and in which
part does He live, O Madhusüdana? And how can those engaged in devotional
service know You at the time of death?
PURPORT
The Lord of sacrifice accepts Indra and Viñëu. Viñëu is the chief
of the primal demigods, including Brahmä and Çiva, and Indra is the chief of
the administrative demigods. Both Indra and Viñëu are worshiped by yajïa performances. But here Arjuna asks who is
actually the Lord of yajïa (sacrifice), and how
is the Lord residing within the body of the living entity.
Arjuna addresses the Lord as Madhusüdana because Kåñëa once killed a demon named Madhu. Actually these questions, which are of the nature of doubts, should not have arisen in the mind of Arjuna because Arjuna is a Kåñëa conscious devotee. Therefore these doubts are like demons. Since Kåñëa is so expert in killing demons, Arjuna here addresses Him as Madhusüdana so that Kåñëa might kill the demonic doubts that arise in Arjuna’s mind.
Now the word prayäëa-käle in this verse is very significant because whatever we do in life will be tested at the time of death. Arjuna fears that at the time of death, those who are in Kåñëa consciousness will forget the Supreme Lord because at such a time body functions are disrupted and the mind may be in a panic-stricken state. Therefore Mahäräja Kulaçekhara, a great devotee, prays, “My dear Lord, may I die immediately now that I’m healthy so that the swan of my mind may enter into the stem of Thy lotus feet.” This metaphor is used because the swan often takes pleasure in entering the stem of the lotus flower-similarly, the mind of the pure devotee is drawn to the lotus feet of the Lord. Mahäräja Kulaçekhara fears that at the moment of death his throat will be so choked up that he will not be able to chant the holy names, so it is better to “die immediately.” Arjuna questions how one’s mind can remain fixed on Kåñëa’s lotus feet at such times.
Bg 8.3
TEXT
3
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
A+ar& b]ø ParMa& Sv>aavae_DYaaTMaMauCYaTae )
>aUTa>aavaeÙvk-rae ivSaGaR" k-MaRSa&ijTa" )) 3 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
akñaraà brahma paramaà
svabhävo ’dhyätmam ucyate
bhüta-bhävodbhava-karo
visargaù karma-saàjïitaù
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; akñaram—indestructible;
brahma—Brahman; paramam—transcendental;
svabhävaù—eternal nature; adhyätmam—the
self; ucyate—is called; bhüta-bhäva-udbhava-karaù—action
producing the material bodies of the living entities; visargaù—creation;
karma—fruitive activities; saàjïitaù—is called.
TRANSLATION
The Supreme Lord said, The indestructible, transcendental living
entity is called Brahman, and his eternal nature is called the self. Action
pertaining to the development of these material bodies is called karma, or
fruitive activities.
PURPORT
Brahman is indestructible and eternally existing, and its constitution
is not changed at any time. But beyond Brahman there is Parabrahman. Brahman
refers to the living entity, and Parabrahman refers to the Supreme Personality
of Godhead. The constitutional position of the living entity is different from
the position he takes in the material world. In material consciousness, his
nature is to try to be the lord of matter, but in spiritual (Kåñëa)
consciousness, his position is to serve the Supreme. When the living entity is
in material consciousness, he has to take on various bodies in the material
world. That is called karma, or varied creation
by the force of material consciousness.
In Vedic literature the living entity is called jévätmä and Brahman, but he is never called Parabrahman. The living entity (jévätmä) takes different positions—sometimes he merges into the dark material nature and identifies himself with matter, and sometimes he identifies himself with the superior spiritual nature. Therefore he is called the Supreme Lord’s marginal energy. According to his identification with material or spiritual nature, he receives a material or spiritual body. In material nature he may take a body from any of the 8,400,000 species of life, but in spiritual nature he has only one body. In material nature he is sometimes manifested as a man, demigod, an animal, a beast, bird, etc., according to his karma. To attain material heavenly planets and enjoy their facilities, he sometimes performs sacrifices (yajïa), but when his merit is exhausted, he returns to earth again in the form of a man.
ln the process of sacrifice, the living entity makes specific sacrifices to attain specific heavenly planets and consequently reaches them. When the merit of sacrifice is exhausted, then the living entity descends to earth in the form of rain, then takes on the form of grains, and the grains are eaten by man and transformed into semen, which impregnates a woman, and thus the living entity once again attains the human form to perform sacrifice and so repeat the same cycle. In this way, the living entity perpetually comes and goes on the material path. The Kåñëa conscious person, however, avoids such sacrifices. He takes directly to Kåñëa consciousness and thereby prepares himself to return to Godhead.
Impersonalist commentators on the Gétä unreasonably assume that Brahman takes the form of jéva in the material world, and to substantiate this they refer to Chapter Fifteen, verse 7, of the Gétä. But this verse also speaks of the living entity as “an eternal fragment of Myself.” The fragment of God, the living entity, may fall down into the material world, but the Supreme Lord (Acyuta) never falls down. Therefore this assumption that the Supreme Brahman assumes the form of jéva is not acceptable. It is important to remember that in Vedic literature Brahman (the living entity) is distinguished from Parabrahman (the Supreme Lord).
Bg 8.4
TEXT
4
TEXT
AiDa>aUTa&
+arae >aav" PauåzêaiDadEvTaMa( )
AiDaYajae_hMaeva}a dehe deh>a*Taa& vr )) 4 ))
adhibhütaà kñaro bhävaù
puruñaç cädhidaivatam
adhiyajïo ’ham evätra
dehe deha-bhåtäà vara
adhibhütam—the physical
manifestation; kñaraù—constantly changing; bhävaù—nature; puruñaù—the
universal form; ca—and; adhidaivatam—including
all demigods like the sun and moon; adhiyajïaù—the
Supersoul; aham—I (Kåñëa); eva—certainly; atra—in
this; dehe—body; deha-bhåtäm—of
the embodied; vara—the Supreme.
TRANSLATION
Physical nature is known to be endlessly mutable. The universe is
the cosmic form of the Supreme Lord, and I am that Lord represented as the
Supersoul, dwelling in the heart of every embodied being.
PURPORT
The physical nature is constantly changing. Material bodies
generally pass through six stages: they are born, they grow, they remain for
some duration, they produce some by-products, they dwindle, and then they
vanish. This physical nature is called adhibhütam. Because
it is created at a certain point and will be annihilated at a certain point,
the conception of the universal form of the Supreme Lord that includes all the
demigods and their different planets is called adhidaivatam.
The individual soul (jéva) accompanies the
body. The Supersoul, a plenary representation of Lord Kåñëa, is called the
Paramätmä or adhiyajïa and is situated in the
heart. The word eva is particularly important in
the context of this verse because by this word the Lord stresses that the
Paramätmä is not different from Him. The Supersoul, the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, seated beside the individual soul, is the witness of the individual
soul’s activities and is the source of consciousness. The Supersoul gives the jéva an opportunity to act freely, and He witnesses his
activities. The functions of all these different manifestations of the Supreme
Lord automatically become clarified for the pure Kåñëa conscious devotee
engaged in transcendental service of the Lord. The gigantic universal form of
the Lord called adhidaivatam is contemplated by
the neophyte who cannot approach the Supreme Lord in His manifestation as
Supersoul. The neophyte is advised to contemplate the universal form whose legs
are considered the lowet planets and whose eyes are considered the sun and
moon, and whose head is considered the upper planetary system.
Bg 8.5
TEXT
5
TEXT
ANTak-ale/ c
MaaMaev SMarNMau¤-a k-le/vrMa( )
Ya" Pa[YaaiTa Sa MaÙav& YaaiTa NaaSTYa}a Sa&XaYa" )) 5 ))
anta-käle ca mäm eva
smaran muktvä kalevaram
yaù prayäti sa mad-bhävaà
yäti nästy atra saàçayaù
anta-käle—at the end
of life; ca—also; mäm—unto
Me; eva—certainly; smaran—remembering;
muktvä—quitting; kalevaram—the
body; yaù—he who; prayäti—goes;
saù—he; mad-bhävam—My
nature; yati—achieves; na—not;
asti—there is; atra—here;
saàçayaù—doubt.
TRANSLATION
And whoever, at the time of death, quits his body, remembering Me
alone, at once attains My nature. Of this there is no doubt.
PURPORT
In this verse the importance of Kåñëa consciousness is stressed.
Anyone who quits his body in Kåñëa consciousness is at once transferred to the
transcendental abode of the Supreme Lord. The word smaran
(remembering) is important. Remembrance of Kåñëa is not possible for the
impure soul who has not practiced Kåñëa consciousness in devotional service. To
remember Kåñëa one should chant the mahämantra, Hare
Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/ Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma,
Hare Hare, incessantly, following in the footsteps of Lord Caitanya, being more
tolerant than the tree, humbler than the grass and offering all respect to
others without requiring respect in return. In such a way one will be able to
depart from the body successfully remembering Kåñëa and so attain the supreme
goal.
Bg 8.6
TEXT
6
TEXT
Ya& Ya&
vaiPa SMarN>aav& TYaJaTYaNTae k-le/vrMa( )
Ta& TaMaevEiTa k-aENTaeYa Sada TaÙav>aaivTa" )) 6 ))
yaà yaà väpi smaran bhävaà
tyajaty ante kalevaram
taà tam evaiti kaunteya
sadä tad-bhäva-bhävitaù
yam yam—whatever; vä—either; api—also; smaran—remembering; bhävam—nature;
tyajati—give up; ante—at
the end; kalevaram—this body; tam tam—similar; eva—certainly;
eti—gets; kaunteya—O
son of Kunté; sadä—always; tat—that; bhäva—state of
being; bhävitaù—remembering.
TRANSLATION
Whatever state of being one remembers when he quits his body, that
state he will attain without fail.
PURPORT
The process of changing one’s nature at the critical moment of
death is here explained. How can one die in the proper state of mind? Mahäräja
Bharata thought of a deer at the time of death and so was transferred to that
form of life. However, as a deer, Mahäräja Bharata could remember his past
activities. Of course the cumulative effect of the thoughts and actions of
one’s life influences one’s thoughts at the moment of death; therefore the
actions of this life determine one’s future state of being. If one is
transcendentally absorbed in Kåñëa’s service,then his next body will be
transcendental (spiritual), not physical. Therefore the chanting of Hare Kåñëa
is the best process for successfully changing one’s state of being to
transcendental life.
Bg 8.7
TEXT
7
TEXT
TaSMaaTSaveRzu
k-ale/zu MaaMaNauSMar YauDYa c )
MaYYaiPaRTaMaNaaebuiÖMaaRMaevEZYaSYaSa&XaYa" )) 7 ))
tasmät sarveñu käleñu
mäm anusmara yudhya ca
mayy arpita-mano-buddhir
mäm evaiñyasy asaàçayaù
tasmät—therefore; sarveñu—always; käleñu—time;
mäm—unto Me; anusmara—go
on remembering; yudhya—fight; ca—also; mayi—unto Me; arpita—surrender; manaù—mind;
buddhiù—intellect; mäm—unto
Me; eva—surely; eñyasi—will
attain; asaàçayaù—beyond a doubt.
TRANSLATION
Therefore, Arjuna, you should always think of Me in the form of
Kåñëa and at the same time carry out your prescribed duty of fighting. With
your activities dedicated to Me and your mind and intelligence fixed on Me, you
will attain Me without doubt.
PURPORT
This instruction to Arjuna is very important for all men engaged
in material activities. The Lord does not say that one should give up his
prescribed duties or engagements. One can continue them and at the same time
think of Kåñëa by chanting Hare Kåñëa. This will free one from material
contamination and engage the mind and intelligence in Kåñëa. By chanting
Kåñëa’s names, one will be transferred to the supreme planet, Kåñëaloka,
without a doubt.
Bg 8.8
TEXT
8
TEXT
A>YaaSaYaaeGaYau¢e-Na
ceTaSaa NaaNYaGaaiMaNaa )
ParMa& Pauåz& idVYa& YaaiTa PaaQaaRNauicNTaYaNa( )) 8 ))
abhyäsa-yoga-yuktena
cetasä nänya-gäminä
paramaà puruñaà divyaà
yäti pärthänucintayan
abhyäsa—practice; yoga-yuktena—being engaged in meditation; cetasä—by the mind and intelligence; na anya-gäminä—without being deviated; paramam—the Supreme; puruñam—Personality
of Godhead; divyam—transcendental; yäti—achieves; pärtha—O
son of Påthä; anucintayan—constantly thinking of.
TRANSLATION
He who meditates on the Supreme Personality of Godhead, his mind
constantly engaged in remembering Me, undeviated from the path, he, O Pärtha
[Arjuna], is sure to reach Me.
PURPORT
In this verse Lord Kåñëa stresses the importance of remembering
Him. One’s memory of Kåñëa is revived by chanting the mahämantra,
Hare Kåñëa. By this practice of chanting and hearing the sound vibration
of the Supreme Lord, one’s ear, tongue and mind are engaged. This mystic
meditation is very easy to practice, and it helps one attain the Supreme Lord. Puruñam means enjoyer. Although living entities belong
to the marginal energy of the Supreme Lord, they are in material contamination.
They think themselves enjoyers, but they are not the supreme enjoyer. Here it
is clearly stated that the supreme enjoyer is the Supreme Personality of
Godhead in His different manifestations and plenary expansions as Näräyaëa,
Väsudeva, etc.
The devotees can constantly think of the object of worship, the Supreme Lord, in any of His features, Näräyaëa, Kåñëa, Räma, etc., by chanting Hare Kåñëa. This practice will purify him, and at the end of his life, due to his constant chanting, he will be transferred to the kingdom of God. Yoga practice is meditation on the Supersoul within; similarly, by chanting Hare Kåñëa one fixes his mind always on the Supreme Lord. The mind is fickle, and therefore it is necessary to engage the mind by force to think of Kåñëa. One example often given is that of the caterpillar that thinks of becoming a butterfly and so is transformed into a butterfly in the same life. Similarly, if we constantly think of Kåñëa, it is certain that at the end of our lives we shall have the same bodily constitution as Kåñëa.
Bg 8.9
TEXT
9
TEXT
k-iv&
Paura<aMaNauXaaiSaTaar‚
Ma<aaer<aqYaa&SaMaNauSMareÛ" )
SavRSYa DaaTaarMaicNTYaæPa‚
MaaidTYav<a| TaMaSa" ParSTaaTa(
)) 9 ))
kavià puräëam anuçäsitäram
aëor aëéyäàsam anusmared yaù
sarvasya dhätäram acintya-rüpam
äditya-varëaà tamasaù parastät
kavim—one who
knows everything; puräëam—the oldest; anuçäsitäram—the controller; aëoù—of
the atom; aëéyäàsam—smaller than; anusmaret—always thinking; yaù—one
who; sarvasya—of everything; dhätäram—maintainer; acintya—inconceivable;
rüpam—form; äditya-varëam—illuminated
like the sun; tamasaù—of the darkness; parastät—transcendental.
TRANSLATION
One should meditate upon the Supreme Person as the one who knows
everything, as He who is the oldest, who is the controller, who is smaller than
the smallest, who is the maintainer of everything, who is beyond all material
conception, who is inconceivable, and who is always a person. He is luminous
like the sun and, being transcendental, is beyond this material nature.
PURPORT
The process of thinking of the Supreme is mentioned in this verse.
The foremost point is that He is not impersonal or void. One cannot meditate on
something impersonal or void. That is very difficult. The process of thinking
of Kåñëa, however, is very easy and is factually stated herein. First of all,
He is puruña, spiritual, Räma and Kåñëa, and is
described herein as kavim; that is, He knows
past, present and future and therefore knows everything. He is the oldest
personality because He is the origin of everything; everything is born out of
Him. He is also the supreme controller of the universe, maintainer and instructor
of humanity. He is smaller than the smallest. The living entity is one 10,000th
part of the tip of a hair, but the Lord is so inconceivably small that He
enters into the heart of this particle. Therefore He is called smaller than the
smallest. As the Supreme, He can enter into the atom and into the heart of the
smallest and control him as the Supersoul. Although so small, He is still
all-pervading and is maintaining everything. By Him all these planetary systems
are sustained. We often wonder how these big planets are floating in the air.
It is stated here that the Supreme Lord, by His inconceivable energy, is
sustaining all these big planets and systems of galaxies. The word acintya (inconceivable) is very significant in this
connection. God’s energy is beyond our conception, beyond our thinking
jurisdiction, and is therefore called inconceivable (acintya).
Who can argue this point? He pervades this material world and yet is
beyond it. We cannot even comprehend this material world, which is
insignificant compared to the spiritual world—so how can we comprehend what is
beyond? Acintya means that which is beyond this
material world, that which our argument, logic and philosophical speculation
cannot touch, that which is inconceivable. Therefore intelligent persons,
avoiding useless argument and speculation, should accept what is stated in
scriptures like the Vedas, Gétä, and Çrémad-Bhägavatam and follow the principles they set
down. This will lead one to understanding.
Bg 8.10
TEXT
10
TEXT
Pa[Yaa<ak-ale/
MaNaSaacle/Na
>a¢-ya Yau¢-ae YaaeGable/Na cEv )
>a]uvaeMaRDYae Pa[a<aMaaveXYa SaMYa‚
KSa Ta& Par& PauåzMauPaEiTa
idVYaMa( )) 10 ))
prayäëa-käle manasäcalena
bhaktyä yukto yoga-balena caiva
bhruvor madhye präëam äveçya samyak
sa taà paraà puruñam upaiti divyam
prayäëa-käle—at the time
of death; manasä—by the mind; acalena—without being deviated; bhaktyä—in
full devotion; yuktaù—engaged; yoga-balena—by the power of mystic yoga; ca—also; eva—certainly;
bhruvoù—between the two eyebrows; madhye—in; präëam—the
life air; äveçya—establishing; samyak—completely; saù—he;
tam—that; param—transcendental;
puruñam—Personality of Godhead; upaiti—achieves; divyam—in
the spiritual kingdom.
TRANSLATION
One who, at the time of death, fixes his life air between the
eyebrows and in full devotion engages himself in remembering the Supreme Lord,
will certainly attain to the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
PURPORT
In this verse it is clearly stated that at the time of death the
mind must be fixed in devotion on the Supreme Godhead. For those practiced in yoga, it is recommended that they raise the life force
between the eyebrows, but for a pure devotee who does not practice such yoga, the mind should always be engaged in Kåñëa
consciousness so that at death he can remember the Supreme by His grace. This
is explained in verse fourteen.
The particular use of the word yoga-balena is significant in this verse because without practice of yoga one cannot come to this transcendental state of being at the time of death. One cannot suddenly remember the Supreme Lord at death unless he is practiced in some yoga system, especially the system of bhakti-yoga. Since one’s mind at death is very disturbed, one should practice transcendence through yoga during one’s life.
Bg 8.11
TEXT
11
TEXT
Yad+ar& vedivdae
vdiNTa
ivXaiNTa YaÛTaYaae vqTaraGaa" )
YaidC^NTaae b]øcYa| criNTa
Tatae Pad& Sa°he<a Pa[v+Yae )) 11
))
yad akñaraà veda-vido vadanti
viçanti yad yatayo véta-rägäù
yad icchanto brahmacaryaà caranti
tat te padaà saìgraheëa pravakñye
yat—that which; akñaram—inexhaustible; veda-vidaù—a
person conversant with the Vedas; vadanti—say; viçanti—enters; yat—in
which; yatayaù—great sages; véta-rägäh—in the renounced order of life; yat—that which; icchantaù—desiring;
brahmacaryam—celibacy; caranti—practices;
tat—that; te—unto
you; padam—situation; saìgraheëa—in
summary; pravakñye—I shall explain.
TRANSLATION
Persons learned in the Vedas, who utter omkära and who are great
sages in the renounced order, enter into Brahman. Desiring such perfection, one
practices celibacy. I shall now explain to you this process by which one may
attain salvation.
PURPORT
Lord Kåñëa explains that Brahman, although one without a second,
has different manifestations and features. For the impersonalists, the syllable
om is identical with Brahman. Kåñëa here explains
the impersonal Brahman in which the renounced order of sages enter.
In the Vedic system of knowledge, students, from the very beginning, are taught to vibrate om and learn of the ultimate impersonal Brahman by living with the spiritual master in complete celibacy. In this way they realize two of Brahman’s features. This practice is very essential for the student’s advancement in spiritual life, but at the moment such brahmacäré (unmarried celibate) life is not at all possible. The social construction of the world has changed so much that there is no possibility of one’s practicing celibacy from the beginning of student life. Throughout the world there are many institutions for different departments of knowledge, but there is no recognized institution where students can be educated in the brahmacäré principles. Unless one practices celibacy, advancement in spiritual life is very difficult. Therefore Lord Caitanya has announced, according to the scriptural injunctions for this age of Kali, that no process of realizing the Supreme is possible except the chanting of the holy name of Lord Kåñëa: Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare, Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare.
Bg 8.12
TEXT
12
TEXT
SavRÜarai<a
Sa&YaMYa MaNaae ôid iNaåDYa c )
MaUDNYaaRDaaYaaTMaNa" Pa[a<aMaaiSQaTaae YaaeGaDaar<aaMa( )) 12 ))
sarva-dväräëi saàyamya
mano hådi nirudhya ca
mürdhny ädhäyätmanaù präëam
ästhito yoga-dhäraëäm
sarva-dväräëi—all the
doors of the body; saàyamya—controlling; manaù—mind; hådi—in the
heart; nirudhya—confined; ca—also;
mürdhni—on the head; ädhäya—fixed; ätmanaù—soul; präëam—the
life air; ästhitaù—situated; yoga-dhäraëäm—the yogic situation.
TRANSLATION
The yogic situation is that of detachment from all sensual
engagements. Closing all the doors of the senses and fixing the mind on the
heart and the life air at the top of the head, one establishes himself in yoga.
PURPORT
To practice yoga, as suggested here,
one first has to close the door of all sense enjoyment. This practice is called
pratyähära, or withdrawing the senses from the
sense objects. Sense organs for acquiring knowledge, such as the eyes, ears,
nose, tongue and touch, should be fully controlled and should not be allowed to
engage in self-gratification. In this way the mind focuses on the Supersoul in
the heart and the life force is raised to the top of the head. In the Sixth
Chapter this process is described in detail. But as mentioned before, this
practice is not practical in this age. The best process is Kåñëa consciousness.
If one is always able to fix his mind on Kåñëa in devotional service, it is
very easy for him to remain in an undisturbed transcendental trance, or in samädhi.
Bg 8.13
TEXT
13
TEXT
p
wTYaek-a+ar& b]ø VYaahrNMaaMaNauSMarNa( )
Ya" Pa[YaaiTa TYaJaNdeh& Sa YaaiTa ParMaa& GaiTaMa( )) 13 ))
oà ity ekäkñaraà brahma
vyäharan mäm anusmaran
yaù prayäti tyajan dehaà
sa yäti paramäà gatim
om—the
combination of letters, omkära; iti—thus; eka-akñaram—supreme, indestructible; brahma—absolute; vyäharan—vibrating;
mäm—Me (Kåñëa); anusmaran—remembering;
yaù—anyone; prayäti—leaves;
tyajan—quitting; deham—this
body; saù—he; yäti—achieves;
paramäm—supreme; gatim—destination.
TRANSLATION
After being situated in this yoga practice and vibrating the
sacred syllable om, the supreme combination of letters, if one thinke of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead and quits his body, he will certainly reach the
spiritual planets.
PURPORT
It is clearly stated here that om,
Brahman, and Lord Kåñëa are not different. The impersonal sound of Kåñëa is om, but the sound Hare Kåñëa contains om. It is clearly recommended in this age that if one
quits his body at the end of this life chanting the mahämantra,
Hare Kåñëa, he will reach the spiritual planets. Similarly, those who are
devotees of Kåñëa enter the Kåñëa planet or Goloka Våndävana, whereas the
impersonalists remain in the brahmajyoti. The
personalists also enter many innumerable planets in the spiritual sky known as
Vaikuëöhas.
Bg 8.14
TEXT
14
TEXT
ANaNYaceTaa"
SaTaTa& Yaae Maa& SMariTa iNaTYaXa" )
TaSYaah& Saul/>a" PaaQaR iNaTYaYau¢-SYa YaaeiGaNa" )) 14 ))
ananya-cetäù satataà
yo mäà smarati nityaçaù
tasyähaà sulabhaù pärtha
nitya-yuktasya yoginaù
ananya-cetäù—without
deviation; satatam—always; yaù—anyone; mäm—Me
(Kåñëa); smarati—remembers; nityaçaù—regularly; tasya—to
him; aham—I am; sulabhaù—very
easy to achieve; pärtha—O son of Påthä; nitya—regularly; yuktasya—engaged;
yoginaù—of the devotee.
TRANSLATION
For one who remembers Me without deviation, I am easy to obtain, O
son of Påthä, because of his constant engagement in devotional service.
PURPORT
ln this verse the bhakti-yoga of the
unalloyed devotees of the Supreme Godhead is described. The preceeding verses
mention four different kinds of devotees—the distressed, the inquisitive, those
who seek material gain, and the speculative philosophers. Different processes
of liberation from material entanglement have also been described: karma-yoga, jïäna-yoga, and haöha-yoga.
But here bhakti-yoga, without any mixture
of these, is mentioned. In bhakti-yoga the
devotees desire nothing but Kåñëa. The pure bhakti devotee
does not desire promotion to heavenly planets, nor does he seek salvation or
liberation from material entanglement. A pure devotee does not desire anything.
In the Caitanya-caritämåta the pure devotee is
called niñkäma, which means he has no desire for
self-interest. Perfect peace belongs to him alone, not to them who strive for
personal gain. The pure devotee only wants to please the Supreme Lord, and so
the Lord says that for anyone who is unflinchingly devoted to Him, He is easy
to attain. The devotee can render service to any of the transcendental forms of
the Supreme Lord, and he meets with none of the problems that plague the
practitioners of other yogas. Bhakti-yoga is very
simple and pure and easy to perform. One can begin by simply chanting Hare
Kåñëa. Kåñëa is very merciful to those who engage in His service, and He helps
in various ways that devotee who is fully surrendered to Him so he can
understand Him as He is. The Lord gives such a devotee sufficient intelligence
so that ultimately the devotee can attain Him in His spiritual kingdom.
The special qualification of the pure devotee is that he is always thinking of Kåñëa without considering the time or place. There should be no impediments. He should be able to carry out his service anywhere and at any time. Some say that the devotee should remain in holy places like Våndävana or some holy town where the Lord lived, but a pure devotee can live anywhere and create the atmosphere of Våndävana by his devotional service. It was Çré Advaita who told Lord Caitanya, “Wherever You are, O Lord—there is Våndavana.”
A pure devotee constantly remembers Kåñëa and meditates upon Him. These are qualifications of the pure devotee for whom the Lord is most easily attainable. Bhakti-yoga is the system that the Gétä recommends above all others. Generally, the bhakti-yogés are engaged in five different ways: 1) çänta-bhakta, engaged in devotional service in neutrality; 2) däsya-bhakta, engaged in devotional service as servant; 3) säkhya-bhakta, engaged as friend; 4) vätsalya-bhakta, engaged as parent; and 5) mädhurya-bhakta, engaged as conjugal lover of the Supreme Lord. In any of these ways, the pure devotee is always constantly engaged in the transcendental loving service of the Supreme Lord and cannot forget the Supreme Lord, and so for him the Lord is easily attained. A pure devotee cannot forget the Supreme Lord for a moment, and similarly, the Supreme Lord cannot forget His pure devotee for a moment. This is the great blessing of the Kåñëa conscious process of chanting the mahämantra, Hare Kåñëa.
Bg 8.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
MaaMauPaeTYa
PauNaJaRNMa du"%al/YaMaXaaìTaMa( )
NaaPanuviNTa MahaTMaaNa" Sa&iSaiÖ& ParMaa& GaTaa" )) 15
))
mäm upetya punar janma
duùkhälayam açäçvatam
näpnuvanti mahätmänaù
saàsiddhià paramäà gatäù
mäm—unto Me; upetya—achieving; punaù—again;
janma—birth; duùkha-älayam—place
of miseries; açäçvatam—temporary; na—never; äpnuvanti—attain;
mahätmänaù—the great souls; saàsiddhim—perfection; paramäm—ultimate;
gatäù—achieved.
TRANSLATION
After attaining Me, the great souls, who are yogés in devotion,
never return to this temporary world, which is full of miseries, because they
have attained the highest perfection.
PURPORT
Since this temporary material world is full of the miseries of
birth, old age, disease and death, naturally he who achieves the highest
perfection and attains the supreme planet, Kåñëaloka, Goloka Våndävana, does
not wish to return. The supreme planet is described in Vedic literature as
beyond our material vision, and it is considered the highest goal. The mahätmäs (great souls) receive transcendental messages
from the realized devotees and thus gradually develop devotional service in
Kåñëa consciousness and become so absorbed in transcendental service that they
no longer desire elevation to any of the material planets, nor do they even
want to be transferred to any spiritual planet. They only want Kåñëa’s
association and nothing else. Such great souls in Kåñëa consciousness attain
the highest perfection of life. In other words, they are the supreme souls.
Bg 8.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
Aab]ø>auvNaaçaek-a"
PauNaraviTaRNaae_JauRNa )
MaaMauPaeTYa Tau k-aENTaeYa PauNaJaRNMa Na ivÛTae )) 16 ))
ä-brahma-bhuvanäl lokäù
punar ävartino ’rjuna
mäm upetya tu kaunteya
punar janma na vidyate
äbrahma—up to the
Brahmaloka planet; bhuvanät—from the planetary
systems; lokäù—planets; punaù—again;
ävartinaù—returning; arjuna—O
Arjuna; mäm—unto Me; upetya—arriving;
tu—but; kaunteya—O
son of Kunté; punaù janma—rebirth; na—never; vidyate—takes
to.
TRANSLATION
From the highest planet in the material world down to the lowest,
all are places of misery wherein repeated birth and death take place. But one
who attains to My abode, O son of Kunté, never takes birth again.
PURPORT
All kinds of yogés—karma, jïäna, haöha, etc.—eventually have to attain
devotional perfection in bhakti-yoga, or Kåñëa
consciousness, before they can go to Kåñëa’s transcendental abode and never
return. Those who attain the highest material planets or the planets of the
demigods are again subjected to repeated birth and death. As persons on earth
are elevated to higher planets, people in higher planets such as Brahmaloka,
Candraloka and Indraloka fall down to earth. The practice of sacrifice called païcägni-vidyä, recommended in the Kaöha Upaniñad, enables one to achieve Brahmaloka, but
if, in Brahmaloka, one does not cultivate Kåñëa consciousness, then he must
return to earth. Those who progress in Kåñëa consciousness in the higher planets
are gradually elevated to higher and higher planets and at the time of
universal devastation are transferred to the eternal spiritual kingdom. When
there is devastation of this material universe, Brahmä and his devotees, who
are constantly engaged in Kåñëa consciousness, are all transferred to the
spiritual universe and to specific spiritual planets according to their
desires.
Bg 8.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
SahóYauGaPaYaRNTaMahYaRd(b]ø<aae
ivdu" )
rai}a& YauGaSahóaNTaa& Tae_haera}aivdae JaNaa" )) 17 ))
sahasra-yuga-paryantam
ahar yad brahmaëo viduù
rätrià yuga-sahasräntäà
te ’ho-rätra-vido janäù
sahasra—thousand; yuga—millenniums; prayantam—including;
ahaù—day; yat—that;
brahmaëaù—of Brahmä; viduù—know
it; rätrim—night; yuga—millenniums;
sahasra-antäm—similarly, at the end of one
thousand; te—that; ahaù-rätra—day
and night; vidaù—understand; janäù—people.
TRANSLATION
By human calculation, a thousand ages taken together is the
duration of Brahmä’s one day. And such also is the duration of his night.
PURPORT
The duration of the material universe is limited. It is manifested
in cycles of kalpas. A kalpa
is a day of Brahmä, and one day of Brahmä consists of a thousand cycles of four
yugas or ages: Satya, Tretä, Dväpara, and Kali.
The cycle of Satya is characterized by virtue, wisdom and religion, there being
practically no ignorance and vice, and the yuga lasts
1,728,000 years. In the Tretä-yuga vice is introduced, and this yuga lasts 1,296,000 years. In the Dväpara-yuga there
is an even greater decline in virtue and religion, vice increasing, and this yuga lasts 864,000 years. And finally in Kali-yuga (the
yuga we have now been experiencing over the past
5,000 years) there is an abundance of strife, ignorance, irreligion and vice,
true virtue being practically nonexistent, and this yuga
lasts 432,000 years. In Kali-yuga vice increases to such a point that at
the termination of the yuga the Supreme Lord
Himself appears as the Kalki avatara, vanquishes
the demons, saves His devotees, and commences another Satya-yuga. Then the
process is set rolling again. These four yugas, rotating
a thousand times, comprise one day of Brahmä, the creator god, and the same
number comprise one night. Brahmä lives one hundred of such “years” and then
dies. These “hundred years” by earth calculations total to 311 trillion and 40
million earth years. By these calculations the life of Brahmä seems fantastic
and interminable, but from the viewpoint of eternity it is as brief as a
lightning flash. In the causal ocean there are innumerable Brahmäs rising and
disappearing like bubbles in the Atlantic. Brahmä and his creation are all part
of the material universe, and therefore they are in constant flux.
In the material universe not even Brahmä is free from the process of birth, old age, disease and death. Brahmä, however, is directly engaged in the service of the Supreme Lord in the management of this universe—therefore he at once attains liberation. Elevated sannyäsés are promoted to Brahmä’s particular planet, Brahmaloka, which is the highest planet in the material universe and which survives all the heavenly planets in the upper strata of the planetary system, but in due course Brahmä and all inhabitants of Brahmaloka are subject to death, according to the law of material nature.
Bg 8.18
TEXT
18
TEXT
AVYa¢-aÜy¢-Ya"
SavaR" Pa[>avNTYahraGaMae )
ra}YaaGaMae Pa[l/IYaNTae Ta}aEvaVYa¢-Sa&jke- )) 18 ))
avyaktäd vyaktayaù sarväù
prabhavanty ahar-ägame
rätry-ägame praléyante
tatraivävyakta-saàjïake
avyaktät—from the
unmanifest; vyaktayaù—living entities; sarväù—all; prabhavanti—come
into being; ahaù-ägame—at the beginning of the
day; rätri-ägame—at the fall of night; praléyante—are annihilated; tatra—there;
eva—certainly; avyakta—the
unmanifest; saàjïake—called.
TRANSLATION
When Brahmä’s day is manifest, this multitude of living entities
comes into being, and at the arrival of Brahmä’s night they are all
annihilated.
PURPORT
The less intelligent jévas try to
remain within this material world and are accordingly elevated and degraded in
the various planetary systems. During the daytime of Brahmä they exhibit their
activities, and at the coming of Brahmä’s night they are annihilated. In the
day they receive various bodies for material activities, and at night these
bodies perish. The jévas (individual souls)
remain compact in the body of Viñëu and again and again are manifest at the
arrival of Brahmä’s day. When Brahmä’s life is finally finished, they are all
annihilated and remain unmanifest for millions and millions of years. Finally,
when Brahmä is born again in another millennium, they are again manifest. In
this way the jévas are captivated by the material
world. However, those intelligent beings who take to Kåñëa consciousness and
chant Hare Kåñëa, Hare Räma in devotional service transfer themselves, even in
this life, to the spiritual planet of Kåñëa and become eternally blissful
there, not being subject to such rebirths.
Bg 8.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
>aUTaGa]aMa"
Sa WvaYa& >aUTva >aUTva Pa[l/IYaTae )
ra}YaaGaMae_vXa" PaaQaR Pa[>avTYahraGaMae )) 19 ))
bhüta-grämaù sa eväyaà
bhütvä bhütvä praléyate
rätry-ägame ’vaçaù pärtha
prabhavaty ahar-ägame
bhüta-grämaù—the
aggregate of all living entities; saù—they; eva—certainly; ayam—this;
bhütvä bhütvä—taking birth; praléyate—annihilate; rätri—night;
ägame—on arrival; avaçaù—automatically;
pärtha—O son of Påthä; prabhavanti—manifest;
ahaù—during daytime; ägame—on
arrival.
TRANSLATION
Again and again the day comes, and this host of beings is active;
and again the night falls, O Pärtha, and they are helplessly dissolved.
Bg 8.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
ParSTaSMaatau
>aavae_NYaae_VYa¢-ae_VYa¢-aTSaNaaTaNa" )
Ya" Sa SaveRzu >aUTaezu NaXYaTSau Na ivNaXYaiTa )) 20 ))
paras tasmät tu bhävo ’nyo
’vyakto ’vyaktät sanätanaù
yaù sa sarveñu bhüteñu
naçyatsu na vinaçyati
paraù—transcendental;
tasmät—from that; tu—but;
bhävaù—nature; anyaù—another;
avyaktaù—unmanifest; avyaktät—from
the unmanifest; sanätanaù—eternal; yaù—that; saù—which; sarveñu—all; bhüteñu—manifestation;
naçyatsu—being annihilated; na—never; vinaçyati—annihilated.
TRANSLATION
Yet there is another nature, which is eternal and is
transcendental to this manifested and unmanifested matter. It is supreme and is
never annihilated. When all in this world is annihilated, that part remains as
it is.
PURPORT
Kåñëa’s superior spiritual energy is transcendental and eternal.
It is beyond all the changes of material nature, which is manifest and
annihilated during the days and nights of Brahmä. Kåñëa’s superior energy is
completely opposite in quality to material nature. Superior and inferior nature
are explained in the Seventh Chapter.
Bg 8.21
TEXT
21
TEXT
AVYa¢-ae_+ar
wTYau¢-STaMaahu" ParMaa& GaiTaMa( )
Ya& Pa[aPYa Na iNavTaRNTae TaÖaMa ParMa& MaMa )) 21 ))
avyakto ’kñara ity uktas
tam ähuù paramäà gatim
yaà präpya na nivartante
tad dhäma paramaà mama
avyaktaù—unmanifested;
akñaraù—infallible; iti—thus;
uktaù—said; tam—that
which; ähuù—is known; paramäm—ultimate;
gatim—destination; yam—that
which; präpya—gaining; na—never;
nivartante—comes back; tat-dhäma—that
abode; paramam—supreme; mama—Mine.
TRANSLATION
That supreme abode is called unmanifested and infallible, and it
is the supreme destination. When one goes there, he never comes back. That is
My supreme abode.
PURPORT
The supreme abode of the Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, is
described in the Brahma-saàhitä as cintämaëi-dhäma, a place where all desires are
fulfilled. The supreme abode of Lord Kåñëa known as Goloka Våndävana is full of
palaces made of touchstone. There are also trees which are called “desire
trees” that supply any type of eatable upon demand, and there are cows known as
surabhi cows which supply a limitless supply of
milk. In this abode, the Lord is served by hundreds of thousands of goddesses
of fortune (Lakñmés), and He is called Govinda, the primal Lord and the cause
of all causes. The Lord is accustomed to blow His flute (venum
kvanantam). His transcendental form is the most attractive in all the
worlds—His eyes are like the lotus petals and the color of His body like
clouds. He is so attractive that His beauty excels that of thousands of cupids.
He wears saffron cloth, a garland around His neck and a peacock feather in His
hair. In the Gétä Lord Krñëa gives only a small
hint of His personal abode (Goloka Våndävana) which is the supermost planet in
the spiritual kingdom. A vivid description is given in the Brahma-saàhitä. Vedic literature states that there is
nothing superior to the abode of the Supreme Godhead, and that that abode is
the ultimate destination. When one attains to it, he never returns to the
material world. Kåñëa’s supreme abode and Kåñëa Himself are nondifferent, being
of the same quality. On this earth, Våndävana, ninety miles southeast of Delhi,
is a replica of that supreme Goloka Våndävana located in the spiritual sky.
When Kåñëa descended on this earth, He sported on that particular tract of land
known as Våndävana in the district of Mathurä, India.
Bg 8.22
TEXT
22
TEXT
Pauåz" Sa
Par" PaaQaR >a¢-ya l/>YaSTvNaNYaYaa )
YaSYaaNTa"SQaaiNa >aUTaaiNa YaeNa SavRiMad& TaTaMa( )) 22 ))
puruñaù sa paraù pärtha
bhaktyä labhyas tv ananyayä
yasyäntaù-sthäni bhütäni
yena sarvam idaà tatam
puruñaù—the Supreme
Personality; saù—He; paraù—the
Supreme, than whom no one is greater; pärtha—O
son of Påthä; bhaktyä—by devotional service; labhyaù—can be achieved; tu—but;
ananyayä—unalloyed, undeviating devotion; yasya—His; antaùsthäni—within;
bhütäni—all this material manifestation; yena—by whom; sarvam—all;
idam—whatever we can see; tatam—distributed.
TRANSLATION
The Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is greater than all, is
attainable by unalloyed devotion. Although He is present in His abode, He is
all-pervading, and everything is situated within Him.
PURPORT
It is here clearly stated that the supreme destination from which
there is no return is the abode of Kåñëa, the Supreme Person. The Brahma-saàhitä describes this supreme abode as änanda-cinmaya-rasa, a place where everything is full
of spiritual bliss. Whatever variegatedness is manifest there is all of the
quality of spiritual bliss—there is nothing material. All variegatedness is
expanded as the spiritual expansion of the Supreme Godhead Himself, for the
manifestation there is totally of the spiritual energy, as explained in Chapter
Seven. As far as this material world is concerned, although the Lord is always
in His supreme abode, He is nonetheless all-pervading by His material energy.
So by His spiritual and material energies He is present everywhere—both in the
material and in the spiritual universes. Yasyäntaùsthäni
means that everything is sustained by Him, whether it be spiritual or material
energy.
It is clearly stated here that only by bhakti, or devotional service, can one enter into the Vaikuëöha (spiritual) planetary system. In all the Vaikuëöhas there is only one Supreme Godhead, Kåñëa, who has expanded Himself into millions and millions of plenary expansions. These plenary expansions are four-armed, and they preside over the innumerable spiritual planets. They are known by a variety of names—Puruñottama, Trivikrama, Keçava, Mädhava, Aniruddha, Håñékeça, Saìkarñaëa, Pradyumna, Çrédhara, Väsudeva, Dämodara, Janärdana, Näräyaëa, Vämana, Padmanäbha, etc. These plenary expansions are likened unto the leaves of a tree, and the main tree is likened to Kåñëa. Kåñëa, dwelling in Goloka Våndävana, His supreme abode, systematically conducts all affairs of both universes (material and spiritual) without a flaw by power of His all-pervasiveness.
Bg 8.23
TEXT
23
TEXT
Ya}a k-ale/
TvNaav*itaMaav*ita& cEv YaaeiGaNa" )
Pa[YaaTaa YaaiNTa Ta& k-al&/ v+YaaiMa >arTazR>a )) 23 ))
yatra käle tv anävåttim
ävåttià caiva yoginaù
prayätä yänti taà kälaà
vakñyämi bharatarñabha
yatra—in that; käle—time; tu—but; anävåttim—no return; ävåttim—return;
ca—also; eva—certainly;
yoginaù—of different kinds of mystics; prayätäù—one who goes; yänti—departs;
tam—that; kälam—time;
vakñyämi—describing; bharatarñabha—O
best of the Bhäratas.
TRANSLATION
O best of the Bhäratas, I shall now explain to you the different
times at which, passing away from this world, one does or does not come back.
PURPORT
The unalloyed devotees of the Supreme Lord who are totally
surrendered souls do not care when they leave their bodies or by what method.
They leave everything in Kåñëa’s hands and so easily and happily return to
Godhead. But those who are not unalloyed devotees and who depend instead on
such methods of spiritual realization as karma-yoga,
jïäna-yoga, haöha-yoga, etc., must leave the body at a suitable time and
thereby be assured whether or not they will return to the world of birth and
death.
If the yogé is perfect, he can select the time and place for leaving this material world, but if he is not so perfect, then he has to leave at nature’s will. The most suitable time to leave the body and not return is being explained by the Lord in these verses. According to Äcärya Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa, the Sanskrit word käla used herein refers to the presiding deity of time.
Bg 8.24
TEXT
24
TEXT
AiGanJYaaeRiTarh"
éu©-" z<MaaSaa otaraYa<aMa( )
Ta}a Pa[YaaTaa GaC^iNTa b]ø b]øivdae JaNaa" )) 24 ))
agnir jyotir ahaù çuklaù
ñaë-mäsä uttaräyaëam
tatra prayätä gacchanti
brahma brahma-vido janäù
agniù—fire; jyotiù—light; ahaù—day; çuklaù—white; ñaö-mäsäù—six
months; uttaräyaëam—when the sun passes on the
northern side; tatra—there; prayätäù—one who goes; gacchanti—passes
away; brahma—the Absolute; brahma-vidaù—one who knows the Absolute; janäù—person.
TRANSLATION
Those who know the Supreme Brahman pass away from the world during
the influence of the fiery god, in the light, at an auspicious moment, during
the fortnight of the moon and the six months when the sun travels in the north.
PURPORT
When fire, light, day and moon are mentioned, it is to be
understood that over all of them there are various presiding deities who make
arrangements for the passage of the soul. At the time of death, the jéva sets forth on the path to a new life. If one
leaves the body at the time designated above, either accidently or by
arrangement, it is possible for him to attain the impersonal brahmajyoti. Mystics who are advanced in yoga practice can arrange the time and place to leave
the body. Others have no control—if by accident they leave at an auspicious
moment, then they will not return to the cycle of birth and death, but if not,
then there is every possibility that they will have to return. However, for the
pure devotee in Kåñëa consciousness, there is no fear of returning, whether he
leaves the body at an auspicious or inauspicious moment, by accident or
arrangement.
Bg 8.25
TEXT
25
TEXT
DaUMaae
rai}aSTaQaa k*-Z<a" z<MaaSaa di+a<aaYaNaMa( )
Ta}a caNd]MaSa& JYaaeiTaYaaeRGaq Pa[aPYa iNavTaRTae )) 25 ))
dhümo rätris tathä kåñëaù
ñaë-mäsä dakñiëäyanam
tatra cändramasaà jyotir
yogé präpya nivartate
dhümaù—smoke; rätriù—night; tathä—also;
kåñëaù—the fortnight of the dark moon; ñaö-mäsäù—the six months; dakñiëa-ayanam—when
the sun passes on the southern side; tatra—there;
cändramasam—the moon planet; jyotiù—light, yogé—the
mystic; präpya—achieves; nivartate—comes
back.
TRANSLATION
The mystic who passes away from this world during the smoke, the
night, the moonlight fortnight, or in the six months when the sun passes to the
south, or who reaches the moon planet, again comes back.
PURPORT
In the Third Canto of Çrémad-Bhägavatam we
are informed that those who are expert in fruitive activities and sacrificial
methods on earth attain to the moon at death. These elevated souls live on the
moon for about 10,000 years (by demigod calculations) and enjoy life by
drinking soma-rasa. They eventually return to earth. This means that on the
moon there are higher classes of living beings, though they may not be
perceived by the gross senses.
Bg 8.26
TEXT
26
TEXT
éu©-k*-Z<ae
GaTaq ùeTae JaGaTa" XaaìTae MaTae )
Wk-Yaa YaaTYaNaav*itaMaNYaYaavTaRTae PauNa" )) 26 ))
çukla-kåñëe gaté hy ete
jagataù çäçvate mate
ekayä yäty anävåttim
anyayävartate punaù
çukla—light; kåñëe—darkness; gaté—passing
away; hi—certainly; ete—all
these; jagataù—of the material world; çäçvate—the Vedas; mate—in the opinion; ekayä—by
one; yäti—goes; anävåttim—no
return; anyayä—by the other; ävartate—comes back; punaù—again.
TRANSLATION
According to the Vedas, there are two ways of passing from this
world—one in light and one in darkness. When one passes in light, he does not
come back; but when one passes in darkness, he returns.
PURPORT
The same description of departure and return is quoted by Äcärya
Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa from the Chandogya Upaniñad. In
such a way, those who are fruitive laborers and philosophical speculators from
time immemorial are constantly going and coming. Actually they do not attain
ultimate salvation, for they do not surrender to Kåñëa.
Bg 8.27
TEXT
27
TEXT
NaETae Sa*Taq
PaaQaR JaaNaNYaaeGaq MauùiTa k-êNa )
TaSMaaTSaveRzu k-ale/zu YaaeGaYau¢-ae >avaJauRNa )) 27 ))
naite såté pärtha jänan
yogé muhyati kaçcana
tasmät sarveñu käleñu
yoga-yukto bhavärjuna
na—never; ete—all these; såté—different
paths; pärtha—O son of Påthä; jänan—even if they know; yogé—the
devotees of the Lord; muhyati—bewildered; kaçcana—anyone; tasmät—therefore;
sarveñu käleñu—always;
yoga-yuktaù—being engaged in Kåñëa consciousness;
bhava—just become; arjuna—O
Arjuna.
TRANSLATION
The devotees who know these two paths, O Arjuna, are never
bewildered. Therefore be always fixed in devotion.
PURPORT
Kåñëa is here advising Arjuna that he should not be disturbed by
the different paths the soul can take when leaving the material world. A
devotee of the Supreme Lord should not worry whether he will depart either by
arrangement or by accident. The devotee should be firmly established in Krñëa
consciousness and chant Hare Kåñëa. He should know that concern over either of
these two paths is troublesome. The best way to be absorbed in Kåñëa
consciousness is to be always dovetailed in His service, and this will make
one’s path to the spiritual kingdom safe, certain, and direct. The word yoga-yukta is especially significant in this verse. One
who is firm in yoga is constantly engaged in
Kåñëa consciousness in all his activities. Çré Rüpa Gosvämé advises that one
should be unattached in the material world and that all affairs should be
steeped in Kåñëa consciousness. In this way one attains perfection. Therefore
the devotee is not disturbed by these descriptions because he knows that his
passage to the supreme abode is guaranteed by devotional service.
Bg 8.28
TEXT
28
TEXT
vedezu Yajezu
TaPa"Sau cEv
daNaezu YaTPau<Yaf-l&/ Pa[idíMa(
)
ATYaeiTa TaTSavRiMad& ividTva
YaaeGaq Par& SQaaNaMauPaEiTa caÛMa(
)) 28 ))
vedeñu yajïeñu tapaùsu caiva
däneñu yat puëya-phalaà pradiñöam
atyeti tat sarvam idaà viditvä
yogé paraà sthänam upaiti cädyam
vedeñu—in the study
of the Vedas; yajïeñu—in the performances of yajïa, sacrifice; tapaùsu—undergoing
different types of austerities; ca—also; eva—certainly; däneñu—in
giving charities; yat—that which; puëya-phalam—the result of pious work; pradiñöam—directed; atyeti—surpasses;
tat—all those; sarvam
idam—all those described above; viditvä—knowing;
yogé—the devotee; param—supreme;
sthänam—abode; upaiti—achieved
peace; ca—also; ädyam—original.
TRANSLATION
A person who accepts the path of devotional service is not bereft
of the results derived from studying the Vedas, performing austere sacrifices,
giving charity or pursuing philosophical and fruitive activities. At the end he
reaches the supreme abode.
PURPORT
This verse is the summation of the Seventh and Eighth Chapters,
particularly as the chapters deal with Kåñëa consciousness and devotional
service. One has to study the Vedas under the
guidance of the spiritual master and undergo many austerities and penances
while living under his care. A brahmacäré has to
live in the home of the spiritual master just like a servant, and he must beg
alms from door to door and bring them to the spiritual master. He takes food
only under the master’s order, and if the master neglects to call the student
for food that day, the student fasts. These are some of the Vedic principles
for observing brahmacarya.
After the student studies the Vedas under the master for a period from five to twenty years, he may become a man of perfect character. Study of the Vedas is not meant for the recreation of armchair speculators, but for the formation of character. After this training, the brahmacäré is allowed to enter into household life and marry. When he is a householder, he also has to perform many sacrifices and strive for further enlightenment. Then after retiring from household life, upon accepting the order of vänaprastha, he undergoes severe penances, such as living in forests, dressing with tree bark, not shaving, etc. By carrying out the orders of brahmacäré, householder, vänaprastha and finally sannyäsa, one becomes elevated to the perfectional stage of life. Some are then elevated to the heavenly kingdoms, and when they become even more advanced they are liberated in the spiritual sky, either in the impersonal brahmajyoti or in the Vaikuëöha planets or Kåñëaloka. This is the path outlined by Vedic literatures.
The beauty of Kåñëa consciousness, however, is that by one stroke, by engaging in devotional service, one can surpass all rituals of the different orders of life.
One should try to understand the Seventh and Eighth Chapters of the Gétä not by scholarship or mental speculation, but by hearing them in association with pure devotees. Chapters Six through Twelve are the essence of the Gétä. If one is fortunate to understand the Gétä—especially these middle six chapters—in the association of devotees, then his life at once becomes glorified beyond all penances, sacrifices, charities, speculations, etc. One should hear the Gétä from the devotee because at the beginning of the Fourth Chapter it is stated that the Géta can only be perfectly understood by devotees. Hearing the Gétä from devotees, not from mental speculators, is called faith. Through association of devotees, one is placed in devotional service, and by this service Kåñëa’s activities, form, pastimes, name, etc., become clear, and all misgivings are dispelled. Then once doubts are removed, the study of the Gétä becomes extremely pleasurable, and one develops a taste and feeling for Kåñëa consciousness. In the advanced stage, one falls completely in love with Kåñëa, and that is the beginning of the highest perfectional stage of life which prepares the devotee’s transferral to Kåñëa’s abode in the spiritual sky, Goloka Våndävana, where the devotee enters into eternal happiness.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the Eighth Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of Attaining the Supreme.
Bg 9. The Most Confidential Knowledge
CHAPTER
NINE
The Most
Confidential Knowledge
Bg 9.1
TEXT
1
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
wd& Tau Tae GauùTaMa& Pa[v+YaaMYaNaSaUYave )
jaNa& ivjaNaSaihTa& YaJjaTva Maae+YaSae_éu>aaTa( )) 1 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
idaà tu te guhyatamaà
pravakñyämy anasüyave
jïänaà vijïäna-sahitaà
yaj jïätvä mokñyase ’çubhät
çré bhagavan uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; idam—this; tu—but; te—unto you; guhyatamam—most confidential; pravakñyämi—I
am speaking; anasüyave—to the nonenvious; jïänam—knowledge; vijïäna—realized
knowledge; sahitam—with; yat—which;
jïätvä—knowing; mokñyase—be
released; açubhät—from this miserable material
existence.
TRANSLATION
The Supreme Lord said: My dear Arjuna, because you are never
envious of Me, I shall impart to you this most secret wisdom, knowing which you
shall be relieved of the miseries of material existence.
PURPORT
As a devotee hears more and more about the Supreme Lord, he
becomes enlightened. This hearing process is recommended in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam: “The messages of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead are full of potencies, and these potencies can be
realized if topics regarding the Supreme Godhead are discussed amongst
devotees. This cannot be achieved by the association of mental speculators or
academic scholars, for it is realized knowledge.”
The devotees are constantly engaged in the Supreme Lord’s service. The Lord understands the mentality and sincerity of a particular living entity who is engaged in Kåñëa consciousness and gives him the intelligence to understand the science of Kåñëa in the association of the devotees. Discussion of Kåñëa is very potent, and if a fortunate person has such association and tries to assimilate the knowledge, then he will surely make advancement toward spiritual realization. Lord Kåñëa, in order to encourage Arjuna to higher and higher elevation in His potent service, describes in this Ninth Chapter matters more confidential than any He has already disclosed.
The very beginning of Bhagavad-gétä, the First Chapter, is more or less an introduction to the rest of the book; and in the Second and Third Chapters, the spiritual knowledge described is called confidential. Topics discussed in the Seventh and Eighth Chapters are specifically related to devotional service, and because they bring enlightenment in Kåñëa consciousness, they are called more confidential. But the matters which are described in the Ninth Chapter deal with unalloyed, pure devotion. Therefore this is called the most confidential. One who is situated in the most confidential knowledge of Kåñëa is naturally transcendental; he therefore has no material pangs, although he is in the material world. In the Bhakti-rasämåta-sindhu it is said that although one who has a sincere desire to render loving service to the Supreme Lord is situated in the conditional state of material existence, he is to be considered liberated. Similarly, we shall find in the Bhagavad-gétä, Tenth Chapter, that anyone who is engaged in that way is a liberated person.
Now this first verse has specific significance. Knowledge (idaà jïänam) refers to pure devotional service, which consists of nine different activities: hearing, chanting, remembering, serving, worshiping, praying, obeying, maintaining friendship and surrendering everything. By the practice of these nine elements of devotional service one is elevated to spiritual consciousness, Kåñëa consciousness. At the time when one’s heart is cleared of the material contamination, one can understand this science of Kåñëa. Simply to understand that a living entity is not material is not sufficient. That may be the beginning of spiritual realization, but one should recognize the difference between activities of the body and spiritual activities by which one understands that he is not the body.
In the Seventh Chapter we have already discussed the opulent potency of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, His different energies, the inferior and superior natures, and all this material manifestation. Now in Chapters Nine and Ten the glories of the Lord will be delineated.
The Sanskrit word anasüyave in this verse is also very significant. Generally the commentators, even if they are highly scholarly, are all envious of Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Even the most erudite scholars write on Bhagavad-gétä very inaccurately. Because they are envious of Kåñëa, their commentaries are useless. The commentaries given by devotees of the Lord are bona fide. No one can explain Bhagavad-gétä, or give perfect knowledge of Kåñëa if he is envious. One who criticizes the character of Kåñëa without knowing Him is a fool. So such commentaries should be very carefully avoided. For one who understands that Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the pure and transcendental Personality, these chapters will be very beneficial.
Bg 9.2
TEXT
2
TEXT
raJaivÛa
raJaGauù& Paiv}aiMadMautaMaMa( )
Pa[TYa+aavGaMa& DaMYa| SauSau%& k-TauRMaVYaYaMa( )) 2 ))
räja-vidyä räja-guhyaà
pavitram idam uttamam
pratyakñävagamaà dharmyaà
su-sukhaà kartum avyayam
räja-vidyä—the king of
education; räja-guhyam—the king of confidential
knowledge; pavitram—the purest; idam—this; uttamam—transcendental;
pratyakña—directly experienced; avagamam—understood; dharmyam—the
principle of religion; susukham—very happy; kartum—to execute; avyayam—everlasting.
TRANSLATION
This knowledge is the king of education, the most secret of all
secrets. It is the purest knowledge, and because it gives direct perception of
the self by realization, it is the perfection of religion. It is everlasting,
and it is joyfully performed.
PURPORT
This chapter of Bhagavad-gétä is
called the king of education because it is the essence of all doctrines and
philosophies explained before. There are seven principal philosophers in India:
Gautama, Kaëäda, Kapila, Yäjïavalkya, Çäëòilya, Vaiçvänara, and, finally,
Vyäsadeva, the author of the Vedänta-sütra. So
there is no dearth of knowledge in the field of philosophy or transcendental
knowledge. Now the Lord says that this Ninth Chapter is the king of all such
knowledge, the essence of all knowledge that can be derived from the study of
the Vedas and different kinds of philosophy. It
is the most confidential because confidential or transcendental knowledge
involves understanding the difference between the soul and the body. And the
king of all confidential knowledge culminates in devotional service.
Generally, people are not educated in this confidential knowledge; they are educated in external knowledge. As far as ordinary education is concerned, people are involved with so many departments: politics, sociology, physics, chemistry, mathematics, astronomy, engineering, etc. There are so many departments of knowledge all over the world and many huge universities, but there is, unfortunately, no university or educational institution where the science of the spirit soul is instructed. Yet the soul is the most important part of this body; without the presence of the soul, the body has no value. Still people are placing great stress on the bodily necessities of life, not caring for the vital soul.
The Bhagavad-gétä, especially from the Second Chapter on, stresses the importance of the soul. In the very beginning, the Lord says that this body is perishable and that the soul is not perishable. That is a confidential part of knowledge: simply knowing that spirit soul is different from this body and that its nature is immutable, indestructible and eternal. But that gives no positive information about the soul. Sometimes people are under the impression that the soul is different from the body and that when the body is finished, or one is liberated from the body, the soul remains in a void and becomes impersonal. But actually that is not the fact. How can the soul, which is so active within this body, be inactive after being liberated from the body? It is always active. If it is eternal, then it is eternally active, and its activities in the spiritual kingdom are the most confidential part of spiritual knowledge. These activities of the spirit soul are therefore indicated here as constituting the king of all knowledge, the most confidential part of all knowledge.
This knowledge is the purest form of all activities, as is explained in Vedic literature. In the Padma Puräëa, man’s sinful activities have been analyzed and are shown to be the results of sin after sin. Those who are engaged in fruitive activities are entangled in different stages and forms of sinful reactions. For instance, when the seed of a particular tree is sown, the tree does not appear immediately to grow; it takes some time. It is first a small, sprouting plant, then it assumes the form of a tree, then it flowers, bears fruit, and, when it is complete, the flowers and fruits are enjoyed by persons who have sown the seed of the tree. Similarly, a man performs a sinful act, and like a seed it takes time to fructify. There are different stages. The sinful action may have already stopped within the individual, but the results or the fruit of that sinful action are still enjoyed. There are sins which are still in the form of a seed, and there are others which are already fructified and are giving us fruit, which we are enjoying as distress and pain, as explained in the twentieth verse of the Seventh Chapter.
A person who has completely ended the reactions of all sinful activities and who is fully engaged in pious activities, being freed from the duality of this material world, becomes engaged in devotional service to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa. In other words, those who are actually engaged in the devotional service of the Supreme Lord are already freed from all reactions. For those who are engaged in the devotional service of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, all sinful reactions, whether fructified, in the stock, or in the form of a seed, gradually vanish. Therefore the purifying potency of devotional service is very strong, and it is called pavitram uttamam, the purest. Uttamam means transcendental. Tamas means this material world or darkness, and uttamam means that which is transcendental to material activities. Devotional activities are never to be considered material, although sometimes it appears that devotees are engaged just like ordinary men. One who can see and is familiar with devotional service, however, will know that they are not material activities. They are all spiritual and devotional, uncontaminated by the material modes of nature.
It is said that the execution of devotional service is so perfect that one can perceive the results directly. This direct result is actually perceived, and we have practical experience that any person who is chanting the holy names of Kåñëa (Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/ Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare) in course of time feels some transcendental pleasure and very quickly becomes purified of all material contamination. This is actually seen. Furthermore, if one engages not only in hearing but in trying to broadcast the message of devotional activities as well, or if he engages himself in helping the missionary activities of Kåñëa consciousness, he gradually feels spiritual progress. This advancement in spiritual life does not depend on any kind of previous education or qualification. The method itself is so pure that by simply engaging in it one becomes pure.
In the Vedänta-sütra this is also described in the following words: prakäçaç ca karmaëy abhyäsät. “Devotional service is so potent that simply by engaging in the activities of devotional service, one becomes enlightened without a doubt.” Närada, who happened to be the son of a maidservant, had no education, nor was he born into a high family. But when his mother was engaged in serving great devotees, Närada also became engaged, and sometimes, in the absence of his mother, he would serve the great devotees himself. Närada personally says, “Once only, by their permission, I took the remnants of their food, and by so doing all my sins were at once eradicated. Thus being engaged, I became purified in heart, and at that time the very nature of the transcendentalist became attractive to me.” (Bhäg. 1.5.25) Närada tells his disciple Vyäsadeva that in a previous life he was engaged as a boy servant of purified devotees during four months of their stay and that he was intimately associating with them. Sometimes those sages left remnants of food on their dishes, and the boy, who would wash their dishes, wanted to taste the remnants. So he asked the great devotees whether he could eat them, and they gave their permission. Närada then ate those remnants and consequently became freed from all sinful reactions. As he went on eating, he gradually became as purehearted as the sages, and he gradually developed the same taste. The great devotees relished the taste of unceasing devotional service of the Lord, hearing, chanting, etc., and by developing the same taste, Närada wanted also to hear and chant the glories of the Lord. Thus by associating with the sages, he developed a great desire for devotional service. Therefore he quotes from the Vedänta-sütra (prakäçaç ca karmaëy abhyäsät): If one is engaged simply in the acts of devotional service, everything is revealed to him automatically, and he can understand. This is called prakäçaù, directly perceived.
Närada was actually a son of a maidservant. He had no opportunity to go to school. He was simply assisting his mother, and fortunately his mother rendered some service to the devotees. The child Närada also got the opportunity and simply by association achieved the highest goal of all religions, devotional service. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam it is said that religious people generally do not know that the highest perfection of religion is the attainment of the stage of devotional service. Generally Vedic knowledge is required for the understanding of the path of self-realization. But here, although he was not educated in the Vedic principle, Närada acquired the highest results of Vedic study. This process is so potent that even without performing the religious process regularly, one can be raised to the highest perfection. How is this possible? This is also confirmed in Vedic literature: äcäryavän puruño veda. One who is in association with great äcäryas, even if he is not educated or has not studied the Vedas, can become familiar with all the knowledge necessary for realization.
The process of devotional service is a very happy one. Why? Devotional service consists of çravaëaà kértanaà viñëoù, so one can simply hear the chanting of the glories of the Lord or can attend philosophical lectures on transcendental knowledge given by authorized äcäryas. Simply by sitting, one can learn; then one can eat the remnants of the food offered to God, nice palatable dishes. In every state devotional service is joyful. One can execute devotional service even in the most poverty-stricken condition. The Lord says, patraà puñpaà phalam: He is ready to accept from the devotee any kind of offering, never mind what. Even a leaf, a flower, a bit of fruit, or a little water, which are all available in every part of the world, can be offered by any person, regardless of social position, and will be accepted if offered with love. There are many instances in history. Simply by tasting the tulasé leaves offered to the lotus feet of the Lord, great sages like Sanatkumära became great devotees. Therefore the devotional process is very nice, and it can be executed in a happy mood. God accepts only the love with which things are offered to Him.
It is said here that this devotional service is eternally existing. It is not as the Mäyävädé philosophers claim. They sometimes take to so-called devotional service, and as long as they are not liberated they continue their devotional service, but at the end, when they become liberated, they “become one with God.” Such temporary time-serving devotional service is not accepted as pure devotional service. Actual devotional service continues even after liberation. When the devotee goes to the spiritual planet in the kingdom of God, he is also engaged there in serving the Supreme Lord. He does not try to become one with the Supreme Lord.
As it will be seen, actual devotional service begins after liberation. So in Bhagavad-gétä it is said, brahma-bhüta. After being liberated, or being situated in the Brahman position, one’s devotional service begins. By executing devotional service, one can understand the Supreme Lord. No one can understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead by executing karma-yoga, jïäna, or añöäìga-yoga or any other yoga independantly. Without coming to the stage of devotional service, one cannot understand what is the Personality of Godhead. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam it is also confirmed that when one becomes purified by executing the process of devotional service, especially by hearing Çrémad-Bhägavatam or Bhagavad-gétä from realized souls, then he can understand the science of Kåñëa or the science of God. Evaà prasanna-manaso bhagavad-bhakti-yogataù. When one’s heart is cleared of all nonsense, then one can understand what God is. Thus the process of devotional service, of Kåñëa consciousness, is the king of all education and the king of all confidential knowledge. It is the purest form of religion, and it can be executed joyfully without difficulty. Therefore one should adopt it.
Bg 9.3
TEXT
3
TEXT
Aé[ÕDaaNaa"
Pauåza DaMaRSYaaSYa ParNTaPa )
APa[aPYa Maa& iNavTaRNTae Ma*TYauSa&SaarvTMaRiNa )) 3 ))
açraddadhänäù puruñä
dharmasyäsya parantapa
apräpya mäà nivartante
måtyu-saàsära-vartmani
açraddadhänäù—those who
are faithless; puruñäù—such persons; dharmasya—of this process of religion; asya—of it; parantapa—O
killer of the enemies; apräpya—without obtaining;
mäm—Me; nivartante—come
back; måtyu—death; saàsära—material
existence; vartmani—on the path of.
TRANSLATION
Those who are not faithful on the path of devotional service
cannot attain Me, O conqueror of foes, but return to birth and death in this
material world.
PURPORT
The faithless cannot accomplish this process of devotional
service; that is the purport of this verse. Faith is created by association
with devotees. Unfortunate people, even after hearing all the evidence of Vedic
literature from great personalities, still have no faith in God. They are
hesitant and cannot stay fixed in the devotional service of the Lord. Thus
faith is a most important factor for progress in Kåñëa consciousness. In the Caitanya-caritämåta it is said that one should have
complete conviction that simply by serving the Supreme Lord Çré Kåñëa he can
achieve all perfection. That is called real faith. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam (3.4.12) it is stated that by giving
water to the root of a tree, its branches, twigs and leaves become satisfied,
and by supplying food to the stomach all the senses of the body become
satisfied, and, similarly, by engaging in the transcendental service of the
Supreme Lord, all the demigods and all the living entities automatically become
satisfied.
After reading Bhagavad-gétä one should promptly come to the conclusion of Bhagavad-gétä: one should give up all other engagements and adopt the service of the Supreme Lord, Kåñëa, the Personality of Godhead. If one is convinced of this philosophy of life, that is faith. Now the development of that faith is the process of Kåñëa consciousness.
There are three divisions of Kåñëa conscious men. In the third class are those who have no faith. If they are engaged in devotional service officially, for some ulterior purpose, they cannot achieve the highest perfectional stage. Most probably they will slip, after some time. They may become engaged, but because they haven’t complete conviction and faith, it is very difficult for them to continue in Kåñëa consciousness. We have practical experience in discharging our missionary activity that some people come and apply themselves to the Kåñëa consciousness with some hidden motive, and as soon as they are economically a little well-situated, they give up this process and take to their old ways again. It is only by faith that one can advance in Kåñëa consciousness. As far as the development of faith is concerned, one who is well versed in the literatures of devotional service and has attained the stage of firm faith is called a first-class person in Kåñëa consciousness. And in the second class are those who are not very advanced in understanding the devotional scriptures but who automatically have firm faith that Kåñëa bhakti or service to Kåñëa is the best course and so in good faith have taken it up. Thus they are superior to the third class who have neither perfect knowledge of the scriptures nor good faith but by association and simplicity are trying to follow. The third-class person in Kåñëa consciousness may fall down, but when one is in the second class or first class, he does not fall down. One in the first class will surely make progress and achieve the result at the end. As far as the third-class person in Kåñëa consciousness is concerned, although he has faith in the conviction that devotional service to Kåñëa is very good, he has no knowledge of Kåñëa through the scriptures like Çrémad-Bhägavatam and Bhagavad-gétä. Sometimes these third-class persons in Kåñëa consciousness have some tendency toward karma-yoga and jïäna-yoga, and sometimes they are disturbed, but as soon as the infection of karma-yoga or jïäna-yoga is vanquished, they become second-class or first-class persons in Kåñëa consciousness. Faith in Kåñëa is also divided into three stages and described in Çrémad-Bhägavatam. First-class attachment, second-class attachment, and third-class attachment are also explained in Çrémad-Bhägavatam in the Eleventh Canto. Those who have no faith even after hearing about Kåñëa and the excellence of devotional service, who think that it is simply eulogy, find the path very difficult, even if they are supposedly engaged in devotional service. For them there is very little hope in gaining perfection. Thus faith is very important in the discharge of devotional service.
Bg 9.4
TEXT
4
TEXT
MaYaa
TaTaiMad& Sav| JaGadVYa¢-MaUiTaRNaa )
MaTSQaaiNa SavR>aUTaaiNa Na cah& TaeZvviSQaTa" )) 4 ))
mayä tatam idaà sarvaà
jagad avyakta-mürtinä
mat-sthäni sarva-bhütäni
na cähaà teñv avasthitaù
mayä—by Me; tatam—spread; idam—all
these manifestations; sarvam—all; jagat—cosmic manifestation; avyakta-mürtinä—unmanifested
form; mat-sthäni—unto Me;
sarva-bhütäni—all living entities; na—not;
ca—also; aham—I; teñu—in them; avasthitaù—situated.
TRANSLATION
By Me, in My unmanifested form, this entire universe is pervaded.
All beings are in Me, but I am not in them.
PURPORT
The Supreme Personality of Godhead is not perceivable through the
gross material senses. It is said that Lord Çré Kåñëa’s name, fame, pastimes,
etc., cannot be understood by material senses. Only to one who is engaged in
pure devotional service under proper guidance is He revealed. In the Brahma-saàhitä it is stated, premäïjanacchurita.…
One can see the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Govinda, always within
himself and outside himself if he has developed the transcendental loving
attitude towards Him. Thus for people in general He is not visible. Here it is
said that although He is all-pervading, everywhere present, He is yet not
conceivable by the material senses. But actually, although we cannot see Him,
everything is resting in Him. As we have discussed in the Seventh Chapter, the
entire material cosmic manifestation is only a combination of His two different
energies, the superior spiritual energy and the inferior material energy. Just
as the sunshine is spread all over the universe, the energy of the Lord is
spread all over the creation, and everything is resting in that energy.
Yet one should not conclude that because He is spread all over He has lost His personal existence. To refute such argument the Lord says, “I am everywhere, and everything is in Me, but still I am aloof.” For example, a king heads a government which is but the manifestation of the king’s energy; the different governmental departments are nothing but the energies of the king, and each department is resting on the king’s power. But still one cannot expect the king to be present in every department personally. That is a crude example. Similarly, all the manifestations that we see, and everything that exists both in this material world and in the spiritual world, are resting on the energy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The creation takes place by the diffusion of His different energies, and, as is stated in the Bhagavad-gétä, He is everywhere present by His personal representation, the diffusion of His different energies.
Bg 9.5
TEXT
5
TEXT
Na c MaTSQaaiNa
>aUTaaiNa PaXYa Mae YaaeGaMaEìrMa( )
>aUTa>a*à c >aUTaSQaae MaMaaTMaa >aUTa>aavNa" )) 5 ))
na ca mat-sthäni bhütäni
paçya me yogam aiçvaram
bhüta-bhån na ca bhüta-stho
mamätmä bhüta-bhävanaù
na—never; ca—also; mat-sthäni—situated
in Me; bhütäni—all creation; paçya—just see; me—My; yogam aiçvaram—inconceivable mystic power; bhüta-bhåt—maintainer of all living entities; na—never; ca—also; bhüta-sthaù—in the cosmic manifestation; mama—My; ätmä—Self; bhüta-bhävanaù—is the
source of all manifestations.
TRANSLATION
And yet everything that is created does not rest in Me. Behold My
mystic opulence! Although I am the maintainer of all living entities, and
although I am everywhere, still My Self is the very source of creation.
PURPORT
The Lord says that everything is resting on Him. This should not
be misunderstood. The Lord is not directly concerned with the maintenance and
sustenance of this material manifestation. Sometimes we see a picture of Atlas
holding the globe on his shoulders; he seems to be very tired, holding this
great earthly planet. Such an image should not be entertained in connection
with Kåñëa’s upholding this created universe. He says that although everything
is resting on Him, still He is aloof. The planetary systems are floating in
space, and this space is the energy of the Supreme Lord. But He is different
from space. He is differently situated. Therefore the Lord says, “Although they
are situated on My inconceivable energy, still, as the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, I am aloof from them.” This is the inconceivable opulence of the Lord.
In the Vedic dictionary it is said, “The Supreme Lord is performing inconceivably wonderful pastimes, displaying His energy. His person is full of different potent energies, and His determination is itself actual fact. In this way the Personality of Godhead is to be understood.” We may think to do something, but there are so many impediments, and sometimes it is not possible to do as we like. But when Kåñëa wants to do something, simply by His willing, everything is performed so perfectly that one cannot imagine how it is being done. The Lord explains this fact: although He is the maintainer and sustainer of all material manifestation, He does not touch this material manifestation. Simply by His supreme will everything is created, everything is sustained, everything is maintained, and everything is annihilated. There is no difference between His mind and Himself (as there is a difference between ourselves and our present material mind) because He is absolute spirit. Simultaneously the Lord is present in everything; yet the common man cannot understand how He is also present personally. He is different from this material manifestation, yet everything is resting on Him. This is explained here as yogam aiçvaram, the mystic power of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Bg 9.6
TEXT
6
TEXT
YaQaak-aXaiSQaTaae
iNaTYa& vaYau" SavR}aGaae MahaNa( )
TaQaa SavaRi<a >aUTaaiNa MaTSQaaNaqTYauPaDaarYa )) 6 ))
yathäkäça-sthito nityaà
väyuù sarvatra-go mahän
tathä sarväëi bhütäni
mat-sthänéty upadhäraya
yathä—as much as;
äkäça-sthitaù—situated in space; nityam—always; väyuù—wind;
sarvatra-gaù—blowing everywhere; mahän—great; tathä—similarly;
sarväëi—everything, bhütäni—created
beings; mat-sthäni—situated in Me; iti—thus; upadhäraya—try
to understand.
TRANSLATION
As the mighty wind, blowing everywhere, always rests in ethereal
space know that in the same manner all beings rest in Me.
PURPORT
For the ordinary person it is almost inconceivable how the huge
material creation is resting in Him. But the Lord is giving an example which
may help us to understand. Space is the biggest manifestation we can conceive.
The cosmic manifestation rests in space. Space permits the movement of even the
atoms and on up to the greatest planets, the sun and the moon. Although the sky
(or wind or air) is great, still it is situated within space. Space is not
beyond the sky.
Similarly, all the wonderful cosmic manifestations are existing by the supreme will of God, and all of them are subordinate to that supreme will. As we generally say, not a blade of grass moves without the will of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Thus everything is moving under His will: by His will everything is being created, everything is being maintained, and everything is being annihilated. Still He is aloof from everything, as space is always aloof from the activities of the atmosphere. In the Upaniñads, it is stated, “It is out of the fear of the Supreme Lord that the wind is blowing.” In the Garga Upaniñad also it is stated, “By the supreme order, under the superintendence of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the moon, the sun and the great planets are moving.” In the Brahma-saàhitä this is also stated. There is also a description of the movement of the sun, and it is said that the sun is considered to be one of the eyes of the Supreme Lord and that it has immense potency to diffuse heat and light. Still it is moving in its prescribed orbit by the order and the supreme will of Govinda. So, from the Vedic literature we can find evidence that this material manifestation, which appears to us to be very wonderful and great, is under the complete control of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This will be further explained in the later verses of this chapter.
Bg 9.7
TEXT
7
TEXT
SavR>aUTaaiNa
k-aENTaeYa Pa[k*-iTa& YaaiNTa MaaiMak-aMa( )
k-LPa+aYae PauNaSTaaiNa k-LPaadaE ivSa*JaaMYahMa( )) 7 ))
sarva-bhütäni kaunteya
prakåtià yänti mämikäm
kalpa-kñaye punas täni
kalpädau visåjämy aham
sarva-bhütäni—all created
entities; kaunteya—O son of Kunté; prakåtim—nature; yänti—enter;
mämikäm—unto Me; kalpa-kñaye—at
the end of the millennium; punaù—again; täni—all those; kalpa-ädau—in
the beginning of the millennium; visåjämi—I
create; aham—I.
TRANSLATION
O son of Kunté, at the end of the millennium every material
manifestation enters into My nature, and at the beginning of another
millennium, by My potency I again create.
PURPORT
The creation, maintenance and annihilation of this material cosmic
manifestation is completely dependant on the supreme will of the
Personality of Godhead. “At the end of the millennium” means at the death of
Brahmä. Brahmä lives for one hundred years, and his one day is calculated at
4,300,000,000 of our earthly years. His night is of the same duration. His
month consists of thirty such days and nights, and his year of twelve months.
After one hundred such years, when Brahmä dies, the devastation or annihilation
takes place; this means that the energy manifested by the Supreme Lord is again
wound up in Himself. Then again, when there is need to manifest the cosmic
world, it is done by His will: “Although I am one, I shall become many.” This
is the Vedic aphorism. He expands Himself in this material energy, and the
whole cosmic manifestation again takes place.
Bg 9.8
TEXT
8
TEXT
Pa[k*-iTa&
SvaMaví>Ya ivSa*JaaiMa PauNa" PauNa" )
>aUTaGa]aMaiMaMa& k*-TòMavXa& Pa[k*-TaevRXaaTa( )) 8 ))
prakåtià sväm avañöabhya
visåjämi punaù punaù
bhüta-grämam imaà kåtsnam
avaçaà prakåter vaçät
prakåtim—material
nature; sväm—of My personal self; avañöabhya—enter in; visåjämi—create;
punaù punaù—again, again; bhüta-grämam—all
these cosmic manifestations; imam—this; kåtsnam—total; avaçam—automatically;
prakåteù—by the force of nature; vaçät—under obligation.
TRANSLATION
The whole cosmic order is under Me. By My will it is manifested
again and again, and by My will it is annihilated at the end.
PURPORT
This matter is the manifestation of the inferior energy of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. This has already been explained several times.
At the creation, the material energy is let loose as mahat-tattva,
into which the Lord as His first Puruña incarnation,
Mahä-Viñëu, enters. He lies within the Causal Ocean and breathes out
innumerable universes, and into each universe the Lord again enters as
Garbhodakaçäyé Viñëu. Each universe is in that way created. He still further
manifests Himself as Kñérodakaçäyé Viñëu, and that Viñëu enters into
everything—even into the minute atom. This fact is explained here. He enters
into everything.
Now, as far as the living entities are concerned, they are impregnated into this material nature, and as a result of their past deeds they take different positions. Thus the activities of this material world begin. The activities of the different species of living beings are begun from the very moment of the creation. It is not that all is evolved. The different species of life are created immediately along with the universe. Men, animals, beasts, birds—everything is simultaneously created, because whatever desires the living entities had at the last annihilation are again manifested. It is clearly stated here that the living entities have nothing to do with this process. The state of being in their past life in the past creation is simply manifested again, and all this is done simply by His will. This is the inconceivable potency of the Supreme Personality of God. And after creating different species of life, He has no connection with them. The creation takes place to accommodate the inclinations of the various living entities, and so the Lord does not become involved with it.
Bg 9.9
TEXT
9
TEXT
Na c Maa&
TaaiNa k-MaaRi<a iNabDNaiNTa DaNaÅYa )
odaSaqNavdaSaqNaMaSa¢&- Taezu k-MaRSau )) 9 ))
na ca mäà täni karmäëi
nibadhnanti dhanaïjaya
udäséna-vad äsénam
asaktaà teñu karmasu
na—never; ca—also; mäm—Me; täni—all those; karmäëi—activities;
nibadhnanti—bind; dhanaïjaya—O
conquerer of riches; udäsénavat—as neutral; äsénam—situated; asaktam—without
attraction; teñu—in them; karmasu—in
activities.
TRANSLATION
O Dhanaïjaya, all this work cannot bind Me. I am ever detached,
seated as though neutral.
PURPORT
One should not think, in this connection, that the Supreme
Personality of Godhead has no engagement. In His spiritual world He is always
engaged. In the Brahma-saàhitä it is stated: “He
is always involved in His eternal, blissful, spiritual activities, but He has
nothing to do with these material activities.” Material activities are being
carried on by His different potencies. The Lord is always neutral in the
material activities of the created world. This neutrality is explained here.
Although He has control over every minute detail of matter, He is sitting as if
neutral. The example can be given of a high court judge sitting on his bench.
By his order so many things are happening: someone is being hanged, someone is
being put into jail, someone is awarded a huge amount of wealth—but still he is
neutral. He has nothing to do with all that gain and loss. Similarly, the Lord
is always neutral, although He has His hand in every sphere of activity. In the
Vedänta-sütra it is stated that He is not
situated in the dualities of this material world. He is transcendental to these
dualities. Nor is He attached to the creation and annihilation of this material
world. The living entities take their different forms in the various species of
life according to their past deeds, and the Lord doesn’t interfere with them.
Bg 9.10
TEXT
10
TEXT
MaYaaDYa+ae<a
Pa[k*-iTa" SaUYaTae SacracrMa( )
heTauNaaNaeNa k-aENTaeYa JaGaiÜPairvTaRTae )) 10 ))
mayädhyakñeëa prakåtiù
süyate sa-caräcaram
hetunänena kaunteya
jagad viparivartate
mayä—by Me; adhyakñeëa—by superintendence; prakåtiù—material
nature; süyate—manifest; sa—with;
caräcaram—moving and nonmoving; hetunä—for this reason; anena—this;
kaunteya—O son of Kunté; jagat—the
cosmic manifestation; viparivartate—is working.
TRANSLATION
This material nature is working under My direction, O son of
Kunté, and it is producing all moving and unmoving beings. By its rule this
manifestation is created and annihilated again and again.
PURPORT
It is clearly stated here that the Supreme Lord, although aloof
from all the activities of the material world, remains the supreme director.
The Supreme Lord is the supreme will and the background of this material
manifestation, but the management is being conducted by material nature. Kåñëa
also states in Bhagavad-gétä that of all the
living entities in different forms and species, “I am the Father.” The father
gives seeds to the womb of the mother for the child, and similarly the Supreme
Lord by His mere glance injects all the living entities into the womb of
material nature, and they come out in their different forms and species,
according to their last desires and activities. All these living entities,
although born under the glance of the Supreme Lord, still take their different
bodies according to their past deeds and desires. So the Lord is not directly
attached to this material creation. He simply glances over material nature;
material nature is thus activated, and everything is created immediately.
Because He glances over material nature, there is undoubtedly activity on the
part of the Supreme Lord, but He has nothing to do with the manifestation of
the material world directly. This example is given in the småti: when there is a fragrant flower before someone,
the fragrance is touched by the smelling power of the person, yet the smelling
and the flower are detached from one another. There is a similar connection
between the material world and the Supreme Personality of Godhead; actually He
has nothing to do with this material world, but He creates by His glance and
ordains. In summary, material nature, without the superintendence of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, cannot do anything. Yet the Supreme Personality
is detached from all material activities.
Bg 9.11
TEXT
11
TEXT
AvJaaNaiNTa
Maa& MaU!a MaaNauzq& TaNauMaaié[TaMa( )
Par& >aavMaJaaNaNTaae MaMa >aUTaMaheìrMa( )) 11 ))
avajänanti mäà müòhä
mänuñéà tanum äçritam
paraà bhävam ajänanto
mama bhüta-maheçvaram
avajänanti—deride; mäm—Me; müòhäù—foolish
men; mänuñém—in a human form; tanum—body; äçritam—assuming;
param—transcendental; bhävam—nature;
ajänantaù—not knowing; mama—Mine;
bhüta—everything that be; maheçvaram—supreme proprietor.
TRANSLATION
Fools deride Me when I descend in the human form. They do not know
My transcendental nature and My supreme dominion over all that be.
PURPORT
From the other explanations of the previous verses in this
chapter, it is clear that the Supreme Personality of Godhead, although
appearing like a human being, is not a common man. The Personality of Godhead,
who conducts the creation, maintenance and annihilation of the complete cosmic
manifestation, cannot be a human being. Yet there are many foolish men who
consider Kå,sëa to be merely a powerful man and nothing more. Actually, He is
the original Supreme Personality, as is confirmed in the Brahma-saàhitä (içvaraù paramaù kåsëaù); He is the
Supreme Lord.
There are many éçvaras, controllers, and one appears greater than another. In the ordinary management of affairs in the material world, we find some official or director, and above him there is a secretary, and above him a minister, and above him a president. Each of them is a controller, but one is controlled by another. In the Brahma-saàhitä it is said that Kåñëa is the supreme controller; there are many controllers undoubtedly both in the material and spiritual world, but Kåñëa is the supreme controller (éçvaraù paramaù kåñëaù), and His body is sac-cid-änanda, non-material.
Material bodies cannot perform the wonderful acts described in previous verses. His body is eternal, blissful and full of knowledge. Although He is not a common man, the foolish deride Him and consider Him to be a man. His body is called here mänuñém because He is acting just like a man, a friend of Arjuna’s, a politician involved in the Battle of Kurukñetra. In so many ways He is acting just like an ordinary man, but actually His body is sac-cid-änanda-vigraha—eternal bliss and knowledge absolute. This is confirmed in the Vedic language also (sac-cid-änanda-rüpäya kåñëäya): “I offer my obeisances unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, who is the eternal blissful form of knowledge.” There are other descriptions in the Vedic language also. Tam ekaà govindam: “You are Govinda, the pleasure of the senses and the cows.” Sac-cid-änanda-vigraham: “And Your form is transcendental, full of knowledge, bliss and eternality.”
Despite the transcendental qualities of Lord Kåñëa’s body, its full bliss and knowledge, there are many so-called scholars and commentators of Bhagavad-gétä who deride Kåñëa as an ordinary man. The scholar may be born an extraordinary man due to his previous good work, but this conception of Çré Kåñëa is due to a poor fund of knowledge. Therefore he is called müòha, for only foolish persons consider Kåñëa to be an ordinary human being because they do not know the confidential activities of the Supreme Lord and His different energies. They do not know that Kåñëa’s body is a symbol of complete knowledge and bliss, that He is the proprietor of everything that be and that He can award liberation to anyone. Because they do not know that Kåñëa has so many transcendental qualifications, they deride Him.
Nor do they know that the appearance of the Supreme Personality of Godhead in this material world is a manifestation of His internal energy. He is the master of the material energy. As has been explained in several places (mama mäyä duratyayä), He claims that the material energy, although very powerful, is under His control, and whoever surrenders unto Him can get out of the control of this material energy. If a soul surrendered to Kåñëa can get out of the influence of material energy, then how can the Supreme Lord, who conducts the creation, maintenance and annihilation of the whole cosmic nature, have a material body like us? So this conception of Kåñëa is complete foolishness. Foolish persons, however, cannot conceive that the Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, appearing just like an ordinary man, can be the controller of all the atoms and of the gigantic manifestation of the universal form. The biggest and the minutest are beyond their conception, so they cannot imagine that a form like that of a human being can simultaneously control the infinite and the minute. Actually although He is controlling the infinite and the finite, He is apart from all this manifestation. It is clearly stated concerning His yogam aiçvaram, His inconceivable transcendental energy, that He can control the infinite and the finite simultaneously and that He can remain aloof from them. Although the foolish cannot imagine how Kåñëa, who appears just like a human being, can control the infinite and the finite, those who are pure devotees accept this, for they know that Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Therefore they completely surrender unto Him and engage in Kåñëa consciousness, devotional service of the Lord.
There are many controversies amongst the impersonalists and the personalists about the Lord’s appearance as a human being. But if we consult Bhagavad-gétä and Çrémad-Bhägavatam, the authoritative texts for understanding the science of Kåñëa, then we can understand that Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He is not an ordinary man, although He appeared on this earth as an ordinary human. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam, First Canto, First Chapter, when the sages inquire about the activities of Kåñëa, it is stated that His appearance as a man bewilders the foolish. No human being could perform the wonderful acts that Kåñëa performed while He was present on this earth. When Kåñëa appeared before His father and mother, Vasudeva and Devaké, He appeared with four hands, but after the prayers of the parents, He transformed Himself into an ordinary child. His appearance as an ordinary human being is one of the features of His transcendental body. In the Eleventh Chapter of the Gétä also it is stated, tenaiva rüpeëa etc. Arjuna prayed to see again that form of four hands, and when Kåñëa was thus petitioned by Arjuna, He again assumed His original form. All these different features of the Supreme Lord are certainly not those of an ordinary human being.
Some of those who deride Kåñëa, who are infected with the Mäyävädé philosophy, quote the following verse from the Çrémad-Bhägavatam to prove that Kåñëa is just an ordinary man: ahaà sarveñu bhüteñu bhütätmävasthitaù sadä: “The Supreme is present in every living entity.” (Bhäg. 3.29.21) We should better take note of this particular verse from the Vaiñëava äcäryas like Jéva Gosvämé instead of following the interpretation of unauthorized persons who deride Kåñëa. Jéva Gosvämé, commenting on this verse, says that Kåñëa, in His plenary expansion as Paramätmä, is situated in the moving and the nonmoving entities as the Supersoul, so any neophyte devotee who simply gives his attention to the arca-mürti, the form of the Supreme Lord in the temple, and does not respect other living entities is uselessly worshiping the form of the Lord in the temple. There are three kinds of devotees of the Lord, and the neophyte is in the lowest stage. The neophyte devotee gives more attention to the Deity in the temple than to other devotees, so Jéva Gosvämé warns that this sort of mentality should be corrected. A devotee should see that Kåñëa is present in everyone’s heart as Paramätmä; therefore every body is the embodiment or the temple of the Supreme Lord, and as such, as one offers respect to the temple of the Lord, he should similarly properly respect each and every body in whom the Paramätmä dwells. Everyone should therefore be given proper respect and should not be neglected.
There are also many impersonalists who deride temple worship. They say that since God is everywhere, why should one restrict himself to temple worship? But if God is everywhere, is He not in the temple or in the Deity? Although the personalist and the impersonalist will fight with one another perpetually, a perfect devotee in Kåñëa consciousness knows that although Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality, He is all-pervading, as is confirmed in the Brahma-saàhitä. Although His personal abode is Goloka Våndävana and He is always staying there, still, by His different manifestations of energy and by His plenary expansion, He is present everywhere in all parts of the material and spiritual creation.
Bg 9.12
TEXT
12
TEXT
MaaegaaXaa
Maaegak-MaaR<aae MaaegajaNaa ivceTaSa" )
ra+aSaqMaaSaurq& cEv Pa[k*-iTa& MaaeihNaq& ié[Taa" )) 12 ))
moghäçä mogha-karmäëo
mogha-jïänä vicetasaù
räkñasém äsuréà caiva
prakåtià mohinéà çritäù
moghäçäù—baffled
hope; mogha-karmäëaù—baffled in fruitive
activities; mogha-jïänäù—baffled in knowledge; vicetasaù—bewildered; räkñasém—demonic;
äsurém—atheistic; ca—and;
eva—certainly; prakåtim—nature;
mohiném—bewildering; çritäù—taking
shelter of.
TRANSLATION
Those who are thus bewildered are attracted by demonic and
atheistic views. In that deluded condition, their hopes for liberation, their
fruitive activities, and their culture of knowledge are all defeated.
PURPORT
There are many devotees who assume themselves to be in Kåñëa
consciousness and devotional service but at heart do not accept the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, as the Absolute Truth. For them, the fruit of
devotional service—going back to Godhead—will never be tasted. Similarly, those
who are engaged in fruitive, pious activities and who are ultimately hoping to
be liberated from this material entanglement will never be successful either because
they deride the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa. In other words, persons
who mock Kåñëa are to be understood to be demonic or atheistic. As described in
the Seventh Chapter of Bhagavad-gétä, such
demonic miscreants never surrender to Kåñëa. Therefore their mental
speculations to arrive at the Absolute Truth bring them to the false conclusion
that the ordinary living entity and Kåñëa are one and the same. With such a
false conviction, they think that the body of any human being is now simply covered
by material nature and that as soon as one is liberated from this material body
there is no difference between God and himself. This attempt to become one with
Kåñëa will be baffled because of delusion. Such atheistic and demoniac
cultivation of spiritual knowledge is always futile. That is the indication of
this verse. For such persons, cultivation of the knowledge in the Vedic
literature, like the Vedänta-sütra and the Upaniñads, is always
baffled.
It is a great offense, therefore, to consider Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, to be an ordinary man. Those who do so are certainly deluded because they cannot understand the eternal form of Kåñëa. In the Båhad-vaiñëava mantra it is clearly stated that one who considers the body of Kåñëa to be material should be driven out from all rituals and activities of the çruti. And if one by chance sees his face, he should at once take bath in the Ganges to rid himself of infection. People jeer at Kåñëa because they are envious of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Their destiny is certainly to take birth after birth in the species of atheistic and demoniac life. Perpetually, their real knowledge will remain under delusion, and gradually they will regress to the darkest region of creation.
Bg 9.13
TEXT
13
TEXT
MahaTMaaNaSTau
Maa& PaaQaR dEvq& Pa[k*-iTaMaaié[Taa" )
>aJaNTYaNaNYaMaNaSaae jaTva >aUTaaidMaVYaYaMa( )) 13 ))
mahätmänas tu mäà pärtha
daivéà prakåtim äçritäù
bhajanty ananya-manaso
jïätvä bhütädim avyayam
mahätmänaù—the great
souls; tu—but; mäm—unto
Me; pärtha—O son of Påthä; daivém—divine; prakåtim—nature;
äçritäù—taken shelter of; bhajanti—render
service; ananya-manasaù—without deviation of the
mind; jïätvä—knowing; bhüta—creation;
ädim—original; avyayam—inexhaustible.
TRANSLATION
O son of Påthä, those who are not deluded, the great souls, are
under the protection of the divine nature. They are fully engaged in devotional
service because they know Me as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, original
and inexhaustible.
PURPORT
In this verse the description of mahätmä is clearly given. The first sign of the mahätmä is that he is
already situated in the divine nature. He is not under the control of material
nature. And how is this effected? That is explained in the Seventh Chapter: one
who surrenders unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëa, at once
becomes freed from the control of material nature. That is the qualification.
One can become free from the control of material nature as soon as he
surrenders his soul to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. That is the
preliminary formula. Being marginal potency, as soon as the living entity is
freed from the control of material nature, he is put under the guidance of the
spiritual nature. The guidance of the spiritual nature is called daivéà prakåtim, divine nature. So, when one is
promoted in that way—by surrendering to the Supreme Personality of Godhead—one
attains to the stage of great soul, mahätmä.
The mahätmä does not divert his attention to anything outside Kåñëa because he knows perfectly well that Kåñëa is the original Supreme Person, the cause of all causes. There is no doubt about it. Such a mahätmä, or great soul, develops through association with other mahätmäs, pure devotees. Pure devotees are not even attracted by Kåñëa’s other features, such as the four-armed Mahä-Viñëu. They are simply attracted by the two-armed form of Kåñëa. Since they are not attracted to other features of Kåñëa (what to speak of the demigods), they are not concerned with any form of a demigod or of a human being. They only meditate upon Kåñëa in Kåñëa consciousness. They are always engaged in the unswerving service of the Lord in Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg 9.14
TEXT
14
TEXT
SaTaTa&
k-ITaRYaNTaae Maa& YaTaNTaê d*!v]Taa" )
NaMaSYaNTaê Maa& >a¢-ya iNaTYaYau¢-a oPaaSaTae )) 14 ))
satataà kértayanto mäà
yatantaç ca dåòha-vratäù
namasyantaç ca mäà bhaktyä
nitya-yuktä upäsate
satatam—always; kértayantaù—chanting; mäm—Me;
yatantaù ca—fully endeavoring also; dåòha-vratäù—with determination; namasyantaù ca—offering obeisances; mäm—unto Me; bhaktyä—in
devotion; nitya-yuktäù—perpetually engaged; upäsate—worship.
TRANSLATION
Always chanting My glories, endeavoring with great determination,
bowing down before Me, these great souls perpetually worship Me with devotion.
PURPORT
The mahätmä cannot be manufactured
by rubber-stamping an ordinary man. His symptoms are described here: a mahätmä is always engaged
in chanting the glories of the Supreme Lord Kåñëa, the Personality of Godhead.
He has no other business. He is always engaged in the glorification of the
Lord. In other words, he is not an impersonalist. When the question of
glorification is there, one has to glorify the Supreme Lord, praising His holy
name, His eternal form, His transcendental qualities and His uncommon pastimes.
One has to glorify all these things; therefore a mahätmä
is attached to the Supreme Personality of
Godhead.
One who is attached to the impersonal feature of the Supreme Lord, the brahmajyoti, is not described as mahätmä in the Bhagavad-gétä. He is described in a different way in the next verse. The mahätmä is always engaged in different activities of devotional service, as described in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam, hearing and chanting about Viñëu, not a demigod or human being. That is devotion: çravaëaà kértanaà viñëoù, smaraëam, and remembering Him. Such a mahätmä has firm determination to achieve at the ultimate end the association of the Supreme Lord in any one of the five transcendental rasas. To achieve that success, he engages all activities—mental, bodily and vocal, everything—in the service of the Supreme Lord, Çré Kåñëa. That is called full Kåñëa consciousness.
In devotional service there are certain activities which are called determined, such as fasting on certain days, like the eleventh day of the moon, Ekädaçé, and on the appearance day of the Lord, etc. All these rules and regulations are offered by the great äcäryas for those who are actually interested in getting admission into the association of the Supreme Personality of Godhead in the transcendental world. The mahätmäs, great souls, strictly observe all these rules and regulations, and therefore they are sure to achieve the desired result.
As described in the second verse of this chapter, this devotional service is not only easy, but it can be performed in a happy mood. One does not need to undergo any severe penance and austerity. He can live this life in devotional service, guided by an expert spiritual master, and in any position, either as a householder or a sannyäsé, or a brahmacäré; in any position and anywhere in the world, he can perform this devotional service to the Supreme Personality of Godhead and thus become actually mahätmä, a great soul.
Bg 9.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
jaNaYajeNa
caPYaNYae YaJaNTaae MaaMauPaaSaTae )
Wk-TveNa Pa*Qa¤e-Na bhuDaa ivìTaaeMau%Ma( )) 15 ))
jïäna-yajïena cäpy anye
yajanto mäm upäsate
ekatvena påthaktvena
bahudhä viçvato-mukham
jïäna-yajïena—by
cultivation of knowledge; ca—also; api—certainly; anye—others;
yajantaù—worshiping; mäm—Me;
upäsate—worship; ekatvena—in
oneness; påthaktvena—in duality; bahudhä—diversity; viçvataù-mukham—in
the universal form.
TRANSLATION
Others, who are engaged in the cultivation of knowledge, worship
the Supreme Lord as the one without a second, diverse in many, and in the
universal form.
PURPORT
This verse is the summary of the previous verses. The Lord tells
Arjuna that those who are purely in Kåñëa consciousness and do not know
anything other than Kåñëa are called mahätmä; yet
there are other persons who are not exactly in the position of mahätmä but who worship Kåñëa also, in different ways.
Some of them are already described as the distressed, the financially
destitute, the inquisitive, and those who are engaged in the cultivation of
knowledge. But there are others who are still lower, and these are divided into
three: 1) He who worships himself as one with the Supreme Lord, 2) He who
concocts some form of the Supreme Lord and worships that, and 3) He who accepts
the universal form, the viçvarüpa of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, and worships that. Out of the above three, the lowest,
those who worship themselves as the Supreme Lord, thinking themselves to be
monists, are most predominant. Such people think themselves to be the Supreme
Lord, and in this mentality they worship themselves. This is also a type of God
worship, for they can understand that they are not the material body but are
actually spiritual soul; at least, such a sense is prominent. Generally the
impersonalists worship the Supreme Lord in this way. The second class includes
the worshipers of the demigods, those who by imagination consider any form to
be the form of the Supreme Lord. And the third class includes those who cannot
conceive of anything beyond the manifestation of this material universe. They
consider the universe to be the supreme organism or entity and worship that.
The universe is also a form of the Lord.
Bg 9.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
Ah&
§-Taurh& Yaj" SvDaahMahMaaEzDaMa( )
MaN}aae_hMahMaevaJYaMahMaiGanrh& huTaMa( )) 16 ))
ahaà kratur ahaà yajïaù
svadhäham aham auñadham
mantro ’ham aham eväjyam
aham agnir ahaà hutam
aham—I; kratuù—ritual; aham—I; yajïaù—sacrifice; svadhä—oblation;
aham—I ; aham—I; auñadham—healing herb ; mantraù—transcendental
chant; aham—I; aham—I;
eva—certainly; ajyam—melted
butter; aham—I; agniù—fire;
aham—I; hutam—offering.
TRANSLATION
But it is I who am the ritual, I the sacrifice, the offering to
the ancestors, the healing herb, the transcendental chant. I am the butter and
the fire and the offering.
PURPORT
The sacrifice known as jyotiñöoma is also Kåñëa, and He is also the mahä-yajïa
The oblations offered to the Pitåloka or the sacrifice performed to
please the Pitåloka, considered as a kind of drug in the form of clarified
butter, is also Kåñëa. The mantras chanted in
this connection are also Kåñëa. And many other commodities made with milk
products for offering in the sacrifices are also Kåñëa. The fire is also Kåñëa
because fire is one of the five material elements and is therefore claimed as
the separated energy of Kåñëa. In other words, the Vedic sacrifices recommended
in the karma-käëòa division of the Vedas are in total also Kåñëa. Or, in other words,
those who are engaged in rendering devotional service unto Kåñëa are to be
understood to have performed all the sacrifices recommended in the Vedas.
Bg 9.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
iPaTaahMaSYa
JaGaTaae MaaTaa DaaTaa iPaTaaMah" )
veÛ& Paiv}aMa( pk-ar ‰k(- SaaMa YaJaurev c )) 17 ))
pitäham asya jagato
mätä dhätä pitämahaù
vedyaà pavitram oàkära
åk säma yajur eva ca
pitä—father; aham—I; asya—of this; jagataù—of the universe; mätä—mother;
dhätä—supporter; pitämahaù—grandfather;
vedyam—what is to be known; pavitram—that which purifies; omkäraù—the
syllable om; åk—the Åg-veda;
säma—the Säma-veda; yajuù—the Yajur-veda; eva—certainly; ca—and.
TRANSLATION
I am the father of this universe, the mother, the support, and the
grandsire. I am the object of knowledge, the purifier and the syllable om. I am
also the Åk, the Säma, and the Yajur [Vedas].
PURPORT
The entire cosmic manifestations, moving and nonmoving, are
manifested by different activities of Kåñëa’s energy. In the material existence
we create different relationships with different living entities who are
nothing but Kåñëa’s marginal energy, but under the creation of prakåti some of them appear as our father, mother, grandfather,
creator, etc., but actually they are parts and parcels of Kåñëa. As such, these
living entities who appear to be our father, mother, etc., are nothing but
Kåñëa. In this verse the word dhätä means
creator. Not only are our father and mother parts and parcels of Kåñëa, but
their creator, grandmother, and grandfather, etc., are also Kåñëa. Actually any
living entity, being part and parcel of Kåñëa, is Kåñëa. All the Vedas, therefore, aim only toward Kåñëa. Whatever we
want to know through the Vedas is but a progressive step to understand Kåñëa. That
subject matter which helps us purify our constitutional position is especially
Kåñëa. Similarly, the living entity who is inquisitive to understand all Vedic
principles is also part and parcel of Kåñëa and as such is also Kåñëa. In all
the Vedic mantras the word om, called praëava, is a transcendental sound vibration and is also Kåñëa.
And because in all the hymns of the four Vedas, Säma,
Yajur, Åg and Atharva, the praëava or omkära is very
prominent, it is understood to be Kåñëa.
Bg 9.18
TEXT
18
TEXT
GaiTa>aRTaaR
Pa[>au" Saa+aq iNavaSa" Xar<a& SauôTa( )
Pa[>av" Pa[l/Ya" SQaaNa& iNaDaaNa& bqJaMaVYaYaMa( )) 18 ))
gatir bhartä prabhuù säkñé
niväsaù çaraëaà suhåt
prabhavaù pralayaù sthänaà
nidhänaà béjam avyayam
gatiù—goal; bhartä—sustainer; prabhuù—Lord;
säkñé—witness; niväsaù—abode;
çaraëam—refuge; suhåt—most
intimate friend; prabhavaù—creation; pralayaù—dissolution; sthänam—ground;
nidhänam—resting place; béjam—seed;
avyayam—imperishable.
TRANSLATION
I am the goal, the sustainer, the master, the witness, the abode,
the refuge and the most dear friend. I am the creation and the annihilation,
the basis of everything, the resting place and the eternal seed.
PURPORT
Gati means the
destination where we want to go. But the ultimate goal is Kåñëa, although
people do not know it. One who does not know Kåñëa is misled, and his so-called
progressive march is either partial or hallucinatory. There are many who make
as their destination different demigods, and by rigid performance of the strict
respective methods they reach different planets known as Candraloka, Süryaloka,
Indraloka, Maharloka, etc. But all such lokas or
planets, being creations of Kåñëa, are simultaneously Kåñëa and not Kåñëa.
Actually such planets, being the manifestations of Kåñëa’s energy, are also
Kåñëa, but actually they only serve as a step forward for realization of Kåñëa.
To approach the different energies of Kåñëa is to approach Kåñëa indirectly.
One should directly approach Kåñëa, for that will save time and energy. For
example, if there is a possibility of going to the top of a building by the
help of an elevator, why should one go by the staircase, step by step?
Everything is resting on Kåñëa’s energy; therefore without Kåñëa’s shelter
nothing can exist. Kåñëa is the supreme ruler because everything belongs to Him
and everything exists on His energy. Kåñëa, being situated in everyone’s heart,
is the supreme witness. The residences, countries or planets on which we live
are also Kåñëa. Kåñëa is the ultimate goal of shelter, and as such one should
take shelter of Kåñëa either for protection or for annihilation of his
distressed condition. And whenever we have to take protection, we should know
that our protection must be a living force. Thus Kåñëa is the supreme living
entity. Since Kåñëa is the source of our generation, or the supreme father, no
one can be a better friend than Kåñëa, nor can anyone be a better well-wisher.
Kåñëa is the original source of creation and the ultimate rest after annihilation.
Kåñëa is therefore the eternal cause of all causes.
Bg 9.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
TaPaaMYahMah&
vz| iNaGa*õaMYauTSa*JaaiMa c )
AMa*Ta& cEv Ma*TYauê SadSaÀahMaJauRNa )) 19 ))
tapämy aham ahaà varñaà
nigåhëämy utsåjämi ca
amåtaà caiva måtyuç ca
sad asac cäham arjuna
tapämi—give heat; aham—I; aham—I; varñam—rain; nigåhëämi—withold;
utsåjämi—send forth; ca—and;
amåtam—immortality; ca—and;
eva—certainly; måtyuù—death;
ca—and; sat—being; asat—nonbeing; ca—and; aham—I; arjuna—O Arjuna.
TRANSLATION
O Arjuna, I control heat, the rain and the drought. I am
immortality, and I am also death personified. Both being and nonbeing are in
Me.
PURPORT
Kåñëa, by His different energies, diffuses heat and light through
the agency of electricity and the sun. During summer season it is Kåñëa who
checks rain from falling from the sky, and then, during the rainy season, He
gives unceasing torrents of rain. The energy which sustains us by prolonging
the duration of our life is Kåñëa, and Kåñëa meets us at the end as death. By
analyzing all these different energies of Kåñëa, one can acertain that for
Kåñëa there is no distinction between matter and spirit, or, in other words, He
is both matter and spirit. In the advanced stage of Kåñëa consciousness, one
does not therefore make such distinctions. He sees Kåñëa only in everything.
Since Kåñëa is both matter and spirit, the gigantic universal form comprising all material manifestations is also Kåñëa, and His pastimes in Våndävana as two-handed Çyämasundara, playing on a flute, are those of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Bg 9.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
}aEivÛa Maa&
SaaeMaPaa" PaUTaPaaPaa
YajEirîa SvGaRiTa& Pa[aQaRYaNTae )
Tae Pau<YaMaaSaaÛ SaureNd]l/aek-‚
MaéniNTa idVYaaiNdiv dev>aaeGaaNa( ))
20 ))
trai-vidyä mäà soma-päù püta-päpä
yajïair iñövä svar-gatià prärthayante
te puëyam äsädya surendra-lokam
açnanti divyän divi deva-bhogän
trai-vidyäù—the knowers
of the three Vedas; mäm—unto Me; soma-päù—drinkers of soma juice;
püta—purified; päpäù—sins;
yajïaiù—with sacrifices; iñövä—after
worshiping; svargatim—passage to heaven; prärthayante—pray; te—they;
puëyam—virtue; äsädya—enjoying;
surendra—of Indra; lokam—world;
açnanti—enjoy; divyän—celestial;
divi—in heaven; deva-bhogän—pleasures
of the gods.
TRANSLATION
Those who study the Vedas and drink the soma juice, seeking the
heavenly planets, worship Me indirectly. They take birth on the planet of
Indra, where they enjoy godly delights.
PURPORT
The word trai-vidyäù refers to the
three Vedas, Säma, Yajur and Åg. A brähmaëa who has
studied these three Vedas is called a tri-vedé. Anyone
who is very much attached to knowledge derived from these three Vedas is respected in
society. Unfortunately, there are many great scholars of the Vedas who do not know the ultimate purport of studying
them. Therefore Kåñëa herein declares Himself to be the ultimate goal for the tri-vedés. Actual tri-vedés take
shelter under the lotus feet of Kåñëa and engage in pure devotional service to
satisfy the Lord. Devotional service begins with the chanting of the Hare Kåñëa
mantra and side by side trying to understand
Kåñëa in truth. Unfortunately those who are simply official students of the Vedas become more interested in offering sacrifices to
the different demigods like Indra, Candra, etc. By such endeavor, the
worshipers of different demigods are certainly purified of the contamination of
the lower qualities of nature and are thereby elevated to the higher planetary
system or heavenly planets known as Maharloka, Janaloka, Tapoloka, etc. Once
situated on those higher planetary systems, one can satisfy his senses hundreds
of thousands of times better than on this planet.
Bg 9.21
TEXT
21
TEXT
Tae Ta&
>au¤-a SvGaRl/aek&- ivXaal&/
+aq<ae Pau<Yae MaTYaRl/aek&-
ivXaiNTa )
Wv& }aYaqDaMaRMaNauPa[Paàa
GaTaaGaTa& k-aMak-aMaa l/>aNTae
)) 21 ))
te taà bhuktvä svarga-lokaà viçälaà
kñéëe puëye martya-lokaà viçanti
evaà trayé-dharmam anuprapannä
gatägataà käma-kämä labhante
te—they; tam—that; bhuktvä—enjoying;
svarga-lokam—heaven; viçälam—vast;
kñéëe—being exhausted; puëye—merits;
martya-lokam—mortal earth; viçanti—fall down; evam—thus;
trayé—three Vedas; dharmam—doctrines; anuprapannäù—following;
gata-agatam—death and birth; käma-kämäù—desiring sense enjoyments; labhante—attain.
TRANSLATION
When they have thus enjoyed heavenly sense pleasure, they return
to this mortal planet again. Thus, through the Vedic principles, they achieve
only flickering happiness.
PURPORT
One who is promoted to those higher planetary systems enjoys a
longer duration of life and better facilities for sense enjoyment, yet one is
not allowed to stay there forever. One is again sent back to this earthly
planet upon finishing the resultant fruits of pious activities. He who has not
attained perfection of knowledge, as indicated in the Vedänta-sütra
(janmädy asya yataù), or, in other words, he who fails to understand
Kåñëa, the cause of all causes, becomes baffled in achieving the ultimate goal
of life and is thus subjected to the routine of being promoted to the higher
planets and then again coming down, as if situated on a ferris wheel which
sometimes goes up and sometimes comes down. The purport is that instead of
being elevated to the spiritual world where there is no longer any possibility
of coming down, one simply revolves in the cycle of birth and death on higher
and lower planetary systems. One should better take to the spiritual world to
enjoy eternal life full of bliss and knowledge and never return to this
miserable material existence.
Bg 9.22
TEXT
22
TEXT
ANaNYaaiêNTaYaNTaae
Maa& Yae JaNaa" PaYauRPaaSaTae
Taeza& iNaTYaai>aYau¢-aNaa& YaaeGa+aeMa& vhaMYahMa( )) 22 ))
ananyäç cintayanto mäà
ye janäù paryupäsate
teñäà nityäbhiyuktänäà
yoga-kñemaà vahämy aham
ananyäù—no other; cintayantaù—concentrating; mäm—unto
Me; ye—who; janäù—persons;
paryupäsate—properly worship; teñäm—their; nitya—always
abhiyuktänäm—fixed in devotion; yoga-kñemam—requirements; vahämi—carry;
aham—I.
TRANSLATION
But those who worship Me with devotion, meditating on My
transcendental form—to them I carry what they lack and preserve what they have.
PURPORT
One who is unable to live for a moment without Kåñëa consciousness
cannot but think of Kåñëa twenty-four hours, being engaged in devotional
service by hearing, chanting, remembering, offering prayers, worshiping,
serving the lotus feet of the Lord, rendering other services, cultivating
friendship and surrendering fully to the Lord. Such activities are all
auspicious and full of spiritual potencies; indeed, they make the devotee
perfect in self-realization. Then his only desire is to achieve the association
of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This is called yoga.
By the mercy of the Lord, such a devotee never comes back to this material
condition of life. Kñema refers to the merciful
protection of the Lord. The Lord helps the devotee to achieve Kåñëa consciousness
by yoga, and when he becomes fully Kåñëa
conscious the Lord protects him from falling down to a miserable conditioned
life.
Bg 9.23
TEXT
23
TEXT
Yae_PYaNYadevTaa>a¢-a
YaJaNTae é[ÖYaaiNvTaa" )
Tae_iPa MaaMaev k-aENTaeYa YaJaNTYaiviDaPaUvRk-Ma( )) 23 ))
ye ’py anya-devatä-bhaktä
yajante çraddhayänvitäù
te ’pi mäm eva kaunteya
yajanty avidhi-pürvakam
ye—those; api—also; anya—other; devatä—demigods; bhaktäù—devotees;
yajante—worship;
çraddhaya-anvitäù—with faith; te—they; api—also; mäm—Me; eva—even; kaunteya—O son
of Kunté; yajanti—sacrifice; avidhi-pürvakam—in a wrong way.
TRANSLATION
Whatever a man may sacrifice to other gods, O son of Kunté, is
really meant for Me alone, but it is offered without true understanding.
PURPORT
“Persons who are engaged in the worship of demigods are not very
intelligent, although such worship is done to Me indirectly,” Kåñëa says. For
example, when a man pours water on the leaves and branches of a tree without
pouring water on the root, he does so without sufficient knowledge or without
observing regulative principles. Similarly, the process of rendering service to
different parts of the body is to supply food to the stomach. The demigods are,
so to speak, different officers and directors in the government of the Supreme Lord.
One has to follow the laws made by the government, not by the officers or
directors. Similarly, everyone is to offer his worship to the Supreme Lord
only. That will automatically satisfy the different officers and directors of
the Lord. The officers and directors are engaged as representatives of the
government, and to offer some bribe to the officers and directors is illegal.
This is stated here as avidhi-pürvakam. In other
words, Kåñëa does not approve the unnecessary worship of the demigods.
Bg 9.24
TEXT
24
TEXT
Ah& ih
SavRYajaNaa& >aae¢-a c Pa[>aurev c )
Na Tau MaaMai>aJaaNaiNTa TatveNaaTaXCYaviNTa Tae )) 24 ))
ahaà hi sarva-yajïänäà
bhoktä ca prabhur eva ca
na tu mäm abhijänanti
tattvenätaç cyavanti te
aham—I; hi—surely; sarva—of all;
yajïänäm—sacrifices; bhoktä—enjoyer;
ca—and; prabhuù—Lord;
eva—also; ca—and; na—not; tu—but; mäm—Me; abhijänanti—know;
tattvena—in reality; ataù—therefore;
cyavanti—fall down; te—they.
TRANSLATION
I am the only enjoyer and the only object of sacrifice. Those who
do not recognize My true transcendental nature fall down.
PURPORT
Here it is clearly stated that there are many types of yajïa performances recommended in the Vedic
literatures, but actually all of them are meant for satisfying the Supreme
Lord. Yajïa means Viñëu. In the Second Chapter of
Bhagavad-gétä it is clearly stated that one
should only work for satisfying Yajïa or Viñëu.
The perfectional form of human civilization, known as varëäçrama-dharma,
is specifically meant for satisfying
Viñëu. Therefore, Kåñëa says in this verse, “I am the enjoyer of all sacrifices
because I am the supreme master.” However, less intelligent persons, without
knowing this fact, worship demigods for temporary benefit. Therefore they fall
down to material existence and do not achieve the desired goal of life. If,
however, anyone has any material desire to be fulfilled, he had better pray for
it to the Supreme Lord (although that is not pure devotion), and he will thus
achieve the desired result.
Bg 9.25
TEXT
25
TEXT
YaaiNTa devv]Taa
devaiNPaTa›NYaaiNTa iPaTa*v]Taa" )
>aUTaaiNa YaaiNTa >aUTaeJYaa YaaiNTa MaÛaiJaNaae_iPa MaaMa( )) 25 ))
yänti deva-vratä devän
pitèn yänti pitå-vratäù
bhütäni yänti bhütejyä
yänti mad-yäjino ’pi mäm
yänti—achieve; deva-vratäù—worshipers of demigods; devän—to demigods; pitèn—to
ancestors; yänti—go; pitå-vratäù—worshipers
of ancestors; bhütäni—to ghosts and spirits; yänti—go; bhütejyäù—worshipers
of ghosts and spirits; yänti—go; mat—My; yäjinaù—devotees;
api—also; mäm—unto
Me.
TRANSLATION
Those who worship the demigods will take birth among the demigods;
those who worship ghosts and spirits will take birth among such beings; those
who worship ancestors go to the ancestors; and those who worship Me will live
with Me.
PURPORT
If anyone has any desire to go to the moon, the sun, or any other
planet, one can attain the desired destination by following specific Vedic
principles recommended for that purpose. These are vividly described in the
fruitive activities portion of the Vedas, technically
known as darça-paurëamäsé, which recommends a
specific worship of demigods situated on different heavenly planets. Similarly,
one can attain the pitä planets by performing a
specific yajïa. Similarly, one can go to many
ghostly planets and become a yakña, rakña or piçäca. Piçäca worship is called “black arts” or “black
magic.” There are many men who practice this black art, and they think that it
is spiritualism, but such activities are completely materialistic. Similarly, a
pure devotee, who worships the Supreme Personality of Godhead only, achieves
the planets of Vaikuëöha and Kåñëaloka without a doubt. It is very easy to
understand through this important verse that if by simply worshiping the
demigods one can achieve the heavenly planets, or by worshiping the pitä achieve the pitä planets,
or by practicing the black arts achieve the ghostly planets, why can the pure
devotee not achieve the planet of Kåñëa or Viñëu? Unfortunately many people
have no information of these sublime planets where Kåñëa and Viñëu live, and
because they do not know of them they fall down. Even the impersonalists fall
down from the brahmajyoti. This Kåñëa
consciousness movement is therefore distributing sublime information to the
entire human society to the effect that by simply chanting the Hare Kåñëa mantra one can become perfect in this life and go back
home, back to Godhead.
Bg 9.26
TEXT
26
TEXT
Pa}a&
PauZPa& f-l&/ TaaeYa& Yaae Mae >a¢-ya Pa[YaC^iTa )
Tadh& >a¢-yuPaôTaMaénaiMa Pa[YaTaaTMaNa" )) 26 ))
patraà puñpaà phalaà toyaà
yo me bhaktyä prayacchati
tad ahaà bhakty-upahåtam
açnämi prayatätmanaù
patram—a leaf; puñpam—a flower; phalam—a
fruit; toyam—water; yaù—whoever;
me—unto Me; bhaktyä—with
devotion; prayacchati—offers; tat—that; aham—I; bhakti-upahåtam—offered in devotion; açnämi—accept; prayata-ätmanaù—of
one in pure consciousness.
TRANSLATION
If one offers Me with love and devotion a leaf, a flower, fruit a
water, I will accept it.
PURPORT
Here Lord Kåñëa, having established that He is the only enjoyer,
the primeval Lord, and the real object of all sacrificial offerings, reveals
what types of sacrifices He desires to be offered. If one wishes to engage in
devotional service to the Supreme in order to be purified and to reach the goal
of life—the transcendental loving service of God—then he should find out what
the Lord desires of him. One who loves Kåñëa will give Him whatever He wants,
and he avoids offering anything which is undesirable or unasked for. Thus,
meat, fish and eggs should not be offered to Kåñëa. If He desired such things
as offerings, He would have said so. Instead He clearly requests that a leaf,
fruit, flowers and water be given to Him, and He says of this offering, “I will
accept it.” Therefore, we should understand that He will not accept meat, fish
and eggs. Vegetables, grains, fruits, milk and water are the proper foods for
human beings and are prescribed by Lord Kåñëa Himself. Whatever else we eat
cannot be offered to Him, since He will not accept it. Thus we cannot be acting
on the level of loving devotion if we offer such foods.
In the Third Chapter, verse thirteen, Çré Kåñëa explains that only the remains of sacrifice are purified and fit for consumption by those who are seeking advancement in life and release from the clutches of the material entanglement. Those who do not make an offering of their food, He says in the same verse, are said to be eating only sin. In other words, their every mouthful is simply deepening their involvement in the complexities of material nature. But preparing nice, simple vegetable dishes, offering them before the picture or Deity of Lord Kåñëa and bowing down and praying for Him to accept such a humble offering, enable one to advance steadily in life, to purify the body, and to create fine brain tissues which will lead to clear thinking. Above all, the offering should be made with an attitude of love. Kåñëa has no need of food, since He already possesses everything that be, yet He will accept the offering of one who desires to please Him in that way. The important element, in preparation, in serving and in offering, is to act with love for Kåñëa.
The impersonalist philosophers, who wish to maintain that the Absolute Truth is without senses, cannot comprehend this verse of Bhagavad-gétä. To them, it is either a metaphor or proof of the mundane character of Kåñëa, the speaker of the Gétä. But, in actuality, Kåñëa, the Supreme Godhead, has senses, and it is stated that His senses are interchangeable; in other words, one sense can perform the function of any other. This is what it means to say that Kåñëa is absolute. Lacking senses, He could hardly be considered full in all opulences. In the Seventh Chapter, Kåñëa has explained that He impregnates the living entities into material nature. This is done by His looking upon material nature. And so in this instance, Kåñëa’s hearing the devotee’s words of love in offering foodstuffs is wholly identical with His eating and actually tasting. This point should be emphasized: because of His absolute position, His hearing is wholly identical with His eating and tasting. Only the devotee, who accepts Kåñëa as He describes Himself, without interpretation, can understand that the Supreme Absolute Truth can eat food and enjoy it.
Bg 9.27
TEXT
27
TEXT
YaTk-raeiz
YadénaiSa YaÂuhaeiz ddaiSa YaTa( )
YataPaSYaiSa k-aENTaeYa TaTku-åZv MadPaR<aMa( )) 27 ))
yat karoñi yad açnäsi
yaj juhoñi dadäsi yat
yat tapasyasi kaunteya
tat kuruñva mad-arpaëam
yat—what; karoñi—you do; yat—whatever;
açnäsi—you eat; yat—whatever;
juhoñi—you offer; dadäsi—you
give away; yat—whatever; yat—whatever;
tapasyasi—austerities you perform; kaunteya—O son of Kunté; tat—that;
kuruñva—make; mat—unto
Me; arpaëam—offering.
TRANSLATION
O son of Kunté, all that you do, all that you eat, all that you
offer and give away, as well as all austerities that you may perform, should be
done as an offering unto Me.
PURPORT
Thus, it is the duty of everyone to mold his life in such a way
that he will not forget Kåñëa in any circumstance. Everyone has to work for
maintenance of his body and soul together, and Kåñëa recommends herein that one
should work for Him. Everyone has to eat something to live; therefore he should
accept the remnants of foodstuffs offered to Kåñëa. Any civilized man has to
perform some religious ritualistic ceremonies; therefore Kåñëa recommends, “Do
it for Me,” and this is called arcanä. Everyone
has a tendency to give something in charity; Kåñëa says, “Give it to Me,” and
this means that all surplus money accummulated should be utilized in furthering
the Kåñëa consciousness movement. Nowadays people are very much inclined to the
meditational process, which is not practical in this age, but if anyone
practices meditating on Kåñëa twenty-four hours by chanting the Hare Kåñëa mantra round his beads, he is surely the greatest yogé, as substantiated by the Sixth Chapter of Bhagavad-gétä.
Bg 9.28
TEXT
28
TEXT
éu>aaéu>af-lE/rev&
Maae+YaSae k-MaRbNDaNaE" )
SaNNYaaSaYaaeGaYau¢-aTMaa ivMau¢-ae MaaMauPaEZYaiSa )) 28 ))
çubhäçubha-phalair evaà
mokñyase karma-bandhanaiù
sannyäsa-yoga-yuktätmä
vimukto mäm upaiñyasi
çubha—good; açubha—evil; phalaiù—results;
evam—thus; mokñyase—free;
karma—action; bandhanaiù—bondage;
sannyäsa—of renunciation; yoga—the
yoga; yukta-ätmä—having the mind firmly set on; vimuktaù—liberated; mäm—to
Me; upaiñyasi—you will attain.
TRANSLATION
In this way you will be freed from all reactions to good and evil
deeds, and by this principle of renunciation you will be liberated and come to
Me.
PURPORT
One who acts in Kåñëa consciousness under superior direction is
called yukta. The technical term is yukta-vairägya. This is further explained by Rüpa
Gosvämé as follows.
Rüpa Gosvämé says that as long as we are in this material world we have to act; we cannot cease acting. Therefore if actions are performed and the fruits are given to Kåñëa, then that is called yukta-vairägya. Actually situated in renunciation, such activities clear the mirror of the mind, and as the actor gradually makes progress in spiritual realization he becomes completely surrendered to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Therefore at the end he becomes liberated, and this liberation is also specified. By this liberation he does not become one with the brahmajyoti but rather enters into the planet of the Supreme Lord. It is clearly mentioned here: mäm upaiñyasi, “he comes to Me,” back home, back to Godhead. There are five different stages of liberation, and here it is specified that the devotee who has always lived his lifetime here under the direction of the Supreme Lord, as stated, has evolved to the point where he can, after quitting this body, go back to Godhead and engage directly in the association of the Supreme Lord.
Anyone who has no other interest but to dedicate his life to the service of the Lord is actually a sannyäsé Such a person always thinks of himself as an eternal servant, dependant on the supreme will of the Lord. As such, whatever he does, he does it for the benefit of the Lord. Whatever action he performs, he performs it as service to the Lord. He does not give serious attention to the fruitive activities or prescribed duties mentioned in the Vedas. For ordinary persons it is obligatory to execute the prescribed duties mentioned in the Vedas, but although a pure devotee who is completely engaged in the service of the Lord may sometimes appear to go against the prescribed Vedic duties, actually it is not so.
It is said, therefore, by Vaiñëava authorities that even the most intelligent person cannot understand the plans and activities of a pure devotee. The exact words are vaiñëavera kriyä mudrä vijïe nä bujhayä. A person who is thus always engaged in the service of the Lord or is always thinking and planning how to serve the Lord is to be considered completely liberated at present and in the future. His going home, back to Godhead, is guaranteed. He is above all materialistic criticism, just as Kåñëa is above all criticism.
Bg 9.29
TEXT
29
TEXT
SaMaae_h&
SavR>aUTaezu Na Mae ÜeZYaae_iSTa Na iPa[Ya" )
Yae >aJaiNTa Tau Maa& >a¢-ya MaiYa Tae Taezu caPYahMa( )) 29 ))
samo ’haà sarva-bhüteñu
na me dveñyo ’sti na priyaù
ye bhajanti tu mäà bhaktyä
mayi te teñu cäpy aham
samaù—equally
disposed; aham—I;
sarva-bhüteñu—to all living entities; na—no
one; me—Mine; dveñyaù—hateful;
asti—is; na—nor; priyaù—dear; ye—those; bhajanti—render transcendental service; tu—yet; mäm—unto Me; bhaktyä—in devotion; mayi—unto
Me; te—such persons; teñu—in
them; ca—also; api—certainly;
aham—I.
TRANSLATION
I envy no one, nor am I partial to anyone. I am equal to all. But
whoever renders service unto Me in devotion is a friend, is in Me, and I am
also a friend to him.
PURPORT
One may question here that if Kåñëa is equal to everyone and no
one is His special friend, then why does He take a special interest in the
devotees who are always engaged in His transcendental service? But this is not
discrimination; it is natural. Any man in this material world may be very
charitably disposed, yet he has a special interest in his own children. The
Lord claims that every living entity—in whatever form—is His son, and as such
He provides everyone with a generous supply of the necessities of life. He is
just like a cloud which pours rain all over, regardless whether it falls on
rock or land or water. But for His devotees, He gives specific attention. Such
devotees are mentioned here: they are always in Kåñëa consciousness, and
therefore they are always transcendentally situated in Kåñëa. The very phrase
Kåñëa consciousness suggests that those who are in such consciousness are
living transcendentalists, situated in Him. The Lord says here distinctly, “mayi te,” “in Me.” Naturally, as a result, the Lord is
also in them. This is reciprocal. This also explains the words: asti na priyaù/ye bhajanti: “Whoever surrenders unto
Me, proportionately I take care of him.” This transcendental reciprocation
exists because both the Lord and the devotee are conscious. When a diamond is
set in a golden ring, it looks very nice. The gold is glorified, and at the
same time the diamond is glorified. The Lord and the living entity eternally
glitter, and when a living entity becomes inclined to the service of the
Supreme Lord, he looks like gold. The Lord is a diamond, and so this
combination is very nice. Living entities in a pure state are called devotees.
The Supreme Lord becomes the devotee of His devotees. If a reciprocal
relationship is not present between the devotee and the Lord, then there is no
personalist philosophy. In the impersonal philosophy there is no reciprocation
between the Supreme and the living entity, but in the personalist philosophy
there is.
The example is often given that the Lord is like a desire tree, and whatever one wants from this desire tree, the Lord supplies. But here the explanation is more complete. The Lord is here stated to be partial to the devotees. This is the manifestation of the Lord’s special mercy to the devotees. The Lord’s reciprocation should not be considered to be under the law of karma. It belongs to the transcendental situation in which the Lord and His devotees function. Devotional service of the Lord is not an activity of this material world; it is part of the spiritual world where eternity, bliss and knowledge predominate.
Bg 9.30
TEXT
30
TEXT
AiPa
ceTSauduracarae >aJaTae MaaMaNaNYa>aak(- )
SaaDaurev Sa MaNTaVYa" SaMYaGVYaviSaTaae ih Sa" )) 30 ))
api cet su-duräcäro
bhajate mäm ananya-bhäk
sädhur eva sa mantavyaù
samyag vyavasito hi saù
api—in spite of;
cet—although; suduräcäraù—one
committing the most abominable actions; bhajate—engaged
in devotional service; mäm—unto Me; ananya-bhäk—without deviation; sädhuù—saint;
eva—certainly; saù—he;
mantavyaù—to be considered; samyak—completely; vyavasitaù—situated;
hi—certainly; saù—he.
TRANSLATION
Even if one commits the most abominable actions, if he is engaged
in devotional service, he is to be considered saintly because he is properly
situated.
PURPORT
The word suduräcäro used in this
verse is very significant, and we should understand it properly. When a living
entity is conditioned, he has two kinds of activities: one is conditional, and
the other is constitutional. As for protecting the body or abiding by the rules
of society and state, certainly there are different activities, even for the
devotees, in connection with the conditional life, and such activities are
called conditional. Besides these, the living entity who is fully conscious of
his spiritual nature and is engaged in Kåñëa consciousness, or the devotional
service of the Lord, has activities which are called transcendental. Such
activities are performed in his constitutional position, and they are
technically called devotional service. Now, in the conditioned state, sometimes
devotional service and the conditional service in relation to the body will
parallel one another. But then again, sometimes these activities become opposed
to one another. As far as possible, a devotee is very cautious so that he does
not do anything that could disrupt his wholesome condition. He knows that
perfection in his activities depends on his progressive realization of Kåñëa
consciousness. Sometimes, however, it may be seen that a person in Kåñëa
consciousness commits some act which may be taken as most abominable socially
or politically. But such a temporary falldown does not disqualify him. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam it is stated that if a person falls
down, but is wholeheartedly engaged in the transcendental service of the
Supreme Lord, the Lord, being situated within his heart, beautifies him and
excuses him from that abomination. The material contamination is so strong that
even a yogé fully engaged in the service of the
Lord sometimes becomes ensnared; but Kåñëa consciousness is so strong that such
an occasional falldown is at once rectified. Therefore the process of
devotional service is always a success. No one should deride a devotee for some
accidental falldown from the ideal path, for, as is explained in the next
verse, such occasional falldowns will be stopped in due course, as soon as a
devotee is completely situated in Kåñëa consciousness.
Therefore a person who is situated in Kåñëa consciousness and is engaged with determination in the process of chanting Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare should be considered to be in the transcendental position, even if by chance or accident he is found to have fallen. The words sädhur eva, “he is saintly,” are very emphatic. They are a warning to the nondevotees that because of an accidental falldown a devotee should not be derided; he should still be considered saintly even if he has fallen down accidentally. And the word mantavyaù is still more emphatic. If one does not follow this rule, and derides a devotee for his accidental falldown, then he is disobeying the order of the Supreme Lord. The only qualification of a devotee is to be unflinchingly and exclusively engaged in devotional service.
The mark of a spot which may be seen on the moon does not become an impediment to the moonlight. Similarly, the accidental falldown of a devotee from the path of a saintly character does not make him abominable. On the other hand, one should not misunderstand that a devotee in transcendental devotional service can act in all kinds of abominable ways; this verse only refers to an accident due to the strong power of material connections. Devotional service is more or less a declaration of war against the illusory energy. As long as one is not strong enough to fight the illusory energy, there may be accidental falldowns. But when one is strong enough, he is no longer subjected to such falldowns, as previously explained. No one should take advantage of this verse and commit nonsense and think that he is still a devotee. If he does not improve in his character by devotional service, then it is to be understood that he is not a high devotee.
Bg 9.31
TEXT
31
TEXT
i+aPa[&
>aviTa DaMaaRTMaa XaìC^aiNTa& iNaGaC^iTa )
k-aENTaeYa Pa[iTaJaaNaqih Na Mae >a¢-" Pa[<aXYaiTa )) 31 ))
kñipraà bhavati dharmätmä
çaçvac-chäntià nigacchati
kaunteya pratijänéhi
na me bhaktaù praëaçyati
kñipram—very soon; bhavati—becomes; dharma-ätmä—righteous;
çaçvat-çäntim—lasting peace; nigacchati—attains; kaunteya—O
son of Kunté; pratijänéhi—justly declare; na—never; me—Mine; bhaktaù—devotee; praëaçyati—perishes.
TRANSLATION
He quickly becomes righteous and attains lasting peace. O son of
Kunté, declare it boldly that My devotee never perishes.
PURPORT
This should not be misunderstood. In the Seventh Chapter the Lord
says that one who is engaged in mischievous activities cannot become a devotee
of the Lord. One who is not a devotee of the Lord has no good qualifications
whatsoever. The question remains, then, how can a person engaged in abominable
activities—either by accident or intention—be a pure devotee? This question may
justly be raised. The miscreants, as stated in the Seventh Chapter, who never
come to the devotional service of the Lord, have no good qualifications, as is
stated in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam. Generally, a
devotee who is engaged in the nine kinds of devotional activities is engaged in
the process of cleansing all material contamination from the heart. He puts the
Supreme Personality of Godhead within his heart, and all sinful contaminations
are naturally washed away. Continuous thinking of the Supreme Lord makes him
pure by nature. According to the Vedas, there is
a certain regulation that if one falls down from his exalted position, he has
to undergo certain ritualistic processes to purify himself. But here there is
no such condition because the purifying process is already there in the heart
of the devotee, due to his remembering the Supreme Personality of Godhead
constantly. Therefore, the chanting of Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa,
Hare Hare/ Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare should be continued
without stoppage. This will protect a devotee from all accidental falldowns. He
will thus remain perpetually free from all material contaminations.
Bg 9.32
TEXT
32
TEXT
Maa& ih
PaaQaR VYaPaaié[TYa Yae_iPa SYau" PaaPaYaaeNaYa" )
iñYaae vEXYaaSTaQaa éUd]aSTae_iPa YaaiNTa Para& GaiTaMa( )) 32 ))
mäà hi pärtha vyapäçritya
ye ’pi syuù päpa-yonayaù
striyo vaiçyäs tathä çüdräs
te ’pi yänti paräà gatim
mäm—unto Me; hi—certainly; pärtha—O son of Påthä;
vyapäçrétya—particularly taking shelter; ye—anyone; api—also; syuù—becomes; päpa-yonayaù—born of a lower family; striyaù—women; vaiçyäù—mercantile
people; tathä—also; çüdräù—lower
class men; te api—even they; yänti—go; paräm—supreme; gatim—destination.
TRANSLATION
O son of Påthä, those who take shelter in Me, though they be of
lower birth—women, vaiçyas [merchants], as well as çüdras [workers]—can
approach the supreme destination.
PURPORT
It is clearly declared here by the Supreme Lord that in devotional
service there is no distinction between the lower or higher classes of people.
In the material conception of life, there are such divisions, but for a person
engaged in transcendental devotional service to the Lord, there are not.
Everyone is eligible for the supreme destination. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam it is stated that even the lowest,
who are called caëòälas (dog-eaters), can be
elevated by association with a pure devotee. Therefore devotional service and
guidance of a pure devotee are so strong that there is no discrimination
between the lower and higher classes of men; anyone can take to it. The most
simple man taking center of the pure devotee can be purified by proper
guidance. According to the different modes of material nature, men are
classified in the mode of goodness (brähmaëas), the
mode of passion (kñatriyas, or administrators),
the mixed modes of passion and ignorance (vaiçyas, or
merchants), and the mode of ignorance (çüdras, or
workers). Those lower than them are called caëòälas, and
they are born in sinful families. Generally, those who are born in sinful
families are not accepted by the higher classes. But the process of devotional
service and the pure devotee of the Supreme God are so strong that all the
lower classes can attain the highest perfection of life. This is possible only
when one takes center of Kåñëa. One has to take center completely of Kåñëa.
Then one can become much greater than great jïänés and
yogés.
Bg 9.33
TEXT
33
TEXT
ik&-
PauNab]aRø<aa" Pau<Yaa >a¢-a raJazRYaSTaQaa )
AiNaTYaMaSau%& l/aek-iMaMa& Pa[aPYa >aJaSv MaaMa( )) 33 ))
kià punar brähmaëäù puëyä
bhaktä räjarñayas tathä
anityam asukhaà lokam
imaà präpya bhajasva mäm
kim—how much; punaù—again; brähmaëäù—brähmaëas;
puëyäù—righteous; bhaktäù—devotees;
räjarñayaù—saintly kings; tathä—also;
anityam—temporary; asukham—sorrowful;
lokam—planets; imam—this;
präpya—gaining; bhajasva—are
engaged in loving service; mäm—unto Me.
TRANSLATION
How much greater then are the brähmaëas, the righteous, the
devotees and saintly kings who in this temporary miserable world engage in
loving service unto Me.
PURPORT
In this material world there are classifications of people, but,
after all, this world is not a happy place for anyone. It is clearly stated
here, anityam asukhaà lokam: this world is
temporary and full of miseries, not habitable for any sane gentleman. This
world is declared by the Supreme Personality of Godhead to be temporary and
full of miseries. Some of the philosophers, especially the minor philosophers,
say that this world is false, but we can understand from Bhagavad-gétä that the world is not false; it is
temporary. There is a difference between temporary and false. This world is
temporary, but there is another world which is eternal. This world is
miserable, but the other world is eternal and blissful.
Arjuna was born in a saintly royal family. To him also the Lord says, “Take to My devotional service and come quickly back to Godhead, back home.” No one should remain in this temporary world, full as it is with miseries. Everyone should attach himself to the bosom of the Supreme Personality of Godhead so that he can be eternally happy. The devotional service of the Supreme Lord is the only process by which all problems of all classes of men can be solved. Everyone should therefore take to Kåñëa consciousness and make his life perfect.
Bg 9.34
TEXT
34
TEXT
MaNMaNaa >av
MaÙ¢-ae MaÛaJaq Maa& NaMaSku-å )
MaaMaevEZYaiSa Yau¤E-vMaaTMaaNa& MaTParaYa<a" )) 34 ))
man-manä bhava mad-bhakto
mad-yäjé mäà namaskuru
mäm evaiñyasi yuktvaivam
ätmänaà mat-paräyaëaù
mat-manäù—always
thinking of Me; bhava—become; mat—My; bhaktaù—devotee; mat—My; yäjé—worshiper; mäm—unto Me; namaskuru—offer
obeisances; mäm—unto Me; eva—completely;
eñyasi—come; yuktvä evam—being
absorbed; ätmänam—your soul; mat-paräyaëaù—devoted to Me.
TRANSLATION
Engage your mind always in thinking of Me, offer obeisances and
worship Me. Being completely absorbed in Me, surely you will come to Me.
PURPORT
In this verse it is clearly indicated that Kåñëa consciousness is
the only means of being delivered from the clutches of this contaminated
material world. Sometimes unscrupulous commentators distort the meaning of what
is clearly stated here: that all devotional service should be offered to the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa. Unfortunately, unscrupulous commentators
divert the mind of the reader to that which is not at all feasible. Such
commentators do not know that there is no difference between Kåñëa’s mind and
Kåñëa. Kåñëa is not an ordinary human being; He is Absolute Truth. His body,
mind and He Himself are one and absolute. It is stated in the Kürma Puräëa, as it is quoted by Bhaktisiddhänta
Sarasvaté Gosvämé in his Anubhäñya comments on Caitanya-caritämrta, Fifth Chapter, Ädi-lélä, verses 41–48, “deha-dehi-vibhedo
’yaà neçvare vidyate kvacit,” which means that there is no difference in
Kåñëa, the Supreme Lord, between Himself and His body. But, because they do not
know this science of Kåñëa, the commentators hide Kåñëa and divide His
personality from His mind or from His body. Although this is sheer ignorance of
the science of Kåñëa, some men make profit out of misleading the people.
There are some who are demonic; they also think of Kåñëa, but enviously, just like King Kaàsa, Kåñëa’s uncle. He was also thinking of Kåñëa always, but he thought of Kåñëa as his enemy. He was always in anxiety, wondering when Kåñëa would come to kill him. That kind of thinking will not help us. One should be thinking of Kåñëa in devotional love. That is bhakti. One should cultivate the knowledge of Kåñëa continually. What is that favorable cultivation? It is to learn from a bona fide teacher. Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and we have several times explained that His body is not material, but is eternal, blissful knowledge. This kind of talk about Kåñëa will help one become a devotee. Otherwise, understanding Kåñëa from the wrong source will prove fruitless.
One should therefore engage his mind in the eternal form, the primal form of Kåñëa; with conviction in his heart that Kåñëa is the Supreme, he should engage himself in worship. There are hundreds of thousands of temples in India for the worship of Kåñëa, and devotional service is practiced there. When such practice is made, one has to offer obeisances to Kåñëa. One should lower his head before the Deity and engage his mind, his body, his activities—everything. That will make one fully absorbed in Kåñëa without deviation. This will help one transfer into the Kåñëaloka. One should not be deviated by unscrupulous commentators. One must engage in the nine different processes of devotional service, beginning with hearing and chanting about Kåñëa. Pure devotional service is the highest achievement of human society.
In the Seventh and Eighth Chapters of Bhagavad-gétä, pure devotional service to the Lord has been explained, apart from the yoga of knowledge and mystic yoga or fruitive activities. Those who are not purely sanctified may be attracted by different features of the Lord, like the impersonal brahmajyoti and localized Paramätmä, but a pure devotee directly takes to the service of the Supreme Lord.
There is a beautiful poem about Kåñëa in which it is clearly stated that any person who is engaged in the worship of demigods is most unintelligent and cannot achieve at any time the supreme award of Kåñëa. The devotee, in the beginning, may sometimes fall from the standard, but still he should be considered superior to all other philosophers and yogés. One who always engages in Kåñëa consciousness should be understood to be the perfect saintly person. His accidental nondevotional activities will diminish, and he will soon be situated without any doubt in complete perfection. The pure devotee has no actual chance to fall down because the Supreme Godhead personally takes care of His pure devotees. Therefore, the intelligent person should take directly to this process of Kåñëa consciousness and happily live in this material world. He will eventually receive the supreme award of Kåñëa.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the Ninth Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of the Most Confidential Knowledge.
Bg 10. The Opulence of the Absolute
CHAPTER
TEN
The Opulence
of the Absolute
Bg 10.1
TEXT
1
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
>aUYa Wv Mahabahae é*<au Mae ParMa& vc" )
Yatae_h& Pa[qYaMaa<aaYa v+YaaiMa ihTak-aMYaYaa )) 1 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
bhüya eva mahä-bäho
çåëu me paramaà vacaù
yat te ’haà préyamäëäya
vakñyämi hita-kämyayä
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; bhüyaù—again; eva—certainly; mahä-bäho—O
mighty-armed; çåëu—just hear; me—My; paramaà—supreme; vacaù—information; yat—that
which; te—to you; aham—I; préyamäëäya—thinking you dear to Me; vakñyämi—say; hita-kämyayä—for
your benefit.
TRANSLATION
The Supreme Lord said: My dear friend, mighty-armed Arjuna, listen
again to My supreme word, which I shall impart to you for your benefit and
which will give you great joy.
PURPORT
The word paramam is explained thus by Paräçara Muni: one who is full in
six opulences, who has full strength, full fame, wealth, knowledge, beauty and
renunciation, is paramam, or the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. While Kåñëa was present on this earth, He displayed all
six opulences. Therefore great sages like Paräçara Muni have all accepted Kåñëa
as the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Now Kåñëa is instructing Arjuna in more
confidential knowledge of His opulences and His work. Previously, beginning
with the Seventh Chapter, the Lord already explained His different energies and
how they are acting. Now in this chapter He explains His specific opulences to
Arjuna. In the previous chapter he has clearly explained His different energies
to establish devotion in firm conviction. Again in this chapter He tells Arjuna
about His manifestations and various opulences.
The more one hears about the Supreme God, the more one becomes fixed in devotional service. One should always hear about the Lord in the association of devotees; that will enhance one’s devotional service. Discourses in the society of devotees can take place only among those who are really anxious to be in Kåñëa consciousness. Others cannot take part in such discourses. The Lord clearly tells Arjuna that because he is very dear to Him, for his benefit such discourses are taking place.
Bg 10.2
TEXT
2
TEXT
Na Mae
ivdu" SaurGa<aa" Pa[>av& Na MahzRYa" )
AhMaaidihR devaNaa& Mahzs<aa& c SavRXa" )) 2 ))
na me viduù sura-gaëäù
prabhavaà na maharñayaù
aham ädir hi devänäà
maharñéëäà ca sarvaçaù
na—never; me—My; viduù—knows; sura-gaëäù—demigods; prabhavam—opulences;
na—never; maharñayaù—great
sages; aham—I am; ädiù—the
origin; hi—certainly; devänäm—of
the demigods; maharñéëäm—of the great sages; ca—also; sarvaçaù—in all
respects.
TRANSLATION
Neither the hosts of demigods nor the great sages know My origin,
for, in every respect, I am the source of the demigods and the sages.
PURPORT
As stated in the Brahma-saàhitä, Lord
Kåñëa is the Supreme Lord. No one is greater than Him; He is the cause of all
causes. Here it is also stated by the Lord personally that He is the cause of
all the demigods and sages. Even the demigods and great sages cannot understand
Kåñëa; they can understand neither His name nor His personality, so what is the
position of the so-called scholars of this tiny planet? No one can understand
why this Supreme God comes to earth as an ordinary human being and executes
such commonplace and yet wonderful activities. One should know, then, that
scholarship is not the qualification necessary to understand Kåñëa. Even the
demigods and the great sages have tried to understand Kåñëa by their mental
speculation, and they have failed to do so. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam
also it is clearly said that even the great demigods are not able to
understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead. They can speculate to the limits
of their imperfect senses and can reach the opposite conclusion of
impersonalism, of something not manifested by the three qualities of material
nature, or they can imagine something by mental speculation, but it is not
possible to understand Kåñëa by such foolish speculation.
Here the Lord indirectly says that if anyone wants to know the Absolute Truth, “Here I am present as the Supreme Personality of Godhead. I am the Supreme.” One should know this. Although one cannot understand the inconceivable Lord who is personally present, He nonetheless exists. We can actually understand Kåñëa, who is eternal, full of bliss and knowledge, simply by studying His words in Bhagavad-gétä and Çrémad-Bhägavatam. The impersonal Brahman can be conceived by persons who are already in the inferior energy of the Lord, but the Personality of Godhead cannot be conceived unless one is in the transcendental position.
Because most men cannot understand Kåñëa in His actual situation, out of His causeless mercy He descends to show favor to such speculators. Yet despite the Supreme Lord’s uncommon activities, these speculators, due to contamination in the material energy, still think that the impersonal Brahman is the Supreme. Only the devotees who are fully surrendered unto the Supreme Lord can understand, by the grace of the Supreme Personality, that He is Kåñëa. The devotees of the Lord do not bother about the impersonal Brahman conception of God; their faith and devotion bring them to surrender immediately unto the Supreme Lord, and out of the causeless mercy of Kåñëa, they can understand Kåñëa. No one else can understand Him. So even great sages agree: What is ätmä, what is the Supreme? It is He whom we have to worship.
Bg 10.3
TEXT
3
TEXT
Yaae
MaaMaJaMaNaaid& c veita l/aek-MaheìrMa( )
ASaMMaU!" Sa MaTYaeRzu SavRPaaPaE" Pa[MauCYaTae )) 3 ))
yo mäm ajam anädià ca
vetti loka-maheçvaram
asammüòhaù sa martyeñu
sarva-päpaiù pramucyate
yaù—anyone; mäm—unto Me; ajam—unborn;
anädim—without beginning; ca—also;
vetti—knows; loka—the
planets; maheçvaram—supreme master; asaàmüòhaù—without doubt; saù—he;
martyeñu—among those subject to death; sarva-päpaiù—from all sinful reactions; pramucyate—is delivered.
TRANSLATION
He who knows Me as the unborn, as the beginningless, as the
Supreme Lord of all the worlds—he, undeluded among men, is freed from all sins.
PURPORT
As stated in the Seventh Chapter, those who are trying to elevate
themselves to the platform of spiritual realization are not ordinary men. They
are superior to millions and millions of ordinary men who have no knowledge of
spiritual realization, but out of those actually trying to understand their
spiritual situation, one who can come to the understanding that Kåñëa is
the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the proprietor of everything, the unborn,
is the most successful spiritually realized person. In that stage only, when
one has fully understood Kåñëa’s supreme position, can one be free completely
from all sinful reactions.
Here the word ajam, meaning unborn, should not be confused with the living entities, who are described in the Second Chapter as ajam. The Lord is different from the living entities who are taking birth and dying due to material attachment. The conditional souls are changing their bodies, but His body is not changeable. Even when He comes to this material world, He comes as the same unborn; therefore in the Fourth Chapter it is said that the Lord, by His internal potency, is not under the inferior material energy, but is always in the superior energy.
He was existing before the creation, and He is different from His creation. All the demigods were created within this material world, but as far as Kåñëa is concerned, it is said that He is not created; therefore Kåñëa is different even from the great demigods like Brahmä and Çiva. And because He is the creator of Brahmä, Çiva and all the other demigods, He is the Supreme Person of all planets.
Çré Kåñëa is therefore
different from everything that is created, and anyone who knows Him as such
immediately becomes liberated from all sinful reaction. One must be liberated
from all sinful activities to be in the knowledge of the Supreme Lord. Only by
devotional service can He be known and not by any other means, as stated in Bhagavad-gétä.
One should not try to understand Kåñëa as a human being. As stated previously, only a foolish person thinks Him to be a human being. This is again expressed here in a different way. A man who is not foolish, who is intelligent enough to understand the constitutional position of the Godhead, is always free from all sinful reactions.
If Kåñëa is known as the son of Devaké, then how can He be unborn? That is also explained in Çrémad-Bhägavatam: When He appeared before Devaké and Vasudeva, He was not born as an ordinary child; He appeared in His original form, and then He transformed Himself into an ordinary child.
Anything done under the direction of Kåñëa is transcendental. It cannot be contaminated by the material reactions, which may be auspicious or inauspicious. The conception that there are things auspicious and inauspicious in the material world is more or less a mental concoction because there is nothing auspicious in the material world. Everything is inauspicious because the very material mask is inauspicious. We simply imagine it to be auspicious. Real auspiciousness depends on activities in Kåñëa consciousness in full devotion and service. Therefore if we at all want our activities to he auspicious, then we should work under the directions of the Supreme Lord. Such directions are given in authoritative scriptures such as Çrémad-Bhägavatam and Bhagavad-gétä, or from a bona fide spiritual master. Because the spiritual master is the representative of the Supreme Lord, his direction is directly the direction of the Supreme Lord. The spiritual master, saintly persons and scriptures direct in the same way. There is no contradiction in these three sources. All actions done under such direction are free from the reactions of pious or impious activities of this material world. The transcendental attitude of the devotee in the performance of activities is actually that of renunciation, and this is called sannyäsa. Anyone acting under the direction of the Supreme Lord is actually a sannyäsé and a yogé, and not the man who has simply taken the dress of the sannyäsé, or a pseudo-yogé.
Bg
10.4, Bg 10.5, Bg 10.4-5
TEXTS
4–5
TEXT
buiÖjaRNaMaSaMMaaeh"
+aMaa SaTYa& dMa" XaMa" )
Sau%& du"%& >avae_>aavae >aYa& ca>aYaMaev c )) 4
))
Aih&Saa SaMaTaa TauiíSTaPaae daNa& YaXaae_YaXa" )
>aviNTa >aava >aUTaaNaa& Mata Wv Pa*QaiGvDaa" )) 5 ))
buddhir jïänam asammohaù
kñamä satyaà damaù çamaù
sukhaà duùkhaà bhavo ’bhävo
bhayaà cäbhayam eva ca
ahiàsä samatä tuñöis
tapo dänaà yaço ’yaçaù
bhavanti bhävä bhütänäà
matta eva påthag-vidhäù
buddhiù—intelligence;
jïänam—knowledge; asam-mohaù—freedom
from doubt; kñamä—forgiveness; satyam—truthfulness; damaù—control
of the senses; çamaù—control of the mind; sukham—happiness; duùkham—distress;
bhavaù—birth; abhävaù—death;
bhayam—fear; ca—also;
abhayam—without fear; eva—also;
ca—and; ahiàsä—nonviolence;
samatä—equilibrium; tuñöiù—satisfaction;
tapaù—penance; dänam—charity;
yaçaù—fame; ayaçaù—infamy;
bhavanti—become; bhäväù—natures;
bhütänäm—of living entities; mattaù—from Me; eva—certainly;
påthak-vidhäù—differently arranged.
TRANSLATION
Intelligence, knowledge, freedom from doubt and delusion,
forgiveness, truthfulness, self-control and calmness, pleasure and pain, birth,
death, fear, fearlessness, nonviolence, equanimity, satisfaction, austerity,
charity, fame and infamy are created by Me alone.
PURPORT
The different qualities of living entities, be they good or bad,
are all created by Kåñëa, and they are described here.
Intelligence refers to the power of analyzing things in proper perspective, and knowledge refers to understanding what is spirit and what is matter. Ordinary knowledge obtained by a university education pertains only to matter, and it is not accepted here as knowledge. Knowledge means knowing the distinction between spirit and matter. In modern education there is no knowledge about the spirit; they are simply taking care of the material elements and bodily needs. Therefore academic knowledge is not complete.
Asaàmohaù, freedom from doubt and delusion, can be achieved when one is not hesitant and when he understands the transcendental philosophy. Slowly but surely he becomes free from bewilderment. Nothing should be accepted blindly; everything should be accepted with care and with caution. Kñamä, forgiveness, should be practiced, and one should excuse the minor offenses of others. Satyam, truthfulness, means that facts should be presented as they are for the benefit of others. Facts should not be misrepresented. According to social conventions, it is said that one can speak the truth only when it is palatable to others. But that is not truthfulness. The truth should be spoken in a straight and forward way, so that others will understand actually what the facts are. If a man is a thief and if people are warned that he is a thief, that is truth. Although sometimes the truth is unpalatable, one should not refrain from speaking it. Truthfulness demands that the facts be presented as they are for the benefit of others. That is the definition of truth.
Self-control means that the senses should not be used for unnecessary personal enjoyment. There is no prohibition against meeting the proper needs of the senses, but unnecessary sense enjoyment is detrimental for spiritual advancement. Therefore the senses should be restrained from unnecessary use. Similarly, the mind should not indulge in unnecessary thoughts; that is called çamaù, or calmness. Nor should one spend one’s time pondering over earning money. That is a misuse of the thinking power. The mind should be used to understand the prime necessity of human beings, and that should be presented authoritatively. The power of thought should be developed in association with persons who are authorities in the scriptures, saintly persons and spiritual masters and those whose thinking is highly developed. Sukham, pleasure or happiness, should always be in that which is favorable for the cultivation of the spiritual knowledge of Kåñëa consciousness. And similarly, that which is painful or which causes distress is that which is unfavorable for the cultivation of Kåñëa consciousness. Anything favorable for the development of Kåñëa consciousness should be accepted, and anything unfavorable should be rejected.
Bhava, birth, should be understood to refer to the body. As far as the soul is concerned, there is neither birth nor death; that we have discussed in the beginning of Bhagavad-gétä. Birth and death apply to one’s embodiment in the material world. Fear is due to worrying about the future. A person in Kåñëa consciousness has no fear because by his activities he is sure to go back to the spiritual sky, back home, back to Godhead. Therefore his future is very bright. Others, however, do not know what their future holds; they have no knowledge of what the next life holds. So they are therefore in constant anxiety. If we want to get free from anxiety, then the best course is to understand Kåñëa and be situated always in Kåñëa consciousness. In that way we will be free from all fear. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam. it is stated that fear is caused by our absorption in the illusory energy, but those who are free from the illusory energy, those who are confident that they are not the material body, that they are spiritual parts of the Supreme Personality of Godhead and are therefore engaged in the transcendental service of the Supreme Godhead, have nothing to fear. Their future is very bright. This fear is a condition of persons who are not in Kåñëa consciousness. Bhayam, fearlessness, is only possible for one in Kåñëa consciousness.
Ahiàsä, nonviolence, means that one should not do anything which will put others into misery or confusion. Material activities that are promised by so many politicians, sociologists, philanthropists, etc., do not produce very good results because the politicians and philanthropists have no transcendental vision; they do not know what is actually beneficial for human society. Ahiàsä means that people should be trained in such a way that the full utilization of the human body can be achieved. The human body is meant for spiritual realization, so any movement or any commissions which do not further that end commit violence on the human body. That which furthers the future spiritual happiness of the people in general is called nonviolence.
Samatä, equanimity, refers to freedom from attachment and aversion. To be very much attached or to be very much detached is not the best. This material world should be accepted without attachment or aversion. Similarly, that which is favorable for prosecuting Kåñëa consciousness should be accepted; that which is unfavorable should be rejected. That is called samatä, equanimity. A person in Kåñëa consciousness has nothing to reject and nothing to accept unless it is useful in the prosecution of Kåñëa consciousness.
Tuñöiù, satisfaction, means that one should not be eager to gather more and more material goods by unnecessary activity. One should be satisfied with whatever is obtained by the grace of the Supreme Lord; that is called satisfaction. Tapas means austerity or penance. There are many rules and definitions in the Vedas which apply here, like rising early in the morning and taking a bath. Sometimes it is very troublesome to rise early in the morning, but whatever voluntary trouble one may suffer in this way is called penance. Similarly, there are prescriptions for fasting on certain days of the month. One may not be inclined to practice such fasting, but because of his determination to make advancement in the science of Kåñëa consciousness, he should accept such bodily troubles which are recommended. However, one should not fast unnecessarily or against Vedic injunctions. One should not fast for some political purpose; that is described in Bhagavad-gétä as fasting in ignorance, and anything done in ignorance or passion does not lead to spiritual advancement. Everything done in the mode of goodness does advance one, however, and fasting done in terms of the Vedic injunctions enriches one in spiritual knowledge.
As far as charity is concerned, one should give fifty percent of his earnings to some good cause. And what is a good cause? It is that which is conducted in terms of Kåñëa consciousness. That is not only a good cause, but it is the best cause. Because Kåñëa is good, His cause is also good. Thus charity should be given to a person who is engaged in Kåñëa consciousness. According to Vedic literature, it is enjoined that charity should be given to the brähmaëas. This practice is still followed, although not very nicely in terms of the Vedic injunction. But still the injunction is that charity should be given to the brähmaëas. Why? Because they are engaged in higher cultivation of spiritual knowledge. A brähmaëa is supposed to devote his whole life to understanding Brahman. A brahma-jana is one who knows Brahman; he is called a brähmaëa. Thus charity is offered to the brähmaëas because since they are always engaged in higher spiritual service, they have no time to earn their livelihood. In the Vedic literature, charity is also to be awarded to the renouncer of life, the sannyäsé. The sannyäsés beg from door to door, not for money but for missionary purposes. The system is that they go from door to door to awaken the householders from the slumber of ignorance. Because the householders are engaged in family affairs and have forgotten their actual purpose in life—awakening their Kåñëa consciousness—it is the business of the sannyäsés to go as beggars to the householders and encourage them to be Kåñëa conscious. As it is said in the Vedas, one should awake and achieve what is due him in this human form of life. This knowledge and method is distributed by the sannyäsés; hence charity is to be given to the renouncer of life, to the brähmaëas, and similar good causes, not to any whimsical cause.
Yaçaù, fame, should be according to Lord Caitanya, who said that a man is famous when he is known as a great devotee. That is real fame. If one has become a great man in Kåñëa consciousness and it is known, then he is truly famous. One who does not have such fame is infamous.
All these qualities are manifest throughout the universe in human society and in the society of the demigods. There are many forms of humanity on other planets, and these qualities are there. Now, for one who wants to advance in Kåñëa consciousness, Kåñëa creates all these qualities, but the person develops them himself from within. One who engages in the devotional service of the Supreme Lord develops all the good qualities, as arranged by the Supreme Lord.
Of whatever we find, good or bad, the origin is Kåñëa. Nothing can manifest in this material world which is not in Kåñëa. That is knowledge; although we know that things are differently situated, we should realize that everything flows from Kåñëa.
Bg 10.6
TEXT
6
TEXT
MahzRYa"
Saá PaUveR cTvarae MaNavSTaQaa )
MaÙava MaaNaSaa JaaTaa Yaeza& l/aek- wMaa" Pa[Jaa" )) 6 ))
maharñayaù sapta pürve
catväro manavas tathä
mad-bhävä mänasä jätä
yeñäà loka imäù prajäù
maharñayaù—the great
sages; sapta—seven; pürve—before;
catväraù—four; manavaù—Manus;
tathä—also; mat-bhäväù—born
of Me; mänasäù—from the mind; jätäù—born; yeñäm—of
them; loke—the planets; imäù—all
this; prajäù—population.
TRANSLATION
The seven great sages and before them the four other great sages
and the Manus [progenitors of mankind] are born out of My mind, and all
creatures in these planets descend from them.
PURPORT
The Lord is giving a genealogical synopsis of the universal
population. Brahmä is the original creature born out of the energy of the
Supreme Lord known as Hiraëyagarbha. And from Brahmä all the seven great sages,
and before them four other great sages, named Sanaka, Sananda, Sanätana, and
Sanatkumära, and the Manus, are manifest. All these twenty-five great sages are
known as the patriarchs of the living entities all over the universe. There are
innumerable universes and innumerable planets within each universe, and each
planet is full of population of different varieties. All of them are born of
these twenty-five patriarchs. Brahmä underwent penance for one thousand years
of the demigods before he realized by the grace of Kåñëa how to create. Then
from Brahmä, Sanaka, Sananda, Sanätana, and Sanatkumära came out, then Rudra,
and then the seven sages, and in this way all the brähmaëas and kñatriyas are
born out of the energy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Brahmä is known
as pitämaha, the grandfather, and Kåñëa is known
as the prapitä-maha, the father of the
grandfather. That is stated in the Eleventh Chapter of the Bhagavad-gétä. (Bg. 11.39)
Bg 10.7
TEXT
7
TEXT
WTaa&
iv>aUiTa& YaaeGa& c MaMa Yaae veita TatvTa" )
Saae_ivk-LPaeNa YaaeGaeNa YauJYaTae Naa}a Sa&XaYa" )) 7 ))
etäà vibhütià yogaà ca
mama yo vetti tattvataù
so ’vikalpena yogena
yujyate nätra saàçayaù
etäm—all this; vibhütià—opulence; yogam ca—also
mystic power; mama—of Mine; yaù—anyone; vetti—knows; tattvataù—factually; saù—he;
avikalpena—without division; yogena—in devotional service; yujyate—engaged;
na—never; atra—here;
saàçayaù—doubt.
TRANSLATION
He who knows in truth this glory and power of Mine engages in
unalloyed devotional service; of this there is no doubt.
PURPORT
The highest summit of spiritual perfection is knowledge of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. Unless one is firmly convinced of the different
opulences of the Supreme Lord, he cannot engage in devotional service.
Generally people know that God is great, but they do not know in detail how God
is great. Here are the details. If one knows factually how God is great, then
naturally he becomes a surrendered soul and engages himself in the devotional
service of the Lord. When one factually knows the opulences of the Supreme,
there is no alternative but to surrender to Him. This factual knowledge can be
known from the descriptions in Çrémad-Bhägavatam and
Bhagavad-gétä and similar literatures.
In the administration of this universe there are many demigods distributed throughout the planetary system, and the chief of them are Brahmä, Lord Çiva and the four great Kumäras and other patriarchs. There are many forefathers of the population of the universe, and all of them are born of the Supreme Lord Kåñëa. The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, is the original forefather of all forefathers.
These are some of the opulences of the Supreme Lord. When one is firmly convinced of them, he accepts Kåñëa with great faith and without any doubt, and he engages in devotional service. All this particular knowledge is required in order to increase one’s interest in the loving devotional service of the Lord. One should not neglect to understand fully how great Kåñëa is, for by knowing the greatness of Kåñëa one will be able to be fixed in sincere devotional service.
Bg 10.8
TEXT
8
TEXT
Ah& SavRSYa
Pa[>avae Mata" Sav| Pa[vTaRTae )
wiTa MaTva >aJaNTae Maa& buDaa >aavSaMaiNvTaa" )) 8 ))
ahaà sarvasya prabhavo
mattaù sarvaà pravartate
iti matvä bhajante mäà
budhä bhäva-samanvitäù
aham—I; sarvasya—of all; prabhavaù—source
of generation; mattaù—from Me; sarvam—everything; pravartate—emanates;
iti—thus; matvä—knowing;
bhajante—becomes devoted; mäm—unto
Me; budhäù—learned; bhäva-samanvitäù—with
great attention.
TRANSLATION
I am the source of all spiritual and material worlds. Everything
emanates from Me. The wise who know this perfectly engage in My devotional
service and worship Me with all their hearts.
PURPORT
A learned scholar who has studied the Vedas
perfectly and has information from authorities like Lord Caitanya and who knows
how to apply these teachings can understand that Kåñëa is the origin of
everything in both the material and spiritual worlds, and because he knows this
perfectly he becomes firmly fixed in the devotional service of the Supreme
Lord. He can never be deviated by any amount of nonsensical commentaries or by
fools. All Vedic literature agrees that Kåñëa is the source of Brahmä, Çiva and
all other demigods. In the Atharva-veda it is
said, “yo brahmäëaà vidadhäti: pürvaà yo vai vedäàç
ca gäpayati sma kåñëaù.” “It was Kåñëa who in the
beginning instructed Brahmä in Vedic knowledge and who disseminated Vedic
knowledge in the past.” Then again it is said, “atha
puruño ha vai näräyaëo ’kämayata prajäù såjeya ity upakramya.” “Then the
Supreme Personality Näräyaëa desired to create living entities.” Again it is
said:
näräyaëäd brahmä jäyate, näräyaëäd prajäpatiù prajäyate, näräyaëäd
indro jäyate, näräyaëäd añöau vasavo jäyante, näräyaëäd ekädaça rudrä jäyante,
näräyaëäd dvädaçädityäù.
“From Näräyaëa, Brahmä is born, and from Näräyaëa, the patriarchs
are also born. From Näräyaëa, Indra is born, from Näräyaëa the eight Vasus are
born, from Näräyaëa the eleven Rudras are born, from Näräyaëa the twelve
Ädityas are born.”
It is said in the same Vedas: brahmaëyo
devaké-putraù: “The son of Devaké, Kåñëa, is the Supreme Personality.”
Then it is said:
eko vai näräyaëa äsén na brahmä na éçäno näpo nägni samau neme
dyäv-äpåthivé na nakñaträëi na süryaù sa ekäké na ramate tasya
dhyänäntaù sthasya yatra chändogaiù kriyamäëäñöakädi-saàjïakä
stuti-stomaù stomam ucyate.
“In the beginning of the creation there was only the Supreme
Personality Näräyaëa. There was no Brahmä, no Çiva, no fire, no moon, no stars
in the sky, no sun. There was only Kåñëa, who creates all and enjoys all.”
In the many Puräëas it is said that
Lord Çiva was born from the highest, the Supreme Lord Kåñëa, and the Vedas say that it is the Supreme Lord, the creator of
Brahmä and Çiva, who is to be worshiped. In the Mokña-dharma
Kåñëa also says, prajäpatià ca rudraà cäpy aham
eva såjämi vai tau hi mäà na vijänéto mama mäyä-vimohitau. “The
patriarchs, Çiva and others are created by Me, though they do not know that
they are created by Me because they are deluded by My illusory energy.” In Varäha Puräëa it is also said, näräyaëaù
paro devas tasmäj jätaç caturmukhaù tasmäd rudro ’bhavad devaù sa ca
sarvajïatäà gataù. “Näräyaëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and
from Him Brahmä was born, from whom Çiva was born.”
Lord Kåñëa is the source of all generations, and He is called the most efficient cause of everything. He says that because “everything is born of Me, I am the original source of all. Everything is under Me; no one is above Me.” There is no supreme controller other than Kåñëa. One who understands Kåñëa in such a way from a bona fide spiritual master and from Vedic literature, who engages all his energy in Kåñëa consciousness, becomes a truly learned man. In comparison to him, all others, who do not know Kåñëa properly, are but fools. Only a fool would consider Kåñëa to be an ordinary man. A Kåñëa conscious person should not be bewildered by fools; he should avoid all unauthorized commentaries and interpretations on Bhagavad-gétä and proceed in Kåñëa consciousness with determination and firmness.
Bg 10.9
TEXT
9
TEXT
MaiÀtaa
MaÓTaPa[a<aa baeDaYaNTa" ParSParMa( )
k-QaYaNTaê Maa& iNaTYa& TauZYaiNTa c rMaiNTa c )) 9 ))
mac-cittä mad-gata-präëä
bodhayantaù parasparam
kathayantaç ca mäà nityaà
tuñyanti ca ramanti ca
mat-cittäù—minds fully
engaged in Me; mat-gata-präëäù—lives devoted to
the service of Kåñëa; bodhayantaù—preaching; parasparam—among themselves; kathayantaù
ca—talking also; mäm—about Me; nityam—perpetually; tuñyanti—are
pleased; ca—also; ramanti—enjoy
transcendental bliss; ca—also.
TRANSLATION
The thoughts of My pure devotees dwell in Me, their lives are
surrendered to Me, and they derive great satisfaction and bliss enlightening
one another and conversing about Me.
PURPORT
Pure devotees, whose characteristics are mentioned here, engage
themselves fully in the transcendental loving service of the Lord. Their minds
cannot be diverted from the lotus feet of Kåñëa. Their talks are solely on the
transcendental subjects. The symptoms of the pure devotees are described in
this verse specifically. Devotees of the Supreme Lord are twenty-four hours
daily engaged in glorifying the pastimes of the Supreme Lord. Their hearts and
souls are constantly submerged in Kåñëa, and they take pleasure in discussing
Him with other devotees.
In the preliminary stage of devotional service they relish the transcendental pleasure from the service itself, and in the mature stage they are actually situated in love of God. Once situated in that transcendental position, they can relish the highest perfection which is exhibited by the Lord in His abode. Lord Caitanya likens transcendental devotional service to the sowing of a seed in the heart of the living entity. There are innumerable living entities traveling throughout the different planets of the universe, and out of them there are a few who are fortunate enough to meet a pure devotee and get the chance to understand devotional service. This devotional service is just like a seed, and if it is sown in the heart of a living entity, and if he goes on hearing and chanting, Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/ Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare, that seed fructifies, just as the seed of a tree fructifies with regular watering. The spiritual plant of devotional service gradually grows and grows until it penetrates the covering of the material universe and enters into the brahmajyoti effulgence in the spiritual sky. In the spiritual sky also that plant grows more and more until it reaches the highest planet, which is called Goloka Våndävana, the supreme planet of Kåñëa. Ultimately, the plant takes shelter under the lotus feet of Kåñëa and rests there. Gradually, as a plant grows fruits and flowers, that plant of devotional service also produces fruits, and the watering process in the form of chanting and hearing goes on. This plant of devotional service is fully described in the Caitanya-caritämåta. It is explained there that when the complete plant takes shelter under the lotus feet of the Supreme Lord, one becomes fully absorbed in love of God; then he cannot live even for a moment without being in contact with the Supreme Lord, just as a fish cannot live without water. In such a state, the devotee actually attains the transcendental qualities in contact with the Supreme Lord.
The Çrémad-Bhägavatam is also full of such narration about the relationship between the Supreme Lord and His devotees; therefore the Çrémad-Bhägavatam is very dear to the devotees. In this narration there is nothing about material activities, sense gratification or liberation. Çrémad-Bhägavatam is the only narration in which the transcendental nature of the Supreme Lord and His devotees is fully described. Thus the realized souls in Kåñëa consciousness take continual pleasure in hearing such transcendental literatures, just as a young boy and girl take pleasure in association.
Bg
10.10
TEXT
10
TEXT
Taeza&
SaTaTaYau¢-aNaa& >aJaTaa& Pa[qiTaPaUvRk-Ma( )
ddaiMa buiÖYaaeGa& Ta& YaeNa MaaMauPaYaaiNTa Tae )) 10 ))
teñäà satata-yuktänäà
bhajatäà préti-pürvakam
dadämi buddhi-yogaà taà
yena mäm upayänti te
teñäm—unto them; satata-yuktänäm—always engaged; bhajatäm—in
devotional service; préti-pürvakam—in loving
ecstasy; dadämi—I give; buddhi-yogam—real
intelligence; tam—that; yena—by
which; mäm—unto Me; upayänti—come; te—they.
TRANSLATION
To those who are constantly devoted and worship Me with love, I
give the understanding by which they can come to Me.
PURPORT
In this verse the word buddhi-yogam is very significant. We may remember that in the Second
Chapter the Lord, instructing Arjuna, said that He had spoken to him of many
things and that He would instruct him in the way of buddhi-yoga.
Now buddhi-yoga is explained. Buddhi-yogam itself is action in Kåñëa consciousness;
that is the highest intelligence. Buddhi means
intelligence, and yogam means mystic activities
or mystic elevation. When one tries to go back home, back to Godhead, and takes
fully to Kåñëa consciousness in devotional service, his action is called buddhi-yogam. In other words, buddhi-yogam
is the process by which one gets out of
the entanglement of this material world. The ultimate goal of progress is
Kåñëa. People do not know this; therefore the association of devotees and a
bona fide spiritual master are important. One should know that the goal is
Kåñëa, and when the goal is assigned, then the path is slowly but progressively
traversed, and the ultimate goal is achieved.
When a person knows the goal of life but is addicted to the fruits of activities, he is acting in karma-yoga. When he knows that the goal is Kåñëa, but he takes pleasure in mental speculations to understand Kåñëa, he is acting in jïäna-yoga. And when he knows the goal and seeks Kåñëa completely in Kåñëa consciousness and devotional service, he is acting in bhakti-yoga, or buddhi-yoga, which is the complete yoga. This complete yoga is the highest perfectional stage of life.
A person may have a bona fide spiritual master and may be attached to a spiritual organization, but still, if he is not intelligent enough to make progress, then Kåñëa from within gives him instructions so that he may ultimately come to Him without difficulty. The qualification is that a person always engage himself in Kåñëa consciousness and with love and devotion render all kinds of services. He should perform some sort of work for Kåñëa, and that work should be with love. If a devotee is intelligent enough, he will make progress on the path of self-realization. If one is sincere and devoted to the activities of devotional service, the Lord gives him a chance to make progress and ultimately attain to Him.
Bg
10.11
TEXT
11
TEXT
TaezaMaevaNauk-MPaaQaRMahMajaNaJa&
TaMa" )
NaaXaYaaMYaaTMa>aavSQaae jaNadqPaeNa >aaSvTaa )) 11 ))
teñäm evänukampärtham
aham ajïäna-jaà tamaù
näçayämy ätma-bhäva-stho
jïäna-dépena bhäsvatä
teñäm—for them; eva—certainly; anukampä-artham—to
show special mercy; aham—I; ajïäna-jam—due to ignorance; tamaù—darkness;
näçayämi—dispel; ätma—within;
bhävasthaù—themselves; jïäna—of
knowledge; dépena—with the lamp; bhäsvatä—glowing.
TRANSLATION
Out of compassion for them, I, dwelling in their hearts, destroy
with the shining lamp of knowledge the darkness born of ignorance.
PURPORT
When Lord Caitanya was in Benares promulgating the chanting of
Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/ Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma
Räma, Hare Hare, thousands of people were following Him. Prakäçänanda, a very
influential and learned scholar in Benares at that time, derided Lord Caitanya
for being a sentimentalist. Sometimes philosophers criticize the devotees
because they think that most of the devotees are in the darkness of ignorance
and are philosophically naive sentimentalists. Actually that is not the fact.
There are very, very learned scholars who have put forward the philosophy of
devotion, but even if a devotee does not take advantage of their literatures or
of his spiritual master, if he is sincere in his devotional service he is
helped by Kåñëa Himself within his heart. So the sincere devotee engaged in
Kåñëa consciousness cannot be without knowledge. The only qualification is that
one carry out devotional service in full Kåñëa consciousness.
The modern philosophers think that without discriminating one cannot have pure knowledge. For them this answer is given by the Supreme Lord: those who are engaged in pure devotional service, even though they be without sufficient education and even without sufficient knowledge of the Vedic principles, are still helped by the Supreme God, as stated in this verse.
The Lord tells Arjuna that basically there is no possibility of understanding the Supreme Truth, the Absolute Truth, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, simply by speculating, for the Supreme Truth is so great that it is not possible to understand Him or to achieve Him simply by making a mental effort. Man can go on speculating for several millions of years, and if he is not devoted, if he is not a lover of the Supreme Truth, he will never understand Kåñëa or the Supreme Truth. Only by devotional service is the Supreme Truth, Kåñëa, pleased, and by His inconceivable energy He can reveal Himself to the heart of the pure devotee. The pure devotee always has Kåñëa within his heart; therefore he is just like the sun that dissipates the darkness of ignorance. This is the special mercy rendered to the pure devotee by Kåñëa.
Due to the contamination of material association, through many, many millions of births, one’s heart is always covered with the dust of materialism, but when one engages in devotional service and constantly chants Hare Kåñëa, the dust quickly clears, and one is elevated to the platform of pure knowledge. The ultimate goal of Viñëu can be attained only by this chant and by devotional service, and not by mental speculation or argument. The pure devotee does not have to worry about the necessities of life; he need not be anxious because when he removes the darkness from his heart, everything is provided automatically by the Supreme Lord, for He is pleased by the loving devotional service of the devotee. This is the essence of the Gétä’s teachings. By studying Bhagavad-gétä, one can become a completely surrendered soul to the Supreme Lord and engage himself in pure devotional service. As the Lord takes charge, one becomes completely free from all kinds of materialistic endeavors.
Bg
10.12, Bg 10.13, Bg 10.12-13
TEXTS
12–13
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac
Par& b]ø Par& DaaMa Paiv}a& ParMa& >avaNa( )
Pauåz& XaaìTa& idVYaMaaiddevMaJa& iv>auMa( )) 12 ))
AahuSTvaMa*zYa" SaveR devizRNaaRrdSTaQaa )
AiSaTaae devl/ae VYaaSa" SvYa& cEv b]vqiz Mae )) 13 ))
arjuna
uväca
paraà brahma paraà dhäma
pavitraà paramaà bhavän
puruñaà çäçvataà divyam
ädi-devam ajaà vibhum
ähus tväm åñayaù sarve
devarñir näradas tathä
asito devalo vyäsaù
svayaà caiva bravéñi me
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna
said; param—supreme; brahma—truth;
param—supreme; dhäma—sustenance; pavitram—purest; paramam—supreme;
bhavän—Yourself; puruñam—personality;
çäçvatam—original; divyam—transcendental;
ädi-devam—original Lord; ajam—unborn;
vibhum—greatest; ähuù—say;
tväm—unto You; åñayaù—sages;
sarve—all; devarñiù—the
sage among the demigods; näradaù—Närada; tathä—also; asitaù—Asita;
devalaù—Devala; vyäsaù—Vyäsa; svayam—personally; ca—also;
eva—certainly; bravéñi—explaining;
me—unto me.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said: You are the Supreme Brahman, the ultimate, the
supreme abode and purifier, the Absolute Truth and the eternal divine person.
You are the primal God, transcendental and original, and You are the unborn and
all-pervading beauty. All the great sages such as Närada, Asita, Devala, and
Vyäsa proclaim this of You, and now You Yourself are declaring it to me.
PURPORT
In these two verses the Supreme Lord gives a chance to the modern
philosopher, for here it is clear that the Supreme is different from the
individual soul. Arjuna, after hearing the essential four verses of Bhagavad-gétä in this chapter, became completely free
from all doubts and accepted Kåñëa as the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He at
once boldly declares, “You are Parambrahma, the Supreme Personality of
Godhead.” And previously Kåñëa states that He is the originator of everything
and everyone. Every demigod and every human being is dependant on Him. Men and
demigods, out of ignorance, think that they are absolute and independant of the
Supreme Lord Kåñëa. That ignorance is removed perfectly by the discharge of
devotional service. This is already explained in the previous verse by the
Lord. Now by His grace, Arjuna is accepting Him as the Supreme Truth, in
concordance with the Vedic injunction. It is not because Kåñëa is an intimate
friend of Arjuna that he is flattering Him by calling Him the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, the Absolute Truth. Whatever Arjuna says in these two
verses is confirmed by Vedic truth. Vedic injunctions affirm that only one who
takes to devotional service to the Supreme Lord can understand Him, whereas
others cannot. Each and every word of this verse spoken by Arjuna is confirmed
by Vedic injunction.
In the Kena Upaniñad it is stated that the Supreme Brahman is the rest for everything, and Kåñëa has already explained that everything is resting on Him. The Muëòaka Upaniñad confirms that the Supreme Lord, in whom everything is resting, can be realized only by those who engage constantly in thinking of Him. This constant thinking of Kåñëa is smaraëam, one of the methods of devotional service. It is only by devotional service to Kåñëa that one can understand his position and get rid of this material body.
In the Vedas the Supreme Lord is accepted as the purest of the pure. One who understands that Kåñëa is the purest of the pure can become purified from all sinful activities. One cannot be disinfected from sinful activities unless he surrenders unto the Supreme Lord. Arjuna’s acceptance of Kåñëa as the supreme pure complies with the injunctions of Vedic literature. This is also confirmed by great personalities, of whom Närada is the chief.
Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and one should always meditate upon Him and enjoy one’s transcendental relationship with Him. He is the supreme existence. He is free from bodily needs, birth and death. Not only does Arjuna confirm this, but all the Vedic literatures. the Puräëas and histories. In all Vedic literatures Kåñëa is thus described, and the Supreme Lord Himself also says in the Fourth Chapter, “Although I am unborn, I appear on this earth to establish religious principles.” He is the supreme origin; He has no cause, for He is the cause of all causes, and everything is emanating from Him. This perfect knowledge can be had by the grace of the Supreme Lord.
Here Arjuna expresses himself through the grace of Kåñëa. If we want to understand Bhagavad-gétä, we should accept the statements in these two verses. This is called the paramparä system, acceptance of the disciplic succession. Unless one is in the disciplic succession, he cannot understand Bhagavad-gétä. It is not possible by so-called academic education. Unfortunately those proud of their academic education, despite so much evidence in Vedic literatures, stick to their obstinate conviction that Kåñëa is an ordinary person.
Bg
10.14
TEXT
14
TEXT
SavRMaeTad*Ta&
MaNYae YaNMaa& vdiSa ke-Xav )
Na ih Tae >aGavNVYai¢&- ivdudeRva Na daNava" )) 14 ))
sarvam etad åtaà manye
yan mäà vadasi keçava
na hi te bhagavan vyaktià
vidur devä na dänaväù
sarvam—all; etat—these; åtam—truths; manye—accept; yat—which; mäm—unto me; vadasi—You
tell; keçava—O Kåñëa; na—never;
hi—certainly; te—Your;
bhagavan—O Personality of Godhead; vyaktim—revelation; viduù—can
know; devaù—the demigods; na—nor;
dänaväù—the demons.
TRANSLATION
O Kåñëa, I totally accept as truth all that You have told me.
Neither the gods nor demons, O Lord, know Thy personality.
PURPORT
Arjuna herein confirms that persons of faithless and demonic
nature cannot understand Kåñëa. He is not even known by the demigods, so what
to speak of the so-called scholars of this modern world? By the grace of the
Supreme Lord, Arjuna has understood that the Supreme Truth is Kåñëa and that He
is the perfect one. One should therefore follow the path of Arjuna. He received
the authority of Bhagavad-gétä. As described in
the Fourth Chapter, the paramparä system of
disciplic succession for the understanding of Bhagavad-gétä
was lost, and therefore Kåñëa reestablished that disciplic succession
with Arjuna because He considered Arjuna His intimate friend and a great
devotee. Therefore, as stated in our Introduction to Gétopaniñad,
Bhagavad-gétä should be understood in the paramparä
system. When the paramparä system was
lost, Arjuna was again selected to rejuvenate it. The acceptance of Arjuna of
all that Kåñëa says should be emulated; then we can understand the essence of Bhagavad-gétä, and then only can we understand that
Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Bg
10.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
SvYaMaevaTMaNaaTMaaNa&
veTQa Tv& PauåzaetaMa )
>aUTa>aavNa >aUTaeXa devdev JaGaTPaTae )) 15 ))
svayam evätmanätmänaà
vettha tvaà puruñottama
bhüta-bhävana bhüteça
deva-deva jagat-pate
svayam—personality;
eva—certainly; ätmanä—by
Yourself; ätmänam—Yourself; vettha—know; tvam—You; puruñottama—O greatest of all persons; bhüta-bhävana—O origin of everything; bhüteça—O Lord of everything; deva-deva—O
Lord of all demigods; jagat-pate—O Lord of the
entire universe.
TRANSLATION
Indeed, You alone know Yourself by Your own potencies, O origin of
all, Lord of all beings, God of gods, O Supreme Person, Lord of the universe!
PURPORT
The Supreme Lord Kåñëa can be known by persons who are in a
relationship with Him through the discharge of devotional service, like Arjuna
and his successors. Persons of demonic or atheistic mentality cannot know
Kåñëa. Mental speculation that leads one away from the Supreme Lord is a
serious sin, and one who does not know Kåñëa should not try to comment on Bhagavad-gétä. Bhagavad-gétä is the
statement of Kåñëa, and since it is the science of Kåñëa, it should be
understood from Kåñëa as Arjuna understood it. It should not be received from
atheistic persons.
The Supreme Truth is realized in three aspects: as impersonal Brahman, localized Paramätmä and at last as the Supreme Personality of Godhead. So at the last stage of understanding the Absolute Truth, one comes to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. A liberated man and even a common man may realize impersonal Brahman or localized Paramätmä, yet they may not understand God’s personality from the verses of Bhagavad-gétä, which are being spoken by this person, Kåñëa. Sometimes the impersonalists accept Kåñëa as Bhagavan, or they accept His authority. Yet many liberated persons cannot understand Kåñëa as Puruñottama, the Supreme Person, the father of all living entities. Therefore Arjuna addresses Him as Puruñottama. And if one comes to know Him as the father of all the living entities, still one may not know Him as the supreme controller; therefore He is addressed here as Bhüteça, the supreme controller of everyone. And even if one knows Kåñëa as the supreme controller of all living entities, still one may not know that He is the origin of all the demigods; therefore He is addressed herein as Devadeva, the worshipful God of all demigods. And even if one knows Him as the worshipful God of all demigods, one may not know that He is the supreme proprietor of everything; therefore He is addressed as Jagatpati. Thus the truth about Kåñëa is established in this verse by the realization of Arjuna, and we should follow in the footsteps of Arjuna to understand Kåñëa as He is.
Bg
10.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
v¢u-MahRSYaXaeze<a
idVYaa ùaTMaiv>aUTaYa" )
Yaai>aivR>aUiTai>al/aeRk-aiNaMaa&STv& VYaaPYa iTaïiSa )) 16 ))
vaktum arhasy açeñeëa
divyä hy ätma-vibhütayaù
yäbhir vibhütibhir lokän
imäàs tvaà vyäpya tiñöhasi
vaktum—to say; arhasi—deserve; açeñeëa—in
detail; divyä—divine; hi—certainly;
ätma—Yourself; vibhütayaù—opulences;
yäbhiù—by which; vibhütibhiù—opulences;
lokän—all the planets; imän—these;
tvam—You; vyäpya—pervading;
tiñöhasi—remain.
TRANSLATION
Please tell me in detail of Your divine powers by which You
pervade all these worlds and abide in them.
PURPORT
In this verse it appears that Arjuna is already satisfied with his
understanding of the Supreme Lord Kåñëa. By Kåñëa’s grace, Arjuna has personal
experience, intelligence and knowledge and whatever else a person may have
through all these agencies, and he has understood Kåñëa as the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. For him there is no doubt, Yet he is asking Kåñëa to
explain His all-pervading nature so that in the future people will understand,
especially the impersonalists, how He exists in His all-pervading aspect through
His different energies. One should know that this is being asked by Arjuna on
behalf of the common people.
Bg
10.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
k-Qa&
ivÛaMah& YaaeiGa&STva& Sada PairicNTaYaNa( )
ke-zu ke-zu c >aavezu icNTYaae_iSa >aGavNMaYaa )) 17 ))
kathaà vidyäm ahaà yogiàs
tväà sadä paricintayan
keñu keñu ca bhäveñu
cintyo ’si bhagavan mayä
katham—how; vidyäm aham—shall I know; yogin—O
supreme mystic; tväm—You;
sadä—always; paricintayan—thinking; keñu—in which; keñu—in
which; ca—also; bhäveñu—nature;
cintyaù asi—You are remembered; bhagavan—O Supreme; mayä—by
me.
TRANSLATION
How should I meditate on You? In what various forms are You to be
contemplated, O Blessed Lord?
PURPORT
As it is stated in the previous chapter, the Supreme Personality
of Godhead is covered by His yoga-mäyä. Only
surrendered souls and devotees can see Him. Now Arjuna is convinced that His
friend, Kåñëa, is the Supreme Godhead, but he wants to know the general process
by which the all-pervading Lord can be understood by the common man. No common
man, including the demons and atheists, can know Kåñëa because He is guarded by
His yoga-mäyä energy. Again, these questions are
asked by Arjuna for their benefit. The superior devotee is not only concerned
for his own understanding, but for the understanding of all mankind. Out of his
mercy, because he is a Vaiñëava, a devotee, Arjuna is opening the understanding
for the common man as far as the all-pervasiveness of the Supreme is concerned.
He addresses Kåñëa specifically as yogin because
Çré Kåñëa is the master of the yoga-mäyä energy
by which He is covered and uncovered to the common man. The common man who has
no love for Kåñëa cannot always think of Kåñëa; therefore he has to think
materially. Arjuna is considering the mode of thinking of the materialistic
persons of this world. Because materialists cannot understand Kåñëa
spiritually, they are advised to concentrate the mind on physical things and
try to see how Kåñëa is manifested by physical representations.
Bg
10.18
TEXT
18
TEXT
ivSTare<aaTMaNaae
YaaeGa& iv>aUiTa& c JaNaadRNa )
>aUYa" k-QaYa Ta*iáihR é*<vTaae NaaiSTa Mae_Ma*TaMa( )) 18 ))
vistareëätmano yogaà
vibhütià ca janärdana
bhüyaù kathaya tåptir hi
çåëvato nästi me ’måtam
vistareëa—in
description; ätmanaù—of Yourself; yogam—mystic power; vibhütim—opulences;
ca—also; janärdana—O
killer of the atheists; bhüyaù—again; kathaya—describe; tåptiù—satisfaction;
hi—certainly; çåëvataù—hearing;
na asti—there is no; me—my;
amåtam—nectar.
TRANSLATION
Tell me again in detail, O Janärdana [Kåñëa], of Your mighty
potencies and glories, for I never tire of hearing Your ambrosial words.
PURPORT
A similar statement was made to Süta Gosvämé by the åñis of Naimiñäraëya, headed by Çaunaka. That statement
is:
vayaà tu na vitåpyäma uttama-çloka-vikrame
yac chåëvatäà rasa-jïänäà svädu svädu pade pade.
“One can never be satiated even though one continuously hears the
transcendental pastimes of Kåñëa, who is glorified by Vedic hymns. Those who
have entered into a transcendental relationship with Kåñëa relish in every step
descriptions of the pastimes of the Lord.” Thus Arjuna is interested to hear
about Kåñëa, specifically how He remains as the all-pervading Supreme Lord.
Now as far as amåtam, nectar, is
concerned, any narration or statement concerning Kåñëa is just like nectar. And
this nectar can be perceived by practical experience. Modern stories, fiction
and histories are different from the transcendental pastimes of the Lord in
that one will tire of hearing mundane stories, but one never tires of hearing
about Kåñëa. It is for this reason only that the history of the whole universe
is replete with references to the pastimes of the incarnations of Godhead. For
instance, the Puräëas are histories of bygone
ages that relate the pastimes of the various incarnations of the Lord. In this
way the reading matter remains forever fresh, despite repeated readings.
Bg
10.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
hNTa Tae k-QaiYaZYaaiMa idVYaa ùaTMaiv>aUTaYa" )
Pa[aDaaNYaTa" ku-åé[eï NaaSTYaNTaae ivSTarSYa Mae )) 19 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
hanta te kathayiñyämi
divyä hy ätma-vibhütayaù
prädhänyataù kuru-çreñöha
nästy anto vistarasya me
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; hanta—yes; te—unto you; kathayiñyämi—I
shall speak; divyäù—divine; hi—certainly; ätma-vibhütayaù—personal
opulences; prädhänyataù—principally; kuruçreñöha—O best of the Kurus; na asti—there is no; antaù—limit;
vistarasya—to the extent; me—My.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: Yes, I will tell you of My splendorous
manifestations, but only of those which are prominent, O Arjuna, for My
opulence is limitless.
PURPORT
It is not possible to comprehend the greatness of Kåñëa and His
opulences. The senses of the individual soul are imperfect and do not permit
him to understand the totality of Kåñëa’s affairs. Still the devotees try to
understand Kåñëa, but not on the principle that they will be able to understand
Kåñëa fully at any specific time or in any state of life. Rather, the very
topics of Kåñëa are so relishable that they appear to them as nectar. Thus they
enjoy them. In discussing Kåñëa’s opulences and His diverse energies, the pure
devotees take transcendental pleasure. Therefore they want to hear and discuss
them. Kåñëa knows that living entities do not understand the extent of His
opulences; He therefore agrees to state only the principal manifestations of
His different energies. The word prädhänyataù (principal)
is very important because we can understand only a few of the principal details
of the Supreme Lord, for His features are unlimited. It is not possible to
understand them all. And vibhüti, as used in this
verse, refers to the opulences by which He controls the whole manifestation. In
the Amara-koça dictionary it is stated that vibhüti indicates an exceptional opulence.
The impersonalist or the pantheist cannot understand the exceptional opulences of the Supreme Lord nor the manifestations of His divine energy. Both in the material world and in the spiritual world His energies are distributed in every variety of manifestation. Now Kåñëa is describing what can be directly perceived by the common man; thus part of His variegated energy is described in this way.
Bg
10.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
AhMaaTMaa
Gau@ake-Xa SavR>aUTaaXaYaiSQaTa" )
AhMaaidê MaDYa& c >aUTaaNaaMaNTa Wv c )) 20 ))
aham ätmä guòäkeça
sarva-bhütäçaya-sthitaù
aham ädiç ca madhyaà ca
bhütänäm anta eva ca
aham—I; ätmä—soul; guòäkeça—O
Arjuna; sarva-bhüta—all living entities; äçaya-sthitaù—situated within; aham—I
am; ädiù—origin; ca—also;
madhyam—middle; ca—also;
bhütänäm—all living entities; antaù—end; eva—certainly;
ca—and.
TRANSLATION
I am the Self, O Guòäkeça, seated in the hearts of all creatures.
I am the beginning, the middle and the end of all beings.
PURPORT
In this verse Arjuna is addressed as Guòäkeça, which means one who
has conquered the darkness of sleep. For those who are sleeping in the darkness
of ignorance, it is not possible to understand how the Supreme Godhead
manifests Himself in the material and spiritual worlds. Thus this address by
Kåñëa to Arjuna is significant. Because Arjuna is above such darkness, the
Personality of Godhead agrees to describe His various opulences.
Kåñëa first informs Arjuna that He is the Self or soul of the entire cosmic manifestation by dint of His primary expansion. Before the material creation, the Supreme Lord, by His plenary expansion, accepts the Puruña incarnations, and from Him everything begins. Therefore He is ätmä, the soul of the mahat-tattva, the universal elements. The total material energy is not the cause of the creation, but actually the Mahä-Visëu enters into the mahat-tattva, the total material energy. He is the soul. When Mahä-Viñëu enters into the manifested universes, He again manifests Himself as the Supersoul in each and every entity. We have experience that the personal body of the living entity exists due to the presence of the spiritual spark. Without the existence of the spiritual spark, the body cannot develop. Similarly, the material manifestation cannot develop unless the Supreme Soul of Kåñëa enters.
The Supreme Personality of Godhead is existing as the Supersoul in all manifested universes. A description of the three puruña-avatäras is given in Çrémad-Bhägavatam. “The Supreme Personality of Godhead manifests three features, as Käraëodakaçäyé Visëu, Garbhodakaçäyé Viñëu and Kñérodakaçäyé Viñëu, in this material manifestation.” The Supreme Lord Kåñëa, the cause of all causes, lies down in the cosmic ocean as Mahä-Viñëu or Käraëodakaçäyé Viñëu, and therefore Kåñëa is the beginning of this universe, the maintainer of the universal manifestation, and the end of all the energy.
Bg
10.21
TEXT
21
TEXT
AaidTYaaNaaMah&
ivZ<auJYaaeRiTaza& rivr&éuMaaNa( )
MarqicMaRåTaaMaiSMa Na+a}aa<aaMah& XaXaq )) 21 ))
ädityänäm ahaà viñëur
jyotiñäà ravir aàçumän
marécir marutäm asmi
nakñaträëäm ahaà çaçé
ädityänäm—of the
Ädityas; aham—I am; viñëuù—the
Supreme Lord; jyotiñäm—of all luminaries; raviù—the sun; aàçumän—radiant;
maréciù—Maréci; marutäm—of
the Marutas; asmi—I am; nakñaträëäm—of
stars; aham—I am; çaçé—the
moon.
TRANSLATION
Of the Ädityas I am Viñëu, of lights I am the radiant sun, I am
Maréci of the Maruts, and among the stars I am the moon.
PURPORT
There are twelve Ädityas, of which Kåñëa is the principal. And
among all the luminaries twinkling in the sky, the sun is the chief, and in the
Brahma-saàhitä the sun is accepted as the glowing
effulgence of the Supreme Lord and is considered to be one of His eyes. Maréci
is the controlling deity of the heavenly spaces. Among the stars, the moon is
most prominent at night, and thus the moon represents Kåñëa.
Bg
10.22
TEXT
22
TEXT
vedaNaa&
SaaMavedae_iSMa devaNaaMaiSMa vaSav" )
wiNd]Yaa<aa& MaNaêaiSMa >aUTaaNaaMaiSMa ceTaNaa )) 22 ))
vedänäà säma-vedo ’smi
devänäm asmi väsavaù
indriyäëäà manaç cäsmi
bhütänäm asmi cetanä
vedänäm—of all the Vedas; säma-vedaù—the Säma-veda; asmi—I am; devänäm—of
all the demigods; asmi—I am; väsavaù—heavenly king; indriyäëäm—of
all the senses; manaù—the mind; ca—also; asmi—I am; bhütänäm—of all living entities; asmi—I am; cetanä—the
living force.
TRANSLATION
Of the Vedas I am the Säma-veda; of the demigods I am Indra; of
the senses I am the mind, and in living beings I am the living force
[knowledge].
PURPORT
The difference between matter and spirit is that matter has no
consciousness like the living entity; therefore this consciousness is supreme
and eternal. Consciousness cannot be produced by a combination of matter.
Bg
10.23
TEXT
23
TEXT
åd]a<aa&
XaªrêaiSMa ivtaeXaae Ya+ar+aSaaMa( )
vSaUNaa& Paavk-êaiSMa Maeå" iXa%ir<aaMahMa( )) 23 ))
rudräëäà çaìkaraç cäsmi
vitteço yakña-rakñasäm
vasünäà pävakaç cäsmi
meruù çikhariëäm aham
rudräëäm—of all the
Rudras; çaìkaraù—Lord Çiva; ca—also; asmi—I am; vitteçaù—the lord of the treasury; yakña-rakñasäm—of the Yakñas and Räkñasas; vasünäm—of the Vasus; pävakaù—fire;
ca—also; asmi—I am;
meruù—Meru; çikhariëäm—of
all mountains; aham—I am.
TRANSLATION
Of all the Rudras I am Lord Çiva; of the Yakñas and Räkñasas I am
the lord of wealth [Kuvera]; of theVasus I am fire [Agni], and of the mountains
I am Meru.
PURPORT
There are eleven Rudras, of whom Çaìkara, Lord Çiva, is
predominant. He is the incarnation of the Supreme Lord in charge of the modes
of ignorance in the universe. Among the demigods Kuvera is the chief treasurer,
and he is a representation of the Supreme Lord. Meru is a mountain famed for
its rich natural resources.
Bg
10.24
TEXT
24
TEXT
PauraeDaSaa&
c Mau:Ya& Maa& iviÖ PaaQaR b*hSPaiTaMa( )
SaeNaaNaqNaaMah& Sk-Nd" SarSaaMaiSMa SaaGar" )) 24 ))
purodhasäà ca mukhyaà mäà
viddhi pärtha båhaspatim
senänénäm ahaà skandaù
sarasäm asmi sägaraù
purodhasäm—of all
priests; ca—also; mukhyam—chief;
mäm—Me; viddhi—understand;
pärtha—O son of Påthä; båhaspatim—Båhaspati;
senänénäm—of all commanders; aham—I am; skandaù—Kärtikeya;
sarasäm—of all reservoirs of water; asmi—I am; sägaraù—the
ocean.
TRANSLATION
Of priests, O Arjuna, know Me to be the chief, Båhaspati, the lord
of devotion. Of generals I am Skanda, the lord of war; and of bodies of water I
am the ocean.
PURPORT
Indra is the chief demigod of the heavenly planets and is known as
the king of the heavens. The planet in which he reigns is called Indraloka.
Båhaspati is Indra’s priest, and since Indra is the chief of all kings,
Båhaspati is the chief of all priests. And as Indra is the chief of all kings,
similarly Skanda, the son of Pärvaté and Lord Çiva, is the chief of all
military commanders. And of all bodies of water, the ocean is the greatest.
These representations of Kåñëa only give hints of His greatness.
Bg
10.25
TEXT
25
TEXT
Mahzs<aa&
>a*Gaurh& iGaraMaSMYaek-Ma+arMa( )
YajaNaa& JaPaYajae_iSMa SQaavra<aa& ihMaal/Ya" )) 25 ))
maharñéëäà bhågur ahaà
giräm asmy ekam akñaram
yajïänäà japa-yajïo ’smi
sthävaräëäà himälayaù
maharñéëäm—among the
great sages; bhåguù—Bhågu; aham—I am; giräm—of
vibrations; asmi—I am; ekam
akñaram—praëava; yajïänäm—of sacrifices; japa-yajïaù—chanting;
asmi—I am; sthävaräëäm—of
immovable things; himälayaù—the Himalayan
mountains.
TRANSLATION
Of the great sages I am Bhågu; of vibrations I am the
transcendental om. Of sacrifices I am the chanting of the holy names [japa],
and of immovable things I am the Himalayas.
PURPORT
Brahmä, the first living creature within the universe, created
several sons for the propagation of various kinds of species. The most powerful
of his sons is Bhågu, who is also the greatest sage. Of all the transcendental
vibrations, the “om” (omkara) represents the Supreme. Of all the sacrifices,
the chanting of Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/ Hare Räma, Hare
Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare is the purest representation of Kåñëa. Sometimes
animal sacrifices are recommended, but in the sacrifice of Hare Kåñëa, Hare
Kåñëa, there is no question of violence. It is the simplest and the purest.
Whatever is sublime in the worlds is a representation of Kåñëa. Therefore the
Himalayas, the greatest mountains in the world, also represent Him. The
mountain named Meru was mentioned in a previous verse, but Meru is sometimes
movable, whereas the Himalayas are never movable. Thus the Himalayas are
greater than Meru.
Bg
10.26
TEXT
26
TEXT
AìTQa"
SavRv*+aa<aa& devzs<aa& c Naard" )
GaNDavaR<aa& ic}arQa" iSaÖaNaa& k-iPal/ae MauiNa" )) 26 ))
açvatthaù sarva-våkñäëäà
devarñéëäà ca näradaù
gandharväëäà citrarathaù
siddhänäà kapilo muniù
açvatthaù—the banyan
tree; sarva-våkñäëäm—of all trees; devarñéëäm—of all the sages amongst the demigods; ca—and; näradaù—Närada; gandharväëäm—the citizens of the Gandharva planet; citrarathaù—Citraratha; siddhänäm—of
all those who are perfected; kapilaù muniù—Kapila
Muni.
TRANSLATION
Of all trees I am the holy fig tree, and amongst sages and
demigods I am Närada. Of the singers of the gods [Gandharvas] I am Citraratha,
and among perfected beings I am the sage Kapila.
PURPORT
The fig tree (açvattha) is one of the most beautiful and highest trees, and
people in India often worship it as one of their daily morning rituals. Amongst
the demigods they also worship Närada, who is considered the greatest devotee
in the universe. Thus he is the representation of Kåñëa as a devotee. The
Gandharva planet is filled with entities who sing beautifully, and among them
the best singer is Citraratha. Amongst the perpetually living entities, Kapila
is considered an incarnation of Kåñëa, and His philosophy is mentioned in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam. Later on another Kapila became
famous, but his philosophy was atheistic. Thus there is a gulf of difference
between them.
Bg
10.27
TEXT
27
TEXT
oÀE"é[vSaMaìaNaa&
iviÖ MaaMaMa*TaaeÙvMa( )
WeravTa& GaJaeNd]a<aa& Nara<aa& c NaraiDaPaMa( )) 27 ))
uccaiùçravasam açvänäà
viddhi mäm amåtodbhavam
airävataà gajendräëäà
naräëäà ca narädhipam
uccaiùçravasam—Uccaiùçravä;
açvänäm—among horses; viddhi—know;
mäm—Me; amåta-udbhavam—produced
from the churning of the ocean; airävatam—Airävata;
gajendräëäm—of elephants; naräëäm—among
human beings; ca—and; narädhipam—the
king.
TRANSLATION
Of horses know Me to be Uccaiùçravä, who rose out of the ocean,
born of the elixir of immortality; of lordly elephants I am Airävata, and among
men I am the monarch.
PURPORT
The devotee demigods and the demons (asuras)
once took a sea journey. On this journey, nectar and poison were produced, and
Lord Çiva drank the poison. From the nectar were produced many entities, of
which there was a horse named Uccaiùçravä. Another animal produced from the
nectar was an elephant named Airävata. Because these two animals were produced
from nectar, they have special significance, and they are representatives of
Kåñëa.
Amongst the human beings, the king is the representative of Kåñëa because Kåñëa is the maintainer of the universe, and the kings, who are appointed on account of their godly qualifications, are maintainers of their kingdoms. Kings like Mahäräja Yudhiñöhira, Mahäräja Parékñit and Lord Räma were all highly righteous kings who always thought of the citizens’ welfare. In Vedic literature, the king is considered to be the representative of God. In this age, however, with the corruption of the principles of religion, monarchy decayed and is now finally abolished. It is to be understood that in the past, however, people were more happy under righteous kings.
Bg
10.28
TEXT
28
TEXT
AaYauDaaNaaMah&
vJa]& DaeNaUNaaMaiSMa k-aMaDauk(- )
Pa[JaNaêaiSMa k-NdPaR" SaPaaR<aaMaiSMa vaSauik-" )) 28 ))
äyudhänäm ahaà vajraà
dhenünäm asmi kämadhuk
prajanaç cäsmi kandarpaù
sarpäëäm asmi väsukiù
äyudhänäm—of all
weapons; aham—I am; vajram—the
thunderbolt; dhenünäm—of cows; asmi—I am; kämadhuk—the surabhi cows; prajanaù—for
begetting children; ca—and; asmi—I am; kandarpaù—Cupid;
sarpäëäm—of all snakes; asmi—I
am; väsukiù—Väsuki.
TRANSLATION
Of weapons I am the thunderbolt; among cows I am the surabhi,
givers of abundant milk. Of procreators I am Kandarpa, the god of love, and of
serpents I am Väsuki, the chief.
PURPORT
The thunderbolt, indeed a mighty weapon, represents Kåñëa’s power.
In Kåñëaloka in the spiritual sky there are cows which can be milked at any
time, and they give as much milk as one likes. Of course such cows do not exist
in this material world, but there is mention of them in Kåñëaloka. The Lord
keeps many such cows, which are called surabhi. It
is stated that the Lord is engaged in herding the surabhi
cows. Kandarpa is the sex desire for presenting good sons; therefore
Kandarpa is the representative of Kåñëa. Sometimes sex is engaged in only for
sense gratification; such sex does not represent Kåñëa. But sex for the generation
of good children is called Kandarpa and represents Kåñëa.
Bg
10.29
TEXT
29
TEXT
ANaNTaêaiSMa
NaaGaaNaa& vå<aae YaadSaaMahMa( )
iPaTa›<aaMaYaRMaa caiSMa YaMa" Sa&YaMaTaaMahMa( )) 29 ))
anantaç cäsmi nägänäà
varuëo yädasäm aham
pitèëäm aryamä cäsmi
yamaù saàyamatäm aham
anantaù—Ananta; ca—also; asmi—I am; nägänäm—of all serpents; varuëaù—the
demigod controlling the water; yädasäm—of all
aquatics; aham—I am;
piöènäm—of the ancestors; aryamä—Aryäma; ca—also; asmi—I am; yamaù—the controller of death; saàyamatäm—of
all regulators; aham—I am.
TRANSLATION
Of the celestial Näga snakes I am Ananta; of the aquatic deities I
am Varuëa. Of departed ancestors I am Aryamä, and among the dispensers of law I
am Yama, lord of death.
PURPORT
Among the many celestial Naga serpents, Ananta is the greatest, as
is Varuëa among the aquatics. They both represent Kåñëa. There is also a planet
of trees presided over by Aryamä, who represents Kåñëa. There are many living
entities who give punishment to the miscreants, and among them Yama is the
chief. Yama is situated in a planet near this earthly planet, and after death
those who are very sinful are taken there, and Yama arranges different kinds of
punishments for them.
Bg
10.30
TEXT
30
TEXT
Pa[úadêaiSMa
dETYaaNaa& k-al/" k-l/YaTaaMahMa( )
Ma*Gaa<aa& c Ma*GaeNd]ae_h& vENaTaeYaê Pai+a<aaMa( )) 30 ))
prahlädaç cäsmi daityänäà
kälaù kalayatäm aham
mågäëäà ca mågendro ’haà
vainateyaç ca pakñiëäm
prahlädaù—Prahläda; ca—also; asmi—I am; daityänäm—of the demons; kälaù—time;
kalayatäm—of subduers; aham—I
am; mågäëäm—of animals; ca—and;
mågendraù—the lion; aham—I
am; vainateyaù—Garuòa; ca—also;
pakñiëäm—of birds.
TRANSLATION
Among the Daitya demons I am the devoted Prahläda; among subduers
I am time; among the beasts I am the lion, and among birds I am Garuòa, the
feathered carrier of Viñëu.
PURPORT
Diti and Aditi are two sisters. The sons of Aditi are called
Ädityas, and the sons of Diti are called Daityas. All the Ädityas are devotees
of the Lord, and all the Daityas are atheistic. Although Prahläda was born in
the family of the Daityas, he was a great devotee from his childhood. Because
of his devotional service and godly nature, he is considered to be a
representative of Kåñëa.
There are many subduing principles, but time wears down all things in the material universe and so represents Kåñëa. Of the many animals, the lion is the most powerful and ferocious, and of the million varieties of birds, Garuòa, the bearer of Lord Viñëu, is the greatest.
Bg
10.31
TEXT
31
TEXT
PavNa"
PavTaaMaiSMa raMa" Xañ>a*TaaMahMa( )
‡za<aa& Mak-rêaiSMa óaeTaSaaMaiSMa Jaaövq )) 31 ))
pavanaù pavatäm asmi
rämaù çastra-bhåtäm aham
jhañäëäà makaraç cäsmi
srotasäm asmi jähnavé
pavanaù—the wind; pavatäm—of all that purifies; asmi—I
am; rämaù—Räma; çastra-bhåtäm—of
the carriers of weapons; aham—I am; jhañäëäm—of all aquatics; makaraù—shark;
ca asmi—I am also; srotasäm—of
flowing rivers; asmi—I am; jähnavé—the River Ganges.
TRANSLATION
Of purifiers I am the wind; of the wielders of weapons I am Räma;
of fishes I am the shark, and of flowing rivers I am the Ganges.
PURPORT
Of all the aquatics the shark is one of the biggest and is
certainly the most dangerous to man. Thus the shark represents Kåñëa. And of
rivers, the greatest in India is the Mother Ganges. Lord Rämacandra, of the Rämäyaëa, an incarnation of Kåñëa, is the mightest of
warriors.
Bg
10.32
TEXT
32
TEXT
SaGaaR<aaMaaidrNTaê
MaDYa& cEvahMaJauRNa )
ADYaaTMaivÛa ivÛaNaa& vad" Pa[vdTaaMahMa( )) 32 ))
sargäëäm ädir antaç ca
madhyaà caiväham arjuna
adhyätma-vidyä vidyänäà
vädaù pravadatäm aham
sargäëäm—of all
creations; ädiù—beginning; antaù—end; ca—and; madhyam—middle; ca—also; eva—certainly; aham—I am;
arjuna—O Arjuna; adhyätma-vidyä—spiritual
knowledge; vidyänäm—of all education; vädaù—natural conclusion; pravadatäm—of
arguments; aham—I am.
TRANSLATION
Of all creations I am the beginning and the end and also the
middle, O Arjuna. Of all sciences I am the spiritual science of the Self, and
among logicians I am the conclusive truth.
PURPORT
Among created manifestations, the total material elements are
first created by Mahä-Viñëu and are annihilated by Lord Çiva. Brahmä is the
secondary creator. All these created elements are different incarnations of the
material qualities of the Supreme Lord; therefore He is the beginning, the
middle and the end of all creation.
Regarding the spiritual science of the Self, there are many literatures, such as the four Vedas, the Vedänta-sütra and the Puräëas, the Çrémad-Bhägavatam and the Gétä. These are all representatives of Kåñëa. Among logicians there are different stages of argument. The presentation of evidence is called japa. The attempt to defeat one another is called vitaëòa, and the final conclusion is called väda. The conclusive truth, the end of all reasoning processes, is Kåñëa.
Bg
10.33
TEXT
33
TEXT
A+ara<aaMak-arae_iSMa
ÜNÜ" SaaMaaiSak-SYa c )
AhMaeva+aYa" k-al/ae DaaTaah& ivìTaaeMau%" )) 33 ))
akñaräëäm a-käro ’smi
dvandvaù sämäsikasya ca
aham eväkñayaù kälo
dhätähaà viçvato-mukhaù
akñaräëäm—of letters;
akäraù—the first; asmi—I
am; dvandvaù—dual; sämäsikäsya—compounds;
ca—and; aham—I am; eva—certainly; akñayaù—eternal;
kälaù—time; dhätä—creator;
aham—I am; viçvato-mukhaù—Brahmä.
TRANSLATION
Of letters I am the letter A, and among compounds I am the dual
word. I am also inexhaustable time, and of creators I am Brahmä, whose manifold
faces turn everywhere.
PURPORT
Akära, the first
letter of the Sanskrit alphabet, is the beginning of the Vedic literature.
Without akära, nothing can be sounded; therefore
it is the beginning of sound. In Sanskrit there are also many compound words,
of which the dual word, like Räma-kåñëa, is called dvandvaù.
For instance, Räma and Kåñëa have the same rhythm and therefore are
called dual.
Among all kinds of killers, time is the ultimate because time kills everything. Time is the representative of Kåñëa because in due course of time there will be a great fire and everything will be annihilated.
Among the creators and living entities, Brahmä is the chief. The various Brahmäs exhibit four, eight, sixteen, etc., heads accordingly, and they are the chief creators in their respective universes. The Brahmäs are representatives of Kåñëa.
Bg
10.34
TEXT
34
TEXT
Ma*TYau"
SavRhrêahMauÙvê >aivZYaTaaMa( )
k-IiTaR" é[qvaRKc Naarq<aa& SMa*iTaMaeRDaa Da*iTa" +aMaa )) 34
))
måtyuù sarva-haraç cäham
udbhavaç ca bhaviñyatäm
kértiù çrér väk ca näréëäà
småtir medhä dhåtiù kñamä
måtyuù—death; sarva-haraù—all-devouring; ca—also;
aham—I am; udbhavaù—generation;
ca—also; bhaviñyatäm—of
the future; kértiù—fame; çréù
väk—beautiful speech; ca—also; näréëäà—of women; småtiù—memory;
medhä—intelligence; dhåtiù—faithfulness;
kñamä—patience.
TRANSLATION
I am all-devouring death, and I am the generator of all things yet
to be. Among women I am fame, fortune, speech, memory, intelligence,
faithfulness and patience.
PURPORT
As soon as a man is born, he dies at every moment. Thus death is
devouring every living entity at every moment, but the last stroke is called
death itself. That death is Kåñëa. All species of life undergo six basic changes.
They are born, they grow, they remain for some time, they reproduce, they
dwindle and finally vanish. Of these changes, the first is deliverance from the
womb, and that is Kåñëa. The first generation is the beginning of all future
activities.
The six opulences listed are considered to be feminine. If a woman possesses all of them or some of them she becomes glorious. Sanskrit is a perfect language and is therefore very glorious. After studying, if one can remember the subject matter, he is gifted with good memory, or småti One need not read many books on different subject matters; the ability to remember a few and quote them when necessary is also another opulence.
Bg
10.35
TEXT
35
TEXT
b*hTSaaMa TaQaa
SaaMana& GaaYa}aq ^NdSaaMahMa( )
MaaSaaNaa& MaaGaRXaqzaeR_hMa*TaUNaa& ku-SauMaak-r" )) 35 ))
båhat-säma tathä sämnäà
gäyatré chandasäm aham
mäsänäà märga-çérño ’ham
åtünäà kusumäkaraù
båhat-säma—the Båhat-säma; tathä—also; sämnäm—of
the Säma-veda song; gäyatré—the
Gäyatré hymns; chandasäm—of all poetry; aham—I am; mäsänäm—of
months; märga-çérño ’ham—the month of
November-December; aham—I am; åtünäm—of all seasons; kusumäkaraù—spring.
TRANSLATION
Of hymns I am the Båhat-säma sung to the Lord Indra, and of poetry
I am the Gäyatré verse, sung daily by brähmaëas. Of months I am November and
December, and of seasons I am flower-bearing spring.
PURPORT
It has already been explained by the Lord that amongst all the Vedas, the Säma-veda is rich with beautiful songs played by the various
demigods.
One of these songs is the Båhat-säma, which has an exquisite melody and is sung at midnight.
In Sanskrit, there are definite rules that regulate poetry; rhyme and meter are not written whimsically, as in much modern poetry. Amongst the regulated poetry, the Gäyatré mantra, which is chanted by the duly qualified brähmaëas, is the most prominent. The Gäyatré mantra is mentioned in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam. Because the Gäyatré mantra is especially meant for God realization, it represents the Supreme Lord. This mantra is meant for spiritually advanced people, and when one attains success in chanting it, he can enter into the transcendental position of the Lord. One must first acquire the qualities of the perfectly situated person, the qualities of goodness according to the laws of material nature, in order to chant the Gäyatré mantra. The Gäyatré mantra is very important in Vedic civilization and is considered to be the sound incarnation of Brahman. Brahmä is its initiator, and it is passed down from him in disciplic succession.
The months of November and December are considered the best of all months because in India grains are collected from the fields at this time, and the people become very happy. Of course spring is a season universally liked because it is neither too hot nor too cold, and the flowers and trees blossom and flourish. In spring there are also many ceremonies commemorating Kåñëa’s pastimes; therefore this is considered to be the most joyful of all seasons, and it is the representative of the Supreme Lord Kåñëa.
Bg 10.36
TEXT
36
TEXT
ÛUTa&
^l/YaTaaMaiSMa TaeJaSTaeJaiSvNaaMahMa( )
JaYaae_iSMa VYavSaaYaae_iSMa Satv& SatvvTaaMahMa( )) 36 ))
dyütaà chalayatäm asmi
tejas tejasvinäm aham
jayo ’smi vyavasäyo ’smi
sattvaà sattvavatäm aham
dyütam—gambling; chalayatäm—of all cheats; asmi—I
am; tejaù—splendid; tejasvinäm—of
everything splendid; aham—I am; jayaù—victory; asmi—I am;
vyavasäyaù—adventure; asmi—I
am; sattvam—strength; sattvavatäm—of
all the strong; aham—I am.
TRANSLATION
I am also the gambling of cheats, and of the splendid I am the
splendor. I am victory, I am adventure, and I am the strength of the strong.
PURPORT
There are many kinds of cheaters all over the universe. Of all
cheating processes, gambling stands supreme and therefore represents Kåñëa. As
the Supreme, Kåñëa can be more deceitful than any mere man. If Kåñëa chooses to
deceive a person, no one can surpass Him in His deceit. His greatness is not
simply one-sided—it is all-sided.
Among the victorious, He is victory. He is the splendor of the splendid. Among enterprising industrialists, He is the most enterprising. Among adventurers, He is the most adventurous, and among the strong, He is the strongest. When Kåñëa was present on earth, no one could surpass Him in strength. Even in His childhood He lifted Govardhana Hill. No one can surpass Him in cheating, no one can surpass Him in splendor, no one can surpass Him in victory, no one can surpass Him in enterprise, and no one can surpass Him in strength.
Bg
10.37
TEXT
37
TEXT
v*Z<aqNaa&
vaSaudevae_iSMa Paa<@vaNaa& DaNaÅYa" )
MauNaqNaaMaPYah& VYaaSa" k-vqNaaMauXaNaa k-iv" )) 37 ))
våñëénäà väsudevo ’smi
päëòavänäà dhanaïjayaù
munénäm apy ahaà vyäsaù
kavénäm uçanä kaviù
våñëénäm—of the
descendants of Våñëi; väsudevaù—Kåñëa in Dväraka;
asmi—I am; päëòavänäm—of
the Päëòavas; dhanaïjayaù—Arjuna; munénäm—of the sages; api—also;
aham—I am; vyäsaù—Vyäsa,
the compiler of all Vedic literature; kavénäm—of
all great thinkers; uçanä—Uçanä; kaviù—the thinker.
TRANSLATION
Of the descendants of Våñëi I am Väsudeva, and of the Päëòavas I
am Arjuna. Of the sages I am Vyäsa, and among great thinkers I am Uçanä.
PURPORT
Kåñëa is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, and Väsudeva
is the immediate expansion of Kåñëa. Both Lord Kåñëa and Baladeva appear as the
sons of Vasudeva. Amongst the sons of Päëòu, Arjuna is famous and valiant.
Indeed, he is the best of men and therefore represents Kåñëa. Among the munis, or learned men conversant in Vedic knowledge,
Vyäsa is the greatest because he explained Vedic knowledge in many different
ways for the understanding of the common mass of people in this age of Kali.
And Vyäsa is also known as an incarnation of Kåñëa; therefore Vyäsa also
represents Kåñëa. Kavis are those who are capable
of thinking thoroughly on any subject matter. Among the kavis,
Uçanä was the spiritual master of the demons; he was extremely
intelligent, far-seeing, political and spiritual in every way. Thus Uçanä is
another representative of the opulence of Kåñëa.
Bg
10.38
TEXT
38
TEXT
d<@ae
dMaYaTaaMaiSMa NaqiTariSMa iJaGaqzTaaMa( )
MaaENa& cEvaiSMa GauùaNaa& jaNa& jaNavTaaMahMa( )) 38 ))
daëòo damayatäm asmi
nétir asmi jigéñatäm
maunaà caiväsmi guhyänäà
jïänaà jïänavatäm aham
daëòaù—punishment; damayatäm—of all separation; asmi—I
am; nétiù—morality; asmi—I
am; jigéñatäm—of the victorious; maunam—silence; ca—and; eva—also; asmi—I am; guhyänäm—of secrets; jïänam—knowledge;
jïänavatäm—of the wise; aham—I
am.
TRANSLATION
Among punishments I am the rod of chastisement, and of those who
seek victory, I am morality. Of secret things I am silence, and of the wise I
am wisdom.
PURPORT
There are many suppressing agents, of which the most important are
those that cut down the miscreants. When miscreants are punished, the rod of
chastisement represents Kåñëa. Among those who are trying to be victorious in
some field of activity, the most victorious element is morality. Among the
confidential activities of hearing, thinking and meditating, silence is most
important because by silence one can make progress very quickly. The wise man
is he who can discriminate between matter and spirit, between God’s superior
and inferior natures. Such knowledge is Kåñëa Himself.
Bg
10.39
TEXT
39
TEXT
YaÀaiPa
SavR>aUTaaNaa& bqJa& TadhMaJauRNa )
Na TadiSTa ivNaa YaTSYaaNMaYaa >aUTa& cracrMa( )) 39 ))
yac cäpi sarva-bhütänäà
béjaà tad aham arjuna
na tad asti vinä yat syän
mayä bhütaà caräcaram
yat—whatever; ca—also; api—may be; sarva-bhütänäm—of all creations; béjam—the seed; tat—that;
aham—I am; arjuna—O
Arjuna; na—not; tat—that;
asti—there is; vinä—without;
yat—that; syät—exists;
mayä—by Me; bhütam—created;
caräcaram—moving and unmoving.
TRANSLATION
Furthermore, O Arjuna, I am the generating seed of all existences.
There is no being—moving or unmoving—that can exist without Me.
PURPORT
Everything has a cause, and that cause or seed of manifestation is
Kåñëa. Without Kåñëa’s energy, nothing can exist; therefore He is called
omnipotent. Without His potency, neither the movable nor the unmovable can
exist. Whatever existence is not founded on the energy of Kåñëa is called mäyä, that which is not.
Bg
10.40
TEXT
40
TEXT
NaaNTaae_iSTa
MaMa idVYaaNaa& iv>aUTaqNaa& ParNTaPa )
Wz TaUÕeXaTa" Pa[ae¢-ae iv>aUTaeivRSTarae MaYaa )) 40 ))
nänto ’sti mama divyänäà
vibhüténäà parantapa
eña tüddeçataù prokto
vibhüter vistaro mayä
na—nor; antaù—a limit; asti—is there; mama—of My; divyänäm—divine; vibhüténam—opulences;
parantapa—O conquerer of the enemies; eñaù—all this; tu—that; uddeçataù—examples; proktaù—spoken;
vibhüteù—opulences; vistaraù—expanded;
mayä—by Me.
TRANSLATION
O mighty conqueror of enemies, there is no end to My divine
manifestations. What I have spoken to you is but a mere indication of My
infinite opulences.
PURPORT
As stated in the Vedic literature, although the opulences and
energies of the Supreme are understood in various ways, there is no limit to
such opulences; therefore not all the opulences and energies can be explained.
Simply a few examples are being described to Arjuna to pacify his
inquisitiveness.
Bg
10.41
TEXT
41
TEXT
YaÛiÜ>aUiTaMaTSatv&
é[qMadUiJaRTaMaev va )
TatadevavGaC^ Tv& MaMa TaeJaae_&XaSaM>avMa( )) 41 ))
yad yad vibhütimat sattvaà
çrémad ürjitam eva vä
tat tad evävagaccha tvaà
mama tejo-’àça-sambhavam
yat yat—whatever; vibhüti—opulences; mat—having;
sattvam—existence; çrémat—beautiful;
ürjitam—glorious; eva—certainly;
vä—or; tat tat—all
those; eva—certainly; avagaccha—you
must know; tvam—you; mama—My;
tejaù—splendor; aàça—partly;
sambhavam—born of.
TRANSLATION
Know that all beautiful, glorious, and mighty creations spring
from but a spark of My splendor.
PURPORT
Any glorious or beautiful existence should be understood to be but
a fragmental manifestation of Kåñëa’s opulence, whether it be in the spiritual
or material world. Anything extraordinarily opulent should be considered to
represent Kåñëa’s opulence.
Bg
10.42
TEXT
42
TEXT
AQava
bhuNaETaeNa ik&- jaTaeNa TavaJauRNa )
iví>YaahiMad& k*-TòMaek-a&XaeNa iSQaTaae JaGaTa( )) 42 ))
atha vä bahunaitena
kià jïätena tavärjuna
viñöabhyäham idaà kåtsnam
ekäàçena sthito jagat
athavä—or; bahunä—many; etena—by
this kind; kim—what; jïätena—knowing;
tava—you; arjuna—O
Arjuna; viñöabhya—entire; aham—I; idam—this; kåtsnam—all
manifestations; eka—one; aàçena—part;
sthithaù—situated; jagat—in
the universe.
TRANSLATION
But what need is there, Arjuna, for all this detailed knowledge?
With a single fragment of Myself I pervade and support this entire universe.
PURPORT
The Supreme Lord is represented throughout the entire material
universes by His entering into all things as the Supersoul. The Lord here tells
Arjuna that there is no point in understanding how things exist in their
separate opulence and grandeur. He should know that all things are existing due
to Kåñëa’s entering them as Supersoul. From Brahmä, the most gigantic entity,
on down to the smallest ant, all are existing because the Lord has entered each
and all and is sustaining them.
Worship of demigods is discouraged herein because even the greatest demigods like Brahmä and Çiva only represent part of the opulence of the Supreme Lord. He is the origin of everyone born, and no one is greater than Him. He is samatä, which means that no one is superior to Him and that no one is equal to Him. In the Viñëu-mantra it is said that one who considers the Supreme Lord Kåñëa in the same category with demigods—be they even Brahmä or Çiva—becomes at once an atheist. If, however, one thoroughly studies the different descriptions of the opulences and expansions of Kåñëa’s energy, then one can understand without any doubt the position of Lord Çré Kåñëa and can fix his mind in the worship of Kåñëa without deviation. The Lord is all-pervading by the expansion of His partial representation, the Supersoul, who enters into everything that is. Pure devotees, therefore, concentrate their minds in Kåñëa consciousness in full devotional service; therefore they are always situated in the transcendental position. Devotional service and worship of Kåñëa are very clearly indicated in this chapter in verses eight to eleven. That is the way of pure devotional service. How one can attain the highest devotional perfection of association with the Supreme Personality of Godhead has been thoroughly explained in this chapter.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the Tenth Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of the Opulence of the Absolute.
Bg 11. The Universal Form
CHAPTER
ELEVEN
The Universal
Form
Bg 11.1
TEXT
1
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac
MadNauGa]haYa ParMa& GauùMaDYaaTMaSa&ijTaMa( )
YatvYaae¢&- vcSTaeNa Maaehae_Ya& ivGaTaae MaMa )) 1 ))
arjuna
uväca
mad-anugrahäya paramaà
guhyam adhyätma-saàjïitam
yat tvayoktaà vacas tena
moho ’yaà vigato mama
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna said;
mat-anugrahäya—just to show me favor; paramam—supreme; guhyam—confidential;
adhyätma—spiritual; saàjïitam—in
the matter of; yat—what; tvayä—by
You; uktam—said; vacaù—words;
tena—by that; mohaù—illusion;
ayam—this; vigataù—is educated; mama—my.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said: I have heard Your instruction on confidential
spiritual matters which You have so kindly delivered unto me, and my illusion
is now dispelled.
PURPORT
This chapter reveals Kåñëa as the cause of all causes. He is even
the cause of the Mahä-Viñëu, and from Him the material universes emanate. Kåñëa
is not an incarnation; He is the source of all incarnations. That has been
completely explained in the last chapter.
Now, as far as Arjuna is concerned, he says that his illusion is over. This means that Arjuna no longer thinks of Kåñëa as a mere human being, as a friend of his, but as the source of everything. Arjuna is very enlightened and is glad that he has a great friend like Kåñëa, but now he is thinking that although he may accept Kåñëa as the source of everything, others may not. So in order to establish Kåñëa’s divinity for all, he is requesting Kåñëa in this chapter to show His universal form. Actually when one sees the universal form of Kåñëa one becomes frightened, like Arjuna, but Kåñëa is so kind that after showing it He converts Himself again into His original form. Arjuna agrees to what Kåñëa says several times. Kåñëa is speaking to him just for his benefit, and Arjuna acknowledges that all this is happening to him by Kåñëa’s grace. He is now convinced that Kåñëa is the cause of all causes and is present in everyone’s heart as the Supersoul.
Bg 11.2
TEXT
2
TEXT
>avaPYaYaaE
ih >aUTaaNaa& é[uTaaE ivSTarXaae MaYaa )
Tvta" k-Mal/Pa}aa+a MaahaTMYaMaiPa caVYaYaMa( )) 2 ))
bhaväpyayau hi bhütänäà
çrutau vistaraço mayä
tvattaù kamala-paträkña
mähätmyam api cävyayam
bhava—appearance; apyayau—disappearance; hi—certainly;
bhütänäm—of all living entities; çrutau—have heard; vistaraçaù—detail;
mayä—by me; tvattaù—from
You; kamala-paträkña—O lotus-eyed one; mähätmyam—glories; api—also;
ca—and; avyayam—inexhaustible.
TRANSLATION
O lotus-eyed one, I have heard from You in detail about the
appearance and disappearance of every living entity, as realized through Your
inexhaustible glories.
PURPORT
Arjuna addresses Lord Kåñëa as “lotus-eyed” (Kåñëa’s eyes appear
just like the petals of a lotus flower) out of his joy, for Kåñëa has assured
him, in the last verse of the previous chapter, that He sustains the entire
universe with just a fragment of Himself. He is the source of everything in
this material manifestation, and Arjuna has heard of this from the Lord in
detail. Arjuna further knows that in spite of His being the source of all appearances
and disappearances, He is aloof from them. His personality is not lost,
although He is all-pervading. That is the inconceivable opulence of Kåñëa which
Arjuna admits that he has thoroughly understood.
Bg 11.3
TEXT
3
TEXT
WvMaeTaÛQaaTQa
TvMaaTMaaNa& ParMaeìr )
d]íuiMaC^aiMa Tae æPaMaEìr& PauåzaetaMa )) 3 ))
evam etad yathättha tvam
ätmänaà parameçvara
drañöum icchämi te rüpam
aiçvaraà puruñottama
evam—that; etat—this; yathättha—as
it is; tvam—You; ätmänam—the
soul; parameçvara—the Supreme Lord; drañöum—to see; icchämi—I
wish; te—You; rüpam—form;
aiçvaram—divine; puruñottama—O
best of personalities.
TRANSLATION
O greatest of all personalities, O supreme form, though I see here
before me Your actual position, I yet wish to see how You have entered into
this cosmic manifestation. I want to see that form of Yours.
PURPORT
The Lord said that because He entered into the material universe
by His personal representation, the cosmic manifestation has been made possible
and is going on. Now as far as Arjuna is concerned, he is inspired by the
statements of Kåñëa, but in order to convince others in the future who may
think that Kåñëa is an ordinary person, he desires to see Him actually in His
universal form, to see how He is acting from within the universe, although He
is apart from it. Arjuna’s asking the Lord’s permission is also significant.
Since the Lord is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, He is present within
Arjuna himself; therefore He knows the desire of Arjuna, and He can understand
that Arjuna has no special desire to see Him in His universal form, for he is
completely satisfied to see Him in His personal form of Kåñëa. But He can
understand also that Arjuna wants to see the universal form to convince others.
He did not have any personal desire for confirmation. Kåñëa also understands
that Arjuna wants to see the universal form to set a criterion, for in the
future there would be so many imposters who would pose themselves as
incarnations of God. The people, therefore, should be careful; one who claims
to be Kåñëa should be prepared to show his universal form to confirm his claim
to the people.
Bg 11.4
TEXT
4
TEXT
MaNYaSae Yaid
TaC^KYa& MaYaa d]íuiMaiTa Pa[>aae )
YaaeGaeìr TaTaae Mae Tv& dXaRYaaTMaaNaMaVYaYaMa( )) 4 ))
manyase yadi tac chakyaà
mayä drañöum iti prabho
yogeçvara tato me tvaà
darçayätmänam avyayam
manyase—if You
think; yadi—if; tat—that;
çakyam—able to see; mayä—by
me; drañöum—to see; iti—thus;
prabho—O Lord; yogeçvara—the
Lord of all mystic power; tataù—then; me—unto me; tvam—You; darçaya—show; ätmänam—Yourself;
avyayam—eternal.
TRANSLATION
If You think that I am able to behold Your cosmic form, O my Lord,
O master of all mystic power, then kindly show me that universal self.
PURPORT
It is said that one can neither see, hear, understand nor perceive
the Supreme Lord, Kåñëa, by the material senses. But if one is engaged
in loving transcendental service to the Lord from the beginning, then one can
see the Lord by revelation. Every living entity is only a spiritual spark;
therefore it is not possible to see or to understand the Supreme Lord. Arjuna,
as a devotee, does not depend on his speculative strength; rather, he admits
his limitations as a living entity and acknowledges Kåñëa’s inestimable
position. Arjuna could understand that for a living entity it is not possible
to understand the unlimited infinite. If the infinite reveals Himself, then it
is possible to understand the nature of the infinite by the grace of the
infinite. The word yogeçvara is also very significant here because the Lord has
inconceivable power. If He likes, He can reveal Himself by His grace, although
He is unlimited. Therefore Arjuna pleads for the inconceivable grace of Kåñëa.
He does not give Kåñëa orders. Kåñëa is not obliged to reveal Himself to
anyone unless one surrenders fully in Kåñëa consciousness and engages in
devotional service. Thus it is not possible for persons who depend on the
strength of their mental speculations to see Kåñëa.
Bg 11.5
TEXT
5
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
PaXYa Mae PaaQaR æPaai<a XaTaXaae_Qa SahóXa" )
NaaNaaivDaaiNa idVYaaiNa NaaNaav<aaRk*-TaqiNa c )) 5 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
paçya me pärtha rüpäëi
çataço ’tha sahasraçaù
nänä-vidhäni divyäni
nänä-varëäkåténi ca
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; paçya—just see; me—Mine; pärtha—O son of Påthä; rüpäëi—forms;
çataçaù—hundreds; atha—also;
sahasraçaù—thousands; nänä-vidhäni—variegated;
divyäni—divine; nänä—variegated;
varëa—colored; akåténi—forms;
ca—also.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: My dear Arjuna, O son of Påthä, behold now
My opulences, hundreds of thousands of varied divine forms, multicolored like
the sea.
PURPORT
Arjuna wanted to see Kåñëa in His universal form, which, although
a transcendental form, is just manifested for the cosmic manifestation and is
therefore subject to the temporary time of this material nature. As the
material nature is manifested and not manifested, similarly this universal form
of Kåñëa is manifested and unmanifested. It is not eternally situated in the
spiritual sky like Kåñëa’s other forms. As far as a devotee is concerned, he is
not eager to see the universal form, but because Arjuna wanted to see Kåñëa in
this way, Kåñëa reveals this form. This universal form is not possible to be
seen by any ordinary man. Kåñëa must give one the power to see it.
Bg 11.6
TEXT
6
TEXT
PaXYaaidTYaaNvSaUNåd]aNaiìNaaE
MaåTaSTaQaa )
bhUNYad*íPaUvaRi<a PaXYaaêYaaRi<a >aarTa )) 6 ))
paçyädityän vasün rudrän
açvinau marutas tathä
bahüny adåñöa-pürväëi
paçyäçcaryäëi bhärata
paçya—see; ädityän—the twelve sons of Aditi; vasün—the eight Vasus; rudrän—the
eleven forms of Rudra; açvinau—the two Asvins; marutaù—the forty-nine Maruts (demigods of the wind); tathä—also; bahüni—many; adåñöa—that you have not heard or seen; pürväëi—before; paçya—there
see; äçcaryäëi—all the wonderful; bhärata—O best of the Bhäratas.
TRANSLATION
O best of the Bhäratas, see here the different manifestations of
Ädityas, Rudras, and all the demigods. Behold the many things which no one has
ever seen or heard before.
PURPORT
Even though Arjuna was a personal friend of Kåñëa and the most
advanced of learned men, it was still not possible for him to know everything
about Kåñëa. Here it is stated that humans have neither heard nor known of all
these forms and manifestations. Now Kåñëa reveals these wonderful forms.
Bg 11.7
TEXT
7
TEXT
whEk-SQa&
JaGaTk*-Tò& PaXYaaÛ SacracrMa( )
MaMa dehe Gau@ake-Xa YaÀaNYad(d]íuiMaC^iSa )) 7 ))
ihaika-sthaà jagat kåtsnaà
paçyädya sa-caräcaram
mama dehe guòäkeça
yac cänyad drañöum icchasi
iha—in this; ekastham—in one; jagat—the
universe; kåtsnam—completely; paçya—see; adya—immediately;
sa—with; cara—moving;
acaram—not moving; mama—My; dehe—in this body; guòäkeça—O
Arjuna; yat—that; ca—also;
anyat—other; drañöum—to
see; icchasi—you like.
TRANSLATION
Whatever you wish to see can be seen all at once in this body.
This universal form can show you all that you now desire, as well as whatever
you may desire in the future. Everything is here completely.
PURPORT
No one can see the entire universe sitting in one place. Even the
most advanced scientist cannot see what is going on in other parts of the
universe. Kåñëa gives him the power to see anything he wants to see, past,
present and future. Thus by the mercy of Kåñëa, Arjuna is able to see
everything.
Bg 11.8
TEXT
8
TEXT
Na Tau Maa&
XaKYaSae d]íuMaNaeNaEv Svc+auza )
idVYa& ddaiMa Tae c+au" PaXYa Mae YaaeGaMaEìrMa( )) 8 ))
na tu mäà çakyase drañöum
anenaiva sva-cakñuñä
divyaà dadämi te cakñuù
paçya me yogam aiçvaram
na—never; tu—but; mäm—Me; çakyase—able; drañöum—to
see; anena—by this; eva—certainly;
sva-cakñuñä—with your own eyes; divyam—divine; dadämi—I
give; te—you; cakñuù—eyes;
paçya—see; me—My; yogam aiçvaram—inconceivable mystic power.
TRANSLATION
But you cannot see Me with your present eyes. Therefore I give to
you divine eyes by which you can behold My mystic opulence.
PURPORT
A pure devotee does not like to see Kåñëa in any form except His
form with two hands; a devotee must see His universal form by His grace, not
with the mind but with spiritual eyes. To see the universal form of Kåñëa,
Arjuna is told not to change his mind but his vision. The universal form of
Kåñëa is not very important; that will be clear in the verses. Yet because
Arjuna wanted to see it, the Lord gives him the particular vision required to
see that universal form.
Devotees who are correctly situated in a transcendental relationship with Kåñëa are attracted by loving features, not by a godless display of opulences. The playmates of Kåñëa, the friends of Kåñëa and the parents of Kåñëa never want Kåñëa to show His opulences. They are so immersed in pure love that they do not even know that Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. In their loving exchange they forget that Kåñëa is the Supreme Lord. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam it is stated that the boys who play with Kåñëa are all highly pious souls, and after many, many births they are able to play with Kåñëa. Such boys do not know that Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. They take Him as a personal friend. The Supreme Person is considered as the impersonal Brahman by great sages, as the Supreme Personality of Godhead by the devotees, and as a product of this material nature by ordinary men. The fact is that the devotee is not concerned to see the viçva-rüpa, the universal form, but Arjuna wanted to see it to substantiate Kåñëa’s statement so that in the future people could understand that Kåñëa not only theoretically or philosophically presented Himself as the Supreme but actually presented Himself as such to Arjuna. Arjuna must confirm this because Arjuna is the beginning of the paramparä system. Those who are actually interested to understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, and who follow in the footsteps of Arjuna should understand that Kåñëa not only theoretically presented Himself as the Supreme, but actually revealed Himself as the Supreme.
The Lord gave Arjuna the necessary power to see His universal form because He knew that Arjuna did not particularly want to see it, as we have already explained.
Bg 11.9
TEXT
9
TEXT
SaÅYa ovac
WvMau¤-a TaTaae raJaNMahaYaaeGaeìrae hir" )
dXaRYaaMaaSa PaaQaaRYa ParMa& æPaMaEìrMa( )) 9 ))
saïjaya
uväca
evam uktvä tato räjan
mahä-yogeçvaro hariù
darçayäm äsa pärthäya
paramaà rüpam aiçvaram
saïjayaù uväca—Sanjaya
said; evam—thus; uktvä—saying;
tataù—thereafter; räjan—O
King; mahä-yogeçvaraù—the most powerful mystic; hariù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa; darçayämäsa—showed; pärthäya—unto
Arjuna; paramam—divine; rüpam—universal
form; aiçvaram—opulences.
TRANSLATION
Saïjaya said: O King, speaking thus, the Supreme, the Lord of all
mystic power, the Personality of Godhead, displayed His universal form to
Arjuna.
Bg
11.10, Bg 11.11, Bg 11.10-11
TEXTS
10–11
TEXT
ANaek-v£-NaYaNaMaNaek-ad(>auTadXaRNaMa(
)
ANaek-idVYaa>ar<a& idVYaaNaek-aeÛTaaYauDaMa( )) 10 ))
idVYaMaaLYaaMbrDar& idVYaGaNDaaNaule/PaNaMa( )
SavaRêYaRMaYa& devMaNaNTa& ivìTaaeMau%Ma( )) 11 ))
aneka-vaktra-nayanam
anekädbhuta-darçanam
aneka-divyäbharaëaà
divyänekodyatäyudham
divya-mälyämbara-dharaà
divya-gandhänulepanam
sarväçcarya-mayaà devam
anantaà viçvato-mukham
aneka—various; vaktra—mouths; nayanam—eyes;
aneka—various; adbhuta—wonderful;
darçanam—sight; aneka—many;
divya—divine; äbharaëam—ornaments;
divya—divine; aneka—various;
udyata—uplifted; äyudham
weapons; divya—divine; mälya—garlands;
ambara-dharam—covered with the dresses; divya—divine; gandha—fragrance;
anulepanam—smeared; sarva—all;
açcaryamayam—wonderful; devam—shining;
anantam—unlimited; viçvataù-mukham—all-pervading.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna saw in that universal form unlimited mouths and unlimited
eyes. It was all wondrous. The form was decorated with divine, dazzling
ornaments and arrayed in many garbs. He was garlanded gloriously, and there
were many scents smeared over His body. All was magnificent, all-expanding,
unlimited. This was seen by Arjuna.
PURPORT
These two verses indicate that there is no limit to the hands,
mouths, legs, etc., of the Lord. These manifestations are distributed
throughout the universe and are unlimited. By the grace of the Lord, Arjuna
could see them while sitting in one place. That is due to the inconceivable
potency of Kåñëa.
Bg
11.12
TEXT
12
TEXT
idiv
SaUYaRSahóSYa >aveÛuGaPaduiTQaTaa )
Yaid >aa" Sad*Xaq Saa SYaaÙaSaSTaSYa MahaTMaNa" )) 12 ))
divi sürya-sahasrasya
bhaved yugapad utthitä
yadi bhäù sadåçé sä syäd
bhäsas tasya mahätmanaù
divi—in the sky; sürya—sun; sahasrasya—of
many thousands; bhavet—there were; yugapat—simultaneously; utthitä—present;
yadi—if; bhäù—light;
sadåçé—like that; sä—that;
syät—may be; bhäsaù—effulgence;
tasya—there is;
mahätmanaù—of the great Lord.
TRANSLATION
If hundreds of thousands of suns rose up at once into the sky,
they might resemble the effulgence of the Supreme Person in that universal
form.
PURPORT
What Arjuna saw was indescribable, yet Saïjaya is trying to give a
mental picture of that great revelation to Dhåtaräñöra. Neither Saïjaya nor
Dhåtaräñöra were present, but Saïjaya, by the grace of Vyäsa, could see
whatever happened. Thus he now compares the situation, as far as it can be
understood, to an imaginable phenomenon (i.e. thousands of suns).
Bg
11.13
TEXT
13
TEXT
Ta}aEk-SQa&
JaGaTk*-Tò& Pa[iv>a¢-MaNaek-Daa )
APaXYaÕevdevSYa Xarqre Paa<@vSTada )) 13 ))
tatraika-sthaà jagat kåtsnaà
pravibhaktam anekadhä
apaçyad deva-devasya
çarére päëòavas tadä
tatra—there; ekastham—one place; jagat—universe;
kåtsnam—completely; pravibhaktam—divided
in; anekadhä—many kinds; apaçyat—could
see; deva-devasya—of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead; çarére—in the universal form; päëòavaù—Arjuna; tadä—at
that time.
TRANSLATION
At that time Arjuna could see in the universal form of the Lord
the unlimited expansions of the universe situated in one place although divided
into many, many thousands.
PURPORT
The word tatra (there) is very
significant. It indicates that both Arjuna and Kåñëa were sitting on the
chariot when Arjuna saw the universal form. Others on the battlefield could not
see this form because Kåñëa gave the vision only to Arjuna. Arjuna could see in
the body of Kåñëa many thousands of universes. As we learn from Vedic
scriptures, there are many universes and many planets. Some of them are made of
earth, some are made of gold, some are made of jewels, some are very great,
some are not so great, etc. Sitting on his chariot, Arjuna could see all these
universes. But no one could understand what was going on between Arjuna and
Kåñëa.
Bg
11.14
TEXT
14
TEXT
TaTa" Sa
ivSMaYaaivíae ôíraeMaa DaNaÅYa" )
Pa[<aMYa iXarSaa dev& k*-TaaÅil/r>aazTa )) 14 ))
tataù sa vismayäviñöo
håñöa-romä dhanaïjayaù
praëamya çirasä devaà
kåtäïjalir abhäñata
tataù—thereafter; saù—he; vismayäviñöaù—being
overwhelmed with wonder; håñöa-romä—with his
bodily hairs standing on end due to his great ecstasy; dhanaïjayaù—Arjuna
; praëamya—offering obeisances; çirasä—with the head; devam—to
the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kåtäïjaliù—with
folded hands; abhäñata—began to say.
TRANSLATION
Then, bewildered and astonished, his hair standing on end, Arjuna
began to pray with folded hands, offering obeisances to the Supreme Lord.
PURPORT
Once the divine vision is revealed, the relationship between Kåñëa
and Arjuna changes immediately. Before, Kåñëa and Arjuna had a relationship
based on friendship, but here, after the revelation, Arjuna is offering
obeisances with great respect, and with folded hands he is praying to Kåñëa. He
is praising the universal form. Thus Arjuna’s relationship becomes one of
wonder rather than friendship. Great devotees see Kåñëa as the reservoir of all
relationships. In the scriptures there are twelve basic kinds of relationships
mentioned, and all of them are present in Kåñëa. It is said that He is the
ocean of all the relationships exchanged between two living entities, between
the gods, or between the Supreme Lord and His devotees.
It is said that Arjuna was inspired by the relationship of wonder, and in that wonder, although he was by nature very sober, calm and quiet, he became ecstatic, his hair stood up, and he began to offer his obeisances unto the Supreme Lord with folded hands. He was not, of course, afraid. He was affected by the wonders of the Supreme Lord. The immediate context is wonder; his natural loving friendship was overwhelmed by wonder, and thus he reacted in this way.
Bg
11.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac
PaXYaaiMa deva&STav dev dehe
Sava|STaQaa >aUTaivXaezSaºaNa( )
b]øa<aMaqXa& k-Mal/aSaNaSQa‚
Ma*zq&ê SavaRNaurGaa&ê idVYaaNa(
)) 15 ))
arjuna
uväca
paçyämi deväàs tava deva dehe
sarväàs tathä bhüta-viçeña-saìghän
brahmäëam éçaà kamaläsana-stham
åñéàç ca sarvän uragäàç ca divyän
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna
said; paçyämi—I see; devän—all
the demigods; tava—Your; deva—O
Lord; dehe—in the body; sarvän—all;
tathä—also; bhüta—living
entities; viçeña-saìghän—specifically assembled; brahmäëam—Lord Brahmä; éçam—Lord
Çiva; kamala-äsana-stham—sitting on the lotus
flower; åñén—great sages; ca—also;
sarvän—all; uragän—serpents;
ca—also; divyän—divine.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said: My dear Lord Kåñëa, I see assembled together in Your
body all the demigods and various other living entities. I see Brahmä sitting
on the lotus flower as well as Lord Çiva and many sages and divine serpents.
PURPORT
Arjuna sees everything in the universe; therefore he sees Brahmä,
who is the first creature in the universe, and the celestial serpent upon which
the Garbhodakaçäyé Viñëu lies in the lower regions of the universe. This snake
bed is called Väsuki. There are also other snakes known as Väsuki. Arjuna can
see from the Garbhodakaçäyé Viñëu up to the topmost part of the universe on the
lotus-flower planet where Brahmä, the first creature of the universe, resides.
That means that from the beginning to the end, everything could be seen by
Arjuna sitting in one place on his chariot. This was possible by the grace of
the Supreme Lord, Kåñëa.
Bg
11.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
ANaek-bahUdrv£-Nae}a&
PaXYaaiMa Tva& SavRTaae_NaNTaæPaMa(
)
NaaNTa& Na MaDYa& Na PauNaSTavaid&
PaXYaaiMa ivìeìr ivìæPa )) 16 ))
aneka-bähüdara-vaktra-netraà
paçyämi tväà sarvato ’nanta-rüpam
näntaà na madhyaà na punas tavädià
paçyämi viçveçvara viçva-rüpa
aneka—many; bähü—arms; udara—bellies;
vaktra—mouths; netram—eyes;
paçyämi—I see; tväm—unto
You; sarvataù—from all sides; ananta-rüpam—unlimited form; na
antam—there is no end; na madhyam—there is
no middle; na punaù—nor again; tava—Your; ädim—beginning;
paçyämi—I see; viçveçvara—O
Lord of the universe; viñva-rüpa—in the form of
the universe.
TRANSLATION
O Lord of the universe, I see in Your universal body many, many
forms—bellies, mouths, eyes—expanded without limit. There is no end, there is
no beginning, and there is no middle to all this.
PURPORT
Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead and is unlimited; thus
through Him everything could be seen.
Bg
11.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
ik-rqi$=Na&
GaidNa& ci§-<a& c
TaeJaaeraiXa& SavRTaae dqiáMaNTaMa(
)
PaXYaaiMa Tva& duiNaRrq+Ya& SaMaNTaa‚
ÕqáaNal/akR-ÛuiTaMaPa[MaeYaMa( )) 17 ))
kiréöinaà gadinaà cakriëaà ca
tejo-räçià sarvato déptimantam
paçyämi tväà durnirékñyaà samantäd
déptänalärka-dyutim aprameyam
kiréöinam—with
helmets; gadinam—with maces; cakriëam—with discs; ca—and;
tejoräçim—effulgence; sarvataù—all
sides; déptimantam—glowing; pasyämi—I see; tväm—You; durnirékñyam—difficult to see; samantät—spreading;
dépta-anala—blazing fire; arka—sun;
dyutim—sunshine; aprameyam—immeasurable.
TRANSLATION
Your form, adorned with various crowns, clubs and discs, is
difficult to see because of its glaring effulgence, which is fiery and
immeasurable like the sun.
Bg
11.18
TEXT
18
TEXT
TvMa+ar&
ParMa& veidTaVYa&
TvMaSYa ivìSYa Par& iNaDaaNaMa( )
TvMaVYaYa" XaaìTaDaMaRGaaeáa
SaNaaTaNaSTv& Pauåzae MaTaae Mae ))
18 ))
tvam akñaraà paramaà veditavyaà
tvam asya viçvasya paraà nidhänam
tvam avyayaù çäçvata-dharma-goptä
sanätanas tvaà puruño mato me
tvam—You; akñaram—inexhaustible; paramam—supreme;
veditavyam—to be understood; tvam—You; asya—of this; viçvasya—of the universe; param—supreme;
nidhänam—basis; tvam—You
are; avyayaù—inexhaustible; çäçvata-dharma-goptä—maintainer of the eternal
religion; sanätanaù—eternal; tvam—You; puruñaù—Supreme
Personality; mataù me—is my
opinion.
TRANSLATION
You are the supreme primal objective; You are the best in all the
universes; You are inexhaustible, and You are the oldest; You are the
maintainer of religion, the eternal Personality of Godhead.
Bg
11.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
ANaaidMaDYaaNTaMaNaNTavqYaR‚
MaNaNTabahu& XaiXaSaUYaRNae}aMa( )
PaXYaaiMa Tva& dqáhuTaaXav£&-
SvTaeJaSaa ivìiMad& TaPaNTaMa( )) 19
))
anädi-madhyäntam ananta-véryam
ananta-bähuà çaçi-sürya-netram
paçyämi tväà dépta-hutäça-vaktraà
sva-tejasä viçvam idaà tapantam
anädi—without
beginning; madhya—without middle; antam—without end; ananta—unlimited;
véryam—glorious; ananta—unlimited;
bähum—arms; çaçi—moon;
sürya—sun; netram—eyes;
paçyämi—I see; tväm—You;
dépta—blazing; hutäça-vaktram—fire
coming out of Your mouth; sva-tejasä—by Your; viçvam—this universe; idam—this;
tapantam—heating.
TRANSLATION
You are the origin without beginning, middle or end. You have
numberless arms, and the sun and moon are among Your great unlimited eyes. By
Your own radiance You are heating this entire universe.
PURPORT
There is no limit to the extent of the six opulences of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. Here and in many other places there is
repetition, but according to the scriptures, repetition of the glories of Kåñëa
is not a literary weakness. It is said that at a time of bewilderment or wonder
or of great ecstasy, statements are repeated over and over. That is not a flaw.
Bg
11.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
ÛavaPa*iQaVYaaeirdMaNTar&
ih
VYaaá& TvYaEke-Na idXaê SavaR"
)
d*îad(>auTa& æPaMauGa]& Taved&
l/aek-}aYa& Pa[VYaiQaTa&
MahaTMaNa( )) 20 ))
dyäv ä-påthivyor idam antaraà hi
vyäptaà tvayaikena diçaç ca sarväù
dåñövädbhutaà rüpam ugraà tavedaà
loka-trayaà pravyathitaà mahätman
dyau—in outer
space; äpåthivyoù—of the earth; idam—this; antaram—in
between; hi—certainly; vyäptam—pervaded;
tvayä—by You; ekena—by
one; diçaù—directions; ca—and;
sarväù—all; dåñövä—by
seeing; adbhutam—wonderful; rüpam—form; ugram—terrible;
tava—Your; idam—this;
loka—planetary system; trayam—three;
pravyathitam—perturbed; mahätman—O
great one.
TRANSLATION
Although You are one, You are spread throughout the sky and the
planets and all space between. O great one, as I behold this terrible form, I
see that all the planetary systems are perplexed.
PURPORT
Dyäv äpåthivyoù (the space
between heaven and earth) and lokatrayam (three
worlds) are significant words in this verse because it appears that not only
Arjuna saw this universal form of the Lord, but others in other planetary
systems also saw it. The vision was not a dream. All who were spiritually awake
with the divine vision saw it.
Bg
11.21
TEXT
21
TEXT
AMaq ih Tva&
SaurSaºa ivXaiNTa
ke-icÙqTaa" Pa[aÅl/Yaae
Ga*<aiNTa )
SvSTaqTYau¤-a MahizRiSaÖSaºa"
STauviNTa Tva& STauiTai>a"
PauZk-l/ai>a" )) 21 ))
amé hi tväà sura-saìghä viçanti
kecid bhétäù präïjalayo gåëanti
svastéty uktvä maharñi-siddha-saìghäù
stuvanti tväà stutibhiù puñkaläbhiù
amé—all those; hi—certainly; tväm—unto
You; sura-saìghäù—groups of demigods; viçanti—entering; kecit—some
of them; bhétäù—out of fear; präïjalayaù—with folded hands; gåëanti—offering
prayers unto; svasti—all peace; iti—thus; uktvä—speaking
like that; maharñi—great sages; siddha-saìghäù—perfect sages; stuvanti—singing
hymns; tväm—unto You; stutibhiù—with
prayers; puñkaläbhiù—Vedic hymns.
TRANSLATION
All the demigods are surrendering and entering into You. They are
very much afraid, and with folded hands they are singing the Vedic hymns.
PURPORT
The demigods in all the planetary systems feared the terrific
manifestation of the universal form and its glowing effulgence and so prayed
for protection.
Bg
11.22
TEXT
22
TEXT
åd]aidTYaa
vSavae Yae c SaaDYaa
ivìe_iìNaaE MaåTaêaeZMaPaaê )
GaNDavRYa+aaSauriSaÖSaºa
vq+aNTae Tva& iviSMaTaaêEv SaveR ))
22 ))
rudrädityä vasavo ye ca sädhyä
viçve ’çvinau marutaç coñmapäç ca
gandharva-yakñäsura-siddha-saìghä
vékñante tväà vismitäç caiva sarve
rudra—manifestations
of Lord Çiva; ädityäù—the Ädityas; vasavaù—the Vasus; ye—all
those; ca—and; sädhyäù—the
Sädhyas; viçve—the Viçvadevas; açvinau—the Açvinékumäras; marutaù—the
Maruts; ca—and; uñmapäù—the
forefathers; ca—and; gandharva—the
Gandharvas; yakña—the Yakñas; asura-siddha—the demons and the perfected demigods; saìghäù—assemblies; vékñante—are
seeing; tväm—You;
vismitäù—in wonder; ca—also; eva—certainly; sarve—all.
TRANSLATION
The different manifestations of Lord Çiva, the Ädityas, the Vasus,
the Sädhyas, the Viçvadevas, the two Açvins, the Märuts, the forefathers and
the Gandharvas, the Yakñas, Asuras, and all perfected demigods are beholding
You in wonder.
Bg
11.23
TEXT
23
TEXT
æPa& Mahtae
bhuv£-Nae}a&
Mahabahae bhubahUåPaadMa( )
bhUdr& bhud&í\ak-ral&/
d*îa l/aek-a" Pa[VYaiQaTaaSTaQaahMa(
)) 23 ))
rüpaà mahat te bahu-vaktra-netraà
mahä-bäho bahu-bähüru-pädam
bahüdaraà bahu-daàñörä-karälaà
dåñövä lokäù pravyathitäs tathäham
rüpam—form; mahat—very great; te—of
You; bahu—many; vaktra—faces;
netram—eyes; mahä-bäho—O
mighty-armed one; bahu—many; bähu—arms; üru—thighs; pädam—legs; bahu-udaram—many
bellies; babu-daàñörä—many teeth; karälam—horrible; dåñövä—seeing;
lokäù—all the planets; pravyathitäù—perturbed;
tathä—similarly; aham—I.
TRANSLATION
O mighty-armed one, all the planets with their demigods are
disturbed at seeing Your many faces, eyes, arms, bellies and legs and Your
terrible teeth, and as they are disturbed, so am I.
Bg
11.24
TEXT
24
TEXT
Na>a"SPa*Xa&
dqáMaNaek-v<a|
VYaataaNaNa& dqáivXaal/Nae}aMa( )
d*îa ih Tva& Pa[VYaiQaTaaNTaraTMaa
Da*iTa& Na ivNdaiMa XaMa& c
ivZ<aae )) 24 ))
nabhaù-spåçaà déptam aneka-varëaà
vyättänanaà dépta-viçäla-netram
dåñövä hi tväà pravyathitäntar-ätmä
dhåtià na vindämi çamaà ca viñëo
nabhaù spåçam—touching the
sky; déptam—glowing; aneka—many;
varëam—color; vyättä—open;
änanam—mouth; dépta—glowing;
viçäla—very great; netram—eyes;
dåñövä—by seeing; hi—certainly;
tväm—You; pravyathitä—perturbed;
antaù—within; ätmä—soul;
dhåtim—steadiness; na—no;
vindämi—and have; çamam—mental
tranquility; ca—also; viñëo—O
Lord Viñëu.
TRANSLATION
O all-pervading Viñëu, I can no longer maintain my equilibrium.
Seeing Your radiant colors fill the skies and beholding Your eyes and mouths, I
am afraid.
Bg
11.25
TEXT
25
TEXT
d&í\ak-ral/aiNa
c Tae Mau%aiNa
d*îEv k-al/aNal/Saià>aaiNa )
idXaae Na JaaNae Na l/>ae c XaMaR
Pa[Saqd deveXa JaGaiàvaSa )) 25 ))
daàñörä-karäläni ca te mukhäni
dåñövaiva kälänala-sannibhäni
diço na jäne na labhe ca çarma
praséda deveça jagan-niväsa
daàñörä—teeth; karäläni—like that; ca—also;
te—Your; mukhäni—faces;
dåñövä—seeing; eva—thus;
kälänala—the fire of death; sannibhäni—as if blazing; diçaù—directions;
na jäne—do not know; na
labhe—nor obtain; ca çarma—and grace; praséda—be pleased; deveça—O
Lord of all lords; jagat-niväsa—refuge of the
worlds.
TRANSLATION
O Lord of lords, O refuge of the worlds, please be gracious to me.
I cannot keep my balance seeing thus Your blazing deathlike faces and awful
teeth. In all directions I am bewildered.
Bg
11.26, Bg 11.27, Bg 11.26-27
TEXTS
26–27
TEXT
AMaq c Tva&
Da*Taraí\SYa Pau}aa" SaveR SahEvaviNaPaal/SaºE" )
>aqZMaae d]ae<a" SaUTaPau}aSTaQaaSaaE SahaSMadqYaEriPa
YaaeDaMau:YaE" )) 26 ))
v£-ai<a Tae TvrMaa<aa ivXaiNTa d&í\ak-ral/aiNa >aYaaNak-aiNa )
ke-iciÜl/Gana dXaNaaNTarezu SaNd*XYaNTae cUi<aRTaEåtaMaa®E" )) 27 ))
amé ca tväà dhåtaräñörasya puträù
sarve sahaivävani-päla-saìghaiù
bhéñmo droëaù süta-putras tathäsau
sahäsmadéyair api yodha-mukhyaiù
vakträëi te tvaramäëä viçanti
daàñörä-karäläni bhayänakäni
kecid vilagnä daçanäntareñu
sandåçyante cürëitair uttamäìgaiù
amé—all those; ca—also; tväm—You; dhåtaräñöasya—of Dhåtaräñöra; puträù—sons;
sarva—all; saha eva—along
with; avanipäla—warrior kings; saìghaiù—with the groups; bhéñmaù—Bhéñmadeva;
droëaù—Droëäcärya; süta-putraù—Karëa;
tathä—also; asau—that;
saha—with; asmadéyaiù—our;
api—also; yodha-mukhyaiù—chief
among the warriors; vakträëi—mouths; te—Your; tvaramäëäù—fearful;
viçanti—entering; daàñörä—teeth;
karäläni—terrible; bhayänakäni—very
fearful; kecit—some of them; vilagnäù—being attacked; daçanäntareñu—between
the teeth; sandåçyante—being seen; cürëitaiù—smashed; uttama-aìgaiù—by
the head.
TRANSLATION
All the sons of Dhåtaräñöra along with their allied kings, and
Bhéñma, Droëa and Karëa, and all our soldiers are rushing into Your mouths,
their heads smashed by Your fearful teeth. I see that some are being crushed
between Your teeth as well.
PURPORT
In a previous verse the Lord promised to show Arjuna things he
would by very interested in seeing. Now Arjuna sees that the leaders of the
opposite party (Bhéñma, Droëa, Karëa and all the sons of Dhåtaräñöra) and their
soldiers and Arjuna’s own soldiers are all being annihilated. This is an
indication that Arjuna will emerge victorious in battle, despite heavy losses
on both sides. It is also mentioned here that Bhéñma, who is supposed to be
unconquerable, will also be smashed. So also Karëa. Not only will the great
warriors of the other party like Bhéñma be smashed, but some of the great
warriors of Arjuna’s side also.
Bg
11.28
TEXT
28
TEXT
YaQaa
NadqNaa& bhvae_MbuveGaa" SaMaud]Maevai>aMau%a d]viNTa )
TaQaa TavaMaq Narl/aek-vqra ivXaiNTa v£-a<Yai>aivJvl/iNTa )) 28 ))
yathä nadénäà bahavo ’mbu-vegäù
samudram eväbhimukhä dravanti
tathä tavämé nara-loka-vérä
viçanti vakträëy abhivijvalanti
yathä—as; nadénäm—of the rivers; bahavaù—many;
ambu-vegäù—waves of the waters; samudram—ocean; eva—certainly;
abhimukhäù—towards; dravanti—gliding;
tathä—similarly; tava—Your;
amé—all those; nara-lokavéräù—the
kings of human society; viçanti—entering; vakträëi—into the mouths; abhivijvalanti—blazing.
TRANSLATION
As the rivers flow into the sea, so all these great warriors enter
Your blazing mouths and perish.
Bg
11.29
TEXT
29
TEXT
YaQaa
Pa[dqá& Jvl/Na& PaTa®a ivXaiNTa NaaXaaYa SaMa*ÖveGaa" )
TaQaEv NaaXaaYa ivXaiNTa l/aek-a‚ STavaiPa v£-ai<a SaMa*ÖveGaa" )) 29
))
yathä pradéptaà jvalanaà pataìgä
viçanti näçäya samåddha-vegäù
tathaiva näçäya viçanti lokäs
taväpi vakträëi samåddha-vegäù
yathä—as; pradéptam—blazing; jvalanam—fire;
pataìgäù—moths; viçanti—enters;
näçäya—destruction; samåddha—full; vegäù—speed; tathä eva—similarly;
näçäya—for destruction; viçanti—entering;
lokäù—all people. tava—unto
You; api—also; vakträëi—in
the mouths; samåddha-vegäù—with full speed.
TRANSLATION
I see all people rushing with full speed into Your mouths as moths
dash into a blazing fire.
Bg
11.30
TEXT
30
TEXT
le/il/ùSae
Ga]SaMaaNa" SaMaNTaa‚ çaek-aNSaMaGa]aNvdNaEJvRl/iÙ" )
TaeJaaei>araPaUYaR JaGaTSaMaGa]& >aaSaSTavaeGa]a" Pa[TaPaiNTa
ivZ<aae )) 30 ))
lelihyase grasamänaù samantäl
lokän samagrän vadanair jvaladbhiù
tejobhir äpürya jagat samagraà
bhäsas tavogräù pratapanti viñëo
lelihyase—licking; grasamänaù—devouring; samantät—from
all directions; lokän—people; samagrän—completely; vadanaiù—by
the mouth; jvaladbhiù—with blazing; tejobhiù—by effulgence; äpürya—covering;
jagat—the universe; samagram—all;
bhäsaù—illuminating; tava—Your;
ugräù—terrible; pratapanti—scorching;
viñëo—O all-pervading Lord.
TRANSLATION
O Viñëu, I see You devouring all people in Your flaming mouths and
covering the universe with Your immeasurable rays. Scorching the worlds, You
are manifest.
Bg
11.31
TEXT
31
TEXT
Aa:Yaaih Mae
k-ae >avaNauGa]æPaae NaMaae_STau Tae devvr Pa[Saqd )
ivjaTauiMaC^aiMa >avNTaMaaÛ& Na ih Pa[JaaNaaiMa Tav Pa[v*itaMa( )) 31 ))
äkhyähi me ko bhavän ugra-rüpo
namo ’stu te deva-vara praséda
vijïätum icchämi bhavantam ädyaà
na hi prajänämi tava pravåttim
äkhyähi—please explain; me—unto
me; kaù—who; bhavän—You;
ugra-rüpaù—fierce form; namaù
astu—obeisances; te—unto You; deva-vara—the great one amongst the demigods; praséda—be gracious; vijïätum—just
to know; icchämi—I wish; bhavantam—You;
ädyam—the original; na—never;
hi—certainly; prajänämi—do
I know; tava—Your; pravåttim—mission.
TRANSLATION
O Lord of lords, so fierce of form, please tell me who You are. I
offer my obeisances unto You; please be gracious to me. I do not know what Your
mission is, and I desire to hear of it.
Bg
11.32
TEXT
32
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
)
k-al/ae_iSMa l/aek-+aYak*-TPa[v*Öae l/aek-aNSaMaahTauRiMah Pa[v*ta" )
‰Tae_iPa Tva& Na >aivZYaiNTa SaveR Yae_viSQaTaa" Pa[TYaNaqke-zu
YaaeDaa" )) 32 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
kälo ’smi loka-kñaya-kåt pravåddho
lokän samähartum iha pravåttaù
åte ’pi tväà na bhaviñyanti sarve
ye ’vasthitäù pratyanékeñu yodhäù
çré bhagavän uväca—the
Personality of Godhead said; kälaù—time; asmi—I am; loka—the
worlds; kñaya-kåt—destroyer; pravåddhaù—to engage; lokän—all
people; samähartum—to destroy; iha—in this world; pravåttaù—to
engage; åte api—without
even; tväm—you; na—never;
bhaviñyanti—will be; sarve—all;
ye—who; avasthitäù—situated;
pratyanékeñu—on the opposite side; yodhäù—the soldiers.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: Time I am, destroyer of the worlds, and I
have come to engage all people. With the exception of you [the Päëòavas], all
the soldiers here on both sides will be slain.
PURPORT
Although Arjuna knew that Kåñëa was his friend and the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, he was nonetheless puzzled by the various forms
exhibited by Kåñëa. Therefore he asked further about the actual mission of this
devastating force. It is written in the Vedas that
the Supreme Truth destroys everything, even Brahmä. Yasya
brahme ca kñatram ca ubhe bhavata odanaù/måtyur yasyopasecanaà ka itthä veda
yatra saù. Eventually all the brähmaëas,
kñatriyas and everyone else are devoured by the Supreme. This form of
the Supreme Lord is an all-devouring giant, and here Kåñëa presents Himself in
that form of all-devouring time. Except for a few Päëòavas, everyone who was
present in that battlefield would be devoured by Him.
Arjuna was not in favor of the fight, and he thought it was better not to fight; then there would be no frustration. In reply, the Lord is saying that even if he did not fight, every one of them would be destroyed, for that is His plan. If he stopped fighting, they would die in another way. Death cannot be checked, even if he did not fight. In fact, they were already dead. Time is destruction, and all manifestations are to be vanquished by the desire of the Supreme Lord. That is the law of nature.
Bg
11.33
TEXT
33
TEXT
TaSMaatvMauitaï
YaXaae l/>aSv iJaTva Xa}aUN>au&+v raJYa& SaMa*ÖMa( )
MaYaEvETae iNahTaa" PaUvRMaev iNaiMataMaa}a& >av SaVYaSaaicNa( ))
33 ))
tasmät tvam uttiñöha yaço labhasva
jitvä çatrün bhuìkñva räjyaà samåddham
mayaivaite nihatäù pürvam eva
nimitta-mätraà bhava savya-säcin
tasmät—therefore; tväm—you; uttiñöha—get
up; yaçaù—fame; labhasva—gain;
jitvä—conquering; çatrün—enemies;
bhuìkñva—enjoy; räjyam—kingdom;
samåddham—flourishing; mayä—by
Me; eva—certainly; ete—all
these; nihatäù—already killed; pürvam eva—by previous elements; nimitta-mätram—just become the cause; bhava—become; savyasäcin—O
Savyasäcin.
TRANSLATION
Therefore get up and prepare to fight. After conquering your
enemies you will enjoy a flourishing kingdom. They are already put to death by
My arrangement, and you, O Savyasäcin, can be but an instmment in the fight.
PURPORT
Savyasäcin refers to
one who can shoot arrows very expertly in the field; thus Arjuna is addressed
as an expert warrior capable of delivering arrows to kill his enemies. “Just
become an instrument”: nimitta-mätram. This word
is also very significant. The whole world is moving according to the plan of
the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Foolish persons who do not have sufficient
knowledge think that nature is moving without a plan and all manifestations are
but accidental formations. There are many so-called scientists who suggest that
perhaps it was like this, or maybe like that, but there is no question of
“perhaps” and “maybe.” There is a specific plan being carried out in this
material world. What is this plan? This cosmic manifestation is a chance for
the conditioned souls to go back to Godhead, back to home. As long they have
the domineering mentality which makes them try to lord it over material nature,
they are conditioned. But anyone who can understand the plan of the Supreme
Lord and cultivate Kåñëa consciousness is most intelligent. The creation and
destruction of the cosmic manifestation are under the superior guidance of God.
Thus the Battle of Kurukñetra was fought according to the plan of God. Arjuna
was refusing to fight, but he was told that he should fight and at the same
time desire the Supreme Lord. Then he would be happy. If one is in full Kåñëa
consciousness and if his life is devoted to His transcendental service, he is perfect.
Bg
11.34
TEXT
34
TEXT
d]ae<a& c
>aqZMa& c JaYad]Qa& c k-<a| TaQaaNYaaNaiPa YaaeDavqraNa( )
MaYaa hTaa&STv& Jaih MaaVYaiQaïa YauDYaSv JaeTaaiSa r<ae SaPaÒaNa(
)) 34 ))
droëaà ca bhéñmaà ca jayadrathaà ca
karëaà tathänyän api yodha-vérän
mayä hatäàs tvaà jahi mä vyathiñöhä
yudhyasva jetäsi raëe sapatnän
droëam ca—also Droëa; bhéñmam ca—also Bhéñma; jayadratham
ca—also Jayadratha; karëam—also Karëa; tathä—also; anyän—others;
api—certainly; yodha-vérän—great
warriors; mayä—by Me; hatän—already
killed; tvam—you; jahi—become
victorious; mä—never; vyathiñöhäù—be
disturbed; yudhyasva—just fight; jetäsi—just conquer; raëe—in
the fight; sapatnän—enemies.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: All the great warriors—Droëa, Bhéñma,
Jayadratha, Karëa—are already destroyed. Simply fight, and you will vanquish
your enemies.
PURPORT
Every plan is made by the Supreme Personality of Godhead, but He
is so kind and merciful to His devotees that He wants to give the credit to His
devotees who carry out His plan according to His desire. Life should therefore
move in such a way that everyone acts in Kåñëa consciousness and understands
the Supreme Personality of Godhead through the medium of a spiritual master.
The plans of the Supreme Personality of Godhead are understood by His mercy,
and the plans of the devotees are as good as His plans. One should follow such
plans and be victorious in the struggle for existence.
Bg
11.35
TEXT
35
TEXT
SaÅYa ovac )
WTaC^]uuTva vcNa& ke-XavSYa k*-TaaÅil/veRPaMaaNa" ik-rqTaq )
NaMaSk*-Tva >aUYa Wvah k*-Z<a& SaGaÓd& >aqTa>aqTa"
Pa[<aMYa )) 35 ))
saïjaya
uväca
etac chrutvä vacanaà keçavasya
kåtäïjalir vepamänaù kirété
namaskåtvä bhüya eväha kåñëaà
sa-gadgadaà bhéta-bhétaù praëamya
saïjayaù uväca—Saïjaya
said; etat—thus; çrutvä—hearing;
vacanam—speech; keçavasya—of
Kåñëa; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; vepamänaù—trembling; kirété—Arjuna;
namaskåtvä—offering obeisances; bhüyaù—again; eva—also; äha kåñëam—said unto
Kåñëa; sa-gadgadam—faltering; bhéta-bhétaù—fearful; praëamya—offering
obeisances.
TRANSLATION
Saïjaya said to Dhåtaräñöra: O King, after hearing these words
from the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Arjuna trembled, fearfully offered
obeisances with folded hands and began, falteringly, to speak as follows:
PURPORT
As we have already explained, because of the situation created by
the universal form of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Arjuna became
bewildered in wonder; thus he began to offer his respectful obeisances to Kåñëa
again and again, and with faltering voice he began to pray, not as a friend,
but as a devotee in wonder.
Bg
11.36
TEXT
36
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac )
SQaaNae ôzqke-Xa Tav Pa[k-ITYaaR JaGaTPa[ôZYaTYaNaurJYaTae c )
r+aa&iSa >aqTaaiNa idXaae d]viNTa SaveR NaMaSYaiNTa c iSaÖSaºa" ))
36 ))
arjuna
uväca
sthäne håñékeça tava prakértyä
jagat prahåñyaty anurajyate ca
rakñäàsi bhétäni diço dravanti
sarve namasyanti ca siddha-saìghäù
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna said;
sthäne—rightly; håñékeça—O
master of all senses; tava—Your; prakértya—glories; jagat—the
entire world; prahåñyati—rejoicing; anurajyate—becoming attached; rakñäàsi—the
demons; bhétäni—out of fear; diçaù—directions; dravanti—fleeing;
sarve—all; namasyanti—offering
respect; ca—also; siddha-saìghäù—the
perfect human beings.
TRANSLATION
O Håñékeça, the world becomes joyful upon hearing Your name and
thus everyone becomes attached to You. Although the perfected beings offer You
their respectful homage, the demons are afraid, and they flee here and there.
All this is rightly done.
PURPORT
Arjuna, after hearing from Kåñëa about the outcome of the Battle
of Kurukñetra, became an enlightened devotee of the Supreme Lord. He admitted
that everything done by Kåñëa is quite fit. Arjuna confirmed that Kåñëa is the
maintainer and the object of worship for the devotees and the destroyer of the
undesirables. His actions are equally good for all. Arjuna understood herein
that when the Battle of Kurukñetra was being concluded, in outer space there
were present many demigods, siddhas, and the
intelligentia of the higher planets, and they were observing the fight because
Kåñëa was present there. When Arjuna saw the universal form of the Lord, the
demigods took pleasure in it, but others, who were demons and atheists, could
not stand it when the Lord was praised. Out of their natural fear of the
devastating form of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, they fled. Kåñëa’s
treatment of the devotees and the atheists is praised by Arjuna. In all cases a
devotee glorifies the Lord because he knows that whatever He does is good for
all.
Bg
11.37
TEXT
37
TEXT
k-SMaaÀ Tae Na NaMaerNMahaTMaNa(
GarqYaSae b]ø<aae_PYaaidk-}aeR )
ANaNTa deveXa JaGaiàvaSa TvMa+ar& SadSataTPar& YaTa( )) 37 ))
kasmäc ca te na nameran mahätman
garéyase brahmaëo ’py ädi-kartre
ananta deveça jagan-niväsa
tvam akñaraà sad-asat tat paraà yat
kasmät—why; ca—also; te—unto You; na—not; nameran—offer
proper obeisances; mahätman—O great one; garéyase—You are better than; brahmaëaù—Brahmä;
api—although; ädi-kartre—the
supreme creator; ananta—unlimited; deveça—God of the gods; jagat-niväsa—O
refuge of the universe; tvam—You are; akñaram—imperishable; sat-asat—cause
and effect; tat-param—transcendental; yat—because.
TRANSLATION
O great one, who stands above even Brahmä, You are the original
master. Why should they not offer their homage up to You, O limitless one? O
refuge of the universe, You are the invincible source, the cause of all causes,
transcendental to this material manifestation.
PURPORT
By this offering of obeisances, Arjuna indicates that Kåñëa is
worshipable by everyone. He is all-pervading, and He is the Soul of every soul.
Arjuna is addressing Kåñëa as mahätmä, which
means that He is most magnanimous and unlimited. Ananta indicates
that there is nothing which is not covered by the influence and energy of the
Supreme Lord, and deveça means that He is the
controller of all demigods and is above them all. He is the center of the whole
universe. Arjuna also thought that it was fitting that all the perfect living
entities and all powerful demigods offer their respectful obeisances unto Him
because no one is greater than Him. He especially mentions that Kåñëa is
greater than Brahmä because Brahmä is created by Him. Brahmä is born out of the
lotus stem grown from the navel abdomen of Garbhodakaçäyé Viñëu, who is Kåñëa’s
plenary expansion; therefore Brahmä and Lord Çiva, who is born of Brahmä, and
all other demigods must offer their respectful obeisances. Thus the Lord is
respected by Lord Çiva and Brahmä and similar other demigods. The word akñaram is very
significant because this material creation is subject to destruction, but the
Lord is above this material creation. He is the cause of all causes, and being
so, He is superior to all the conditioned souls within this material nature as
well as the material cosmic manifestation itself. He is therefore the all-great
Supreme.
Bg
11.38
TEXT
38
TEXT
TvMaaiddev"
Pauåz" Paura<a‚ STvMaSYa ivìSYa Par& iNaDaaNaMa( )
vetaaiSa veÛ& c Par& c DaaMa TvYaa TaTa& ivìMaNaNTaæPa )) 38 ))
tvam ädi-devaù puruñaù puräëas
tvam asya viçvasya paraà nidhänam
vettäsi vedyaà ca paraà ca dhäma
tvayä tataà viçvam ananta-rüpa
tvam—You; ädi-devaù—the original Supreme God; puruñaù—personality; puräëaù—old;
tvam—You; asya—this;
viçvasya—universe; param—transcendental;
nidhänam—refuge; vettä—knower;
asi—You are; vedyam ca—and
the knowable; param ca—and transcendental; dhäma—refuge; tvayä—by
You; tatam—pervaded; viçvam—universe;
ananta-rüpa—unlimited form.
TRANSLATION
You are the original Personality, the Godhead. You are the only
sanctuary of this manifested cosmic world. You know everything, and You are all
that is knowable. You are above the material modes. O limitless form! This
whole cosmic manifestation is pervaded by You!
PURPORT
Everything is resting on the Supreme Personality of Godhead;
therefore He is the ultimate rest. Nidhänam means
that everything, even the Brahman effulgence, rests on the Supreme Personality
of Godhead Kåñëa. He is the knower of everything that is happening in this
world, and if knowledge has any end, He is the end of all knowledge; therefore
He is the known and the knowable. He is the object of knowledge because He is
all-pervading. Because He is the cause in the spiritual world, He is
transcendental. He is also the chief personality in the transcendental world.
Bg
11.39
TEXT
39
TEXT
vaYauYaRMaae_iGanvRå<a"
XaXaaª" Pa[JaaPaiTaSTv& Pa[iPaTaaMahê )
NaMaae NaMaSTae_STau Sahók*-Tv" PauNaê >aUYaae_iPa NaMaae NaMaSTae ))
39 ))
väyur yamo ’gnir varuëaù çaçäìkaù
prajäpatis tvaà prapitämahaç ca
namo namas te ’stu sahasra-kåtvaù
punaç ca bhüyo ’pi namo namas te
väyuù—air; yamaù—controller; agniù—fire;
varuëaù—water; çaçäìkaù—moon;
prajäpatiù—Brahmä; tvam—You;
prapitämahaù—grandfather; ca—also;
namaù—offering respects; namaù
te—again I offer my respects unto You; astu—are
being; sahasra-kåtvaù—a thousand times; punaù ca—and again; bhüyaù—again;
api—also; namaù—offer
my respects; namaù te—offering my respects unto
You.
TRANSLATION
You are air, fire, water, and You are the moon! You are the
supreme controller and the grandfather. Thus I offer my respectful obeisances
unto You a thousand times, and again and yet again!
PURPORT
The Lord is addressed here as air because the air is the most
important representation of all the demigods, being all-pervasive. Arjuna also
addresses Kåñëa as the grandfather because He is the father of Brahmä, the
first living creature in the universe.
Bg
11.40
TEXT
40
TEXT
NaMa"
PaurSTaadQa Pa*ïTaSTae NaMaae_STau Tae SavRTa Wv SavR )
ANaNTavqYaaRiMaTaiv§-MaSTv& Sav| SaMaaPanaeiz TaTaae_iSa SavR" )) 40
))
namaù purastäd atha påñöhatas te
namo ’stu te sarvata eva sarva
ananta-véryämita-vikramas tvaà
sarvaà samäpnoñi tato ’si sarvaù
namaù—offering
obeisances; purastät—from the front; atha—also; påñöhataù—from
behind; te—You; namaù astu—offer
my respects; te—unto You; sarvataù—from
all sides; eva sarva—because You are everything; ananta-vérya—unlimited potency; amita-vikramaù—unlimited
force; tvam—You; sarvam—everything;
samäpnoñi—cover; tataù
asi—therefore You are; sarvaù—everything.
TRANSLATION
Obeisances from the front, from behind and from all sides! O
unbounded power, You are the master of limitless, might! You are all-pervading,
and thus You are everything!
PURPORT
Out of loving ecstasy for Kåñëa, his friend, Arjuna is offering
his respects from all sides. He is accepting that He is the master of all
potencies and all prowess and far superior to all the great warriors assembled
on the battlefield. It is said in the Viñëu Puräëa: yo ’yaà tavägato deva-samépaà devatä-gaëaù sa tvam eva
jagat-srañöä yataù sarva-gato bhavän. “Whoever comes before You, be he a
demigod, is created by You, O Supreme Personality of Godhead.”
Bg
11.41, Bg 11.42, Bg 11.41-42
TEXTS
41–42
TEXT
Sa%eiTa MaTva
Pa[Sa>a& Yadu¢&- he k*-Z<a he Yaadv he Sa%eiTa )
AJaaNaTaa MaihMaaNa& Taved& MaYaa Pa[MaadaTPa[<aYaeNa vaiPa )) 41 ))
YaÀavhaSaaQaRMaSaTk*-Taae_iSa ivharXaYYaaSaNa>aaeJaNaezu )
Wk-ae_QavaPYaCYauTa TaTSaMa+a& TaT+aaMaYae TvaMahMaPa[MaeYaMa( )) 42 ))
sakheti matvä prasabhaà yad uktaà
he kåñëa he yädava he sakheti
ajänatä mahimänaà tavedaà
mayä pramädät praëayena väpi
yac cävahäsärtham asat-kåto ’si
vihära-çayyäsana-bhojaneñu
eko ’tha väpy acyuta tat-samakñaà
tat kñämaye tväm aham aprameyam
sakhä—friend; iti—thus; matvä—thinking;
prasabham—temporary; yat—whatever;
uktam—said; he krñëa—O Kåñëa; he yädava—O Yädava; he sakhä iti—O my dear friend, ajänatä—without
knowing; mahimänam—glories; tava—Your; idam—this; mayä—by me; pramädät—out
of foolishness; pranayena—out of love; vä api—either; yat—whatever; ca—also; avahäsärtham—for joking; asatkåtaù—dishonor;
asi—have been done; vihära—in
relaxation; çayyä—in joking; äsana—in a resting place; bhojaneñu—or
while eating together; ekaù—alone; athavä—or; api—others; acyuta—O infallible one; tat-samakñam—as
Your competitor; tat—all those; kñämaye—excuse; tväm—You;
aham—I; aprameyam—immeasurable.
TRANSLATION
I have in the past addressed You as “O Kåñëa,” “O Yädava,” “O my
friend,” without knowing Your glories. Please forgive whatever I may have done
in madness or in love. I have dishonored You many times while relaxing or while
lying on the same bed or eating together, sometimes alone and sometimes in
front of many friends. Please excuse me for all my offenses.
PURPORT
Although Kåñëa is manifested before Arjuna in His universal form,
Arjuna remembers his friendly relationship with Kåñëa and is therefore asking
pardon and requesting Him to excuse him for the many informal gestures which
arise out of friendship. He is admitting that formerly he did not know that
Kåñëa could assume such a universal form, although He explained it as his
intimate friend. Arjuna did not know how many times he may have dishonored Him
by addressing Him as “O my friend, O Kåñëa, O Yädava,” etc., without
acknowledging His opulence. But Kåñëa is so kind and merciful that in spite of
such opulence He played with Arjuna as a friend. Such is the transcendental
loving reciprocation between the devotee and the Lord. The relationship between
the living entity and Kåñëa is fixed eternally; it cannot be forgotten, as we
can see from the behavior of Arjuna. Although Arjuna has seen the opulence in
the universal form, he could not forget his friendly relationship with Kåñëa.
Bg
11.43
TEXT
43
TEXT
iPaTaaiSa
l/aek-SYa cracrSYa TvMaSYa PaUJYaê GauåGaRrqYaaNa( )
Na TvTSaMaae_STYa>YaiDak-" ku-Taae_NYaae
l/aek-}aYae_PYaPa[iTaMaPa[>aav )) 43 ))
pitäsi lokasya caräcarasya
tvam asya püjyaç ca gurur garéyän
na tvat-samo ’sty abhyadhikaù kuto ’nyo
loka-traye ’py apratima-prabhäva
pitä—father; asi—You are; lokasya—of
all the world; cara—moving; acarasya—nonmoving; tvam—You
are; asya—of this; püjyaù—worshipable;
ca—also; guruù—master;
garéyän—glorious; na—never;
tvat-samaù—equal to You;
asti—there is; abhyadhikaù—greater; kutaù—how is it possible; anyaù—other;
loka-traye—in three planetary systems; api—also; apratima—immeasurable;
prabhäva—power.
TRANSLATION
You are the father of this complete cosmic manifestation, the
worshipable chief, the spiritual master. No one is equal to You, nor can anyone
be one with You. Within the three worlds, You are immeasurable.
PURPORT
The Lord Kåñëa is worshipable as a father is worshipable for his
son. He is the spiritual master because He originally gave the Vedic
instructions to Brahmä, and presently He is also instructing Bhagavad-gétä to Arjuna; therefore He is the original
spiritual master, and any bona fide spiritual master at the present moment must
be a descendant in the line of disciplic succession stemming from Kåñëa.
Without being a representative of Kåñëa, one cannot become a teacher or
spiritual master of transcendental subject matter.
The Lord is being paid obeisances in all respects. He is of immeasurable greatness. No one can be greater than the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, because no one is equal to or higher than Kåñëa within any manifestation, spiritual or material. Everyone is below Him. No one can excel Him.
The Supreme Lord Kåñëa has senses and a body like the ordinary man, but for Him there is no difference between His senses, body, mind and Himself. Foolish persons who do not know Him perfectly say that Kåñëa is different from His soul, mind, heart and everything else. Kåñëa is absolute; therefore His activities and potencies are supreme. It is also stated that He does not have senses like ours. He can perform all sensual activities; therefore His senses are neither imperfect nor limited. No one can be greater than Him, no one can be equal to Him, and everyone is lower than Him.
Whoever knows His transcendental body, activities and perfection, after quitting his body, returns to Him and doesn’t come back again to this miserable world. Therefore one should know that Kåñëa’s activities are different from others. The best policy is to follow the principles of Kåñëa; that will make one perfect. It is also stated that there is no one who is master of Kåñëa; everyone is His servant. Only Kåñëa is God, and everyone is servant. Everyone is complying with His order. There is no one who can deny His order. Everyone is acting according to His direction, being under His superintendence. As stated in the Brahmä-saàhitä, He is the cause of all causes.
Bg
11.44
TEXT
44
TEXT
TaSMaaTPa[<aMYa
Pa[i<aDaaYa k-aYa& Pa[SaadYae TvaMahMaqXaMaq@yMa( )
iPaTaev Pau}aSYa Sa%ev Sa:Yau" iPa[Ya" iPa[YaaYaahRiSa dev Saae!uMa(
)) 44 ))
tasmät praëamya praëidhäya käyaà
prasädaye tväm aham éçam éòyam
piteva putrasya sakheva sakhyuù
priyaù priyäyärhasi deva soòhum
tasmät—therefore; praëamya—after offering obeisances; praëidhäya—laying down; käyam—body; prasädaye—to beg mercy; tväm—unto
you; aham—I; éçam—unto
the Supreme Lord; éòyam—who is worshipable; pitä iva—like a father; putrasya—of
a son; sakhä iva—like a friend; sakhyuù—of a friend; priyaù—lover;
priyäyäù—of the dearmost; arhasi—You
should; deva—my Lord; soòhum—tolerate.
TRANSLATION
You are the Supreme Lord, to be worshiped by every living being.
Thus I fall down to offer You my respects and ask Your mercy. Please tolerate
the wrongs that I may have done to You and bear with me as a father with his
son, or a friend with his friend, or a lover with his beloved.
PURPORT
Kåñëa’s devotees relate to Kåñëa in various relationships; one
might treat Kåñëa as a son, one might treat Kåñëa as a husband, as a friend, as
a master, etc. Kåñëa and Arjuna are related in friendship. As the father
tolerates, or the husband or master tolerates, so Kåñëa tolerates.
Bg
11.45
TEXT
45
TEXT
Ad*íPaUv|
ôizTaae_iSMa d*îa >aYaeNa c Pa[VYaiQaTa& MaNaae Mae )
Tadev Mae dXaRYa dev æPa& Pa[Saqd deveXa JaGaiàvaSa )) 45 ))
adåñöa-pürvaà håñito ’smi dåñövä
bhayena ca pravyathitaà mano me
tad eva me darçaya deva rüpaà
praséda deveça jagan-niväsa
adåñöa-pürvam—never seen
before; håñitaù—gladdened; asmi—I am; dåñövä—by
seeing; bhayena—out of fear; ca—also; pravyathitam—perturbed;
manaù—mind; me—mine;
tat—therefore; eva—certainly;
me—unto me; darçaya—show;
deva—O Lord; rüpam—the
form; praséda—just be gracious; deveça—O Lord of lords; jagat-niväsa—the
refuge of the universe.
TRANSLATION
After seeing this universal form, which I have never seen before,
I am gladdened, but at the same time my mind is disturbed with fear. Therefore
please bestow Your grace upon me and reveal again Your form as the Personality
of Godhead, O Lord of lords, O abode of the universe.
PURPORT
Arjuna is always in confidence with Kåñëa because he is a very
dear friend, and as a dear friend is gladdened by his friend’s opulence, Arjuna
is very joyful to see that his friend, Kåñëa, is the Supreme Personality of
Godhead and can show such a wonderful universal form. But at the same time,
after seeing that universal form, he is afraid that he has committed so many
offenses to Kåñëa out of his unalloyed friendship. Thus his mind is disturbed
out of fear, although he had no reason to fear. Arjuna therefore is asking
Kåñëa to show His Näräyaëa form because He can assume any form. This universal
form is material and temporary, as the material world is temporary. But in the
Vaikuëöha planets He has His transcendental form with four hands as Näräyaëa.
There are innumerable planets in the spiritual sky, and in each of them Kåñëa
is present by His plenary manifestations of different names. Thus Arjuna
desired to see one of the forms manifest in the Vaikuëöha planets. Of course in
each Vaikuëöha planet the form of Näräyaëa is four-handed, and the four hands
hold different symbols, the conchshell, mace, lotus and disc. According to the
different hands these four things are held in, the Näräyaëas are named. All of
these forms are one and the same to Kåñëa; therefore Arjuna requests to see His
four-handed feature.
Bg
11.46
TEXT
46
TEXT
ik-rqi$=Na&
GaidNa& c§-hSTa‚ iMaC^aiMa Tva& d]íuMah& TaQaEv )
TaeNaEv æPae<a cTau>auRJaeNa Sahóbahae >av ivìMaUTaeR )) 46 ))
kiréöinaà gadinaà cakra-hastam
icchämi tväà drañöum ahaà tathaiva
tenaiva rüpeëa catur-bhujena
sahasra-bäho bhava viçva-mürte
kiréöinam—with helmet;
gadinam—with club; cakra-hastam—disc
in hand; icchämi—I wish; tväm—You; drañöum—to see; aham—I; tathä eva—in that position; tena
eva—by that; rüpeëa—with form; catur-bhujena—four-handed; sahasra-bäho—O
thousand-handed one; bhava—just become; viçva-mürte—O universal form.
TRANSLATION
O universal Lord, I wish to see You in Your four-armed form, with
helmeted head and with club, wheel, conch and lotus flower in Your hands. I
long to see You in that form.
PURPORT
In the Brahmä-saàhitä it is stated that the Lord is eternally situated in hundreds
and thousands of forms, and the main forms are those like Räma, Nåsiàha,
Näräyaëa, etc. There are innumerable forms. But Arjuna knew that Kåñëa is the
original Personality of Godhead assuming His temporary universal form. He is
now asking to see the form of Näräyaëa, a spiritual form. This verse establishes
without any doubt the statement of the Çrémad-Bhägavatam
that Kåñëa is the original Personality of Godhead and all other features
originate from Him. He is not different from His plenary expansions, and He is
God in any of His innumerable forms. In all of these forms He is fresh like a
young man. That is the constant feature of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
One who knows Kåñëa at once becomes free from all contamination of the material
world.
Bg
11.47
TEXT
47
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
)
MaYaa Pa[SaàeNa TavaJauRNaed& æPa& Par& diXaRTaMaaTMaYaaeGaaTa( )
TaeJaaeMaYa& ivìMaNaNTaMaaÛ& YaNMae TvdNYaeNa Na d*íPaUvRMa( )) 47 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
mayä prasannena tavärjunedaà
rüpaà paraà darçitam ätma-yogät
tejo-mayaà viçvam anantam ädyaà
yan me tvad anyena na dåñöa-pürvam
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; mayä—by Me; prasannena—happily; tava—unto
you; arjuna—O Arjuna; idam—this;
rüpam—form; param—transcendental;
darçitam—shown; ätma-yogät—by
My internal potency; tejomayam—full of effulgence;
viçvam—the entire universe; anantam—unlimited; ädyam—original;
yat me—that which is Mine; tvat-anyena—besides you; na
dåñöa-pürvam—no one has previously seen.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: My dear Arjuna, happily do I show you this
universal form within the material world by My internal potency. No one before
you has ever seen this unlimited and glaringly effulgent form.
PURPORT
Arjuna wanted to see the universal form of the Supreme Lord, so
out of His mercy upon His devotee Arjuna, Lord Kåñëa showed His universal form
full of effulgence and opulence. This form was glaring like the sun, and its
many faces were rapidly changing. Kåñëa showed this form just to satisfy the
desire of His friend Arjuna. This form was manifested by Kåñëa through His internal
potency, which is inconceivable by human speculation. No one had seen this
universal form of the Lord before Arjuna, but because the form was shown to
Arjuna, other devotees in the heavenly planets and in other planets in outer
space could also see it. They did not see it before, but because of Arjuna they
were also able to see it. In other words, all the disciplic devotees of the
Lord could see the universal form which was shown to Arjuna by the mercy of
Kåñëa. Someone commented that this form was shown to Duryodhana also when Kåñëa
went to Duryodhana to negotiate for peace. Unfortunately, Duryodhana did not
accept the peace offer, but at that time Kåñëa manifested some of His universal
forms. But those forms are different from this one shown to Arjuna. It is
clearly said that no one has ever seen this form before.
Bg
11.48
TEXT
48
TEXT
Na
vedYajaDYaYaNaENaR daNaE‚ NaR c i§-Yaai>aNaR TaPaaei>aåGa]E" )
Wv&æPa" XaKYa Ah& Na*l/aeke- d]íu& TvdNYaeNa ku-åPa[vqr )) 48
))
na veda-yajïädhyayanair na dänair
na ca kriyäbhir na tapobhir ugraiù
evaà-rüpaù çakya ahaà nå-loke
drañöuà tvad anyena kuru-pravéra
na—never; veda—Vedic study; yajïa—sacrifice;
adhyayanaiù—studying; na
dänaiù—by charity; na—never; ca—also; kriyäbhiù—by
pious activities; na tapobhiù—by serious penances;
ugraiù—severe; evam—thus;
rüpaù—form; çakyaù—can
be seen; aham—I; nåloke—in
this material world; drañöum—to see; tvat—you; anyena—by
another; kuru-pravéra—O best among the Kuru
warriors.
TRANSLATION
O best of the Kuru warriors, no one before you has ever seen this
universal form of Mine, for neither by studying the Vedas, nor by performing
sacrifices, nor by charities or similar activities can this form be seen. Only
you have seen this.
PURPORT
The divine vision in this connection should be clearly understood.
Who can have divine vision? Divine means godly. Unless one attains the status
of divinity as a demigod, he cannot have divine vision. And what is a demigod?
It is stated in the Vedic scriptures that those who are devotees of Lord Viñëu
are demigods. Those who are atheistic, i.e., who do not believe in Viñëu, or
who only recognize the impersonal part of Kåñëa as the Supreme, cannot have the
divine vision. It is not possible to decry Kåñëa and at the same time have the
divine vision. One cannot have the divine vision without becoming divine. In
other words, those who have divine vision can also see like Arjuna.
The Bhagavad-gétä gives the description of the universal form, and this description was unknown to everyone before Arjuna. Now one can have some idea of the viçva-rüpa after this incidence; those who are actually divine can see the universal form of the Lord. But one cannot be divine without being a pure devotee of Kåñëa. The devotees, however, who are actually in the divine nature and who have divine vision, are not very much interested to see the universal form of the Lord. As described in the previous verse, Arjuna desired to see the four-handed form of Lord Kåñëa as Viñëu, and he was actually afraid of the universal form.
In this verse there are some significant words, just like veda-yajïädhya-yanaiù, which refers to studying Vedic literature and the subject matter of sacrificial regulations. Veda refers to all kinds of Vedic literature, namely the four Vedas (Åk, Yajus, Säma and Atharva) and the eighteen Puräëas and Upaniñads, and Vedänta-sütra. One can study these at home or anywhere else. Similarly, there are sütras, Kalpa-sütras and Mémäàsä-sütras, for studying the method of sacrifice. Dänaiù refers to charity which is offered to a suitable party. such as those who are engaged in the transcendental loving service of the Lord, the brähmaëas and the Vaiñëavas. Similarly, pious activities refer to the agni-hotra, etc., the prescribed duties of the different castes. Pious activities and the voluntary acceptance of some bodily pains are called tapasya. So one can perform all these, can accept bodily penances, give charity, study the Vedas, etc., but unless he is a devotee like Arjuna, it is not possible to see that universal form. Those who are impersonalists are also imagining that they are seeing the universal form of the Lord, but from Bhagavad-gétä we understand that the impersonalists are not devotees. Therefore they are unable to see the universal form of the Lord.
There are many persons who create incarnations. They falsely claim an ordinary human to be an incarnation, but this is all foolishness. We should follow the principles of Bhagavad-gétä, otherwise there is no possibility of attaining perfect spiritual knowledge. Although Bhagavad-gétä is considered the preliminary study of the science of God, still it is so perfect that one can distinguish what is what. The followers of a pseudo incarnation may say that they have also seen the transcendental incarnation of God, the universal form, but that is not acceptable because it is clearly stated here that unless one becomes a devotee of Kåñëa, one cannot see the universal form of God. So one first of all has to become a pure devotee of Kåñëa; then he can claim that he can show the universal form of what he has seen. A devotee of Kåñëa cannot accept false incarnations or followers of false incarnations.
Bg
11.49
TEXT
49
TEXT
Maa Tae VYaQaa
Maa c ivMaU!>aavae d*îa æPa& gaaerMaqd*x(MaMaedMa( )
VYaPaeTa>aq" Pa[qTaMaNaa" PauNaSTv& Tadev Mae æPaiMad&
Pa[PaXYa )) 49 ))
mä te vyathä mä ca vimüòha-bhävo
dåñövä rüpaà ghoram édåì mamedam
vyapeta-bhéù préta-manäù punas tvaà
tad eva me rüpam idaà prapaçya
mä—let it not
be; te—unto you; vyathä—trouble;
mä—let it not be; ca—also;
vimüòha-bhävaù—bewilderment; dåñövä—by seeing; rüpam—form;
ghoram—horrible; édåk—like
this; mama—My; idam—as
it is; vyapetabhéù—just become free from all
fear; préta-manäù—be pleased in mind; punaù—again; tvam—you; tat—that; eva—thus; me—My; rüpam—form; idam—this; prapaçya—just
see.
TRANSLATION
Your mind has been perturbed upon seeing this horrible feature of
Mine. Now let it be finished. My devotee, be free from all disturbance. With a
peaceful mind you can now see the form you desire.
PURPORT
In the beginning of Bhagavad-gétä Arjuna
was worried about killing Bhéñma and Droëa, his worshipful grandfathers and
masters. But Kåñëa said that he need not be afraid of killing his grandfather.
When they tried to disrobe Draupadé in the assembly, Bhéñma and Droëa were
silent, and for such negligence of duty they should be killed. Kåñëa showed His
universal form to Arjuna just to show him that these people were already killed
for their unlawful action. That scene was shown to Arjuna because devotees are
always peaceful, and they cannot perform such horrible actions. The purpose of
the revelation of the universal form was shown; now Arjuna wanted to see the
four-armed form, and Kåñëa showed him. A devotee is not much interested in the
universal form, for it does not enable one to reciprocate loving feelings. A
devotee wants to offer his respectful worshiping feelings; thus he wants to see
the two-handed or four-handed Kåñëa form so he can reciprocate in loving
service with the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Bg
11.50
TEXT
50
TEXT
SaÅYa ovac )
wTYaJauRNa& vaSaudevSTaQaae¤-a Svk&- æPa& dXaRYaaMaaSa
>aUYa" )
AaìaSaYaaMaaSa c >aqTaMaeNa& >aUTva PauNa" SaaEMYavPauMaRhaTMaa
)) 50 ))
saïjaya
uväca
ity arjunaà väsudevas tathoktvä
svakaà rüpaà darçayäm äsa bhüyaù
äçväsayäm äsa ca bhétam enaà
bhütvä punaù saumya-vapur mahätmä
saïjayaù uväca—Saïjaya
said; iti—thus; arjunam—unto
Arjuna; väsudevaù—Kåñëa; tathä—that
way; uktvä—saying; svakam—His
own; rüpam—form; darçayämäsa—showed;
bhüyaù—again; äçväsayämäsa—also
convinced him; ca—also; bhétam—fearful;
enam—him; bhütvä punaù—becoming
again; saumya-vapuù—beautiful form; mahätmä—the great one.
TRANSLATION
Saïjaya said to Dhåtaräñöra: The Supreme Personality of Godhead,
Kåñëa, while speaking thus to Arjuna, displayed His real four-armed form, and
at last He showed him His two-armed form, thus encouraging the fearful Arjuna.
PURPORT
When Kåñëa appeared as the son of Vasudeva and Devaké, He first of
all appeared as four-armed Näräyaëa, but when He was requested by His parents,
He transformed Himself into an ordinary child in appearance. Similarly, Kåñëa
knew that Arjuna was not interested in seeing a four-handed form of Kåñëa, but
since he asked to see this four-handed form, He also showed him this form again
and then showed Himself in His two-handed form. The word saumya-vapuù is very significant. Saumya-vapu is a very beautiful form; it is known as
the most beautiful form. When He was present, everyone was attracted simply by
Kåñëa’s form, and because Kåñëa is director of the universe, He just banished
the fear of Arjuna, His devotee, and showed him again His beautiful form of
Kåñëa. In the Brahma-saàhitä it is stated that
only a person whose eyes are smeared with the ointment of love can see the
beautiful form of Çré Kåñëa.
Bg
11.51
TEXT
51
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac )
d*îed& MaaNauz& æPa& Tav SaaEMYa& JaNaadRNa )
wdaNaqMaiSMa Sa&v*ta" SaceTaa" Pa[k*-iTa& GaTa" )) 51 ))
arjuna
uväca
dåñövedaà mänuñaà rüpaà
tava saumyaà janärdana
idäném asmi saàvåttaù
sa-cetäù prakåtià gataù
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna
said; dåñövä—seeing; idam—this;
mänuñam—human being; rüpam—form;
tava—Your; saumyam—very
beautiful; janärdana—O chastiser of the enemies; idäném—just now; asmi—I
am; saàvåttaù—settled; sa-cetäù—in
my consciousness; prakåtim—my own; gataù—I am.
TRANSLATION
When Arjuna thus saw Kåñëa in His original form, he said: Seeing
this humanlike form, so very beautiful, my mind is now pacified, and I am
restored to my original nature.
PURPORT
Here the words mänuñaà rüpam clearly
indicate the Supreme Personality of Godhead to be originally two-handed. Those
who deride Kåñëa to be an ordinary person are shown here to be ignorant of His
divine nature. If Kåñëa is like an ordinary human being, then how is it
possible for Him to show the universal form and again to show the four-handed
Näräyaëa form? So it is very clearly stated in Bhagavad-gétä
that one who thinks that Kåñëa is an ordinary person and misguides the
reader by claiming that it is the impersonal Brahman within Kåñëa speaking, is
doing the greatest injustice. Kåñëa has actually shown His universal form and
His fourhanded Viñëu form. So how can He be an ordinary human being? A pure
devotee is not confused by misguiding commentaries on Bhagavad-gétä
because he knows what is what. The original verses of Bhagavad-gétä are as clear as the sun; they do not
require lamplight from foolish commentators.
Bg
11.52
TEXT
52
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
)
SaududRXaRiMad& æPa& d*ívaNaiSa YaNMaMa )
deva APYaSYa æPaSYa iNaTYa& dXaRNak-ax(i+a<a" )) 52 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
su-durdarçam idaà rüpaà
dåñöavän asi yan mama
devä apy asya rüpasya
nityaà darçana-käìkñiëaù
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; sudur-darçana- very
difficult to be seen; idam—this; rüpam—form; dåñöavän asi—as
you have seen; yat—which; mama—of
Mine; deväù—the demigods; api
asya—also this; rüpasya—of the form; nityam—eternally; darçana-käìkñiëaù—always
aspire to see.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: My dear Arjuna, the form which you are now
seeing is very difficult to behold. Even the demigods are ever seeking the
opportunity to see this form which is so dear.
PURPORT
In the forty-eighth verse of this chapter Lord Kåñëa concluded
revealing His universal form and informed Arjuna that this form is not possible
to be seen by so many activities, sacrifices, etc. Now here the word sudurdarçam is used,
indicating that Kåñëa’s two-handed form is still more confidential. One may be
able to see the universal form of Kåñëa by adding a little tinge of devotional
service to various activities like penance, Vedic study and philosophical
speculation, etc. It may be possible, but without a tinge of bhakti, one cannot see; that has already been
explained. Still, beyond that universal form, the form of Kåñëa as a two-handed
man is still more difficult to see, even for demigods like Brahmä and Lord
Çiva. They desire to see Him, and we have evidences in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam that when He was supposed to be in
the womb of His mother, Devaké, all the demigods from heaven came to see the
marvel of Kåñëa. They even waited to see Him. A foolish person may deride Him,
but that is an ordinary person. Kåñëa is actually desired to be seen by
demigods like Brahmä and Çiva in His two-armed form.
In Bhagavad-gétä it is also confirmed that He is not visible to the foolish persons who deride Him. Kåñëa’s body, as confirmed by Brahmä-saàhitä and confirmed by Himself in Bhagavad-gétä, is completely spiritual and full of bliss and eternality. His body is never like a material body. But for some who make a study of Kåñëa by reading Bhagavad-gétä or similar Vedic scriptures, Kåñëa is a problem. For one using a material process, Kåñëa is considered to be a great historical personality and very learned philosopher. But He isn’t an ordinary man. But some think that even though He was so powerful, He had to accept a material body. Ultimately they think that the Absolute Truth is impersonal; therefore they think that from His impersonal feature He assumed a personal feature attached to material nature. This is a materialistic calculation of the Supreme Lord. Another calculation is speculative. Those who are in search of knowledge also speculate on Kåñëa and consider Him to be less important than the universal form of the Supreme. Thus some think that the universal form of Kåñëa which was manifested to Arjuna is more important than His personal form. According to them, the personal form of the Supreme is something imaginary. They believe that in the ultimate issue, the Absolute Truth is not a person. But the transcendental process is described in Bhagavad-gétä, Chapter Two: to hear about Kåñëa from authorities. That is the actual Vedic process, and those who are actually in the Vedic line hear about Kåñëa from authority, and by repeated hearing about Him, Kåñëa becomes dear. As we have several times discussed, Kåñëa is covered by His yoga-mäyä potency. He is not to be seen or revealed to anyone and everyone. Only by one to whom He reveals Himself can He be seen. This is confirmed in Vedic literature; for one who is a surrendered soul, the Absolute Truth can actually be understood. The transcendentalist, by continuous Kåñëa consciousness and by devotional service to Kåñëa, can have his spiritual eyes opened and can see Kåñëa by revelation. Such a revelation is not possible even for the demigods; therefore it is difficult even for the demigods to understand Kåñëa, and the advanced demigods are always in hope of seeing Kåñëa in His two-handed form. The conclusion is that although to see the universal form of Kåñëa is very, very difficult and not possible for anyone and everyone, it is still more difficult to understand His personal form as Çyämasundara.
Bg
11.53
TEXT
53
TEXT
Naah&
vedENaR TaPaSaa Na daNaeNa Na ceJYaYaa )
XaKYa Wv&ivDaae d]íu& d*ívaNaiSa Maa& YaQaa )) 53 ))
nähaà vedair na tapasä
na dänena na cejyayä
çakya evaà-vidho drañöuà
dåñöavän asi mäà yathä
na—never; aham—I; vedaiù—by study
of the Vedas; na—never; tapasä—by
serious penances; na—never; dänena—by charity; na—never;
ca—also; ijyayä—by
worship; çakyaù—is it
possible; evam-vidhaù—like this; drañöum—to see; dåñöavän—seeing;
asi—you are; mäm—Me;
yathä—as.
TRANSLATION
The form which you are seeing with your transcendental eyes cannot
be understood simply by studying the Vedas, nor by undergoing serious penances,
nor by charity, nor by worship. It is not by these means that one can see Me as
I am.
PURPORT
Kåñëa first appeared before His parents Devaké and Vasudeva in a
four-handed form, and then He transformed Himself into the two-handed form.
This mystery is very difficult to understand for those who are atheists or who
are devoid of devotional service. For scholars who have simply studied Vedic
literature by way of speculation or out of mere academic interest, Kåñëa is not
easy to understand. Nor is He to he understood by persons who officially go to
the temple to offer worship. They make their visit, but they cannot understand
Kåñëa as He is. Kåñëa can be understood only through the path of devotional
service, as explained by Kåñëa Himself in the next verse.
Bg
11.54
TEXT
54
TEXT
>a¢-ya
TvNaNYaYaa XaKYa AhMaev&ivDaae_JauRNa )
jaTau& d]íu& c TatveNa Pa[veíu& c ParNTaPa )) 54 ))
bhaktyä tv ananyayä çakya
aham evaà-vidho ’rjuna
jïätuà drañöuà ca tattvena
praveñöuà ca parantapa
bhaktyä—by
devotional service; tu—but; ananyayä—without being mixed with fruitive activities
or speculative knowledge; çakyaù—possible; aham—I; evam-vidhaù—like
this; arjuna—O Arjuna; jïätum—to
know; drañöum—to see; tattvena—in
fact; praveñöum—and to enter into; ca—also; parantapa—O
mighty-armed one.
TRANSLATION
My dear Arjuna, only by undivided devotional service can I be
understood as I am, standing before you, and can thus be seen directly. Only in
this way can you enter into the mysteries of My understanding.
PURPORT
Kåñëa can be understood only by the process of undivided
devotional service. He explicitly explains this in this verse so unauthorized
commentators, who try to understand Bhagavad-gétä by
the speculative process, will know that they are simply wasting their time. No
one can understand Kåñëa or how He came from parents in a four-handed form and
at once changed Himself into a two-handed form. It is clearly stated here that
no one can see Him. Those who, however, are very experienced students of Vedic
literature can learn about Him from the Vedic literature in so many ways. There
are so many rules and regulations, and if one at all wants to understand Kåñëa,
he must follow the regulative principles described in the authoritative
literature. One can perform penance in accordance with those principles. As far
as charity is concerned, it is plain that charity should be given to the
devotees of Kåñëa who are engaged in His devotional service to spread the Kåñëa
philosophy or Kåñëa consciousness throughout the world. Kåñëa consciousness is
a benediction to humanity. Lord Caitanya was appreciated by Rüpa Gosvämé as the
most munificent man of charity because love of Kåñëa, which is very difficult
to achieve, was distributed freely by Him. And if one worships as prescribed in
the temple (in the temples in India there is always some statue, usually of
Viñëu or Kåñëa), that is a chance to progress. For the beginners in devotional
service to the Lord, temple worship is very essential, and this is confirmed in
the Vedic literature.
One who has unflinching devotion for the Supreme Lord and is directed by the spiritual master can see the Supreme Personality of Godhead by revelation. For one who does not take personal training under the guidance of a bona fide spiritual master, it is impossible to even begin to understand Kåñëa. The word tu is specifically used here to indicate that no other process can be used, can be recommended, or can be successful in understanding Kåñëa.
The personal forms of Kåñëa, the two-handed form and the four-handed, are completely different from the temporary universal form shown to Arjuna. The four-handed form is Näräyaëa, and the two-handed form is Kåñëa; they are eternal and transcendental, whereas the universal form exhibited to Arjuna is temporary. The very word sudurdarçam, meaning difficult to see, suggests that no one saw that universal form. It also suggests that amongst the devotees there was no necessity of showing it. That form was exhibited by Kåñëa at the request of Arjuna because in the future, when one represents himself as an incarnation of God, people can ask to see his universal form.
Kåñëa changes from the
universal form to the four-handed form of Näräyaëa and then to His own natural
form of two hands. This indicates that the four-handed forms and other forms
mentioned in Vedic literature are all emanations of the original two-handed
Kåñëa. He is the origin of all emanations. Kåñëa is distinct even from these
forms, not to speak of the impersonal conception. As far as the four-handed
forms of Kåñëa are concerned, it is stated clearly that even the most identical
four-handed form of Kåñëa (which is known as Mahä-Viñëu, who is lying on the
cosmic ocean and from whose breathing so many innumerable universes are passing
out and entering) is also an expansion of the Supreme Lord. Therefore one
should conclusively worship the personal form of Kåñëa as the Supreme
Personality of Godhead who is eternity, bliss and knowledge. He is the source
of all forms of Viñëu, He is the source of all forms of incarnation, and He is
the original Supreme Personality, as confirmed in Bhagavad-gétä.
In the Vedic literature it is stated that the Supreme Absolute Truth is a person. His name is Kåñëa, and He sometimes descends on this earth. Similarly, in Çrémad-Bhägavatam there is a description of all kinds of incarnations of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and there it is said that Kåñëa is not an incarnation of God but is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself. Kåñëas tu bhagavän svayam. Similarly, in Bhagavad-gétä the Lord says, mattaù parataram nänyät: “There is nothing superior to My form as the Personality of Godhead Kåñëa.” He also says elsewhere in Bhagavad-gétä, aham ädir hi devänäm: “I am the origin of all the demigods.” And after understanding Bhagavad-gétä from Kåñëa, Arjuna also confirms this in the following words: paraà brahma paraà dhäma pavitraà paramaà bhavän: “I now fully understand that You are the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the Absolute Truth, and that You are the refuge of everything.” Therefore the universal form which Kåñëa showed to Arjuna is not the original form of God. The original is the Kåñëa form. The universal form, with its thousands and thousands of heads and hands, is manifest just to draw the attention of those who have no love for God. It is not God’s original form.
The universal form is not attractive for pure devotees, who are in love with the Lord in different transcendental relationships. The Supreme Godhead exchanges transcendental love in His original form of Kåñëa. Therefore to Arjuna, who was so intimately related with Kåñëa in friendship, this form of the universal manifestation was not pleasing; rather, it was fearful. Arjuna, who is a constant companion of Kåñëa’s, must have had transcendental eyes; he was not an ordinary man. Therefore he was not captivated by the universal form. This form may seem wonderful to persons who are involved in elevating themselves by fruitive activities, but to persons who are engaged in devotional service, the two-handed form of Kåñëa is the most dear.
Bg
11.55
TEXT
55
TEXT
MaTk-MaRk*-NMaTParMaae
MaÙ¢-" Sa®viJaRTa" )
iNavŒr" SavR>aUTaezu Ya" Sa MaaMaeiTa Paa<@v )) 55 ))
mat-karma-kån mat-paramo
mad-bhaktaù saìga-varjitaù
nirvairaù sarva-bhüteñu
yaù sa mäm eti päëòava
mat-karma-kåt—engaged in
doing My work; mat-paramaù—concerning Me, the
Supreme; mat-bhaktaù—engaged in My devotional
service; saìga-varjitaù—freed from the
contamination of previous activities and mental speculation; nirvairaù—without an enemy; sarva-bhüteñu—to
every living entity; yaù—one who; saù—he; mäm—unto Me; eti—comes; päëòava—O son
of Päëòu.
TRANSLATION
My dear Arjuna, one who is engaged in My pure devotional service,
free from the contaminations of previous activities and from mental
speculation, who is friendly to every living entity, certainly comes to Me.
PURPORT
Anyone who wants to approach the Supreme of all the Personalities
of Godhead, on the Kåñëaloka planet in the spiritual sky, and be intimately
connected with the Supreme Personality, Kåñëa, must take this formula, as is
stated by the Supreme Himself. Therefore, this verse is considered to be the
essence of Bhagavad-gétä. The Bhagavad-gétä is a book
directed to the conditioned souls, who are engaged in the material world with
the purpose of lording it over nature and who do not know of the real,
spiritual life. The Bhagavad-gétä is meant to show how one can understand his spiritual
existence and his eternal relationship with the Supreme Spiritual Personality
and to teach one how to go back home, back to Godhead. Now here is the verse
which clearly explains the process by which one can attain success in his
spiritual activity: devotional service. As far as work is concerned, one should
transfer his energy entirely to Kåñëa conscious activities. No work should be
done by any man except in relationship to Kåñëa. This called Kåñëa-karma. One may be engaged in various activities, but
one should not be attached to the result of his work, but the result should be
done for Him. For example, one may be engaged in business, but to transform
that activity into Kåñëa consciousness, one has to do business for Kåñëa. If
Kåñëa is the proprietor of the business, then Kåñëa should enjoy the profit of
the business. If a businessman is in possession of thousands and thousands of
dollars, and if he has to offer all this to Kåñëa, he can do it. This is work
for Kåñëa. Instead of constructing a big building for his sense gratification,
he can construct a nice temple for Kåñëa, and he can install the Deity of Kåñëa
and arrange for the Deity’s service, as is outlined in the authorized books of
devotional service. This is all Kåñëa-karma. One
should not be attached to the result of his work, but the result should be
offered to Kåñëa. One should also accept as prasädam, food,
the remnants of offerings to Kåñëa. If, however, one is not able to construct a
temple for Kåñëa, one can engage himself in cleansing the temple of Kåñëa; that
is also Kåñëa-karma. One can cultivate a garden.
Anyone who has land—in India, at least, any poor man has a certain amount of
land—can utilize that for Kåñëa by growing flowers to offer Him. He can sow tulasé plants because tulasé
leaves are very important, and Kåñëa has recommended this in Bhagavad-gétä. Kåñëa desires that one offer Him either
a leaf, or a flower, or a little water—and He is satisfied. This leaf
especially refers to the tulasé So one can sow tulasé leaves and pour water on the plant. Thus, even
the poorest man can engage in the service of Kåñëa. These are some of the
examples of how one can engage in working for Kåñëa.
The word mat-paramaù refers to one who considers the association of Kåñëa in His supreme abode to be the highest perfection of life. Such a person does not wish to be elevated to the higher planets such as the moon or sun or heavenly planets, or even the highest planet of this universe, Brahmaloka. He has no attraction for that. He is only attracted to being transferred to the spiritual sky. And even in the spiritual sky he is not satisfied with merging into the glowing brahmajyoti effulgence, for he wants to enter the highest spiritual planet, namely Kåñëaloka, Goloka Våndävana. He has full knowledge of that planet, and therefore he is not interested in any other. As indicated by the word mad-bhaktaù, he fully engages in devotional service, specifically in the nine processes of devotional engagement: hearing, chanting, remembering, worshiping, serving the lotus feet of the Lord, offering prayers, carrying out the orders of the Lord, making friends with Him, and surrendering everything to Him. One can engage in all nine devotional processes, or eight, or seven, or at least in one, and that will surely make one perfect.
The term saìga-varjitaù is very significant. One should disassociate himself from persons who are against Kåñëa. Not only are the atheistic persons against Kåñëa, but also those who are attracted to fruitive activities and mental speculation. Therefore the pure form of devotional service is described in Bhakti-rasämåta-sindhu as follows: anyäbhiläñitä-çünyaà jïäna-karmädy-anävåtam änukülyena kåñëänuçélanaà bhaktir uttamä. In this verse Çréla Rüpa Gosvämé clearly states that if anyone wants to execute unalloyed devotional service, he must be freed from all kinds of material contamination. He must be freed from the association of persons who are addicted to fruitive activities and mental speculation. When, freed from such unwanted association and from the contamination of material desires, one favorably cultivates knowledge of Kåñëa, that is called pure devotional service. Änukülyasya saìkaplaù prätikülyasya varjanam. One should think of Kåñëa and act for Kåñëa favorably, not unfavorably. Kaàsa was an enemy of Kåñëa’s. From the very beginning of Kåñëa’s birth, he planned in so many ways to kill Him, and because he was always unsuccessful, he was always thinking of Kåñëa. Thus while working, while eating and while sleeping, he was always Kåñëa conscious in every respect, but that Kåñëa consciousness was not favorable, and therefore in spite of his always thinking of Kåñëa twenty-four hours a day, he was considered a demon, and Kåñëa at last killed him. Of course anyone who is killed by Kåñëa attains salvation immediately, but that is not the aim of the pure devotee. The pure devotee does not even want salvation. He does not want to be transferred even to the highest planet, Goloka Våndävana. His only objective is to serve Kåñëa wherever he may be.
A devotee of Kåñëa is friendly to everyone. Therefore it is said here that he has no enemy. How is this? A devotee situated in Kåñëa consciousness knows that only devotional service to Kåñëa can relieve a person from all the problems of life. He has personal experience of this, and therefore he wants to introduce this system, Kåñëa consciousness, into human society. There are many examples in history of devotees of the Lord risking their lives for the spreading of God consciousness. The favorite example is Lord Jesus Christ. He was crucified by the nondevotees, but He sacrificed His life for spreading God consciousness. Of course, it would be superficial to understand that He was killed. Similarly, in India also there are many examples, such as Öhäkur Haridäsa. Why such risk? Because they wanted to spread Kåñëa consciousness, and it is difficult. A Kåñëa conscious person knows that if a man is suffering, it is due to his forgetfulness of his eternal relationship with Kåñëa. Therefore, the highest benefit one can render to human society is relieving one’s neighbor from all material problems. In such a way, a pure devotee is engaged in the service of the Lord. Now, we can imagine how merciful Kåñëa is to those engaged in His service, risking everything for Him. Therefore it is certain that such persons must reach the supreme planet after leaving the body.
In summary, the universal form of Kåñëa, which is a temporary manifestation, and the form of time which devours everything, and even the form of Viñëu, four-handed, have all been exhibited by Kåñëa. Thus Kåñëa is the origin of all these manifestations. It is not that Kåñëa is a manifestation of the original viçva-rüpa, or Viñëu. Kåñëa is the origin of all forms. There are hundreds and thousands of Viñëus, but for a devotee, no form of Kåñëa is important but the original form, two-handed Çyämasundara. In the Brahmä-saàhitä it is stated that those who are attached to the Çyämasundara form of Kåñëa in love and devotion can see Him always within the heart and cannot see anything else. One should understand, therefore, that the purport of this Eleventh Chapter is that the form of Kåñëa is essential and supreme.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the Eleventh Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of the Universal Form.
Bg 12. Devotional Service
CHAPTER
TWELVE
Devotional
Service
Bg 12.1
TEXT
1
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac )
Wv& SaTaTaYau¢-a Yae >a¢-aSTva& PaYauRPaaSaTae )
Yae caPYa+arMaVYa¢&- Taeza& ke- YaaeGaivtaMaa" )) 1 ))
arjuna
uväca
evaà satata-yuktä ye
bhaktäs tväà paryupäsate
ye cäpy akñaram avyaktaà
teñäà ke yoga-vittamäù
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna said;
evam—thus; satata—always; yuktäù—engaged; ye—those;
bhaktäù—devotees; tväm—unto
You; paryupäsate—properly worship; ye—those; ca—also; api—again; akñaram—beyond
the senses; avyaktam—unmanifested; teçäm—of them; ke—who; yoga-vittamäù—the most perfect.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna inquired: Which is considered to be more perfect: those who
are properly engaged in Your devotional service, or those who worship the
impersonal Brahman, the unmanifested?
PURPORT
Kåñëa has now explained about the personal, the impersonal and the
universal and has described all kinds of devotees and yogés.
Generally, the transcendentalists can be divided into two classes. One is the
impersonalist, and the other is the personalist. The personalist devotee
engages himself with all energy in the service of the Supreme Lord. The
impersonalist engages himself not directly in the service of Kåñëa but in
meditation on the impersonal Brahman, the unmanifested.
We find in this chapter that of the different processes for realization of the Absolute Truth, bhakti-yoga, devotional service, is the highest. If one at all desires to have the association of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, then he must take to devotional service.
Those who worship the Supreme Lord directly by devotional service are called personalists. Those who engage themselves in meditation on the impersonal Brahman are called impersonalists. Arjuna is here questioning which position is better. There are different ways to realize the Absolute Truth, but Kåñëa indicates in this chapter that bhakti-yoga, or devotional service to Him, is highest of all. It is the most direct, and it is the easiest means for association with the Godhead.
In the Second Chapter the Lord explains that a living entity is not the material body but is a spiritual spark, a part of the Absolute Truth. In the Seventh Chapter He speaks of the living entity as part and parcel of the supreme whole and recommends that he transfer his attention fully to the whole. In the Eighth Chapter it is stated that whoever thinks of Kåñëa at the moment of death is at once transferred to the spiritual sky, Kåñëa’s abode. And at the end of the Sixth Chapter the Lord says that out of all the yogés, he who thinks of Kåñëa within himself is considered to be the most perfect. So throughout the Gétä personal devotion to Kåñëa is recommended as the highest form of spiritual realization. Yet there are those who are still attracted to Kåñëa’s impersonal brahmajyoti effulgence, which is the all-pervasive aspect of the Absolute Truth and which is unmanifest and beyond the reach of the senses. Arjuna would like to know which of these two types of transcendentalists is more perfect in knowledge. In other words, he is clarifying his own position because he is attached to the personal form of Kåñëa. He is not attached to the impersonal Brahman. He wants to know whether his position is secure. The impersonal manifestation, either in this material world or in the spiritual world of the Supreme Lord, is a problem for meditation. Actually, one cannot perfectly conceive of the impersonal feature of the Absolute Truth. Therefore Arjuna wants to say, “What is the use of such a waste of time?” Arjuna experienced in the Eleventh Chapter that to be attached to the personal form of Kåñëa is best because he could thus understand all other forms at the same time and there was no disturbance to his love for Kåñëa. This important question asked of Kåñëa by Arjuna will clarify the distinction between the impersonal and personal conceptions of the Absolute Truth.
Bg 12.2
TEXT
2
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
)
MaYYaaveXYa MaNaae Yae Maa& iNaTYaYau¢-a oPaaSaTae )
é[ÖYaa ParYaaePaeTaaSTae Mae Yau¢-TaMaa MaTaa" )) 2 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
mayy äveçya mano ye mäà
nitya-yuktä upäsate
çraddhayä parayopetäs
te me yuktatamä matäù
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; mayi—unto Me; äveçya—fixing; manaù—mind;
ye—one who; mäm—unto
Me; nitya—always; yuktäù—engaged;
upäsate—worships; çraddhayä—with
faith; parayä—transcendental; upetäù—engages; te—they; me—Mine; yuktatamäù—most
perfect; matäù—I consider.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: He whose mind is fixed on My personal form,
always engaged in worshiping Me with great and transcendental faith, is
considered by Me to be most perfect.
PURPORT
In answer to Arjuna’s question, Kåñëa clearly says that he who
concentrates upon His personal form and who worships Him with faith and
devotion is to be considered most perfect in yoga.
For one in such Kåñëa consciousness there are no material activities because
everything is done by Kåñëa. A pure devotee is constantly engaged—sometimes he
chants, sometimes he hears or reads books about Kåñëa, or sometimes he cooks prasädam or goes to the marketplace to purchase
something for Kåñëa, or sometimes he washes the temple or the dishes—whatever
he does, he does not let a single moment pass without devoting his activities
to Kåñëa Such action is in full samädhi.
Bg
12.3, Bg 12.4, Bg 12.3-4
TEXTS
3–4
TEXT
Yae
Tv+arMaiNadeRXYaMaVYa¢&- PaYauRPaaSaTae )
SavR}aGaMaicNTYa& c kU-$=SQaMacl&/ Da]uvMa( )) 3 ))
SaiàYaMYaeiNd]YaGa]aMa& SavR}a SaMabuÖYa" )
Tae Pa[aPanuviNTa MaaMaev SavR>aUTaihTae rTaa" )) 4 ))
ye tv akñaram anirdeçyam
avyaktaà paryupäsate
sarvatra-gam acintyaà ca
küöa-stham acalaà dhruvam
sanniyamyendriya-grämaà
sarvatra sama-buddhayaù
te präpnuvanti mäm eva
sarva-bhüta-hite ratäù
ye—those; tu—but; akñaram—which is
beyond the perception of the senses; anirdeçyam—indefinite;
avyaktam—unmanifested; paryupäsate—completely
engages; sarvatra-gam—all-pervading; acintyam—inconceivable; ca—also;
küöastham—in the center; acalam—immovable;
dhruvam—fixed; sanniyamya—controlling;
indriya-grämam—all the senses; sarvatra—everywhere; sama-buddayaù—equally
disposed; te—they; präpnuvanti—achieve;
mäm—unto Me; eva—certainly;
sarva-bhüta-hite—all living entities’ welfare; ratäù—engaged.
TRANSLATION
But those who fully worship the unmanifested, that which lies
beyond the perception of the senses, the all-pervading, inconceivable, fixed,
and immovable—the impersonal conception of the Absolute Truth—by controlling
the various senses and being equally disposed to everyone, such persons,
engaged in the welfare of all, at last achieve Me.
PURPORT
Those who do not directly worship the Supreme Godhead, Kåñëa, but
who attempt to achieve the same goal by an indirect process, also ultimately
achieve the supreme goal, Çré Kåñëa, as is stated, “After many births the man
of wisdom seeks refuge in Me, knowing Väsudeva is all.” When a person comes to
full knowledge after many births, he surrenders unto Lord Kåñëa. If one
approaches the Godhead by the method mentioned in this verse, he has to control
the senses, render service to everyone and engage in the welfare of all beings.
It is inferred that one has to approach Lord Kåñëa, otherwise there is no
perfect realization. Often there is much penance involved before one fully
surrenders unto Him.
In order to perceive the Supersoul within the individual soul, one has to cease the sensual activities of seeing, hearing, tasting, working, etc. Then one comes to understand that the Supreme Soul is present everywhere. Realizing this, one envies no living entity—he sees no difference between man and animal because he sees soul only, not the outer covering. But for the common man, this method of impersonal realization is very difficult.
Bg 12.5
TEXT
5
TEXT
©e-Xaae_iDak-TarSTaezaMaVYa¢-aSa¢-ceTaSaaMa(
)
AVYa¢-a ih GaiTaduR"%& dehviÙrvaPYaTae )) 5 ))
kleço ’dhikataras teñäm
avyaktäsakta-cetasäm
avyaktä hi gatir duùkhaà
dehavadbhir aväpyate
kleçaù—trouble; adhikataraù—more troublesome; teñäm—of
them; avyakta—unmanifested; äsakta—being attached; cetasäm—of
those whose minds; avyaktä—unmanifested; hi—certainly; gatiù duùkham—progress
is troublesome; dehavadbhiù—of the embodiments; aväpyate—achieve.
TRANSLATION
For those whose minds are attached to the unmanifested, impersonal
feature of the Supreme, advancement is very troublesome. To make progrese in
that discipline is always difficult for those who are embodied.
PURPORT
The group of transcendentalists who follow the path of the
inconceivable, unmanifested, impersonal feature of the Supreme Lord are called jïäna-yogés, and persons who are in full Kåñëa
consciousness, engaged in devotional service to the Lord, are called bhakti-yogés. Now, here the difference between jïäna-yoga and bhakti-yoga is definitely expressed. The process of jïäna-yoga, although ultimately bringing one to the
same goal, is very troublesome, whereas the path of bhakti-yoga,
the process of being in direct service to the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, is easier and is natural for the embodied soul. The individual soul is
embodied since time immemorial. It is very difficult for him to simply
theoretically understand that he is not the body. Therefore, the bhakti-yogé accepts the Deity of Kåñëa as worshipable
because there is some bodily conception fixed in the mind, which can thus be
applied. Of course, worship of the Supreme Personality of Godhead in His form
within the temple is not idol worship. There is evidence in the Vedic
literature that worship may be saguëa and nirguëa—of the Supreme possessing or not possessing
attributes. Worship of the Deity in the temple is saguëa
worship, for the Lord is represented by material qualities. But the form
of the Lord, though represented by material qualities such as stone, wood, or
oil paint, is not actually material. That is the absolute nature of the Supreme
Lord.
A crude example may be given here. We may find some mailboxes on the street, and if we post our letters in those boxes, they will naturally go to their destination without difficulty. But any old box, or an imitation, which we may find somewhere, which is not authorized by the post office, will not do the work. Similarly, God has an authorized representation in the Deity form, which is called arca-vigraha. This arca-vigraha is an incarnation of the Supreme Lord. God will accept service through that form. The Lord is omnipotent and all-powerful; therefore, by His incarnation as arca-vigraha, He can accept the services of the devotee, just to make it convenient for the man in conditioned life.
So, for a devotee, there is no difficulty in approaching the Supreme immediately and directly, but for those who are following the impersonal way to spiritual realization, the path is difficult. They have to understand the unmanifested representation of the Supreme through such Vedic literatures as the Upaniñads, and they have to learn the language, understand the nonperceptual feelings, and they have to realize all these processes. This is not very easy for a common man. A person in Kåñëa consciousness, engaged in devotional service, simply by the guidance of the bona fide spiritual master, simply by offering regulative obeisances unto the Deity, simply by hearing the glories of the Lord, and simply by eating the remnants of foodstuffs offered to the Lord, realizes the Supreme Personality of Godhead very easily. There is no doubt that the impersonalists are unnecessarily taking a troublesome path with the risk of not realizing the Absolute Truth at the ultimate end. But the personalist, without any risk, trouble, or difficulty, approaches the Supreme Personality directly. A similar passage appears in Çrémad-Bhägavatam. It is stated there that if one has to ultimately surrender unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead (This surrendering process is called bhakti.), but instead takes the trouble to understand what is Brahman and what is not Brahman and spends his whole life in that way, the result is simply troublesome. Therefore it is advised here that one should not take up this troublesome path of self-realization because there is uncertainty in the ultimate result.
A living entity is eternally an individual soul, and if he wants to merge into the spiritual whole, he may accomplish the realization of the eternal and knowledgeable aspects of his original nature, but the blissful portion is not realized. By the grace of some devotee, such a transcendentalist, highly learned in the process of jïäna-yoga, may come to the point of bhakti-yoga, or devotional service. At that time, long practice in impersonalism also becomes a source of trouble, because he cannot give up the idea. Therefore an embodied soul is always in difficulty with the unmanifest, both at the time of practice and at the time of realization. Every living soul is partially independant, and one should know for certain that this unmanifested realization is against the nature of his spiritual blissful self. One should not take up this process. For every individual living entity the process of Kåñëa consciousness, which entails full engagement in devotional service, is the best way. If one wants to ignore this devotional service, there is the danger of turning to atheism. Thus this process of centering attention on the unmanifested, the inconceivable, which is beyond the approach of the senses, as already expressed in this verse, should never be encouraged at any time, especially in this age. It is not advised by Lord Kåñëa.
Bg 12.6,
Bg 12.7, Bg 12.6-7
TEXTS
6–7
TEXT
Yae Tau
SavaRi<a k-MaaRi<a MaiYa SaNNYaSYa MaTPara" )
ANaNYaeNaEv YaaeGaeNa Maa& DYaaYaNTa oPaaSaTae )) 6 ))
TaezaMah& SaMauÖTaaR Ma*TYauSa&SaarSaaGaraTa( )
>avaiMa Na icraTPaaQaR MaYYaaveiXaTaceTaSaaMa( )) 7 ))
ye tu sarväëi karmäëi
mayi sannyasya mat-paräù
ananyenaiva yogena
mäà dhyäyanta upäsate
teñäm ahaà samuddhartä
måtyu-saàsära-sägarät
bhavämi na cirät pärtha
mayy äveçita-cetasäm
ye—one who; tu—but; sarväëi—everything;
karmäëi—activities; mayi—unto
Me; sannyasya—giving up; mat-paräù—being
attached to Me; ananyena—without division; eva—certainly; yogena—by
practice of such bhakti-yoga; mäm—unto Me; dhyäyantaù—meditating; upäsate—worship;
teñäm—of them; aham—I; samuddhartä—deliverer; måtyu—that;
saàsära—material existence; sägarät—from the ocean; bhavämi—become;
na cirät—not a long time; pärtha—O
son of Påthä; mayi—unto Me; äveçita—fixed; cetasäm—of
those whose minds are like that.
TRANSLATION
For one who worships Me, giving up all his activities unto Me and
being devoted to Me without deviation, engaged in devotional service and always
meditating upon Me, who has fixed his mind upon Me, O son of Påthä, for him I
am the swift deliverer from the ocean of birth and death.
PURPORT
It is explicitly stated here that the devotees are very fortunate
to be delivered very soon from material existence by the Lord. In pure
devotional service one comes to the realization that God is great and that the
individual soul is subordinate to Him. His duty is to render service to the Lord—if
not, then he will render service to mäyä.
As stated before, the Supreme Lord can only be appreciated by devotional service. Therefore, one should be fully devoted. One should fix his mind fully on Kåñëa in order to achieve Him. One should work only for Kåñëa. It does not matter in what kind of work one engages, but that work should be done only for Kåñëa. That is the standard of devotional service. The devotee does not desire any achievement other than pleasing the Supreme Personality of Godhead. His life’s mission is to please Kåñëa, and he can sacrifice everything for Kåñëa’s satisfaction, just as Arjuna did in the Battle of Kurukñetra. The process is very simple: one can devote himself in his occupation and engage at the same time in chanting Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/ Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare. Such transcendental chanting attracts the devotee to the Personality of Godhead.
The Supreme Lord herein promises that He will without delay deliver a pure devotee thus engaged from the ocean of material existence. Those who are advanced in yoga practice can willfully transfer the soul to whatever planet they like by the yoga process, and others take the opportunity in various ways, but as far as the devotee is concerned, it is clearly stated here that the Lord Himself takes him. He does not need to wait to become very experienced in order to transfer himself to the spiritual sky.
In the Varäha Puräëa this verse appears:
nayämi paramaà sthänam arcirädi-gatià vinä
garuòa-skandham äropya yatheccham aniväritaù
The purport of this verse is that a devotee does not need to
practice añöäìga-yoga in order to transfer his
soul to the spiritual planets. The responsibility is taken by the Supreme Lord
Himself. He clearly states here that He Himself becomes the deliverer. A child
is completely cared for by his parents, and thus his position is secure.
Similarly, a devotee does not need to endeavor to transfer himself by yoga practice to other planets. Rather, the Supreme
Lord, by His great mercy, comes at once, riding on His bird carrier Garuòa, and
at once delivers the devotee from this material existence. Although a man who
has fallen in the ocean may struggle very hard and may be very expert in
swimming, he cannot save himself. But if someone comes and picks him up from
the water, then he is easily rescued. Similarly, the Lord picks up the devotee
from this material existence. One simply has to practice the easy process of
Kåñëa consciousness and fully engage himself in devotional service. Any
intelligent man should always prefer the process of devotional service to all
other paths. In the Näräyaëéya this is confirmed
as follows:
yä vai sädhana-sampatti-puruñärtha-catuñöaye
tayä vinä tad-äpnoti naro näräyaëäçrayaù
The purport of this verse is that one should not engage in the
different processes of fruitive activity or cultivate knowledge by the mental
speculative process. One who is devoted to the Supreme Personality can attain
all the benefits derived from other yogic processes, speculation, rituals,
sacrifices, charities, etc. That is the specific benediction of devotional
service.
Simply by chanting the holy name of Kåñëa—Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa,
Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/ Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare—a devotee of
the Lord can approach the supreme destination easily and happily, but this
destination cannot be approached by any other process of religion.
The conclusion of Bhagavad-gétä is stated in the Eighteenth Chapter:
sarva-dharmän parityajya mäm ekaà çaraëaà vraja
ahaà tväà sarva-päpebhyo mokñayiñyämi mä çucaù.
One should give up all other processes of self-realization and
simply execute devotional service in Kåñëa consciousness. That will enable one
to reach the highest perfection of life. There is no need for one to consider
the sinful actions of his past life because the Supreme Lord fully takes charge
of him. Therefore one should not futilely try to deliver himself in spiritual
realization. Let everyone take shelter of the supreme omnipotent Godhead Kåñëa.
That is the highest perfection of life.
Bg 12.8
TEXT
8
TEXT
MaYYaev MaNa
AaDaTSv MaiYa buiÖ& iNaveXaYa )
iNaviSaZYaiSa MaYYaev ATa Oß| Na Sa&XaYa" )) 8 ))
mayy eva mana ädhatsva
mayi buddhià niveçaya
nivasiñyasi mayy eva
ata ürdhvaà na saàçayaù
mayi—unto Me; eva—certainly; manaù—mind;
ädhatsva—fix; mayi—upon
Me; buddhim—intelligence; niveçaya—apply;
nivasiñyasi—you lead; mayi—unto
Me; eva—certainly; ataù—therefore;
ürdhvam—up; na—never;
saàçayaù—doubt.
TRANSLATION
Just fix your mind upon Me, the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
and engage all your intelligence in Me. Thus you will live in Me always,
without a doubt.
PURPORT
One who is engaged in Lord Kåñëa’s devotional service lives in a
direct relationship with the Supreme Lord, so there is no doubt that his
position is transcendental from the very beginning. A devotee does not live on
the material plane—he lives in Kåñëa. The holy name of the Lord and the Lord
are nondifferent; therefore when a devotee chants Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa and His
internal potency are dancing on the tongue of the devotee. When he offers Kåñëa
food, Kåñëa directly accepts these eatables, and the devotee becomes Kåñëa-ized
by eating the remnants. One who does not engage in such service cannot
understand how this is so, although this is a process recommended in the Gétä and in other Vedic literatures.
Bg 12.9
TEXT
9
TEXT
AQa icta&
SaMaaDaaTau& Na Xa¥-aeiz MaiYa iSQarMa( )
A>YaaSaYaaeGaeNa TaTaae MaaiMaC^aáu& DaNaÅYa )) 9 ))
atha cittaà samädhätuà
na çaknoñi mayi sthiram
abhyäsa-yogena tato
mäm icchäptuà dhanaïjaya
atha—if,
therefore; cittam—mind; samädhätam—fixing;
na—not; çaknoñi—able;
mayi—upon Me; sthiram—fixed;
abhyäsa—practice; yogena—by
devotional service; tataù—therefore; mäm—Me; icchä—desire; äptum—to get; dhanaïjaya—O
Arjuna.
TRANSLATION
My dear Arjuna, O winner of wealth, if you cannot fix your mind
upon Me without deviation, then follow the regulated principles of bhakti-yoga
In this way you will develop a desire to attain to Me.
PURPORT
In this verse, two different processes of bhakti-yoga
are indicated. The first applies to one who has actually developed an
attachment for Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, by transcendental
love. And the other is for one who has not developed an attachment for the
Supreme Person by transcendental love. For this second class there are
different prescribed rules and regulations, which one can follow to be
ultimately elevated to the stage of attachment to Kåñëa.
Bhakti-yoga is the purification of the senses. At the present moment in material existence the senses are always impure, being engaged in sense gratification. But, by the practice of bhakti-yoga these senses can become purified, and in the purified state they come directly in contact with the Supreme Lord. In this material existence, I may be engaged in some service to some master, but I don’t really lovingly serve my master. I simply serve to get some money. And the master also is not in love; he takes service from me and pays me. So there is no question of love. But for spiritual life, one must be elevated to the pure stage of love. That stage of love can be achieved by practice of devotional service, performed with the present senses.
This love of God is now in a dormant state in everyone’s heart. And, there, love of God is manifested in different ways, but it is contaminated by the material association. Now the material association has to be purified, and that dormant, natural love for Kåñëa has to be revived. That is the whole process.
To practice the regulative principles of bhakti-yoga one should, under the guidance of an expert spiritual master, follow certain principles: one should rise early in the morning, take bath, enter the temple and offer prayers and chant Hare Kåñëa, then collect flowers to offer to the Deity, cook foodstuffs to offer to the Deity, take prasädam, and so on. There are various rules and regulations which one should follow. And one should constantly hear Bhagavad-gétä and Çrémad-Bhägavatam from pure devotees. This practice can help anyone to rise to the level of love of God, and then he is sure of his progress into the spiritual kingdom of God. This practice of bhakti-yoga, under the rules and regulations, with the direction of a spiritual master, will surely bring one to the stage of love of God.
Bg
12.10
TEXT
10
TEXT
A>YaaSae_PYaSaMaQaaeR_iSa
MaTk-MaRParMaae >av )
MadQaRMaiPa k-MaaRi<a ku-vRiNSaiÖMavaPSYaiSa )) 10 ))
abhyäse ’py asamartho ’si
mat-karma-paramo bhava
mad-artham api karmäëi
kurvan siddhim aväpsyasi
abhyäse—in the
practice of; api—even; asamarthaù—unable;
asi—you are; mat-karma—My
work; paramaù—supreme; bhava—you
become; mat-artham—for My sake; api—even though; karmäëi—what;
kurvan—performing; siddhim—perfection;
aväpsyasi—achieve.
TRANSLATION
If you cannot practice the regulations of bhakti-yoga, then just
try to work for Me, because by working for Me you will come to the perfect
stage.
PURPORT
One who is not able even to practice the regulative principles of bhakti-yoga, under the guidance of a spiritual master,
can still be drawn to this perfectional stage by working for the Supreme Lord.
How to do this work has already been explained in the fifty-fifth verse of the
Eleventh Chapter. One should be sympathetic to the propagation of Kåñëa
consciousness. There are many devotees who are engaged in the propagation of Kåñëa
consciousness, and they require help. So, even if one cannot directly practice
the regulated principles of bhakti-yoga, he can
try to help such work. Every endeavor requires land, capital, organization, and
labor. Just as, in business, one requires a place to stay, some capital to use,
some labor, and some organization to expand, so the same is required in the
service of Kåñëa. The only difference is that in materialism one works for
sense gratification. The same work, however, can be performed for the satisfaction
of Kåñëa, and that is spiritual activity. If one has sufficient money, he can
help in building an office or temple for propagating Kåñëa consciousness. Or he
can help with publications. There are various fields of activity, and one
should be interested in such activities. If one cannot sacrifice the result of
such activities, the same person can still sacrifice some percentage to
propagate Kåñëa consciousness. This voluntary service to the cause of Kåñëa
consciousness will help one to rise to a higher state of love for God,
whereupon one becomes perfect.
Bg
12.11
TEXT
11
TEXT
AQaETadPYaXa¢-ae_iSa
k-Tau| MaÛaeGaMaaié[Ta" )
SavRk-MaRf-l/TYaaGa& TaTa" ku-å YaTaaTMavaNa( )) 11 ))
athaitad apy açakto ’si
kartuà mad-yogam äçritaù
sarva-karma-phala-tyägaà
tataù kuru yatätmavän
atha—even though;
etat—this; api—also;
açaktaù—unable; asi—you
are; kartum—to perform; mat—unto
Me; yogam—devotional service; äçritaù—refuge; sarva-karma—all
activities; phala—result; tyägam—for
renunciation; tataù—therefore; kuru—do; yata-ätmavan—self-situated.
TRANSLATION
If, however, you are unable to work in this consciousness, then
try to act giving up all results of your work and try to be self-situated.
PURPORT
It may be that one is unable to even sympathize with the activities
of Kåñëa consciousness because of social, familial or religious considerations
or because of some other impediments. If one attaches himself directly to the
activities of Kåñëa consciousness, there may be objection from family members,
or so many other difficulties. For one who has such a problem, it is advised
that he sacrifice the accumulated result of his activities to some good cause.
Such procedures are described in the Vedic rules. There are many descriptions
of sacrifices and special functions of the pumundi or
special work in which the result of one’s previous action may be applied. Thus
one may gradually become elevated to the state of knowledge. It is also found
that when one who is not even interested in the activities of Kåñëa
consciousness gives charity to some hospital or some other social institution,
he gives up the hard-earned results of his activities. That is also recommended
here because by the practice of giving up the fruits of one’s activities one is
sure to purify his mind gradually, and in that purified stage of mind one
becomes able to understand Kåñëa consciousness. Of course Kåñëa consciousness
is not dependant on any other experience because Kåñëa consciousness itself can
purify one’s mind, but if there are impediments to Kåñëa consciousness, one may
try to give up the result of his action. In that respect, social service,
community service, national service, sacrifice for one’s country, etc., may be
accepted so that some day one may come to the stage of pure devotional service
to the Supreme Lord. In Bhagavad-gétä we find it
is stated: yataù pravåttir bhütänäm: If one
decides to sacrifice for the supreme cause, even if he does not know that the
supreme cause is Kåñëa, he will come gradually to understand that Kåñëa is the
supreme cause by the sacrificial method.
Bg
12.12
TEXT
12
TEXT
é[eYaae ih
jaNaMa>YaaSaaJjaNaaÖyaNa& iviXaZYaTae )
DYaaNaaTk-MaRf-l/TYaaGaSTYaaGaaC^aiNTarNaNTarMa( )) 12 ))
çreyo hi jïänam abhyäsäj
jïänäd dhyänaà viçiñyate
dhyänät karma-phala-tyägas
tyägäc chäntir anantaram
çreyaù—better; hi—certainly; jïänam—knowledge;
abhyäsät—by practice; jnänät—better
than knowledge; dhyänam—meditation; viçiñyate—especially considered; dhyänät—from meditation; karma-phala-tyägaù—renunciation
of the results of fruitive action; tyägät—by such
renunciation; çäntiù—peace; anantaram—thereafter.
TRANSLATION
If you cannot take to this practice, then engage yourself in the
cultivation of knowledge. Better than knowledge, however, is meditation, and
better than meditation is renunciation of the fruits of action, for by such
renunciation one can attain peace of mind.
PURPORT
As mentioned in the previous verses, there are two kinds of
devotional service: the way of regulated principles, and the way of full
attachment in love to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. For those who are
actually not able to follow the principles of Kåñëa consciousness, it is better
to cultivate knowledge because by knowledge one can be able to understand his
real position. Gradually knowledge will develop to the point of meditation. By
meditation one can be able to understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead by
a gradual process. There are processes which make one understand that one
himself is the Supreme, and that sort of meditation is preferred if one is unable
to engage in devotional service. If one is not able to meditate in such a way,
then there are prescribed duties, as enjoined in the Vedic literature, for the brähmaëas, vaiçyas, and çüdras, which
we shall find in a later chapter of Bhagavad-gétä. But
in all cases, one should give up the result or fruits of labor; this means to
employ the result of karma for some good cause.
In summary, to reach the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the highest goal,
there are two processes: one process is by gradual development, and the other
process is direct. Devotional service in Kåñëa consciousness is the direct
method, and the other method involves renouncing the fruits of one’s
activities. Then one can come to the stage of knowledge, then to the stage of
meditation, then to the stage of understanding the Supersoul, and then to the
stage of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. One may either take the step by
step process or the direct path. The direct process is not possible for
everyone; therefore the indirect process is also good. It is, however, to be
understood that the indirect process is not recommended for Arjuna because he
is already at the stage of loving devotional service to the Supreme Lord. It is
for others who are not at this state; for them the gradual process of
renunciation, knowledge, meditation and realization of the Supersoul and
Brahman should be followed. But as far as Bhagavad-gétä is concerned, it is the direct method that is stressed.
Everyone is advised to take to the direct method and surrender unto the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa.
Bg
12.13, Bg 12.14, Bg 12.13-14
TEXTS
13–14
TEXT
AÜeía
SavR>aUTaaNaa& MaE}a" k-å<a Wv c )
iNaMaRMaae iNarhªar" SaMadu"%Sau%" +aMaq )) 13 ))
SaNTauí" SaTaTa& YaaeGaq YaTaaTMaa d*!iNaêYa" )
MaYYaiPaRTaMaNaaebuiÖYaaeR MaÙ¢-" Sa Mae iPa[Ya" )) 14 ))
adveñöä sarva-bhütänäà
maitraù karuëa eva ca
nirmamo nirahaìkäraù
sama-duùkha-sukhaù kñamé
santuñöaù satataà yogé
yatätmä dåòha-niçcayaù
mayy arpita-mano-buddhir
yo mad-bhaktaù sa me priyaù
adveñöä—not envious;
sarva-bhütänäm—for all living entities; maitraù—friendly; karuëaù—kindly;
eva—certainly; ca—also;
nirmamaù—with no sense of proprietorship; nirahaìkäraù—without false ego; sama—equally;
duùkhaù—distress; sukhaù—happiness;
kñamé—forgiving; santuñöaù—satisfied;
satatam—satisfied; yogé—engaged
in devotion; yatä-atmä—endeavoring; dådùaniçcayaù—with determination; mayi—upon Me; arpita—engaged;
manaù—mind; buddhiù—intelligent;
yaù—one who; mat-bhaktaù—My
devotee; saù me priyaù—he is dear to Me.
TRANSLATION
One who is not envious but who is a kind friend to all living
entities, who does not think himself a proprietor, who is free from false ego
and equal both in happiness and distress, who is always satisfied and engaged
in devotional service with determination and whose mind and intelligence are in
agreement with Me—he is very dear to Me.
PURPORT
Coming again to the point of pure devotional service, the Lord is
describing the transcendental qualifications of a pure devotee in these two
verses. A pure devotee is never disturbed in any circumstances. Nor is he
envious of anyone. Nor does a devotee become his enemy’s enemy; he thinks that
one is acting as his enemy due to his own past misdeeds. Thus it is better to
suffer than to protest. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam it
is stated: tat te ’nukampäà su-samékñyamaëo. Whenever
a devotee is in distress or has fallen into difficulty, he thinks that it is
the Lord’s mercy upon him. He thinks: “Thanks to my past misdeeds I should
suffer far, far greater than I am suffering now. So it is by the mercy of the
Supreme Lord that I am not getting all the punishment I am due. I am just
getting a little, by the mercy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.”
Therefore he is always calm, quiet and patient, despite many distressful
conditions. A devotee is also always kind to everyone, even to his enemy. Nirmama means that a devotee does not attach much
importance to the peace and trouble pertaining to the body because he knows
perfectly well that he is not the material body. He does not identify with the
body; therefore he is freed from the conception of false ego and is equiposed
both in happiness and distress. He is tolerant, and he is satisfied with
whatever comes by the grace of the Supreme Lord. He does not endeavor much to
achieve something with great difficulty; therefore he is always joyful. He is a
completely perfect mystic because he is fixed in the instructions received from
the spiritual master, and because his senses are controlled, he is determined.
He is not swayed by false argument because no one can lead him from the fixed
determination of devotional service. He is fully conscious that Kåñëa is the
eternal Lord, so no one can disturb him. All his qualifications enable him to
depend entirely on the Supreme Lord. Such a standard of devotional service is
undoubtably very rare, but a devotee becomes situated in that stage by
following the regulative principles of devotional service. Furthermore, the
Lord says that such a devotee is very dear to Him, for the Lord is always
pleased with all his activities in full Kåñëa consciousness.
Bg
12.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
YaSMaaàaeiÜJaTae
l/aek-ae l/aek-aàaeiÜJaTae c Ya" )
hzaRMazR>aYaaeÜeGaEMauR¢-ae Ya" Sa c Mae iPa[Ya" )) 15 ))
yasmän nodvijate loko
lokän nodvijate ca yaù
harñämarña-bhayodvegair
mukto yaù sa ca me priyaù
yasmät—from whom; na—never; udvijate—agétätes;
lokaù—persons; lokät—persons;
na—never; advijate—disturbed;
ca—also; yaù—anyone;
harña—happiness; amarña—distress;
bhaya—fearfulness; udvegaiù—with
anxiety; muktaù—freed; yaù—who;
saù—anyone; ca—also;
me—My; priyaù—very
dear.
TRANSLATION
He for whom no one is put into difficulty and who is not dirturbed
by anxiety, who is steady in happiness and distress, is very dear to Me.
PURPORT
A few of a devotee’s qualifications are further being described.
No one is put into difficulty, anxiety, fearfulness, or dissatisfaction by such
a devotee. Since a devotee is kind to everyone, he does not act in such a way
to put others into anxiety. At the same time, if others try to put a devotee
into anxiety, he is not disturbed. It is by the grace of the Lord that he is so
practiced that he is not disturbed by any outward disturbance. Actually because
a devotee is always engrossed in Kåñëa consciousness and engaged in devotional
service, all such material circumstances cannot woo him. Generally a
materialistic person becomes very happy when there is something for his sense
gratification and his body, but when he sees that others have something for
their sense gratification and he hasn’t, he is sorry and envious. When he is
expecting some retaliation from an enemy, he is in a state of fear, and when he
cannot successfully execute something he becomes dejected. But a devotee is
always transcendental to all these disturbances; therefore he is very dear to
Kåñëa.
Bg
12.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
ANaPae+a"
éuicdR+a odaSaqNaae GaTaVYaQa" )
SavaRrM>aPairTYaaGaq Yaae MaÙ¢-" Sa Mae iPa[Ya" )) 16 ))
anapekñaù çucir dakña
udäséno gata-vyathaù
sarvärambha-parityägé
yo mad-bhaktaù sa me priyaù
anapekñaù—neutral; çuciù—pure; dakñaù—expert;
udäsénaù—free from care; gata-vyathaù—freed
from all distress; sarva-ärambha—all endeavors; parityägé—renouncer; yaù—anyone;
mat-bhaktaù—My devotee; saù—he;
me—Me; priyaù—very
dear
TRANSLATION
A devotee who is not dependant on the ordinary course of
activities, who is pure, expert, without cares, free from all pains, and who
does not strive for some result, is very dear to Me.
PURPORT
Money may be offered to a devotee, but he should not struggle to
acquire it. If automatically, by the grace of the Supreme, money comes to him,
he is not agétäted. Naturally a devotee takes bath at least twice in a day and
rises early in the morning for devotional service. Thus he is naturally clean
both inwardly and outwardly. A devotee is always expert because he fully knows
the sense of all activities of life, and he is convinced of the authoritative
scriptures. A devotee never takes the part of a particular party; therefore he
is carefree. He is never pained because he is free from all designations; he
knows that his body is a designation, so if there are some bodily pains, he is
free. The pure devotee does not endeavor for anything which is against the
principles of devotional service. For example, constructing a big building
requires great energy, and a devotee does not take to such business if it does
not benefit him by advancing his devotional service. He may construct a temple
for the Lord, and for that he may take all kinds of anxiety, but he does not
construct a big house for his personal relations.
Bg
12.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
Yaae Na ôZYaiTa
Na Üeií Na XaaeciTa Na k-ax(+aiTa )
éu>aaéu>aPairTYaaGaq >ai¢-MaaNYa" Sa Mae iPa[Ya" )) 17 ))
yo na håñyati na dveñöi
na çocati na käìkñati
çubhäçubha-parityägé
bhaktimän yaù sa me priyaù
yaù—one who: na—never; håñyati—takes
pleasure; na—never; dveñöi—grieves;
na—never; çocati—laments;
na—never; käìkñati—desires;
çubha—auspicious; açubha—inauspicious;
parityägé—renouncer; bhaktimän—devotee;
yaù—one who; saù—he
is; me—My; priyaù—dear.
TRANSLATION
One who neither grasps pleasure or grief, who neither laments nor
desires, and who renounces both auspicious and inauspicious things, is very
dear to Me.
PURPORT
A pure devotee is neither happy nor distressed over material gain
and loss, nor is he very much anxious to get a son or disciple, nor is he
distressed by not getting them. If he loses anything which is very dear to him,
he does not lament. Similarly, if he does not get what he desires, he is not
distressed. He is transcendental in the face of all kinds of auspicious,
inauspicious and sinful activities. He is prepared to accept all kinds of risks
for the satisfaction of the Supreme Lord. Nothing is an impediment in the
discharge of his devotional service. Such a devotee is very dear to Kåñëa.
Bg
12.18, Bg 12.19, Bg 12.18-19
TEXTS
18–19
TEXT
SaMa" Xa}aaE
c iMa}ae c TaQaa MaaNaaPaMaaNaYaae" )
XaqTaaeZ<aSau%du"%ezu SaMa" Sa®ivviJaRTa" )) 18 ))
TauLYaiNaNdaSTauiTaMaaŒNaq SaNTauíae YaeNa ke-NaicTa( )
AiNake-Ta" iSQarMaiTa>aRi¢-MaaNMae iPa[Yaae Nar" )) 19 ))
samaù çatrau ca mitre ca
tathä mänäpamänayoù
çétoñëa-sukha-duùkheñu
samaù saìga-vivarjitaù
tulya-nindä-stutir mauné
santuñöo yena kenacit
aniketaù sthira-matir
bhaktimän me priyo naraù
samaù—equal; çatrau—to the enemy; ca—also;
mitre—to friends; ca—also;
tatha—so; mäna—honor;
apamänayoù—dishonor; çéta—cold;
uñëa—heat; sukha—happiness;
duùkheñu—distress; samaù—equiposed;
saìga-vivarjitaù—free from all association; tulya—equal; nindä—defamation;
stutiù—repute; mauné—silent;
santuñöaù—satisfied; yena—somehow;
kena—or other; cit—if;
aniketaù—having no residence; sthira—fixed; matiù—determination;
bhaktimän—engaged in devotion; me—My; priyaù—dear; naraù—a man.
TRANSLATION
One who is equal to friends and enemies, who is equiposed in honor
and dishonor, heat and cold, happiness and distress, fame and infamy, who is
always free from contamination, always silent and satisfied with anything, who
doesn’t care for any residence, who is fixed in knowledge and engaged in
devotional service, is very dear to Me.
PURPORT
A devotee is always free from all bad association. Sometimes one
is praised and sometimes one is defamed; that is the nature of human society.
But a devotee is always transcendental to artificial fame and infamy, distress
or happiness. He is very patient. He does not speak of anything but the topics
about Kåñëa; therefore he is called silent. Silent does not mean that one
should not speak; silent means that one should not speak nonsense. One should
speak only of essentials, and the most essential speech for the devotee is to
speak of the Supreme Lord. He is happy in all conditions; sometimes he may get
very palatable foodstuffs, sometimes not, but he is satisfied. Nor does he care
for any residential facility. He may sometimes live underneath a tree, and he
may sometimes live in a very palatial building; he is attracted to neither. He
is called fixed because he is fixed in his determination and knowledge. We may
find some repetition in the descriptions of the qualifications of a devotee,
but this is just to give an illustration of the fact that a devotee must acquire
all these qualifications. Without good qualifications, one cannot be a pure
devotee. One who is not a devotee has no good qualification. One who wants to
be recognized as a devotee should develop the good qualifications. Of course he
does not extraneously endeavor to acquire these qualifications, but engagement
in Kåñëa consciousness and devotional service automatically helps him develop
them.
Bg
12.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
Yae Tau
DaMaaRMa*TaiMad& YaQaae¢&- PaYauRPaaSaTae )
é[ÕDaaNaa MaTParMaa >a¢-aSTae_Taqv Mae iPa[Yaa" )) 20 ))
ye tu dharmämåtam idaà
yathoktaà paryupäsate
çraddadhänä mat-paramä
bhaktäs te ’téva me priyäù
ye—one who; tu—but; dharmya—generosity;
amåtam—understanding; idam—this;
yathä—as; uktam—said;
paryupäsate—completely engages; sraddadhänäù—with faith; mat-paramäù—taking
the Supreme Lord as everything; bhaktäù—devotees;
te—such persons; atéva—very,
very; me—Me; priyäù—dear.
TRANSLATION
He who follows this imperishable path of devotional service and
who completely engages himself with faith, making Me the supreme goal, is very,
very dear to Me.
PURPORT
In this chapter the religion of eternal engagement, the
explanation of the process of transcendental service for approaching the
Supreme Lord, is given. This process is very dear to the Lord, and He accepts a
person who is engaged in such a process. The
question who is better—one who is engaged in the path of impersonal Brahman or
one who is engaged in the personal service of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead—was raised by Arjuna, and the Lord replied to him so explicitly that
there is no doubt that devotional service to the Personality of Godhead is the
best of all processes of spiritual realization. In other words, in this chapter
it is decided that through good association, one develops attachment for pure
devotional service and thereby accepts a bona fide spiritual master and from
him begins to hear and chant and observe the regulative principles of
devotional service with faith, attachment and devotion and thus becomes engaged
in the transcendental service of the Lord. This path is recommended in this
chapter; therefore there is no doubt that devotional service is the only
absolute path for self-realization, for the attainment of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. The impersonal conception of the Supreme Absolute
Truth, as described in this chapter, is recommended only up to the time one
surrenders himself for self-realization. In other words, as long as one does
not have the chance to associate with a pure devotee, the impersonal conception
may be beneficial. In the impersonal conception of the Absolute Truth one works
without fruitive result, meditates and cultivates knowledge to understand
spirit and matter. This is necessary as long as one is not in the association
of a pure devotee. Fortunately, if one develops directly a desire to engage in
Kåñëa consciousness in pure devotional service, he does not need to undergo
step by step improvements in spiritual realization. Devotional service, as
described in the middle six chapters of Bhagavad-gétä, is
more congenial. One need not bother about materials to keep body and soul
together because by the grace of the Lord everything is carried out
automatically.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the Twelfth Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of Devotional Service.
Bg 13. Nature, the Enjoyer, and Consciousness
CHAPTER
THIRTEEN
Nature, the
Enjoyer, and Consciousness
Bg
13.1, Bg 13.2, Bg 13.1-2
TEXTS
1–2
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac
Pa[k*-iTa& Pauåz& cEv +ae}a& +ae}ajMaev c )
WTaÜeidTauiMaC^aiMa jaNa& jeYa& c ke-Xav )) 1 ))
é[q>aGavaNauvacwd& Xarqr& k-aENTaeYa +ae}aiMaTYai>aDaqYaTae )
WTaÛae veita Ta& Pa[ahu" +ae}aj wiTa TaiÜd" )) 2 ))
arjuna
uväca
prakåtià puruñaà caiva
kñetraà kñetra-jïam eva ca
etad veditum icchämi
jïänaà jïeyaà ca keçava
çré-bhagavän uväca
idaà çaréraà kaunteya
kñetram ity abhidhéyate
etad yo vetti taà prähuù
kñetra-jïa iti tad-vidaù
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna
said; prakåtim—nature; puruñam—the
enjoyer; ca—also; eva—certainly;
kñetram—body; kñetrajïam—knower
of the body; eva—certainly; ca—also; etat—all this; veditum—to understand; icchämi—I
wish; jïänam—knowledge; jïeyam—the
object of knowledge; ca—also; keçava—O Kåñëa; çré bhagavän
uväca—the Personality of Godhead said; idam—this;
çaréram—body; kaunteya—O
son of Kunté; kñetram—the field; iti—thus; abhidhéyate—is called; etat—this; yaù—anyone; vetti—knows; tam—him; prähuù—is called; kñetrajïaù—knower
of the body; iti—thus; tat-vidaù—one
who knows.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said: O my dear Kåñëa, I wish to know about prakåti
[nature], Puruña [the enjoyer], and the field and the knower of the field, and
of knowledge and the end of knowledge. The Blessed Lord then said: This body, O
son of Kunté, is called the field, and one who knows this body is called the
knower of the field.
PURPORT
Arjuna was inquisitive about prakåti or
nature, puruña, the enjoyer, kñetra, the field, kñetrajïa, its
knower, and of knowledge and the object of knowledge. When he inquired about
all these, Kåñëa said that this body is called the field and that one who knows
this body is called the knower of the field. This body is the field of activity
for the conditioned soul. The conditioned soul is entrapped in material
existence, and he attempts to lord over material nature. And so, according to
his capacity to dominate material nature, he gets a field of activity. That
field of activity is the body. And what is the body? The body is made of
senses. The conditioned soul wants to enjoy sense gratification, and, according
to his capacity to enjoy sense gratification, he is offered a body, or field of
activity. Therefore the body is called kñetra, or
the field of activity for the conditioned soul. Now, the person who does not
identify himself with the body is called kñetrajïa, the
knower of the field. It is not very difficult to understand the difference
between the field and its knower, the body and the knower of the body. Any
person can consider that from childhood to old age he undergoes so many changes
of body and yet is still one person, remaining. Thus there is a difference between
the knower of the field of activities and the actual field of activities. A
living conditioned soul can thus understand that he is different from the body.
It is described in the beginning—dehe ’smin—that
the living entity is within the body and that the body is changing from
childhood to boyhood and from boyhood to youth and from youth to old age, and
the person who owns the body knows that the body is changing. The owner is
distinctly kñetrajïa. Sometimes we understand
that I am happy, I am mad, I am a woman, I am a dog, I am a cat: these are the
knowers. The knower is different from the field. Although we use many
articles—our clothes, etc.—we know- that we are different from the things used.
Similarly, we also understand by a little contemplation that we are different
from the body.
In the first six chapters of Bhagavad-gétä, the knower of the body, the living entity, and the position by which he can understand the Supreme Lord are described. In the middle six chapters of the Gétä, the Supreme Personality of Godhead and the relationship between the individual soul and the Supersoul in regard to devotional service are described. The superior position of the Supreme Personality of Godhead and the subordinate position of the individual soul are definitely defined in these chapters. The living entities are subordinate under all circumstances, but in their forgetfulness they are suffering. When enlightened by pious activities, they approach the Supreme Lord in different capacities—as the distressed, those in want of money, the inquisitive, and those in search of knowledge. That is also described. Now, starting with the Thirteenth Chapter, how the living entity comes into contact with material nature, how he is delivered by the Supreme Lord through the different methods of fruitive activities, cultivation of knowledge, and the discharge of devotional service are explained. Although the living entity is completely different from the material body, he somehow becomes related. This also is explained.
Bg 13.3
TEXT
3
TEXT
+ae}aj&
caiPa Maa& iviÖ SavR+ae}aezu >aarTa )
+ae}a+ae}ajYaaejaRNa& YataJjaNa& MaTa& MaMa )) 3 ))
kñetra-jïaà cäpi mäà viddhi
sarva-kñetreñu bhärata
kñetra-kñetrajïayor jïänaà
yat taj jïänaà mataà mama
kñetrajïam—the knower; ca—also; api—certainly; mäm—Me; viddhi—know; sarva—all; kñetreñu—in
bodily fields; bhärata—O son of Bharata; kñetra—field of activities (the body); kñetrajïayoù—the knower of the field; jïänam—knowledge; yat—that
which is taught; tat—that; jïänam—knowledge; matam—opinion;
mama—that.
TRANSLATION
O scion of Bharata, you should understand that I am also the
knower in all bodies, and to understand this body and its owner is called
knowledge. That is My opinion.
PURPORT
While discussing the subject of this body and the owner of the body,
the soul and the Supersoul, we shall find three different topics of study: the
Lord, the 1iving entity, and matter. In every field of activities, in every
body, there are two souls: the individual soul and the Supersoul. Because the
Supersoul is the plenary expansion of the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
Kåñëa, Kåñëa says, “I am also the knower, but I am not the individual owner of
the body. I am the superknower. I am present in every body as the Paramätmä, or
Supersoul.”
One who studies the subject matter of the field of activity and the knower of the field very minutely, in terms of this Bhagavad-gétä, can attain to knowledge.
The Lord says: “I am the knower of the field of activities in every individual body.” The individual may be the knower of his own body, but he is not in knowledge of other bodies. The Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is present as the Supersoul in all bodies, knows everything about all bodies. He knows all the different bodies of all the various species of life. A citizen may know everything about his patch of land, but the king knows not only his palace but all the properties possessed by the individual citizens. Similarly, one may be the proprietor of the body individually, but the Supreme Lord is the proprietor of all bodies. The king is the original proprietor of the kingdom, and the citizen is the secondary proprietor. Similarly, the Supreme Lord is the supreme proprietor of all bodies.
The body consists of the senses. The Supreme Lord is Håñékeça, which means controller of the senses. He is the original controller of the senses, just as the king is the original controller of all the activities of the state, and the citizens are secondary controllers. The Lord also says: “I am also the knower.” This means that He is the superknower; the individual soul knows only his particular body. In the Vedic literature, it is stated as follows:
kñeträëi hi çaréräëi béjaà cäpi çubhäçubhe
täni vetti sa yogätmä tataù kñetrajïa ucyate.
This body is called the kñetra, and
within it dwells the owner of the body and the Supreme Lord who knows both the
body and the owner of the body. Therefore He is called the knower of all
fields. The distinction between the field of activities, the owner of
activities and the supreme owner of activities is described as follows. Perfect
knowledge of the constitution of the body, the constitution of the individual
soul, and the constitution of the Supersoul is known in terms of Vedic
literature as jïänam. That is the opinion of
Kåñëa. To understand both the soul and the Supersoul as one yet distinct is
knowledge. One who does not understand the field of activity and the knower of
activity is not in perfect knowledge. One has to understand the position of prakåti, nature, and puruña, the
enjoyer of the nature, and éçvara, the knower who
dominates or controls nature and the individual soul. One should not confuse
the three in their different capacities. One should not confuse the painter,
the painting and the easel. This material world, which is the field of
activities, is nature, and the enjoyer of nature is the living entity, and
above them both is the supreme controller, the Personality of Godhead. It is
stated in the Vedic language: “bhoktä bhogyaà preritäraà
ca matvä sarvaà proktaà tri-vidhaà brahmam etat.” There are three
Brahman conceptions: prakåti is Brahman as the field of activities, and the jéva (individual soul) is also Brahman and is trying to
control material nature, and the controller of both of them is also Brahman,
but He is the factual controller.
In this chapter it will be also explained that out of the two
knowers, one is fallible and the other is infallible. One is superior and the
other is subordinate. One who understands the two knowers of the field to be
one and the same contradicts the Supreme Personality of Godhead who states here
very clearly that “I am also the knower of the field of activity.” One who
misunderstands a rope to be a serpent is not in knowledge. There are different
kinds of bodies, and there are different owners of the bodies. Because each
individual soul has his individual capacity of lording it over material nature,
there are different bodies. But the Supreme also is present in them as the
controller. The word ca is
significant, for it indicates the total number of bodies. That is the
opinion of Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa: Kåñëa is the Supersoul present in each
and every body apart from the individual soul. And Kåñëa explicitly says here
that the Supersoul is the controller of both the field of activities and the
finite enjoyer.
Bg 13.4
TEXT
4
TEXT
TaT+ae}a&
YaÀ Yaad*Kc YaiÜk-air YaTaê YaTa( )
Sa c Yaae YaTPa[>aavê TaTSaMaaSaeNa Mae é*<au )) 4 ))
tat kñetraà yac ca yädåk ca
yad-vikäri yataç ca yat
sa ca yo yat-prabhävaç ca
tat samäsena me çåëu
tat—that; kñetram—field of activities; yat—as;
ca—also; yädåk—as
it is; ca—also; yat—what
is; vikäri—changes; yataù—from
which; ca—also; yat—one;
saù—he; ca—also; yaù—one; yat—which; prabhävaù ca—influence
also; tat—that; samäsena—in
detail; me—from Me; çåëu—understand.
TRANSLATION
Now please hear My brief description of this field of activity and
how it is constituted, what its changes are, whence it is produced, who that
knower of the field of activities is, and what his influences are.
PURPORT
The Lord is describing the field of activities and the knower of
the field of activities in their constitutional positions. One has to know how
this body is constituted, the materials of which this body is made, under whose
control this body is working, how the changes are taking place, wherefrom the
changes are coming, what the causes are, what the reasons are, what the
ultimate goal of the individual is, and what the actual form of the individual
soul is. One should also know the distinction between the individual living
soul and the Supersoul, the different influences, their potentials, etc. One
just has to understand this Bhagavad-gétä directly
from the description given by the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and all this
will be clarified. But one should be careful not to consider the Supreme Personality
of Godhead in every body and individual soul to be the jéva.
This is something like equalizing the potent and the impotent.
Bg 13.5
TEXT
5
TEXT
‰izi>abRhuDaa
GaqTa& ^Ndaei>aivRivDaE" Pa*Qak(- )
b]øSaU}aPadEêEv heTauMaiÙivRiNaiêTaE" )) 5 ))
åñibhir bahudhä gétaà
chandobhir vividhaiù påthak
brahma-sütra-padaiç caiva
hetumadbhir viniçcitaiù
åñibhiù—by the wise
sages; bahudhä—in many ways; gétäm—described; chandobhiù—Vedic
hymns; vividhaiù—in various; påthak—variously; brahma-sütra—the
Vedänta; padaiù—aphorism; ca—also;
eva—certainly; hetumadbhiù—with
cause and effect; viniçcitaiù—ascertain.
TRANSLATION
That knowledge of the field of activities and of the knower of
activities is described by various sages in various Vedic writings—especially
in the Vedänta-sütra—and is presented with all reasoning as to cause and
effect.
PURPORT
The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, is the highest
authority in explaining this knowledge. Still, as a matter of course, learned
scholars and standard authorities always give evidence from previous
authorities. Kåñëa is explaining this most controversial point regarding the
duality and non-duality of the soul and the Supersoul by referring to
Scriptures, the Vedänta, which are accepted as
authority. First, He says, this is according to different sages. As far as the
sages are concerned, besides Himself, Vyäsadeva, the author of the Vedänta-sütra, is a great
sage, and in the Vedänta-sütra duality is
perfectly explained. And Vyäsadeva’s father, Paräçara, was also a great sage, and
he writes in his books of religiosity: “aham tvaà ca
athänye…” “We—you, I and various other living entities—are all
transcendental, although in material bodies. Now we are fallen into the ways of
the three modes of material nature according to our different karma. As such, some are on higher levels, and some are
in the lower nature. The higher and lower natures exist due to ignorance and
are being manifested in an infinite number of living entities. But the
Supersoul, which is infallible, is uncontaminated by the three qualities of
nature and is transcendental.” Similarly, in the original Vedas, a distinction between the soul, the Supersoul
and the body is made, especially in the Kaöha Upaniñad.
There is a manifestation of the Supreme Lord’s energy known as annamaya by which one depends simply upon food for existence. This is a materialistic realization of the Supreme. Then there is präëamaya; this means that after realizing the Supreme Absolute Truth in foodstuff, one can realize the Absolute Truth in the living symptoms, or life forms. In jïänamaya the living symptom develops to the point of thinking, feeling, and willing. Then there is Brahman realization and the realization called vijïänamaya by which the living entity’s mind and life symptoms are distinguished from the living entity himself. The next and supreme stage is änandamaya, realization of the all-blissful nature. Thus there are five stages of Brahman realization, which is called brahma puccham. Out of these the first three—annamaya, präëamaya, and jïänamaya—involve the fields of activities of the living entities. Transcendental to all these fields of activities is the Supreme Lord, who is called änandamaya. In the Vedänta-sütra also the Supreme is called änandamayo ’bhyäsät. The Supreme Personality of Godhead is by nature full of joy, and to enjoy His transcendental bliss, He expands into vijïänamaya, präëamaya, jïänamaya, and annamaya. In this field of activities the living entity is considered to be the enjoyer, and different from him is the änandamaya. That means that if the living entity decides to enjoy, in dovetailing himself with the änandamaya, then he becomes perfect. This is the real picture of the Supreme Lord, as supreme knower of the field, the living entity, as subordinate knower, and the nature of the field of activities.
Bg
13.6, Bg 13.7, Bg 13.6-7
TEXTS
6–7
TEXT
Maha>aUTaaNYahªarae
buiÖrVYa¢-Maev c )
wiNd]Yaai<a dXaEk&- c PaÄ ceiNd]YaGaaecra" )) 6 ))
wC^a Üez" Sau%& du"%& SaºaTaêeTaNaa Da*iTa" )
WTaT+ae}a& SaMaaSaeNa Saivk-arMaudaôTaMa( )) 7 ))
mahä-bhütäny ahaìkäro
buddhir avyaktam eva ca
indriyäëi daçaikaà ca
païca cendriya-gocaräù
icchä dveñaù sukhaà duùkhaà
saìghätaç cetanä dhåtiù
etat kñetraà samäsena
sa-vikäram udähåtam
mahä-bhütäni—great
elements; ahaìkäraù—false ego; buddhiù—intelligence; avyaktam—the
unmanifested; eva—certainly; ca—also; indriyäëi—senses
; daça ekam—eleven; ca—also;
païca—five; ca—also;
indriya-gocaräù—objects of the senses; icchä—desire; dveñaù—hatred;
sukham—happiness; duùkham—distress;
saìghataù—the aggregate; cetanä—living
symptoms; dhåtiù—conviction; etat—all this; kñetram—field
of activities; samäsena—in summary; sa-vikäram—interaction; udähåtam—exemplified.
TRANSLATION
The five great elements, false ego, intelligence, the
unmanifested, the ten senses, the mind, the five sense objects, desire, hatred,
happiness, distress, the aggregate, the life symptoms, and convictions—all
these are considered, in summary, to be the field of activities and its
interactions.
PURPORT
From all the authoritative statements of the great sages, the
Vedic hymns and the aphorisms of the Vedänta-sütra, the
components of this world are earth, water, fire, air and ether. These are the
five great elements (mahäbhüta). Then there are
false ego, intelligence and the unmanifested stage of the three modes of
nature. Then there are five senses for acquiring knowledge: the eyes, ears,
nose, tongue and touch. Then five working senses: voice, legs, hands, the anus
and the genitals. Then, above the senses, there is the mind, which is within
and which can be called the sense within. Therefore, including the mind, there
are eleven senses altogether. Then there are the five objects of the senses:
smell, taste, warmth, touch and sound. Now the aggregate of these twenty-four
elements is called the field of activity. If one makes an analytical study of
these twenty-four subjects, then he can very well understand the field of
activity. Then there is desire, hatred, pleasure and pain, which are
interactions, representations of the five great elements in the gross body. The
living symptoms, represented by consciousness and conviction, are the
manifestation of the subtle body—mind, ego and intelligence. These subtle
elements are included within the field of activities.
The five great elements
are a gross representation of the subtle false ego. They are a representation
in the material conception. Consciousness is represented by intelligence, of
which the unmanifested stage is the three modes of material nature. The
unmanifested three modes of material nature is called pradhäna.
One who desires to know the twenty-four elements in detail along with their interactions should study the philosophy in more detail. In Bhagavad-gétä, a summary only is given.
The body is the representation of all these factors, and there are changes of the body, which are six in number: the body is born, it grows, it stays, it produces by-products, then begins to decay, and at the last stage it vanishes. Therefore the field is a nonpermanent material thing. However, the kñetrajïa, the knower of the field, its proprietor, is different.
Bg
13.8, Bg 13.9, Bg 13.10, Bg 13.11, Bg 13.12, Bg 13.8-12
TEXTS
8–12
TEXT
AMaaiNaTvMadiM>aTvMaih&Saa
+aaiNTaraJaRvMa( )
AacaYaaeRPaaSaNa& XaaEc& SQaEYaRMaaTMaiviNaGa]h" )) 8 ))
wiNd]YaaQaeRzu vEraGYaMaNahªar Wv c )
JaNMaMa*TYauJaraVYaaiDadu"%daezaNaudXaRNaMa( )) 9 ))
ASai¢-rNai>aZv®" Pau}adarGa*haidzu )
iNaTYa& c SaMaictaTviMaíaiNaíaePaPaitazu )) 10 ))
MaiYa caNaNYaYaaeGaeNa >ai¢-rVYai>acair<aq )
iviv¢-deXaSaeivTvMariTaJaRNaSa&Said )) 11 ))
ADYaaTMajaNaiNaTYaTv& TatvjaNaaQaRdXaRNaMa( )
WTaJjaNaiMaiTa Pa[ae¢-MajaNa& YadTaae_NYaQaa )) 12 ))
amänitvam adambhitvam
ahiàsä kñäntir ärjavam
äcäryopäsanaà çaucaà
sthairyam ätma-vinigrahaù
indriyärtheñu vairägyam
anahaìkära eva ca
janma-måtyu-jarä-vyädhi-
duùkha-doñänudarçanam
asaktir anabhiñvaìgaù
putra-dära-gåhädiñu
nityaà ca sama-cittatvam
iñöäniñöopapattiñu
mayi cänanya-yogena
bhaktir avyabhicäriëé
vivikta-deça-sevitvam
aratir jana-saàsadi
adhyätma-jïäna-nityatvaà
tattva-jïänärtha-darçanam
etaj jïänam iti proktam
ajïänaà yad ato ’nyathä
amänitvam—humility; adambhitvam—pridelessness; ahiàsä—nonviolence;
kñäntiù—tolerance; ärjavam—simplicity;
äcärya-upäsanam—approaching a bona fide spiritual
master; çaucam—cleanliness; sthairyam—steadfastness; ätma-vinigrahaù—control;
iëdriya-artheñu—in the matter of the senses; vairägyam—renunciation; anahaìkäraù—being
without false egoism; eva—certainly; ca—also; janma—birth; måtyu—death; jarä—old
age; vyädhi—disease; duùkha—distress;
doña—fault; anudarçanam—observing;
asaktiù—without attachment; anabhiñvaìgaù—without association; putra—son; dära—wife; gåha-ädiñu—home, etc.; nityam;
ca—also; sama-cittatvam—equilibrium;
iñöa—desirable; aniñöaù—undesirable;
upapattiñu—having obtained; mayi—unto Me; ca—also; ananya-yogena—by devotional service; bhaktiù—devotion; avyabhicäriëé—constant,
unalloyed; vivikta—solitary; deça—place; sevitvam—aspiring;
aratiù—without attachment; jana—people in general; saàsadi—mass;
adhyätma—pertaining to the self; jïäna—knowledge; nityatvam—eternity;
tattva-jïäna—knowledge of the truth; artha—the object; darçanam—philosophy;
etat—all this; jïänam—knowledge;
iti—thus; proktam—declared;
ajïänam—ignoraëce; yat—that
which; ataù—from this; anyathä—others.
TRANSLATION
Humility, pridelessness, nonviolence, tolerance, simplicity,
approaching a bona fide spiritual master, cleanliness, steadiness and
self-control; renunciation of the objects of sense gratification, absence of
false ego, the perception of the evil of birth, death, old age and disease;
nonattachment to children, wife, home and the rest, and evenmindedness amid
pleasant and unpleasant events; constant and unalloyed devotion to Me,
resorting to solitary places, detachment from the general mass of people;
accepting the importance of self-realization, and philosophical search for the
Absolute Truth—all these I thus declare to be knowledge, and what is contrary
to these is ignorance.
PURPORT
This process of knowledge is sometimes misunderstood by less
intelligent men as being the interaction of the field of activity. But actually
this is the real process of knowledge. If one accepts this process, then the
possibility of approaching the Absolute Truth exists. This is not the
interaction of the tenfold elements, as described before, This is actually the
means to get out of it. Of all the descriptions of the process of knowledge,
the most important point is described in the first line of the tenth verse: The
process of knowledge terminates in unalloyed devotional service to the Lord.
So, if one does not approach, or is not able to approach, the transcendental
service of the Lord, then the other nineteen items are of no particular value.
But, if one takes to devotional service in full Kåñëa consciousness, the other
nineteen items automatically develop within him. The principle of accepting a
spiritual master, as mentioned in the seventh verse, is essential. Even for one
who takes to devotional service, it is most important. Transcendental life
begins when one accepts a bona fide spiritual master. The Supreme Personality
of Godhead, Çré Kåñëa, clearly states here that this process of knowledge is
the actual path. Anything speculated beyond this is nonsense.
As for the knowledge outlined here, the items may be analyzed as follows: Humility means that one should not be anxious to have the satisfaction of being honored by others. The material conception of life makes us very eager to receive honor from others, but from the point of view of a man in perfect knowledge—who knows that he is not this body—anything, honor or dishonor, pertaining to this body is useless. One should not be hankering after this material deception. People are very anxious to be famous for their religion, and consequently sometimes it is found that without understanding the principles of religion, one enters into some group, which is not actually following religious principles, and then wants to advertise himself as a religious mentor. As for actual advancement in spiritual science, one should have a test to see how far he is progressing. He can judge by these items.
Nonviolence is generally taken to mean not killing or destroying the body, but actually nonviolence means not to put others into distress. People in general are trapped by ignorance in the material concept of life, and they perpetually suffer material pains. So, unless one elevates people to spiritual knowledge, one is practicing violence. One should try his best to distribute real knowledge to the people, so that they may become enlightened and leave this material entanglement. That is nonviolence.
Tolerance means that one should be practiced to bear insult and dishonor from others. If one is engaged in the advancement of spiritual knowledge, there will be so many insults and much dishonor from others. This is expected because material nature is so constituted. Even a boy like Prahläda, who, only five years old, was engaged in the cultivation of spiritual knowledge, was endangered when his father became antagonistic to his devotion. The father tried to kill him in so many ways, but Prahlada tolerated him. So, for making advancement in spiritual knowledge, there may be many impediments, but we should be tolerant and continue our progress with determination.
Simplicity means that without diplomacy one should be so straightforward that he can disclose the real truth even to an enemy. As for acceptance of the spiritual master, that is essential, because without the instruction of a bona fide spiritual master, one cannot progress in the spiritual science. One should approach the spiritual master with all humility and offer him all services so that he will be pleased to bestow his blessings upon the disciple. Because a bona fide spiritual master is a representative of Kåñëa, if he bestows any blessings upon his disciple, that will make the disciple immediately advanced without the disciple’s following the regulated principles. Or, the regulated principles will be easier for one who has served the spiritual master without reservation.
Cleanliness is essential for making advancement in spiritual life. There are two kinds of cleanliness: external and internal. External cleanliness means taking a bath, but for internal cleanliness, one has to think of Kåñëa always and chant Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/Hare Räma. Hare Räma, Räma Räma Hare Hare. This process cleans the accumulated dust of past karma from the mind.
Steadiness means that one should be very determined to make progress in spiritual life. Without such determination, one cannot make tangible progress. And self-control means that one should not accept anything which is detrimental to the path of spiritual progress. One should become accustomed to this and reject anything which is against the path of spiritual progress. This is real renunciation. The senses are so strong that they are always anxious to have sense gratification. One should not cater to these demands, which are not necessary. The senses should only be gratified to keep the body fit so that one can discharge his duty in advancing in spiritual life. The most important and uncontrollable sense is the tongue. If one can control the tongue, then there is every possibility of controlling the other senses. The function of the tongue is to taste and to vibrate. Therefore, by systematic regulation, the tongue should always be engaged in tasting the remnants of foodstuffs offered to Kåñëa and chanting Hare Kåñëa. As far as the eyes are concerned, they should not be allowed to see anything but the beautiful form of Kåñëa. That will control the eyes. Similarly, the ears should be engaged in hearing about Kåñëa and the nose in smelling the flowers offered to Kåñëa. This is the process of devotional service, and it is understood here that Bhagavad-gétä is simply expounding the science of devotional service. Devotional service is the main and sole objective. Unintelligent commentators on the Gétä try to divert the mind of the reader to other subjects, but there is no other subject in Bhagavad-gétä but devotional service.
False ego means accepting this body as oneself. When one understands that he is not his body and is spirit soul, that is real ego. Ego is there. False ego is condemned, but not real ego. In the Vedic literature, it is said: ahaà brahmäsmi. I am Brahman, I am spirit. This “I am,” the sense of self, also exists in the liberated stage of self-realization. This sense of “I am” is ego, but when the sense of “I am” is applied to this false body, it is false ego. When the sense of self is applied to reality, that is real ego. There are some philosophers who say we should give up our ego, but we cannot give up our ego because ego means identity. We ought, of course, to give up the false identification with the body.
One should try to understand the distress of accepting birth, death, old age and disease. There are descriptions in various Vedic literatures of birth. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam the world of the unborn, the child’s stay in the womb of the mother, its suffering, etc., are all very graphically described. It should be thoroughly understood that birth is distressful. Because we forget how much distress we have suffered within the womb of the mother, we do not make any solution to the repetition of birth and death. Similarly at the time of death, there are all kinds of sufferings, and they are also mentioned in the authoritative scriptures. These should be discussed. And as far as disease and old age are concerned, everyone gets practical experience. No one wants to be diseased, and no one wants to become old, but there is no avoiding these. Unless we have a pessimistic view of this material life, considering the distresses of birth, death, old age and disease, there is no impetus for our making advancement in spiritual life.
As for detachment from children, wife and home, it is not meant that one should have no feeling for these. They are natural objects of affection, but when they are not favorable to spiritual progress, then one should not be attached to them. The best process for making the home pleasant is Kåñëa consciousness. If one is in full Kåñëa consciousness, he can make his home very happy because this process of Kåñëa consciousness is very easy. One need only chant Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare, accept the remnants of foodstuffs offered to Kåñëa, have some discussion on books like Bhagavad-gétä and Çrémad-Bhägavatam, and engage oneself in Deity worship. These four will make one happy. One should train the members of his family in this way. The family members can sit down morning and evening and chant together Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare. If one can mold his family life in this way to develop Kåñëa consciousness, following these four principles, then there is no need to change from family life to renounced life. But if it is not congenial, not favorable for spiritual advancement, then family life should be abandoned. One must sacrifice everything to realize or serve Kåñëa, just as Arjuna did. Arjuna did not want to kill his family members, but when he understood that these family members were impediments to his Kåñëa realization, he accepted the instruction of Kåñëa and fought and killed them. In all cases, one should be detached from the happiness and distress of family life because in this world one can never be fully happy or fully miserable. Happiness and distress are concommitant factors of material life. One should learn to tolerate, as advised in Bhagavad-gétä. One can never restrict the coming and going of happiness and distress, so one should be detached from the materialistic way of life and be automatically equiposed in both cases. Generally, when we get something desirable, we are very happy, and when we get something undesirable, we are distressed. But if we are actually in the spiritual position, these things will not agitate us. To reach that stage, we have to practice unbreakable devotional service; devotional service to Kåñëa without deviation means engaging oneself in the nine processes of devotional service, chanting, hearing, worshiping, offering respect, etc., as described in the last verse of the Ninth Chapter. That process should be followed. Naturally, when one is adapted to the spiritual way of life, he will not want to mix with materialistic men. That would go against his grain. One may test himself by seeing how far he is inclined to live in a solitary place without unwanted association.
Naturally a devotee has no taste for unnecessary sporting or cinema-going or enjoying some social function, because he understands that these are simply a waste of time. There are many research scholars and philosophers who study sex life or some other subject, but according to Bhagavad-gétä, such research work and philosophical speculation have no value. That is more or less nonsensical. According to Bhagavad-gétä, one should make research by philosophical discretion into the nature of the soul. One should make research to understand with what the self is concerned. That is recommended here.
As far as self-realization is concerned, it is clearly stated here that bhakti-yoga is especially practical. As soon as there is a question of devotion, one must consider the relationship between the Supersoul and the individual soul. The individual soul and the Supersoul cannot be one, at least not in the bhakti conception, the devotional conception of life. This service of the individual soul to the Supreme Soul is eternal, nityam, as is clearly stated. So bhakti or devotional service is eternal. One should be established in that philosophical conviction, otherwise it is only a waste of time, ignorance.
In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam, this is explained; vadanti tat tattva-vidas tattvaà yaj jïänam advayam. “Those who are actually knowers of the Absolute Truth know that the Self is realized in three different phases as Brahman, Paramätmä and Bhagavän.” (Bhäg. 1.2.11) Bhagavän is the last word in the realization of the Absolute Truth; therefore one should reach up to that platform of understanding the Supreme Personality of Godhead and thus engage in the devotional service of the Lord. That is perfection of knowledge.
Beginning from practicing humility up to the point of realization of the Supreme Truth, the Absolute Personality of Godhead, this process is just like a staircase beginning from the ground floor up to the top floor. Now on this staircase there are so many people who have reached the first floor, the second or third floor, etc., but unless one reaches the top floor, which is the understanding of Kåñëa, he is at a lower stage of knowledge. If anyone wants to compete with God and at the same time make advancement in spiritual knowledge, he will be frustrated. It is clearly stated that without humility understanding is harmful. To think oneself God is most puffed up. Although the living entity is always being kicked by the stringent laws of material nature, still he thinks, “I am God” because of ignorance. One should be humble and know that he is subordinate to the Supreme Lord. Due to rebellion against the Supreme Lord, one becomes subordinate to material nature. One must know and be convinced of this truth.
Bg
13.13
TEXT
13
TEXT
jeYa&
YataTPa[v+YaaiMa YaJjaTvaMa*TaMaénuTae )
ANaaidMaTPar& b]ø Na SataàaSaduCYaTae )) 13 ))
jïeyaà yat tat pravakñyämi
yaj jïätvämåtam açnute
anädi mat-paraà brahma
na sat tan näsad ucyate
jïeyam—knowable; yat—that; tat—which; pravakñyämi—I shall now explain; yat—which; jïätvä—knowing;
amåtam—nectar; açnute—taste;
anädi—beginningless; mat-param—subordinate
to Me; brahma—spirit; na—neither;
sat—cause; tat—that;
na—nor; asat—effect;
ucyate—is called.
TRANSLATION
I shall now explain the knowable, knowing which you will taste the
eternal. This is beginningless, and it is subordinate to Me. It is called
Brahman, the spirit, and it lies beyond the cause and effect of this material
world.
PURPORT
The Lord has explained the field of activities and the knower of
the field. He has also explained the process of knowing the knower of the field
of activities. Now He is explaining the knowable, both the soul and the
Supersoul respectively. By knowledge of the knower, both the soul and the
Supersoul, one can relish the nectar of life. As explained in the Second
Chapter, the living entity is eternal. This is also confirmed here. There is no
specific date at which the jéva was born. Nor can
anyone trace out the history of jévätmä’s manifestation
from the Supreme Lord. Therefore it is beginningless. The Vedic literature
confirms this: na jäyate måjayate vä vipaçcit. The
knower of the body is never born and never dies, and he is full of knowledge.
The Supreme Lord is also stated in the Vedic literature as pradhäna-kñetrajïa-patir guëeçaù. The Supreme Lord as
the Supersoul is the chief knower of the body, and He is the master of the
three modes of material nature. In the småti it
is said: däsa-bhüto harer eva nänyasvaiva kadäcana. The
living entities are eternally in the service of the Supreme Lord. This is also
confirmed by Lord Caitanya in His teaching; therefore the description of
Brahman mentioned in this verse is in relation to the individual soul, and when
the word Brahman is applied to the living entity, it is to be understood that
he is vijïänaà brahma as opposed to ananta-brahma. Ananta-brahma is the
Supreme Brahman Personality of Godhead.
Bg
13.14
TEXT
14
TEXT
SavRTa"
Paai<aPaad& TaTSavRTaae_i+aiXaraeMau%Ma( )
SavRTa" é[uiTaMaçaeke- SavRMaav*TYa iTaïiTa )) 14 ))
sarvataù päëi-pädaà tat
sarvato ’kñi-çiro-mukham
sarvataù çrutimal loke
sarvam ävåtya tiñöhati
sarvataù—everywhere; päëi—hands; pädam—legs; tat—that; sarvataù—everywhere;
akñi—eyes; çiraù—head;
mukham—face; sarvataù—everywhere;
çrutimat—hearing; loke—in
the world; sarvam—everywhere, ävåtya—covering; tiñöhati—exists.
TRANSLATION
Everywhere are His hands and legs, His eyes and faces, and He
hears everything. In this way the Supersoul exists.
PURPORT
As the sun exists diffusing its unlimited rays, so does the
Supersoul, or Supreme Personality of Godhead. He exists in His all-pervading
form, and in Him exist all the individual living entities, beginning from the
first great teacher, Brahmä, down to the small ants. There are unlimited heads,
legs, hands and eyes, and unlimited living entities. All are existing in and on
the Supersoul. Therefore the Supersoul is all-pervading. The individual soul,
however, cannot say that he has his hands, legs and eyes everywhere. That is
not possible. If he thinks that although under ignorance he is not conscious
that his hands and legs are diffused all over, but when he attains to proper
knowledge he will come to that stage, his thinking is contradictory. This means
that the individual soul, having become conditioned by material nature, is not
supreme. The Supreme is different from the individual soul. The Supreme Lord
can extend His hand without limit; the individual soul cannot. In Bhagavad-gétä the Lord says that if anyone offers Him a
flower, or a fruit, or a little water, He accepts. If the Lord is a far
distance away, how can He accept things? This is the omnipotence of the Lord:
even though He is situated in His own abode, far, far away from earth, He can
extend His hand to accept what anyone offers. That is His potency. In the Brahmä-saàhitä it is stated, goloka
eva nivasati: although He is always engaged in pastimes in His
transcendental planet, He is all-pervading. The individual soul cannot claim
that he is all-pervading. Therefore this verse describes the Supreme Soul, the
Personality of Godhead, not the individual soul.
Bg
13.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
SaveRiNd]YaGau<aa>aaSa&
SaveRiNd]YaivviJaRTaMa( )
ASa¢&- SavR>a*ÀEv iNaGauR<a& Gau<a>aae¢*- c )) 15 ))
sarvendriya-guëäbhäsaà
sarvendriya-vivarjitam
asaktaà sarva-bhåc caiva
nirguëaà guëa-bhoktå ca
sarve—all; indriya—senses; guëa—qualities;
äbhäsam—original source; sarva—all;
indriya—senses; vivarjitam—being
without; asaktam—without attachment; sarva-bhåt—maintainer of everyone; ca—also; eva—certainly; nirguëam—without material qualities; guëa-bhoktå—simultaneously master of the guëas; ca—also.
TRANSLATION
The Supersoul is the original source of all senses, yet He is
without senses. He is unattached, although He is the maintainer of all living
beings. He transcends the modes of nature, and at the same time He is the
master of all modes of material nature.
PURPORT
The Supreme Lord, although the source of all the senses of the
living entities, doesn’t have material senses like they have. Actually, the
individual souls have spiritual senses, but in condemned life they are covered
with the material elements and therefore the sense activities are exhibited
through matter. The Supreme Lord’s senses are not so covered. His senses are
transcendental and are therefore called nirguëa. Guëa means
the material modes, but His senses are without material covering. It should be
understood that His senses are not exactly like ours. Although He is the source
of all our sensual activities, He has His transcendental senses which are
uncontaminated. This is very nicely explained in the Çvetäçvatara
Upaniñad in the verse: sarvataù päëi-pädam. The
Supreme Personality of Godhead has no hands which are materially contaminated,
but He has His hands and accepts whatever sacrifice is offered to Him. That is
the distinction between the conditioned soul and the Supersoul. He has no
material eyes, but He has eyes—otherwise how could He see? He sees everything,
past, present and future. He lives within the heart of the living being, and He
knows what we have done in the past, what we are doing now, and what is
awaiting us in the future. This is also confirmed in Bhagavad-gétä:
He knows everything, but no one knows Him. It is said that the Supreme
Lord has no legs like us, but He can travel throughout space because He has
spiritual legs. In other words, the Lord is not impersonal; He has His eyes,
legs, hands and everything else, and because we are part and parcel of the
Supreme Lord we also have these things. But His hands, legs, eyes and senses
are not contaminated by material nature.
Bhagavad-gétä also confirms that when the Lord appears He appears as He is by His internal potency. He is not contaminated by the material energy because He is the Lord of material energy. In the Vedic literature we find that His whole embodiment is spiritual. He has His eternal form called sac-cid-änanda-vigraha. He is full of all opulence. He is the proprietor of all wealth and the owner of all energy. He is the most intelligent and is full of knowledge. These are some of the symptoms of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He is maintainer of all living entities and the witness of all activities. As far as we can understand from Vedic literature, the Supreme Lord is always transcendental. Although we do not see His head, face, hands, or legs, He has them, and when we are elevated to the transcendental situation then we can see the Lord’s form. Due to materially contaminated senses, we cannot see His form. Therefore the impersonalists who are still materially affected cannot understand the Personality of Godhead.
Bg
13.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
bihrNTaê
>aUTaaNaaMacr& crMaev c )
SaU+MaTvatadivjeYa& dUrSQa& caiNTake- c TaTa( )) 16 ))
bahir antaç ca bhütänäm
acaraà caram eva ca
sükñmatvät tad avijïeyaà
düra-sthaà cäntike ca tat
bahiù—outside; antaù—inside; ca—also; bhütänäm—of all living entities; acaram—not moving; caram—moving;
eva—also; ca—and; sükñmatvät—on account of being subtle; tat—that; avijïeyam—unknowable;
dürasthaà—far away; ca
antike—near also; ca—and; tat—that.
TRANSLATION
The Supreme Truth exists both internally and externally, in the
moving and nonmoving. He is beyond the power of the material senses to see or
to know. Although far, far away, He is also near to all.
PURPORT
In Vedic literature we understand that Näräyaëa, the Supreme
Person, is residing both outside and inside of every living entity. He is
present both in the spiritual and material world. Although He is far, far away,
still He is near to us. These are the statements of Vedic literature. Äséno düraà vrajati çayäno yäti sarvataù. And, because
He is always engaged in transcendental bliss, we cannot understand how He is
enjoying His full opulence. We cannot see or understand with these material
senses. Therefore in the Vedic language it is said that to understand Him our
material mind and senses cannot act. But one who has purified his mind and
senses by practicing Kåñëa consciousness in devotional service can see Him
constantly. It is confirmed in Brahmä-saàhitä that
the devotee who has developed love for the Supreme God can see Him always,
without cessation. And it is confirmed in Bhagavad-gétä (11.54)
that He can be seen and understood only by devotional service. Bhaktyä tvananyayä çakyaù.
Bg
13.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
Aiv>a¢&-
c >aUTaezu iv>a¢-iMav c iSQaTaMa( )
>aUTa>aTa*R c TaJjeYa& Ga]iSaZ<au Pa[>aivZ<au c )) 17 ))
avibhaktaà ca bhüteñu
vibhaktam iva ca sthitam
bhüta-bhartå ca taj jïeyaà
grasiñëu prabhaviñëu ca
avibhaktam—without division; ca—also; bhüteñu—in every living being; vibhaktam—divided;
iva—as if; ca—also;
sthitam—situated; bhüta-bhartå—maintainer
of all living entities; ca—also; tat—that; jïeyam—to be
understood; grasiñëu—devours; prabhaviñëu—develops; ca—also.
TRANSLATION
Although the Supersoul appears to be divided, He is never divided.
He is situated as one. Although He is the maintainer of every living entity, it
is to be understood that He devours and develops all.
PURPORT
The Lord is situated in everyone’s heart as the Supersoul. Does
that mean that He has become divided? No. Actually, He is one. The example is
given of the sun: the sun, at the meridian, is situated in his place. But if
one goes for five thousand miles in all directions and asks, “Where is the
sun?” everyone will say that it is shining on his head. In the Vedic literature
this example is given to show that although He is undivided, He is situated as
if divided. Also it is said in Vedic literature that one Viñëu is present
everywhere by His omnipotence, just as the sun appears in many places to many
persons. And the Supreme Lord, although the maintainer of every living entity,
devours everything at the time of annihilation. This was confirmed in the
Eleventh Chapter when the Lord said that He has come to devour all the warriors
assembled at Kurukñetra. He also mentions that in the form of time He devours
also. He is the annihilator, the killer of all. When there is creation, He
develops all from their original state, and at the time of annihilation He
devours them. The Vedic hymns confirm the fact that He is the origin of all
living entities and the rest of al1. After creation, everything rests in His
omnipotence, and after annihilation, everything again returns to rest in Him.
These are the confirmations of Vedic hymns. Yato vä
imäni bhütäni jäyante yena jätäni jévanti yat prayanty abhisaàviçanti tad
brahma tad vijijïäsasva. (Taittiréya Upaniñad,
3.1)
Bg
13.18
TEXT
18
TEXT
JYaaeiTazaMaiPa
TaJJYaaeiTaSTaMaSa" ParMauCYaTae )
jaNa& jeYa& jaNaGaMYa& ôid SavRSYa iviïTaMa( )) 18 ))
jyotiñäm api taj jyotis
tamasaù param ucyate
jïänaà jïeyaà jïäna-gamyaà
hådi sarvasya viñöhitam
jyotiñäm—in all
luminous objects; api—also; tat—that; jyotiù—source
of light; tamasaù—of the darkness; param—beyond; ucyate—is
said; jïänam—knowledge; jïeyam—to
be known; jïäna-gamyam—to be approached by
knowledge; hådi—in the heart; sarvasya—of everyone; viñöhitam—situated.
TRANSLATION
He is the source of light in all luminous objects. He is beyond
the darkness of matter and is unmanifested. He is knowledge, He is the object
of knowledge, and He is the goal of knowledge. He is situated in everyone’s
heart.
PURPORT
The Supersoul, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, is the source
of light in all luminous objects like the sun, moon, stars, etc. In the Vedic
literature we find that in the spiritual kingdom there is no need of sun or
moon because the effulgence of the Supreme Lord is there. In the material world
that brahmajyoti the Lord’s spiritual effulgence,
is covered by the mahat-tattva, the material
elements; therefore in this material world we require the assistance of sun,
moon, electricity, etc., for light. But in the spiritual world there is no need
of such things. It is clearly stated in the Vedic literature that because of
His luminous effulgence, everything is illuminated. It is clear, therefore,
that His situation is not in the material world. He is situated in the
spiritual world which is far, far away in the spiritual sky. That is also
confirmed in the Vedic literature. Äditya-varëam tamasaù
parastät. He is just like the sun, eternally luminous, but He is far,
far beyond the darkness of this material world. His knowledge is
transcendental. The Vedic literature confirms that Brahman is concentrated
transcendental knowledge. To one who is anxious to be transferred to that
spiritual world, knowledge is given by the Supreme Lord who is situated in
everyone’s heart.
One Vedic mantra says: taà ha devam ätma-buddhi-prakäçaà mumukñur vai çaraëam aham prapadye. One must surrender unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead if he at all wants liberation. As far as the goal of ultimate knowledge is concerned, it is also confirmed in Vedic literature: tam eva viditvätimåtyum eti. “Only by knowing You can one surpass the boundary of birth and death.” He is situated in everyone’s heart as the supreme controller. The Supreme has legs and hands distributed everywhere, and this cannot be said of the individual soul. Therefore that there are two knowers of the field of activity, the individual soul and the Supersoul, must be admitted. One’s hands and legs are distributed locally, but Kåñëa’s hands and legs are distributed everywhere. This is confirmed in the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad: sarvasya prabhum éçänaà sarvasya çaraëaà båhat. That Supreme Personality of Godhead, Supersoul, is the prabhu or master of all living entities; therefore He is the ultimate center of all living entities. So there is no denying the fact that the Supreme Supersoul and the individual soul are always different.
Bg
13.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
wiTa +ae}a&
TaQaa jaNa& jeYa& cae¢&- SaMaaSaTa" )
MaÙ¢- WTaiÜjaYa MaÙavaYaaePaPaÛTae )) 19 ))
iti kñetraà tathä jïänaà
jïeyaà coktaà samäsataù
mad-bhakta etad vijïäya
mad-bhäväyopapadyate
iti—thus; kñetram—field of activities (the body); tathä—also; jïänam—knowledge;
jïeyam—knowable; ca—also;
uktam—describe; samäsataù—in
summary; mat-bhaktaù—My devotee; etat—all this; vijïäya—after
understanding; mat-bhäväya—My nature; upapadyate—attains.
TRANSLATION
Thus the field of activities [the body], knowledge, and the
knowable have been summarily described by Me. Only My devotees can understand
this thoroughly and thus attain to My nature.
PURPORT
The Lord has described in summary the body, knowledge and the
knowable. This knowledge is of three things: the knower, the knowable and the
process of knowing. Combined, these are called vijïänam,
or the science of knowledge. Perfect knowledge can be understood by the
unalloyed devotees of the Lord directly. Others are unable to understand. The
monists say that at the ultimate stage these three items become one, but the
devotees do not accept this. Knowledge and development of knowledge mean
understanding oneself in Kåñëa consciousness. We are being led by material
consciousness, but as soon as we transfer all consciousness to Kåñëa’s
activities and realize that Kåñëa is everything, then we attain real knowledge.
In other words, knowledge is nothing but the preliminary stage of understanding
devotional service perfectly.
Bg
13.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
Pa[k*-iTa&
Pauåz& cEv ivÖyNaadq o>aaviPa )
ivk-ara&ê Gau<aa&êEv iviÖ Pa[k*-iTaSaM>avaNa( )) 20 ))
prakåtià puruñaà caiva
viddhy anädé ubhäv api
vikäräàç ca guëäàç caiva
viddhi prakåti-sambhavän
prakåtim—material
nature; puruñam—living entities; ca—also; eva—certainly; viddhi—must know; anädé—without
beginning; ubhau—both; api—also;
vikärän—transformation; ca—also;
guëän—three modes of nature; ca—also; eva—certainly; viddhi—know; prakåti—material
nature; sambhavän—produced of.
TRANSLATION
Material nature and the living entities should be understood to be
beginningless. Their transformations and the modes of matter are products of
material nature.
PURPORT
By this knowledge, the body, the field of activities and the
knowers of the body (both the individual soul and the Supersoul) can be known.
The body is the field of activity and is composed of material nature. It is the
individual soul which is embodied. Enjoying the activities of the body is the puruña, or the living entity. He is one knower, and the
other is the Supersoul. Of course, it is to be understood that both the
Supersoul and the individual entity are different manifestations of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. The living entity is in the category of His energy, and
the Supersoul is in the category of His personal expansion.
Both material nature and the living entity are eternal. That is to say that they existed before the creation. The material manifestation is from the energy of the Supreme Lord and so also are the living entities, but they are of the superior energy. Both of them existed before this cosmos was manifested. Material nature was absorbed in the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Mahä-Visëu, and when it was required, it was manifested by the agency of mahat-tattva. Similarly, the living entities are also in Him, and because they are conditioned, they are adverse to serving the Supreme Lord. Thus they are not allowed to enter into the spiritual sky. After the winding up of material nature, these living entities are again given a chance to act in the material world and prepare themselves to enter into the spiritual world. That is the mystery of this material creation. Actually the living entity is originally the spiritual part and parcel of the Supreme Lord, but due to his rebellious nature, he is conditioned within material nature. It really does not matter how these living entities or superior entities of the Supreme Lord have come in contact with material nature. The Supreme Personality of Godhead knows, however, how and why this actually took place. In the scriptures the Lord says that those attracted by this material nature are undergoing a hard struggle for existence. But we should know it with certainty from the descriptions of these few verses that all the transformations and influences of material nature by the three modes are also productions of material nature. All transformations and variety in respect to living entities are due to the body. As far as spirit is concerned, living entities are all the same.
Bg
13.21
TEXT
21
TEXT
k-aYaRk-ar<ak-Ta*RTve
heTau" Pa[k*-iTaåCYaTae )
Pauåz" Sau%du"%aNaa& >aae¢*-Tve heTauåCYaTae )) 21 ))
kärya-käraëa-kartåtve
hetuù prakåtir ucyate
puruñaù sukha-duùkhänäà
bhoktåtve hetur ucyate
kärya—effect; käraëa—cause; kartåtve—in
the matter of creation; hetuù—instrument; prakåtiù—material nature; ucyate—is said to be; puruñaù—the
living entities; sukha—happiness; duùkhänäm—of distresses; bhoktåtve—in
enjoyment; hetuù—instrument; ucyate—is said to be.
TRANSLATION
Nature is said to be the cause of all material activities and
effects, whereas the living entity is the cause of the various sufferings and
enjoyments in this world.
PURPORT
The different manifestations of body and senses among the living
entities are due to material nature. There are 8,400,000 different species of
life, and these varieties are the creation of the material nature. They arise
from the different sensual pleasures of the 1iving entity, who thus desires to
live in this body or that. When he is put into different bodies, he enjoys
different kinds of happiness and distress. His material happiness and distress
are due to his body, and not to himself as he is. In his original state there
is no doubt of enjoyment; therefore that is his real state. Because of the
desire to lord it over material nature, he is in the material world. In the
spiritual world there is no such thing. The spiritual world is pure, but in the
material world everyone is struggling hard to acquire victims who present
different pleasures to the body. It might be more clear to state that this body
is the effect of the senses. The senses are instruments for gratifying desire.
Now, the sum total—body and instrument senses—are offered by material nature,
and, as will be clear in the next verse, the living entity is blessed or damned
with circumstances according to his past desire and activity. According to
one’s desires and activities, material nature places one in various residential
quarters. The being himself is the cause of his attaining such residential
quarters and his attendant enjoyment or suffering. Once placed in some
particular kind of body, he comes under the control of nature because the body,
being matter, acts according to the laws of nature. At that time, the 1iving
entity has no power to change that law. Suppose an entity is put into the body
of a dog. As soon as he is put into the body of a dog, he must act like a dog.
He cannot act otherwise. And if the living entity is put into the body of a
hog, then he is forced to eat stool and act like a hog. Similarly, if the
living entity is put into the body of a demigod, he must act according to his
body. This is the law of nature. But in all circumstances, the Supersoul is
with the individual soul. That is explained in the Vedas
as follows: dvä suparëä
sayujä sakhäyä. The Supreme Lord is so kind upon the living entity that
He always accompanies the individual soul and in all circumstances is present
as the Supersoul or Paramätmä.
Bg
13.22
TEXT
22
TEXT
Pauåz"
Pa[k*-iTaSQaae ih >au»e Pa[k*-iTaJaaNGau<aaNa( )
k-ar<a& Gau<aSa®ae_SYa SadSaÛaeiNaJaNMaSau )) 22 ))
puruñaù prakåti-stho hi
bhuìkte prakåti-jän guëän
käraëaà guëa-saìgo ’sya
sad-asad-yoni-janmasu
puruñaù—the living
entity; prakåti-sthaù—being situated in the
material energy; hi—certainly; bhuìkte—enjoys; prakåti-jän—produced
by the material nature; guëän—modes of nature; käraëam—cause; guëa-saìgaù—association
with the modes of nature; asya—of the living
entity; sat-asat—good and bad; yoni—species of life; janmasu—birth.
TRANSLATION
The living entity in material nature thus follows the ways of
life, enjoying the three modes of nature. This is due to his association with
that material nature. Thus he meets with good and evil amongst various species.
PURPORT
This verse is very important for an understanding of how the
living entities transmigrate from one body to another. It is explained in the
Second Chapter that the living entity is transmigrating from one body to
another just as one changes dress. This change of dress is due to his
attachment to material existence. As long as he is captivated by this false
manifestation, he has to continue transmigrating from one body to another. Due
to his desire to lord it over material nature, he is put into such undesirable
circumstances. Under the influence of material desire, the entity is born
sometimes as a demigod, sometimes as a man, sometimes as a beast, as a bird, as
a worm, as an aquatic, as a saintly man, as a bug. This is going on. And in all
cases the living entity thinks himself to be the master of his circumstances,
yet he is under the influence of material nature.
How he is put into such different bodies is explained here. It is due to association with the different modes of nature. One has to rise, therefore, above the three material modes and become situated in the transcendental position. That is called Kåñëa consciousness. Unless one is situated in Kåñëa consciousness, his material consciousness will oblige him to transfer from one body to another because he has material desires since time immemorial. But he has to change that conception. That change can be effected only by hearing from authoritative sources. The best example is here: Arjuna is hearing the science of God from Kåñëa. The living entity, if he submits to this hearing process, will lose his long-cherished desire to dominate material nature, and gradually and proportionately, as he reduces his long desire to dominate, he comes to enjoy spiritual happiness. In a Vedic mantra it is said that as he becomes learned in association with the Supreme Personality of Godhead, he proportionately relishes his eternal blissful life.
Bg
13.23
TEXT
23
TEXT
oPad]íaNauMaNTaa
c >aTaaR >aae¢-a Maheìr" )
ParMaaTMaeiTa caPYau¢-ae dehe_iSMaNPauåz" Par" )) 23 ))
upadrañöänumantä ca
bhartä bhoktä maheçvaraù
paramätmeti cäpy ukto
dehe ’smin puruñaù paraù
upadrañöä—overseer; anumantä—permitter; ca—also;
bhartä—master; bhoktä—supreme
enjoyer; maheçvaraù—the Supreme Lord; paramätmä—Supersoul; iti—also;
ca—and; api uktaù—is said; dehe—in this body;
asmin—this; puruñaù—enjoyer;
paraù—transcendental.
TRANSLATION
Yet in this body there is another, a transcendental enjoyer who is
the Lord, the supreme proprietor, who exists as the overseer and permitter, and
who is known as the Supersoul.
PURPORT
It is stated here that the Supersoul, who is always with the
individual soul, is the representation of the Supreme Lord. He is not an
ordinary living entity. Because the monist philosophers take the knower of the
body to be one, they think that there is no difference between the Supersoul
and the individual soul. To clarify this, the Lord says that He is the
representation of Paramätmä in every body. He is different from the individual
soul; He is paraù, transcendental. The individual
soul enjoys the activities of a particular field, but the Supersoul is present
not as finite enjoyer nor as one taking part in bodily activities, but as the
witness, overseer, permitter and supreme enjoyer. His name is Paramätmä, not ätmä, and He is transcendental. It is distinctly clear
that the ätmä and Paramätmä are different. The
Supersoul, the Paramätmä, has legs and hands everywhere, but the individual
soul does not. And because He is the Supreme Lord, He is present within to
sanction the individual soul’s desiring material enjoyment. Without the
sanction of the Supreme Soul, the individual soul cannot do anything. The
individual is bhakta or the sustained, and He is bhukta or the maintainer. There are innumerable living
entities, and He is staying in them as a friend.
The fact is that individual living entities are eternally part and parcel of the Supreme Lord, and both of them are very intimately related as friends. But the living entity has the tendency to reject the sanction of the Supreme Lord and act independantly in an attempt to dominate the supreme nature, and because he has this tendency, he is called the marginal energy of the Supreme Lord. The living entity can be situated either in the material energy or the spiritual energy. As long as he is conditioned by the material energy, the Supreme Lord, as his friend, the Supersoul, stays with him just to get him to return to the spiritual energy. The Lord is always eager to take him back to the spiritual energy, but due to his minute independence, the individual entity is continually rejecting the association of spiritual light. This misuse of independence is the cause of his material strife in the conditioned nature. The Lord, therefore, is always giving instruction from within and from without. From without He gives instructions as stated in Bhagavad-gétä, and from within He tries to convince him that his activities in the material field are not conducive to real happiness. “Just give it up and turn your faith toward Me. Then you will be happy,” He says. Thus the intelligent person who places his faith in the Paramätmä or the Supreme Personality of Godhead begins to advance toward a blissful eternal life of knowledge
Bg
13.24
TEXT
24
TEXT
Ya Wv& veita
Pauåz& Pa[k*-iTa& c Gau<aE" Sah )
SavRQaa vTaRMaaNaae_iPa Na Sa >aUYaae_i>aJaaYaTae )) 24 ))
ya evaà vetti puruñaà
prakåtià ca guëaiù saha
sarvathä vartamäno ’pi
na sa bhüyo ’bhijäyate
yaù—anyone; evam—thus; vetti—understands;
puruñam—the living entities; prakåtim—material nature; ca—and;
guëaiù—modes of material nature; saha—with; sarvathä—by
all means; vartamänaù—situated; api—in spite of; na—never;
saù—he; bhüyaù—again;
abhijäyate—takes his birth.
TRANSLATION
One who understands this philosophy concerning material nature,
the living entity and the interaction of the modes of nature is sure to attain
liberation. He will not take birth here again, regardless of his present
position.
PURPORT
Clear understanding of material nature, the Supersoul, the
individual soul and their interrelation makes one eligible to become liberated
and turn to the spiritual atmosphere without being forced to return to this
material nature. This is the result of knowledge. The purpose of knowledge is
to understand distinctly that the living entity has by chance fallen into this
material existence. By his personal endeavor in association with authorities,
saintly persons and a spiritual master, he has to understand his position and
then revert to spiritual consciousness or Kåñëa consciousness by understanding Bhagavad-gétä as it is explained by the Personality of
Godhead. Then it is certain that he will never come again into this material
existence; he will be transferred into the spiritual world for a blissful
eternal life of knowledge.
Bg
13.25
TEXT
25
TEXT
DYaaNaeNaaTMaiNa
PaXYaiNTa ke-icdaTMaaNaMaaTMaNaa )
ANYae Saa&:YaeNa YaaeGaeNa k-MaRYaaeGaeNa caPare )) 25 ))
dhyänenätmani paçyanti
kecid ätmänam ätmanä
anye säìkhyena yogena
karma-yogena cäpare
dhyänena—by
meditation; ätmani—self; paçyanti—see;
kecit—one; ätmänam—Supersoul;
ätmanä—by the mind; anye—others;
säìkhyena—by philosophical discussion; yogena—by the yoga system;
karma-yogena—by activities without fruitive
desire; ca—also; apare—others.
TRANSLATION
That Supersoul is perceived by some through meditation, by some
through the cultivation of knowledge, and by others through working without
fruitive desire.
PURPORT
The Lord informs Arjuna that the conditioned soul can be divided
into two classes as far as man’s search for self-realization is concerned.
Those who are atheists, agnostics and skeptics are beyond the sense of
spiritual understanding. But there are others who are faithful in their
understanding of spiritual life, and they are called workers who have renounced
fruitive results. Those who always try to establish the doctrine of monism are
also counted among the atheists and agnostics. In other words, only the
devotees of the Supreme Personality of Godhead are really capable of spiritual
understanding because they understand that beyond this material nature there is
the spiritual world and the Supreme Personality of Godhead who is expanded as
the Paramätmä, the Supersoul in everyone, the all-pervading Godhead. Of course
there are those who try to understand the Supreme Absolute Truth by cultivation
of knowledge, and they can be counted in the second class. The atheistic
philosophers analyze this material world into twenty-four elements, and they
place the individual soul as the twenty-fifth item. When they are able to
understand the nature of the individual soul to be transcendental to the
material elements, they are able to understand also that above the individual
soul there is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He is the twenty-sixth
element. Thus gradually they also come to the standard of devotional service in
Kåñëa consciousness. Those who work without fruitive results are also perfect
in their attitude. They are given a chance to advance to the platform of
devotional service in Kåñëa consciousness. Here it is stated that there are
some people who are pure in consciousness and who try to find out the Supersoul
by meditation, and when they discover the Supersoul within themselves, they
become transcendentally situated. Similarly, there are others who also try to
understand the Supreme Soul by cultivation of knowledge, and there are others
who cultivate the haöha-yoga system and who try
to satisfy the Supreme Personality of Godhead by childish activities.
Bg
13.26
TEXT
26
TEXT
ANYae TvevMaJaaNaNTa"
é[uTvaNYae>Ya oPaaSaTae )
Tae_iPa caiTaTarNTYaev Ma*TYau& é[uiTaParaYa<aa" )) 26 ))
anye tv evam ajänantaù
çrutvänyebhya upäsate
te ’pi cätitaranty eva
måtyuà çruti-paräyaëäù
anye—others; tu—but; evam—this; ajänantaù—without spiritual knowledge; çrutvä—by hearing; anyebhyaù—from
others; upäsate—begin to worship; te—they; api—also; ca—and; atitaranti—transcend;
eva—certainly; måtyum—the
path of death; çruti-paräyaëäù—inclined to the
process of hearing.
TRANSLATION
Again there are those who, although not conversant in spiritual
knowledge, begin to worship the Supreme Person upon hearing about Him from
others. Because of their tendency to hear from authorities, they also transcend
the path of birth and death.
PURPORT
This verse is particularly applicable to modern society because in
modern society there is practically no education in spiritual matters. Some of
the people may appear to be atheistic or agnostic or philosophical, but
actually there is no knowledge of philosophy. As for the common man, if he is a
good soul, then there is a chance for advancement by hearing. This hearing
process is very important. Lord Caitanya, who preached Kåñëa consciousness in
the modern world, gave great stress to hearing because if the common man simply
hears from authoritative sources, he can progress, especially, according to
Lord Caitanya, if he hears the transcendental vibration Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa,
Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare. It is
stated, therefore, that all men should take advantage of hearing from realized
souls and gradually become able to understand everything. The worship of the
Supreme Lord will then undoubtedly take place. Lord Caitanya has said that in
this age no one needs to change his position, but one should give up the
endeavor to understand the Absolute Truth by speculative reasoning. One should
learn to become the servant of those who are in knowledge of the Supreme Lord.
If one is fortunate enough to take shelter of a pure devotee, hear from him
about self-realization and follow in his footsteps, he will be gradually
elevated to the position of a pure devotee. In this verse particularly the
process of hearing is strongly recommended, and this is very appropriate.
Although the common man is often not as capable as so-called philosophers,
faithful hearing from an authoritative person will help one transcend this
material existence and go back to Godhead, back to home.
Bg
13.27
TEXT
27
TEXT
YaavTSaÅaYaTae
ik-iÄTSatv& SQaavrJa®MaMa( )
+ae}a+ae}ajSa&YaaeGaataiÜiÖ >arTazR>a )) 27 ))
yävat saïjäyate kiïcit
sattvaà sthävara-jaìgamam
kñetra-kñetrajïa-saàyogät
tad viddhi bharatarñabha
yävat—whatever; saàjäyate—takes place; kiïcit—anything;
sattvam—existence; sthävara—not
moving; jaìgamam—moving; kñetra—the
body; kñetrajïa—knower of the body; saàyogät—union between; tat
viddhi—you must know it; bharatarñabha—O
chief of the Bhäratas.
TRANSLATION
O chief of the Bhäratas, whatever you see in existence, both
moving and unmoving, is only the combination of the field of activities and the
knower of the field.
PURPORT
Both material nature and the living entity, which were existing
before the creation of the cosmos, are explained in this verse. Whatever is
created is but a combination of the living entity and material nature. There
are many manifestations like trees, mountains and hills, which are not moving,
and there are many existences which are moving, and all of them are but
combinations of material nature and superior nature, the living entity. Without
the touch of the superior nature, the living entity, nothing can grow.
Therefore the relationship between matter and nature is eternally going on, and
this combination is effected by the Supreme Lord; therefore He is the
controller of both the superior and inferior natures. The material nature is
created by Him, and the superior nature is placed in this material nature, and
thus all these activities and manifestations take place.
Bg
13.28
TEXT
28
TEXT
SaMa&
SaveRzu >aUTaezu iTaïNTa& ParMaeìrMa( )
ivNaXYaTSvivNaXYaNTa& Ya" PaXYaiTa Sa PaXYaiTa )) 28 ))
samaà sarveñu bhüteñu
tiñöhantaà parameçvaram
vinaçyatsv avinaçyantaà
yaù paçyati sa paçyati
samam—equally; sarveñu—in all; bhüteñu—living
entities; tiñöhantam—residing; parameçvaram—the Supersoul; vinaçyatsu—in
the destructible; avinaçyantam—not destroyed; yaù—anyone; paçyati—see; saù—he; paçyati—actually
sees.
TRANSLATION
One who sees the Supersoul accompanying the individual soul in all
bodies and who understands that neither the soul nor the Supersoul is ever
destroyed, actually sees.
PURPORT
Anyone who can see three things—the body, the proprietor of the
body, or individual soul, and the friend of the individual soul, combined
together by good association—is actually in knowledge. Those who are not
associated with the soul’s friend are ignorant; they simply see the body, and
when the body is destroyed they think that everything is finished, but actually
it is not so. After the destruction of the body, both the soul and the
Supersoul exist, and they go on eternally in many various moving and unmoving
forms. The Sanskrit word parameçvaram is sometimes translated as the individual soul because
the soul is the master of the body, and after the destruction of the body he
transfers to another form. In that way he is master. But there are others who
interpret this parameçvaram to be the Supersoul.
In either case, both the Supersoul and the individual soul continue. They are
not destroyed. One who can see in this way can actually see what is happening.
Bg
13.29
TEXT
29
TEXT
SaMa&
PaXYaiNh SavR}a SaMaviSQaTaMaqìrMa( )
Na ihNaSTYaaTMaNaaTMaaNa& TaTaae YaaiTa Para& GaiTaMa( )) 29 ))
samaà paçyan hi sarvatra
samavasthitam éçvaram
na hinasty ätmanätmänaà
tato yäti paräà gatim
samam—equally; paçyan—seeing; hi—certainly;
sarvatra—everywhere; samavasthitam—equally
situated; éçvaram—Supersoul; na—does not; hinasti—degrade;
ätmanä—by the mind; ätmänam—the
soul; tataù yäti—then reaches; paräm—the transcendental; gatim—destination.
TRANSLATION
One who sees the Supersoul in every living being and equal everywhere
does not degrade himself by his mind. Thus he approaches the transcendental
destination.
PURPORT
The living entity, by accepting his material existence as just so
much suffering, can become situated in his spiritual existence. If one
understands that the Supreme is situated in His Paramätmä manifestation
everywhere, that is, if one can see the presence of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead in every living thing, he does not degrade himself, and he therefore
gradually advances in the spiritual world. The mind is generally addicted to
self-centered processes; but when the mind turns to the Supersoul, one becomes
advanced in spiritual understanding.
Bg
13.30
TEXT
30
TEXT
Pa[k*-TYaEv c
k-MaaRi<a i§-YaMaa<aaiNa SavRXa" )
Ya" PaXYaiTa TaQaaTMaaNaMak-TaaRr& Sa PaXYaiTa )) 30 ))
prakåtyaiva ca karmäëi
kriyamäëäni sarvaçaù
yaù paçyati tathätmänam
akartäraà sa paçyati
prakåtyä—material
nature; eva—certainly; ca—also;
karmäëi—activities; kriyamäëäni—engaged
in performing; sarvaçaù—in all respects; yaù—anyone who; paçyati—sees;
tathä—also; ätmänam—himself;
akartäram—non-doer; saù—he;
paçyati—sees perfectly.
TRANSLATION
One who can see that all activities are performed by the body,
which is created of material nature, and sees that the self does nothing,
actually sees.
PURPORT
This body is made by material nature under the direction of the
Supersoul, and whatever activities are going on in respect to one’s body are
not his doing. Whatever one is supposed to do, either for happiness or for
distress, one is forced to do because of the bodily constitution. The self,
however, is outside all these bodily activities. This body is given according
to one’s past desires. To fulfill desires, one is given the body, with which he
acts accordingly. Practically speaking, the body is a machine, designed by the
Supreme Lord, to fulfill desires. Because of desires, one is put into difficult
circumstances to suffer or to enjoy. This transcendental vision of the living
entity, when developed, makes one separate from bodily activities. One who has
such a vision is an actual seer.
Bg
13.31
TEXT
31
TEXT
Yada
>aUTaPa*QaG>aavMaek-SQaMaNauPaXYaiTa )
TaTa Wv c ivSTaar& b]ø SaMPaÛTae Tada )) 31 ))
yadä bhüta-påthag-bhävam
eka-stham anupaçyati
tata eva ca vistäraà
brahma sampadyate tadä
yadä—when; bhüta—living entities; påthak-bhävam—separated
entities; eka-stham—situated in one; anupaçyati—tries to see through authority; tataù eva—thereafter; ca—also;
vistäram—expanded; brahma—the
Absolute; sampadyate—attains; tadä—at that time.
TRANSLATION
When a sensible man ceases to see different identities, which are
due to different material bodies, he attains to the Brahman conception. Thus he
sees that beings are expanded everywhere.
PURPORT
When one can see that the various bodies of living entities arise
due to the different desires of the individual soul and do not actually belong
to the soul itself, one actually sees. In the material conception of life, we
find someone a demigod, someone a human being, a dog, a cat, etc. This is
material vision, not actual vision. This material differentiation is due to a
material conception of life. After the destruction of the material body, this
spirit soul is one. The spirit soul, due to contact with material nature, gets
different types of bodies. When one can see this, he attains spiritual vision;
thus being freed from differentiations like man, animal, big, low, etc., one
becomes beautified in his consciousness and able to develop Kåñëa consciousness
in his spiritual identity. How he then sees things will be explained in the
next verse.
Bg
13.32
TEXT
32
TEXT
ANaaidTvaiàGauR<aTvaTParMaaTMaaYaMaVYaYa"
)
XarqrSQaae_iPa k-aENTaeYa Na k-raeiTa Na il/PYaTae )) 32 ))
anäditvän nirguëatvät
paramätmäyam avyayaù
çaréra-stho ’pi kaunteya
na karoti na lipyate
anäditvät—due to
eternity; nirguëatvät—due to transcendental; param—beyond material nature; ätmä—spirit;
ayam—this; avyayaù—inexhaustable;
çaréra-sthaù api—though dwelling in the body; kaunteya—O son of Kunté; na
karoti—never does anything; na lipyate—nor
is he entangled.
TRANSLATION
Those with the vision of eternity can see that the soul is
transcendental, eternal, and beyond the modes of nature. Despite contact with
the material body, O Arjuna, the soul neither does anything nor is entangled.
PURPORT
A living entity appears to be born because of the birth of the
material body, but actually the living entity is eternal; he is not born, and
in spite of his being situated in a material body, he is transcendental and
eternal. Thus he cannot be destroyed. By nature he is full of bliss. He does
not engage himself in any material activities; therefore the activities
performed due to his contact with material bodies do not entangle him.
Bg
13.33
TEXT
33
TEXT
YaQaa
SavRGaTa& SaaE+MYaadak-aXa& NaaePail/PYaTae )
SavR}aaviSQaTaae dehe TaQaaTMaa NaaePail/PYaTae )) 33 ))
yathä sarva-gataà saukñmyäd
äkäçaà nopalipyate
sarvaträvasthito dehe
tathätmä nopalipyate
yathä—as; sarva-gatam—all-pervading; saukñmyät—due
to being subtle; äkäçam—the sky; na—never; upalipyate—mixes;
sarvatra—everywhere; avasthitaù—situated;
dehe—in the body; tathä—such;
ätmä—the self; na—never;
upalipyate—mixes.
TRANSLATION
The sky, due to its subtle nature, does not mix with anything,
although it is all-pervading. Similarly, the soul, situated in Brahman vision,
does not mix with the body, though situated in that body.
PURPORT
The air enters into water, mud, stool and whatever else is there;
still it does not mix with anything. Similarly, the living entity, even though
situated in varieties of bodies, is aloof from them due to his subtle nature.
Therefore it is impossible to see with the material eyes how the living entity
is in contact with this body and how he is out of it after the destruction of
the body. No one in science can ascertain this.
Bg
13.34
TEXT
34
TEXT
YaQaa
Pa[k-aXaYaTYaek-" k*-Tò& l/aek-iMaMa& riv" )
+ae}a& +ae}aq TaQaa k*-Tò& Pa[k-aXaYaiTa >aarTa )) 34 ))
yathä prakäçayaty ekaù
kåtsnaà lokam imaà raviù
kñetraà kñetré tathä kåtsnaà
prakäçayati bhärata
yathä—as; prakäçayati—illuminates; ekaù—one;
kåtsnam—the whole; lokam—universe;
imam—this; raviù—the
sun, kñetram—this body; kñetré—the
soul; tathä—similarly; kåtsnam—all;
prakäçayati—illuminates; bhärata—O
son of Bharata.
TRANSLATION
O son of Bharata, as the sun alone illuminates all this universe,
so does the living entity, one within the body, illuminate the entire body by
consciousness.
PURPORT
There are various theories regarding consciousness. Here in Bhagavad-gétä the example of the sun and the sunshine
is given. As the sun is situated in one place, but is illuminating the whole
universe, so a small particle of spirit soul, although situated in the heart of
this body, is illuminating the whole body by consciousness. Thus consciousness
is the proof of the presence of the soul, as sunshine or light is the proof of
the presence of the sun.
When the soul is present in the body, there is consciousness all over the body, and as soon as the soul has passed from the body, there is no more consciousness. This can be easily understood by any intelligent man. Therefore consciousness is not a production of the combinations of matter. It is the symptom of the living entity. The consciousness of the living entity, although qualitatively one with the supreme consciousness, is not supreme because the consciousness of one particular body does not share that of another body. But the Supersoul, which is situated in all bodies as the friend of the individual soul, is conscious of all bodies. That is the difference between supreme consciousness and individual consciousness.
Bg
13.35
TEXT
35
TEXT
+ae}a+ae}ajYaaerevMaNTar&
jaNac+auza )
>aUTaPa[k*-iTaMaae+a& c Yae ivduYaaRiNTa Tae ParMa( )) 35 ))
kñetra-kñetrajïayor evam
antaraà jïäna-cakñuñä
bhüta-prakåti-mokñaà ca
ye vidur yänti te param
kñetra—body; kñetrajïayoù—of the proprietor of the body; evam—that; antaram—difference;
jïäna-cakñuñä—by vision of knowledge; bhüta—living entity; prakåti—material
nature; mokñam—liberation; ca—also; ye—one who; viduù—knows; yänti—approaches;
te—they; param—Supreme.
TRANSLATION
One who knowingly sees this difference between the body and the
owner of the body and can understand the process of liberation from this
bondage, also attains to the supreme goal.
PURPORT
The purport of this Thirteenth Chapter is that one should know the
distinction between the body, the owner of the body, and the Supersoul. A
faithful person should at first have some good association to hear of God and
thus gradually become enlightened. If one accepts a spiritual master, he can
learn to distinguish between matter and spirit, and that becomes the
steppingstone for further spiritual realization. A spiritual master teaches his
students to get free from the material concept of life by various instructions.
For instance, in Bhagavad-gétä we find Kåñëa
instructing Arjuna to free him from materialistic considerations.
One can understand that this body is matter; it can be analyzed with its twenty-four elements. That is the gross manifestation. And the subtle manifestation is the mind and psychological effects. And the symptoms of life are the interaction of these features. But over and above this, there is the soul, and there is also the Supersoul. The soul and the Supersoul are two. This material world is working by the conjunction of the soul and the twenty-four material elements. One who can see the constitution of the whole material manifestation as this combination of the soul and material elements and also can see the situation of the Supreme Soul becomes eligible for transfer to the spiritual world. These things are meant for contemplation and for realization, and one should have a complete understanding of this chapter with the help of the spiritual master.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the Thirteenth Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of Nature, the Enjoyer, and Consciousness.
Bg 14. The Three Modes of Material Nature
CHAPTER
FOURTEEN
The Three
Modes of Material Nature
Bg 14.1
TEXT
1
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
)
Par& >aUYa" Pa[v+YaaiMa jaNaaNaa& jaNaMautaMaMa( )
YaJjaTva MauNaYa" SaveR Para& iSaiÖiMaTaae GaTaa" )) 1 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
paraà bhüyaù pravakñyämi
jïänänäà jïänam uttamam
yaj jïätvä munayaù sarve
paräà siddhim ito gatäù
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; param—transcendental; bhüyaù—again; pravakñyämi—I
shall speak; jïänänäm—of all knowledge; jïänam—knowledge; uttamam—the
supreme; yat—which; jïätvä—knowing;
munayaù—the sages; sarve—all;
paräm—transcendental; siddhim—perfection;
itaù—from this world; gatäù—attain.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: Again I shall declare to you this supreme
wisdom, the best of all knowledge, knowing which all the sages have attained to
supreme perfection.
PURPORT
From the Seventh Chapter to the end of the Twelfth Chapter, Çré
Kåñëa in detail reveals the Absolute Truth, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Now, the Lord Himself is further enlightening Arjuna. If one understands this
chapter through the process of philosophical speculation, he will come to an
understanding of devotional service. In the Thirteenth Chapter, it was clearly
explained that by humbly developing knowledge one may possibly be freed from
material entanglement. It has also been explained that it is due to association
with the modes of nature that the living entity is entangled in this material
world. Now, in this chapter, the Supreme Personality explains what those modes
of nature are, how they act, how they bind and how they give liberation. The
knowledge explained in this chapter is proclaimed by the Supreme Lord to be
superior to the knowledge given so far in other chapters. By understanding this
knowledge, various great sages attain perfection and transfer to the spiritual
world. The Lord now explains the same knowledge in a better way. This knowledge
is far, far superior to all other processes of knowledge thus far explained,
and knowing this many attain perfection. Thus it is expected that one who
understands this Fourteenth Chapter will attain perfection.
Bg 14.2
TEXT
2
TEXT
wd&
jaNaMauPaaié[TYa MaMa SaaDaMYaRMaaGaTaa" )
SaGaeR_iPa NaaePaJaaYaNTae Pa[l/Yae Na VYaQaiNTa c )) 2 ))
idaà jïänam upäçritya
mama sädharmyam ägatäù
sarge ’pi nopajäyante
pralaye na vyathanti ca
idam—this; jïänam—knowledge; upäçritya—taking
shelter of; mama—My; sädharmyam—nature;
ägatäù—attain; sarge api—even
in the creation; na—never; upajäyante—comes in; pralaye—in
the annihilation; na—nor; vyathanti—disturbed;
ca—also.
TRANSLATION
By becoming fixed in this knowledge, one can attain to the
transcendental nature, which is like My own nature. Thus established, one is
not born at the time of creation nor disturbed at the time of dissolution.
PURPORT
After acquiring perfect transcendental knowledge, one acquires
qualitative equality with the Supreme Personality of Godhead, becoming free
from the repetition of birth and death. One does not, however, lose his
identity as an individual soul. It is understood from Vedic literature that the
liberated souls who have reached the transcendental planets of the spiritual
sky always look to the lotus feet of the Supreme Lord, being engaged in His
transcendental loving service. So, even after liberation, the devotees do not
lose their individual identities.
Generally, in the material world, whatever knowledge we get is contaminated by the three modes of material nature. But knowledge which is not contaminated by the three modes of nature is called transcendental knowledge. As soon as one is situated in that transcendental knowledge, he is on the same platform as that of the Supreme Person. Those who have no knowledge of the spiritual sky hold that after being freed from the material activities of the material form, this spiritual identity becomes formless, without any variegatedness. However, just as there is material variegatedness in this world, so, in the spiritual world, there is also variegatedness. Those in ignorance of this think that spiritual existence is opposed to material variety. But actually, in the spiritual sky, one attains spiritual form. There are spiritual activities, and the spiritual situation is called devotional life. That atmosphere is said to be uncontaminated, and there one is equal in quality with the Supreme Lord. To obtain such knowledge, one must develop all the spiritual qualities. One who thus develops the spiritual qualities is not affected either by the creation or the destruction of the material world.
Bg 14.3
TEXT
3
TEXT
MaMa
YaaeiNaMaRhd(Ba]ø TaiSMaNGa>a| dDaaMYahMa( )
SaM>av" SavR>aUTaaNaa& TaTaae >aviTa >aarTa )) 3 ))
mama yonir mahad brahma
tasmin garbhaà dadhämy aham
sambhavaù sarva-bhütänäà
tato bhavati bhärata
mama—My; yoniù—source of birth; mahat—the
total material existence; brahma—supreme; tasmin—in that; garbham—pregnancy;
dadhämi—create; aham—I; sambhavaù—possibility; sarva-bhütänäm—of
all living entities; tataù—thereafter; bhavati—becomes; bhärata—O
son of Bharata.
TRANSLATION
The total material substance, called Brahman, is the source of
birth, and it is that Brahman that I impregnate, making possible the births of
all living beings, O son of Bharata.
PURPORT
This is an explanation of the world: everything that takes place
is due to the combination of kñetra and kñetrajïa, the body and the spirit soul. This
combination of material nature and the living entity is made possible by the
Supreme God Himself. The mahat-tattva is the
total cause of the total cosmic manifestation, and because in the total
substance of the material cause there are three modes of nature, it is
sometimes called Brahman. The Supreme Personality impregnates that total
substance, and thus innumerable universes become possible. This total material
substance, the mahat-tattva, is described as
Brahman in the Vedic literature: tasmäd etad brahma
näma-rüpam annaà ca jäyate. Into that Brahman the seeds of the living
entities are impregnated by the Supreme Person. The twenty-four elements,
beginning from earth, water, fire and air, are all material energy, called Mahä-brahman, or the great Brahman, the material
nature. As is explained in the Seventh Chapter, beyond this there is another,
superior nature—the living entity. In material nature the superior nature is mixed
by the will of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and thereafter all living
entities are born of this material nature.
The scorpion lays its eggs in piles of rice, and sometimes it is said that the scorpion is born out of rice. But the rice is not the cause of the scorpion. Actually, the eggs were laid by the mother. Similarly, material nature is not the cause of the birth of the living entities. The seed is given by the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and they only seem to come out as products of material nature. Thus every living entity, according to his past activities, has a different body, created by this material nature, and the entity can enjoy or suffer according to his past deeds. The Lord is the cause of all the manifestations of living entities in this material world.
Bg 14.4
TEXT
4
TEXT
SavRYaaeiNazu
k-aENTaeYa MaUTaRYa" SaM>aviNTa Yaa" )
TaaSaa& b]ø MahÛaeiNarh& bqJaPa[d" iPaTaa )) 4 ))
sarva-yoniñu kaunteya
mürtayaù sambhavanti yäù
täsäà brahma mahad yonir
ahaà béja-pradaù pitä
sarva-yoniñu—in all
species of life; kaunteya—O son of Kunté; mürtayaù—forms; sambhavanti—as
they appear; yäù—which; täsäm—all
of them; brahma—supreme; mahat
yoniù—the source of birth in the material substance; aham—Myself; béja-pradaù—seed-giving;
pitä—father.
TRANSLATION
It should be understood that all species of life, O son of Kunté,
are made possible by birth in this material nature, and that I am the
seed-giving father.
PURPORT
In this verse it is clearly explained that the Supreme Personality
of Godhead, Kåñëa, is the original father of all living entities. The living
entities are combinations of the material nature and the spiritual nature. Such
living entities are seen not only on this planet, but in every planet, even in
the highest where Brahmä is situated. Everywhere there are living entities;
within the earth there are living entities, even within water and within fire.
All these appearances are due to the mother, material nature, and Kåñëa’s
seed-giving process. The purport is that the living entities, being impregnated
in the material world, come out and form at the time of creation according to
their past deeds.
Bg 14.5
TEXT
5
TEXT
Satv&
rJaSTaMa wiTa Gau<aa" Pa[k*-iTaSaM>ava" )
iNabDNaiNTa Mahabahae dehe deihNaMaVYaYaMa( )) 5 ))
sattvaà rajas tama iti
guëäù prakåti-sambhaväù
nibadhnanti mahä-bäho
dehe dehinam avyayam
sattvam—mode of
goodness; rajaù—mode of passion; tamaù—mode of ignorance; iti—thus;
guëäù—qualities; prakåti—material
nature; sambhaväù—produced of; nibadhnanti—does condition; mahä-bäho—O
mighty-armed one; dehe—in this body; dehinam—the living entity; avyayam—eternal.
TRANSLATION
Material nature consists of the three modes—goodness, passion and
ignorance. When the living entity comes in contact with nature, he becomes
conditioned by these modes.
PURPORT
The living entity, because he is transcendental, has nothing to do
with this material nature. Still, because he has become conditioned by the
material world, he is acting under the spell of the three modes of material
nature. Because living entities have different kinds of bodies, in terms of the
different aspects of nature, they are induced to act according to that nature.
This is the cause of the varieties of happiness and distress.
Bg 14.6
TEXT
6
TEXT
Ta}a Satv&
iNaMaRl/TvaTPa[k-aXak-MaNaaMaYaMa( )
Sau%Sa®eNa bDNaaiTa jaNaSa®eNa caNaga )) 6 ))
tatra sattvaà nirmalatvät
prakäçakam anämayam
sukha-saìgena badhnäti
jïäna-saìgena cänagha
tatra—thereafter; sattvam—mode of goodness; nirmalatvät—being
purest in the material world; prakäçakam—illuminating;
anämayam—without any sinful reachon; sukha—happiness; saìgena—association;
badhnäti—conditions; jïäna—knowledge;
saìgena—association; ca—also;
anagha—O sinless one.
TRANSLATION
O sinless one, the mode of goodness, being purer than the others,
is illuminating, and it frees one from all sinful reactions. Those situated in
that mode develop knowledge, but they become conditioned by the concept of
happiness.
PURPORT
The living entities conditioned by material nature are of various
types. One is happy, another is very active, and another is helpless. All these
types of psychological manifestations are causes of the entities’ conditioned
status in nature. How they are differently conditioned is explained in this
section of Bhagavad-gétä. The mode of goodness is
first considered. The effect of developing the mode of goodness in the material
world is that one becomes wiser than those otherwise conditioned. A man in the
mode of goodness is not so much affected by material miseries, and he has a
sense of advancement in material knowledge. The representative type is the brähmaëa, who is supposed to be situated in the mode of
goodness. This sense of happiness is due to understanding that, in the mode of
goodness, one is more or less free from sinful reactions. Actually, in the
Vedic literature it is said that the mode of goodness means greater knowledge
and a greater sense of happiness.
The difficulty here is that when a living entity is situated in the mode of goodness, he becomes conditioned to feel that he is advanced in knowledge and is better than others. In this way he becomes conditioned. The best examples are the scientist and philosopher: each is very proud of his knowledge, and because they generally improve their living conditions, they feel a sort of material happiness. This sense of advanced happiness in conditioned life makes them bound by the mode of goodness of material nature. As such, they are attracted toward working in the mode of goodness, and, as long as they have an attraction for working in that way, they have to take some type of body in the modes of nature. Thus there is no likelihood of liberation, or of being transferred to the spiritual world. Repeatedly, one may become a philosopher, a scientist, or a poet, and, repeatedly, become entangled in the same disadvantages of birth and death. But, due to the illusion of the material energy, one thinks that that sort of life is pleasant.
Bg 14.7
TEXT
7
TEXT
rJaae
raGaaTMak&- iviÖ Ta*Z<aaSa®SaMauÙvMa( )
TaiàbDNaaiTa k-aENTaeYa k-MaRSa®eNa deihNaMa( )) 7 ))
rajo rägätmakaà viddhi
tåñëä-saìga-samudbhavam
tan nibadhnäti kaunteya
karma-saìgena dehinam
rajaù—mode of
passion; räga-ätmakam—born of desire or lust; viddhi—know; tåñëä—hankering;
saìga—association; samudbhavam—produced
of; tat—that; nibadhnäti—is
bound; kaunteya—O son of Kunté; karma-saìgena—association with fruitive activity; dehinam—of the embodied.
TRANSLATION
The mode of passion is born of unlimited desires and longings, O
son of Kunté, and because of this one is bound to material fruitive activities.
PURPORT
The mode of passion is characterized by the attraction between man
and woman. Woman has attraction for man, and man has attraction for woman. This
is called the mode of passion. And, when the mode of passion is increased, one
develops the hankering for material enjoyment. He wants to enjoy sense
gratification. For sense gratification, a man in the mode of passion wants some
honor in society, or in the nation, and he wants to have a happy family, with
nice children, wife, and house. These are the products of the mode of passion.
As long as one is hankering after these things, he has to work very hard.
Therefore it is clearly stated here that he becomes associated with the fruits
of his activities and thus becomes bound by such activities. In order to please
his wife, children and society and to keep up his prestige, one has to work.
Therefore, the whole material world is more or less in the mode of passion.
Modern civilization is considered to be advanced in the standards of the mode
of passion. Formerly, the advanced condition was considered to be in the mode
of goodness. If there is no liberation for those in the mode of goodness, what
of those who are entangled in the mode of passion?
Bg 14.8
TEXT
8
TEXT
TaMaSTvjaNaJa&
iviÖ MaaehNa& SavRdeihNaaMa( )
Pa[Maadal/SYaiNad]ai>aSTaiàbDNaaiTa >aarTa )) 8 ))
tamas tv ajïäna-jaà viddhi
mohanaà sarva-dehinäm
pramädälasya-nidräbhis
tan nibadhnäti bhärata
tamaù—mode of
ignorance; tu—but; ajïäna-jam—products
of ignorance; viddhi—knowing; mohanam—delusion; sarva-dehinäm—of
all embodied beings; pramäda—madness; älasya—indolence; nidräbhiù—sleep;
tat—that; nibadhnäti—binds;
bhärata—O son of Bharata.
TRANSLATION
O son of Bharata, the mode of ignorance causes the delusion of all
living entities. The result of this mode is madness, indolence and sleep, which
bind the conditioned soul.
PURPORT
In this verse the specific application of the word tu is very significant. This means that the mode of
ignorance is a very peculiar qualification of the embodied soul. This mode of
ignorance is just the opposite of the mode of goodness. In the mode of
goodness, by development of knowledge, one can understand what is what, but the
mode of ignorance is just the opposite. Everyone under the spell of the mode of
ignorance becomes mad, and a madman cannot understand what is what. Instead of
making advancement, one becomes degraded. The definition of the mode of
ignorance is stated in the Vedic literature: under the spell of ignorance, one
cannot understand the thing as it is. For example, everyone can see that his
grandfather has died, and therefore he will also die; man is mortal. The
children that he conceives will also die. So death is sure. Still, people are
madly accumulating money and working very hard all day and night, not caring
for the eternal spirit. This is madness. In their madness, they are very
reluctant to make advancement in spiritual understanding. Such people are very
lazy. When they are invited to associate for spiritual understanding, they are
not much interested. They are not even active like the man who is controlled by
the mode of passion. Thus another symptom of one embedded in the mode of
ignorance is that he sleeps more than is required. Six hours of sleep is
sufficient, but a man in the mode of ignorance sleeps at least ten or twelve
hours a day. Such a man appears to be always dejected, and is addicted to
intoxicants and sleeping. These are the symptoms of a person conditioned by the
mode of ignorance.
Bg 14.9
TEXT
9
TEXT
Satv& Sau%e
SaÅYaiTa rJa" k-MaRi<a >aarTa )
jaNaMaav*TYa Tau TaMa" Pa[Maade SaÅYaTYauTa )) 9 ))
sattvaà sukhe saïjayati
rajaù karmaëi bhärata
jïänam ävåtya tu tamaù
pramäde saïjayaty uta
sattvam—mode of
goodness; sukhe—in happiness; saïjayati—develops; rajaù—mode
of passion; karmaëi—fruits of activities; bhärata—O son of Bharata; jïänam—knowledge;
ävåtya—covering; tu—but;
tamaù—the mode of ignorance; pramäde—in madness; saïjayati—develops;
uta—it is said.
TRANSLATION
The mode of goodness conditions one to happiness, passion
conditions him to the fruits of action, and ignorance to madness.
PURPORT
A person in the mode of goodness is satisfied by his work or
intellectual pursuit, just as a philosopher, scientist, or educator may be
engaged in a particular field of knowledge and may be satisfied in that way. A
man in the modes of passion and goodness may be engaged in fruitive activity;
he owns as much as he can and spends for good causes. Sometimes he tries to
open hospitals, give to charity institutions, etc. These are the signs of one
in the mode of passion. And the mode of ignorance covers knowledge. In the mode
of ignorance, whatever one does is neither good for him nor for anyone.
Bg
14.10
TEXT
10
TEXT
rJaSTaMaêai>a>aUYa
Satv& >aviTa >aarTa )
rJa" Satv& TaMaêEv TaMa" Satv& rJaSTaQaa )) 10 ))
rajas tamaç cäbhibhüya
sattvaà bhavati bhärata
rajaù sattvaà tamaç caiva
tamaù sattvaà rajas tathä
rajaù—mode of
passion; tamaù—mode of ignorance; ca—also; abhibhüya—also
surpassing; sattvam—mode of goodness; bhavati—becomes prominent; bhärata—O
son of Bharata; rajaù—mode of passion; sattvam—mode of goodness; tamaù—mode
of ignorance; ca—also; eva—like
that; tamaù—mode of ignorance; sattvam—mode of goodness; rajaù—mode
of passion; tathä—as in this.
TRANSLATION
Sometimes the mode of passion becomes prominent, defeating the
mode of goodness, O son of Bharata. And sometimes the mode of goodness defeats
passion, and at other times the mode of ignorance defeats goodness and passion.
In this way there is always competition for supremacy.
PURPORT
When the mode of passion is prominent, the modes of goodness and
ignorance are defeated. When the mode of goodness is prominent, passion and
ignorance are defeated. And, when the mode of ignorance is prominent, passion
and goodness are defeated. This competition is always going on. Therefore, one
who is actually intent on advancing in Kåñëa consciousness has to transcend
these three modes. The prominence of some certain mode of nature is manifested
in one’s dealings, in his activities, in eating, etc. All this will be explained
in later chapters. But if one wants, he can develop, by practice, the mode of
goodness and thus defeat the modes of ignorance and passion. One can similarly
develop the mode of passion and defeat goodness and ignorance. Or, one can
develop the mode of ignorance and defeat goodness and passion. Although there
are these three modes of material nature, if one is determined, he can be
blessed by the mode of goodness, and, by transcending the mode of goodness, he
can be situated in pure goodness, which is called the väsudeva
state, a state in which one can understand the science of God. By the
manifestation of particular activities, it can be understood in what mode of
nature one is situated.
Bg
14.11
TEXT
11
TEXT
SavRÜarezu
dehe_iSMaNPa[k-aXa oPaJaaYaTae )
jaNa& Yada Tada ivÛaiÜv*Ö& SatviMaTYauTa )) 11 ))
sarva-dväreñu dehe ’smin
prakäça upajäyate
jïänaà yadä tadä vidyäd
vivåddhaà sattvam ity uta
sarva-dväreñu—all the
gates; dehe asmin—in this body; prakäçaù—quality of illumination; upajäyate—develops; jïänam—knowledge;
yadä—when; tadä—at
that time; vidyät—must know; vivåddham—increased; sattvam—mode
of goodness; iti—thus; uta—said.
TRANSLATION
The manifestations of the mode of goodness can be experienced when
all the gates of the body are illuminated by knowledge.
PURPORT
There are nine gates in the body: two eyes, two ears, two
nostrils, the mouth, the genital and the anus. In every gate, when the symptom
of goodness is illuminated, it should be understood that one has developed the
mode of goodness. In the mode of goodness, one can see things in the right
position, one can hear things in the right position, and one can taste things
in the right position. One becomes cleansed inside and outside. In every gate
there is development of the symptoms of happiness, and that is the position of
goodness.
Bg
14.12
TEXT
12
TEXT
l/ae>a"
Pa[v*itararM>a" k-MaR<aaMaXaMa" SPa*ha )
rJaSYaeTaaiNa JaaYaNTae ivv*Öe >arTazR>a )) 12 ))
lobhaù pravåttir ärambhaù
karmaëäm açamaù spåhä
rajasy etäni jäyante
vivåddhe bharatarñabha
lobhaù—greed; pravåttiù—hankering; ärambhaù—endeavor;
karmaëäm—of activities; açamaù—uncontrollable;
spåhä—desire; rajasi—in
the mode of passion; etäni—all this; jäyante—develop; vivåddhe—when
there is excess; bharatarñabha—O chief of the
descendants of Bharata.
TRANSLATION
O chief of the Bhäratas, when there is an increase in the mode of
passion, the symptoms of great attachment, uncontrollable desire, hankering,
and intense endeavor develop.
PURPORT
One in the mode of passion is never satisfied with the position he
has already acquired; he hankers to increase his position. If he wants to
construct a residential house, he tries his best to have a palatial house, as
if he would be able to reside in that house eternally. And he develops a great
hankering for sense gratification. There is no end to sense gratification. He
always wants to remain with his family and in his house and to continue the
process of sense gratification. There is no cessation of this. All these
symptoms should be understood as characteristic of the mode of passion.
Bg
14.13
TEXT
13
TEXT
APa[k-aXaae_Pa[v*itaê
Pa[Maadae Maaeh Wv c )
TaMaSYaeTaaiNa JaaYaNTae ivv*Öe ku-åNaNdNa )) 13 ))
aprakäço ’pravåttiç ca
pramädo moha eva ca
tamasy etäni jäyante
vivåddhe kuru-nandana
aprakäçaù—darkness; apravåttiù—inactivity; ca—and;
pramädaù—madness; mohaù—illusion;
eva—certainly; ca—also;
tamasi—of the mode of ignorance; etäni—these; jäyante—are
manifested; vivåddhe—is developed; kuru-nandana—O son of Kuru.
TRANSLATION
O son of Kuru, when there is an increase in the mode of ignorance
madness, illusion, inertia and darkness are manifested.
PURPORT
When there is no illumination, knowledge is absent. One in the
mode of ignorance does not work by a regulative principle; he wants to act
whimsically for no purpose. Even though he has the capacity to work, he makes
no endeavor. This is called illusion. Although consciousness is going on, life
is inactive. These are the symptoms of one in the mode of ignorance.
Bg
14.14
TEXT
14
TEXT
Yada Satve
Pa[v*Öe Tau Pa[l/Ya& YaaiTa deh>a*Ta( )
TadaetaMaivda& l/aek-aNaMal/aNPa[iTaPaÛTae )) 14 ))
yadä sattve pravåddhe tu
pralayaà yäti deha-bhåt
tadottama-vidäà lokän
amalän pratipadyate
yadä—when; sattve—mode of goodness; pravåddhe—in
development; tu—but; pralayam—dissolution;
yäti—goes; deha-bhåt—embodied;
tadä—at that time; uttama-vidäm—of
the great sages; lokän—the planets; amalän—pure; pratipadyate—attains.
TRANSLATION
When one dies in the mode of goodness, he attains to the pure
higher planets.
PURPORT
One in goodness attains higher planetary systems, like Brahmaloka
or Janaloka, and there enjoys godly happiness. The word amalän
is significant; it means free from the modes of passion and ignorance. There
are impurities in the material world, but the mode of goodness is the purest form
of existence in the material world. There are different kinds of planets for
different kinds of living entities. Those who die in the mode of goodness are
elevated to the planets where great sages and great devotees live.
Bg
14.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
rJaiSa Pa[l/Ya&
GaTva k-MaRSai®zu JaaYaTae )
TaQaa Pa[l/INaSTaMaiSa MaU!YaaeiNazu JaaYaTae )) 15 ))
rajasi pralayaà gatvä
karma-saìgiñu jäyate
tathä pralénas tamasi
müòha-yoniñu jäyate
rajasi—in passion; pralayam—dissolution; gatvä—attaining;
karma-saìgiñu—in the association of fruitive
activities; jäyate—takes birth; tathä—thereafter; pralénaù—being
dissolved; tamasi—in ignorance; müòha—animal; yoniñu—species;
jäyate—take birth.
TRANSLATION
When one dies in the mode of passion, he takes birth among those
engaged in fruitive activities; and when he dies in the mode of ignorance, he
takes birth in the animal kingdom.
PURPORT
Some people have the impression that when the soul reaches the
platform of human life, it never goes down again. This is incorrect. According
to this verse, if one develops the mode of ignorance, after his death he is
degraded to the animal form of life. From there one has to again elevate
himself, by evolutionary process, to come again to the human form of life.
Therefore, those who are actually serious about human life should take to the
mode of goodness and in good association transcend the modes and become
situated in Kåñëa consciousness. This is the aim of human life. Otherwise,
there is no guarantee that the human being will again attain to the human
status.
Bg
14.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
k-MaR<a"
Sauk*-TaSYaahu" Saaitvk&- iNaMaRl&/ f-l/Ma( )
rJaSaSTau f-l&/ du"%MajaNa& TaMaSa" f-l/Ma( )) 16 ))
karmaëaù sukåtasyähuù
sättvikaà nirmalaà phalam
rajasas tu phalaà duùkham
ajïänaà tamasaù phalam
karmaëaù—of work; sukåtasya—in the mode of goodness; ähuù—said; sättvikam—mode
of goodness; nirmalam—purified; phalam—result; rajasaù—of
the mode of passion; tu—but; phalam—result; duùkham—misery;
ajïänam—nonsense; tamasaù—of
the mode of ignorance; phalam—result.
TRANSLATION
By acting in the mode of goodness, one becomes purified. Works
done in the mode of passion result in distress, and actions performed in the
mode of ignorance result in foolishness.
PURPORT
By pious activities in the mode of goodness one is purified;
therefore the sages, who are free from all illusion, are situated in happiness.
Similarly, activities in the mode of passion are simply miserable. Any activity
for material happiness is bound to be defeated. If, for example, one wants to
have a skyscraper, so much human misery has to be undergone before a big
skyscraper can be built. The financier has to take much trouble to earn a mass
of wealth, and those who are slaving to construct the building have to render
physical toil. The miseries are there. Thus Bhagavad-gétä
says that in any activity performed under the spell of the mode of
passion, there is definitely great misery. There may be a little so-called
mental happiness—“I have this house or this money”—but this is not actual
happiness. As far as the mode of ignorance is concerned, the performer is
without knowledge, and therefore all his activities result in present misery,
and afterwards he will go on toward animal life. Animal life is always
miserable, although, under the spell of the illusory energy, mäyä, the animals do not understand this. Slaughtering
poor animals is also due to the mode of ignorance. The animal killers do not
know that in the future the animal will have a body suitable to kill them. That
is the law of nature. In human society, if one kills a man he has to be hanged.
That is the law of the state. Because of ignorance, people do not perceive that
there is a complete state controlled by the Supreme Lord. Every living creature
is the son of the Supreme Lord, and He does not tolerate even an ant’s being
killed. One has to pay for it. So, indulgence in animal killing for the taste
of the tongue is the grossest kind of ignorance. A human being has no need to
kill animals because God has supplied so many nice things. If one indulges in meat-eating
anyway, it is to be understood that he is acting in ignorance and is making his
future very dark. Of all kinds of animal killing, the killing of cows is most
vicious because the cow gives us all kinds of pleasure by supplying milk. Cow
slaughter is an act of the grossest type of ignorance. In the Vedic literature
the words gobhiù préëita-matsaram indicate that
one who, being fully satisfied by milk, is desirous of killing the cow, is in
the grossest ignorance. There is also a prayer in the Vedic literature that
states:
namo brahmaëya-deväya go-brähmaëa-hitäya ca
jagaddhitäya kåñëäya govindäya namo namaù.
“My Lord, You are the well-wisher of the cows and the brähmaëas, and You are the well-wisher of the entire
human society and world.” The purport is that special mention is given in that
prayer for the protection of the cows and the brähmaëas.
Brähmaëas are the symbol of spiritual education, and cows are the symbol
of the most valuable food; these two living creatures, the brähmaëas and the cows, must be given all
protection—that is real advancement of civilization. In modern human society,
spiritual knowledge is neglected, and cow killing is encouraged. It is to be
understood, then, that human society is advancing in the wrong direction and is
clearing the path to its own condemnation. A civilization which guides the
citizens to become animals in their next lives is certainly not a human
civilization. The present human civilization is, of course, grossly misled by
the modes of passion and ignorance. It is a very dangerous age, and all nations
should take care to provide the easiest process, Kåñëa consciousness, to save
humanity from the greatest danger.
Bg
14.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
SatvaTSaÅaYaTae
jaNa& rJaSaae l/ae>a Wv c )
Pa[MaadMaaehaE TaMaSaae >avTaae_jaNaMaev c )) 17 ))
sattvät saïjäyate jïänaà
rajaso lobha eva ca
pramäda-mohau tamaso
bhavato ’jïänam eva ca
sattvät—from the
mode of goodness; saïjäyate—develops; jïänam—knowledge; rajasaù—from
the mode of passion; lobhaù—greed; eva—certainly; ca—also; pramäda—madness; mohau—illusion;
tamasaù—from the mode of ignorance; bhavataù—develops; ajïänam—nonsense;
eva—certainly; ca—also.
TRANSLATION
From the mode of goodness, real knowledge develops; from the mode
of passion, grief develops; and from the mode of ignorance, foolishness,
madness and illusion develop.
PURPORT
Since the present civilization is not very congenial to the living
entities, Kåñëa consciousness is recommended. Through Kåñëa consciousness,
society will develop the mode of goodness. When the mode of goodness is
developed, people will see things as they are. In the mode of ignorance, people
are just like animals and cannot see things clearly. In the mode of ignorance,
for example, they do not see that by killing one animal they are taking a chance
of being killed by the same animal in the next life. Because people have no
education in actual knowledge, they become irresponsible. To stop this
irresponsibility, education for developing the mode of goodness of the people
in general must be there. When they are actually educated in the mode of
goodness, they will become sober, in full knowledge of things as they are. Then
people will be happy and prosperous. Even if the majority of the people aren’t
happy and prosperous, if a certain percentage of the population develops Kåñëa
consciousness and becomes situated in the mode of goodness, then there is the
possibility for peace and prosperity all over the world. Otherwise, if the
world is devoted to the modes of passion and ignorance, there can be no peace
or prosperity. In the mode of passion, people become greedy, and their
hankering for sense enjoyment has no limit. One can see that even if one has
enough money and adequate arrangement for sense gratification, there is neither
happiness nor peace of mind. That is not possible because one is situated in
the mode of passion. If one wants happiness at all, his money will not help
him; he has to elevate himself to the mode of goodness by practicing Kåñëa
consciousness. One engaged in the mode of passion is not only mentally unhappy,
but his profession and occupation are also very troublesome. He has to devise
so many plans and schemes to acquire enough money to maintain his status quo.
This is all miserable. In the mode of ignorance, people become mad. Being distressed
by their circumstances, they take shelter of intoxication, and thus they sink
further into ignorance. Their future in life is very dark.
Bg
14.18
TEXT
18
TEXT
Oß| GaC^iNTa
SatvSQaa MaDYae iTaïiNTa raJaSaa" )
JagaNYaGau<av*itaSQaa ADaae GaC^iNTa TaaMaSaa" )) 18 ))
ürdhvaà gacchanti sattva-sthä
madhye tiñöhanti räjasäù
jaghanya-guëa-våtti-sthä
adho gacchanti tämasäù
ürdhvam—upwards; gacchanti—goes; sattva-sthäù—one
who is situated in the mode of goodness; madhye—in
the middle; tiñöhanti—dwell; räjasäù—those who are situated in the mode of passion; jaghanya—abominable; guëa—quality;
våtti-sthäù—occupation; adhaù—down;
gacchanti—go; tämasäù—persons
in the mode of ignorance.
TRANSLATION
Those situated in the mode of goodness gradually go upward to the
higher planets; those in the mode of passion live on the earthly planets; and
those in the mode of ignorance go down to the hellish worlds.
PURPORT
In this verse the results of actions in the three modes of nature
are more explicitly set forth. There is an upper planetary system, consisting
of the heavenly planets, where everyone is highly elevated. According to the
degree of development of the mode of goodness, the living entity can be
transferred to various planets in this system. The highest planet is Satyaloka,
or Brahmaloka, where the prime person of this universe, Lord Brahmä, resides.
We have seen already that we can hardly calculate the wondrous condition of
life in Brahmaloka, but the highest condition of life, the mode of goodness,
can bring us to this.
The mode of passion is mixed. It is in the middle, between the modes of goodness and ignorance. A person is not always pure, but even if he should be purely in the mode of passion, he will simply remain on this earth as a king or a rich man. But because there are mixtures, one can also go down. People on this earth, in the modes of passion or ignorance, cannot forcibly approach the higher planets by machine. In the mode of passion, there is also the chance of becoming mad in the next life.
The lowest quality, the mode of ignorance, is described here as abominable. The result of developing ignorance is very, very risky. It is the lowest quality in material nature. Beneath the human level there are eight million species of life: birds, beasts, reptiles, trees, etc., and, according to the development of the mode of ignorance, people are brought down to these abominable conditions. The word tämasäù is very significant here. Tämasäù indicates those who stay continually in the mode of ignorance without rising to a higher mode. Their future is very dark.
There is opportunity for men in the modes of ignorance and passion to be elevated to the mode of goodness, and that system is called Kåñëa consciousness. But one who does not take advantage of this opportunity certainly will continue in the lower modes.
Bg
14.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
NaaNYa&
Gau<ae>Ya" k-TaaRr& Yada d]íaNauPaXYaiTa )
Gau<ae>Yaê Par& veita MaÙav& Saae_iDaGaC^iTa )) 19 ))
nänyaà guëebhyaù kartäraà
yadä drañöänupaçyati
guëebhyaç ca paraà vetti
mad-bhävaà so ’dhigacchati
na—never; anyam—other than; guëebhyaù—from
the qualities; kartäram—the performer; yadä—when; drañöä anupaçyati—he
who sees properly; guëebhyaù ca—from the modes of
nature; param—transcendental; vetti—know; mat-bhävam—My
spiritual nature; saù—he; adhigacchati—is
promoted.
TRANSLATION
When you see that there is nothing beyond these modes of nature in
all activities and that the Supreme Lord is transcendental to all these modes,
then you can know My spiritual nature.
PURPORT
One can transcend all the activities of the modes of material
nature simply by understanding them properly by learning from the proper souls.
The real spiritual master is Kåñëa, and He is imparting this spiritual
knowledge to Arjuna. Similarly, it is from those who are fully in Kåñëa
consciousness that one has to learn this science of activities in terms of the
modes of nature. Otherwise, one’s life will be misdirected. By the instruction
of a bona fide spiritual master, a living entity can know of his spiritual
position, his material body, his senses, how he is entrapped, and how he is
under the spell of the material modes of nature. He is helpless, being in the
grip of these modes, but when he can see his real position, then he can attain
to the transcendental platform, having the scope for spiritual life. Actually,
the living entity is not the performer of different activities. He is forced to
act because he is situated in a particular type of body, conducted by some
particular mode of material nature. Unless one has the help of spiritual
authority, he cannot understand in what position he is actually situated. With
the association of a bona fide spiritual master, he can see his real position,
and, by such an understanding, he can become fixed in full Kåñëa consciousness.
A man in Kåñëa consciousness is not controlled by the spell of the material
modes of nature. It has already been stated in the Seventh Chapter that one who
has surrendered to Kåñëa is relieved from the activities of material nature.
Therefore for one who is able to see things as they are, the influence of
material nature gradually ceases.
Bg
14.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
Gau<aaNaeTaaNaTaqTYa
}aqNdehq dehSaMauÙvaNa( )
JaNMaMa*TYauJaradu"%EivRMau¢-ae_Ma*TaMaénuTae )) 20 ))
guëän etän atétya trén
dehé deha-samudbhavän
janma-måtyu-jarä-duùkhair
vimukto ’måtam açnute
guëän—qualities; etän—all these; atétya—transcending;
trén—three; dehé—body;
deha—body; samudbhavän—produced
of; janma—birth; måtyu—death;
jarä—old age; duùkhaiù—distresses;
vimuktaù—being freed from; amåtam—nectar; açnute—enjoys.
TRANSLATION
When the embodied being is able to transcend these three modes, he
can become free from birth, death, old age and their distresses and can enjoy
nectar even in this life.
PURPORT
How one can stay in the transcendental position, even in this
body, in full Kåñëa consciousness, is explained in this verse. The Sanskrit
word dehé means embodied. Although one is within
this material body, by his advancement in spiritual knowledge he can be free
from the influence of the modes of nature. He can enjoy the happiness of
spiritual life even in this body because, after leaving this body, he is
certainly going to the spiritual sky. But even in this body he can enjoy
spiritual happiness. In other words, devotional service in Kåñëa consciousness is
the sign of liberation from this material entanglement, and this will be
explained in the Eighteenth Chapter. When one is freed from the influence of
the modes of material nature, he enters into devotional service.
Bg
14.21
TEXT
21
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac )
kE-ilR/®EñqNGau<aaNaeTaaNaTaqTaae >aviTa Pa[>aae )
ik-Maacar" k-Qa& cETaa&ñqNGau<aaNaiTavTaRTae )) 21 ))
arjuna
uväca
kair liìgais trén guëän etän
atéto bhavati prabho
kim äcäraù kathaà caitäàs
trén guëän ativartate
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna said;
kaiù—by which; liìgaiù—symptoms;
trén—three; guëän—qualities;
etän—all this; atétaù—transcend;
bhavati—become; prabho—my
Lord; kim—what; äcäraù—behavior;
katham—what; ca—also;
etän—these; trén—three;
guëän—qualities; ativartate—transcend.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna inquired: O my dear Lord, by what symptoms is one known who
is transcendental to those modes? What is his behavior? And how does he
transcend the modes of nature?
PURPORT
In this verse, Arjuna’s questions are very appropriate. He wants
to know the symptoms of a person who has already transcended the material
modes. He first inquires of the symptoms of such a transcendental person. How
can one understand that he has already transcended the influence of the modes
of material nature? The second question asks how he lives and what his
activities are. Are they regulated or nonregulated? Then Arjuna inquires of the
means by which he can attain the transcendental nature. That is very important.
Unless one knows the direct means by which one can be situated always
transcendentally, there is no possibility of showing the symptoms. So all these
questions put by Arjuna are very important, and the Lord answers them.
Bg
14.22, Bg 14.23, Bg 14.24, Bg 14.25, Bg
14.22-25
TEXTS
22–25
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
)
Pa[k-aXa& c Pa[v*ita& c MaaehMaev c Paa<@v )
Na Üeií SaMPa[v*taaiNa Na iNav*taaiNa k-ax(+aiTa )) 22 ))
odaSaqNavdaSaqNaae Gau<aEYaaeR Na ivcaLYaTae )
Gau<aa vTaRNTa wTYaev& Yaae_viTaïiTa Nae®Tae )) 23 ))
SaMadu"%Sau%" SvSQa" SaMal/aeíaXMak-aÄNa" )
TauLYaiPa[YaaiPa[Yaae DaqrSTauLYaiNaNdaTMaSa&STauiTa" )) 24 ))
MaaNaaPaMaaNaYaaeSTauLYaSTauLYaae iMa}aairPa+aYaae" )
SavaRrM>aPairTYaaGaq Gau<aaTaqTa" Sa oCYaTae )) 25 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
prakäçaà ca pravåttià ca
moham eva ca päëòava
na dveñöi sampravåttäni
na nivåttäni käìkñati
udäséna-vad äséno
guëair yo na vicälyate
guëä vartanta ity evaà
yo ’vatiñöhati neìgate
sama-duùkha-sukhaù sva-sthaù
sama-loñöäçma-käïcanaù
tulya-priyäpriyo dhéras
tulya-nindätma-saàstutiù
mänäpamänayos tulyas
tulyo miträri-pakñayoù
sarvärambha-parityägé
guëätétaù sa ucyate
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; prakäçam ca—and
illumination; pravåttim ca—and attachment; moham—illusion; eva ca—also;
päëòava—O son of Päëòu; na
dveñöi—does not hate; sampravåttäni—although
developed; na nivåttäni—nor stop development; käìkñati—desires; udäsénavat—as
if neutral; äsénaù—situated; guëaiù—by the qualities; yaù—one
who; na—never; vicälyate—is
agitated; guëäù—the qualities; vartante—is situated; iti evam—knowing
thus; yaù—one who; avatiñöhati—remains;
na—never; iìgate—flickering;
sama—equally; duùkha—in
distress; sukhaù—in happiness; svasthaù—being situated himself; sama—equally; loñöa—a
lump of earth; açma—stone; käïcanaù—gold; tulya—equally
disposed; priya—dear; apriyaù—undesirable;
dhéraù—steadily; tulya—equally;
nindä—in defamation;
ätma-saàstutiù—in praise of himself; mäna—honor;
apamänayoù—dishonor; tulyaù—equally;
tulyaù—equally; mitra—friend;
ari—enemy; pakñayoù—in
party; sarva—all; ärambhaù—endeavor;
parityägé—renouncer; guëa-atétaù—transcendental
to the material modes of nature; saù—he; ucyate—is said to be.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: He who does not hate illumination,
attachment and delusion when they are present, nor longs for them when they
disappear; who is seated like one unconcerned, being situated beyond these
material reactions of the modes of nature, who remains firm, knowing that the
modes alone are active; who regards alike pleasure and pain, and looks on a
clod, a stone and a piece of gold with an equal eye; who is wise and holds praise
and blame to be the same; who is unchanged in honor and dishonor, who treats
friend and foe alike, who has abandoned all fruitive undertakings—such a man is
said to have transcended the modes of nature.
PURPORT
Arjuna submitted the three different questions, and the Lord
answers them one after another. In these verses, Kåñëa first indicates that a
person transcendentally situated neither envies anyone nor hankers for
anything. When a living entity stays in this material world embodied by the
material body, it is to be understood that he is under the control of one of
the three modes of material nature. When he is actually out of the body, then
he is out of the clutches of the material modes of nature. But as long as he is
not out of the material body, he should be neutral. He should engage himself in
the devotional service of the Lord so that his identity with the material body
will automatically be forgotten. When one is conscious of the material body, he
acts only for sense gratification, but when one transfers the consciousness to
Kåñëa, sense gratification automatically stops. One does not need this material
body, and he does not need to accept the dictations of the material body. The
qualities of the material modes in the body will act, but as spirit soul the
self is aloof from such activities. How does he become aloof? He does not
desire to enjoy the body, nor does he desire to get out of it. Thus
transcendentally situated, the devotee becomes automatically free. He need not
try to become free from the influence of the modes of material nature.
The next question concerns the dealings of a transcendentally situated person. The materially situated person is affected by so-called honor and dishonor offered to the body, but the transcendentally situated person is not affected by such false honor and dishonor. He performs his duty in Kåñëa consciousness and does not mind whether a man honors or dishonors him. He accepts things that are favorable for his duty in Kåñëa consciousness, otherwise he has no necessity of anything material, either a stone or gold. He takes everyone as his dear friend who helps him in his execution of Kåñëa consciousness, and he does not hate his so-called enemy. He is equally disposed and sees everything on an equal level because he knows perfectly well that he has nothing to do with material existence. Social and political issues do not affect him because he knows the situation of temporary upheavals and disturbances. He does not attempt anything for his own sake. He can attempt anything for Kåñëa, but for his personal self he does not attain anything. By such behavior one becomes actually transcendentally situated.
Bg
14.26
TEXT
26
TEXT
Maa& c
Yaae_VYai>acare<a >ai¢-YaaeGaeNa SaevTae )
Sa Gau<aaNSaMaTaqTYaETaaNb]ø>aUYaaYa k-LPaTae )) 26 ))
mäà ca yo ’vyabhicäreëa
bhakti-yogena sevate
sa guëän samatétyaitän
brahma-bhüyäya kalpate
mäm—unto Me; ca—also; yaù—person; avyabhicäreëa—without fail; bhakti-yogena—by
devotional service; sevate—renders service; saù—he; guëän—all the
modes of material nature; samatétya—transcending;
etän—all this; brahma-bhüyäya—to
be elevated on the Brahman platform; kalpate—is
considered.
TRANSLATION
One who engages in full devotional service, who does not fall down
in any circumstance, at once transcends the modes of material nature and thus
comes to the level of Brahman.
PURPORT
This verse is a reply to Arjuna’s third question: What is the
means of attaining to the transcendental position? As explained before, the
material world is acting under the spell of the modes of material nature. One
should not be disturbed by the activities of the modes of nature; instead of
putting his consciousness into such activities, he may transfer his
consciousness to Kåñëa activities. Kåñëa activities are known as bhakti-yoga—always acting for Kåñëa. This includes not
only Kåñëa, but His different plenary expansions such as Räma and Näräyaëa. He
has innumerable expansions. One who is engaged in the service of any of the
forms of Kåñëa, or of His plenary expansions, is considered to be
transcendentally situated. One should also note that all the forms of Kåñëa are
fully transcendental, blissful, full of knowledge and eternal. Such
personalities of Godhead are omnipotent and omniscient, and they possess all
transcendental qualities. So, if one engages himself in the service of Kåñëa or
His plenary expansions with unfailing determination, although these modes of
material nature are very difficult to overcome, he can overcome them easily.
This is already explained in the Seventh Chapter. One who surrenders unto Kåñëa
at once surmounts the influence of the modes of material nature. To be in Kåñëa
consciousness or in devotional service means to acquire the equality of Kåñëa.
The Lord says that His nature is eternal, blissful and full of knowledge, and
the living entities are part and parcel of the Supreme, as gold particles are
part of a gold mine. Thus the living entity’s spiritual position is as good as
gold, as good as Kåñëa in quality. The difference of individuality continues,
otherwise there is no question of bhakti-yoga.
Bhakti-yoga means that the Lord is there, the devotee is there and the
activity of exchange of love between the Lord and the devotee is there.
Therefore the individuality of two persons is present in the Supreme Personality
of Godhead and the individual person, otherwise there is no meaning to bhakti-yoga. If one is not situated in the same
transcendental position with the Lord, one cannot serve the Supreme Lord. To be
a personal assistant to a king, one must acquire the qualifications. Thus the
qualification is to become Brahman, or freed from all material contamination.
It is said in the Vedic literature: brahmaiva san
brahmäpyeti. One can attain the Supreme Brahman by becoming Brahman.
This means that one must qualitatively become one with Brahman. By attainment
of Brahman, one does not lose his eternal Brahman identity as individual soul.
Bg
14.27
TEXT
27
TEXT
b]ø<aae ih
Pa[iTaïahMaMa*TaSYaaVYaYaSYa c )
XaaìTaSYa c DaMaRSYa Sau%SYaEk-aiNTak-SYa c )) 27 ))
brahmaëo hi pratiñöhäham
amåtasyävyayasya ca
çäçvatasya ca dharmasya
sukhasyaikäntikasya ca
brahmaëaù—of the
impersonal brahmajyoti; hi—certainly; pratiñöhä—the rest; aham—I
am; amåtasya—of the imperishable; avyayasya—immortal; ca—also;
çäçvatasya—of eternal; ca—and;
dharmasya—of the constitutional position; sukhasya—happiness; aikäntikasya—ultimate;
ca—also.
TRANSLATION
And I am the basis of the impersonal Brahman, which is the
constitutional position of ultimate happiness, and which is immortal,
imperishable and eternal.
PURPORT
The constitution of Brahman is immortality, imperishability,
eternity, and happiness. Brahman is the beginning of transcendental
realization. Paramätmä, the Supersoul, is the middle, the second stage in
transcendental realization, and the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the
ultimate realization of the Absolute Truth. Therefore, both Paramätmä and the
impersonal Brahman are within the Supreme Person. It is explained in the
Seventh Chapter that material nature is the manifestation of the inferior
energy of the Supreme Lord. The Lord impregnates the inferior material nature
with the fragments of the superior nature, and that is the spiritual touch in
the material nature. When a living entity conditioned by this material nature
begins the cultivation of spiritual knowledge, he elevates himself from the
position of material existence and gradually rises up to the Brahman conception
of the Supreme. This attainment of the Brahman conception of life is the first
stage in self-realization. At this stage the Brahman realized person is
transcendental to the material position, but he is not actually perfect in
Brahman realization. If he wants, he can continue to stay in the Brahman
position and then gradually rise up to Paramätmä realization and then to the realization
of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. There are many examples of this in Vedic
literature. The four Kumäras were situated first in the impersonal Brahman
conception of truth, but then they gradually rose to the platform of devotional
service. One who cannot elevate himself beyond the impersonal conception of
Brahman runs the risk of falling down. In Çrémad-Bhägavatam
it is stated that although a person may rise to the stage of impersonal
Brahman, without going farther, with no information of the Supreme Person, his
intelligence is not perfectly clear. Therefore, in spite of being raised to the
Brahman platform, there is the chance of falling down if one is not engaged in
the devotional service of the Lord. In the Vedic language it is also said: raso vai saù; rasaà hy eväyaà labdhvänandé bhavati. “When
one understands the Personality of God, the reservoir of pleasure, Kåñëa, he
actually becomes transcendentally blissful.” The Supreme Lord is full in six
opulences, and when a devotee approaches Him, there is an exchange of these six
opulences. The servant of the king enjoys on an almost equal level with the
king. And so, eternal happiness, imperishable happiness, eternal life accompany
devotional service. Therefore, realization of Brahman, or eternity, or
imperishability is included in devotional service. This is already possessed by
a person who is engaged in devotional service.
The living entity, although Brahman by nature, has the desire to lord it over the material world, and due to this he falls down. In his constitutional position, a living entity is above the three modes of material nature, but association with material nature entangles him in the different modes of material nature, goodness, passion and ignorance. Due to the association of these three modes, his desire to dominate the material world is there. By engagement in devotional service in full Kåñëa consciousness, he is immediately situated in the transcendental position, and his unlawful desire to control material nature is removed. Therefore the process of devotional service beginning with hearing, chanting, remembering—the prescribed nine methods for realizing devotional service—should be practiced in the association of devotees. Gradually, by such association, by the influence of the spiritual master, one’s material desire to dominate is removed, and one becomes firmly situated in the Lord’s transcendental loving service. This method is prescribed from the twenty-second to the last verse of this chapter. Devotional service to the Lord is very simple: one should always engage in the service of the Lord, should eat the remnants of foodstuffs offered to the Deity, smell the flowers offered to the lotus feet of the Lord, see the places where the Lord had His transcendental pastimes, read of the different activities of the Lord, His reciprocation of love with His devotees, chant always the transcendental vibration Hare Kåñëna, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/ Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare, and observe the fasting days commemorating the appearances and disappearances of the Lord and His devotees. By following such a process one becomes completely detached from all material activities. One who can thus situate himself in the brahmajyoti is equal to the Supreme Personality of Godhead in quality.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the Fourteenth Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of the Three Modes of Material Nature.
Bg 15. The Yoga of the Supreme Person
CHAPTER
FIFTEEN
The Yoga of
the Supreme Person
Bg 15.1
TEXT
1
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
)
OßRMaUl/MaDa"Xaa%MaìTQa& Pa[ahurVYaYaMa( )
^Nda&iSa YaSYa Pa<aaRiNa YaSTa& ved Sa vedivTa( )) 1 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
ürdhva-mülam adhaù-çäkham
açvatthaà prähur avyayam
chandäàsi yasya parëäni
yas taà veda sa veda-vit
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; ürdhva-mülam—with
roots above; adhaù—downwards; çäkham—branches; açvattham—banyan
tree; prähuù—said; avyayam—eternal;
chandäàsi—Vedic hymns; yasya—of
which; parëäni—the leaves; yaù—anyone; tam—that; veda—knows; saù—he; veda-vit—the knower of the Vedas.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: There is a banyan tree which has its roots
upward and its branches down and whose leaves are the Vedic hymns. One who
knows this tree is the knower of the Vedas.
PURPORT
After the discussion of the importance of bhakti-yoga,
one may question, “What about the Vedas?”
It is explained in this chapter that the purpose of Vedic study is to
understand Kåñëa. Therefore one who is in Kåñëa consciousness, who is engaged
in devotional service, already knows the Vedas.
The entanglement of this material world is compared here to a banyan tree. For one who is engaged in fruitive activities, there is no end to the banyan tree. He wanders from one branch to another, to another, to another. The tree of this material world has no end, and for one who is attached to this tree, there is no possibility of liberation. The Vedic hymns, meant for elevating oneself, are called the leaves of this tree. This tree’s roots grow upward because they begin from where Brahmä is located, the topmost planet of this universe. If one can understand this indestructible tree of illusion, then one can get out of it.
This process of extrication should be understood. In the previous chapters it has been explained that there are many processes by which to get out of the material entanglement. And, up to the Thirteenth Chapter, we have seen that devotional service to the Supreme Lord is the best way. Now, the basic principle of devotional service is detachment from material activities and attachment to the transcendental service of the Lord. The process of breaking attachment to the material world is discussed in the beginning of this chapter. The root of this material existence grows upward. This means that it begins from the total material substance, from the topmost planet of the universe. From there, the whole universe is expanded, with so many branches, representing the various planetary systems. The fruits represent the results of the living entities’ activities, namely, religion, economic development, sense gratification and liberation.
Now, there is no ready experience in this world of a tree situated with its branches down and its roots upward, but there is such a thing. That tree can be found beside a reservoir of water. We can see that the trees on the bank reflect upon the water with their branches down and roots up. In other words, the tree of this material world is only a reflection of the real tree of the spiritual world. This reflection of the spiritual world is situated on desire, just as the tree’s reflection is situated on water. Desire is the cause of things’ being situated in this reflected material light. One who wants to get out of this material existence must know this tree thoroughly through analytical study. Then he can cut off his relationship with it.
This tree, being the reflection of the real tree, is an exact replica. Everything is there in the spiritual world. The impersonalists take Brahmä to be the root of this material tree, and from the root, according to säìkhya philosophy, come prakåti, puruña, then the three guëas, then the five gross elements (païca-mahäbhüta), then the ten senses (daçendriya), mind, etc. In this way they divide up the whole material world. If Brahmä is the center of all manifestations, then this material world is a manifestation of the center by 180 degrees, and the other 180 degrees constitute the spiritual world. The material world is the perverted reflection, so the spiritual world must have the same variegatedness, but in reality. The prakåti is the external energy of the Supreme Lord, and the puruña is the Supreme Lord Himself, and that is explained in Bhagavad-gétä. Since this manifestation is material, it is temporary. A reflection is temporary, for it is sometimes seen and sometimes not seen. But the origin from whence the reflection is reflected is eternal. The material reflection of the real tree has to be cut off. When it is said that a person knows the Vedas, it is assumed that he knows how to cut off attachment to this material world. If one knows that process, he actually knows the Vedas. One who is attracted by the ritualistic formulas of the Vedas is attracted by the beautiful green leaves of the tree. He does not exactly know the purpose of the Vedas. The purpose of the Vedas, as disclosed by the Personality of Godhead Himself, is to cut down this reflected tree and attain the real tree of the spiritual world.
Bg 15.2
TEXT
2
TEXT
ADaêaeß|
Pa[Sa*TaaSTaSYa Xaa%a Gau<aPa[v*Öa ivzYaPa[val/a" )
ADaê MaUl/aNYaNauSaNTaTaaiNa k-MaaRNaubNDaqiNa MaNauZYal/aeke- )) 2 ))
adhaç cordhvaà prasåtäs tasya çäkhä
guëa-pravåddhä viñaya-praväläù
adhaç ca müläny anusantatäni
karmänubandhéni manuñya-loke
adhaù—downward; ca—and; ürdhvam—upward; prasåtäù—extended; tasya—its;
çäkhäù—branches; guëa—modes
of material nature; pravåddhäù—developed; viñaya—sense objects; praväläù—twigs;
adhaù—downward; ca—and;
müläni—roots; anusantatäni—extended;
karma—according to work; anubandhéni—bound;
manuñya-loke—in the world of human society.
TRANSLATION
The branches of this tree extend downward and upward, nourished by
the three modes of material nature. The twigs are the objects of the senses.
This tree also has roots going down, and these are bound to the fruitive
actions of human society.
PURPORT
The description of the banyan tree is further explained here. Its
branches are spread in all directions. In the lower parts, there are variegated
manifestations of living entities, such as human beings, animals, horses, cows,
dogs, cats, etc. These are situated on the lower parts of the branches, whereas
on the upper parts are higher forms of living entities: the demigods,
Gandharvas (fairies), and many other higher species of life. As a tree is
nourished by water, so this tree is nourished by the three modes of material
nature. Sometimes we find that a tract of land is barren for want of sufficient
water, and sometimes a tract is very green; similarly, where the modes of
material nature are proportionately greater in quantity, the different species
of life are manifested in that proportion.
The twigs of the tree are considered to be the sense objects. By development of the different modes of nature, we develop different senses, and, by the senses, we enjoy different varieties of sense objects. The source of the senses—the ears, the nose, eyes, etc.—is considered to be the upper twigs, tuned to the enjoyment of different sense objects. The leaves are sound, form, touch—the sense objects. The roots, which are subsidiary, are the by-products of different varieties of suffering and sense enjoyment. Thus we develop attachment and aversion. The tendencies toward piety and impiety are considered to be the secondary roots, spreading in all directions. The real root is from Brahmaloka, and the other roots are in the human planetary systems. After one enjoys the results of virtuous activities in the upper planetary systems, he comes down to this earth and renews his karma or fruitive activities for promotion. This planet of human beings is considered the field of activities.
Bg
15.3, Bg 15.4, Bg 15.3-4
TEXTS
3–4
TEXT
Na æPaMaSYaeh
TaQaaePal/>YaTae NaaNTaae Na caidNaR c SaMPa[iTaïa )
AìTQaMaeNa& Sauivæ!MaUl/‚ MaSa®Xañe<a d*!eNa i^tva )) 3 ))
TaTa" Pad& TaTPairMaaiGaRTaVYa& YaiSMaNGaTaa Na iNavTaRiNTa
>aUYa" )
TaMaev caÛ& Pauåz& Pa[PaÛe YaTa" Pa[v*ita" Pa[Sa*Taa
Paura<aq )) 4 ))
na rüpam asyeha tathopalabhyate
nänto na cädir na ca sampratiñöhä
açvattham enaà su-virüòha-mülam
asaìga-çastreëa dåòhena chittvä
tataù padaà tat parimärgitavyaà
yasmin gatä na nivartanti bhüyaù
tam eva cädyaà puruñaà prapadye
yataù pravåttiù prasåtä puräëé
na—not; rüpam—form; asya—of this
tree; iha—in this; tathä—also;
upalabhyate—can be perceived; na—never; antaù—end; na—never; ca—also; ädiù—beginning; na—never;
ca—also; sampratiñöhä—the
foundation; açvattham—banyan tree; enam—this; suvirüòha—strongly;
mülam—rooted; asaìga-çastreëa—by
the weapon of detachment; dåòhena—strong; chittvä—by cutting; tataù—thereafter;
padam—situation; tat—that;
parimärgitavyam—has to be searched out; yasmin—where; gatäù—going;
na—never; nivartanti—comes
back; bhüyaù—again; tam—to
him; eva—certainly; ca—also;
ädyam—original; puruñam—the
Personality of Godhead; prapadye—surrender; yataù—from whom; pravåttiù—beginning;
prasåtä—extension; puräëé—very
old.
TRANSLATION
The real form of this tree cannot be perceived in this world. No
one can understand where it ends, where it begins, or where its foundation is.
But with determination one must cut down this tree with the weapon of
detachment. So doing, one must seek that place from which, having once gone,
one never returns, and there surrender to that Supreme Personality of Godhead
from whom everything has begun and in whom everything is abiding since time
immemorial.
PURPORT
It is now clearly stated that the real form of this banyan tree
cannot be understood in this material world. Since the root is upwards, the
extension of the real tree is at the other end. No one can see how far the tree
extends, nor can one see the beginning of this tree. Yet one has to find out
the cause. “I am the son of my father, my father is the son of such and such a
person, etc.” By searching in this way, one comes to Brahmä, who is generated
by the Garbhodakaçäyé Viñëu. Finally, in this way, when one reaches to the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, that is the end of research work. One has to
search out that origin of this tree, the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
through the association of persons who are in the knowledge of that Supreme
Personality of Godhead. Then by understanding one becomes gradually detached
from this false reflection of reality, and by knowledge one can cut off the
connection and actually become situated in the real tree.
The word asaìga is very important in this connection because the attachment for sense enjoyment and lording it over the material nature is very strong. Therefore one must learn detachment by discussion of spiritual science based on authoritative scriptures, and one must hear from persons who are actually in knowledge. As a result of such discussion in the association of devotees, one comes to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Then the first thing one must do is surrender to Him. The description of that place whence going no one returns to this false reflected tree is given here. The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, is the original root from whom everything has emanated. To gain favor of that Personality of Godhead, one has only to surrender, and this is a result of performing devotional service by hearing, chanting, etc. He is the cause of this extension of this material world. This is already explained by the Lord Himself: ahaà sarvasya prabhavaù. “I am the origin of everything.”
Therefore to get out of the entanglement of this strong banyan tree of material life, one must surrender to Kåñëa. As soon as one surrenders unto Kåñëa, he becomes detached automatically from this material extension.
Bg 15.5
TEXT
5
TEXT
iNaMaaRNaMaaeha
iJaTaSa®daeza ADYaaTMaiNaTYaa iviNav*tak-aMaa" )
ÜNÜEivRMau¢-a" Sau%du"%Sa&jE‚ GaRC^NTYaMaU!a"
PadMaVYaYa& TaTa( )) 5 ))
nirmäna-mohä jita-saìga-doñä
adhyätma-nityä vinivåtta-kämäù
dvandvair vimuktäù sukha-duùkha-saàjïair
gacchanty amüòhäù padam avyayaà tat
nir—without; mäna—respect; mohäù—illusion;
jita—having conquered; saìga—association;
doñäù—faulty; adhyätma—spiritual;
nityäù—eternity; vinivåtta—associated;
kämäù—lusts; dvandvaiù—with
duality; vimuktäù—liberated; sukha-duùkha—happiness and distress; saàjïaiù—named; gacchanti—attains;
amüòhäù—unbewildered; padam—situation;
avyayam—eternal; tat—that.
TRANSLATION
One who is free from illusion, false prestige, and false
association, who understands the eternal, who is done with material lust and is
freed from the duality of happiness and distress, and who knows how to
surrender unto the Supreme Person, attains to that eternal kingdom.
PURPORT
The surrendering process is described here very nicely. The first
qualification is that one should not be deluded by pride. Because the
conditioned soul is puffed up, thinking himself the lord of material nature, it
is very difficult for him to surrender unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
One should know by the cultivation of real knowledge that he is not lord of
material nature; the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the Lord. When one is
free from delusion caused by pride, he can begin the process of surrender. For
one who is always expecting some honor in this material world, it is not
possible to surrender to the Supreme Person. Pride is due to illusion, for
although one comes here, stays for a brief time and then goes away, he has the
foolish notion that he is the lord of the world. He thus makes all things
complicated, and he is always in trouble. The whole world moves under this
impression. People are considering that the land, this earth, belongs to human
society, and they have divided the land under the false impression that they
are the proprietors. One has to get out of this false notion that human society
is the proprietor of this world. When one is freed from such a false notion, he
becomes free from all the false associations caused by familial, social, and
national affections. These fake associations bind one to this material world.
After this stage, one has to develop spiritual knowledge. One has to cultivate
knowledge of what is actually his own and what is actually not his own. And,
when one has an understanding of things as they are, he becomes free from all
dual conceptions such as happiness and distress, pleasure and pain. He becomes
full in knowledge; then it is possible for him to surrender to the Supreme
Personality of Godhead.
Bg 15.6
TEXT
6
TEXT
Na TaÙaSaYaTae
SaUYaaeR Na XaXaaªae Na Paavk-" )
YaÓTva Na iNavTaRNTae TaÖaMa ParMa& MaMa )) 6 ))
na tad bhäsayate süryo
na çaçäìko na pävakaù
yad gatvä na nivartante
tad dhäma paramaà mama
na—not; tat—that; bhäsayate—illuminates;
süryaù—sun; na—nor;
çaçäìkaù—the moon; na—nor;
pävakaù—fire, electricity; yat—where; gatvä—going; na—never; nivartante—comes
back; tat dhäma—that
abode; paramam—supreme; mama—My.
TRANSLATION
That abode of Mine is not illumined by the sun or moon, nor by
electricity. One who reaches it never returns to this material world.
PURPORT
The spiritual world, the abode of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, Kåñëa—which is known as Kåñëaloka, Goloka Våndävana—is described here.
In the spiritual sky there is no need of sunshine, moonshine, fire or
electricity, because all the planets are self-luminous. We have only one planet
in this universe, the sun, which is self-luminous, but all the planets in the
spiritual sky are self-luminous. The shining effulgence of all those planets (called
Vaikuëöhas) constitutes the shining sky known as the brahmajyoti.
Actually, the effulgence is emanating from the planet of Kåñëa, Goloka
Våndävana. Part of that shining effulgence is covered by the mahat-tattva, the material world. Other than this, the
major portion of that shining sky is full of spiritual planets, which are
called Vaikuëöhas, chief of which is Goloka Våndävana.
As long as a living entity is in this dark material world, he is in conditional life, but as soon as he reaches the spiritual sky, by cutting through the false, perverted tree of this material world, he becomes liberated. Then there is no chance of his coming back here. In his conditional life, the living entity considers himself to be the lord of this material world, but in his liberated state he enters into the spiritual kingdom and becomes the associate of the Supreme Lord. There he enjoys eternal bliss, eternal life, and full knowledge.
One should be captivated by this information. He should desire to transfer himself to that eternal world and extricate himself from this false reflection of reality. For one who is too much attached to this material world, it is very difficult to cut that attachment, but if he takes to Kåñëa consciousness, there is a chance of gradually becoming detached. One has to associate himself with devotees, those who are in Kåñëa consciousness. One should search out a society dedicated to Kåñëa consciousness and learn how to discharge devotional service. In this way he can cut off his attachment to the material world. One cannot become detached from the attraction of the material world simply by dressing himself in saffron cloth. He must become attached to the devotional service of the Lord. Therefore one should take it very seriously that devotional service as described in the Twelfth Chapter is the only way to get out of this false representation of the real tree. In Chapter Fourteen the contamination of all kinds of processes by material nature is described. Only devotional service is described as purely transcendental.
The words paramaà mama are very important here. Actually every nook and corner is the property of the Supreme Lord, but the spiritual world is paramam, full of six opulences. In the Upaniñads it is also confirmed that in the spiritual world there is no need of sunshine or moonshine, for the whole spiritual sky is illuminated by the internal potency of the Supreme Lord. That supreme abode can be achieved only by surrender and by no other means.
Bg 15.7
TEXT
7
TEXT
MaMaEva&Xaae
Jaqvl/aeke- Jaqv>aUTa" SaNaaTaNa" )
MaNa"zïaNaqiNd]Yaai<a Pa[k*-iTaSQaaiNa k-zRiTa )) 7 ))
mamaiväàço jéva-loke
jéva-bhütaù sanätanaù
manaù-ñañöhänéndriyäëi
prakåti-sthäni karñati
mama—My; eva—certainly; aàçaù—fragmental
particles; jéva-loke—world of conditional life; jéva-bhütaù—the conditioned living entities; sanätanaù—eternal; manaù—mind;
ñañöhäni—six; indriyäëi—senses;
prakåti—material nature; sthäni—situated;
karñati—struggling hard.
TRANSLATION
The living entities in this conditioned world are My eternal,
fragmental parts. Due to conditioned life, they are struggling very hard with
the six senses, which include the mind.
PURPORT
In this verse the identity of the living being is clearly given.
The living entity is the fragmental part and parcel of the Supreme Lord—eternally.
It is not that he assumes individuality in his conditional life and in his
liberated state becomes one with the Supreme Lord. He is eternally fragmented.
It is clearly said, sanätanaù. According to the
Vedic version, the Supreme Lord manifests and expands Himself in innumerable
expansions, of which the primary expansions are called Viñëu-tattva,
and the secondary expansions are called the living entities. In other
words, the Viñëu-tattva is the personal
expansion, and the living entities are separated expansions. By His personal
expansion, He is manifested in various forms like Lord Räma, Nåsiàhadeva,
Viñëumürti and all the predominating Deities in the Vaikuëöha planets. The
separated expansions, the living entities, are eternally servitors. The
personal expansions of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the individual
identities of the Godhead, are always present. Similarly, the separated
expansions of living entities have their identities. As fragmental parts and
parcels of the Supreme Lord, the living entities have also fragmental
qualities, of which independence is one. Every living entity has an individual
soul, his personal individuality and a minute form of independence. By misuse
of that independence, one becomes a conditioned soul, and by proper use of
independence he is always liberated. In either case, he is qualititatively
eternal, as the Supreme Lord is. In his liberated state he is freed from this
material condition, and he is under the engagement of transcendental service
unto the Lord; in his conditioned life he is dominated by the material modes of
nature, and he forgets the transcendental loving service of the Lord. As a
result, he has to struggle very hard to maintain his existence in the material
world.
The living entities, not only the human beings and the cats and dogs, but even the greater controllers of the material world—Brahmä, Lord Çiva, and even Viñëu—are all parts and parcels of the Supreme Lord. They are all eternal, not temporary manifestations. The word karñati (struggling or grappling hard) is very significant. The conditioned soul is bound up, as though shackled by iron chains. He is bound up by the false ego, and the mind is the chief agent which is driving him in this material existence. When the mind is in the mode of goodness, his activities are good; when the mind is in the mode of passion, his activities are troublesome; and when the mind is in the mode of ignorance, he travels in the lower species of life. It is clear, however, in this verse, that the conditioned soul is covered by the material body, with the mind and the senses, and when he is liberated this material covering perishes, but his spiritual body manifests in its individual capacity. The following information is there in the Mädhyandi-näyana-çruti: sa vä eña brahma-niñöha idaà saréraà marttyam atisåjya brahmäbhisampadya brahmaëä paçyati brahmaëä çånoti brahmaëaivedaà sarvam anubhavati. It is stated here that when a living entity gives up this material embodiment and enters into the spiritual world, he revives his spiritual body, and in his spiritual body he can see the Supreme Personality of Godhead face to face. He can hear and speak to Him face to face, and he can understand the Supreme Personality as He is. In småti also it is understood that in the spiritual planets everyone lives in bodies featured like the Supreme Personality of Godhead’s. As far as bodily construction is concerned, there is no difference between the part and parcel living entities and the expansions of Viñëumürti. In other words, at liberation the living entity gets a spiritual body by the grace of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
The word mamaiväàçaù (fragmental parts and parcels of the Supreme Lord) is also very significant. The fragmental portion of the Supreme Lord is not like some material broken part. We have already understood in the Second Chapter that the spirit cannot be cut into pieces. This fragment is not materially conceived. It is not like matter which can be cut into pieces and joined together again. That conception is not applicable here because the Sanskrit word sanätana (eternal) is used. The fragmental portion is eternal. It is also stated in the beginning of the Second Chapter that (dehino ’smin yathä) in each and every individual body, the fragmental portion of the Supreme Lord is present. That fragmental portion, when liberated from the bodily entanglement, revives its original spiritual body in the spiritual sky in a spiritual planet and enjoys association with the Supreme Lord. It is, however, understood here that the living entity, being the fragmental part and parcel of the Supreme Lord, is qualitatively one, just as the parts and parcels of gold are also gold.
Bg 15.8
TEXT
8
TEXT
Xarqr&
YadvaPanaeiTa YaÀaPYauT§-aMaTaqìr" )
Ga*hqTvETaaiNa Sa&YaaiTa vaYauGaRNDaaiNavaXaYaaTa( )) 8 ))
çaréraà yad aväpnoti
yac cäpy utkrämatéçvaraù
gåhétvaitäni saàyäti
väyur gandhän iväçayät
çaréram—body; yat—as much as; aväpnoti—gets;
yat—that which; ca—also;
api—virtually; utkrämati—gives
up; éçvaraù—the lord of the body; gåhétvä—taking; etäni—all
these; saàyäti—goes away; väyuù—air;
gandhän—smell; iva—like;
äçayät—from the flower.
TRANSLATION
The living entity in the material world carries his different
conceptions of life from one body to another as the air carries aromas.
PURPORT
Here the living entity is described as éçvara,
the controller of his own body. If he likes, he can change his body to a
higher grade, and if he likes he can move to a lower class. Minute independence
is there. The change his body undergoes depends upon him. At the time of death,
the consciousness he has created will carry him on to the next type of body. If
he has made his consciousness like that of a cat or dog, he is sure to change
to a cat’s or dog’s body. And, if he has fixed his consciousness on godly
qualities, he will change into the form of a demigod. And, if he is in Kåñëa
consciousness, he will be transferred to Kåñëaloka in the spiritual world and
will associate with Kåñëa. It is a false claim that after the annihilation of
this body everything is finished. The individual soul is transmigrating from
one body to another, and his present body and present activities are the
background of his next body. One gets a different body according to karma, and he has to quit this body in due course. It is
stated here that the subtle body, which carries the conception of the next
body, develops another body in the next life. This process of transmigrating
from one body to another and struggling while in the body is called karñati or struggle for existence.
Bg 15.9
TEXT
9
TEXT
é[ae}a&
c+au" SPaXaRNa& c rSaNa& ga]a<aMaev c )
AiDaïaYa MaNaêaYa& ivzYaaNauPaSaevTae )) 9 ))
çrotraà cakñuù sparçanaà ca
rasanaà ghräëam eva ca
adhiñöhäya manaç cäyaà
viñayän upasevate
çrotram—ears; cakñuù—eyes; sparçanam—touch;
ca—also; rasanam—tongue;
ghräëam—smelling power; eva—also;
ca—and; adhiñöhäya—being
situated; manaù—mind; ca—also;
ayam—this; viñayän—sense
objects; upasevate—enjoys.
TRANSLATION
The living entity, thus taking another gross body, obtains a
certain type of ear, tongue, and nose and sense of touch, which are grouped
about the mind. He thus enjoys a particular set of sense objects.
PURPORT
In other words, if the living entity adulterates his consciousness
with the qualities of cats and dogs, in his next life he gets a cat or dog body
and enjoys. Consciousness is originally pure, like water. But if we mix water
with a certain color, it changes. Similarly, consciousness is pure, for the
spirit soul is pure. But consciousness is changed according to the association
of the material qualities. Real consciousness is Kåñëa consciousness. When,
therefore, one is situated in Kåñëa consciousness, he is in his pure life. But
if his consciousness is adulterated by some type of material mentality, in the
next life he gets a corresponding body. He does not necessarily get a human
body again; he can get the body of a cat, dog, hog, demigod or one of many
other forms, for there are 8,400,000 species.
Bg
15.10
TEXT
10
TEXT
oT§-aMaNTa&
iSQaTa& vaiPa >auÅaNa& va Gau<aaiNvTaMa( )
ivMaU!a NaaNauPaXYaiNTa PaXYaiNTa jaNac+auz" )) 10 ))
utkrämantaà sthitaà väpi
bhuïjänaà vä guëänvitam
vimüòhä nänupaçyanti
paçyanti jïäna-cakñuñaù
utkrämantam—quitting
the body; sthitam—situated in the body; väpi—either; bhuïjänam—enjoying;
vä—or; guëa-anvitam—under
the spell of the modes of material nature; vimüòhäù—foolish
persons; na—never; anupaçyanti—can
see; paçyanti—one can see; jïäna-cakñuñaù—one who has the eyes of knowledge.
TRANSLATION
The foolish cannot understand how a living entity can quit his
body, nor can they understand what sort of body he enjoys under the spell of
the modes of nature. But one whose eyes are trained in knowledge can see all
this.
PURPORT
The word jïäna-cakñuñaù is very
significant. Without knowledge, one cannot understand how a living entity
leaves his present body, nor what form of body he is going to take in the next
life, nor even why he is living in a particular type of body. This requires a
great amount of knowledge understood from Bhagavad-gétä and
similar literatures heard from a bona fide spiritual master. One who is trained
to perceive all these things is fortunate. Every living entity is quitting his
body under certain circumstances; he is living under certain circumstances and
enjoying under certain circumstances under the spell of material nature. As a
result, he is suffering different kinds of happiness and distress, under the
illusion of sense enjoyment. Persons who are everlastingly fooled by lust and
desire lose all power of understanding their change of body and their stay in a
particular body. They cannot comprehend it. Those who have developed spiritual
knowledge, however, can see that the spirit is different from the body and is
changing its body and enjoying in different ways. A person in such knowledge
can understand how the conditioned living entity is suffering in this material
existence. Therefore those who are highly developed in Kåñëa consciousness try
their best to give this knowledge to the people in general, for their
conditional life is very much troublesome. They should come out of it and be
Kåñëa conscious and liberate themselves to transfer to the spiritual world.
Bg
15.11
TEXT
11
TEXT
YaTaNTaae
YaaeiGaNaêENa& PaXYaNTYaaTMaNYaviSQaTaMa( )
YaTaNTaae_PYak*-TaaTMaaNaae NaENa& PaXYaNTYaceTaSa" )) 11 ))
yatanto yoginaç cainaà
paçyanty ätmany avasthitam
yatanto ’py akåtätmäno
nainaà paçyanty acetasaù
yatantaù—endeavoring;
yoginaù—transcendentalists; ca—also; enam—this; paçyanti—can see; ätmani—in
the self; avasthitam—situated; yatantaù—although endeavoring; api—although;
akåta-ätmänaù—without self-realization; na—does not; enam—this; paçyanti—can see; acetasaù—undeveloped
mind.
TRANSLATION
The endeavoring transcendentalist, who is situated in
self-realization, can see all this clearly. But those who are not situated in
self-realization cannot see what is taking place, though they may try to.
PURPORT
There are many transcendentalists in the path of spiritual
self-realization, but one who is not situated in self-realization cannot see
how things are changing in the body of the living entity. The word yoginaù is significant in this connection. In the
present day there are many so-called yogés, and
there are many so-called associations of yogés, but
they are actually blind in the matter of self-realization. They are simply
addicted to some sort of gymnastic exercise and are satisfied if the body is
well-built and healthy. They have no other information. They are called yatanto ’py akåtätmänaù. Even though they are
endeavoring in a so-called yoga system, they are
not self-realized. Such people cannot understand the process of the
transmigration of the soul. Only those who are actually in the yoga system and have realized the self, the world, and
the Supreme Lord, in other words, the bhakti-yogés, those
engaged in pure devotional service in Krsëa consciousness, can understand how
things are taking place.
Bg
15.12
TEXT
12
TEXT
YadaidTYaGaTa&
TaeJaae JaGaÙaSaYaTae_i%l/Ma( )
YaÀNd]MaiSa YaÀaGanaE TataeJaae iviÖ MaaMak-Ma( )) 12 ))
yad äditya-gataà tejo
jagad bhäsayate ’khilam
yac candramasi yac cägnau
tat tejo viddhi mämakam
yat—that which; äditya-gatam—in the sunshine; tejaù—splendor;
jagat—the whole world; bhäsayate—illuminates;
akhilam—entirely; yat—that
which; candramasi—in the moon; yat—that which; ca—also; agnau—in the fire; tat—that;
tejaù—splendor; viddhi—understand;
mämakam—from Me.
TRANSLATION
The splendor of the sun, which dissipates the darkness of this
whole world, comes from Me. And the splendor of the moon and the splendor of
fire are also from Me.
PURPORT
The unintelligent cannot understand how things are taking place.
The beginning of knowledge can be established by understanding what the Lord
explains here. Everyone sees the sun, moon, fire and electricity. One should
simply try to understand that the splendor of the sun, the splendor of the
moon, and the splendor of electricity or fire are coming from the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. In such a conception of life, the beginning of Kåñëa
consciousness, lies a great deal of advancement for the conditioned soul in
this material world. The living entities are essentially the parts and parcels
of the Supreme Lord, and He is giving herewith the hint how they can come back
to Godhead, back to home. From this verse we can understand that the sun is
illuminating the whole solar system. There are different universes and solar
systems, and there are different suns, moons and planets also. Sunlight is due
to the spiritual effulgence in the spiritual sky of the Supreme Lord. With the
rise of the sun, the activities of human beings are set up. They set fire to
prepare their foodstuff; they set fire to start the factories, etc. So many
things are done with the help of fire. Therefore sunrise, fire and moonlight
are so pleasing to the living entities. Without their help no living entity can
live. So if one can understand that the light and splendor of the sun, moon and
fire are emanating from the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, then one’s
Kåñëa consciousness will begin. By the moonshine, all the vegetables are nourished.
The moonshine is so pleasing that people can easily understand that they are
living by the mercy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead Kåñëa. Without His
mercy there cannot be sun, without His mercy there cannot be moon, and without
His mercy there cannot be fire, and without the help of sun, moon and fire, no
one can live. These are some thoughts to provoke Kåñëa consciousness in the
conditioned soul.
Bg
15.13
TEXT
13
TEXT
GaaMaaivXYa c
>aUTaaiNa DaarYaaMYahMaaeJaSaa )
PauZ<aaiMa caEzDaq" SavaR" SaaeMaae >aUTva rSaaTMak-" ))
13 ))
gäm äviçya ca bhütäni
dhärayämy aham ojasä
puñëämi cauñadhéù sarväù
somo bhütvä rasätmakaù
gäm—the planets;
äviçya—entering; ca—also;
bhütäni—living entities; dhärayämi—sustaining;
aham—I; ojasä—by My
energy; puñëämi—nourishing; ca—and; auñadhéù—all
vegetables; sarväù—all; somaù—the
moon; bhütvä—becoming; rasa-ätmakaù—supplying
the juice.
TRANSLATION
I enter into each planet, and by My energy they stay in orbit. I
become the moon and thereby supply the juice of life to all vegetables.
PURPORT
It is understood that all the planets are floating in the air only
by the energy of the Lord. The Lord enters into every atom, every planet, and
every living being. That is discussed in the Brahmä-saàhitä.
It is said there that one plenary portion of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, Paramätmä, enters into the planets, the universe, the living entity,
and even into the atom. So due to His entrance, everything is appropriately
manifested. When the spirit soul is there, a living man can float on the water,
but when the living spark is out of the body and the body is dead, it sinks. Of
course when it is decomposed it floats just like straw and other things, but as
soon as the man is dead, he at once sinks in the water. Similarly, all these planets
are floating in space, and this is due to the entrance of the supreme energy of
the Supreme Personality of Godhead. His energy is sustaining each planet, just
like a handful of dust. If someone holds a handful of dust, there is no
possibility of the dust falling, but if one throws it in the air, it will fall
down. Similarly, these planets, which are floating in air, are actually held in
the fist of the universal form of the Supreme Lord. By His strength and energy,
all moving and unmoving things stay in their place. It is said that because of
the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the sun is shining and the planets are
steadily moving. Were it not for Him, all the planets would scatter, like dust
in air, and perish. Similarly, it is due to the Supreme Personality of Godhead
that the moon nourishes all vegetables. Due to the moon’s influence, the
vegetables become delicious. Without the moonshine, the vegetables can neither
grow nor taste succulent. Human society is working, living comfortably and
enjoying food due to the supply from the Supreme Lord. Otherwise, mankind could
not survive. The word rasätmakaù is very
significant. Everything becomes palatable by the agency of the Supreme Lord
through the influence of the moon.
Bg
15.14
TEXT
14
TEXT
Ah&
vEìaNarae >aUTva Pa[ai<aNaa& dehMaaié[Ta" )
Pa[a<aaPaaNaSaMaaYau¢-" PacaMYaà& cTauivRDaMa( )) 14 ))
ahaà vaiçvänaro bhütvä
präëinäà deham äçritaù
präëäpäna-samäyuktaù
pacämy annaà catur-vidham
aham—I; vaiçvänaraù—by My plenary portion as the digesting
fire; bhütvä—becoming; präëinäm—of
all living entities; deham—body; äçritaù—situated; präëa—outgoing
air; apäna—downgoing air; samäyuktaù—keep
balance; pacämi—digest; annam—foodstuff;
catur-vidham—four kinds
of.
TRANSLATION
I am the fire of digestion in every living body, and I am the air
of life, outgoing and incoming, by which I digest the four kinds of foodstuff.
PURPORT
According to Äyur-vedic çästra, we
understand that there is a fire in the stomach which digests all food sent
there. When the fire is not blazing, there is no hunger, and when the fire is
in order, we become hungry. Sometimes when the fire is not going nicely,
treatment is required. In any case, this fire is representative of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. Vedic mantras also
confirm that the Supreme Lord or Brahman is situated in the form of fire within
the stomach and is digesting all kinds of foodstuff. Therefore since He is
helping the digestion of all kinds of foodstuff, the living entity is not
independant in the eating process. Unless the Supreme Lord helps him in
digesting, there is no possibility of eating. He thus produces and digests
foodstuff, and, by His grace, we are enjoying life. In the Vedänta-sütra this is also confirmed: çabdädibhyo ’ntaù pratiñöhänäc ca. The Lord is situated
within sound and within the body, within the air and even within the stomach as
the digestive force. There are four kinds of foodstuff: some are swallowed,
some are chewed, some are licked up, and some are sucked, and He is the
digestive force for all of them.
Bg
15.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
SavRSYa cah&
ôid Saiàivíae Mata" SMa*iTajaRNaMaPaaehNa& c )
vedEê SavŒrhMaev veÛae vedaNTak*-Üedivdev cahMa( )) 15 ))
sarvasya cähaà hådi sanniviñöo
mattaù småtir jïänam apohanaà ca
vedaiç ca sarvair aham eva vedyo
vedänta-kåd veda-vid eva cäham
sarvasya—of all
living beings; ca—and; aham—I; hådi—in the heart; sanniviñöaù—being
situated; mattaù—from Me; småtiù—remembrance;
jïänam—knowledge; apohanam
ca—and forgetfulness; vedaiù—by the Vedas; ca—also; sarvaiù—all;
aham—I am; eva—certainly;
vedyaù—knowable; vedänta-kåt—the
compiler of the Vedänta; veda-vit—the
knower of the Vedas; eva—certainly; ca—and; aham—I.
TRANSLATION
I am seated in everyone’s heart, and from Me come remembrance,
knowledge and forgetfulness. By all the Vedas am I to be known; indeed I am the
compiler of Vedänta, and I am the knower of the Vedas.
PURPORT
The Supreme Lord is situated as Paramätmä in everyone’s heart, and
it is from Him that all activities are initiated. The living entity forgets
everything of his past life, but he has to act according to the direction of
the Supreme Lord, who is witness to all his work. Therefore he begins his work
according to his past deeds. Required knowledge is supplied to him, and
remembrance is given to him, and he forgets, also, about his past life. Thus,
the Lord is not only all-pervading; He is also localized in every individual
heart. He awards the different fruitive results. He is not only worshipable as
the impersonal Brahman, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and the localized
Paramätmä, but as the form of the incarnation of the Vedas
as well. The Vedas give the right direction to
the people so that they can properly mold their lives and come back to Godhead,
back to home. The Vedas offer knowledge of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, and Kåñëa in His incarnation as
Vyäsadeva is the compiler of the Vedänta-sütra.
The commentation on the Vedänta-sütra by
Vyäsadeva in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam gives the real
understanding of Vedänta-sütra. The Supreme Lord
is so full that for the deliverance of the conditioned soul He is the supplier
and digester of foodstuff, the witness of his activity, the giver of knowledge
in the form of Vedas and as the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëa, the teacher of the Bhagavad-gétä.
He is worshipable by the conditioned soul. Thus God is all-good; God is
all-merciful.
Antaùpraviñöaù çästä janänäm. The living entity forgets as soon as he quits his present body, but he begins his work again, initiated by the Supreme Lord. Although he forgets, the Lord gives him the intelligence to renew his work where he ended his last life. So not only does a living entity enjoy or suffer in this world according to the dictation from the Supreme Lord situated locally in the heart, but he receives the opportunity to understand Vedas from Him. If one is serious to understand the Vedic knowledge, then Kåñëa gives the required intelligence. Why does He present the Vedic knowledge for understanding? Because a living entity individually needs to understand Kåñëa. Vedic literature confirms this: yo ’sau sarvair vedair géyate. In all Vedic literature, beginning from the four Vedas, Vedänta-sütra and the Upaniñads and Puräëas, the glories of the Supreme Lord are celebrated. By performing Vedic rituals, discussing the Vedic philosophy and worshiping the Lord in devotional service, He is attained. Therefore the purpose of the Vedas is to understand Kåñëa. The Vedas give us direction to understand Kåñëa and the process of understanding. The ultimate goal is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Vedänta-sütra confirms this in the following words: tat tu samanvayät. One can attain perfection by understanding Vedic literature, and one can understand his relationship with the Supreme Personality of Godhead by performing the different processes. Thus one can approach Him and at the end attain the supreme goal, who is no other than the Supreme Personality of Godhead. In this verse, however, the purpose of the Vedas, the understanding of the Vedas and the goal of Vedas are clearly defined.
Bg
15.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
ÜaivMaaE PauåzaE
l/aeke- +arêa+ar Wv c )
+ar" SavaRi<a >aUTaaiNa kU-$=SQaae_+ar oCYaTae )) 16 ))
dväv imau puruñau loke
kñaraç cäkñara eva ca
kñaraù sarväëi bhütäni
küöa-stho ’kñara ucyate
dvau—two; imau—in this (world); puruñau—living
entities; loke—in the world; kñaraù—fallible; ca—and; akñaraù—infallible; eva—certainly;
ca—and; kñaraù—the
fallible; sarväëi—all; bhütäni—living
entities; küöasthaù—in oneness; akñaraù—infallible; ucyate—is
said.
TRANSLATION
There are two classes of beings, the fallible and the infallible.
In the material world every entity is fallible, and in the spiritual world
every entity is called infallible.
PURPORT
As already explained, the Lord in His incarnation as Vyäsadeva
compiled the Vedänta-sutra. Here the Lord is
giving, in summary, the contents of the Vedänta-sütra: He
says that the living entities, who are innumerable, can be divided into two
classes—the fallible and the infallible. The living entities are eternally
separated parts and parcels of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. When they
are in contact with the material world, they are called jéva-bhütäù,
and the Sanskrit words given here, sarväëi
bhütäni mean that they are fallible. Those who are in oneness with the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, however, are called infallible. Oneness does
not mean that they have no individuality, but that there is no disunity. They
are all agreeable to the purpose of the creation. Of course, in the spiritual
world, there is no such thing as creation, but since the Supreme Personality of
Godhead has stated in the Vedänta-sütra that He
is the source of all emanations, that conception is explained.
According to the statement of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Kåñëa, there are two classes of men. The Vedas give evidence of this, so there is no doubt about it. The living entities, who are struggling in this world with the mind and five senses, have their material bodies which are changing as long as the living entities are conditioned. One’s body changes due to contact with matter; matter is changing, so the living entity appears to be changing. But in the spiritual world the body is not made of matter; therefore there is no change. In the material world the living entity undergoes six changes—birth, growth, duration, reproduction, then dwindling and vanishing. These are the changes of the material body. But in the spiritual world the body does not change; there is no old age, there is no birth, there is no death. There all exists in oneness. It is more clearly explained as sarväëi bhütäni: any living entity who has come in contact with matter, beginning from the first created being, Brahmä, down to a small ant, is changing its body; therefore they are all fallible. In the spiritual world, however, they are always liberated in oneness.
Bg
15.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
otaMa"
PauåzSTvNYa" ParMaaTMaeTYaudaôTa" )
Yaae l/aek-}aYaMaaivXYa ib>aTYaRVYaYa wRìr" )) 17 ))
uttamaù puruñas tv anyaù
paramätmety udähåtaù
yo loka-trayam äviçya
bibharty avyaya éçvaraù
uttamaù—the best; puruñaù—personality; tu—but;
anyaù—another; param—the
Supreme; ätmä—Self; iti—thus;
udähåtaù—said; yaù—one
who; loka—of the universe; trayam—the three divisions; äviçya—entering;
bibharti—maintaining; avyayaù—inexhaustible;
éçvaraù—the Lord.
TRANSLATION
Besides these two, there is the greatest living personality, the
Lord Himself, who has entered into these worlds and is maintaining them.
PURPORT
This verse is very nicely expressed in the Kaöha
Upaniñad and Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad. It is
clearly stated there that above the innumerable living entities, some of whom
are conditioned and some of whom are liberated, there is the Supreme
Personality who is Paramätmä. The Upanisadic verse runs as follows: nityo nityänäà cetanaç cetanänäm. The purport is that
amongst all the living entities, both conditioned and liberated, there is one
supreme living personality, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who maintains
them and gives them all the facility of enjoyment according to different work.
That Supreme Personality of Godhead is situated in everyone’s heart as
Paramätmä. A wise man who can understand Him is eligible to attain the perfect
peace, not others.
It is incorrect to think
of the Supreme Lord and the living entities as being on the same level or equal
in all respects. There is always the question of superiority and inferiority in
their personalities. This particular word uttama is
very significant. No one can surpass the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Loke is also significant because in the Pauruña, a Vedic literature, it is stated: lokyate vedärtho ’nena. This Supreme Lord in His
localized aspect as Paramätmä explains the purpose of the Vedas. The following verse also appears in the Vedas:
tävad eña samprasädo ’smäc
charérät samutthäya paraà
jyoti-rüpaà sampadya svena
rüpeëäbhiniñpadyate sa uttamaù puruñaù
“The Supersoul coming out of the body enters the impersonal brahmajyoti; then in His form He remains in His
spiritual identity. That Supreme is called the Supreme Personality.” This means
that the Supreme Personality is exhibiting and diffusing His spiritual
effulgence, which is the ultimate illumination. That Supreme Personality also
has a localized aspect as Paramätmä. By incarnating Himself as the son of
Satyavaté and Paräçara, He explains the Vedic knowledge as Vyäsadeva.
Bg
15.18
TEXT
18
TEXT
YaSMaaT+arMaTaqTaae_hMa+aradiPa
caetaMa" )
ATaae_iSMa l/aeke- vede c Pa[iQaTa" PauåzaetaMa" )) 18 ))
yasmät kñaram atéto ’ham
akñaräd api cottamaù
ato ’smi loke vede ca
prathitaù puruñottamaù
yasmät—because; kñaram—the fallible; atétaù—transcendental;
aham—I; akñarät—from
the infallible; api—better than that; ca—and; uttamaù—the best;
ataù—therefore; asmi—I
am; loke—in the world; vede—in
the Vedic literature; ca—and; prathitaù—celebrated; puruñottamaù—as
the Supreme Personality.
TRANSLATION
Because I am transcendental, beyond both the fallible and the
infallible, and because I am the greatest, I am celebrated both in the world
and in the Vedas as that Supreme Person.
PURPORT
No one can surpass the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
Kåñëa—neither the conditioned soul nor the liberated soul. He is, therefore,
the greatest of personalities. Now it is clear here that the living entities
and the Supreme Personality of Godhead are individuals. The difference is that
the living entities, either in the conditioned state or in the liberated state,
cannot surpass in quantity the inconceivable potencies of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead.
Bg
15.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
Yaae
MaaMaevMaSaMMaU!ae JaaNaaiTa PauåzaetaMaMa( )
Sa SavRivÙJaiTa Maa& SavR>aaveNa >aarTa )) 19 ))
yo mäm evam asammüòho
jänäti puruñottamam
sa sarva-vid bhajati mäà
sarva-bhävena bhärata
yaù—anyone; mäm—unto Me; evam—certainly;
asammüòhaù—without a doubt; jänäti—knows; puruñottamam—the
Supreme Personality of Godhead; saù—he; sarva-vit—knower of everything; bhajati—renders
devotional service; mäm—unto Me; sarva-bhävena—in all respects; bhärata—O
son of Bharata.
TRANSLATION
Whoever knows Me as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, without
doubting, is to be understood as the knower of everything, and he therefore
engages himself in full devotional service, O son of Bharata
PURPORT
There are many philosophical speculations about the constitutional
position of the living entities and the Supreme Absolute Truth. Now in this
verse the Supreme Personality of Godhead clearly explains that anyone who knows
Lord Kåñëa as the Supreme Person is actually the knower of everything. The
imperfect knower goes on simply speculating about the Absolute Truth, but the
perfect knower, without wasting his valuable time, engages directly in Kåñëa
consciousness, the devotional service of the Supreme Lord. Throughout the whole
of Bhagavad-gétä, this fact is being stressed at
every step. And still there are so many stubborn commentators on Bhagavad-gétä who consider the Supreme Absolute Truth
and the living entities to be one and the same.
Vedic knowledge is called
çruti learning by aural reception. One should
actually receive the Vedic message from authorities like Kåñëa and His
representatives. Here Kåñëa distinguishes everything very nicely, and one
should hear from this source. Simply to hear like the hogs is not sufficient;
one must be able to understand from the authorities. It is not that one should
simply speculate academically. One should submissively hear from Bhagavad-gétä that these living entities are always
subordinate to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Anyone who is able to
understand this, according to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëa,
knows the purpose of the Vedas; no one else knows
the purpose of the Vedas.
The word bhajate is very significant. In many places the word bhajate is expressed in relationship with the service of the Supreme Lord. If a person is engaged in full Kåñëa consciousness in devotional service of the Lord, it is to be understood that he has understood all the Vedic knowledge. In the Vaiñëava paramparä it is said that if one is engaged in the devotional service of Kåñëa, then there is no need for a spiritual process to understand the Supreme Absolute Truth. He has already come to the post because he is engaged in the devotional service of the Lord. He has ended all preliminary processes of understanding; similarly, if anyone, after speculating for hundreds of thousands of lives, does not come to the point that Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead and that one has to surrender there, all his speculation for so many years and lives is a useless waste of time.
Bg
15.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
wiTa
GauùTaMa& XaañiMadMau¢&- MaYaaNaga )
WTad(bud(ßa buiÖMaaNSYaaTk*-Tak*-TYaê >aarTa )) 20 ))
iti guhyatamaà çästram
idam uktaà mayänagha
etad buddhvä buddhimän syät
kåta-kåtyaç ca bhärata
iti—thus; guhyatamam—the most confidential; çästram—revealed scriptures; idam—this;
uktam—disclosed; mayä—by
Me; anagha—O sinless one; etat—this;
buddhvä—understanding; buddhimän—intelligent;
syät—one becomes; kåta-kåtyaù—the
most perfect; ca—and; bhärata—O
son of Bharata.
TRANSLATION
This is the most confidential part of the Vedic scriptures, O
sinless one, and it is disclosed now by Me. Whoever understands this will
become wise, and his endeavors will know perfection.
PURPORT
The Lord clearly explains here that this is the substance of all
revealed scriptures. And one should understand this as it is given by the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. Thus one will become intelligent and perfect in
transcendental knowledge. In other words, by understanding this philosophy of
the Supreme Personality of Godhead and engaging in His transcendental service,
everyone can become freed from all contaminations of the modes of material
nature. Devotional service is a process of spiritual understanding. Wherever
devotional service exists, the material contamination cannot coexist.
Devotional service to the Lord and the Lord Himself are one and the same
because they are spiritual—the internal energy of the Supreme Lord. The Lord is
said to be the sun, and ignorance is called darkness. Where the sun is present,
there is no question of darkness. Therefore, whenever devotional service is
present under the proper guidance of a bona fide spiritual master, there is no
question of ignorance.
Everyone must take to this consciousness of Kåñëa and engage in devotional service to become intelligent and purified. Unless one comes to this position of understanding Kåñëa and engages in devotional service, however intelligent he may be in the estimation of some common man, he is not perfectly intelligent.
The word anagha, by which Arjuna is addressed, is significant. Anagha, O sinless one, means that unless one is free from all sinful reactions, it is very difficult to understand Kåñëa. One has to become free from all contamination, all sinful activities; then he can understand. But devotional service is so pure and potent that once one is engaged in devotional service he automatically comes to the stage of sinlessness.
While performing devotional service in the association of pure devotees in full Kåñëa consciousness, there are certain things which require to be vanquished altogether. The most important thing one has to surmount is weakness of the heart. The first falldown is caused by the desire to lord it over material nature. Thus one gives up the transcendental loving service of the Supreme Lord. The second weakness of the heart is that as one increases the propensity of lording it over material nature, he becomes attached to matter and the possession of matter. The problems of material existence are due to these weaknesses of the heart.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the Fifteenth Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of Puruñottama-yoga, the Yoga of the Supreme
Person.
Bg 16. The Divine and Demoniac Natures
CHAPTER
SIXTEEN
The Divine and
Demoniac Natures
Bg
16.1, Bg 16.2, Bg 16.3, Bg 16.1-3
TEXTS
1–3
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
)
A>aYa& SatvSa&éuiÖjaRNaYaaeGaVYaviSQaiTa" )
daNa& dMaê Yajê SvaDYaaYaSTaPa AaJaRvMa( )) 1 ))
Aih&Saa SaTYaMa§-aeDaSTYaaGa" XaaiNTarPaEéuNaMa( )
dYaa >aUTaeZvl/aelu/PTv& MaadRv& hqrcaPal/Ma( )) 2 ))
TaeJa" +aMaa Da*iTa" XaaEcMad]aehae NaaiTaMaaiNaTaa )
>aviNTa SaMPad& dEvqMai>aJaaTaSYa >aarTa )) 3 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
abhayaà sattva-saàçuddhir
jïäna-yoga-vyavasthitiù
dänaà damaç ca yajïaç ca
svädhyäyas tapa ärjavam
ahiàsä satyam akrodhas
tyägaù çäntir apaiçunam
dayä bhüteñv aloluptvaà
märdavaà hrér acäpalam
tejaù kñamä dhåtiù çaucam
adroho näti-mänitä
bhavanti sampadaà daivém
abhijätasya bhärata
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; abhayam—fearlessness;
sattva-saàçuddhiù—purification of one’s
existence; jïäna—knowledge; yoga—of linking up; vyavasthitiù—the
situation; dänam—charity; damaù
ca—and controlling the mind; yajïaù ca—and
performance of sacrifice; svädhyäyaù—study of
Vedic literature; tapaù—austerity; ärjavam—simplicity; ahiàsä—nonviolence;
satyam—truthfulness; akrodhaù—freedom
from anger; tyägaù—renunciation; çäntiù—tranquility; apaiçunam—aversion
to faultfinding; dayä—mercy; bhüteñu—towards all living entities; aloluptvam—freedom from greed; märdavam—gentleness;
hréù—modesty; acäpalam—determination;
tejaù—vigor ; kñamä—forgiveness;
dhåtiù—fortitude; çaucam—cleanliness;
adrohaù—freedom from envy; na—not; atimänitä—expectation
of honor; bhavanti—become; sampadam—qualities; daivém—transcendental;
abhijätasya—one who is born of; bhärata—O son of Bharata.
TRANSLATION
The Blessed Lord said: Fearlessness, purification of one’s
existence, cultivation of spiritual knowledge, charity, self-control,
performance of sacrifice, study of the Vedas, austerity and simplicity;
nonviolence, truthfulness, freedom from anger; renunciation, tranquility,
aversion to faultfinding, compassion and freedom from covetousness; gentleness,
modesty and steady determination; vigor, forgiveness, fortitude, cleanliness,
freedom from envy and the passion for honor—these transcendental qualities, O
son of Bharata, belong to godly men endowed with divine nature.
PURPORT
In the beginning of the Fifteenth Chapter, the banyan tree of this
material world was explained. The extra roots coming out of it were compared to
the activities of the living entities, some auspicious, some inauspicious. In
the Ninth Chapter, also, the devas, or godly, and
the asuras, the ungodly, or demons, were
explained. Now, according to Vedic rites, activities in the mode of goodness
are considered auspicious for progress on the path of liberation, and such
activities are known as deva prakåti,
transcendental by nature. Those who are situated in the transcendental nature
make progress on the path of liberation. For those who are acting in the modes
of passion and ignorance, on the other hand, there is no possibility of
liberation. Either they will have to remain in this material world as human
beings, or they will descend among the species of animals or even lower life
forms. In this Sixteenth Chapter the Lord explains both the transcendental
nature and its attendant qualities, as well as the demoniac nature and its
qualities. He also explains the advantages and disadvantages of these
qualities.
The word abhijätasya in reference to one born of transcendental qualities or godly tendencies is very significant. To beget a child in a godly atmosphere is known in the Vedic scriptures as Garbhädhäna-saàskära. If the parents want a child in the godly qualities they should follow the ten principles of the human being. In Bhagavad-gétä we have studied also before that sex life for begetting a good child is Kåñëa Himself. Sex life is not condemned provided the process is used in Kåñëa consciousness. Those who are in Kåñëa consciousness at least should not beget children like cats and dogs but should beget them so they may become Kåñëa conscious after birth. That should be the advantage of children born of a father or mother absorbed in Kåñëa consciousness.
The social institution known as varëäçrama-dharma—the institution dividing society into four divisions or castes—is not meant to divide human society according to birth. Such divisions are in terms of educational qualifications. They are to keep the society in a state of peace and prosperity. The qualities mentioned herein are explained as transcendental qualities meant for making a person progress in spiritual understanding so he can get liberated from the material world. In the varëäçrama institution the sannyäsé, or the person in the renounced order of life, is considered to be the head or the spiritual master of all the social statuses and orders. A brähmaëa is considered to be the spiritual master of the three other sections of a society, namely, the kñatriyas, the vaiçyas and the çüdras, but a sannyäsé, who is on the top of the institution, is considered to be the spiritual master of the brähmaëas also. For a sannyäsé, the first qualification should be fearlessness. Because a sannyäsé has to be alone without any support or guarantee of support, he has simply to depend on the mercy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. If he thinks, “After leaving my connections, who will protect me?” he should not accept the renounced order of life. One must be fully convinced that Kåñëa or the Supreme Personality of Godhead in His localized aspect as Paramätmä is always within, that He is seeing everything and He always knows what one intends to do. One must thus have firm conviction that Kåñëa as Paramätmä will take care of a soul surrendered to Him. “I shall never be alone,” one should think. “Even if I live in the darkest regions of a forest I shall be accompanied by Kåñëa, and He will give me all protection.” That conviction is called abhayam, without fear. This state of mind is necessary for a person in the renounced order of life. Then he has to purify his existence. There are so many rules and regulations to be followed in the renounced order of life. Most important of all, a sannyäsé is strictly forbidden to have any intimate relationship with a woman. He is even forbidden to talk with a woman in a secluded place. Lord Caitanya was an ideal sannyäsé, and when He was at Puré His feminine devotees could not even come near to offer their respects. They were advised to bow down from a distant place. This is not a sign of hatred for women as a class, but it is a stricture imposed on the sannyäsé not to have close connections with women. One has to follow the rules and regulations of a particular status of life in order to purify his existence. For a sannyäsé, intimate relations with women and possessions of wealth for sense gratification are strictly forbidden. The ideal sannyäsé was Lord Caitanya Himself, and we can learn from His life that He was very strict in regards to women. Although He is considered to be the most liberal incarnation of Godhead, accepting the most fallen conditioned souls, He strictly followed the rules and regulations of the sannyäsa order of the life in connection with association with woman. One of His personal associates, namely Choöa Haridäsa, was personally associated with Lord Caitanya, along with His other confidential personal associates, but somehow or other this Choöa Haridäsa looked lustily on a young woman, and Lord Caitanya was so strict that He at once rejected him from the society of His personal associates. Lord Caitanya said, “For a sannyäsé or anyone who is aspiring to get out of the clutches of material nature and trying to elevate himself to the spiritual nature and go back to home, back to Godhead, for him, looking toward material possessions and women for sense gratification—not even enjoying them, but just looking toward them with such a propensity—is so condemned that he had better commit suicide before experiencing such illicit desires.” So these are the processes for purification.
The next item is jïäna-yoga-vyavasthitiù: being engaged in the cultivation of knowledge. Sannyäsé life is meant for distributing knowledge to the householders and others who have forgotten their real life of spiritual advancement. A sannyäsé is supposed to beg from door to door for his livelihood, but this does not mean that he is a beggar. Humility is also one of the qualifications of a transcendentally situated person, and out of sheer humility the sannyäsé goes from door to door, not exactly for the purpose of begging, but to see the householders and awaken them to Kåñëa consciousness. This is the duty of a sannyäsé. If he is actually advanced and so ordered by his spiritual master, he should preach Kåñëa with logic and understanding, and if he is not so advanced he should not accept the renounced order of life. But even if he has accepted the renounced order of life without sufficient knowledge, he should engage himself fully in hearing from a bona fide spiritual master to cultivate knowledge. A sannyäsé or one in the renounced order of life must be situated in fearlessness, sattva-saàçuddhiù (purity) and jïäna-yoga (knowledge).
The next item is charity. Charity is meant for the householders. The householders should earn a livelihood by an honorable means and spend fifty percent of their income to propagate Kåñëa consciousness all over the world. Thus a householder should give in charity to such institutional societies that are engaged in that way. Charity should be given to the right receiver. There are different kinds of charities, as will be explained later on, charity in the modes of goodness, passion and ignorance. Charity in the mode of goodness is recommended by the scriptures, but charity in the modes of passion and ignorance is not recommended because it is simply a waste of money. Charity should be given only to propagate Kåsna consciousness all over the world. That is charity in the mode of goodness.
Then as far as damaù (self-control) is concerned, it is not only meant for other orders of religious society, but it is especially meant for the householder. Although he has a wife, a householder should not use his senses for sex life unnecessarily. There are restrictions for the householders even in sex life, which should only be engaged in for the propagation of children. If he does not require children, he should not enjoy sex life with his wife. Modern society enjoys sex life with contraceptive methods or more abominable methods to avoid the responsibility of children. This is not in the transcendental quality but is demoniac. If anyone, even if he is a householder, wants to make progress in spiritual life, he must control his sex life and should not beget a child without the purpose of serving Kåñëa. If he is able to beget children who will be in Kåñëa consciousness, one can produce hundreds of children, but without this capacity one should not indulge only for sense pleasure.
Sacrifice is another item to be performed by the householders because sacrifices require a large amount of money. Other orders of life, namely the brahmacarya, the vänaprastha and sannyäsa, have no money; they live by begging. So performance of different types of sacrifice is meant for the householder. They should perform agni-hotra sacrifices as enjoined in the Vedic literature, but such sacrifices at the present moment are very expensive, and it is not possible for any householder to perform them. The best sacrifice recommended in this age is called saìkértana-yajïa, the chanting of Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare. This is the best and most inexpensive sacrifice; everyone can adopt it and derive benefit. So these three items, namely charity, sense control and performance of sacrifice, are meant for the householder.
Then svädhyäyaù, Vedic study, and tapas,
austerity, and ärjavam, gentleness or
simplicity, are meant for the brahmacarya or
student life. Brahmacärés should have no
connection with women; they should live a life of celibacy and engage the mind
in the study of Vedic literature for cultivation of spiritual knowledge. This
is called svädhyäyaù. Tapas or austerity is
especially meant for the retired life. One should not remain a householder
throughout his whole life; he must always remember that there are four
divisions of life, brahmacarya, gåhastha, vänaprastha and
sannyäsa. So after gåhastha,
householder life, one should retire. If one lives for a hundred years,
he should spend twenty-five years in student life, twenty-five in householder
life, twenty-five in retired life and twenty-five in the renounced order of
life. These are the regulations of the Vedic religious discipline. A man
retired from household life must practice austerities of the body, mind and
tongue. That is tapasyä. The entire varëäçrama-dharma society is meant for tapasyä. Without tapasyä or
austerity no human being can get liberation. The theory that there is no need
of austerity in life, that one can go on speculating and everything will be
nice, is neither recommended in the Vedic literature nor in Bhagavad-gétä. Such theories are manufactured by
showbottle spiritualists who are trying to gather more followers. If there are
restrictions, rules and regulations, people will not become attracted.
Therefore those who want followers in the name of religion, just to have a show
only, don’t restrict the lives of their students nor their own lives. But that
method is not approved by the Vedas.
As far as simplicity is concerned, not only should a particular order of life follow this principle, but every member, be he in the brahmacarya-äçrama, or gåhastha-äçrama or vänaprastha-äçrama. One must live very simply.
Ahiàsä
means not arresting the progressive life of any living entity. One
should not think that since the spirit spark is never killed even after the
killing of the body there is no harm in killing animals for sense
gratification. People are now addicted to eating animals, in spite of having an
ample supply of grains, fruits and milk. There is no necessity for animal
killing. This injunction is for everyone. When there is no other alternative,
one may kill an animal, but it should be offered in sacrifice. At any rate,
when there is an ample food supply for humanity, persons who are desiring to
make advancement in spiritual realization should not commit violence to
animals. Real ahiàsä means not checking anyone’s
progressive life. The animals are also making progress in their evolutionary
life by transmigrating from one category of animal life to another. If a
particular animal is killed, then his progress is checked. If an animal is
staying in a particular body for so many days or so many years and is untimely
killed, then he has to come back again in that form of life to complete the
remaining days in order to be promoted to another species of life. So their
progress should not be checked simply to satisfy one’s palate. This is called ahiàsä.
Satyam. This word means that one should not distort the truth for some personal interest. In Vedic literature there are some difficult passages, but the meaning or the purpose should be learned from a bona fide spiritual master. That is the process for understanding Vedas. Çruti means that one should hear from the authority. One should not construe some interpretation for his personal interest. There are so many commentaries on Bhagavad-gétä that misinterpret the original text. The real import of the word should be presented, and that should be learned from a bona fide spiritual master.
Akrodhaù means to check anger. Even if there is provocation one should be tolerant, for once one becomes angry his whole body becomes polluted. Anger is the product of the modes of passion and lust, so one who is transcendentally situated should check himself from anger. Apaiçunam means that one should not find fault with others or correct them unnecessarily. Of course to call a thief a thief is not faultfinding, but to call an honest person a thief is very much offensive for one who is making advancement in spiritual life. Hréù means that one should be very modest and must not perform some act which is abominable. Acäpalam, determination, means that one should not be agitated or frustrated in some attempt. There may be failure in some attempt, but one should not be sorry for that; he should make progress with patience and determination. The word tejaù used here is meant for the kñatriyas. The kñatriyas should always be very strong to be able to give protection to the weak. They should not pose themselves as nonviolent. If violence is required, they must exhibit it.
Çaucam means cleanliness, not only in mind and body but in one’s dealings also. It is especially meant for the mercantile people, who should not deal in the black market. Nätimänitä, not expecting honor, applies to the çüdras, the worker class, which are considered, according to Vedic injunctions, to be the lowest of the four classes. They should not be puffed up with unnecessary prestige or honor and should remain in their own status. It is the duty of the çüdras to offer respect to the higher class for the upkeep of the social order.
All these sixteen qualifications mentioned are transcendental qualities. They should be cultivated according to the different statuses of the social order. The purport is that even though material conditions are miserable, if these qualities are developed by practice, by all classes of men, then gradually it is possible to rise to the highest platform of transcendental realization.
Bg 16.4
TEXT
4
TEXT
dM>aae
dPaaeR_i>aMaaNaê §-aeDa" PaaåZYaMaev c )
AjaNa& cai>aJaaTaSYa PaaQaR SaMPadMaaSaurqMa( )) 4 ))
dambho darpo ’bhimänaç ca
krodhaù päruñyam eva ca
ajïänaà cäbhijätasya
pärtha sampadam äsurém
dambhaù—pride; darpaù—arrogance; abhimänaù—conceit;
ca—and; krodaù—anger;
päruñyam—harshness; eva—certainly;
ca—and; ajïänam—ignorance;
ca—and; abhijätasya—one
who is born; pärtha—O son of Påthä; sampadam—nature; äsurém—demoniac.
TRANSLATION
Arrogance, pride, anger, conceit, harshness and ignorance—these
qualities belong to those of demonic nature, O son of Påthä.
PURPORT
In this verse, the royal road to hell is described. The demoniac
want to make a show of religion and advancement in spiritual science, although
they do not follow the principles. They are always arrogant or proud in
possessing some type of education or so much wealth. They desire to be
worshiped by others, and demand respectability, although they do not command
respect. Over trifles they become very angry and speak harshly, not gently.
They do not know what should be done and what should not be done. They do
everything whimsically, according to their own desire, and they do not
recognize any authority. These demoniac qualities are taken on by them from the
beginning of their bodies in the wombs of their mothers, and as they grow they
manifest all these inauspicious qualities.
Bg 16.5
TEXT
5
TEXT
dEvq
SaMPaiÜMaae+aaYa iNabNDaaYaaSaurq MaTaa )
Maa éuc" SaMPad& dEvqMai>aJaaTaae_iSa Paa<@v )) 5 ))
daivé sampad vimokñäya
nibandhäyäsuré matä
mä çucaù sampadaà daivém
abhijäto ’si päëòava
daivé—transcendental;
sampat—nature; vimokñäya—meant
for liberation; nibandhäya—for bondage; äsuré—demoniac qualities; matä—it
is considered; mä—do not; çucaù—worry;
sampadam—nature; daivém—transcendental;
abhijätaù—born; asi—you
are; päëòava—O son of Päëòu.
TRANSLATION
The transcendental qualities are conducive to liberation, whereas
the demonic qualities make for bondage. Do not worry, O son of Päëòu, for you
are born with the divine qualities.
PURPORT
Lord Kåñëa encouraged Arjuna by telling him that he was not born
with demoniac qualities. His involvement in the fight was not demoniac because
he was considering the pro’s and con’s. He was considering whether respectable
persons such as Bhéñma and Droëa should be killed or not, so he was not acting
under the influence of anger, false prestige, or harshness. Therefore he was
not of the quality of the demons. For a kñatriya, a
military man, shooting arrows at the enemy is considered transcendental, and
refraining from such a duty is demoniac. Therefore, there was no cause for
Arjuna to lament. Anyone who performs the regulated principles of the different
orders of life is transcendentally situated.
Bg 16.6
TEXT
6
TEXT
ÜaE
>aUTaSaGaaΠl/aeke-_iSMaNdEv AaSaur Wv c )
dEvae ivSTarXa" Pa[ae¢- AaSaur& PaaQaR Mae é*<au )) 6 ))
dvau bhüta-sargau loke ’smin
daiva äsura eva ca
daivo vistaraçaù prokta
äsuraà pärtha me çåëu
dvau—two; bhüta-sargau—created living beings; loke—in this world; asmin—this;
daivaù—godly; äsuraù—demoniac;
eva—certainly; ca—and;
daivaù—divine; vistaraçaù—at
great length; proktaù—said; asuram—demoniac; pärtha—O
son of Påthä; me—from Me; çåëu—just
hear.
TRANSLATION
O son of Påthä, in this world there are two kinds of created
beings. One is called the divine and the other demonic. I have already
explained to you at length the divine qualities. Now hear from Me of the
demoniac.
PURPORT
Lord Kåñëa, having assured Arjuna that he was born with the divine
qualities, is now describing the demoniac way. The conditioned living entities
are divided into two classes in this world. Those who are born with divine
qualities follow a regulated life; that is to say they abide by the injunctions
in scriptures and by the authorities. One should perform duties in the light of
authoritative scripture. This mentality is called divine. One who does not
follow the regulative principles as they are laid down in the scriptures and
who acts according to his whims is called demoniac or asuric. There is no other
criterion but obedience to the regulative principles of scriptures. It is
mentioned in Vedic literature that both the demigods and the demons are born of
the Prajäpati; the only difference is that one class obeys the Vedic injunctions
and the other does not.
Bg 16.7
TEXT
7
TEXT
Pa[v*ita& c
iNav*ita& c JaNaa Na ivduraSaura" )
Na XaaEc& NaaiPa cacarae Na SaTYa& Taezu ivÛTae )) 7 ))
pravåttià ca nivåttià ca
janä na vidur äsuräù
na çaucaà näpi cäcäro
na satyaà teñu vidyate
pravåttim—proper
action; ca—also; nivåttim—improper
action; ca—and; janäù—persons;
na—never; viduù—know;
äsuräù—in demoniac quality; na—never; çaucam—cleanliness;
na—nor; api—also; ca—and; äcäraù—behavior; na—never; satyam—truth; teñu—in them; vidyate—there
is.
TRANSLATION
Those who are demoniac do not know what is to be done and what is
not to be done. Neither cleanliness nor proper behavior nor truth is found in
them.
PURPORT
In every civilized human society there is some set of scriptural
rules and regulations which are followed from the beginning, especially among
the Äryans, those who adopt the Vedic civilization and who are known as the
most advanced civilized peoples. Those who do not follow the scriptural
injunctions are supposed to be demons. Therefore it is stated here that the
demons do not know the scriptural rules, nor do they have any inclination to
follow them. Most of them do not know them, and even if some of them know, they
have not the tendency to follow them. They have no faith, nor are they willing
to act in terms of the Vedic injunctions. The demons are not clean, either
externally or internally.
One should always be careful to keep his body clean by bathing, brushing teeth, changing clothes, etc. As far as internal cleanliness is concerned, one should always remember the holy names of God and chant Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare. The demons neither like nor follow all these rules for external and internal cleanliness.
As for behavior, there are many rules and regulations guiding human behavior, such as the Manu-saàhitä, which is the law of the human race. Even up to today, those who are Hindu follow the Manu-saàhitä. Laws of inheritance and other legalities are derived from this book. Now, in the Manu-saàhitä, it is clearly stated that a woman should not be given freedom. That does not mean that women are to be kept as slaves, but they are like children. Children are not given freedom, but that does not mean that they are kept as slaves. The demons have now neglected such injunctions, and they think that women should be given as much freedom as men. However, this has not improved the social condition of the world. Actually, a woman should be given protection at every stage of life. She should be given protection by the father in her younger days, by the husband in her youth, and by the grownup sons in her old age. This is proper social behavior according to the Manu-saàhitä. But modern education has artificially devised a puffed up concept of womanly life, and therefore marriage is practically now an imagination in human society. Nor is the moral condition of woman very good now. The demons, therefore, do not accept any instruction which is good for society, and because they do not follow the experience of great sages and the rules and regulations laid down by the sages, the social condition of the demoniac people is very miserable.
Bg 16.8
TEXT
8
TEXT
ASaTYaMaPa[iTaï&
Tae JaGadahurNaqìrMa( )
AParSParSaM>aUTa& ik-MaNYaTk-aMahETauk-Ma( )) 8 ))
asatyam apratiñöhaà te
jagad ähur anéçvaram
aparaspara-sambhütaà
kim anyat käma-haitukam
asatyam—unreal; apratiñöham—without foundation; te—they;
jagat—the cosmic manifestation; ähuù—is said; anéçvaram—with
no controller; aparaspara—by mutual lust; sambhütam—caused; kim anyat—there
is no other cause; käma-haitukam—it is due to
lust only.
TRANSLATION
They say that this world is unreal, that there is no foundation
and that there is no God in control. It is produced of sex desire, and has no
cause other than lust.
PURPORT
The demoniac conclude that the world is phantasmagoria. There is
no cause, no effect, no controller, no purpose: everything is unreal. They say
that this cosmic manifestation arises due to chance material actions and
reactions. They do not think that the world was created by God for a certain
purpose. They have their own theory: that the world has come about in its own
way and that there is no reason to believe that there is a God behind it. For
them there is no difference between spirit and matter, and they do not accept
the Supreme Spirit. Everything is matter only, and the whole cosmos is supposed
to be a mass of ignorance. According to them, everything is void, and whatever
manifestation exists is due to our ignorance in perception. They take it for
granted that all manifestation of diversity is a display of ignorance. Just as
in a dream we may create so many things, which actually have no existence, so
when we are awake we shall see that everything is simply a dream. But
factually, although the demons say that life is a dream, they are very expert
in enjoying this dream. And so, instead of acquiring knowledge, they become
more and more implicated in their dreamland. They conclude that as a child is
simply the result of sexual intercourse between man and woman, this world is
born without any soul. For them it is only a combination of matter that has
produced the living entities, and there is no question of the existence of the
soul. As many living creatures come out from perspiration and from a dead body
without any cause, similarly, the whole living world has come out of the
material combinations of the cosmic manifestation. Therefore material nature is
the cause of this manifestation, and there is no other cause. They do not
believe in the words of Kåñëa in Bhagavad-gétä:
mayädhyakñeëa prakåtiù süyate sa-caräcaram. “Under My direction the
whole material world is moving.” In other words, amongst the demons there is no
perfect knowledge of the creation of this world; every one of them has some
particular theory of his own. According to them, one interpretation of the
scriptures is as good as another, for they do not believe in a standard
understanding of the scriptural injunctions.
Bg 16.9
TEXT
9
TEXT
WTaa&
d*iíMaví>Ya NaíaTMaaNaae_LPabuÖYa" )
Pa[>avNTYauGa]k-MaaR<a" +aYaaYa JaGaTaae_ihTaa" )) 9 ))
etäà dåñöim avañöabhya
nañöätmäno ’lpa-buddhayaù
prabhavanty ugra-karmäëaù
kñayäya jagato ’hitäù
etäm—thus; dåñöim—vision; avañöabhya—accepting;
nañöa—lost; ätmänaù—self;
alpa-buddhayaù—less intelligent; prabhavanti—flourish; ugra-karmäëaù—in
painful activities; kñayäya—for destruction; jagataù—of the world; ahitäù—unbeneficial.
TRANSLATION
Following such conclusions, the demoniac, who are lost to
themselves and who have no intelligence, engage in unbeneficial, horrible works
meant to destroy the world.
PURPORT
The demoniac are engaged in activities that will lead the world to
destruction. The Lord states here that they are less intelligent. The
materialists, who have no concept of God, think that they are advancing. But,
according to Bhagavad-gétä, they are
unintelligent and devoid of all sense. They try to enjoy this material world to
the utmost limit and therefore always engage in inventing something for sense
gratification. Such materialistic inventions are considered to be advancement
of human civilization, but the result is that people grow more and more violent
and more and more cruel, cruel to animals and cruel to other human beings. They
have no idea how to behave toward one another. Animal killing is very prominent
amongst demoniac people. Such people are considered the enemies of the world
because ultimately they will invent or create something which will bring
destruction to all. Indirectly, this verse anticipates the invention of nuclear
weapons, of which the whole world is today very proud. At any moment war may
take place, and these atomic weapons may create havoc. Such things are created
solely for the destruction of the world, and this is indicated here. Due to
godlessness, such weapons are invented in human society; they are not meant for
the peace and prosperity of the world.
Bg
16.10
TEXT
10
TEXT
k-aMaMaaié[TYa
duZPaUr& dM>aMaaNaMadaiNvTaa" )
Maaehad(Ga*hqTvaSad(Ga]ahaNPa[vTaRNTae_éuicv]Taa" )) 10 ))
kämam äçritya duñpüraà
dambha-mäna-madänvitäù
mohäd gåhétväsad-grähän
pravartante ’çuci-vratäù
kämam—lust; äçritya—taking shelter of; duñpüram—insatiable;
dambha—pride; mäna—false
prestige; mada-anvitäù—absorbed in conceit; mohät—by illusion; gåhétvä—taking;
asat—nonpermanent; grähän—things;
pravartante—flourish; açuci—unclean;
vratäù—avowed.
TRANSLATION
The demoniac, taking shelter of insatiable lust, pride and false
prestige, and being thus illusioned, are always sworn to unclean work,
attracted by the impermanent.
PURPORT
The demoniac mentality is described here. The demons’ lust is
never satiated. They will go on increasing and increasing their insatiable
desires for material enjoyment. Although they are always full of anxieties on
account of accepting nonpermanent things, they still continue to engage in such
activities out of illusion. They have no knowledge and cannot tell that they
are heading the wrong way. Accepting nonpermanent things, such demoniac people
create their own God, create their own hymns and chant accordingly. The result
is that they become more and more attracted to two things—sex enjoyment and
accumulation of material wealth. The word açuci-vratäù, unclean
vow, is very significant in this connection. Such demoniac people are only
attracted by wine, women, gambling and meat eating; those are their açuci, unclean habits. Induced by pride and false
prestige, they create some principles of religion which are not approved by the
Vedic injunctions. Although such demoniac people are most abominable in the
world, still, by artificial means, the world creates a false honor for them.
Although they are gliding toward hell, they consider themselves very much
advanced.
Bg
16.11, Bg 16.12, Bg 16.11-12
TEXTS
11–12
TEXT
icNTaaMaPairMaeYaa&
c Pa[l/YaaNTaaMauPaaié[Taa" )
k-aMaaePa>aaeGaParMaa WTaavidiTa iNaiêTaa" )) 11 ))
AaXaaPaaXaXaTaEbRÖa" k-aMa§-aeDaParaYa<aa" )
wRhNTae k-aMa>aaeGaaQaRMaNYaaYaeNaaQaRSaÄYaaNa( )) 12 ))
cintäm aparimeyäà ca
pralayäntäm upäçritäù
kämopabhoga-paramä
etävad iti niçcitäù
äçä-päça-çatair baddhäù
käma-krodha-paräyaëäù
éhante käma-bhogärtham
anyäyenärtha-saïcayän
cintäm—fears and
anxieties; aparimeyäm—unmeasurable; ca—and; pralaya-antäm—unto
the point of death; upäçritäù—having taken
shelter of them; käma-upabhoga—sense
gratification; paramäù—the highest goal of life; etävat—thus; iti—in this
way; niçcitäù—ascertain; äçä-päça—entanglement
in the network of hope; çataiù—by hundreds; baddhäù—being bound; käma—lust;
krodha—anger; paräyaëäù—always
situated in that mentality; éhante—desire; käma—lust; bhoga—sense
enjoyment; artham—for that purpose; anyäyena—illegally; artha—wealth;
saïcayän—accumulate.
TRANSLATION
They believe that to gratify the senses unto the end of life is
the prime necessity of human civilization. Thus there is no end to their
anxiety. Being bound by hundreds and thousands of desires, by lust and anger,
they secure money by illegal means for sense gratification.
PURPORT
The demoniac accept that the enjoyment of the senses is the
ultimate goal of life, and this concept they maintain until death. They do not
believe in life after death, and they do not believe that one takes on
different types of bodies according to one’s karma, or
activities in this world. Their plans for life are never finished, and they go
on preparing plan after plan, all of which are never finished. We have personal
experience of a person of such demoniac mentality, who, even at the point of
death, was requesting the physician to prolong his life for four years more
because his plans were not yet complete. Such foolish people do not know that a
physician cannot prolong life even for a moment. When the notice is there,
there is no consideration of the man’s desire. The laws of nature do not allow
a second beyond what one is destined to enjoy.
The demoniac person, who has no faith in God or the Supersoul within himself, performs all kinds of sinful activities simply for sense gratification. He does not know that there is a witness sitting within his heart. The Supersoul is observing the activities of the individual soul. As it is stated in the Vedic literature, the Upaniñads, there are two birds sitting in one tree; the one is acting and enjoying or suffering the fruits of the branches, and the other is witnessing. But one who is demoniac has no knowledge of Vedic scripture, nor has he any faith; therefore he feels free to do anything for sense enjoyment, regardless of the consequences.
Bg
16.13, Bg 16.14, Bg 16.15, Bg 16.13-15
TEXTS
13–15
TEXT
wdMaÛ MaYaa
l/BDaiMaMa& Pa[aPSYae MaNaaerQaMa( )
wdMaSTaqdMaiPa Mae >aivZYaiTa PauNaDaRNaMa( )) 13 ))
ASaaE MaYaa hTa" Xa}auhRiNaZYae caParaNaiPa )
wRìrae_hMah& >aaeGaq iSaÖae_h& bl/vaNSau%q )) 14 ))
Aa!yae_i>aJaNavaNaiSMa k-ae_NYaae_iSTa Sad*Xaae MaYaa )
Ya+Yae daSYaaiMa MaaeidZYa wTYajaNaivMaaeihTaa" )) 15 ))
idam adya mayä labdham
imaà präpsye manoratham
idam astédam api me
bhaviñyati punar dhanam
asau mayä hataù çatrur
haniñye cäparän api
éçvaro ’ham ahaà bhogé
siddho ’haà balavän sukhé
äòhyo ’bhijanavän asmi
ko ’nyo ’sti sadåço mayä
yakñye däsyämi modiñya
ity ajïäna-vimohitäù
idam—this; adya—today; mayä—by me; labdham—gained; imam—this;
präpsye—I shall gain; manoratham—according
to my desires; idam—this; asti—there
is; idam—this; api—also;
me—mine; bhaviñyati—will
increase in the future; punaù—again; dhanam—wealth; asau—that;
mayä—by me; hataù—has
been killed; çatruù—enemy; haniñye—I shall kill; ca—also;
aparän—others; api—certainly;
éçvaraù—the lord; aham—I
am; aham—I am; bhogé—the
enjoyer; siddhah—perfect; aham—I
am; balavän—powerful; sukhé—happy;
äòhyaù—wealthy; abhijanavän—surrounded
by aristocratic relatives; asmi—I am; kaù—who else; anyaù—other;
asti—there is; sadåçaù—like;
mayä—me; yakñye—I
shall sacrifice; däsyämi—I shall give in charity;
modiñye—I shall rejoice; iti—thus;
ajïäna—ignorance; vimohitäù—deluded
by.
TRANSLATION
The demoniac person thinks: “So much wealth do I have today, and I
will gain more according to my schemes. So much is mine now, and it will
increase in the future, more and more. He is my enemy, and I have killed him;
and my other enemy will also be killed. I am the lord of everything, I am the
enjoyer, I am perfect, powerful and happy. I am the richest man, surrounded by
aristocratic relatives. There is none so powerful and happy as I am. I shall
perform sacrifices, I shall give some charity, and thus I shall rejoice.” In
this way, such persons are deluded by ignorance.
Bg
16.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
ANaek-ictaiv>a]aNTaa
MaaehJaal/SaMaav*Taa" )
Pa[Sa¢-a" k-aMa>aaeGaezu PaTaiNTa Narke-_éucaE )) 16 ))
aneka-citta-vibhräntä
moha-jäla-samävåtäù
prasaktäù käma-bhogeñu
patanti narake ’çucau
aneka—numerous; citta-vibhräntäù—perplexed by anxieties; moha—of illusions; jäla—by
a network; samävåtäù—surrounded; prasaktäù—attached; käma—lust;
bhogeñu—sense gratification; patanti—glides down; narake—into
hell; açucau—unclean.
TRANSLATION
Thus perplexed by various anxieties and bound by a network of
illusions, one becomes too strongly attached to sense enjoyment and falls down
into hell.
PURPORT
The demoniac man knows no limit to his desire to acquire money.
That is unlimited. He only thinks how much assessment he has just now and
schemes to engage that stock of wealth farther and farther. For that reason, he
does not hesitate to act in any sinful way and so deals in the black market for
illegal gratification. He is enamoured by the possessions he has already, such
as land, family, house and bank balance, and he is always planning to improve
them. He believes in his own strength, and he does not know that whatever he is
gaining is due to his past good deeds. He is given an opportunity to accumulate
such things, but he has no conception of past causes. He simply thinks that all
his mass of wealth is due to his own endeavor. A demoniac person believes in
the strength of his personal work, not in the law of karma.
According to the law of karma, a man takes
his birth in a high family, or becomes rich, or very well educated, or very
beautiful because of good work in the past. The demoniac thinks that all these
things are accidental and due to the strength of his personal ability. He does
not sense any arrangement behind all the varieties of people, beauty, and
education. Anyone who comes into competition with such a demoniac man is his
enemy. There are many demoniac people, and each is enemy to the others. This
enmity becomes more and more deep—between persons, then between families, then
between societies, and at last between nations. Therefore there is constant
strife, war and enmity all over the world.
Each demoniac person thinks that he can live at the sacrifice of all others. Generally, a demoniac person thinks of himself as the Supreme God, and a demoniac preacher tells his followers: “Why are you seeking God elsewhere? You are all yourselves God! Whatever you like, you can do. Don’t believe in God. Throw away God. God is dead.” These are the demoniac’s preachings.
Although the demoniac person sees others equally rich and influential, or even more so, he thinks that no one is richer than him and that no one is more influential than him. As far as promotion to the higher planetary system is concerned, he does not believe in performing yajïas or sacrifices. Demons think that they will manufacture their own process of yajïa and prepare some machine, by which they will be able to reach any higher planet. The best example of such a demoniac man was Rävaëa. He offered a program to the people by which he would prepare a staircase so that anyone could reach the heavenly planets without performing sacrifices, such as are prescribed in the Vedas. Similarly, in the present age such demoniac men are striving to reach the higher planetary systems by mechanical arrangement. These are examples of bewilderment. The result is that, without their knowledge, they are gliding toward hell. Here the Sanskrit word mohajäla is very significant. Jäla means net; like fishes caught in a net, they have no way to come out.
Bg
16.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
AaTMaSaM>aaivTaa"
STaBDaa DaNaMaaNaMadaiNvTaa" )
YaJaNTae NaaMaYajESTae dM>aeNaaiviDaPaUvRk-Ma( )) 17 ))
ätma-sambhävitäù stabdhä
dhana-mäna-madänvitäù
yajante näma-yajïais te
dambhenävidhi-pürvakam
ätma-sambhävitäù—self-complacent;
stabdhäù—impudent; dhana-mäna—wealth
and false prestige; mada-anvitäù—absorbed in
pride; yajante—perform sacrifices; näma—in name only; yajïaiù—with
such a sacrifice; te—they; dambhena—out of pride; avidhi-pürvakam—without
following any rules and regulations.
TRANSLATION
Self-complacent and always impudent, deluded by wealth and false
prestige, they sometimes perform sacrifices in name only without following any
rules or regulations.
PURPORT
Thinking themselves all in all, not caring for any authority or
scripture, the demoniac sometimes perform so-called religious or sacrificial
rites. And since they do not believe in authority, they are very impudent. This
is due to illusion caused by accumulating some wealth and false prestige. Sometimes
such demons take up the role of preacher, mislead the people, and become known
as religious reformers or as incarnations of God. They make a show of
performing sacrifices, or they worship the demigods, or manufacture their own
God. Common men advertise them as God and worship them, and by the foolish they
are considered advanced in the principles of religion, or in the principles of
spiritual knowledge. They take the dress of the renounced order of life and
engage in all nonsense in that dress. Actually there are so many restrictions
for one who has renounced this world. The demons, however, do not care for such
restrictions. They think that whatever path one can create is one’s own path;
there is no such thing as a standard path one has to follow. The word avidhi-pürvakam, meaning disregard for the rules and
regulations, is especially stressed here. These things are always due to
ignorance and illusion.
Bg
16.18
TEXT
18
TEXT
Ahªar&
bl&/ dPa| k-aMa& §-aeDa& c Sa&ié[Taa" )
MaaMaaTMaPardehezu Pa[iÜzNTaae_>YaSaUYak-a" )) 18 ))
ahaìkäraà balaà darpaà
kämaà krodhaà ca saàçritäù
mäm ätma-para-deheñu
pradviñanto ’bhyasüyakäù
ahaìkäram—false ego; balam—strength; darpam—pride;
kämam—lust; krodham—anger;
ca—also; saàçritäù—having
taken shelter of; mäm—Me; ätma—one’s
own; para-deheñu—in other bodies; pradviñantaù—blasphemes; abhyasüyakäù—envious.
TRANSLATION
Bewildered by false ego, strength, pride, lust and anger, the
demon becomes envious of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is situated in
his own body and in the bodies of others, and blasphemes against the real
religion.
PURPORT
A demoniac person, being always against God’s supremacy, does not
like to believe in the scriptures. He is envious of both the scriptures and of
the existence of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This is caused by his
so-called prestige and his accumulation of wealth and strength. He does not
know that the present life is a preparation for the next life. Not knowing
this, he is actually envious of his own self, as well as of others. He commits
violence on other bodies and on his own. He does not care for the supreme
control of the Personality of Godhead because he has no knowledge. Being
envious of the scriptures and the Supreme Personality of Godhead, he puts
forward false arguments against the existence of God and refutes the scriptural
authority. He thinks himself independant and powerful in every action. He
thinks that since no one can equal him in strength, power, or in wealth, he can
act in any way and no one can stop him. If he has an enemy who might check the
advancement of his sensual activities, he makes plans to cut him down by his
own power.
Bg
16.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
TaaNah&
iÜzTa" §U-raNSa&Saarezu NaraDaMaaNa( )
i+aPaaMYaJaóMaéu>aaNaaSaurqZvev YaaeiNazu )) 19 ))
tän ahaà dviñataù krürän
saàsäreñu narädhamän
kñipämy ajasram açubhän
äsuréñv eva yoniñu
tän—those; aham—I; dviñataù—envious;
krürän—mischievous; saàsäreñu—into
the ocean of material existence; narädhamän—the
lowest of mankind; kñipämi—put; ajasram—innumerable; açubhän—inauspicious;
äsuréñu—demoniac; eva—certainly;
yoniñu—in the wombs.
TRANSLATION
Those who are envious and mischievous, who are the lowest among
men, are cast by Me into the ocean of material existence, into various demoniac
species of life.
PURPORT
In this verse it is clearly indicated that the placing of a
particular individual soul in a particular body is the prerogative of the
supreme will. The demoniac person may not agree to accept the supremacy of the
Lord, and it is a fact that he may act according to his own whims, but his next
birth will depend upon the decision of the Supreme Personality of Godhead and
not on himself. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam, Third
Canto, it is stated that an individual soul, after his death, is put into the
womb of a mother where he gets a particular type of body under the supervision
of superior power. Therefore in the material existence we find so many species
of life—animals, insects, men, and so on. All are arranged by the superior
power. They are not accidental. As for the demoniac, it is clearly said here
that they are perpetually put into the wombs of demons, and thus they continue
to be envious, the lowest of mankind. Such demoniac species of life are held to
be always full of lust, always violent and hateful and always unclean. They are
just like so many beasts in a jungle.
Bg
16.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
AaSaurq&
YaaeiNaMaaPaàa MaU!a JaNMaiNaJaNMaiNa )
MaaMaPa[aPYaEv k-aENTaeYa TaTaae YaaNTYaDaMaa& GaiTaMa( )) 20 ))
äsuréà yonim äpannä
müòhä janmani janmani
mäm apräpyaiva kaunteya
tato yänty adhamäà gatim
äsurém—demoniac; yonim—species; äpannäù—gaining;
müòhäù—the foolish; janmani
janmani—in birth after birth; mäm—unto Me;
apräpya—without achieving; eva—certainly; kaunteya—O
son of Kunté; tataù—thereafter; yänti—goes; adhamäm—condemned;
gatim—destination.
TRANSLATION
Attaining repeated birth amongst the species of demoniac life,
such persons can never approach Me. Gradually they sink down to the most
abominable type of existence.
PURPORT
It is known that God is all-merciful, but here we find that God is
never merciful to the demoniac. It is clearly stated that the demoniac people,
life after life, are put into the wombs of similar demons, and, not achieving
the mercy of the Supreme Lord, they go down and down, so that at last they achieve
bodies like those of cats, dogs and hogs. It is clearly stated that such demons
have practically no chance of receiving the mercy of God at any stage of later
life. In the Vedas also it is stated that such
persons gradually sink to become dogs and hogs. It may be then argued in this
connection that God should not be advertised as all-merciful if He is not
merciful to such demons. In answer to this question, in the Vedänta-sütra we find that the Supreme Lord has no
hatred for anyone. The placing of the asuras, the
demons, in the lowest status of life is simply another feature of His mercy.
Sometimes the asuras are killed by the Supreme
Lord, but this killing is also good for them, for in Vedic literature we find
that anyone who is killed by the Supreme Lord becomes liberated. There are
instances in history of many asuras—Rävaëa,
Kaàsa, Hiraëyakaçipu—to whom the Lord appeared in various incarnations just to
kill. Therefore God’s mercy is shown to the asuras if
they are fortunate enough to be killed by Him.
Bg
16.21
TEXT
21
TEXT
i}aivDa&
Nark-SYaed& Üar& NaaXaNaMaaTMaNa" )
k-aMa" §-aeDaSTaQaa l/ae>aSTaSMaadeTaT}aYa& TYaJaeTa( )) 21 ))
tri-vidhaà narakasyedaà
dväraà näçanam ätmanaù
kämaù krodhas tathä lobhas
tasmäd etat trayaà tyajet
tri-vidham—three kinds of;
narakasya—hellish; idam—this;
dväram—gate; näçanam—destructive;
ätmanaù—of the self; kämaù—lust;
krodhaù—anger; tathä—as
well as; lobhaù—greed; tasmät—therefore;
etat—these; trayam—three;
tyajet—must give up.
TRANSLATION
There are three gates leading to this hell—lust, anger, and greed.
Every sane man should give these up, for they lead to the degradation of the
soul.
PURPORT
The beginning of demoniac life is described herein. One tries to
satisfy his lust, and when he cannot, anger and greed arise. A sane man who
does not want to glide down to the species of demoniac life must try to give up
these three enemies which can kill the self to such an extent that there will
be no possibility of liberation from this material entanglement.
Bg
16.22
TEXT
22
TEXT
WTaEivRMau¢-"
k-aENTaeYa TaMaaeÜarEiñi>aNaRr" )
AacrTYaaTMaNa" é[eYaSTaTaae YaaiTa Para& GaiTaMa( )) 22 ))
etair vimuktaù kaunteya
tamo-dvärais tribhir naraù
äcaraty ätmanaù çreyas
tato yäti paräà gatim
etaiù—by these; vimuktaù—being liberated; kaunteya—O
son of Kunté; tamaù-dväraiù—the gates of
ignorance; tribhiù—three kinds of; naraù—a person; äcarati—performs
; ätmanaù—self; çreyaù—benediction;
tataù—thereafter; yäti—goes;
paräm—supreme; gatim—destination.
TRANSLATION
The man who has escaped these three gates of hell, O son of Kunté,
performs acts conducive to self-realization and thus gradually attains the
supreme destination.
PURPORT
One should be very careful of these three enemies to human life:
lust, anger, and greed. The more a person is freed from lust, anger and greed,
the more his existence becomes pure. Then he can follow the rules and
regulations enjoined in the Vedic literature. By following the regulative
principles of human life, one gradually raises himself to the platform of
spiritual realization. If one is so fortunate, by such practice, to rise to the
platform of Kåñëa consciousness, then success is guaranteed for him. In the
Vedic literature, the ways of action and reaction are prescribed to enable one
to come to the stage of purification. The whole method is based on giving up
lust, greed and anger. By cultivating knowledge of this process, one can be
elevated to the highest position of self-realization; this self-realization is
perfected in devotional service. In that devotional service, the liberation of
the conditioned soul is guaranteed. Therefore, according to the Vedic system,
there are instituted the four orders of life and the four statuses of life,
called the caste system and the spiritual order system. There are different
rules and regulations for different castes or divisions of society, and if a
person is able to follow them, he will be automatically raised to the highest
platform of spiritual realization. Then he can have liberation without a doubt.
Bg
16.23
TEXT
23
TEXT
Ya" XaañiviDaMauTSa*JYa
vTaRTae k-aMak-arTa" )
Na Sa iSaiÖMavaPanaeiTa Na Sau%& Na Para& GaiTaMa( )) 23 ))
yaù çästra-vidhim utsåjya
vartate käma-kärataù
na sa siddhim aväpnoti
na sukhaà na paräà gatim
yaù—anyone; çästra-vidhim—the regulations of the scriptures; utsåjya—giving up; vartate—remains;
käma-kärataù—acting whimsically in lust; na—never; saù—he; siddhim—perfection; aväpnoti—achieves;
na—never; sukham—happiness;
na—never; paräm—the
supreme; gatim—perfectional stage.
TRANSLATION
But he who discards scriptural injunctions and acts according to
his own whims attains neither perfection, nor happiness, nor the supreme
destination.
PURPORT
As described before, the çästra-vidhim, or
the direction of the çästra, is given to the
different castes and orders of human society. Everyone is expected to follow
these rules and regulations. If one does not follow them and acts whimsically
according to his lust, greed and desire, then he never will be perfect in his
life. In other words, a man may theoretically know all these things, but if he
does not apply them in his own life, then he is to be known as the lowest of
mankind. In the human form of life, a living entity is expected to be sane and
to follow the regulations given for elevating his life to the highest platform,
but if he does not follow them, then he degrades himself. But even if he
follows the rules and regulations and moral principles and ultimately does not
come to the stage of understanding the Supreme Lord, then all his knowledge
becomes spoiled. Therefore one should gradually raise himself to the platform
of Kåñëa consciousness and devotional service; it is then and there that he can
attain the highest perfectional stage, not otherwise.
The word käma-cärataù is very significant. A person who knowingly violates the rules acts in lust. He knows that this is forbidden, still he acts. This is called acting whimsically. He knows that this should be done, but still he does not do it; therefore he is called whimsical. Such persons are destined to be condemned by the Supreme Lord. Such persons cannot have the perfection which is meant for the human life. The human life is especially meant for purifying one’s existence, and one who does not follow the rules and regulations cannot purify himself, nor can he attain the real stage of happiness.
Bg
16.24
TEXT
24
TEXT
TaSMaaC^añ&
Pa[Maa<a& Tae k-aYaaRk-aYaRVYaviSQaTaaE )
jaTva XaañivDaaNaae¢&- k-MaR k-TauRiMahahRiSa )) 24 ))
tasmäc chästraà pramäëaà te
käryäkärya-vyavasthitau
jïätvä çästra-vidhänoktaà
karma kartum ihärhasi
tasmät—therefore; çästram—scriptures; pramäëam—evidence;
te—your; kärya—duty;
akärya—forbidden activities; vyavasthitau—in determining; jïätvä—knowing;
çästra—of scripture; vidhäna—regulations;
uktam—as declared; karma—work;
kartum—to do; iha arhasi—you
should do it.
TRANSLATION
One should understand what is duty and what is not duty by the
regulations of the scriptures. Knowing such rules and regulations, one should
act so that he may gradually be elevated.
PURPORT
As stated in the Fifteenth Chapter, all the rules and regulations
of the Vedas are meant for knowing Kåñëa. If one
understands Krsëa from the Bhagavad-gétä and
becomes situated in Krsëa consciousness, engaging himself in devotional
service, he has reached the highest perfection of knowledge offered by the
Vedic literature. Lord Caitanya Mahäprabhu made this process very easy: He
asked people simply to chant Hare Kåñëa, Hare Kåñëa, Kåñëa Kåñëa, Hare Hare/
Hare Räma, Hare Räma, Räma Räma, Hare Hare and to engage in the devotional
service of the Lord and eat the remnants of foodstuff offered to the Deity. One
who is directly engaged in all these devotional activities is to be understood
as having studied all Vedic literature. He has come to the conclusion
perfectly. Of course, for the ordinary persons who are not in Krsëa
consciousness or who are not engaged in devotional service, what is to be done
and what is not to be done must be decided by the injunctions of the Vedas. One should act accordingly, without argument.
That is called following the principles of çästra, or
scripture. Çästra is without the four principal
defects that are visible in the conditioned soul: imperfect senses, the
propensity for cheating, certainty of committing mistakes, and certainty of
being illusioned. These four principal defects in conditioned life disqualify
one from putting forth rules and regulations. Therefore, the rules and
regulations as described in the çästra—being
above these defects—are accepted without alteration by all great saints, äcäryas, and great souls.
In India there are many parties of spiritual understanding, generally classified as two: the impersonalist and the personalist. Both of them, however, lead their lives according to the principles of the Vedas. Without following the principles of the scriptures, one cannot elevate himself to the perfectional stage. One who actually, therefore, understands the purport of the çästras is considered fortunate.
In human society, aversion to the principles of understanding the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the cause of all falldowns. That is the greatest offense of human life. Therefore, mäyä, the material energy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, is always giving us trouble in the shape of the threefold miseries. This material energy is constituted of the three modes of material nature. One has to raise himself at least to the mode of goodness before the path to understanding the Supreme Lord can be opened. Without raising oneself to the standard of the mode of goodness, one remains in ignorance and passion, which are the cause of demoniac life. Those in the modes of passion and ignorance deride the scriptures, deride the holy man, and deride the proper understanding of the spiritual master, and they do not care for the regulations of the scriptures. In spite of hearing the glories of devotional service, they are not attracted. Thus they manufacture their own way of elevation. These are some of the defects of human society, which lead to the demoniac status of life. If, however, one is able to be guided by a proper and bona fide spiritual master, who can lead one to the path of elevation, to the higher stage, then one’s life becomes successful.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the Sixteenth Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of the Divine and Demoniac Natures.
Bg 17. The Divisions of Faith
CHAPTER
SEVENTEEN
The Divisions
of Faith
Bg 17.1
TEXT
1
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac )
Yae XaañiviDaMauTSa*JYa YaJaNTae é[ÖYaaiNvTaa" )
Taeza& iNaïa Tau k-a k*-Z<a SatvMaahae rJaSTaMa" )) 1 ))
arjuna
uväca
ye çästra-vidhim utsåjya
yajante çraddhayänvitäù
teñäà niñöhä tu kä kåñëa
sattvam äho rajas tamaù
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna said;
ye—those; çästra-vidhim—the
regulations of scripture; utsåjya—giving up; yajante—worships; çraddhayä—full
faith; anvitäù—possessed of; teñäm—of them; niñöhä—faith;
tu—but; kä—what is
that; kåñëa—O Kåñëa; sattvam—in
goodness; äho—said; rajaù—in
passion; tamaù—in ignorance.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said, O Kåñëa, what is the situation of one who does not
follow the principles of scripture but worships according to his own
imagination? Is he in goodness, in passion or in ignorance?
PURPORT
In the Fourth Chapter, thirty-ninth verse, it is said that a
person faithful to a particular type of worship gradually becomes elevated to
the stage of knowledge and attains the highest perfectional stage of peace and
prosperity. In the Sixteenth Chapter, it is concluded that one who does not
follow the principles laid down in the scriptures is called an asura, demon, and one who follows the scriptural
injunctions faithfully is called a deva, or
demigod. Now, if one, with faith, follows some rules which are not mentioned in
the scriptural injunctions, what is his position? This doubt of Arjuna is to be
cleared by Kåñëa. Are those who create some sort of God by selecting a human
being and placing their faith in him worshiping in goodness, passion or
ignorance? Do such persons attain the perfectional stage of life? Is it
possible for them to be situated in real knowledge and elevate themselves to
the highest perfectional stage? Do those who do not follow the rules and
regulations of the scriptures but who have faith in something and worship gods
and demigods and men attain success in their effort? Arjuna is putting these
questions to Kåñëa.
Bg 17.2
TEXT
2
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
)
i}aivDaa >aviTa é[Öa deihNaa& Saa Sv>aavJaa )
Saaitvk-I raJaSaq cEv TaaMaSaq ceiTa Taa& é*<au )) 2 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
tri-vidhä bhavati çraddhä
dehinäà sä svabhäva-jä
sättviké räjasé caiva
tämasé ceti täà çåëu
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; tri-vidhä—three
kinds; bhavati—become; çraddhä—faith;
dehinäm—of the embodied; sä—that;
sva-bhäva-jä—according to his mode of material
nature; sättviké—mode of goodness; räjasé—mode of passion; ca—also;
eva—certainly; tämasé—mode
of ignorance; ca—and; iti—thus;
täm—that; såëu—hear
from Me.
TRANSLATION
The Supreme Lord said, according to the modes of nature acquired
by the embodied soul, one’s faith can be of three kinds—goodness, passion or
ignorance. Now hear about these.
PURPORT
Those who know the rules and regulations of the scriptures, but,
out of laziness or indolence, give up following these rules and regulations,
are governed by the modes of material nature. According to their previous
activities in the modes of goodness, passion or ignorance, they acquire a
nature which is of a specific quality. The association of the living entity
with the different modes of nature has been going on perpetually since the
living entity is in contact with material nature. Thus he acquires different
types of mentality according to his association with the material modes. But
this nature can be changed if one associates with a bona fide spiritual master
and abides by his rules and the scriptures. Gradually, one can change his
position from ignorance to goodness, or from passion to goodness. The
conclusion is that blind faith in a particular mode of nature cannot help a
person become elevated to the perfectional stage. One has to consider things
carefully, with intelligence, in the association of a bona fide spiritual
master. Thus one can change his position to a higher mode of nature.
Bg 17.3
TEXT
3
TEXT
SatvaNauæPaa
SavRSYa é[Öa >aviTa >aarTa )
é[ÖaMaYaae_Ya& Pauåzae Yaae YaC^\Ö" Sa Wv Sa" )) 3 ))
sattvänurüpä sarvasya
çraddhä bhavati bhärata
çraddhä-mayo ’yaà puruño
yo yac-chraddhaù sa eva saù
sattva-anurüpä—according to
the existence; sarvasya—of everyone; çraddhä—faith; bhavati—becomes;
bhärata—O son of Bhärata; çraddhä—faith;
mayaù—full; ayam—this;
puruñaù—living entity; yaù—anyone;
yat—that; çraddhaù—faith;
saù—that; eva—certainly;
saù—he.
TRANSLATION
According to one’s existence under the various modes of nature,
one evolves a particular kind of faith. The living being is said to be of a
particular faith according to the modes he has acquired.
PURPORT
Everyone has a particular type of faith, regardless of what he is.
But his faith is considered good, passionate or ignorant according to the
nature he has acquired. Thus, according to his particular type of faith, one
associates with certain persons. Now the real fact is that every living being,
as is stated in the Fifteenth Chapter, is originally the fragmental part and
parcel of the Supreme Lord. Therefore one is originally transcendental to all
the modes of material nature. But when one forgets his relationship with the
Supreme Personality of Godhead and comes into contact with the material nature
in conditional life, he generates his own position by association with the
different varieties of material nature. The resultant artificial faith and existence
are only material. Although one may be conducted by some impression, or some
conception of life, still, originally, he is nirguëa, or
transcendental. Therefore one has to become cleansed of the material
contamination that he has acquired in order to regain his relationship with the
Supreme Lord. That is the only path back without fear: Kåñëa consciousness. If
one is situated in Kåñëa consciousness, then that path is guaranteed for his
elevation to the perfectional stage. If one does not take to this path of
self-realization, then he is surely to be conducted by the influence of the
modes of nature.
The word sattva, or faith, is very significant in this verse. Sattva or faith always comes out of the works of goodness. One’s faith may be in a demigod or some created God or some mental concoction. It is supposed to be one’s strong faith in something that is productive of the works of material goodness. But in material conditional life, no works of material nature are completely purified. They are mixed. They are not in pure goodness. Pure goodness is transcendental; in purified goodness one can understand the real nature of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. As long as one’s faith is not completely in purified goodness, the faith is subject to contamination by any of the modes of material nature. The contaminated modes of material nature expand to the heart. Therefore according to the position of the heart in contact with a particular mode of material nature, one’s faith is established. It should be understood, that if one’s heart is in the mode of goodness, his faith is also in the mode of goodness. If his heart is in the mode of passion, his faith is also in the mode of passion. And if his heart is in the mode of darkness, illusion, his faith is also thus contaminated. Thus we find different types of faith in this world, and there are different types of religions due to different types of faith. The real principle of religious faith is situated in the mode of pure goodness, but because the heart is tainted, we find different types of religious principles. Thus according to different types of faith, there are different kinds of worship.
Bg 17.4
TEXT
4
TEXT
YaJaNTae
Saaitvk-a devaNYa+ar+aa&iSa raJaSaa" )
Pa[eTaaN>aUTaGa<aa&êaNYae YaJaNTae TaaMaSaa JaNaa" )) 4 ))
yajante sättvikä devän
yakña-rakñäàsi räjasäù
pretän bhüta-gaëäàç cänye
yajante tämasä janäù
yajante—worship; sättvikäù—those who are in the mode of goodness; devän—demigods; yakña-rakñäàsi
räjasäù—those who are in the mode of passion worship demons; pretän—dead spirits; bhüta-gaëän—ghosts;
ca anye—and others; yajante—worship;
tämasäù—in the mode of ignorance; janäù—people.
TRANSLATION
Men in the mode of goodness worship the demigods; those in the
mode of passion worship the demons; and those in the mode of ignorance worship
ghosts and spirits.
PURPORT
In this verse the Supreme Personality of Godhead describes
different kinds of worshipers according to their external activities. According
to scriptural injunction, only the Supreme Personality of Godhead is worshipable,
but those who are not very conversant with, or faithful to, the scriptural
injunctions worship different objects, according to their specific situations
in the modes of material nature. Those who are situated in goodness generally
worship the demigods. The demigods include Brahmä, Çiva and others such as
Indra, Candra and the sun-god. There are various demigods. Those in goodness
worship a particular demigod for a particular purpose. Similarly, those who are
in the mode of passion worship the demons. We recall that during the Second
World War, a man in Calcutta worshiped Hitler because thanks to that war he had
amassed a large amount of wealth by dealing in the black market. Similarly,
those in the modes of passion and ignorance generally select a powerful man to
be God. They think that anyone can be worshiped as God and that the same
results will be obtained.
Now, it is clearly described here that those who are in the mode of passion worship and create such gods, and those who are in the mode of ignorance, in darkness, worship dead spirits. Sometimes people worship at the tomb of some dead man. Sexual service is also considered to be in the mode of darkness. Similarly, in remote villages in India there are worshipers of ghosts. We have seen that in India the lower class people sometimes go to the forest, and if they have knowledge that a ghost lives in a tree, they worship that tree and offer sacrifices. These different kinds of worship are not actually God worship. God worship is for persons who are transcendentally situated in pure goodness. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam it is said, sattvaà viçuddham väsudeva-çabditam. “When a man is situated in pure goodness, he worships Väsudeva.” The purport is that those who are completely purified of the material modes of nature and who are transcendentally situated can worship the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
The impersonalists are supposed to be situated in the mode of goodness, and they worship five kinds of demigods. They worship the impersonal Viñëu, or Viñëu form in the material world, which is known as philosophized Viñëu. Viñëu is the expansion of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, but the impersonalists, because they do not ultimately believe in the Supreme Personality of Godhead, imagine that the Viñëu form is just another aspect of the impersonal Brahman; similarly, they imagine that Lord Brahmä is the impersonal form in the material mode of passion. Thus they sometimes describe five kinds of gods that are worshipable, but because they think that the actual truth is impersonal Brahman, they dispose of all worshipable objects at the ultimate end. In conclusion, the different qualities of the material modes of nature can be purified through association with persons who are of transcendental nature.
Bg 17.5,
Bg 17.6, Bg 17.5-6
TEXTS
5–6
TEXT
AXaañivihTa&
gaaer& TaPYaNTae Yae TaPaae JaNaa" )
dM>aahªarSa&Yau¢-a" k-aMaraGabl/aiNvTaa" )) 5 ))
k-zRYaNTa" XarqrSQa& >aUTaGa]aMaMaceTaSa" )
Maa& cEvaNTa" XarqrSQa& TaaiNvÖyaSauriNaêYaaNa( )) 6 ))
açästra-vihitaà ghoraà
tapyante ye tapo janäù
dambhähaìkära-saàyuktäù
käma-räga-balänvitäù
karñayantaù çaréra-sthaà
bhüta-grämam acetasaù
mäà caiväntaù çaréra-sthaà
tän viddhy äsura-niçcayän
açästra—not
mentioned in the scriptures; vihitam—directed; ghoram—harmful to others; tapyante—undergo
penances; ye—those; tapaù—austerities;
janäù—persons; dambha—pride;
ahaìkära—egotism; saàyuktäù—engaged;
käma—lust; räga—attachment;
bala—force; anvitäù—impelled
by; karñayantaù—tormenting; çaréra-stham—situated within the body; bhütagrämam—combination of material elements; acetasaù—by such a misled mentality; mäm—to Me; ca—also; eva—certainly; antaù—within;
çaréra-stham—situated in the body; tän—them; viddhi—understand;
äsura—demons; niçcayän—certainly.
TRANSLATION
Those who undergo severe austerities and penances not recommended
in the scriptures, performing them out of pride, egotism, lust and attachment,
who are impelled by passion and who torture their bodily organs as well as the
Supersoul dwelling within are to be known as demons.
PURPORT
There are persons who manufacture modes of austerity and penances
which are not mentioned in the scriptural injunctions. For instance, fasting
for some ulterior purpose, such as to promote a purely political end, is not
mentioned in the scriptural directions. The scriptures recommend fasting for
spiritual advancement, not for some political end or social purpose. Persons
who take to such austerities are, according to Bhagavad-gétä,
certainly demoniac. Their acts are against the scriptural injunction and
are not beneficial for the people in general. Actually, they act out of pride,
false ego, lust and attachment for material enjoyment. By such activities, not
only are the combination of material elements of which the body is constructed
disturbed, but also the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself living within
the body. Such unauthorized fasting or austerities for some political end are
certainly very disturbing to others. They are not mentioned in the Vedic
literature. A demoniac person may think that he can force his enemy or other
parties to comply with his desire by this method, but sometimes one dies by
such fasting. These acts are not approved by the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, and He says that those who engage in them are demons. Such demonstrations
are insults to the Supreme Personality of Godhead because they are enacted in
disobedience to the Vedic scriptural injunctions. The word acetasaù is significant in this connection—persons of
normal mental condition must obey the scriptural injunctions. Those who are not
in such a position neglect and disobey the scriptures and manufacture their own
way of austerities and penances. One should always remember the ultimate end of
the demoniac people, as described in the previous chapter. The Lord forces them
to take birth in the womb of demoniac persons. Consequently they will live by
demoniac principles life after life without knowing their relationship with the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. If, however, such persons are fortunate enough
to be guided by a spiritual master who can direct them to the path of Vedic
wisdom, they can get out of this entanglement and ultimately achieve the
supreme goal.
Bg 17.7
TEXT
7
TEXT
AaharSTviPa
SavRSYa i}aivDaae >aviTa iPa[Ya" )
YajSTaPaSTaQaa daNa& Taeza& >aediMaMa& é*<au )) 7 ))
ähäras tv api sarvasya
tri-vidho bhavati priyaù
yajïas tapas tathä dänaà
teñäà bhedam imaà çåëu
ähäraù—eating; tu—certainly; api—also; sarvasya—of everyone; trividhaù—three
kinds; bhavati—there are; priyaù—dear;
yajïaù—sacrifice; tapaù—austerity;
tathä—also; dänam—charity;
teñäm—of them; bhedam—differences;
imam—thus; çåëu—hear.
TRANSLATION
Even food of which all partake is of three kinds, according to the
three modes of material nature. The same is true of sacrifices, austerities and
charity. Listen, and I shall tell you of the distinctions of these.
PURPORT
In terms of different situations and the modes of material nature,
there are differences in the manner of eating, performing sacrifices,
austerities and charities. They are not all conducted on the same level. Those
who can understand analytically what kind of performances are in what modes of
material nature are actually wise; those who consider all kinds of sacrifice or
foods or charity to be the same cannot discriminate, and they are foolish.
There are missionary workers who advocate that one can do whatever he likes and
attain perfection. But these foolish guides are not acting according to the
direction of the scripture. They are manufacturing ways and misleading the
people in general.
Bg
17.8, Bg 17.9, Bg 17.10, Bg 17.8-10
TEXT
8
TEXT
AaYau"Satvbl/araeGYaSau%Pa[qiTaivvDaRNaa"
)
rSYaa" iòGDaa" iSQara ôÛa Aahara" Saaitvk-iPa[Yaa" )) 8 ))
k-Èãl/v<aaTYauZ<aTaq+<aæ+aivdaihNa" )
Aahara raJaSaSYaeía du"%Xaaek-aMaYaPa[da" )) 9 ))
YaaTaYaaMa& GaTarSa& PaUiTa PaYauRizTa& c YaTa( )
oiC^íMaiPa caMaeDYa& >aaeJaNa& TaaMaSaiPa[YaMa( )) 10 ))
äyuù-sattva-balärogya-
sukha-préti-vivardhanäù
rasyäù snigdhäù sthirä hådyä
ähäräù sättvika-priyäù
kaöv-amla-lavaëäty-uñëa-
tékñëa-rükña-vidähinaù
ähärä räjasasyeñöä
duùkha-çokämaya-pradäù
yäta-yämaà gata-rasaà
püti paryuñitaà ca yat
ucchiñöam api cämedhyaà
bhojanaà tämasa-priyam
TRANSLATION
Foods in the mode of goodness increase the duration of life,
purify one’s existence and give strength, health, happiness and satisfaction.
Such nourishing foods are sweet, juicy, fattening and palatable. Foods that are
too bitter, too sour, salty, pungent, dry and hot, are liked by people in the
modes of passion. Such foods cause pain, distress, and disease. Food cooked
more than three hours before being eaten, which is tasteless, stale, putrid,
decomposed and unclean, is food liked by people in the mode of ignorance.
PURPORT
Thc purpose of food is to increase the duration of life, purify
the mind and aid bodily strength. This is its only purpose. In the past, great
authorities selected those foods that best aid health and increase life’s
duration, such as milk products, sugar, rice, wheat, fruits and vegetables.
These foods are very dear to those in the mode of goodness. Some other foods,
such as baked corn and molasses, while not very palatable in themselves, can be
made pleasant when mixed with milk or other foods. They are then in the mode of
goodness. All these foods are pure by nature. They are quite distinct from
untouchable things like meat and liquor. Fatty foods, as mentioned in the
eighth verse, have no connection with animal fat obtained by slaughter. Animal
fat is available in the form of milk, which is the most wonderful of all foods.
Milk, butter, cheese and similar products give animal fat in a form which rules
out any need for the killing of innocent creatures. It is only through brute
mentality that this killing goes on. The civilized method of obtaining needed
fat is by milk. Slaughter is the way of subhumans. Protein is amply available
through split peas, dhall, whole wheat, etc.
Foods in the mode of passion, which are bitter, too salty, or too hot or overly mixed with red pepper, cause misery by producing mucous in the stomach, leading to disease. Foods in the mode of ignorance or darkness are essentially those that are not fresh. Any food cooked more than three hours before it is eaten (except prasädam, food offered to the Lord) is considered to be in the mode of darkness. Because they are decomposing, such foods give a bad odor, which often attracts people in this mode but repulses those in the mode of goodness.
Remnants of food may be eaten only when they are part of a meal that was first offered to the Supreme Lord or first eaten by saintly persons, especially the spiritual master. Otherwise the remnants of food are considered to be in the mode of darkness, and they increase infection or disease. Such foodstuffs, although very palatable to persons in the mode of darkness, are neither liked nor even touched by those in the mode of goodness. The best food is the remnant of what is offered to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. In Bhagavad-gétä the Supreme Lord says that He accepts preparations of vegetables, flour and milk when offered with devotion. Patraà puñpaà phalaà toyam. Of course, devotion and love are the chief things which the Supreme Personality of Godhead accepts. But it is also mentioned that the prasädam should be prepared in a particular way. Any food prepared by the injunction of the scripture offered to the Supreme Personality of Godhead can be taken even if prepared long, long ago, because such food is transcendental. Therefore to make food antiseptic, eatable and palatable for all persons, one should offer food to the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Bg
17.11
TEXT
11
TEXT
Af-l/ak-ax(i+ai>aYaRjae
iviDad*íae Ya wJYaTae )
YaíVYaMaeveiTa MaNa" SaMaaDaaYa Sa Saaitvk-" )) 11 ))
aphaläkäìkñibhir yajïo
vidhi-diñöo ya ijyate
yañöavyam eveti manaù
samädhäya sa sättvikaù
aphala-käïkñibhiù—devoid of
desire for result; yajïaù—sacrifice; vidhi—accordingly; dåñtaù—direction;
yaù—anyone; ijyate—performs;
yañöavyam—must be performed; eva—certainly; iti—thus; manaù—mind; samädhäya—fixed
in; saù—he; sättvikaù—is
in the mode of goodness.
TRANSLATION
Of sacrifices, that sacrifice performed according to duty and to
scriptural rules, and with no expectation of reward, is of the nature of
goodness.
PURPORT
The general tendency is to offer sacrifice with some purpose in
mind, but here it is stated that sacrifice should be performed without any such
desire. It should be done as a matter of duty. Take, for example, the
performance of rituals in temples or in churches. Generally they are performed
with the purpose of material benefit, but that is not in the mode of goodness.
One should go to a temple or church as a matter of duty, offer respect to the
Supreme Personality of Godhead and offer flowers and eatables. Everyone thinks
that there is no use in going to the temple just to worship God. But worship
for economic benefit is not recommended in the scriptural injunction. One
should go simply to offer respect to the Deity. That will place one in the mode
of goodness. It is the duty of every civilized man to obey the injunctions of
the scriptures and offer respect to the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Bg
17.12
TEXT
12
TEXT
Ai>aSaNDaaYa
Tau f-l&/ dM>aaQaRMaiPa cEv YaTa( )
wJYaTae >arTaé[eï Ta& Yaj& iviÖ raJaSaMa( )) 12 ))
abhisandhäya tu phalaà
dambhärtham api caiva yat
ijyate bharata-çreñöha
taà yajïaà viddhi räjasam
abhisandhäya—desiring; tu—but; phalam—the
result; dambha—pride; artham—material
benefits; api—also; ca—and;
eva—certainly; yat—that
which; ijyate—worship; bharata-çreñöha—O
chief of the Bhäratas; tam—that; yajïam—sacrifice; viddhi—know;
räjasam—in the mode of passion.
TRANSLATION
But that sacrifice performed for some material end or benefit or
performed ostentatiously, out of pride, is of the nature of passion, O chief of
the Bhäratas.
PURPORT
Sometimes sacrifices and rituals are performed for elevation to
the heavenly kingdom or for some material benefits in this world. Such
sacrifices or ritualistic performances are considered to be in the mode of
passion.
Bg
17.13
TEXT
13
TEXT
iviDahqNaMaSa*íaà&
MaN}ahqNaMadi+a<aMa( )
é[ÖaivrihTa& Yaj& TaaMaSa& Pairc+aTae )) 13 ))
vidhi-hénam asåñöännaà
mantra-hénam adakñiëam
çraddhä-virahitaà yajïaà
tämasaà paricakñate
vidhi-hénam—without
scriptural direction; asåñöa-annam—without
distribution of prasädam; mantra-hénam—with no
chanting of the Vedic hymns; adakñiëam—with no
remunerations to the priests; çraddhä—faith; virahitam—without; yajïam—sacrifice;
tämasam—in the mode of ignorance; paricakñate—is to be considered.
TRANSLATION
And that sacrifice performed in defiance of scriptural
injunctions, in which no spiritual food is distributed, no hymns are chanted
and no remunerations are made to the priests, and which is faithless—that
sacrifice is of the nature of ignorance.
PURPORT
Faith in the mode of darkness or ignorance is actually
faithlessness. Sometimes people worship some demigod just to make money and
then spend the money for recreation, ignoring the scriptural injunctions. Such
ceremonial shows of religiosity are not accepted as genuine. They are all in
the mode of darkness; they produce a demoniac mentality and do not benefit human
society.
Bg
17.14
TEXT
14
TEXT
deviÜJaGauåPa[ajPaUJaNa&
XaaEcMaaJaRvMa( )
b]øcYaRMaih&Saa c Xaarqr& TaPa oCYaTae )) 14 ))
deva-dvija-guru-präjïa-
püjanaà çaucam ärjavam
brahmacaryam ahiàsä ca
çäréraà tapa ucyate
deva—the Supreme
Lord; dvija—the brähmaëa;
guru—the spiritual master; präjïa—worshipable
personalities; püjanam—worship; çaucam—cleanliness; ärjavam—simplicity;
brahma-caryam—celibacy; ahiàsä—nonviolence;
ca—also; çäréram—pertaining
to the body; tapaù—austerity; ucyate—is said to be.
TRANSLATION
The austerity of the body consists in this: worship of the Supreme
Lord, the brähmaëas, the spiritual master, and superiors like the father and
mother. Cleanliness, simplicity, celibacy and nonviolence are also austerities
of the body.
PURPORT
The Supreme Godhead here explains the different kinds of austerity
and penance. First He explains the austerities and penances practiced by the
body. One should offer, or learn to offer, respect to God or to the demigods,
the perfect, qualified brähmaëas and the spiritual
master and superiors like father, mother or any person who is conversant with
Vedic knowledge. These should be given proper respect. One should practice
cleansing oneself externally and internally, and he should learn to become
simple in behavior. He should not do anything which is not sanctioned by the
scriptural injunction. He should not indulge in sex outside of married life,
for sex is sanctioned in the scripture only in marriage, not otherwise. This is
called celibacy. These are penances and austerities as far as the body is
concerned.
Bg
17.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
ANauÜeGak-r&
vaKYa& SaTYa& iPa[YaihTa& c YaTa( )
SvaDYaaYaa>YaSaNa& cEv vax(MaYa& TaPa oCYaTae )) 15 ))
anudvega-karaà väkyaà
satyaà priya-hitaà ca yat
svädhyäyäbhyasanaà caiva
väì-mayaà tapa ucyate
anudvega—not
agitating; karam—producing; väkyam—words; satyam—truthful;
priya—dear; hitam—beneficial;
ca—also; yat—which;
svädhyäya—Vedic study; abhyasanam—practice;
ca—also; eva—certainly;
väìmayaà—of the voice; tapaù—austerity;
ucyate—is said to be.
TRANSLATION
Austerity of speech consists in speaking truthfully and
beneficially and in avoiding speech that offends. One should also recite the
Vedas regularly.
PURPORT
One should not speak in such a way as to agitate the minds of
others. Of course, when a teacher speaks, he can speak the truth for the
instruction of his students, but such a teacher should not speak to others who
are not his students if he will agitate their minds. This is penance as far as
talking is concerned. Besides that, one should not talk nonsense. When speaking
in spiritual circles, one’s statements must be upheld by the scriptures. One
should at once quote from scriptural authority to back up what he is saying. At
the same time, such talk should be very pleasurable to the ear. By such
discussions, one may derive the highest benefit and elevate human society.
There is a limitless stock of Vedic literature, and one should study this. This
is called penance of speech.
Bg
17.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
MaNa"Pa[Saad"
SaaEMYaTv& MaaENaMaaTMaiviNaGa]h" )
>aavSa&éuiÖirTYaeTataPaae MaaNaSaMauCYaTae )) 16 ))
manaù-prasädaù saumyatvaà
maunam ätma-vinigrahaù
bhäva-saàçuddhir ity etat
tapo mänasam ucyate
manaù-prasädaù—satisfaction
of the mind; saumyatvam—without duplicity towards
others; maunam—gravity; ätma—self;
vinigrahaù—control; bhäva—nature;
saàçuddhiù—purification; iti—thus;
etat—that is; tapaù—austerity;
mänasam—of the mind; ucyate—is
said to be.
TRANSLATION
And serenity, simplicity, gravity, self-control and purity of
thought are the austerities of the mind.
PURPORT
To make the mind austere is to detach it from sense gratification.
It should be so trained that it can be always thinking of doing good for others.
The best training for the mind is gravity in thought. One should not
deviate from Kåñëa consciousness and must always avoid sense gratification. To
purify one’s nature is to become Kåñëa conscious. Satisfaction of the mind can
be obtained only by taking the mind away from thoughts of sense enjoyment. The
more we think of sense enjoyment, the more the mind becomes dissatisfied. In
the present age we unnecessarily engage the mind in so many different ways for
sense gratification, and so there is no possibility of the mind’s becoming
satisfied. The best course is to divert the mind to the Vedic literature, which
is full of satisfying stories, as in the Puräëas
and the Mahäbhärata. One can take advantage of
this knowledge and thus become purified. The mind should be devoid of
duplicity, and one should think of the welfare of all. Silence means that one
is always thinking of self-realization. The person in Kåñëa consciousness
observes perfect silence in this sense. Control of the mind means detaching the
mind from sense enjoyment. One should be straightforward in his dealing and
thereby purify his existence. All these qualities together constitute austerity
in mental activities.
Bg
17.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
é[ÖYaa ParYaa
Taá& TaPaSTaiT}aivDa& NarE" )
Af-l/ak-ax(i+ai>aYauR¢E-" Saaitvk&- Pairc+aTae )) 17 ))
çraddhayä parayä taptaà
tapas tat tri-vidhaà naraiù
aphaläkäìkñibhir yuktaiù
sättvikaà paricakñate
çraddhayä—with faith;
parayä—transcendental; taptam—executed;
tapaù—austerity; tat—that;
tri-vidham—three kinds; naraiù—by
men; aphala-äkäìkñibhiù—without desires for
fruits; yuktaiù—engaged; sättvikam—in
the mode of goodness; pari-cakñate—is called.
TRANSLATION
This threefold austerity, practiced by men whose aim is not to
benefit themselves materially but to please the Supreme, is of the nature of
goodness.
Bg
17.18
TEXT
18
TEXT
SaTk-arMaaNaPaUJaaQa|
TaPaae dM>aeNa cEv YaTa( )
i§-YaTae Taidh Pa[ae¢&- raJaSa& cl/MaDa]uvMa( )) 18 ))
satkära-mäna-püjärthaà
tapo dambhena caiva yat
kriyate tad iha proktaà
räjasaà calam adhruvam
satkära—respect; mäna—honor; püjä-artham—for
worship; tapaù—austerity;
dambhena—with pride; ca—also; eva—certainly; yat—which
is; kriyate—performed; tat—that;
iha—in this world; proktam—is
said; räjasam—in the mode of passion; calam—flickering; adhruvam—temporary.
TRANSLATION
Those ostentatious penances and austerities which are performed in
order to gain respect, honor and reverence are said to be in the mode of
passion. They are neither stable nor permanent.
PURPORT
Sometimes penance and austerity are executed to attract people and
receive honor, respect and worship from others. Persons in the mode of passion
arrange to be worshiped by subordinates and let them wash their feet and offer
riches. Such arrangements artificially made by the performance of penances are
considered to be in the mode of passion. The results are temporary; they can be
continued for some time, but they are not permanent.
Bg
17.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
MaU!Ga]ahe<aaTMaNaae
YaTPaq@Yaa i§-YaTae TaPa" )
ParSYaaeTSaadNaaQa| va TataaMaSaMaudaôTaMa( )) 19 ))
müòha-gräheëätmano yat
péòayä kriyate tapaù
parasyotsädanärthaà vä
tat tämasam udähåtam
müòha—foolish; gräheëa—with endeavor; ätmanaù—of
one’s own self; yat—which; péòayä—by torture; kriyate—is
performed; tapaù—penance; parasya—to
others; utsädanärtham—causing annihilation; vä—or; tat—that; tämasam—in the mode of darkness; udähåtam—is said to be.
TRANSLATION
And those penances and austerities which are performed foolishly
by means of obstinant self-torture, or to destroy or injure others, are said to
be in the mode of ignorance.
PURPORT
There are instances of foolish penance undertaken by demons like
Hiraëyakaçipu, who performed austere penances to become immortal and kill the
demigods. He prayed to Brahmä for such things, but ultimately he was killed by
the Supreme Personality of Godhead. To undergo penances for something which is
impossible is certainly in the mode of ignorance.
Bg
17.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
daTaVYaiMaiTa
YaÕaNa& dqYaTae_NauPak-air<ae )
deXae k-ale/ c Paa}ae c TaÕaNa& Saaitvk&- SMa*TaMa( )) 20 ))
dätavyam iti yad dänaà
déyate ’nupakäriëe
deçe käle ca pätre ca
tad dänaà sättvikaà småtam
dätavyam—worth
giving; iti—thus; yat—that
which; dänam—charity; déyate—given;
anupakäriëe—to any person irrespective of doing
good; dese—in place; käle—in
time; ca—also; pätre—suitable
person; ca—and; tat—that;
dänam—charity; sättvikam—in
the mode of goodness; småtam—consider.
TRANSLATION
That gift which is given out of duty, at the proper time and
place, to a worthy person, and without expectation of return, is considered to
be charity in the mode of goodness.
PURPORT
In the Vedic literature, charity given to a person engaged in
spiritual activities is recommended. There is no recommendation for giving
charity indiscriminately. Spiritual perfection is always a consideration.
Therefore charity is recommended to be given at a place of pilgrimage and at
lunar or solar eclipses or at the end of the month or to a qualified brähmaëa or a Vaiñëava (devotee) or in temples. Such
charities should be given without any consideration of return. Charity to the
poor is sometimes given out of compassion, but if a poor man is not worth
giving charity to, then there is no spiritual advancement. In other words,
indiscriminate charity is not recommended in the Vedic literature.
Bg
17.21
TEXT
21
TEXT
Yatau
Pa[TYauPak-araQa| f-l/MauiÕXYa va PauNa" )
dqYaTae c Pairi©-í& TaÕaNa& raJaSa& SMa*TaMa( )) 21 ))
yat tu pratyupakärärthaà
phalam uddiçya vä punaù
déyate ca parikliñöaà
tad dänaà räjasaà småtam
yat—that which; tu—but; prati-upakära-artham—for
the sake of getting some return; phalam—result; uddiçya—desiring; vä—or; punaù—again; déyate—is
given in charity; ca—also; parikliñöam—grudgingly; tat—that;
dänam—charity; räjasam—in
the mode of passion; småtam—is understood to be.
TRANSLATION
But charity performed with the expectation of some return, or with
a desire for fruitive results, or in a grudging mood, is said to be charity in
the mode of passion.
PURPORT
Charity is sometimes performed for elevation to the heavenly
kingdom and sometimes with great trouble and with repentance afterwards. “Why
have I spent so much in this way?” Charity is also sometimes made under some
obligation, at the request of a superior. These kinds of charity are said to be
made in the mode of passion.
There are many charitable foundations which offer their gifts to institutions where sense gratification goes on. Such charities are not recommended in the Vedic scripture. Only charity in the mode of goodness is recommended.
Bg
17.22
TEXT
22
TEXT
AdeXak-ale/
YaÕaNaMaPaa}ae>Yaê dqYaTae )
ASaTk*-TaMavjaTa& TataaMaSaMaudaôTaMa( )) 22 ))
adeça-käle yad dänam
apätrebhyaç ca déyate
asat-kåtam avajïätaà
tat tämasam udähåtam
adesa—unpurified
place; käle—unpurified time; yat—that which is; dänam—charity;
apätrebhyaù—to unworthy persons; ca—also; déyate—is given;
asatkåtam—without respect; avajïätam—without proper attention; tat—that; tämasam—in the
mode of darkness; udähåtam—is said to be.
TRANSLATION
And charity performed at an improper place and time and given to
unworthy persons without respect and with contempt is charity in the mode of
ignorance.
PURPORT
Contributions for indulgence in intoxication and gambling are not
encouraged here. That sort of contribution is in the mode of ignorance. Such
charity is not beneficial; rather, sinful persons are encouraged. Similarly, if
a person gives charity to a suitable person without respect and without
attention, that sort of charity is also said to be in the mode of darkness.
Bg
17.23
TEXT
23
TEXT
p TaTSaidiTa
iNadeRXaae b]ø<aiñivDa" SMa*Ta" )
b]aø<aaSTaeNa vedaê Yajaê ivihTaa" Paura )) 23 ))
oà tat sad iti nirdeço
brahmaëas tri-vidhaù småtaù
brähmaëäs tena vedäç ca
yajïäç ca vihitäù purä
om—indication
of the Supreme; tat—that; sat—eternal;
iti—that; nirdeçaù—indication;
brähmaëäù—of the Supreme; tri-vidhaù—three
kinds; småtaù—consider; brahmaëaù—the
brähmaëas; tena—therefore; vedäù—the Vedic literature; ca—also;
yajïäù—sacrifice; ca—also;
vihitäù—sacrifice; purä—formerly.
TRANSLATION
From the beginning of creation, the three syllables—om tat
sat—have been used to indicate the Supreme Absolute Truth [Brahman]. They were
uttered by brähmaëas while chanting Vedic hymns and during sacrifices, for the
satisfaction of the Supreme.
PURPORT
It has been explained that penance, sacrifice, charity and foods
are divided into three categories: the modes of goodness, passion and ignorance.
But whether first class, second class or third class, they are all conditioned,
contaminated by the material modes of nature. When they are aimed at the
Supreme—om tat sat, the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, the eternal—they become means for spiritual elevation. In the
scriptural injunctions such an objective is indicated. These three words, om tat sat, particularly indicate the Absolute Truth,
the Supreme Personality of Godhead. In the Vedic hymns, the word om is always found.
One who acts without following the regulations of the scriptures will not attain the Absolute Truth. He will get some temporary result, but not the ultimate end of life. The conclusion is that the performance of charities, sacrifice and penance must be done in the mode of goodness. Performed in the modes of passion or ignorance, they are certainly inferior in quality. The three words om tat sat are uttered in conjunction with the holy name of the Supreme Lord, e.g., om tad viñëoù. Whenever a Vedic hymn or the holy name of the Supreme Lord is uttered, om is added. This is the indication of Vedic literature. These three words are taken from Vedic hymns. Om ity etad brahmaëo nediñöaà näma indicates the first goal. Then tattvamasi indicates the second goal. And sad eva saumya indicates the third goal. Combined they become om tat sat. Formerly when Brahmä, the first created living entity, performed sacrifices, he spoke these three names of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The same principle holds by disciplic succession. So this hymn has great significance. Bhagavad-gétä recommends, therefore, that any work done should be done for om tat sat, or for the Supreme Personality of Godhead. When one performs penance, charity, and sacrifice with these three words, he is acting in Krñna consciousness. Kåñëa consciousness is a scientific execution of transcendental activities which enables one to return home, back to Godhead. There is no loss of energy in acting in such a transcendental way.
Bg
17.24
TEXT
24
TEXT
TaSMaad( p
wTYaudaôTYa YajdaNaTaPa"i§-Yaa" )
Pa[vTaRNTae ivDaaNaae¢-a" SaTaTa& b]øvaidNaaMa( )) 24 ))
tasmäd oà ity udähåtya
yajïa-däna-tapaù-kriyäù
pravartante vidhänoktäù
satataà brahma-vädinäm
tasmät—therefore; om—beginning with om; iti—thus;
udähåtya—indicating; yajïa—sacrifice;
däna—charity; tapaù—penance;
kriyäù—performances; pravartante—begins;
vidhäna-uktäù—according to scriptural regulation;
satatam—always; brahma-vädinäm—of
the transcendentalists.
TRANSLATION
Thus the transcendentalists undertake sacrifices, charities, and
penances, beginning always with om, to attain the Supreme.
PURPORT
Om tad viñëoù paramaà padam. The lotus
feet of Viñëu are the supreme devotional platform. The performance of
everything on behalf of the Supreme Personality of Godhead assures the
perfection of all activity.
Bg
17.25
TEXT
25
TEXT
TaidTYaNai>aSaNDaaYa
f-l&/ YajTaPa"i§-Yaa" )
daNai§-Yaaê ivivDaa" i§-YaNTae Maae+ak-ax(i+ai>a" )) 25 ))
tad ity anabhisandhäya
phalaà yajïa-tapaù-kriyäù
däna-kriyäç ca vividhäù
kriyante mokña-käìkñibhiù
tat—that; iti—they; anabhisandhäya—without
fruitive result; phalam—result of sacrifice; yajïa—sacrifice; tapaù—penance;
kriyäù—activities; däna—charity;
kriyäù—activities; ca—also;
vividhäù—varieties; kriyante—done;
mokña-käìkñibhiù—those who actually desire
liberation.
TRANSLATION
One should perform sacrifice, penance and charity with the word
tat. The purpose of such transcendental activities is to get free from the
material entanglement.
PURPORT
To be elevated to the spiritual position, one should not act for
any material gain. Acts should be performed for the ultimate gain of being
transferred to the spiritual kingdom, back to home, back to Godhead.
Bg
17.26, Bg 17.27, Bg 17.26-27
TEXTS
26–27
TEXT
SaÙave
SaaDau>aave c SaidTYaeTaTPa[YauJYaTae )
Pa[XaSTae k-MaRi<a TaQaa SaC^Bd" PaaQaR YauJYaTae )) 26 ))
Yaje TaPaiSa daNae c iSQaiTa" SaidiTa caeCYaTae )
k-MaR cEv TadQasYa& SaidTYaevai>aDaqYaTae )) 27 ))
sad-bhäve sädhu-bhäve ca
sad ity etat prayujyate
praçaste karmaëi tathä
sac-chabdaù pärtha yujyate
yajïe tapasi däne ca
sthitiù sad iti cocyate
karma caiva tad-arthéyaà
sad ity eväbhidhéyate
sat-bhäve—in the sense
of the nature of the Supreme; sädhu-bhäve—in the
sense of the nature of devotion; ca—also; sat—the Supreme; iti—thus;
etat—this; prayujyate—is
used; praçaste—bona fide; karmaëi—activities;
tathä—also; sat-çabdaù—sound;
pärtha—O son of Påthä; yujyate—is
used; yajïe—sacrifice; tapasi—in
penance; däne—charity; ca—also;
sthitiù—situated; sat—the
Supreme; iti—thus; ca—and;
ucyate—pronounced; karma—work;
ca—also; eva—certainly;
tat—that; arthéyam—are
meant; sat—Supreme; iti—thus;
eva—certainly; abhidhéyate—is
practiced.
TRANSLATION
The Absolute Truth is the objective of devotional sacrifice, and
it is indicated by the word sat. These works of sacrifice, of penance and of
charity, true to the absolute nature, are performed to please the Supreme
Person, O son of Påthä.
PURPORT
The words praçaste karmaëi, or
prescribed duties, indicate that there are many activities prescribed in the
Vedic literature which are purificatory processes beginning from parental care
up to the end of one’s life. Such purificatory processes are adopted for the
ultimate liberation of the living entity. In all such activities it is
recommended that one should vibrate om tat sat. The
words sad-bhäve and sädhu-bhäve
indicate the transcendental situation. One who is acting in Kåñëa
consciousness is called sattva, and one who is
fully conscious of activities in Kåñëa consciousness is called svarüpa. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam
it is said that the transcendental subject matter becomes clear in the
association of the devotees. Without good association, one cannot achieve
transcendental knowledge. When initiating a person or offering the sacred
thread, one vibrates the words om tat sat. Similarly,
in all kinds of yogic performances, the supreme object, om
tat sat is invoked. These words om tat sat are
used to perfect all activities. This supreme om tat sat makes
everything complete.
Bg
17.28
TEXT
28
TEXT
Aé[ÖYaa
huTa& dta& TaPaSTaá& k*-Ta& c YaTa( )
ASaidTYauCYaTae PaaQaR Na c TaTPa[eTYa Naae wh )) 28 ))
açraddhayä hutaà dattaà
tapas taptaà kåtaà ca yat
asad ity ucyate pärtha
na ca tat pretya no iha
açraddhayä—without
faith; hutam—performed; dattam—given;
tapaù—penance; taptam—executed;
kåtam—performed; ca—also;
yat—that which; asat—falls;
iti—thus; ucyate—is
said to be; pärtha—O son of Påthä; na—never; ca—also; tat—that; pretya—after
death; no—nor; iha—in
this life.
TRANSLATION
But sacrifices, austerities and charities performed without faith
in the Supreme are nonpermanent, O son of Påthä, regardless of whatever rites
are performed. They are called asat and are useless both in this life and the
next.
PURPORT
Anything done without the transcendental objective—whether it be
sacrifice, charity or penance-is useless. Therefore, in this verse, it is
declared that such activities are abominable. Everything should be done for the
Supreme in Kåñëa consciousness. Without such faith, and without the proper
guidance, there can never be any fruit. In all the Vedic scriptures, faith in
the Supreme is advised. In the pursuit of all Vedic instructions, the ultimate
goal is the understanding of Kåñëa. No one can obtain success without following
this principle. Therefore, the best course is to work from the very beginning
in Kåñëa consciousness under the guidance of a bona fide spiritual master. That
is the way to make everything successful.
In the conditional state, people are attracted to worship demigods, ghosts, or Yakñas like Kuvera. The mode of goodness is better than the modes of passion and ignorance, but one who takes directly to Kåñëa consciousness is transcendental to all three modes of material nature. Although there is a process of gradual elevation, if one, by the association of pure devotees, takes directly to Kåñëa consciousness, that is the best way. And that is recommended in this chapter. To achieve success in this way, one must first find the proper spiritual master and receive training under his direction. Then one can achieve faith in the Supreme. When that faith matures, in course of time, it is called love of God. This love is the ultimate goal of the living entities. One should, therefore, take to Krñëa consciousness directly. That is the message of this Seventeenth Chapter.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the Seventeenth Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of the Divisions of Faith.
Bg 18. Conclusion—The Perfection of Renunciation
CHAPTER
EIGHTEEN
Conclusion—The
Perfection of Renunciation
Bg 18.1
TEXT
1
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac )
SaNNYaaSaSYa Mahabahae TatviMaC^aiMa veidTauMa( )
TYaaGaSYa c ôzqke-Xa Pa*Qa¡e-iXaiNazUdNa )) 1 ))
arjuna
uväca
sannyäsasya mahä-bäho
tattvam icchämi veditum
tyägasya ca håñékeça
påthak keçé-niñüdana
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna said;
sannyäsasya—renunciation; mahä-bäho—O
mighty-armed one; tattvam—truth; icchämi—I wish; veditum—to
understand; tyägasya—of renunciation; ca—also; håñékeça—O
master of the senses; påthak—differently; keçi-nisüdana—O killer of the Keçé demon.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said, O mighty-armed one, I wish to understand the purpose
of renunciation [tyäga] and of the renounced order of life [sannyäsa], O killer
of the Keçé demon, Håñékeça.
PURPORT
Actually the Bhagavad-gétä is
finished in seventeen chapters. The Eighteenth Chapter is a supplementary
summarization of the topics discussed before. In every chapter of Bhagavad-gétä, Lord Kåñëa stresses that devotional
service unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the ultimate goal of life.
This same point is summarized in the Eighteenth Chapter as the most
confidential path of knowledge. In the first six chapters, stress was given to
devotional service: yoginäm api sarveñäm… “Of all
yogés or transcendentalists, one who always
thinks of Me within himself is best.” In the next six chapters, pure devotional
service and its nature and activity were discussed. In the third six chapters,
knowledge, renunciation, the activities of material nature and transcendental
nature, and devotional service were described. It was concluded that all acts
should be performed in conjunction with the Supreme Lord, summarized by the
words om tat sat, which
indicate Viñëu, the Supreme Person. In the third part of Bhagavad-gétä, devotional service was established by
the example of past äcäryas and the Brahma-sütra, the Vedänta-sütra,
which cites that devotional service is the ultimate purpose of life and
nothing else. Certain impersonalists consider themselves monopolizers of the
knowledge of Vedänta-sütra, but actually the Vedänta-sütra is meant for understanding devotional
service, for the Lord Himself is the composer of the Vedänta-sütra,
and He is its knower. That is described in the Fifteenth Chapter. In
every scripture, every Veda, devotional service
is the objective. That is explained in Bhagavad-gétä.
As in the Second Chapter a synopsis of the whole subject matter was described, similarly, in the Eighteenth Chapter also the summary of all instruction is given. The purpose of life is indicated to be renunciation and attainment of the transcendental position above the three material modes of nature. Arjuna wants to clarify the two distinct subject matters of Bhagavad-gétä, namely renunciation (tyäga) and the renounced order of life (sannyäsa). Thus he is asking the meaning of these two words.
Two words used in this verse to address the Supreme Lord—Håñékeça and Keçinisüdana—are significant. Håñékeça is Kåñëa, the master of all senses, who can always help us attain mental serenity. Arjuna requests Him to summarize everything in such a way that he can remain equiposed. Yet he has some doubts, and doubts are always compared to demons. He therefore addresses Kåñëa as Keçinisüdana. Keçé was a most formidable demon who was killed by the Lord; now Arjuna is expecting Kåñëa to kill the demon of doubt.
Bg 18.2
TEXT
2
TEXT
é[q>aGavaNauvac
)
k-aMYaaNaa& k-MaR<aa& NYaaSa& SaNNYaaSa& k-vYaae ivdu"
)
SavRk-MaRf-l/TYaaGa& Pa[ahuSTYaaGa& ivc+a<aa" )) 2 ))
çré-bhagavän
uväca
kämyänäà karmaëäà nyäsaà
sannyäsaà kavayo viduù
sarva-karma-phala-tyägaà
prähus tyägaà vicakñaëäù
çré bhagavän uväca—the Supreme
Personality of Godhead said; kämyänäm—with
desire; karmaëäm—activities; nyäsam—renunciation; sannyäsam—renounced
order of life; kavayaù—the learned; viduù—know; sarva—all; karma—activities; phala—of
results; tyägam—renunciation; prähuù—call; tyägam—renunciation;
vicakñaëäù—the experienced.
TRANSLATION
The Supreme Lord said, To give up the results of all activities is
called renunciation [tyäga] by the wise. And that state is called the renounced
order of life [sannyäsa] by great learned men.
PURPORT
The performance of activities for results has to be given up. This
is the instruction of Bhagavad-gétä. But
activities leading to advanced spiritual knowledge are not to be given up. This
will be made clear in the next verse. There are many prescriptions of methods
for performing sacrifice for some particular purpose in the Vedic literatures.
There are certain sacrifices to perform to attain a good son or to attain
elevation to the higher planets, but sacrifices prompted by desires should be
stopped. However, sacrifice for the purification of one’s heart or for
advancement in the spiritual science should not be given up.
Bg 18.3
TEXT
3
TEXT
TYaaJYa&
daezvidTYaeke- k-MaR Pa[ahuMaRNaqiz<a" )
YajdaNaTaPa"k-MaR Na TYaaJYaiMaiTa caPare )) 3 ))
tyäjyaà doña-vad ity eke
karma prähur manéñiëaù
yajïa-däna-tapaù-karma
na tyäjyam iti cäpare
tyäjyam—must be
given up; doñavat—as an evil; iti—thus; eke—one group; karma—work; prähuù—said; manéñiëaù—of great thinkers; yajïa—sacrifice;
däna—charity; tapaù—penance;
karma—work; na—never;
tyäjyam—is to be given up; iti—thus; ca—certainly; apare—others.
TRANSLATION
Some learned men declare that all kinds of fruitive activities
should be given up, but there are yet other sages who maintain that acts of
sacrifice, charity and penance should never be abandoned.
PURPORT
There are many activities in the Vedic literatures which are
subjects of contention. For instance, it is said that an animal can be killed
in a sacrifice, yet some maintain animal killing is completely abominable.
Although animal killing in a sacrifice is recommended in the Vedic literature,
the animal is not considered to be killed. The sacrifice is to give a new life
to the animal. Sometimes the animal is given a new animal life after being
killed in the sacrifice, and sometimes the animal is promoted immediately to
the human form of life. But there are different opinions among the sages. Some
say that animal killing should always be avoided, and others say that for a
specific sacrifice it is good. All these different opinions on sacrificial activity
are now being clarified by the Lord Himself.
Bg
18.04
TEXT
4
TEXT
iNaêYa&
é*<au Mae Ta}a TYaaGae >arTaSataMa )
TYaaGaae ih PauåzVYaaga] i}aivDa" SaMPa[k-IiTaRTa" )) 4 ))
niçcayaà çåëu me tatra
tyäge bharata-sattama
tyägo hi puruña-vyäghra
tri-vidhaù samprakértitaù
niçcayam—certainly; çåëu—hear; me—from Me; tatra—there; tyäge—in the
matter of renunciation; bharata-sattama—O best of
the Bhäratas; tyägaù—renunciation; hi—certainly; puruña-vyäghra—O
tiger among human beings; tri-vidhaù—three kinds;
samprakértitaù—is declared.
TRANSLATION
O best of the Bhäratas, hear from Me now about renunciation. O
tiger among men, there are three kinds of renunciation declared in the
scriptures.
PURPORT
Although there are differences of opinion about renunciation, here
the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëa, gives His judgment, which should
be taken as final. After all, the Vedas are
different laws given by the Lord. Here the Lord is personally present, and His
word should be taken as final. The Lord says that the process of renunciation
should be considered in terms of the modes of material nature in which they are
performed.
Bg 18.5
TEXT
5
TEXT
YajdaNaTaPa"k-MaR
Na TYaaJYa& k-aYaRMaev TaTa( )
Yajae daNa& TaPaêEv PaavNaaiNa MaNaqiz<aaMa( )) 5 ))
yajïa-däna-tapaù-karma
na tyäjyaà käryam eva tat
yajïo dänaà tapaç caiva
pävanäni manéñiëäm
yajïa—sacrifice; däna—charity; tapaù—penance;
karma—activities; na—never;
tyäjyam—to be given up; käryam—must
be done; eva—certainly; tat—that;
yajïaù—sacrifice; dänam—charity;
tapaù—penance; ca—also;
eva—certainly; pävanäni—purifying;
manéñiëäm—even of the great souls.
TRANSLATION
Acts of sacrifice, charity and penance are not to be given up but
should be performed. Indeed, sacrifice, charity and penance purify even the
great souls.
PURPORT
The yogés should perform acts for
the advancement of human society. There are many purificatory processes for
advancing a human being to spiritual life. The marriage ceremony, for example,
is considered to be one of these sacrifices. It is called viväha-yajïa. Should a sannyäsé,
who is in the renounced order of life and who has given up his family
relations, encourage the marriage ceremony? The Lord says here that any
sacrifice which is meant for human welfare should never be given up. Viväha-yajïa, the marriage ceremony, is meant to
regulate the human mind to become peaceful for spiritual advancement. For most
men, this viväha-yajïa should be encouraged even
by persons in the renounced order of life. Sannyasés should
never associate with women, but that does not mean that one who is in the lower
stages of life, a young man, should not accept a wife in the marriage ceremony.
All prescribed sacrifices are meant for achieving the Supreme Lord. Therefore,
in the lower stages, they should not be given up. Similarly, charity is for the
purification of the heart. If charity is given to suitable persons, as
described previously, it leads one to advanced spiritual life.
Bg 18.6
TEXT
6
TEXT
WTaaNYaiPa Tau
k-MaaRi<a Sa®& TYa¤-a f-l/aiNa c )
k-TaRVYaaNaqiTa Mae PaaQaR iNaiêTa& MaTaMautaMaMa( )) 6 ))
etäny api tu karmäëi
saìgaà tyaktvä phaläni ca
kartavyänéti me pärtha
niçcitaà matam uttamam
etäni—all this; api—certainly; tu—must; karmäëi—activities; saìgam—association;
tyaktvä—renouncing; phaläni—results;
ca—also; kartavyäni—as
duty; iti—thus; me—My; pärtha—O son of Påthä; niçcitam—definite;
matam—opinion; uttamam—the
best.
TRANSLATION
All these activities should be performed without any expectation
of result. They should be performed as a matter of duty, O son of Påthä. That
is My final opinion.
PURPORT
Although all sacrifices are purifying, one should not expect any
result by such performances. In other words, all sacrifices which are meant for
material advancement in life should be given up, but sacrifices that purify
one’s existence and elevate one to the spiritual plane should not be stopped.
Everything that leads to Kåñëa consciousness must be encouraged. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam also it is said that any activity
which leads to devotional service to the Lord should be accepted. That is the
highest criterion of religion. A devotee of the Lord should accept any kind of
work, sacrifice, or charity which will help him in the discharge of devotional
service to the Lord
Bg 18.7
TEXT
7
TEXT
iNaYaTaSYa Tau
SaNNYaaSa" k-MaR<aae NaaePaPaÛTae )
MaaehataSYa PairTYaaGaSTaaMaSa" Pairk-IiTaRTa" )) 7 ))
niyatasya tu sannyäsaù
karmaëo nopapadyate
mohät tasya parityägas
tämasaù parikértitaù
niyatasya—prescribed
duties; tu—but; sannyäsaù—renunciation;
karmaëaù—activities; na—never;
upapadyate—is deserved; mohät—by
illusion; tasya—of which; parityägaù—renunciation;
tämasaù—in the mode of ignorance; parikértitaù—declared.
TRANSLATION
Prescribed duties should never be renounced. If, by illusion, one
gives up his prescribed duties, such renunciation is said to be in the mode of
ignorance.
PURPORT
Work for material satisfaction must be given up, but activities
which promote one to spiritual activity, like cooking for the Supreme Lord and
offering the food to the Lord and then accepting the food, are recommended. It
is said that a person in the renounced order of life should not cook for
himself. Cooking for oneself is prohibited, but cooking for the Supreme Lord is
not prohibited. Similarly, a sannyäsé may perform
a marriage ceremony to help his disciple in the advancement of Kåñëa
consciousness. If one renounces such activities, it is to be understood that he
is acting in the mode of darkness.
Bg 18.8
TEXT
8
TEXT
du"%iMaTYaev
YaTk-MaR k-aYa©e-Xa>aYaatYaJaeTa( )
Sa k*-Tva raJaSa& TYaaGa& NaEv TYaaGaf-l&/ l/>aeTa( )) 8 ))
duùkham ity eva yat karma
käya-kleça-bhayät tyajet
sa kåtvä räjasaà tyägaà
naiva tyäga-phalaà labhet
duùkham—unhappy; iti—thus; eva—certainly; yat—that which; karma—work;
käya—body; kleça—troublesome;
bhayät—out of; tyajet—fear;
saù—that; kåtvä—after
doing; räjasam—in the mode of passion; tyägam—renunciation; na eva—certainly not; tyäga—renounced;
phalam—results; labhet—gain.
TRANSLATION
Anyone who gives up prescribed duties as troublesome, or out of
fear, is said to be in the mode of passion. Such action never leads to the
elevation of renunciation.
PURPORT
One who is in Kåñëa consciousness should not give up earning money
out of fear that he is performing fruitive activities. If by working one can
engage his money in Kåñëa consciousness, or if by rising early in the morning
one can advance his transcendental Kåñëa consciousness, one should not desist
out of fear or because such activities are considered troublesome. Such
renunciation is in the mode of passion. The result of passionate work is always
miserable. Even if a person renounces work in that spirit, he never gets the
result of renunciation.
Bg 18.9
TEXT
9
TEXT
k-aYaRiMaTYaev
YaTk-MaR iNaYaTa& i§-YaTae_JauRNa )
Sa®& TYa¤-a f-l&/ cEv Sa TYaaGa" Saaitvk-ae MaTa" )) 9 ))
käryam ity eva yat karma
niyataà kriyate ’rjuna
saìgaà tyaktvä phalaà caiva
sa tyägaù sättviko mataù
käryam—must be
done; iti—thus; eva—thus;
yat—that which; karma—work;
niyatam—prescribed; kriyate—performed;
arjuna—O Arjuna; saìgam—association;
tyaktvä—giving up; phalam—result;
ca—also; eva—certainly;
saù—that; tyägaù—renunciation;
sättvikaù—in the mode of goodness; mataù—in My opinion.
TRANSLATION
But he who performs his prescribed duty only because it ought to
be done, and renounces all attachment to the fruit—his renunciation is of the
nature of goodness, O Arjuna.
PURPORT
Prescribed duties must be performed with this mentality. One
should act without attachment for the result; he should be disassociated from
the modes of work. A man working in Kåñëa consciousness in a factory does not
associate himself with the work of the factory, nor with the workers of the
factory. He simply works for Kåñëa. And when he gives up the result for Kåñëa,
he is acting transcendentally.
Bg
18.10
TEXT
10
TEXT
Na
Üeíyku-Xal&/ k-MaR ku-Xale/ NaaNauzÂTae )
TYaaGaq SatvSaMaaivíae MaeDaavq i^àSa&XaYa" )) 10 ))
na dveñöy akuçalaà karma
kuçale nänuñajjate
tyägé sattva-samäviñöo
medhävé chinna-saàçayaù
na—never; dveñöi—hates; akuçalam—inauspicious;
karma—work; kuçale—in
auspicious; na—nor; anuñajjate—becomes
attached; tyägé—the renouncer; sattva—goodness; samäviñöaù—absorbed
in; medhävé—intelligent; chinna—cut
up; saàçayaù—all doubts.
TRANSLATION
Those who are situated in the mode of goodness, who neither hate
inauspicious work nor are attached to auspicious work, have no doubts about
work.
PURPORT
It is said in Bhagavad-gétä that one
can never give up work at any time. Therefore he who works for Kåñëa and does
not enjoy the fruitive results, who offers everything to Kåñëa, is actually a renouncer.
There are many members of the International Society for Krishna Consciousness
who work very hard in their office or in the factory or some other place, and
whatever they earn they give to the Society. Such highly elevated souls are
actually sannyäsés and are situated in the
renounced order of life. It is clearly outlined here how to renounce the fruits
of work and for what purpose fruits should be renounced.
Bg
18.11
TEXT
11
TEXT
Na ih
deh>a*Taa XaKYa& TYa¢u-& k-MaaR<YaXaezTa" )
YaSTau k-MaRf-l/TYaaGaq Sa TYaaGaqTYai>aDaqYaTae )) 11 ))
na hi deha-bhåtä çakyaà
tyaktuà karmäëy açeñataù
yas tu karma-phala-tyägé
sa tyägéty abhidhéyate
na—never; hi—certainly; deha-bhåtä—of
the embodied; çakyam—possible; tyaktum—to renounce; karmäëi—activities
of; açeñataù—altogether; yaù
tu—anyone who; karma—work; phala—result; tyägé—renouncer;
saù—he; tyägé—the
renouncer; iti—thus; abhidhéyate—it
is said.
TRANSLATION
It is indeed impossible for an embodied being to give up all
activities. Therefore it is said that he who renounces the fruits of action is
one who has truly renounced.
PURPORT
A person in Kåñëa consciousness acting in knowledge of his
relationship with Kåñëa is always liberated. Therefore he does not have to
enjoy or suffer the results of his acts after death.
Bg
18.12
TEXT
12
TEXT
AiNaíiMaí&
iMaé[& c i}aivDa& k-MaR<a" f-l/Ma( )
>avTYaTYaaiGaNaa& Pa[eTYa Na Tau SaNNYaaiSaNaa& KvicTa( )) 12 ))
aniñöam iñöaà miçraà ca
tri-vidhaà karmaëaù phalam
bhavaty atyäginäà pretya
na tu sannyäsinäà kvacit
aniñöam—leading to
hell; iñöam—leading to heaven; miçram ca—or mixture; tri-vidham—three
kinds; karmaëaù—work; phalam—result;
bhavati—becomes; atyäginäm—of
the renouncer; pretya—after death; na tu—but not; sannyäsinäm—of
the renounced order; kvacit—at any time.
TRANSLATION
For one who is not renounced, the threefold fruits of
action—desirable, undesirable and mixed—accrue after death. But those who are
in the renounced order of life have no such results to suffer or enjoy.
PURPORT
A person in Kåñëa consciousness or in the mode of goodness does
not hate anyone or anything which troubles his body. He does work in the proper
place and at the proper time without fearing the troublesome effects of his
duty. Such a person situated in transcendence should be understood to be most
intelligent and beyond all doubts in his activities.
Bg
18.13, Bg 18.14, Bg 18.13-14
TEXTS
13–14
TEXT
PaÄETaaiNa
Mahabahae k-ar<aaiNa iNabaeDa Mae )
Saa&:Yae k*-TaaNTae Pa[ae¢-aiNa iSaÖYae SavRk-MaR<aaMa( )) 13 ))
AiDaïaNa& TaQaa k-TaaR k-r<a& c Pa*QaiGvDaMa( )
ivivDaaê Pa*QaKceía dEv& cEva}a PaÄMaMa( )) 14 ))
païcaitäni mahä-bäho
käraëäni nibodha me
säìkhye kåtänte proktäni
siddhaye sarva-karmaëäm
adhiñöhänaà tathä kartä
karaëaà ca påthag-vidham
vividhäç ca påthak ceñöä
daivaà caivätra païcamam
païca—five; etäni—all these; mahä-bäho—O
mighty-armed one; käraëäni—cause; nibodha—just understand; me—from
Me; säìkhye—in the Vedas;
kåtänte—after performance; proktäni—said; siddhaye—perfection; sarva—all;
karmaëäm—actuated; adhiñöhänam—place;
tathä—also; kartä—worker;
karaëam ca—and instruments; påthak-vidham—different kinds; vividhäù
ca—varieties; påthak—separately; ceñöäù—endeavor; daivam—the
Supreme; ca—also; eva—certainly;
atra—here; païcamam—five.
TRANSLATION
O mighty-armed Arjuna, learn from Me of the five factors which
bring about the accomplishment of all action. These are declared in säìkhya
philosophy to be the place of action, the performer, the senses, the endeavor,
and ultimately the Supersoul.
PURPORT
A question may be raised that since any activity performed must
have some reaction, how is it that the person in Kåñëa consciousness does not
suffer or enjoy the reactions of work? The Lord is citing Vedänta philosophy to show how this is possible. He
says that there are five causes for all activities and for success in all
activity, and one should know these five causes. Säìkhya
means the stalk of knowledge, and Vedänta is
the final stalk of knowledge accepted by all leading äcäryas.
Even Çaìkara accepts Vedänta-sütra as
such. Therefore such authority should be consulted.
The ultimate will is invested in the Supersoul, as it is stated in the Gétä, “sarvasya cähaà hådi.” He is engaging everyone in certain activities. Acts done under His direction from within yield no reaction, either in this life or in the life after death.
The instruments of action are the senses, and by senses the soul acts in various ways, and for each and every action there is a different endeavor. But all one’s activities depend on the will of the Supersoul, who is seated within the heart as a friend. The Supreme Lord is the super cause. Under these circumstances, he who is acting in Kåñëa consciousness under the direction of the Supersoul situated within the heart is naturally not bound by any activity. Those in complete Kåñëa consciousness are not ultimately responsible for their actions. Everything is dependant on the supreme will, the Supersoul, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Bg
18.15
TEXT
15
TEXT
Xarqrvax(MaNaaei>aYaRTk-MaR
Pa[ar>aTae Nar" )
NYaaYYa& va ivParqTa& va PaÄETae TaSYa heTav" )) 15 ))
çaréra-väì-manobhir yat
karma prärabhate naraù
nyäyyaà vä viparétaà vä
païcaite tasya hetavaù
çaréra—body; väk—speech; manobhiù—by
the mind; yat—anything; karma—work;
prärabhate—begins; naraù—a
person; nyäyyam—right; vä—or;
viparétam—the opposite; vä—or; païca—five; ete—all
these; tasya—its; hetavaù—causes.
TRANSLATION
Whatever right or wrong action a man performs by body, mind or
speech is caused by these five factors.
PURPORT
The words “right” and “wrong” are very significant in this verse.
Right work is work done in terms of the prescribed directions in the
scriptures, and wrong work is work done against the principles of the
scriptural injunctions. But whatever is done requires these five factors for
its complete performance.
Bg
18.16
TEXT
16
TEXT
Ta}aEv&
SaiTa k-TaaRrMaaTMaaNa& ke-vl&/ Tau Ya" )
PaXYaTYak*-TabuiÖTvaà Sa PaXYaiTa duMaRiTa" )) 16 ))
tatraivaà sati kartäram
ätmänaà kevalaà tu yaù
paçyaty akåta-buddhitvän
na sa paçyati durmatiù
tatra—there; evam—certainly; sati—being
thus; kartäram—of the worker; ätmänam—the soul; kevalam—only;
tu—but; yaù—anyone;
paçyati—sees; akåta-buddhitvät—due
to unintelligence; na—never; saù—he; paçyati—sees; durmatiù—foolish.
TRANSLATION
Therefore one who thinks himself the only doer, not considering the
five factors, is certainly not very intelligent and cannot see things as they
are.
PURPORT
A foolish person cannot understand that the Supersoul is sitting
as a friend within and conducting his actions. Although the material causes are
the place, the worker, the endeavor and the senses, the final cause is the
Supreme, the Personality of Godhead. Therefore, one should see not only the
four material causes, but the supreme efficient cause as well. One who does not
see the Supreme thinks himself to be the instrument.
Bg
18.17
TEXT
17
TEXT
YaSYa
Naah&k*/=Taae >aavae buiÖYaRSYa Na il/PYaTae )
hTvaiPa Sa wMaamçaek-aà hiNTa Na iNabDYaTae )) 17 ))
yasya nähaìkåto bhävo
buddhir yasya na lipyate
hatväpi sa imäû lokän
na hanti na nibadhyate
yasya—of one who; na—never; ahaìkåtaù—false
ego; bhävaù—nature; buddhiù—intelligence;
yasya—one who; na—never;
lipyate—is attached; hatvä
api—even killing; saù—he; imän—this; lokän—world; na—never; hanti—kills; na—never; nibadhyate—becomes
entangled.
TRANSLATION
One who is not motivated by false ego, whose intelligence is not
entangled, though he kills men in this world, is not the slayer. Nor is he
bound by his actions.
PURPORT
In this verse the Lord informs Arjuna that the desire not to fight
arises from false ego. Arjuna thought himself to be the doer of action, but he
did not consider the Supreme sanction within and without. If one does not know
that a super sanction is there, why should he act? But one who knows the
instrument of work, himself as the worker, and the Supreme Lord as the supreme
sanctioner, is perfect in doing everything. Such a person is never in illusion.
Personal activity and responsibility arise from false ego and godlessness, or a
lack of Kåñëa consciousness. Anyone who is acting in Kåñëa consciousness under
the direction of the Supersoul or the Supreme Personality of Godhead, even
though killing, does not kill. Nor is he ever affected with the reaction of
such killing. When a soldier kills under the command of a superior officer, he
is not subject to be judged. But if a soldier kills on his own personal
account, then he is certainly judged by a court of law.
Bg
18.18
TEXT
18
TEXT
jaNa&
jeYa& PairjaTaa i}aivDaa k-MaRcaedNaa )
k-r<a& k-MaR k-TaeRiTa i}aivDa" k-MaRSa°h" )) 18 ))
jïänaà jïeyaà parijïätä
tri-vidhä karma-codanä
karaëaà karma karteti
tri-vidhaù karma-saìgrahaù
jïänam—knowledge; jïeyam—objective; parijïätä—the
knower; tri-vidhä—three kinds; karma—work; codanä—impetus;
karaëam—the senses; karma—work;
kartä—the doer; iti—thus;
tri-vidhaù—three kinds; karma—work;
saìgrahaù—accumulation.
TRANSLATION
Knowledge, the object of knowledge and the knower are the three
factors which motivate action; the senses, the work and the doer comprise the
threefold basis of action.
PURPORT
There are three kinds of impetus for daily work: knowledge, the
object of knowledge and the knower. The instruments of work, the work itself
and the worker are called the constituents of work. Any work done by any human
being has these elements. Before one acts, there is some impetus, which is
called inspiration. Any solution arrived at before work is actualized is a
subtle form of work. Then work takes the form of action. First one has to
undergo the psychological processes of thinking, feeling and willing, and that
is called impetus. Actually the faith to perform acts is called knowledge. The
inspiration to work is the same if it comes from the scripture or from the
instruction of the spiritual master. When the inspiration is there and the
worker is there, then actual activity takes place by the help of the senses.
The mind is the center of all senses, and the object is work itself. These are
the different phases of work as described in Bhagavad-gétä.
The sum total of all activities is called accumulation of work.
Bg
18.19
TEXT
19
TEXT
jaNa& k-MaR
c k-TaaR c i}aDaEv Gau<a>aedTa" )
Pa[aeCYaTae Gau<aSa&:YaaNae YaQaavC^*<au TaaNYaiPa )) 19 ))
jïänaà karma ca kartä ca
tridhaiva guëa-bhedataù
procyate guëa-saìkhyäne
yathävac chåëu täny api
jïänam—knowledge; karma—work; ca—also; kartä—worker; ca—also; tridhä—three kinds; eva—certainly;
guëa-bhedataù—in terms of different modes of
material nature; procyate—is said; guëa-saìkhyäne—in terms of different modes; yathävat—as they act; çåëu—hear;
täni—all of them; api—also.
TRANSLATION
In accordance with the three modes of material nature, there are
three kinds of knowledge, action, and performers of action. Listen as I
describe them.
PURPORT
In the Fourteenth Chapter the three divisions of the modes of
material nature were elaborately described. In that chapter it was said that
the mode of goodness is illuminating, the mode of passion materialistic, and
the mode of ignorance conducive to laziness and indolence. All the modes of
material nature are binding; they are not sources of liberation. Even in the mode
of goodness one is conditioned. In the Seventeenth Chapter, the different types
of worship by different types of men in different modes of material nature were
described. In this verse, the Lord wishes to speak about the different types of
knowledge, workers, and work itself according to the three material modes.
Bg
18.20
TEXT
20
TEXT
SavR>aUTaezu
YaeNaEk&- >aavMaVYaYaMaq+aTae )
Aiv>a¢&- iv>a¢e-zu TaJjaNa& iviÖ Saaitvk-Ma( )) 20 ))
sarva-bhüteñu yenaikaà
bhävam avyayam ékñate
avibhaktaà vibhakteñu
taj jïänaà viddhi sättvikam
sarva-bhüteñu—in all
living entities; yena—by whom; ekam—one; bhävam—situation;
avyayam—imperishable; ékñate—does
see; avibhaktam—undivided; vibhakteñu—in the numberless divided; tat—that; jïänam—knowledge;
viddhi—knows; sättvikam—in
the mode of goodness.
TRANSLATION
That knowledge by which one undivided spiritual nature is seen in
all existences, undivided in the divided, is knowledge in the mode of goodness.
PURPORT
A person who sees one spirit soul in every living being, whether a
demigod, human being, animal, bird, beast, aquatic or plant, possesses
knowledge in the mode of goodness. In all living entities, one spirit soul is
there, although they have different bodies in terms of their previous work. As
described in the Seventh Chapter, the manifestation of the living force in
every body is due to the superior nature of the Supreme Lord. Thus to see that
one superior nature, that living force, in every body is to see in the mode of
goodness. That living energy is imperishable, although the bodies are
perishable. The difference is perceived in terms of the body because there are
many forms of material existence in conditional life; therefore they appear to
be divided. Such impersonal knowledge finally leads to self-realization.
Bg 18.21
TEXT
21
TEXT
Pa*Qa¤e-Na Tau
YaJjaNa& NaaNaa>aavaNPa*QaiGvDaaNa( )
veita SaveRzu >aUTaezu TaJjaNa& iviÖ raJaSaMa( )) 21 ))
påthaktvena tu yaj jïänaà
nänä-bhävän påthag-vidhän
vetti sarveñu bhüteñu
taj jïänaà viddhi räjasam
påthaktvena—because of
division; tu—but; yat
jïänam—which knowledge; nänä-bhävän—multifarious
situations; påthak-vidhän—differently; vetti—one who knows; sarveñu—in
all; bhüteñu—living entities; tat jïänam—that knowledge; viddhi—must
be known; räjasam—in terms of passion.
TRANSLATION
That knowledge by which a different type of living entity is seen
to be dwelling in different bodies is knowledge in the mode of passion.
PURPORT
The concept that the material body is the living entity and that
with the destruction of the body the consciousness is also destroyed is called
knowledge in the mode of passion. According to that knowledge, bodies differ
from one another because of the development of different types of
consciousness, otherwise there is no separate soul which manifests consciousness.
The body is itself the soul, and there is no separate soul beyond this body.
According to such knowledge, consciousness is temporary. Or else there are no
individual souls, but there is an all-pervading soul, which is full of
knowledge, and this body is a manifestation of temporary ignorance. Or beyond
this body there is no special individual or Supreme Soul. All such conceptions
are considered products of the mode of passion.
Bg
18.22
TEXT
22
TEXT
Yatau
k*-Tòvdek-iSMaNk-aYaeR Sa¢-MahETauk-Ma( )
ATatvaQaRvdLPa& c TataaMaSaMaudaôTaMa( )) 22 ))
yat tu kåtsna-vad ekasmin
kärye saktam ahaitukam
atattvärtha-vad alpaà ca
tat tämasam udähåtam
yat—that which; tu—but; kåtsnavat—all in
all; ekasmin—in one; kärye—work;
saktam—attached; ahaitukam—without
cause; atattva-arthavat—without reality; alpam ca—and very meager; tat—that;
tämasam—in the mode of darkness; udähåtam—is spoken.
TRANSLATION
And that knowledge by which one is attached to one kind of work as
the all in all, without knowledge of the truth, and which is very meager, is
said to be in the mode of darkness.
PURPORT
The “knowledge” of the common man is always in the mode of
darkness or ignorance because every living entity in conditional life is born
into the mode of ignorance. One who does not develop knowledge through the
authorities or scriptural injunctions has knowledge that is limited to the
body. He is not concerned about acting in terms of the directions of scripture.
For him God is money, and knowledge means the satisfaction of bodily demands.
Such knowledge has no connection with the Absolute Truth. It is more or less
like the knowledge of the ordinary animals: the knowledge of eating, sleeping,
defending and mating. Such knowledge is described here as the product of the
mode of darkness. In other words, knowledge concerning the spirit soul beyond
this body is called knowledge in the mode of goodness, and knowledge producing
many theories and doctrines by dint of mundane logic and mental speculation is
the product of the mode of passion, and knowledge concerned with only keeping
the body comfortable is said to be in the mode of ignorance.
Bg
18.23
TEXT
23
TEXT
iNaYaTa&
Sa®rihTaMaraGaÜezTa" k*-TaMa( )
Af-l/Pa[ePSauNaa k-MaR YataTSaaitvk-MauCYaTae )) 23 ))
niyataà saìga-rahitam
aräga-dveñataù kåtam
aphala-prepsunä karma
yat tat sättvikam ucyate
niyatam—regulative; saìga-rahitam—without attachment; aräga-dveñataù—without love or hatred; kåtam—done; aphala-prepsunä—without
fruitive result; karma—acts; yat—that which; tat—that;
sättvikam—in the mode of goodness; ucyate—is called.
TRANSLATION
As for actions, that action in accordance with duty, which is
performed without attachment, without love or hate, by one who has renounced
fruitive results, is called action in the mode of goodness.
PURPORT
Regulated occupational duties, as prescribed in the scriptures in
terms of the different orders and divisions of society, performed without
attachment or proprietary rights and therefore without any love or hatred and
performed in Kåñëa consciousness for the satisfaction of the Supreme, without
self-satisfaction or self-gratification, are called actions in the mode of
goodness.
Bg
18.24
TEXT
24
TEXT
Yatau
k-aMaePSauNaa k-MaR Saahªare<a va PauNa" )
i§-YaTae bhul/aYaaSa& Tad]aJaSaMaudaôTaMa( )) 24 ))
yat tu kämepsunä karma
sähaìkäreëa vä punaù
kriyate bahuläyäsaà
tad räjasam udähåtam
yat—that which;
tu—but; käma-épsunä—with
fruitive result; karma—work; sähaìkäreëa—with ego; vä—or;
punaù—again; kriyate—performed;
bahula-äyäsam—with great labor; tat—that; räjasam—in the
mode of passion; udähåtam—is said to be.
TRANSLATION
But action performed with great effort by one seeking to gratify
his desires, and which is enacted from a sense of false ego, is called action
in the mode of passion.
Bg
18.25
TEXT
25
TEXT
ANaubNDa&
+aYa& ih&SaaMaNaPae+Ya c PaaEåzMa( )
Maaehadar>YaTae k-MaR YatataaMaSaMauCYaTae )) 25 ))
anubandhaà kñayaà hiàsäm
anapekñya ca pauruñam
mohäd ärabhyate karma
yat tat tämasam ucyate
anubandham—future
bondage; kñayam—distracted; hiàsäm—violence; anapekñya—without
consideration of consequences; ca—also; pauruñam—distressing to others; mohät—by
illusion; ärabhyate—begun; karma—work; yat—that; tat—which; tämasam—in the
mode of ignorance; ucyate—is said to be.
TRANSLATION
And that action performed in ignorance and delusion without
consideration of future bondage or consequences, which inflicts injury and is
impractical, is said to be action in the mode of ignorance.
PURPORT
One has to give account of one’s actions to the state or to the
agents of the Supreme Lord called the Yamadütas. Irresponsible work is
distraction because it destroys the regulative principles of scriptural
injunction. It is often based on violence and is distressing to other living
entities. Such irresponsible work is carried out in the light of one’s personal
experience. This is called illusion. And all such illusory work is a product of
the mode of ignorance.
Bg
18.26
TEXT
26
TEXT
Mau¢-Sa®ae_Nah&vadq
Da*TYauTSaahSaMaiNvTa" )
iSaÖyiSaÖyaeiNaRivRk-ar" k-TaaR Saaitvk- oCYaTae )) 26 ))
mukta-saìgo ’nahaà-vädé
dhåty-utsäha-samanvitaù
siddhy-asiddhyor nirvikäraù
kartä sättvika ucyate
mukta-saìgaù—liberated
from all material association; anaham-vädé—without
false ego; dhåti-utsäha—with great enthusiasm; samanvitaù—qualified in that way; siddhi—perfection; asiddhyoù—failure;
nirvikäraù—without change; kartä—worker; sättvikaù—in
the mode of goodness; ucyate—is said to be.
TRANSLATION
The worker who is free from all material attachments and false
ego, who is enthusiastic and resolute and who is indifferent to success or
failure, is a worker in the mode of goodness.
PURPORT
A person in Kåñëa consciousness is always transcendental to the
material modes of nature. He has no expectations for the result of the work
entrusted to him because he is above false ego and pride. Still, he is always
enthusiastic till the completion of such work. He does not worry about the
distress undertaken; he is always enthusiastic. He does not care for success or
failure; he is equal both in distress or happiness. Such a worker is situated in
the mode of goodness.
Bg
18.27
TEXT
27
TEXT
raGaq
k-MaRf-l/Pa[ePSaulu/RBDaae ih&SaaTMak-ae_éuic" )
hzRXaaek-aiNvTa" k-TaaR raJaSa" Pairk-IiTaRTa" )) 27 ))
rägé karma-phala-prepsur
lubdho hiàsätmako ’çuciù
harña-çokänvitaù kartä
räjasaù parikértitaù
rägé—very much
attached; karma-phala—to the fruit of the work; prepsuù—desiring; lubdhaù—greedy;
hiàsä-ätmakaù—and always envious; açuciù—unclean; harña-çoka-anvitaù—complicated,
with joy and sorrow; kartä—such a worker; räjasaù—in the mode of passion; parikértitaù—is
declared.
TRANSLATION
But that worker who is attached to the fruits of his labor and who
passionately wants to enjoy them, who is greedy, envious and impure and moved
by happiness and distress, is a worker in the mode of passion.
PURPORT
A person is too much attached to certain kind of work or to the
result because he has too much attachment for materialism or hearth and home,
wife and children. Such a person has no desire for higher elevation of life. He
is simply concerned with making this world as materially comfortable as
possible. He is generally very greedy, and he thinks that anything attained by
him is permanent and never to be lost. Such a person is envious of others and
prepared to do anything wrong for sense gratification. Therefore such a person
is unclean, and he does not care whether his earning is pure or impure. He is
very happy if his work is successful and very much distressed when his work is
not successful. Such is a man in the mode of passion.
Bg
18.28
TEXT
28
TEXT
AYau¢-"
Pa[ak*-Ta" STaBDa" Xa#=ae NaEZk*-iTak-ae_l/Sa" )
ivzadq dqgaRSaU}aq c k-TaaR TaaMaSa oCYaTae )) 28 ))
ayuktaù präkåtaù stabdhaù
çaöho naiñkåtiko ’lasaù
viñädé dérgha-sütré ca
kartä tämasa ucyate
ayuktaù—without
reference to the scriptural injunctions; präkåtaù—materialistic;
stabdhaù—obstinate; çaöhaù—deceitful;
naiñkåtikaù—expert in insulting others; alasaù—lazy; viñädé—morose;
dérgha-sütré—procrastinating; ca—also; kartä—worker; tämasaù—in the mode of ignorance; ucyate—is said to be.
TRANSLATION
And that worker who is always engaged in work against the
injunction of the scripture, who is materialistic, obstinate, cheating and
expert in insulting others, who is lazy, always morose and procrastinating, is
a worker in the mode of ignorance.
PURPORT
In the scriptural injunctions we find what sort of work should be
performed and what sort of work should not be performed. Those who do not care
for those injunctions engage in work not to be done, and such persons are
generally materialistic. They work according to the modes of nature, not
according to the injunctions of the scripture. Such workers are not very
gentle, and generally they are always cunning and expert in insulting others.
They are very lazy; even though they have some duty, they do not do it
properly, and they put it aside to be done later on. Therefore they appear to
be morose. They procrastinate; anything which can be done in an hour they drag
on for years. Such workers are situated in the mode of ignorance.
Bg
18.29
TEXT
29
TEXT
buÖe>aeRd&
Da*TaeêEv Gau<aTaiñivDa& é*<au )
Pa[aeCYaMaaNaMaXaeze<a Pa*Qa¤e-Na DaNaÅYa )) 29 ))
buddher bhedaà dhåteç caiva
guëatas tri-vidhaà çåëu
procyamänam açeñeëa
påthaktvena dhanaïjaya
buddheù—of
intelligence; bhedam—differences; dhåteù—of steadiness; ca—also;
eva—certainly; guëataù—by
the modes of material nature; tri-vidham—the
three kinds of; çåëu—just hear; procyamänam—as described by Me; açeñeëa—in
detail; påthaktvena—differently; dhanaïjaya—O winner of wealth.
TRANSLATION
Now, O winner of wealth, please listen as I tell you in detail of
the three kinds of understanding and determination according to the three modes
of nature.
PURPORT
Now after explaining knowledge, the object of knowledge and the
knower, in three different divisions according to modes of material nature, the
Lord is explaining the intelligence and determination of the worker in the same
way.
Bg
18.30
TEXT
30
TEXT
Pa[v*ita& c
iNav*ita& c k-aYaaRk-aYaeR >aYaa>aYae )
bNDa& Maae+a& c Yaa veita buiÖ" Saa PaaQaR Saaitvk-I )) 30 ))
pravåttià ca nivåttià ca
käryäkärye bhayäbhaye
bandhaà mokñaà ca yä vetti
buddhiù sä pärtha sättviké
pravåttim—deserving; ca—also; nivåttim—not
deserving; kärya—work; akärye—reaction;
bhaya—fearful; abhaye—fearlessness;
bandham—obligation; mokñam
ca—and liberation; yä—that which; vetti—knows; buddhiù—understanding;
sä—that; pärtha—O
son of Påthä; sättviké—in the mode of goodness.
TRANSLATION
O son of Påthä, that understanding by which one knows what ought
to be done and what ought not to be done, what is to be feared and what is not
to be feared, what is binding and what is liberating, that understanding is
established in the mode of goodness.
PURPORT
Actions which are performed in terms of the directions of the
scriptures are called pravåtti, or actions that
deserve to be performed, and actions which are not so directed are not to be
performed. One who does not know the scriptural directions becomes entangled in
the actions and reactions of work. Understanding which discriminates by
intelligence is situated in the mode of goodness.
Bg 18.31
TEXT
31
TEXT
YaYaa
DaMaRMaDaMa| c k-aYa| cak-aYaRMaev c )
AYaQaavTPa[JaaNaaiTa buiÖ" Saa PaaQaR raJaSaq )) 31 ))
yayä dharmam adharmaà ca
käryaà cäkäryam eva ca
ayathävat prajänäti
buddhiù sä pärtha räjasé
yayä—by which; dharmam—principles of religion; adharmam
ca—and irreligion; käryam—work; ca—also; akäryam—what
ought not to be done; eva—certainly; ca—also; ayathävat—not
perfectly; prajänati—knows; buddhiù—intelligence; sä—that;
pärtha—O son of Påthä; räjasé—in
the mode of passion.
TRANSLATION
And that understanding which cannot distinguish between the
religious way of life and the irreligious, between action that should be done
and action that should not be done, that imperfect understanding, O son of
Påthä, is in the mode of passion.
PURPORT
Intelligence in the mode of passion is always working perversely.
It accepts religions which are not actually religions and rejects actual
religion. All views and activities are misguided. Men of passionate
intelligence understand a great soul to be a common man and accept a common man
as a great soul. They think truth to be untruth and accept untruth as truth. In
all activities they simply take the wrong path; therefore their intelligence is
in the mode of passion.
Bg
18.32
TEXT
32
TEXT
ADaMa|
DaMaRiMaiTa Yaa MaNYaTae TaMaSaav*Taa )
SavaRQaaRiNvParqTaa&ê buiÖ" Saa PaaQaR TaaMaSaq )) 32 ))
adharmaà dharmam iti yä
manyate tamasävåtä
sarvärthän viparétäàç ca
buddhiù sä pärtha tämasé
adharmam—irreligion; dharmam—religion; iti—thus;
yä—which; manyate—thinks;
tamasä—by illusion; ävåtä—covered;
sarva-arthän—all things; viparétän—the
wrong direction; ca—also; buddhiù—intelligence;
sa—that; pärtha—O
son of Påthä; tämasé—the mode of ignorance.
TRANSLATION
That understanding which considers irreligion to be religion and
religion to be irreligion, under the spell of illusion and darkness, and
strives always in the wrong direction, O Pärtha, is in the mode of ignorance.
Bg
18.33
TEXT
33
TEXT
Da*TYaa YaYaa
DaarYaTae MaNa"Pa[a<aeiNd]Yai§-Yaa" )
YaaeGaeNaaVYai>acair<Yaa Da*iTa" Saa PaaQaR Saaitvk-I )) 33 ))
dhåtyä yayä dhärayate
manaù-präëendriya-kriyäù
yogenävyabhicäriëyä
dhåtiù sä pärtha sättviké
dhåtyä—determination;
yayä—by which; dhärayate—is
sustained; manaù—mind; präëa—life;
indriya—senses; kriyäù—activities;
yogena—by yoga practice;
avyabhicäriëyä—without any break; dhåtiù—such determination; sä—that;
pärtha—O son of Påthä; sättviké—in
the mode of goodness.
TRANSLATION
O son of Påthä, that determination which is unbreakable, which is
sustained with steadfastness by yoga practice, and thus controls the mind,
life, and the acts of the senses, is in the mode of goodness.
PURPORT
Yoga is a means
to understand the Supreme Soul. One who is steadily fixed in the Supreme Soul
with determination, concentrating one’s mind, life and sensual activities on
the Supreme, engages in Kåñëa consciousness. That sort of determination is in
the mode of goodness. The word avyabhicäriëya is
very significant, for it refers to persons who are engaged in Kåñëa
consciousness and are never deviated by any other activity.
Bg
18.34
TEXT
34
TEXT
YaYaa Tau
DaMaRk-aMaaQaaRNDa*TYaa DaarYaTae_JauRNa )
Pa[Sa®eNa f-l/ak-a¿q Da*iTa" Saa PaaQaR raJaSaq )) 34 ))
yayä tu dharma-kämärthän
dhåtyä dhärayate ’rjuna
prasaìgena phaläkäìkñé
dhåtiù sä pärtha räjasé
yayä—by which; tu—but; dharma-käma-arthän—for
religiosity and economic development; dhåtyä—by
determination; dhärayate—in such terms; arjuna—O Arjuna; prasaìgena—for
that; phala-äkäìkñé—desiring fruitive result; dhåtiù—determination; sä—that;
pärtha—O son of Påthä; räjasé—in
the mode of passion.
TRANSLATION
And that determination by which one holds fast to fruitive result
in religion, economic development and sense gratification is of the nature of
passion, O Arjuna.
PURPORT
Any person who is always desirous of fruitive results in religious
or economic activities, whose only desire is sense gratification, and whose
mind, life and senses are thus engaged, is in the mode of passion.
Bg
18.35
TEXT
35
TEXT
YaYaa SvPan&
>aYa& Xaaek&- ivzad& MadMaev c )
Na ivMauÄiTa duMaeRDaa Da*iTa" Saa PaaQaR TaaMaSaq )) 35 ))
yayä svapnaà bhayaà çokaà
viñädaà madam eva ca
na vimuïcati durmedhä
dhåtiù sä pärtha tämasé
yayä—by which; svapnam—dream; bhayam—fearfulness;
çokam—lamentation; viñädam—moroseness;
madam—illusion; eva—certainly;
ca—also; na—never; vimuïcati—is liberated; durmedhäù—unintelligent;
dhåtiù—determination; sä—that;
pärtha—O son of Påthä; tämasé—in
the mode of ignorance.
TRANSLATION
And that determination which cannot go beyond dreaming,
fearfulness, lamentation, moroseness, and illusion—such unintelligent
determination is in the mode of darkness.
PURPORT
It should not be concluded that a person in the mode of goodness
does not dream. Here dream means too much sleep. Dream is always present;
either in the mode of goodness, passion or ignorance, dream is a natural
occurrence. But those who cannot avoid oversleeping, who cannot avoid the pride
of enjoying material objects and who are always dreaming of lording it over the
material world, whose life, mind, and senses are thus engaged, are considered
to be in the mode of ignorance.
Bg
18.36, Bg 18.37, Bg 18.36-37
TEXTS
36–37
TEXT
Sau%&
iTvdaNaq& i}aivDa& é*<au Mae >arTazR>a )
A>YaaSaad]MaTae Ya}a du"%aNTa& c iNaGaC^iTa )) 36 ))
YatadGa]e ivziMav Pair<aaMae_Ma*TaaePaMaMa( )
TaTSau%& Saaitvk&- Pa[ae¢-MaaTMabuiÖPa[SaadJaMa( )) 37 ))
sukhaà tv idänéà tri-vidhaà
çåëu me bharatarñabha
abhyäsäd ramate yatra
duùkhäntaà ca nigacchati
yat tad agre viñam iva
pariëäme ’måtopamam
tat sukhaà sättvikaà proktam
ätma-buddhi-prasäda-jam
sukham—happiness; tu—but; idäném—now; tri-vidham—three kinds; çåëu—hear;
me—from Me; bharatarñabha—O
best amongst the Bhäratas; abhyäsät—by practice; ramate—enjoyer; yatra—where;
duùkha—distress; antam—end;
ca—also; nigacchati—gains;
yat—that which; tat—that;
agre—in the beginning; viñam
iva—like poison; pariëäme—at the end; amåta—nectar; upamam—compared
to; tat—that; sukham—happiness;
sättvikam—in the mode of goodness; proktam—is said; ätma—self;
buddhi—intelligence; prasäda-jam—satisfactory.
TRANSLATION
O best of the Bhäratas, now please hear from Me about the three
kinds of happiness which the conditioned soul enjoys, and by which he sometimes
comes to the end of all distress. That which in the beginning may be just like
poison but at the end is just like nectar and which awakens one to
self-realization is said to be happiness in the mode of goodness.
PURPORT
A conditioned soul tries to enjoy material happiness again and
again. Thus he chews the chewed, but, sometimes, in the course of such
enjoyment, he becomes relieved from material entanglement by association with a
great soul. In other words, a conditioned soul is always engaged in some type
of sense gratification, but when he understands by good association that it is
only a repetition of the same thing, and he is awakened to his real Kåñëa
consciousness, he is sometimes relieved from such repetitive so-called
happiness.
In the pursuit of self-realization, one has to follow many rules and regulations to control the mind and the senses and to concentrate the mind on the Self. All these procedures are very difficult, bitter like poison, but if one is successful in following the regulations and comes to the transcendental position, he begins to drink real nectar, and he enjoys life.
Bg
18.38
TEXT
38
TEXT
ivzYaeiNd]YaSa&YaaeGaaÛtadGa]e_Ma*TaaePaMaMa(
)
Pair<aaMae ivziMav TaTSau%& raJaSa& SMa*TaMa( )) 38 ))
viñayendriya-saàyogäd
yat tad agre ’måtopamam
pariëäme viñam iva
tat sukhaà räjasaà småtam
viñaya—objects of
sense; indriya—senses; saàyogät—combination;
yat—that; tat—which;
agre—in the beginning; amåta-upamam—just
like nectar; pariëäme—at the end; viñam iva—like poison; tat—that;
sukham—happiness; räjasam—in
the mode of passion; småtam—is considered.
TRANSLATION
That happiness which is derived from contact of the senses with
their objects and which appears like nectar at first but poison at the end is
said to be of the nature of passion.
PURPORT
A young man and a young woman meet, and the senses drive the young
man to see her, to touch her and to have sexual intercourse. In the beginning
this may be very pleasing to the senses, but at the end, or after some time, it
becomes just like poison. They are separated or there is divorce, there is
lamentation, there is sorrow, etc. Such happiness is always in the mode of
passion. Happiness derived from a combination of the senses and the sense
objects is always a cause of distress and should be avoided by all means.
Bg
18.39
TEXT
39
TEXT
YadGa]e
caNaubNDae c Sau%& MaaehNaMaaTMaNa" )
iNad]al/SYaPa[MaadaeTQa& TataaMaSaMaudaôTaMa( )) 39 ))
yad agre cänubandhe ca
sukhaà mohanam ätmanaù
nidrälasya-pramädotthaà
tat tämasam udähåtam
yat—that which; agre—in the beginning; ca—also;
anubandhe—by binding; ca—also;
sukham—happiness; mohanam—illusion;
ätmanaù—of the self; nidrä—sleeping;
älasya—laziness; pramäda—illusion;
uttham—produced of; tat—that;
tämasam—in the mode of ignorance; udähåtam—is said to be.
TRANSLATION
And that happiness which is blind to self-realization, which is
delusion from beginning to end and which arises from sleep, laziness and
illusion is said to be of the nature of ignorance.
PURPORT
One who takes pleasure in laziness and in sleep is certainly in
the mode of darkness, and one who has no idea how to act and how not to act is
also in the mode of ignorance. For the person in the mode of ignorance,
everything is illusion. There is no happiness either in the beginning or the
end. For the person in the mode of passion there might be some kind of
ephemeral happiness in the beginning and at the end distress, but for the
person in the mode of ignorance there is only distress both in the beginning
and at the end.
Bg
18.40
TEXT
40
TEXT
Na TadiSTa
Pa*iQaVYaa& va idiv devezu va PauNa" )
Satv& Pa[k*-iTaJaEMauR¢&- Yadei>a"
SYaaiT}ai>aGauR<aE" )) 40 ))
na tad asti påthivyäà vä
divi deveñu vä punaù
sattvaà prakåti-jair muktaà
yad ebhiù syät tribhir guëaiù
na—not; tat—that; asti—there is; påthivyäm—within the universe; vä—or;
divi—in the higher planetary system; deveñu—amongst the demigods; vä—or;
punaù—again; sattvam—existence;
prakåti-jaiù—under the influence of material
nature; muktam—liberated; yat—that;
ebhiù—by this; syät—so
becomes; tribhiù—by three; guëaiù—modes of material nature.
TRANSLATION
There is no being existing, either here or among the demigods in
the higher planetary systems, which is freed from the three modes of material
nature.
PURPORT
The Lord here summarizes the total influence of the three modes of
material nature all over the universe.
Bg
18.41
TEXT
41
TEXT
b]aø<a+ai}aYaivXaa&
éUd]a<aa& c ParNTaPa )
k-MaaRi<a Pa[iv>a¢-aiNa Sv>aavPa[>avEGauR<aE" )) 41 ))
brähmaëa-kñatriya-viçäà
çüdräëäà ca parantapa
karmäëi pravibhaktäni
svabhäva-prabhavair guëaiù
brähmaëa—the brähmaëas; kñatriya—the kñatriyas; viçäm—the vaiçyas; çüdräëäm—the çüdras; ca—and; parantapa—O subduer of the enemies; karmäëi—activities; pravibhaktäni—are
divided; svabhäva—own nature; prabhavaiù—born of; guëaiù—by
the modes of material nature.
TRANSLATION
Brähmaëas, kñatriyas, vaiçyas and çüdras are distinguished by
their qualities of work, O chastiser of the enemy, in accordance with the modes
of nature.
Bg
18.42
TEXT
42
TEXT
XaMaae
dMaSTaPa" XaaEc& +aaiNTaraJaRvMaev c )
jaNa& ivjaNaMaaiSTaKYa& b]øk-MaR Sv>aavJaMa( )) 42 ))
çamo damas tapaù çaucaà
kñäntir ärjavam eva ca
jïänaà vijïänam ästikyaà
brahma-karma svabhäva-jam
çamaù—peacefulness;
damaù—self-control; tapaù—austerity;
çaucam—purity; kñäntiù—tolerance;
ärjavam—honesty; eva—certainly;
ca—and; jïänam—wisdom;
vijïänam—knowledge; ästikyam—religiousness;
brahma—of a brähmaëa;
karma—duty; svabhäva-jam—born of his own
nature.
TRANSLATION
Peacefulness, self-control, austerity, purity, tolerance, honesty,
wisdom, knowledge, and religiousness—these are the qualities by which the
brähmaëas work.
Bg
18.43
TEXT
43
TEXT
XaaEYa| TaeJaae
Da*iTadaR+Ya& YauÖe caPYaPal/aYaNaMa( )
daNaMaqìr>aavê +aa}a& k-MaR Sv>aavJaMa( )) 43 ))
çauryaà tejo dhåtir däkñyaà
yuddhe cäpy apaläyanam
dänam éçvara-bhävaç ca
kñätraà karma svabhäva-jam
çauryam—heroism; tejaù—power; dhåtiù—determination;
däkñyam—resourcefulness; yuddhe—in
battle; ca—and; api—also;
apaläyanam—not fleeing; dänam—generosity;
éçvara—leadership; bhävaù—nature;
ca—and kñätram—kñatriya;
karma—duty; svabhäva-jam—born of his own
nature.
TRANSLATION
Heroism, power, determination, resourcefulness, courage in battle,
generosity, and leadership are the qualities of work for the kñatriyas.
Bg
18.44
TEXT
44
TEXT
k*-izGaaer+Yavai<aJYa&
vEXYak-MaR Sv>aavJaMa( )
PaircYaaRTMak&- k-MaR éUd]SYaaiPa Sv>aavJaMa( )) 44 ))
kåñi-go-rakñya-väëijyaà
vaiçya-karma svabhäva-jam
paricaryätmakaà karma
çüdrasyäpi svabhäva-jam
kåñi—ploughing; go—cows; rakñya—protection;
väëijyam—trade; vaiçya—vaiçya;
karma—duty; svabhäva-jam—born of his own
nature; paricaryä—service; ätmakam—nature; karma—duty;
çüdrasya—of the çüdra;
api—also; svabhäva-jam—born of his own nature.
TRANSLATION
Farming, cattle raising and business are the qualities of work for
the vaiçyas, and for the çüdras there is labor and service to others.
Bg
18.45
TEXT
45
TEXT
Sve Sve
k-MaR<Yai>arTa" Sa&iSaiÖ& l/>aTae Nar" )
Svk-MaRiNarTa" iSaiÖ& YaQaa ivNdiTa TaC^*<au )) 45 ))
sve sve karmaëy abhirataù
saàsiddhià labhate naraù
sva-karma-nirataù siddhià
yathä vindati tac chåëu
sve—own; sve—own; karmaëi—in work;
abhirataù—following; saàsiddhim—perfection;
labhate—achieves; naraù—a
man; svakarma—by his own duty; nirataù—engaged; siddhim—perfection;
yathä—as; vindati—attains,
tat—that; çåëu—listen.
TRANSLATION
By following his qualities of work, every man can become perfect.
Now please hear from Me how this can be done.
Bg
18.46
TEXT
46
TEXT
YaTa"
Pa[v*ita>aURTaaNaa& YaeNa SavRiMad& TaTaMa( )
Svk-MaR<aa TaMa>YaCYaR iSaiÖ& ivNdiTa MaaNav" )) 46 ))
yataù pravåttir bhütänäà
yena sarvam idaà tatam
sva-karmaëä tam abhyarcya
siddhià vindati mänavaù
yataù—from whom; pravåttiù—emanation; bhütänäm—of
all living entities; yena—by whom; sarvam—all; idam—this; tatam—is pervaded; svakarmaëä—in
his own duties; tam—Him; abhyarcya—by
worshiping; siddhim—perfection; vindati—achieves; mänavaù—a
man.
TRANSLATION
By worship of the Lord, who is the source of all beings and who is
all-pervading, man can, in the performance of his own duty, attain perfection.
PURPORT
As stated in the Fifteenth Chapter, all living beings are
fragmental parts and parcels of the Supreme Lord. As such, the Supreme Lord is
the beginning of all living entities. This is confirmed in the Vedänta-sütra—janmädy asya yataù. The Supreme Lord is
therefore the beginning of life of every living entity. And the Supreme Lord,
by His two energies, His external energy and internal energy, is all-pervading.
Therefore one should worship the Supreme Lord with His energies. Generally the
Vaiñëava devotees worship the Supreme Lord with His internal energy. His
external energy is a perverted reflection of the internal energy. The external
energy is a background, but the Supreme Lord by the expansion of His plenary
portion as Paramätmä is situated everywhere. He is the Supersoul of all
demigods, all human beings, all animals, everywhere. One should therefore know
that as part and parcel of the Supreme Lord it is his duty to render service
unto the Supreme. Everyone should be engaged in devotional service to the Lord
in full Kåñëa consciousness. That is recommended in this verse.
Everyone should think that he is engaged in a particular type of occupation by Håñékeça, the master of the senses. And, by the result of the work in which one is engaged, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëa, should be worshiped. If one thinks always in this way, in full Kåñëa consciousness, then, by the grace of the Lord, he becomes fully aware of everything. That is the perfection of life. The Lord says in Bhagavad-gétä, teñäm ahaà samuddhartä. The Supreme Lord Himself takes charge of delivering such a devotee. That is the highest perfection of life. In whatever occupation one may be engaged, if he serves the Supreme Lord, he will achieve the highest perfection.
Bg
18.47
TEXT
47
TEXT
é[eYaaNSvDaMaaeR
ivGau<a" ParDaMaaRTSvNauiïTaaTa( )
Sv>aaviNaYaTa& k-MaR ku-vRàaPanaeiTa ik-iLbzMa( )) 47 ))
çreyän sva-dharmo viguëaù
para-dharmät sv-anuñöhität
svabhäva-niyataà karma
kurvan näpnoti kilbiñam
sreyän—better; sva-dharmaù—one’s own occupation; viguëaù—imperfectly performed; para-dharmät—another’s
occupation; svanuñöhität—perfectly done; svabhäva-niyatam—prescribed duties according to one’s
nature; karma—work; kurvan—performing;
na—never; äpnoti—achieve;
kilbiñam—sinful reactions.
TRANSLATION
It is better to engage in one’s own occupation, even though one
may perform it imperfectly, than to accept another’s occupation and perform it
perfectly. Prescribed duties, according to one’s nature, are never affected by
sinful reactions.
PURPORT
One’s occupational duty is prescribed in Bhagavad-gétä.
As already discussed in previous verses, the duties of a brähmaëa, kñatriya, vaiçya and çüdra
are prescribed according to the particular modes of nature. One should
not imitate another’s duty. A man who is by
nature attracted to the kind of work done by çüdras should
not artificially claim himself to be a brähmaëa, although
he may be born into a brähmaëa family. In this way
one should work according to his own nature; no work is abominable, if
performed in the service of the Supreme Lord. The occupational duty of a brähmaëa is certainly in the mode of goodness, but if a
person is not by nature in the mode of goodness, he should not imitate the
occupational duty of a brähmaëa. For a kñatriya, or administrator, there are so many
abominable things; a kñatriya has to be violent
to kill his enemies, and sometimes a kñatriya has
to tell lies for the sake of diplomacy. Such violence and duplicity accompany
political affairs, but a kñatriya is not supposed
to give up his occupational duty and try to perform the duties of a brähmaëa.
One should act to satisfy the Supreme Lord. For example, Arjuna was a kñatriya. He was hesitating to fight the other party. But if such fighting is performed for the sake of Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, there need be no fear of degradation. In the business field also, sometimes a merchant has to tell so many lies to make a profit. If he does not do so, there can be no profit. Sometimes a merchant says, “Oh, my dear customer, for you I am making no profit,” but one should know that without profit the merchant cannot exist. Therefore it should be taken as a simple lie if a merchant says that he is not making a profit. But the merchant should not think that because he is engaged in an occupation in which the telling of lies is compulsory, he should give up his profession and pursue the profession of a brähmaëa. That is not recommended. Whether one is a kñatriya, a vaiçya, or a çüdra doesn’t matter, if he serves, by his work, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Even brähmaëas, who perform different types of sacrifice, sometimes must kill animals because sometimes animals are sacrificed in such ceremonies. Similarly, if a kñatriya engaged in his own occupation kills an enemy, there is no sin incurred. In the Third Chapter these matters have been clearly and elaborately explained; every man should work for the purpose of yajïa, or for Viñëu, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Anything done for personal sense gratification is a cause of bondage. The conclusion is that everyone should be engaged according to the particular mode of nature he has acquired, and he should decide to work only to serve the supreme cause of the Supreme Lord.
Bg
18.48
TEXT
48
TEXT
SahJa& k-MaR
k-aENTaeYa SadaezMaiPa Na TYaJaeTa( )
SavaRrM>aa ih daeze<a DaUMaeNaaiGanirvav*Taa" )) 48 ))
saha-jaà karma kaunteya
sa-doñam api na tyajet
sarvärambhä hi doñeëa
dhümenägnir ivävåtäù
saha-jam—born
simultaneously; karma—work; kaunteya—O son of Kunté; sa-doñam—with
fault; api—although; na—never;
tyajet—to be given up;
sarva-ärambhäù—any venture; hi—is
certainly; doñeëa—with fault; dhümena—with smoke; agniù—fire;
iva—as; ävåtäù—covered.
TRANSLATION
Every endeavor is covered by some sort of fault, just as fire is
covered by smoke. Therefore one should not give up the work which is born of
his nature, O son of Kunté, even if such work is full of fault.
PURPORT
In conditioned life, all work is contaminated by the material
modes of nature. Even if one is a brähmaëa, he
has to perform sacrifices in which animal killing is necessary. Similarly, a kñatriya, however pious he may be, has to fight
enemies. He cannot avoid it. Similarly, a merchant, however pious he may be,
must sometimes hide his profit to stay in business, or he may sometimes have to
do business on the black market. These things are necessary; one cannot avoid
them. Similarly, even though a man is a çüdra serving
a bad master, he has to carry out the order of the master, even though it
should not be done. Despite these flaws, one should continue to carry out his
prescribed duties, for they are born out of his own nature.
A very nice example is given herein. Although fire is pure, still there is smoke. Yet smoke does not make the fire impure. Even though there is smoke in the fire, fire is still considered to be the purest of all elements. If one prefers to give up the work of a kñatriya and take up the occupation of a brähmaëa, he is not assured that in the occupation of a brähmaëa there are no unpleasant duties. One may then conclude that in the material world no one can be completely free from the contamination of material nature. This example of fire and smoke is very appropriate in this connection. When in wintertime one takes a stone from the fire, sometimes smoke disturbs the eyes and other parts of the body, but still one must make use of the fire despite disturbing conditions. Similarly, one should not give up his natural occupation because there are some disturbing elements. Rather, one should be determined to serve the Supreme Lord by his occupational duty in Kåñëa consciousness. That is the perfectional point. When a particular type of occupation is performed for the satisfaction of the Supreme Lord, all the defects in that particular occupation are purified. When the results of work are purified, when connected with devotional service, one becomes perfect in seeing the self within, and that is self-realization.
Bg
18.49
TEXT
49
TEXT
ASa¢-buiÖ"
SavR}a iJaTaaTMaa ivGaTaSPa*h" )
NaEZk-MYaRiSaiÖ& ParMaa& SaNNYaaSaeNaaiDaGaC^iTa )) 49 ))
asakta-buddhiù sarvatra
jitätmä vigata-spåhaù
naiñkarmya-siddhià paramäà
sannyäsenädhigacchati
asakta-buddhiù—unattached
intelligence; sarvatra—everywhere; jita-ätmä—control of the mind, vigata-spåhaù—without
material desires; naiñkarmya-siddhim—perfection
of non-reaction; paramäm—supreme; sannyäsena—by the renounced order of life; adhigacchati—attains.
TRANSLATION
One can obtain the results of renunciation simply by self-control
and by becoming unattached to material things and disregarding material
enjoyments. That is the highest perfectional stage of renunciation.
PURPORT
Real renunciation means that one should always think himself part
and parcel of the Supreme Lord. Therefore he has no right to enjoy the results
of his work. Since he is part and parcel of the Supreme Lord, the results of
his work must be enjoyed by the Supreme Lord. This is actually Krñna
consciousness. The person acting in Kåñëa consciousness is really a sannyäsé, one in the renounced order of life. By such
mentality, one is satisfied because he is actually acting for the Supreme. Thus
he is not attached to anything material; he becomes accustomed to not taking
pleasure in anything beyond the transcendental happiness derived from the
service of the Lord. A sannyäsé is supposed to be
free from the reactions of his past activities, but a person who is in Kåñëa
consciousness automatically attains this perfection without even accepting the
so-called order of renunciation. This state of mind is called yogärüòha, or the perfectional stage of yoga, as confirmed in the Third Chapter: yas tv ätma-ratir eva syät. One who is satisfied in
himself has no fear of any kind of reaction from his activity.
Bg
18.50
TEXT
50
TEXT
iSaiÖ&
Pa[aáae YaQaa b]ø TaQaaPanaeiTa iNabaeDa Mae )
SaMaaSaeNaEv k-aENTaeYa iNaïa jaNaSYa Yaa Para )) 50 ))
siddhià präpto yathä brahma
tathäpnoti nibodha me
samäsenaiva kaunteya
niñöhä jïänasya yä parä
siddhim—perfection; präptaù—achieving; yathä—as;
brahma—the Supreme; tathä—so; äpnoti—achieves; nibodha—try
to understand; me—from Me; samäsena—summarily; eva—certainly;
kaunteya—O son of Kunté; niñöhä—stage;
jïänasya—of knowledge; yä—which;
parä—transcendental.
TRANSLATION
O son of Kunté, learn from Me in brief how one can attain to the
supreme perfectional stage, Brahman, by acting in the way which I shall now
summarize.
PURPORT
The Lord describes for Arjuna how one can achieve the highest
perfectional stage simply by being engaged in his occupational duty, performing
that duty for the Supreme Personality of Godhead. One attains the supreme stage
of Brahman simply by renouncing the result of his work for the satisfaction of
the Supreme Lord. That is the process of self-realization. Actual perfection of
knowledge is in attaining pure Kåñëa consciousness; that is described in the
following verses.
Bg
18.51, Bg 18.52, Bg 18.53, Bg 18.51-53
TEXTS
51–53
TEXT
buÖya ivéuÖYaa
Yau¢-ae Da*TYaaTMaaNa& iNaYaMYa c )
XaBdadqiNvzYaa&STYa¤-a raGaÜezaE VYaudSYa c )) 51 ))
iviv¢-Saevq l/gvaXaq YaTava¡-aYaMaaNaSa" )
DYaaNaYaaeGaParae iNaTYa& vEraGYa& SaMauPaaié[Ta" )) 52 ))
Ahªar& bl&/ dPa| k-aMa& §-aeDa& PairGa]hMa( )
ivMauCYa iNaMaRMa" XaaNTaae b]ø>aUYaaYa k-LPaTae )) 53 ))
buddhyä viçuddhayä yukto
dhåtyätmänaà niyamya ca
çabdädén viñayäàs tyaktvä
räga-dveñau vyudasya ca
vivikta-sevé laghv-äçé
yata-väk-käya-mänasaù
dhyäna-yoga-paro nityaà
vairägyaà samupäçritaù
ahaìkäraà balaà darpaà
kämaà krodhaà parigraham
vimucya nirmamaù çänto
brahma-bhüyäya kalpate
buddhyä—by the
intelligence; viçuddhayä—fully purified; yuktaù—such engagement; dhåtyä—determination;
ätmänam—self; niyamya—regulated;
ca—also; çabdädén—the
sense objects, such as sound, etc.; viñayän—sense
objects; tyaktvä—giving up; räga—attachments; dveñau—hatred; vyudasya—having laid aside; ca—also;
vivikta-sevé—living in a secluded place; laghu-äçé—eating a small quantity; yata-väk—control of speech; käya—body;
mänasaù—control of the mind; dhyäna-yoga-paraù—always absorbed in trance; nityam—twenty-four hours a day; vairägyam—detachment;
samupäçritaù—taken shelter of; ahaìkäram—false ego; balam—false
strength; darpam—false pride; kämam—lust; krodham—anger;
parigraham—acceptance of material things; vimucya—being delivered; nirmamaù—without
proprietorship; çäntaù—peaceful; brahma-bhüyäya—to become self-realized; kalpate—is understood.
TRANSLATION
Being purified by his intelligence and controlling the mind with
determination, giving up the objects of sense gratification, being freed from
attachment and hatred, one who lives in a secluded place, who eats little and
who controls the body and the tongue, and is always in trance and is detached,
who is without false ego, false strength, false pride, lust, anger, and who
does not accept material things, such a person is certainly elevated to the
position of self-realization.
PURPORT
When one is purified by knowledge, he keeps himself in the mode of
goodness. Thus one becomes the controller of the mind and is always in trance.
Because he is not attached to the objects of sense gratification, he does not
eat more than what he requires, and he controls the activities of his body and
mind. He has no false ego because he does not accept the body as himself. Nor
has he a desire to make the body fat and strong by accepting so many material
things. Because he has no bodily concept of life, he is not falsely proud. He
is satisfied with everything that is offered to him by the grace of the Lord,
and he is never angry in the absence of sense gratification. Nor does he
endeavor to acquire sense objects. Thus when he is completely free from false
ego, he becomes nonattached to all material things, and that is the stage of
self-realization of Brahman. That stage is called the brahma-bhüta
stage. When one is free from the material conception of life, he becomes
peaceful and cannot be agitated.
Bg
18.54
TEXT
54
TEXT
b]ø>aUTa"
Pa[SaàaTMaa Na XaaeciTa Na k-a¿iTa )
SaMa" SaveRzu >aUTaezu MaÙi¢&- l/>aTae ParaMa( )) 54 ))
brahma-bhütaù prasannätmä
na çocati na käìkñati
samaù sarveñu bhüteñu
mad-bhaktià labhate paräm
brahma-bhütaù—being one
with the Absolute; prasanna-ätmä—fully joyful; na—never; çocati—laments;
na—never; käìkñati—desires;
samaù—equally disposed; sarveñu—all;
bhüteñu—living entity; mat-bhaktim—My
devotional service; labhate—gains; paräm—transcendental.
TRANSLATION
One who is thus transcendentally situated at once realizes the
Supreme Brahman. He never laments nor desires to have anything; he is equally
disposed to every living entity. In that state he attains pure devotional service
unto Me.
PURPORT
To the impersonalist, achieving the brahma-bhüta
stage, becoming one with the Absolute, is the last word. But for the
personalist, or pure devotee, one has to go still further to become engaged in
pure devotional service. This means that one who is engaged in pure devotional
service to the Supreme Lord is already in a state of liberation, called brahma-bhüta, oneness with the Absolute. Without being
one with the Supreme, the Absolute, one cannot render service unto Him. In the
absolute conception, there is no difference between the served and the
servitor; yet the distinction is there, in a higher spiritual sense.
In the material concept of life, when one works for sense gratification, there is misery, but in the absolute world, when one is engaged in pure devotional service, there is no misery. The devotee in Kåñëa consciousness has nothing to lament or desire. Since God is full, a living entity who is engaged in God’s service, in Kåñëa consciousness, becomes also full in himself. He is just like a river cleansed of all dirty water. Because a pure devotee has no thought other than Kåñëa, he is naturally always joyful. He does not lament for any material loss or gain because he is full in service of the Lord. He has no desire for material enjoyment because he knows that every living entity is the fragmental part and parcel of the Supreme Lord and therefore eternally a servant. He does not see, in the material world, someone as higher and someone as lower; higher and lower positions are ephemeral, and a devotee has nothing to do with ephemeral appearances or disappearances. For him stone and gold are of equal value. This is the brahma-bhüta stage, and this stage is attained very easily by the pure devotee. In that stage of existence, the idea of becoming one with the Supreme Brahman and annihilating one’s individuality becomes hellish, and the idea of attaining the heavenly kingdom becomes phantasmagoria, and the senses are like broken serpents’ teeth. As there is no fear of a serpent with broken teeth, so there is no fear from the senses when they are automatically controlled. The world is miserable for the materially infected person, but for a devotee the entire world is as good as Vaikuëöha, or the spiritual sky. The highest personality in this material universe is no more significant than an ant for a devotee. Such a stage can be achieved by the mercy of Lord Caitanya, who preached pure devotional service in this age.
Bg
18.55
TEXT
55
TEXT
>a¢-ya
MaaMai>aJaaNaaiTa YaavaNYaêaiSMa TatvTa" )
TaTaae Maa& TatvTaae jaTva ivXaTae TadNaNTarMa( )) 55 ))
bhaktyä mäm abhijänäti
yävän yaç cäsmi tattvataù
tato mäà tattvato jïätvä
viçate tad-anantaram
bhaktyä—by pure
devotional service; mäm—Me; abhijänäti—one can know; yävän—as
much as; yaù ca asmi—as I am; tattvataù—in truth; tataù—thereafter;
mäm—Me; tattvataù—by
truth; jïätvä—knowing; viçate—enters;
tat—thereafter; anantaram—after
TRANSLATION
One can understand the Supreme Personality as He is only by
devotional service. And when one is in full consciousness of the Supreme Lord
by such devotion, he can enter into the kingdom of God.
PURPORT
The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, and His plenary
portions cannot be understood by mental speculation nor by the nondevotees. If
anyone wants to understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead, he has to take
to pure devotional service under the guidance of a pure devotee. Otherwise, the
truth of the Supreme Personality of Godhead will always be hidden. It is
already stated (nähaà prakäçaù) that He is not
revealed to everyone. Everyone cannot understand God simply by erudite
scholarship or mental speculation. Only one who is actually engaged in Kåñëa
consciousness and devotional service can understand what Kåñëa is. University
degrees are not helpful.
One who is fully conversant with the Kåñëa science becomes eligible to enter into the spiritual kingdom, the abode of Kåñëa. Becoming Brahman does not mean that one loses his identity. Devotional service is there, and as long as devotional service exists, there must be God, the devotee, and the process of devotional service. Such knowledge is never vanquished, even after liberation. Liberation involves getting free from the concept of material life; in spiritual life the same distinction is there, the same individuality is there, but in pure Kåñëa consciousness. One should not misunderstand that the word viçate, “enters into Me,” supports the monist theory that one becomes homogeneous with the impersonal Brahman. No. Viçate means that one can enter into the abode of the Supreme Lord in his individuality to engage in His association and render service unto Him. For instance, a green bird enters a green tree not to become one with the tree but to enjoy the fruits of the tree. Impersonalists generally give the example of a river flowing into the ocean and merging. This may be a source of happiness for the impersonalist, but the personalist keeps his personal individuality like an aquatic in the ocean. We find so many living entities within the ocean, if we go deep. Surface acquaintance with the ocean is not sufficient; one must have complete knowledge of the aquatics living in the ocean depths.
Because of his pure devotional service, a devotee can understand the transcendental qualities and the opulences of the Supreme Lord in truth. As it is stated in the Eleventh Chapter, only by devotional service can one understand. The same is confirmed here; one can understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead by devotional service and enter into His kingdom.
After attainment of the brahma-bhüta stage of freedom from material conceptions, devotional service begins by one’s hearing about the Lord. When one hears about the Supreme Lord, automatically the brahma-bhüta stage develops, and material contamination—greediness and lust for sense enjoyment—disappears. As lust and desires disappear from the heart of a devotee, he becomes more attached to the service of the Lord, and by such attachment he becomes free from material contamination. In that state of life he can understand the Supreme Lord. This is the statement of Çrémad-Bhägavatam also. Also after liberation the process of bhakti or transcendental service continues. The Vedänta-sütra confirms this: äpräyaëät taträpi hi dåñöam. This means that after liberation the process of devotional service continues. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam, real devotional liberation is defined as the reinstatement of the living entity in his own identity, his own constitutional position. The constitutional position is already explained: every living entity is the part and parcel fragmental portion of the Supreme Lord. Therefore his constitutional position is to serve. After liberation, this service is never stopped. Actual liberation is getting free from misconceptions of life.
Bg
18.56
TEXT
56
TEXT
SavRk-MaaR<YaiPa
Sada ku-vaR<aae MaÜyPaaé[Ya" )
MaTPa[SaadadvaPanaeiTa XaaìTa& PadMaVYaYaMa( )) 56 ))
sarva-karmäëy api sadä
kurväëo mad-vyapäçrayaù
mat-prasädäd aväpnoti
çäçvataà padam avyayam
sarva—all; karmäëi—activities; api—although;
sadä—always; kurväëaù—performing;
mat—under My; vyapäçrayah—protection;
mat—My; prasädät—mercy;
aväpnoti—achieves; säçvatam—eternal;
padam—abode; avyayam—-imperishable.
TRANSLATION
Though engaged in all kinds of activities, My devotee, under My
protection, reaches the eternal and imperishable abode by My grace.
PURPORT
The word mad-vyapäçrayaù means under
the protection of the Supreme Lord. To be free from material contamination, a
pure devotee acts under the direction of the Supreme Lord or His
representative, the spiritual master. There is no time limitation for a pure
devotee. He is always, twenty-four hours, one hundred percent engaged in
activities under the direction of the Supreme Lord. To a devotee who is thus
engaged in Kåñëa consciousness the Lord is very, very kind. In spite of all
difficulties, he is eventually placed in the transcendental abode, or
Kåñëaloka. He is guaranteed entrance there; there is no doubt about it. In that
supreme abode, there is no change; everything is eternal, imperishable and full
of knowledge.
Bg 18.57
TEXT
57
TEXT
ceTaSaa
SavRk-MaaRi<a MaiYa SaNNYaSYa MaTPar" )
buiÖYaaeGaMauPaaié[TYa MaiÀta" SaTaTa& >av )) 57 ))
cetasä sarva-karmäëi
mayi sannyasya mat-paraù
buddhi-yogam upäçritya
mac-cittaù satataà bhava
cetasä—by
intelligence; sarva-karmäni—all kinds of
activities; mayi—unto Me; sannyasya—giving
up; mat-paraù—My protection; buddhi-yogam—devotional activities; upäçritya—taking shelter of; mat-cittaù—consciousness;
satatam—twenty-four hours a day; bhava—just become.
TRANSLATION
In all activities just depend upon Me and work always under My
protection. In such devotional service, be fully conscious of Me.
PURPORT
When one acts in Kåñëa consciousness, he does not act as the
master of the world. Just like a servant, one should act fully under the
direction of the Supreme Lord. A servant has no individual independence. He
acts only on the order of the master. A servant acting on behalf of the supreme
master has no affection for profit and loss. He simply discharges his duty
faithfully in terms of the order of the Lord. Now, one may argue that Arjuna
was acting under the personal direction of Kåñëa, but, when Kåñëa is not
present, how should one act? If one acts according to the direction of Kåñëa in
this book, as well as under the guidance of the representative of Kåñëa, then
the result will be the same. The Sanskrit word mat-paraù
is very important in this verse. It indicates that one has no goal in life save
and except acting in Kåñëa consciousness just to satisfy Kåñëa. And, while
working in that way, one should think of Kåñëa only: “I have been appointed to
discharge this particular duty by Kåñëa.” While acting in such a way, one
naturally has to think of Kåñëa. This is perfect Kåñëa consciousness. One
should, however, note that, after doing something whimsically, he should not
offer the result to the Supreme Lord. That sort of duty is not in the
devotional service of Kåñëa consciousness. One should act according to the
order of Krñna. This is a very important point. That order of Kåñëa comes
through disciplic succession from the bona fide spiritual master. Therefore the
spiritual master’s order should be taken as the prime duty of life. If one gets
a bona fide spiritual master and acts according to his direction, then his
perfection of life in Kåñëa consciousness is guaranteed.
Bg
18.58
TEXT
58
TEXT
MaiÀta"
SavRduGaaRi<a MaTPa[SaadatairZYaiSa )
AQa cetvMahªaraà é[aeZYaiSa ivNax(+YaiSa )) 58 ))
mac-cittaù sarva-durgäëi
mat-prasädät tariñyasi
atha cet tvam ahaìkärän
na çroñyasi vinaìkñyasi
mat—My; cittaù—consciousness; sarva—all;
durgäëi—impediments; mat—My;
prasädät—My mercy; tariñyasi—you
will overcome; atha—therefore; cet—if; tvam—you; ahaìkärät—by false ego; na—not;
çroñyasi—do not hear; vinaìkñyasi—then
lose yourself.
TRANSLATION
If you become conscious of Me, you will pass over all the
obstacles of conditional life by My grace. If, however, you do not work in such
consciousness but act through false ego, not hearing Me, you will be lost.
PURPORT
A person in full Kåñëa consciousness is not unduly anxious to
execute the duties of his existence. The foolish cannot understand this great
freedom from all anxiety. For one who acts in Kåñëa consciousness, Lord Kåñëa
becomes the most intimate friend. He always looks after His friend’s comfort,
and He gives Himself to His friend, who is so devotedly engaged working
twenty-four hours a day to please the Lord. Therefore, no one should be carried
away by the false ego of the bodily concept of life. One should not falsely
think himself independant of the laws of material nature or free to act. He is
already under strict material laws. But, as soon as he acts in Kåñëa
consciousness, he is liberated, free from the material perplexities. One should
note very carefully that one who is not active in Kåñëa consciousness is losing
himself in the material whirlpool, in the ocean of birth and death. No
conditioned soul actually knows what is to be done and what is not to be done,
but a person who acts in Kåñëa consciousness is free to act because everything
is prompted by Kåñëa from within and confirmed by the spiritual master.
Bg
18.59
TEXT
59
TEXT
YadhªarMaaié[TYa
Na YaaeTSYa wiTa MaNYaSae )
iMaQYaEz VYavSaaYaSTae Pa[k*-iTaSTva& iNaYaae+YaiTa )) 59 ))
yad ahaìkäram äçritya
na yotsya iti manyase
mithyaiña vyavasäyas te
prakåtis tväà niyokñyati
yat—therefore; ahaìkäram—false ego; äçritya—taking
shelter; na—not; yotsya—shall
fight; iti—thus; manyase—think;
mithyä eñaù—this is all false; vyavasäyah te—your determination; prakåtiù—material nature; tväm—you; niyokñyati—will engage you.
TRANSLATION
If you do not act according to My direction and do not fight, then
you will be falsely directed. By your nature, you will have to be engaged in
warfare.
PURPORT
Arjuna was a military man, and born of the nature of the kñatriya. Therefore his natural duty was to fight. But,
due to false ego, he was fearing that by killing his teacher, grandfather and
friends, there would be sinful reactions. Actually he was considering himself
master of his actions, as if he were directing the good and bad results of such
work. He forgot that the Supreme Personality of Godhead was present there,
instructing him to fight. That is the forgetfulness of the conditioned soul.
The Supreme Personality gives directions as to what is good and what is bad,
and one simply has to act in Kåñëa consciousness to attain the perfection of
life. No one can ascertain his destiny as the Supreme Lord can; therefore the
best course is to take direction from the Supreme Lord and act. No one should
neglect the order of the Supreme Personality of Godhead or the order of the
spiritual master who is the representative of God. One should act
unhesitatingly to execute the order of the Supreme Personality of Godhead—that
will keep him safe under all circumstances.
Bg
18.60
TEXT
60
TEXT
Sv>aavJaeNa
k-aENTaeYa iNabÖ" SveNa k-MaR<aa )
k-Tau| NaeC^iSa YaNMaaehaTk-irZYaSYavXaae_iPa TaTa( )) 60 ))
svabhäva-jena kaunteya
nibaddhaù svena karmaëä
kartuà necchasi yan mohät
kariñyasy avaço ’pi tat
sva-bhäva-jena—by one’s
own nature; kaunteya—O son of Kunté; nibaddhaù—conditioned; svena—by
one’s own; karmaëä—activities; kartum—to do; na—not; icchasi—like; yat—that; mohät—by illusion; kariñyasi—you
will act; avaçaù—imperceptibly; api—even; tat—that.
TRANSLATION
Under illusion you are now declining to act according to My
direction. But, compelled by your own nature, you will act all the same, O son
of Kunté.
PURPORT
If one refuses to act under the direction of the Supreme Lord,
then he is compelled to act by the modes in which he is situated. Everyone is
under the spell of a particular combination of the modes of nature and is
acting in that way. But anyone who voluntarily engages himself under the
direction of the Supreme Lord becomes glorious.
Bg
18.61
TEXT
61
TEXT
wRìr"
SavR>aUTaaNaa& ôÕeXae_JauRNa iTaïiTa )
>a]aMaYaNSavR>aUTaaiNa YaN}aaæ!aiNa MaaYaYaa )) 61 ))
éçvaraù sarva-bhütänäà
håd-deçe ’rjuna tiñöhati
bhrämayan sarva-bhütäni
yanträrüòhäni mäyayä
éçvaraù—the Supreme
Lord; sarva-bhütänäm—of all living entities; håd-deçe—in the location of the heart; arjuna—O Arjuna; tiñöhati—resides;
bhrämayan—causing to travel; sarva-bhütäni—all living entities; yantra—machine; ärüòhäni—being
so placed; mäyayä—under the spell of material
energy.
TRANSLATION
The Supreme Lord is situated in everyone’s heart, O Arjuna, and is
directing the wanderings of all living entities, who are seated as on a
machine, made of the material energy.
PURPORT
Arjuna was not the supreme knower, and his decision to fight or
not to fight was confined to his limited discretion. Lord Kåñëa instructed that
the individual is not all in all. The Supreme Personality of Godhead, or He
Himself, Kåñëa, the localized Supersoul, sits in the heart directing the living
being. After changing bodies, the living entity forgets his past deeds, but the
Supersoul, as the knower of the past, present and future, remains the witness
of all his activities. Therefore all the activities of living entities are
directed by this Supersoul. The living entity gets what he deserves and is
carried by the material body which is created in the material energy under the
direction of the Supersoul. As soon as a living entity is placed in a
particular type of body, he has to work under the spell of that bodily
situation. A person seated in a high-speed motor car goes faster than one seated
in a slower car, though the living entities, the drivers, may be the same.
Similarly, by the order of the Supreme Soul, material nature fashions a
particular type of body to a particular type of living entity to work according
to his past desires. The living entity is not independant. One should not think
himself independant of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The individual is
always under His control. Therefore his duty is to surrender, and that is the
injunction of the next verse.
Bg
18.62
TEXT
62
TEXT
TaMaev
Xar<a& GaC^ SavR>aaveNa >aarTa )
TaTPa[SaadaTPara& XaaiNTa& SQaaNa& Pa[aPSYaiSa XaaìTaMa( )) 62 ))
tam eva çaraëaà gaccha
sarva-bhävena bhärata
tat-prasädät paräà çäntià
sthänaà präpsyasi çäçvatam
tam—unto Him; eva—certainly; çaraëam—surrender;
gaccha—go; sarva-bhävena—in
all respects; bhärata—O son of Bharata; tat-prasädät—by His grace; paräm—transcendental;
çäntim—peace; sthänam—abode;
präpsyasi—you will get; çäçvatam—eternal.
TRANSLATION
O scion of Bharata, surrender unto Him utterly. By His grace you
will attain transcendental peace and the supreme and eternal abode.
PURPORT
A living entity should therefore surrender unto the Supreme
Personality of Godhead who is situated in everyone’s heart, and that will
relieve him from all kinds of miseries of this material existence. By such
surrender, one will not only be released from all miseries in this life, but at
the end he will reach the Supreme God. The transcendental world is described in
the Vedic literature as tad viñëoù paramaà padam. Since
all of creation is the kingdom of God, everything material is actually
spiritual, but paramaà padam specifically refers
to the eternal abode, which is called the spiritual sky or Vaikuëöha.
In the Fifteenth Chapter of Bhagavad-gétä it is stated: “Sarvasya cäham hådi sanniviñöaù.” The Lord is seated in everyone’s heart, so this recommendation that one should surrender unto the Supersoul sitting within means that one should surrender unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa. Kåñëa has already been accepted by Arjuna as the Supreme. He was accepted in the Tenth Chapter as paraà brahma paraà dhäma. Arjuna has accepted Kåñëa as the Supreme Personality of Godhead and the supreme abode of all living entities, not only because of his personal experience but also because of the evidences of great authorities like Närada, Asita, Devala and Vyäsa.
Bg
18.63
TEXT
63
TEXT
wiTa Tae
jaNaMaa:YaaTa& Gauùad(GauùTar& MaYaa )
ivMa*XYaETadXaeze<a YaQaeC^iSa TaQaa ku-å )) 63 ))
iti te jïänam äkhyätaà
guhyäd guhyataraà mayä
vimåçyaitad açeñeëa
yathecchasi tathä kuru
iti—thus; te—unto you; jïänam—knowledge;
äkhyätam—described; guhyät—confidential;
guhyataram—still more confidential; mayä—by Me; vimåçya—by
deliberation; etat—that; açeñeëa—fully;
yathä—as you; icchasi—you
like; tathä—that; kuru—perform.
TRANSLATION
Thus I have explained to you the most confidential of all
knowledge. Deliberate on this fully, and then do what you wish to do.
PURPORT
The Lord has already explained to Arjuna the knowledge of brahmabhüta. One who is in the brahma-bhüta
condition is joyful; he never laments, nor does he desire anything. That
is due to confidential knowledge. Kåñëa also discloses knowledge of the
Supersoul. This is also Brahman knowledge, knowledge of Brahman, but it is
superior.
Here Lord Kåñëa telIs Arjuna that he can do as he chooses. God does not interfere with the little independence of the living entity. In Bhagavad-gétä, the Lord has explained in all respects how one can elevate his living condition. The best advice imparted to Arjuna is to surrender unto the Supersoul seated within his heart. By right discrimination, one should agree to act according to the order of the Supersoul. That will help one become situated constantly in Kåñëa consciousness, the highest perfectional stage of human life. Arjuna is being directly ordered by the Personality of Godhead to fight. Surrender to the Supreme Personality of Godhead is in the best interest of the living entities. It is not for the interest of the Supreme. Before surrendering, one is free to deliberate on this subject as far as the intelligence goes; that is the best way to accept the instruction of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Such instruction comes also through the spiritual master, the bona fide representative of Kåñëa.
Bg
18.64
TEXT
64
TEXT
SavRGauùTaMa&
>aUYa" é*<au Mae ParMa& vc" )
wíae_iSa Mae d*!iMaiTa TaTaae v+YaaiMa Tae ihTaMa( )) 64 ))
sarva-guhyatamaà bhüyaù
çåëu me paramaà vacaù
iñöo ’si me dåòham iti
tato vakñyämi te hitam
sarva-guhyatamam—the most
confidential; bhüyaù—again; çåëu—just hear; me—from
Me; paramam—the supreme; vacaù—instruction;
isöaù asi—you are very dear to Me; dåòham—very; iti—thus; tataù—therefore; vakñyämi—speaking;
te—for your; hitam—benefit.
TRANSLATION
Because you are My very dear friend, I am speaking to you the most
confidential part of knowledge. Hear this from Me, for it is for your benefit.
PURPORT
The Lord has given Arjuna confidential knowledge of the Supersoul
within everyone’s heart, and now He is giving the most confidential part of
this knowledge: just surrender unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead. At the
end of the Ninth Chapter He has said, “Just always think of Me.” The same
instruction is repeated here to stress the essence of the teachings of Bhagavad-gétä. This essence is not understood by a
common man, but by one who is actually very dear to Kåñëa, a pure devotee of
Kåñëa. This is the most important instruction in all Vedic literature. What
Kåñëa is saying in this connection is the most essential part of knowledge, and
it should be carried out not only by Arjuna but by all living entities.
Bg
18.65
TEXT
65
TEXT
MaNMaNaa >av
MaÙ¢-ae MaÛaJaq Maa& NaMaSku-å )
MaaMaevEZYaiSa SaTYa& Tae Pa[iTaJaaNae iPa[Yaae_iSa Mae )) 65 ))
man-manä bhava mad-bhakto
mad-yäjé mäà namaskuru
mäm evaiñyasi satyaà te
pratijäne priyo ’si me
man-manäù—thinking of
Me; bhava—just become; mat-bhaktaù—My
devotee; mat-yäjé—My worshiper; mäm—unto Me; namaskuru—offer
your obeisances; mäm—unto Me; eva—certainly; eñyasi—come;
satyam—truly; te—to
you; pratijäne—I promise; prijaù—dear;
asi—you are; me—My.
TRANSLATION
Always think of Me and become My devotee. Worship Me and offer
your homage unto Me. Thus you will come to Me without fail. I promise you this
because you are My very dear friend.
PURPORT
The most confidential part of knowledge is that one should become
a pure devotee of Kåñëa and always think of Him and act for Him. One should
not become an official meditator. Life should be so molded that one will always
have the chance to think of Kåñëa. One should always act in such a way
that all his daily activities are in connection with Kåñëa. He should arrange
his life in such a way that throughout the twenty-four hours he cannot but
think of Kåñëa. And the Lord’s promise is that anyone who is in such pure Kåñëa
consciousness will certainly return to the abode of Kåñëa, where he will be
engaged in the association of Kåñëa face to face. This most confidential part
of knowledge is spoken to Arjuna because he is the dear friend of Kåñëa.
Everyone who follows the path of Arjuna can become a dear friend to Kåñëa and
obtain the same perfection as Arjuna.
These words stress that one should concentrate his mind upon Kåñëa—the very form with two hands carrying a flute, the bluish boy with a beautiful face and peacock feathers in His hair. There are descriptions of Kåñëa found in the Brahma-saàhitä and other literatures. One should fix his mind on this original form of Godhead, Kåñëa. He should not even divert his attention to other forms of the Lord. The Lord has multi-forms, as Viñëu, Näräyaëa, Räma, Varäha, etc., but a devotee should concentrate his mind on the form that was present before Arjuna. Concentration of the mind on the form of Kåñëa constitutes the most confidential part of knowledge, and this is disclosed to Arjuna because Arjuna is the most dear friend of Kåñëa’s.
Bg
18.66
TEXT
66
TEXT
SavRDaMaaRNPairTYaJYa
MaaMaek&- Xar<a& v]Ja )
Ah& Tva& SavRPaaPae>Yaae Maae+aiYaZYaaiMa Maa éuc" )) 66 ))
sarva-dharmän parityajya
mäm ekaà çaraëaà vraja
ahaà tväà sarva-päpebhyo
mokñayiñyämi mä çucaù
sarva-dharmän—all
varieties of religion; parityajya—abandoning; mäm—unto Me; ekam—only; çaraëam—surrender; vraja—go;
aham—I; tväm—you; sarva—all; päpebhyaù—from
sinful reactions; mokñayiñyämi—deliver; mä—not; çucaù—worry.
TRANSLATION
Abandon all varieties of religion and just surrender unto Me. I
shall deliver you from all sinful reaction. Do not fear.
PURPORT
The Lord has described various kinds of knowledge, processes of
religion, knowledge of the Supreme Brahman, knowledge of the Supersoul,
knowledge of the different types of orders and statuses of social life,
knowledge of the renounced order of life, knowledge of nonattachment, sense and
mind control, meditation, etc. He has described in so many ways different types
of religion. Now, in summarizing Bhagavad-gétä, the
Lord says that Arjuna should give up all the processes that have been explained
to him; he should simply surrender to Kåñëa. That surrender will save him from
all kinds of sinful reactions, for the Lord personally promises to protect him.
In the Eighth Chapter it was said that only one who has become free from all sinful reactions can take to the worship of Lord Kåñëa. Thus one may think that unless he is free from all sinful reactions he cannot take to the surrendering process. To such doubts it is here said that even if one is not free from all sinful reactions, simply by the process of surrendering to Çré Kåñëa he is automatically freed. There is no need of strenuous effort to free oneself from sinful reactions. One should unhesitatingly accept Kåñëa as the supreme savior of all living entities. With faith and love, one should surrender unto Him.
According to the devotional process, one should simply accept such religious principles that will lead ultimately to the devotional service of the Lord. One may perform a particular occupational duty according to his position in the social order, but if by executing his duty one does not come to the point of Kåñëa consciousness, all his activities are in vain.
Anything that does not lead to the perfectional stage of Kåñëa consciousness should be avoided. One should be confident that in all circumstances Kåñëa will protect him from all difficulties. There is no need of thinking how one should keep the body and soul together. Kåñëa will see to that. One should always think himself helpless and should consider Kåñëa the only basis for his progress in life. As soon as one seriously engages himself in devotional service to the Lord in full Kåñëa consciousness, at once he becomes freed from all contamination of material nature. There are different processes of religion and purificatory processes by cultivation of knowledge, meditation in the mystic yoga system, etc., but one who surrenders unto Kåñëa does not have to execute so many methods. That simple surrender unto Kåñëa will save him from unnecessarily wasting time. One can thus make all progress at once and be freed from all sinful reaction.
One should be attracted by the beautiful vision of Kåñëa. His name is Kåñëa because He is all-attractive. One who becomes attracted by the beautiful, all-powerful, omnipotent vision of Kåñëa is fortunate. There are different kinds of transcendentalists—some of them are attached to the impersonal Brahman vision, some of them are attracted by the Supersoul feature, etc., but one who is attracted to the personal feature of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and, above all, one who is attracted by the Supreme Personality of Godhead as Kåñëa Himself, is the most perfect transcendentalist. In other words, devotional service to Kåñëa, in full consciousness, is the most confidential part of knowledge, and this is the essence of the whole Bhagavad-gétä. Karma-yogés, empiric philosophers, mystics, and devotees are all called transcendentalists, but one who is a pure devotee is the best of all. The particular words used here, mä çucaù, “Don’t fear, don’t hesitate, don’t worry,” are very significant. One may be perplexed as to how one can give up all kinds of religious forms and simply surrender unto Kåñëa, but such worry is useless.
Bg
18.67
TEXT
67
TEXT
wd& Tae
NaaTaPaSk-aYa Naa>a¢-aYa k-dacNa )
Na caéué[Uzve vaCYa& Na c Maa& Yaae_>YaSaUYaiTa )) 67 ))
idaà te nätapaskäya
näbhaktäya kadäcana
na cäçuçrüñave väcyaà
na ca mäà yo ’bhyasüyati
idam—this; te—you; na—never; atapaskäya—one who is not austere; na—never; abhaktäya—one
who is not a devotee; kadäcana—at any time; na—never; ca—also; açuçrüñave—one who is not engaged in devotional
service; väcyam—to be spoken; na—never; ca—also; mäm—unto Me; yaù—anyone; abhyasüyati—envious.
TRANSLATION
This confidential knowledge may not be explained to those who are
not austere, or devoted, or engaged in devotional service, nor to one who is
envious of Me.
PURPORT
Persons who have not undergone the austerities of the religious
process, who have never attempted devotional service in Kåñëa consciousness,
who have not tended a pure devotee, and especially those who are conscious of
Kåñëa as a historical personality or who are envious of the greatness of Kåñëa,
should not be told this most confidential part of knowledge. It is, however,
sometimes found that even demoniac persons who are envious of Kåñëa, worshiping
Kåñëa in a different way, take to the profession of explaining Bhagavad-gétä in a different way to make business, but
anyone who desires actually to understand Kåñëa must avoid such commentaries on
Bhagavad-gétä. Actually the purpose of Bhagavad-gétä is not understandable to those who are
sensuous—even if one is not sensuous but is strictly following the disciplines
enjoined in the Vedic scripture, if he is not a devotee, he also cannot
understand Kåñëa. Even when one poses himself as a devotee of Kåñëa, but is not
engaged in Kåñëa conscious activities, he also cannot understand Kåñëa. There
are many persons who envy Kåñëa because He has explained in Bhagavad-gétä that He is the Supreme and that nothing
is above Him or equal to Him. There are many persons who are envious of Kåñëa.
Such persons should not be told of Bhagavad-gétä, for
they cannot understand. There is no possibility of faithless persons’
understanding Bhagavad-gétä and Kåñëa. Without
understanding Kåñëa from the authority of a pure devotee, one should not try to
comment upon Bhagavad-gitä.
Bg
18.68
TEXT
68
TEXT
Ya wd&
ParMa& Gauù& MaÙ¢e-Zvi>aDaaSYaiTa )
>ai¢&- MaiYa Para& k*-Tva MaaMaevEZYaTYaSa&XaYa" )) 68 ))
ya idaà paramaà guhyaà
mad-bhakteñv abhidhäsyati
bhaktià mayi paräà kåtvä
mäm evaiñyaty asaàçayaù
yaù—anyone; idam—this; paramam—most; guhyam—confidential; mat—Mine;
bhakteñu—amongst devotees of; abhidhäsyati—explains; bhaktim—devotional
service; mayi—unto Me; paräm—transcendental;
kåtvä—having done; mäm—unto
Me; eva—certainly; eñyati—comes;
asaàçayaù—without doubt.
TRANSLATION
For one who explains the supreme secret to the devotees,
devotional service is guaranteed, and at the end he will come back to Me.
PURPORT
Generally it is advised that Bhagavad-gétä be
discussed amongst the devotees only, for those who are not devotees will
neither understand Kåñëa nor Bhagavad-gétä. Those
who do not accept Kåñëa as He is and Bhagavad-gétä as
it is should not try to explain Bhagavad-gétä whimsically
and become offenders. Bhagavad-gétä should be
explained to persons who are ready to accept Kåñëa as the Supreme Personality
of Godhead. It is a subject matter for the devotees only and not for
philosophical speculators. Anyone, however, who tries sincerely to present Bhagavad-gétä as it is will advance in devotional
activities and reach the pure devotional state of life. As a result of such
pure devotion, he is sure to go back home, back to Godhead.
Bg
18.69
TEXT
69
TEXT
Na c
TaSMaaNMaNauZYaezu k-iêNMae iPa[Yak*-taMa" )
>aivTaa Na c Mae TaSMaadNYa" iPa[YaTarae >auiv )) 69 ))
na ca tasmän manuñyeñu
kaçcin me priya-kåttamaù
bhavitä na ca me tasmäd
anyaù priyataro bhuvi
na—never; ca—and; tasmät—therefore;
manuñyeñu—among mankind; kaçcit—anyone;
me—My; priya-kåttamaù—more
dear; bhavitä—will become; na—no; ca—and; me—My; tasmät—than him; anyaù—other; priyataraù—dearer;
bhuvi—in this world.
TRANSLATION
There is no servant in this world more dear to Me than he, nor
will there ever be one more dear.
Bg
18.70
TEXT
70
TEXT
ADYaeZYaTae c Ya
wMa& DaMYa| Sa&vadMaavYaae" )
jaNaYajeNa TaeNaahiMaí" SYaaiMaiTa Mae MaiTa" )) 70 ))
adhyeñyate ca ya imaà
dharmyaà saàvädam ävayoù
jïäna-yajïena tenäham
iñöaù syäm iti me matiù
adhyeñyate—will study; ca—also; yaù—he; imam—this; dharmyaà—sacred;
saàvädam—conversation; ävayoù—of
ours; jïäna—knowledge; yajïena—by
sacrifice; tena—by him; aham—I; iñöaù—worshiped; syäm—shall
be; iti—thus; me—My; matiù—opinion.
TRANSLATION
And I declare that he who studies this sacred conversation
worships Me by his intelligence.
Bg
18.71
TEXT
71
TEXT
é[ÖavaNaNaSaUYaê
é*<auYaadiPa Yaae Nar" )
Saae_iPa Mau¢-" éu>aamçaek-aNPa[aPanuYaaTPau<Yak-MaR<aaMa( )) 71
))
çraddhävän anasüyaç ca
çåëuyäd api yo naraù
so ’pi muktaù çubhäl lokän
präpnuyät puëya-karmaëäm
sraddhävan—faithful; anasüyaù ca—and not envious; çåëuyät—does
hear; api—certainly; yaù—who;
naraù—man; saù api—he
also; muktaù—being liberated; çubhän—auspicious; lokän—planets;
präpnuyät—attains; puëya-karmaëäm—of
the past.
TRANSLATION
And one who listens with faith and without envy becomes free from
sinful reaction and attains to the planets where the pious dwell.
PURPORT
In the 67th verse of this chapter, the Lord explicitly forbade the
Gétä’s being spoken to those who are envious of
the Lord. In other words, Bhagavad-gétä is for
the devotees only, but it so happens that sometimes a devotee of the Lord will
hold open class, and in that class all the students are not expected to be devotees.
Why do such persons hold open class? It is explained here that although
everyone is not a devotee, still there are many men who are not envious of
Kåñëa. They have faith in Him as the Supreme Personality of Godhead. If such
persons hear from a bona fide devotee about the Lord, the result is that they
become at once free from all sinful reactions and after that attain to the
planetary system where all righteous persons are situated. Therefore simply by
hearing Bhagavad-gétä, even a person who does not
try to be a pure devotee attains the result of righteous activities. Thus a
pure devotee of the Lord gives everyone a chance to become free from all sinful
reactions and to become a devotee of the Lord.
Generally those who are free from sinful reaction are righteous. Such persons very easily take to Kåñëa consciousness. The word puëya-karmaëäm is very significant here. This refers to the performance of great sacrifice. Those who are righteous in performing devotional service but who are not pure can attain the planetary system of the polestar, or Dhruvaloka, where Dhruva Mahäräja is presiding. He is a great devotee of the Lord, and he has a special planet which is called the polestar.
Bg
18.72
TEXT
72
TEXT
k-iÀdeTaC^]uTa&
PaaQaR TvYaEk-aGa]e<a ceTaSaa )
k-iÀdjaNaSaMMaaeh" Pa[<aíSTae DaNaÅYa )) 72 ))
kaccid etac chrutaà pärtha
tvayaikägreëa cetasä
kaccid ajïäna-sammohaù
praëañöas te dhanaïjaya
kaccit—whether; etat—this; çrutam—heard; pärtha—O son of Påthä; tvayä—by
you; ekägreëa—with full attention; cetasä—by the mind; kaccit—whether;
ajïäna—ignorant; saàmohaù—illusion;
praëañöaù—dispelled; te—of
you; dhanaïjaya—O conqueror of wealth (Arjuna).
TRANSLATION
O conqueror of wealth, Arjuna, have you heard this attentively
with your mind? And are your illusions and ignorance now dispelled?
PURPORT
The Lord was acting as the spiritual master of Arjuna. Therefore
it was His duty to inquire from Arjuna whether he understood the whole Bhagavad-gétä in its proper perspective. If not, the
Lord was ready to re-explain any point, or the whole Bhagavad-gétä
if so required. Actually, anyone who hears Bhagavad-gétä
from a bona fide spiritual master like Kåñëa or His representative will
find that all his ignorance is dispelled. Bhagavad-gétä
is not an ordinary book written by a poet or fiction writer; it is spoken by
the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Any person, if he is fortunate enough to
hear these teachings from Kåñëa or from His bona fide spiritual representative,
is sure to become a liberated person and get out of the darkness of ignorance.
Bg
18.73
TEXT
73
TEXT
AJauRNa ovac )
Naíae Maaeh" SMa*iTalR/BDaa TvTPa[SaadaNMaYaaCYauTa )
iSQaTaae_iSMa GaTaSaNdeh" k-irZYae vcNa& Tav )) 73 ))
arjuna
uväca
nañöo mohaù småtir labdhä
tvat-prasädän mayäcyuta
sthito ’smi gata-sandehaù
kariñye vacanaà tava
arjunaù uväca—Arjuna said;
nañöaù—dispelled; mohaù—illusion;
småtiù—memory; labdhä—regained;
tvat-prasädät—by Your mercy; mayä—by me; acyuta—O
infallible Kåñëa; sthitaù—situated; asmi—I am; gata—removed; sandehaù—all doubts; kariñye—I
shall execute; vacanam—order; tava—Your.
TRANSLATION
Arjuna said, My dear Kåñëa, O infallible one, my illusion is now
gone. I have regained my memory by Your mercy, and I am now firm and free from
doubt and am prepared to act according to Your instructions.
PURPORT
The constitutional position of a living entity, represented by
Arjuna, is that he has to act according to the order of the Supreme Lord. He is
meant for self-discipline. Çré Caitanya Mahäprabhu says that the actual
position of the living entity is that of eternal servant of the Supreme Lord.
Forgetting this principle, the living entity becomes conditioned by material
nature, but in serving the Supreme Lord, he becomes the liberated servant of
God. The living entity’s constitutional position is to be servitor; he either
has to serve the illusory mäyä or the Supreme
Lord. If he serves the Supreme Lord, he is in his normal condition, but if he
prefers to serve the illusory external energy, then certainly he will be in
bondage. In illusion the living entity is serving in this material world. He is
bound by his lust and desires, yet he thinks of himself as the master of the
world. This is called illusion. When a person is liberated, his illusion is
over, and he voluntarily surrenders unto the Supreme to act according to His
desires. The last illusion, the last snare of mäyä to
trap the living entity, is the proposition that he is God. The living entity
thinks that he is no longer a conditioned soul, but God. He is so unintelligent
that he does not think that if he were God, then how could he be in doubt? That
he does not consider. So that is the last snare of illusion. Actually to become
free from the illusory energy is to understand Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality
of Godhead, and agree to act according to His order. The word mohaù is very important in this verse. Mohaù refers to that which is opposed to knowledge.
Actually real knowledge is the understanding that every living being is
eternally servitor of the Lord, but instead of thinking oneself in that position,
the living entity thinks that he is not servant, that he is the master of this
material world, for he wants to lord it over the material nature. That is his
illusion. This illusion can be overcome by the mercy of the Lord or by the
mercy of a pure devotee. When that illusion is over, one agrees to act in Kåñëa
consciousness.
Kåñëa consciousness is acting according to Kåñëa’s order. A conditioned soul illusioned by the external energy of matter does not know that the Supreme Lord is the master who is full of knowledge and who is the proprietor of everything. Whatever He desires He can bestow upon His devotees; He is the friend of everyone, and He is especially inclined to His devotee. He is the controller of this material nature and of all living entities. He is also the controller of inexhaustible time, and He is full of all opulences and all potencies. The Supreme Personality of Godhead can even give Himself to the devotee. One who does not know Him is under the spell of illusion; he does not become a devotee, but a servitor of mäyä. Arjuna, however, after hearing Bhagavad-gétä from the Supreme Personality of Godhead, became free from all illusion. He could understand that Kåñëa was not only his friend, but the Supreme Personality of Godhead. And he understood Kåñëa factually. So to study Bhagavad-gétä is to understand Kåñëa factually. When a person is in full knowledge, he naturally surrenders to Kåñëa. When Arjuna understood that it was Kåñëa’s plan to reduce the unnecessary increase of population, he agreed to fight according to Kåñëa’s desire. He again took up his weapons—his arrows and bow—to fight under the order of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Bg
18.74
TEXT
74
TEXT
SaÅYa ovac )
wTYah& vaSaudevSYa PaaQaRSYa c MahaTMaNa" )
Sa&vadiMaMaMaé[aEzMad(>auTa& raeMahzR<aMa( )) 74 ))
saïjaya
uväca
ity ahaà väsudevasya
pärthasya ca mahätmanaù
saàvädam imam açrauñam
adbhutaà roma-harñaëam
saïjayaù uväca—Saïjaya
said; iti—thus; aham—I; väsudevasya—of Kåñëa; pärthasya—of
Arjuna; ca—also;
mahätmanaù—two great souls; saàvädam—discussing;
imam—this; açrauñam—heard;
adbhutam—wonder; romaharñaëam—hair
standing on end.
TRANSLATION
Saïjaya said: Thus have I heard the conversation of two great
souls, Kåñëa and Arjuna. And so wonderful is that message that my hair is
standing on end.
PURPORT
In the beginning of Bhagavad-gétä, Dhåtaräñöra
inquired from his secretary Saïjaya, “What happened in the Battlefield of
Kurukñetra?” The entire study was related to the heart of Saïjaya by the grace
of his spiritual master, Vyäsa. He thus explained the theme of the battlefield.
The conversation was wonderful because such an important conversation between
two great souls never took place before and would not take place again. It is
wonderful because the Supreme Personality of Godhead is speaking about Himself
and His energies to the living entity, Arjuna, a great devotee of the Lord. If
we follow in the footsteps of Arjuna to understand Kåñëa, then our life will be
happy and successful. Saïjaya realized this, and as he began to understand it,
he related the conversation to Dhåtaräñöra. Now it is concluded that wherever
there is Kåñëa and Arjuna, there is victory.
Bg
18.75
TEXT
75
TEXT
VYaaSaPa[SaadaC^]uTavaNaeTad(GauùMah&
ParMa( )
YaaeGa& YaaeGaeìraTk*-Z<aaTSaa+aaTk-QaYaTa" SvYaMa( )) 75 ))
vyäsa-prasädäc chrutavän
etad guhyam ahaà param
yogaà yogeçvarät kåñëät
säkñät kathayataù svayam
vyäsa-prasädät—by the mercy
of Vyäsadeva; çrutavän—heard; etat—this; guhyam—confidential;
aham—I; param—the
supreme; yogam—mysticism; yogeçvarät—from
the master of all mysticism; kåñëät—from Kåñn.a; säkñät—directly; kathayataù—speaking;
svayam—personally.
TRANSLATION
By the mercy of Vyäsa, I have heard these most confidential talks
directly from the master of all mysticism, Kåñëa, who was speaking personally
to Arjuna.
PURPORT
Vyäsa was the spiritual master of Saïjaya, and Saïjaya admits that
it was by his mercy that he could understand the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. This means that one has to understand Kåñëa not directly but through
the medium of the spiritual master. The spiritual master is the transparent
medium, although it is true that the experience is direct. This is the mystery
of the disciplic succession. When the spiritual master is bona fide, then one
can hear Bhagavad-gétä directly, as Arjuna heard
it. There are many mystics and yogés all over the
world, but Kåñëa is the master of all yoga systems.
Kåñëa’s instruction is explicitly stated in Bhagavad-gétä—surrender
unto Krñëa. One who does so is the topmost yogé.
This is confirmed in the last verse of the Sixth Chapter. Yoginäm api sarveñäm.
Närada is the direct disciple of Kåñëa and the spiritual master of Vyäsa. Therefore Vyäsa is as bona fide as Arjuna because he comes in the disciplic succession, and Saïjaya is the direct disciple of Vyäsa. Therefore by the grace of Vyäsa, his senses were purified, and he could see and hear Kåñëa directly. One who directly hears Kåñëa can understand this confidential knowledge. If one does not come to the disciplic succession, he cannot hear Kåñëa; therefore his knowledge is always imperfect, at least as far as understanding Bhagavad-gétä is concerned.
In Bhagavad-gétä, all the yoga systems, karma-yoga,
jïäna-yoga and bhakti-yoga, are explained.
Kåñëa is the master of all such mysticism. It is to be understood, however,
that as Arjuna was fortunate enough to understand Kåñëa directly, similarly, by
the grace of Vyäsa, Saïjaya was also able to hear Kåñëa directly. Actually
there is no difference in hearing directly from Kåñëa or hearing directly from
Kåñëa via a bona fide spiritual master like Vyäsa. The spiritual master is the
representative of Vyäsadeva also. According to the Vedic system, on the
birthday of the spiritual master, the disciples conduct the ceremony called Vyäsa-püjä.
Bg
18.76
TEXT
76
TEXT
raJaNSa&SMa*TYa
Sa&SMa*TYa Sa&vadiMaMaMad(>auTaMa( )
ke-XavaJauRNaYaae" Pau<Ya& ôZYaaiMa c MauhuMauRhu" )) 76 ))
räjan saàsmåtya saàsmåtya
saàvädam imam adbhutam
keçavärjunayoù puëyaà
håñyämi ca muhur muhuù
räjan—O King; saàsmåtya—remembering; saàsmåtya—remembering;
saàvädam—message; imam—this;
adbhutam—wonderful; keçava—Lord
Kåñëa; arjunayoù—and Arjuna; puëyam—pious; håñyämi—taking
pleasure; ca—also; muhuù
muhuù—always, repeatedly.
TRANSLATION
O King, as I repeatedly recall this wondrous and holy dialogue between
Kåñëa and Arjuna, I take pleasure, being thrilled at every moment.
PURPORT
The understanding of Bhagavad-gétä
is so transcendental that anyone who becomes conversant with the topics of
Arjuna and Kåñëa becomes righteous, and he cannot forget such talks. This is
the transcendental position of spiritual life. In other words, one who hears
the Gétä from the right source, directly from
Kåñëa, attains full Kåñëa consciousness. The result of Kåñëa consciousness is
that one becomes increasingly enlightened, and he enjoys life with a thrill,
not only for some time, but at every moment.
Bg
18.77
TEXT
77
TEXT
TaÀ
Sa&SMa*TYa Sa&SMa*TYa æPaMaTYad(>auTa& hre" )
ivSMaYaae Mae MahaNraJaNôZYaaiMa c PauNa" PauNa" )) 77 ))
tac ca saàsmåtya saàsmåtya
rüpam aty-adbhutaà hareù
vismayo me mahän räjan
håñyämi ca punaù punaù
tat—that; ca—also; saàsmåtya—remembering;
saàsmåtya—remembering; rüpam—form;
ati—great; adbhutam—wonderful;
hareù—of Lord Kåñëa; vismayaù—wonder;
me—my; mahän—great;
räjan—O King, håñyämi—enjoying;
ca—also; punaù punaù—repeatedly.
TRANSLATION
O King, when I remember the wonderful form of Lord Kåñëa, I am
struck with even greater wonder, and I rejoice again and again.
PURPORT
It appears that Saïjaya also, by the grace of Vyäsa, could see the
universal form of Kåñëa exhibited to Arjuna. It is, of course, said that Lord
Kåñëa never exhibited such a form before. It was exhibited to Arjuna only, yet
some great devotees could also see the universal form of Kåñëa when it was
shown to Arjuna, and Vyäsa was one of them. He is one of the great devotees of
the Lord, and he is considered to be a powerful incarnation of Kåñëa. Vyäsa
disclosed this to his disciple, Saïjaya, who remembered that wonderful form of
Kåñëa exhibited to Arjuna and enjoyed it repeatedly.
Bg 18.78
TEXT
78
TEXT
a}a
YaaeGaeìr" k*-Z<aae Ya}a PaaQaaeR DaNauDaRr" )
Ta}a é[qivRJaYaae >aUiTaDa]uRva NaqiTaMaRiTaMaRMa )) 78 ))
yatra yogeçvaraù kåñëo
yatra pärtho dhanur-dharaù
tatra çrér vijayo bhütir
dhruvä nétir matir mama
yatra—where; yogeçvaraù—the master of mysticism; kåñëaù—Lord Krñna; yatra—where;
pärthaù—the son of Påthä;
dhanur-dharaù—the carrier of the bow and arrow; tatra—there;
çréù—opulence; vijayaù—victory;
bhütiù—exceptional power; dhruvä—certainly;
nétiù—morality; matiù
mama—is my opinion.
TRANSLATION
Wherever there is Kåñëa, the master of all mystics, and wherever
there is Arjuna, the supreme archer, there will also certainly be opulence,
victory, extraordinary power, and morality. That is my opinion.
PURPORT
The Bhagavad-gétä began with an inquiry
of Dhåtaräñöra. He was hopeful of the victory of his sons, assisted by great
warriors like Bhéñma, Droëa and Karëa. He was hopeful that the victory would be
on his side. But, after describing the scene in the battlefield, Saïjaya told
the King, “You are thinking of victory, but my opinion is that where Kåñëa and
Arjuna are present, there will be all good fortune.” He directly confirmed that
Dhåtaräñöra could not expect victory for his side. Victory was certain for the
side of Arjuna because Kåñëa was there. Kåñëa’s acceptance of the post of
charioteer for Arjuna was an exhibition of another opulence. Kåñëa is full of
all opulences, and renunciation is one of them. There are many instances of
such renunciation, for Kåñëa is also the master of renunciation.
The fight was actually between Duryodhana and Yudhiñöhira. Arjuna was fighting on behalf of his elder brother, Yudhiñöhira. Because Kåñëa and Arjuna were on the side of Yudhiñöhira, Yudhiñöhira’s victory was certain. The battle was to decide who would rule the world, and Saïjaya predicted that the power would be transferred to Yudhiñöhira. It is also predicted here that Yudhiñöhira, after gaining victory in this battle, would flourish more and more because he was not only righteous and pious, but he was a strict moralist. He never spoke a lie during his life.
There are many less intelligent persons who take Bhagavad-gétä to be a discussion of topics between two friends in a battlefield. But such a book cannot be scripture. Some may protest that Kåñëa incited Arjuna to fight, which is immoral, but the reality of the situation is clearly stated: Bhagavad-gétä is the supreme instruction in morality. The supreme instruction of morality is stated in the Ninth Chapter, in the thirty-fourth verse: manmanä bhava mad-bhaktaù. One must become a devotee of Kåñëa, and the essence of all religion is to surrender unto Kåñëa, as stated, Sarva-dharmän. The instructions of Bhagavad-gétä constitute the supreme process of religion and of morality. All other processes may be purifying and may lead to this process, but the last instruction of the Gétä is the last word in all morality and religion: surrender unto Kåñëa. This is the verdict of the Eighteenth Chapter.
From Bhagavad-gétä we can understand that to realize oneself by philosophical speculation and by meditation is one process, but to fully surrender unto Kåñëa is the highest perfection. This is the essence of the teachings of Bhagavad-gétä. The path of regulative principles according to the orders of social life and according to the different courses of religion may be a confidential path of knowledge in as far as the rituals of religion are confidential, but one is still involved with meditation and cultivation of knowledge. Surrender unto Kåñëa in devotional service in full Kåñëa consciousness is the most confidential instruction and is the essence of the Eighteenth Chapter.
Another feature of Bhagavad-gétä is that the actual truth is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa. Absolute Truth is realized in three features—impersonal Brahman, localized Paramätmä, and the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa. Perfect knowledge of the Absolute Truth means perfect knowledge of Kåñëa. If one understands Kåñëa, then all the departments of knowledge are part and parcel of that understanding. Kåñëa is transcendental, for He is always situated in His eternal internal potency. The living entities are manifested and are divided into two classes, eternally conditioned and eternally liberated. Such living entities are innumerable, and they are considered fundamental parts of Kåñëa. Material energy is manifested into twenty-four divisions. The creation is effected by eternal time, and it is created and dissolved by external energy. This manifestation of the cosmic world repeatedly becomes visible and invisible.
In Bhagavad-gétä five principal subject matters have been discussed: the Supreme Personality of Godhead, material nature, the living entities, eternal time and all kinds of activities. All of these are dependant on the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa. All conceptions of the Absolute Truth, namely, impersonal Brahman, localized Paramätmä, or any other transcendental conception, exist within the category of understanding the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Although superficially the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the living entity, material nature and time appear to be different, nothing is different from the Supreme. But the Supreme is always different from everything. Lord Caitanya’s philosophy is that of “inconceivably one and different.” This system of philosophy constitutes perfect knowledge of the Absolute Truth.
The living entity in his original position is pure spirit. He is just like an atomic particle of the Supreme Spirit. The conditioned living entity, however, is the marginal energy of the Lord; he tends to be in contact with both the material energy and the spiritual energy. In other words, the living entity is situated between the two energies of the Lord, and because he belongs to the superior energy of the Lord, he has a particle of independence. By proper use of that independence he comes under the direct order of Kåñëa. Thus he attains his normal condition in the pleasure-giving potency.
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports
to the Eighteenth Chapter of the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä in the matter of its Conclusions—the Perfection of
Renunciation.